F LO U R M ILL I N G

A T HE O R E TI C A L A ND P R A C TI C A L H A ND B O O K
O F F L O UR M A NUFAC T UR E
F OR M I LL E R S , M I L LW R I GH T S , F L O UR -
M I LLI NG
E N G I NE E R S , A ND O TH E R S E NG A G E D I N T HE

FL O U R -
M I LL I NG I ND U S T RY

P ETE R A .

IST T OZ MIN
T
O F TH E P O LY E C H N I C I NS T I T
U E , P E R O GR A D

ED I TO R OF TH E R US S I A N M I LL E R

T RA N S L A T E D F RO M T H E R U S S I A N

r BY

M . FA L KN E R and TH E O D O R FJEL S TR U P

IV IEVV Y () RJ§
T

D . VA
N N O S T R A ND C O M P A NY
25 PA RK P LA C E
1 917
 P RE F A C E

is a si ngu lar fact that ther is no serious m o dern work on flour milling ‘

IT e

in E nglish This fact wa s recently stated by Mr Arthur E H awker

. , . .
,

se cr tary of the N ational Association of B ritish and I rish Millers in a

e ,

l e tte r to the E ditor of M i lling Ev n the rich A merican technical

. e

literature has no modern works of this kind and the Am ricans w r ,

e e e

c ompelled four or fi v e years ago to translate th old book of P rofessor F r e .

K ick th last editio n of which was publish d over twenty years ago
,
e e

The want of serious scientific lit rature on flour milling is noticeabl e e

even in th e G er man language in which dia lect during all the time which
,

has elapsed since the appearance of P rofessor Kick s book not one obj ctiv .
’
e e

scientific wo r k has been publish d As a characteristic feature of the e .

—
G erman literature of the last few y ars (B aumg artner 1 9 0 2 B aum e ,

—
gartner and Graf l 9 0 4 B aumgartner l 9 0 7 P appenheim —l 9 0 3 Ketten
,
— , ,

bach one may point out the absenc of desc riptions of E nglish e

and American machinery I refrain from j udging whether this is a

.

result of the G ermans not being acquainted with the machinery of E nglish
and American manufacture or whether it is to be asc r ib d to the p culiar
,
e e

G erm an patriotism in scienc B e this as it may the G rman authors

e .
, e

do not give a broad scientific technical statem n t to their readers wh n e e

they omit to mention E nglish and American machinery .

H aving been for twenty years engage d in this industry as a theoretical

and practical worker and having studi d t he technology of milling in
,
e

Russia G ermany Austria Hungary F rance B elgium E ngland and

, , , , , , ,

the Unit d S tates I made up my mi n d to write a book on this subj ect

e , ,

k eping to the most scie n tific basis The obj ct I had in view was to
e . e

produce a practical and theoretical text book for op rative millers and -
e

for milling engineers who have to construct flour mills and to design
, ,

flour mill ing machinery .

I thought it necessary to b eg in m y book with a n historical outline of

the manufacture of flour I drew up this outli ne on the basis of the
.
'

materials which I found in the richest library of the world that of the ,

B ritish Museu m as well as in the Congressional Library of th United

, e

382 9 3 8
vi P R E FA CE
S tates in which I w o rk ed on th occasion of my visits to these tw o
'

,
e

countries I have giv n an outline of the most important dev lopment

. e e

th e milling industry has und rgone f r om the anci nt period of the civilised
e e

nations of Asia Minor and E gypt till the period wh n practice determined e

t h e correct way of improving the technology of flour milling The .

.
.

historical outlin is important in that it presents the gen ral d v lopment

e e e e

of the craft t o the mind of th student and forces him to think more e .

logically .

Aft r having spoken of the product which is to be treated I pass to

e ,

th study of the constructi on of the cleaning and grinding machines

e .

Th designs of the machines performing a very particular operation in

e

the cleaning and grinding processes a r almost infinitely variable I n e .

order to train th student promptly and logically to analyseand estimat e

e

the numerous machines I have classified them according to the principles

,

of their action having pointed out the most economical principles o f

,

operatio n Then I have illustrated the fundamental principles from the

.

most characteristic and most popular E uropean and American machines .

To explain my idea I will take for instance the study of the roller mill
, .

I consider this machine from the point of V iew of feeding the rolls (G erman ,

E nglish and American systems of feeding ) dis positio n of the rolls (hori
, ,

z o n t al v e rtic a l or diagonal ) driving of the rolls (gear drive in the E uropean

, , ,

makes belt drive in America ) methods of ventilation etc D escribing

, , , .

the principles of the action a n d design of certain machines I make als o ,

a critical estimate of th em b a sing m y c o nten tio n s on p ra ctica l a nd scien tifi c

‘

considerations .

S uch is my method of describi n g machin es the idea always being to ,

giv the student a conception of the most important d sig ns and to forc e
e e

him to think critically .

I n the chapter o n m illin g diagrams I give typical diagrams of systems

'

at work in E uropean and American countries in order that the student ,

may compare a ll the different schemes of grinding .

I n each chapter I give the practically established capacities of th e

machines and a basis for the calculation of the necessary number a n d
dimensions of them corresponding to a given capaci ty of a Russian ,

G erman E nglish or American mill

, , .

N o author has as yet paid attention to the problem of th motion of e

t h e p l n ifter and of the m ovement of th e product in the purifier

a s I .

t hought it ther for necessary to solve this problem and this makes
e e ,

it possible scientifically to estimate the advantages and disadvantages

of the different types of th s machines e e .
 P R E F ACE v ii
In writing my book I have attempt d to instruct and pr par the e e e

w y for learned and sci ntifically thinking specialists

a I t is for others
e .

t o j udge as to whether I have succeeded in my achi vement e .

I n writing this book I have largely availed myself of the materials

and advic of my prof ssional colleagu s working theoretically and
e e e

practically in E ng land and America for th b nefit of the Milling I ndustry e e .

I consider it therefor my duty most earnestly to thank Mr W Jago e . .

,

t h e author of th excellent work on The Techn lo gy f B rea d M a kin g

e o o ,

for his kind permission to reproduce som of its tabl s and photographs e e

of the wh at grain F urther to Mr R A S idley editor of The M iller

e .
, . . .
,

t o Mr G eo J S B roomhall editor of M i llin g Mr A R Tattersall Mr

. . . .
, . . .
, .

Chas E Oliv r of th D ix ie M iller and many others who have rendered

. . e e ,

me th ir kind assistance
e .

I n ad di tion many E nglish and American firms have supplied

,

me with detail d drawings of their machines which I have reproduced

e ,

in my book I am ther fore most grateful to Messrs Thos Robinson

. e .

S o n Rochdal E ngland Messrs E R 85 F Turner I pswich E ngland

, e, . . . .
, ,

M ssrs N ordyke
e . Marmon Cc I ndianapolis I n d U S A Messrs .
, , .
, . . . .

The S Howes Co S ilver Creek N Y Allis —

. Chalmers Cc Milwaukee
.
, ,
. .
, .
, ,

Wis and many others

. . 1

F inally I d sire to xpress my heartiest thanks to Messrs Geo

, e e . .

Routledg S ons Ltd for their kind consent to publish my book in

e .
,

E nglish and thus to give me a chance to o ff r it to the judgment of

, e

the specialists of E ngland and Ameri ca to whom I shall be most obliged ,

for their impartial criticism .

P K O ZM I N
. .

P U BL I S H E R S N O TE
’

Th eP ublishers de sire to add the ir than ks to Mr E dward B ra dfield .

,

As sociate a n d Te ch n ical E dito rof M illing for his assistan ce in re vising ,

the proof sheets of this book .

 C ONTE NT S

CH APTER I

S T O RI C AL O U TLI NE O F F L O U R M I LLI NG
HI

I F LO U R MI LL N G
. N G TO R E L G O UIL E G E N D S N C LA C AL I
A CC OR D I I I S A D S SI I TE RA

TU RE MO DE RN R E L C O F AN C E NT F ORM O F M LL N G
. I S I S I I

I I T Y P E O F M LL DR E N
. S AN M AL P O W E R
I S IV BY I

I I I TH
. U T L AT ON O F W AT E R P O W E R
E I IS M LL I F OR I S

I V TH
. AM E R C AN AU TO M AT C M LL
E I I I .

V TH I NFL U E N CE O F AME R C AN T EC H N C N E U O P E
. E I I S I R

V I M LL
. I N F RAN CE
S I

V I I P RO G R E
. O F T ECH N C N G E RMAN Y
S S I S I

V I I I F U RTH E D E E LO P ME NT O F M LL B U L D N G N E U O P E
. R V I I I I R

I X TH ST U GG L E
. E E T WEE N H R OLL E R AN D STON E M LL
R B T E -
I S

C HAP T E R I I

G E N E R AL D E AS OF TH E R AW M AT E RI AL S
I F OR F L O UR PR O D U C TI ON
I . TH B E R E O F H C E RE AL
E R I S T E S .

II . PH Y C AL ST U C T U R E O F H W H E AT G A N
SI R T E R I

III . CH EM C AL C O MP O T ON O F WH E AT
I SI I

C HAP T E R I I I

PR E P ARAT I O N O F G R AI N F OR G RI N D I N G
IMPU R T E AN D H PR N C P LE O F C L E AN N G
I I S T E I I S I

E TRA C T ON O F P ECE O F M E TAL F RO M H

X I STO C I S T E K .

S E PARAT ON O F LARG E AN D S MALL I M U T E

I P RI I S

1 S p r ti. rdi g t S i
e a a o n a cco n o ze

2 S p r ti. rdi g t S h p
e a a o n a cco n o a e

IV . MA C N E F OR S E PA AT N G STON E
HI S R I S
 CO N T E N T S

V . S C O U R N G AN D P OL H N G H GRA N
I IS I T E I

1 P ri ip l .f th Pr d th C h r
nc es o e o ces s es a n e a a c te r of t he W rki g P rt
o n a s

2 C t r ti. fS ri g M hi
o ns uc on o co u n ac n es

3 S p i l M hi ry
. ec a ac ne

4 Th W t S . ri g d W hi g Pre e co u n an as n o cess

DAM N G H G RA N
PI T E I

G R N C L E AN N G D A G RA M
AI -
I I S

C HAP T E R I V

G R I ND I N GTH E G R AI N
TH E F U N D A ME NTAL P RI N CI PL E S
O F M LL N G I I

TH C ON TRU C T ON O F H G R N D N G MA CH N E
E S I T E I I I S

MA CH N E O F R E T E RAT ED AC T ON O F H W ORK N G S U RFA CE

I S I I T E I S

1 St Mill —H ri t l (V rt i l Ax i f R t ti )
. o ne s o zo n a e ca s o o a on

2 C m p iti . d D ig o f M ill t os o n an es n o s o n es

3 U d r R . r Mill t n e -
u nn e s o n es

4 St Mill —V rti l (H ri t l Ax i f R t ti )
. o ne s e ca o zo n a s o o a on

5 Th C p it y . d C l l ti e f St Mill
a ac an a cu a on o o ne s

6 M ill wit h M t l G ri d r
. s e a n e s

MA CH N E AC T N G I I M PA C T S I BY

M LL N G MA CH N E H A N G H AX O F R OTAT ON O F H W ORK N G
I I I S VI T E IS I T E I

O GAN N D FF E RE NT PLAN E
R S I I S

R OLL E R M LL I S

1 C diti f R d ti
. on f th Pr d t o ns o e uc on o e o uc .

2 C rr g ti g t h R ll
. o u a n e o s

3 Adj t m t f t h D i t
. b tw
us t h W rk i g S rf
en o e s a n ce e e en e o n u a c es

4 A G r l S rv y f th R ll r Mil l
. en e a u e o e o e

5 Th F d i g f t h R l l
. e ee n o e o s

6 Typ f R ll r M il l
. es o o e s

mi i f M ti
_

7 Tr .
t th R ll
an s ss o n o o on o e o s

8 C p it y f R ll r M il l
. a ac o o e s

9 . B ru s h M a chin es
10 . D et a che s r

C HAP T E R V

G R AD I N G TH E PR O D U C T ACCO R D I NG TO S I ZE
I . S F T N G H PRO U C T
I I T E D

II . R E LAT E P O T ON O F IV SI I TH E S I EV Es

III . TH S F T N G P O CE
E I I R S S
 C O N T E NTS Xi

MACH I N E S

3 . Dy n a m cs o f i P l a ns ift e rs

5 . F ree S wi gi g Pl n n a n s ifters

6 . C p ity
a ac of P la n sifters

C HAP T E R V I

G RAD I NG THE P R O D U C T ACCO R D I N G TO S PE C I F I C G RAV I TY

I .
'

GR A D I NG M DD L N G S AN D UN S T A CC ORD I N G To
I I D S P EC F C GRA T Y
I I VI

II . M LI N G S AN D D UN S T G RA D N G MA CH N E S O F
IDD -
I I To -
D AY

III
‘

. CAPA CI T Y O F P U RI FI E RS

C HAP T E R V I I

A C C E SS O R Y APP LI AN E C S AND M E C HANI S M S

I . C AT ON O F
P U RI F I I TH E I NT E RMED AT E I PR O D U C T S
II . D U T C OLL EC TO
S -
RS

III . E A U T S Y T EM
XH S S S

1 . G ro u p E x ha u st S ys te ms
2 . G en eral E x hau st S ys tems
3 . C a l cu l a t o n i fo r a n E h a u st x Pla nt
IV . TRAN S P ORTATI ON O F STO C K
l Sp t . d El v t r ou s an e a o s

2 H ri t l Tr
.
p rt
o z on a a ns o

V . APP A RAT U F OR M X N G AN D P A C K N G FLO U R

S I I I

VI . A P A AT U F OR R EC K ON N G AN D R E GU LAT N G
P R S I I TH E QU ANTI T Y PRO D UCT
V II . FLO U R B L E A CH N G I

C HAP T E R V I I I

M I LLI NG D I AGRAM S
C LA S S F C ATI ON O F MI LLI N G S YS T EMS
I I

PLA N G R N D N G
I I I

D A G RA M S O F I MPRO V E D PLAI N MI LLI N G S YS T EMS

I

H G H G RI N D I N G
I

S H ORT E R GRA D UAL R ED U C T ON S YS T EM S I

RY E G RI N D I N G
xii C O NTENTS

V II . MAI ZE G RI N D I N G
VI I I . S C H EM E O F O AT ME AL G R N D N GI I

IX .
QUAN TI T Y O F I NT E RMED I AT E PR O D U C T S AN D TH E C AL C U LATI ON O F C ORRE
S P ON I NG MA C H I N E S
D

X . RU S S I A N G RI N D N G
I

C HA P T E R I X

CONS TR U C TI O N O F M I LL B U I L D I N G S
C ON DI T ON S DE T E RM N N G H CHARA C T E R O F B UI LD N G S
I I I T E I

C ON S TRUC TI ON O F M LL B UI LD N G S
I I

B UI LD I N G S O F C O MP L C AT ED G R N D N G M LL S
I I I I

C ON S TR U C T ON O F AME RI CAN M LL S
I I

P LA N S O F MI LL S

C HAP T ER X

THE CO S T O F E RE C TI NG AND O F WO R KI NG M I LL S
I . TH E MI LL BUI L D I N G AN D E QU PME NT I

II . CAL C ULATI ON O F W ORKI N G E XP E N S E S

III . S E L EC T ON O F A PRI ME MOTOR
I

I N DE X
 FLO UR MI L L I NG
CH AP TE R I

HI S TOR I CAL OUTLI N E OF F LOUR MI LLI N G

F L O U R MI LLI N G ACCO R D I N G To R E LI G I O U S L E G E N D S AN D CLA SS I CAL

L I TE R A TU R E . MO D E R N R E LI C S OF A NC I E N T F O R M S OF MIL LI N G

MO D ER N culture of mankind indi ssolubly connected with the technics ,

of production is the last li nk of a long chain of human ndeavour stretch

, e

ing away into the dark space of past millen n iums .

The culture of mankind has not developed spasmodically ; although

history relates of whole peoples vani shing and th ir culture with them e ,

thi s is but a s eeming disapp arance of culture I t is an undoubted fact e .

with us that a more perfect t chnical knowledge corresponds wit h a

, e

more perf ct culture C l ture never vanished it simply und rwent an

e . u , e

evolution I ts old forms were gradually modi fied and perfected

. .

When studying th history of th tech ni cs of any particular kind ofe

-
e

production we come to the conclusion that the p rfecting of the process

,
e

o f production was never brought about by leaps and bounds On the

'

c ontrary it has be n a slow process of gradually collecting grains of

,
e

human knowledge Out of an inexhaustible source of knowledge the gains

.
,

of culture i th weapons of the victorious battle Of man for existence

,
. e . e

an d happiness passed from one p ople to anoth r ; neither racial social

,
e e , ,

n o r national and territorial partitions of humanity could bar their

passage An empire might vanish even a p opl but the weapons of
.
,
e e,

—
the struggle for lif in the first plac th implements of production
e e, e

remained n the hands of others and the culture did n o t di sappear

I ,
.

The law of evolution of the technics of production is a curv having e

no solution of contin i ty The study of the d v lopm nt of a prod uc u .

e e e

tion gives us th law of infl ction in that curve P arallel to this

'

e e
'

curv i e in accordance with that law runs uninterrupt dly the line
e, . .
,
e

A
 x2: FLO R MI LLI N G
“

2 U : [ C H A R 1

of human cultur e That is th r ason why histo rical catastrophes of

. e e

human culture r impossibl however powerful the wav of barbarians

a e e, e

On t h c ultur d people may be

e e ,
.

An inti mat acquaintanc with technical history is indispensable

e e

to every ngineer b caus history gives us the law of evolution of the

e ,
e e

implem nts and p roc s s of production Only by car fully studying th

e e se . e e

historical d v lopm nt of th t chnics of pr oduction does th creativ

e e e e e e e

power of an ngineer r c ive its t r ue ducation and evade retrogression

e e e e .

Th most brilliant xample of cultur and its evolution to date

e e e

is the t chnics of procuring and preparing th nutritive substances for

e e

food S ince man l ft th cave poch behind him vegetable food has
. e e e ,

constitut d undoubt dly the most substantial part of hi s nourishment

e e .

E v n the biblical l gend of paradi

e tells us that man lived on the
e se

abundance of the fruits of th arth and was allowed to u th m for e e ,

se e

food Traditions about a human paradi s on earth r ached v n the

'

. e e e e

time of Ovid who d picts the lif of primeval man as the golden epoch
,
e e ,

when men were content with the food the arth yielded them without e

constraint B u t people mul tipli d

. form ed num rous groups th e , e ,
e

abundance of the fruits of th a r th did not suffic and the curse of pro e e e,

curing foo d by the sweat Of man s brow began to gain ground The ’
.

struggle against that curse is th histo r y of human cult re the history e u ,

of the techni cs of production I n th n d a pe rfect t chnical kn owledge . e e ,

e

will of necessity liberate mankind from this curs e

, , .

S inc ti m immemorial b r ad has been th most essential element of

e e ,
e
-

man s v g table food Ho w it happened that man stumbl d upon the

’
e e . e

cereals why he began to cultivate this unsightly plant w know not but
, ,
e ,

in s l cting th cereal plant out of the mass of other fr i t man made n o

e e e u ,

blunder for the g r ain of corn contains more nut ritive substanc than
, e

any other frui t ; but o u t of th gloom of ag s tradi tions slightly v aryin g e e ,

in import have reached us Mos s says that Cain tilled the soil that . e ,

N oah aft r the flood likewise began to cultivate land P liny speaks of
,
e , .

a tradition which asc r ibes th origin of agriculture to a d ity e e .

1

Tradition tells us men w re taught to cultivate corn by th goddess e e

of ag riculture C r s (by D meter sist r of Zeus according to the

,
e e e , e ,

Greeks ) B efo r this peopl fed on acorns

. P liny adds that men
e ,
e .

learn d th grinding of corn to flo ur also from Ceres

e e .

F rom this myth we understand that th a r t of grain gri n di ng a e ,

contempora r y of agricultu r and proce din g from one and the same e e

d ity has its o rigin in th am depth of ages as the cultivation of corn

e ,
e s e .

Pli y th Eld r ( 23 Hi t ri N t 1
li n e e A D . . s o a a ura s .
 CH AP . I ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 3

A S part an tradition ascribes th art of making flour to Miles an d say e

,
‘

s
that the chi f milling town in Gr ece of that epoch was Alesia
e e .

According to H omm l Asia is the native country of the cultivated e ,

1

cereals H maintains that the S umerians coming to E gypt f r om

. e

Mesopotamia ight thousand years ago had a great influenc on the

,
e
, e

culture of E gypt having taught th abo rig in s to procur and work

, e e e

m tals and cultiva t corn

e e .

About the g rinding inst r um nts of the p r mythological ages the e e -

traditions give s no information but r lics of th classical and th

u , e e e

E gyptian cultur xist which can giv an id a what the antiqu

e e , e f
us e e

E gyptian machine was lik e .

E xcavations and the hieroglyphics of the ancient E gyptians indicate

that th primitive milling impl ments w re first wooden th n ston
e e e
, e e,

FI G . l .
—Gri di g i n n n An c i en t E g yp t .

and later on m tal mortars in which th grain was crush d by blows

e , e e

from pestles Fig 1 shows the whole proc ss of fl r making by th

. . e ou -

E gyptians This drawing is a reproduction from o n of the pictures

.
e

that deco r at d the hous walls in the town of Th bes according to

e e e ,

Wilkins on s Acc n t f the An ien t E gyp tia n

’
ou o c s .

The mortars here r ma r ked the p stl s with two working ends I
a e a, e e ),

the basket of gr ain or semi product d the basket of ready flour 0 The -

, .

loading (I ) is don b y a man who pours th grain out of the vess l 9

e
-

, e e

in to the mortar Two men (I I ) are g rinding ; one (I I I ) is mptying th

. e e

crushed grain out of th mortar into a si ve th last man (I V ) is sifting e e e .

The sifting of crudely crush d grain was known apparently even in th s

-
e e e

very remote times The siev e a kind of rudely S hap d plate was prob
. e, -
e ,

ably made of papyrus

0

On eith r sid of the bas relief at the top are hieroglyphic inscriptions
e e -

h and l xplaining th m aning of th pictur

,
e I t is supposed th a
e t the e e e .

1
Fr Ho m m el
.
,
P rehisto ris che I ndo E u rop eer -
.
4 FLO UR MI LL I N G [CH AR i
ancient E gyptians roasted or heated the grain until dry ,
prev ious to
grin ding it That is very possibl as the d ryer the grain is th more
. e,
,
e

easily it is broken by blows from the p stle e .

The same typ of the primitive mill xisted in ancient Greece and
e e
,

som of the excavated vases bear th drawing of a similar mort ar and

e e

pestl B esides that e .

,

Pliny gives us a de
scription of appar ntly e

imilar mill s in Gr ec S e e,

saying that in E truri a ,

th ars of corn are e e

roasted and then ,

crush d by m ans of e e

pestl s with harp saw e S

like dg b low and e es e

a cogged whe l in the e

middl And yet th e .

”
e

p rimitive milling in
E truria req i red tech u

n i al knowledge for c ,

Pliny says (ibid ) if the .

work was done care

lessly the grain was ,

crush d more fin ly e e

than W necessary and as

the iron parts of the

pestle were soon worn
out o r brok n e .

B t what strikes us u

most is the fact that

after thousands of years
living relics of antique
FI G.2 .N gr Milli g t th Pr
-
e o nt Tim i Afri
a e E gyptian t hniC
esen e nr ca . eC S a e

fo nd S om of the u . e

negro tribes in the vall y of the Nil use the mortar and pestl
.
e e e

for gram grinding at the present day The photog r aph (Fig 2 ) . .

S hows a striking lik n ss between the milling of a negro trib

e e e

n ear K hartum a n d that of ancient E gypt H re are the same two

1
. e

bask ts
e — o n with g r ain th other for fl o
e r— ,
a s t on morta r and
e u e ,

E li e R l L H mm tl T l ii
1 ’
s e ec u s , o e e a e rre, vo . .
 hina where traditions of g r eat antiquity
In C ,
,

the gift of gods also xist wh at was cultivated 2 70 0 y a r s

, e , e
and
e B C the
anci nt E gyptian type of grinding machin was in use
e
e
. .

An in er sting mill of a similar type but dri ven by water is described

t e
,

by B ridd in the A m erica n Miller

2
.
,

This mill (Fig 4 ) is used by the I ndians who settl d in the stat of
.

, e e
Kentucky
for maize g rinding The mortar is hollowed out in a tree
,
-

stump A lever with a stone pestle attach d to one n d and a box to

.

, e e ,

the other is placed on a fork A j t of water from a str am is con

, . e e

ducted along a groov into the box When the box is filled with water
e .

outw ighin g the stone it drops to the lower position the water runs out
e
,
,

S t 1
t
Bri i h Am b d r i Chi
t au n on
, Hi R p rt t th E m b
s a ssa
y 1 7 9o
7 n na . s e o o e a ss
2
i Amerca n M iller 1 90 7
,

, .
 6 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C H AR
'

of the box and the p tl fall quickly in to th morta r c r ushing th grain

, es e s e , e .

The capacity of the mortar is about 2 8 lbs of grain ; that quantity is .

ground in eight to ten hours .

The mill consisting of a mo r ta r and pestle belongs to the fi r st pe riod

, ,

of p r historic t hnics e ec .

Th next stage of its d v lop e e e

m nt is a transitory typ f r om e e

th mo rtar and pestle to two mill e

stones betwe n which the grain is , e

ground .

Th primitive type of such a e

mill was p r oduc d apparently also 1

e

in E gypt (Fig Th grain was . e

ground on th larg r t n by mean s

I

e e s o e

of the small one .

4 —
F IG I ndi
. W t r m ill i K t ky
. an a e
We find
-
this mill
n
nowadays
en u c
in .

the hands of th nativ s of Africa e e

in the Nile V alley Fig 6 represents a neg r ess preparing flo ur in the

. .

same manner E gyptians did some 4 0 00 years ago Fig 7 shows the . .

u p to dat
-

milling of the N u
-
e

bians Th work is perform

. ed
e

by children here .

I t is curious to note that

the same principle of milling .

has been retained up to this , ,

day by th M xican I ndi ans

, e e ,

who are consider d to b th e e e

descendants of th Azt cs e e .

Fig 8 r produces that mill

. e

used by Mexican I ndi ans of to

day they grind their corn on it .

Th se illustrations of primi
e

tive grain crushing Show us -

how Sl owly anci nt man a e o

quired th princi ples of a more e F 5 — A i t Eg yp ti Milli g IG . , n c en an n ,

economical system .

e —
The mill of th fi r st typ is v ry imple it is based on th im p ct e e S e a

p ri n cip l e The prim

. val m n had n o d i fl‘
i l ty in coming upon this
e a cu

principle knowing as h did th d structive power of a blow and the

, ,
e ,
e e

Ph t f 1
t im pl m t f d t th x v ti i Upp r Egyp
o o o a s o ne e en o un a e e ca a o ns n e t.
8 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ CH AR 1

nether or the upper millstone to pledg E vidently the grin dstone e .

mill was an indi spensabl ut nsil of a H br w household during their e e e e

search s for the bl ss d land ince Moses forbad by law loans on the
e e e ,
S e

pledg of a millston
e e .

I n th fourth book of Moses (xi 8 ) the heavenl y manna is

e .

spoken of in the following

t rms And th people went e e

about and gathered it in mill s ,

or beat it in a mortar .

The contemporary use of the

mortar and grindi n g m ill points
to the period of the mi gration '

of the Jews as the b g nni ng , e

i

of the of grin di n g mills

8 —
u se
A Mill f th M xi I di
,
F IG a ns
. . o
which at the time had not
e e ca n n .

yet succeeded in supplanting the p stle and mortar e .

G rindin g mills are spoken of more definit ly (about 1 00 0 years e

in Homer s Odyssey (song 7 vv 1 0 3

’
where domestic life at the ,
.
,

court of King Alcinous is desc ribed 1

F u ll fifty ha n dm a ds fo m th e ho u seh o l d t a i r r i n ;
r
S o m e tu n th e m l l , o r s ft th e g o lden g a n i i r i .
”

and then canto 20, VV . 105 1 1 1 -

2

B en ea th a
p i l e t ha t cl o se th e do m e a d o in
j
’

d,
Tw el ve fe m a l e t h e g ft o f Ce es g n d
s l a ve s i r ri
Ta sk d fo r th e
’
r r
o a l b o a d t o b o l t th e b a n
y r
F r om th e pu r e r
fl o u (t h e g o w th a n d s tren gt h r of man) .

D i sch a rg i g t n o t h e da y t h e l a b o u du e , r
No w ea rl y t r o e o s e th e
p est w th d ew r i r
On e m a d , i u ne
q u al to th e ta sk a s si
g n
’
d,
i
S t ll tu rn ed i
th e t o l so m e m l l w th i i anx o u s i m i nd .

The grindstones of those mills were v ry small a proof of whi ch is to e ,

be found in the fact of ancient heroes using them as missiles for thro wing
at their enemies during battle .

A stone of this description weighs some 4 5 lbs and does not exceed .
,

1 foot in diameter The upper stone slightly co ni cal is inches thick

.
, , .

The nether one is flat and 2 5 inches thick S uch stones are di sin terred in .

Abbevill e (Picardy ) Fig 9 shows grindstones belonging to an age not

. .

1
Po pe s trans la tio n
’
, p 12 ,
. O dyssey ,
B k V IIoo , 11 132 .
, 1 33
.

2
I bid .
,
B k XX
oo , 132 4 39 .
am p . I ] FLOUR MI LLI N G 9

distant from that of Homer (found in S yria ) The working surfaces .

of the upper and neth r stones r of conic shap Lat r on we shall

e a e e . e ,

FI G . 9 .
—
Mill ts o nes o f the Ag e of Ho m e r .

fin d proof that this mill was the predecessor of that of the Romans .

We ventured the opinion that the doubl stone mill was invented in e

FI G
. 10 .
—
Milli g by
iv f M r n the Na t es o o o cco .

ancient E gypt n d then brought into Gree ce I ndee d the kin d of mill
,
a .
,

described by H omer is still used in Morocco .

A b d
These m ills are als o in u s in the Orie t a d i Chn
i l r t
n n e n a ce e a e .
10
'

F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C H A R I

trav ll r and xplor r of the Orient J o rn fa

e e e e says he saw a imilar , u e u se , S

mill on the isl of Nicaria Giving a description of it he t lls us that

e .
, e

the grain w s poured into an apertur in the upp r ston and fell in b
'

a e e e e

twe n the two ston s The upper stone (2 feet in di ameter ) was made to
e e .

rotat by m ans of a stick fixed into its dg

e e e e .

S imilar millstones r mention d by Clark who saw them in

a e e ,

N azareth ; they wer worked by two women e On of them was turn . e

ing the upp r stone taking e ,

the handle with h r right e

hand half way round and ,

passing the handle to the

second woman who aft r , e

p rforming the sam mo e e

tion returned it to th first , e

from th other side & c e , .

With their left b an ds they

poured the grain into the
hole in the upper stone .

The Chin s rice mills e e -

are of the same con

struction according to
S taunton though de ,

signed not for the grindin g

of grain but for fr eing it , e

of its out r cOv r He e e .

describes it in th follow e

ing manner The rice

is plac d in b tween two e e

FIG 11 —
.A H d Mill t S t f th C
. an i-
fl a t c
s o ney h n d n tone
s t
o
h e a u ca s a n
’ ’ c S e ?

D kh b r u are so far apart that with

o o s .
”

the rotation of the upper stone the grain is but freed of its coverin g ,

and n o t ground .

The type of hand mill alluded to by Moses and H omer is still pres rved
-
e

among the natives of Morocco Fig 1 0 is a photograph of such a mill . .

,

mad in 1 9 0 8
e .

B u t not only the semi savage aborigines of Africa use these mil ls ; Fig 1 1
-
.

S hows us an almost identical hand mill wit h a few improvements that the -

, ,

D ukhobors f r om th Caucasus used b fore migrating to Americae ,

e .

The improvem nts in this mill wh n compared to the Morocco o n

e ,
e e,

consis t in th e fixin g of the ston es to a bloc k h o ll o we d o ut in t he sha pe of

C H AP . I ] F LOUR MI LLI N G 11

a trough Th hole a bored in th sid of th trough rv s for disch rg

. e ,
e e e , se e a

ing the fl o ur .

This typ of hand mill b r ings us to the n d of th first p riod of milling

e -
e e e

t chni s of th antique mainly lav owning culture The consumption

e c e ,
S e -

of bread not being high th re was no n d for large production of it ,

e ee
,

a n d therefore the mil li ng was successfully performed by slaves and

women .

The work b ing very difficult criminals w r condemned to do it

e , e e

for punishment .

As to the woman it was one of the it ms of her ordinary h ousehold

'

, e

work .
1

To this day in Mecca a place is shown wher F ati ma daughter of

, , e ,

Mohamm d worke d a hand mill e ,

-
.

T Y PE S OF MI LL S D R I V E N BY A N I M AL P O W E R
The new mill where mainly animal power and only partly human ,

power is utilised appears with the passing of flour milling from the,

family which only satisfied its private needs into the hands of the pro
, ,

du cer working for the market

,
.

The principle of grindi ng the grain between two millstones remain s

in the new mill but it is larger and , ,

has undergone some modification in

its construction tending to reduce the
expendi tur of power This mill e .

was invented at a lat er period yet ,

we fin d no t r aces of it among the

relics of antique E gyptian Roman , ,

and Greek lt r s Only th 12 1 6 8 13 F 1 2 Mill f th P ri d f th Ki g

Cu u e . e 3
IG -
o e e o o e n s

v t o n s of P ompeu hav g i ven

. .

ex ca a I fR m e o o e ,

us pict u res of the improv d mill of e

the time of Roman dominion as w ll as nearly perfectly pres rved mill ,

e e

stones I n all probability this type o f mill was invented by th Romans

.
e

at least 1 5 0 to 2 00 years B C . .

Fig 1 2 represents the outer v iew of the mill in question and the same
. ,

in section .

1
It i ri f t th t i
s a cu Littl R i
ousm ill t i ti
acl l gr d wi th a m k g ni e u ss a , e s s o un a a o on n a

m kitr r r r r g r ki d ”
f b
d m t ) t fl f i b h h ( p) e cau se
“
so u
a
(p tl a es p p
e an o a o ou ,
or e a rn o s c a n o ,

mill t m l i
e t pr d
ea d m ill
s no o u ce on o u r s.
12 F LOUR MI LL I N G [ C H A R I

The foun dation of the Roman mill consists of a cylindrical pillow of

stone A is about 5 feet in diameter and 1 foot thick To this fo n da
.
. u

tion is rigidly fixed a conic ston (the e

nether ston meta ) with the top e

”

truncated about 2 feet in h ight The e .

cone is provid d with an iron j ournal e

at th top The rev olvin g upper stone e .

till B has two bell S haped

'

ca us -

w l —
hollo s thus r semb ing a sand glass , e .

I n the plac where the tops of th e e

bells a r j oined an iron cross beam is e

fixed like a dov tail in shape at the , e -

ends .

I n the middle of t his beam is a

round hole into whi ch the j ournal ,

is inserted O that in between the , S

inner sid s of the lower bell and the e

FIG 13 —R m M I1 t r d by H r
o an 1
outer
u ne
surface a
of the cone
o se
th re is e

ust the space needed for the

.
. .

mdm
0

j gr g
grain which is put there The grain is poured into the hollow C of the
.

upper bell B acting the part of hopper from whence it falls into the space
, ,

FI G. l4 .
—
R o m an Mill driv en by Sl a ves a nd Asses .

between the grin din g surfac s The upper stone is revolv ed by means
e .

of le v ers D which are inserted into the two or fo ur rectangular cav ties i

made in it .
 FI G . 15 .
~
Po mp eian Mil l s .

FI G
. 16 .
—
A Chi n es e Mill .

the P ompeian mills were shaped of lava from Vesuvius Coarse and fine
sieves made of horse hair and lin n w r e used for sepa r ating th flour
.

,
e
-

, e e

from t h bran and whole grains that passed unground The r We r usually
e
. e e
14 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C H A R I

s veral kinds of flour known on the market mentions ev n . He e th e

e
m di m n m hol di ng
number of fl o ur grades and refus obtained from o n e e e u

1 0 8 laurels vi,
z .

1 7 laurels
F lour of finest quality (pollen ) .

5 0
F lour of m dium quality (sim il g )
e
—
a o
1
3 0
F lour of semolina 1 st quality (farin tritici )
i ,
3

F lour of semolina 2 n d quality (s u n d ri

,
i pa s )
ni 2 § ec a

F lo ur of s molina 3rd quality ( ib

e
r ii panis )
,
2 § c a
3
B ran (furfur )
V arious refus e

1 0 8 laur ls
Total e .

som tim s forced to

e e

w e a rw o d e nodi cs round s

their ne cks to pr v nt ,
e e

any pos ibility of r ach

s e

ing their mouth with

t h hand and eating the
e

F or that purpose a
fencing of b ams with e

shafts for the harnes

sing Of ho r ses was ar

—A Hin do o Mill were

FI G . 17 .
.

V ati can . B l mkers

place d on the eyes of the animals probably to prevent giddiness ,

.

Herc la n e m u
Th e
mill driv n by an ass is r eproduc d in a book on e e
u

This draw n was mad e

a nd P o m eii by Rou B ar r e (vol 2 tab .

p
-
.
,
,
16 FLO UR MI LLI NG [C H AR 1

III

TH E UTI LI S ATI ON OF W ATE R P O W E R F OR MI LL S

As the construction of a mill grew heavier in respons to the n ee d
'

, e

of greater output men were forced to apply a greater driving power

, ,

which S hould be more efficacious than the muscles of a slave woman or , ,

FI G . l9 .
—
A W t r m ill
a e -
as d i d
e scr be by Vitr viu us .

an imal N aturally they turned to water and air first of all and utilised
.
, ,

the power of these moving elements .

The first veracious information concerning mi ll s dri ven by means of

under shot water wheels and a minut explanation of their construction
- -

,
e ,

we fin d in Vitruvius .
1

I t is to be regrette d that V itruvius in hi s immense work about the art

of b i ldi ng di d not furnish it wi th drawings all illustrations given
u
“

in some of the later editions of his work are only attempts to depict ,

what he described .

Vitr vi
1
u R m r hit t wr t D A hit t
u s, a o b t 16 13 y r
an a c ec ,
o e e rc ec u ra a ou -
ea s D . C .
am p . I] F LOUR MI LLI N G 17

S uch is the drawing in Fig 1 9 tak n from an dition of Vitruvius .

, e e
’

work published in 1 5 2 1 in C m e in Old I talian

,
a , .

H ere A r presents a wooden water wh el On its rim are radially

e -
e .

fixed paddles B receiving th pressure of moving water and box s o r

.

, e , e

ladl s C which serve to b ring up th water used for sp cial purposes

e , e e .
1

The shaft of the water whe l is turn d with the long end inwa r ds On
-
e e .

the square part of the shaft D is fixed a comb whe l E ngag d with a -
e e e

mangle gear The cogs of the collar comb whe l enter into th mangle
.
-
e .
e

wheel F set on G the spindle of the millstone which r sts with its lower
, , ,
e

end on a beam L the upper end passingthrough a fixed (not shown in th

,
e

drawing ) lower grindstone a n d is hermetically fastened to the runn r H,

e ,

into the Openi ng of which the product to be ground is poured Th latter . e

is fed from a pyramidal

hopp r K where the
e ,

grain is kept The lower .

opening of the hopper

is furnished with a n a d
j u st a b l e vibrating shoe .

The water lifted b y

the wheel A pours out '

of the boxes 0 into a

tank R whence through
,

an Opening X it passes F 20 —Ar bi W t r mill IG

. . a an a e -
.

into the spout Y an d ,

may be used for irrigation P ossibly a fullery was attached to the mill . ,

which may explain the presence of a hammer 0 in the drawing though ,

it may have been used fo rhammering a stopper into the outlet X

We may suppos e the use of horizontal water wheels or turbines on -

mills to be n early as old as th e use of vertical water wheels S impl

“
-
. e

turbines are found in mountainous regions in almost all lands where the
population is slightly touched b y civilisation howev er low their mechanics ,

may stan d .

F ig 2 0 pro v es this surmise to be correct is a drawing of

I t n .
a
.

Arabi an water mill made at Rollet s by a captain of the French artillery

-

,
’

soon after the taking o ffCo n stan tin o ple by the Fr nch A d notes the e .
e

wall of the mill buildi ng B the hopper for pouring the grain in a cross
-

,
C ,

bar comm u nicatin g a vibratory motion to the hopper D v

a revol ing
’

grindstone (making 1 1 2 rev olutions in the present cas ) E t h spi dl of

n e ,
e e

the grin ds ton e F m as o nr y serving

,
as n th r stone at the sam time e e e ,

Pr b bly f irrig ti 1
o a or a on .
18 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C H A R I

G a cavity where the ground product (flour semolin a ) is collected H a

, ,

shaft on which a t urbin I is moun ted K a l a dder L a l ver for th runner

e , ,
e e

D M a gate in front of th Spout N

, ,
I t is also mentioned that the e .

turbin is
e metres in diam ter and is furnishe d with thi rty e ,

paddl s e .

With the aid of a spout through a small opening in th dam th ,

e ,
e

water is di r cted on to one half of that whe l so that it falls into the
e e ,

concav e side of the paddles bringing the wheel the S haft H and grind r D , ,
e

into motion .

As to hori zontal wat r wheels in the mill s M Ru hlm an n quotes ane -

, .

extract from the French encyclop aedia .

I n the 1 4 th vol of th D icti n n ire Techno l giq e p 2 0 7 it is stated

. e o a o u , .
,

that horizontal water wheels in th so called b a a cl mills in Tu m ra

-
e -
z e

were built in the tw lfth century e

Then in the issue of N en e Hann ver ches Ma ga sin on Oc

,
s o s

tober 4 1 80 2 p 1 2 7 7 is the foll owing descri ption of a B ashkir

, ,
.
,

mill that was vidently a contemporary of the vessel mi ll s of

e

B elisarius :
Th B ashkirs have mills of a peculiar construction apparently an
e ,

inv ention of th people With the view of economising labour they

e .
,

choose the small st rivulets for their mills make a hedge of twigs which is
e ,

filled with earth and dam the stream with it (or an ordinary dyke of
,

brushwood ) On the dyke is built a hut on piles I n that hut grindstones

. .

are placed on a scaffolding standing in the middle with railings running

round its edge The grinders are not of stone but of a hard tree stump
.
,

or block of wood and are shaped in the form of plates studded in an

, ,

orderless way with flat iron nails so laid that their prominent parts ru n ,

lengthways from the centr to th pe riph ry The nether wooden e e e .

grinder is rigidly attached to the scaffolding while th upper one may be , e

'

raised and revolves conj ointly with th vertical shaft that r u ns through e

the opening in the nether grind r and rests with th point of an iron e e

crutch in a cavity made in the cent r e of the upper grinder Th vertic al . e

shaft is usually made of o n block of wood so that its low r part nds in e , e e

a round thick knob into which a good numb r of flat win gs or paddl es
, e ,

slightly concav on n sid may be hammer d in a manner resembling

e o e e, e

the spokes in a wh l and fo r ming the water wheel proper A bolt is

ee ,
-

hammered into th thick n d of th shaft b lo w by means of whi ch th

e e e e , e

vertical shaft r sts in th rivulet on a beam an d revolves in it as n a

e e ,
I

The grain to be ground into semolina or flour is poured

CH AP .
'

I ] F LOUR MI LLI N G 19

into a hopper built of planks Und r the opening of that hopp r a ho r t . e e ,

s

horizontal spout is plac d leading to th Opening in th middl e of th

e ,
e e e

upper grinding di sk The corn bin with grain is hung to th c r o b am

.
-
e ss -
e

of the mill fr to b shifted A handl ti d to th corn bin whi h

,
ee e . e, e e -

,
c

touches the upp r grind r with o n n d imparts a Vibratin g motion

e e e e ,

to it
.
”

We presume however that th author rrs in scribing the inv n

, ,
e e a e

FI G 2 1 .

tion of this mill with a horizontal wat r whe l to

,
ashkirs From e -
e ,
the B .

the oldest times and up to this day such a mill is a common object in ,

the Caucasus P ossibly the author has mistaken the natives of Caucasus
.

for B ashki rs .

The mountaine rs and e ven th peopl of the plains of the norther

e ,
n e e

C aucasus chiefly maize

,
flour of w hi ch an unleaven
u se d bread is pre ,
e

pared Chu reck Wheat is also ground b u t is u se d

,
.
” onl y w i t h an
,
20 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C H A R I

adm i xture of maize flour as the use of pure wh at flour is a luxury amo ng
,
e

the natives Th whole amount of maiz and wheat is ground for local
. e e

FI G 2 2
. . A
-
Ca u ca sia n Mill with o ne S et of Grin d ers .

consumption in the water mills depicted in 180 2 by the

-
Ncu es Ha n no
versches Ma ga sin .

Fig . is a sketch of this mil l The shaft of a horizontal water

21 .

W heel rests with one end e on a step bearing in the shaft d which may rise
-

,
 FL O UR MI LLI NG

FI G 2 3
. .
—C
A i Mil l with th
a u c as a n re e S e ts o f i
Gr n d ers .

Thes mills are usually furnished with o n burr and r built on

e
e , a e

mountain brooks Their capacity varies from 1 to 8 or 1 0 poods per day

.
1
.

Fig
. 2 2 is a photograph of such a mill with a singl s t of g rinde rs , e e
I t is of brushwood
.

wicker wo r k with a thatched roof Fig 2 3 hows a

-

, . . s

mill with thr e sets of g rind r s and la t ly Fig 2 4 gives us a vi w of nin

e e , s , .
e e

such mills situated along a mountain torr nt clinging to th mountain

, e , e
sid lik swallow n st
e e e s .

1
1 po o d =36 l b s.
22 F LO UR MI LLI NG
these mills the work is usually performed by women This type
In .

of water wheel became known in Franc and G rmany only in the

-
e e

FI G 2 4
. .
-
A Ro w iv r
of Mill s a lo n g a Mo u n tain R e .

fifteenth century Therefore the supposition that these mills were

.
,

brought to E urope by the crusaders at the end of the thirteenth

cen tury is quit j ust
e .
 FLO UR MI LLI NG
“

2 4; [C H A R I

pyramidal bin 7 o n the next floor but one below Out of bin 7 the grain
.

.
,

passes through the hopper 8 into the burr the purpose of which is to rub ,

off th outer h sk remov th g rm and dirt Con sequently this grinder

e u ,
e e e .

is th same as the G erman S pit g n g The grain comparativ ly cleaned

e z a .
, e

of husk germ and d irt is aspirated in passing out of the grin der the
, , , ,

cl an g r ain falli ng again into bin 3 (no dirty grain is mixed with it as it
e ,

was all pass d into b in e the heavy refuse into bin 9 lying below while ,

FI G 2 5. .

the air and light refuse are blown out through an opening in the bin 9a .

I n proportio n to th freeing of the grain of its husk it is taken by the

e

sam elevator 4—
,

e 5 this time into bins 1 0 and 1 1

,
F rom these bins it is .

convey d into th reel s parator 1 2 wh r the small grain and chaff are
e e -
e ,
e e

sifted away The thro gh of that separator are fanned th r fore th

. u s ,
e e e

good grain falls into bin 1 4 the light kern ls and chaff ar blown by the ,
e e

ventil ator into bin 3 2 and still li ghter r fus into bin 3 3
, e e .

—
Out of bin 1 4 the cl aned grain passes into conveyor 1 5 1 6 with paddl es
e

right and l ft which dis harges th g r ain into conveyor boxes 1 7 7 1 8

e , c e , , ,

which f d th g r ind rs 8 1 9 2 0
ee e e , , .
 veyo r 2 1 2 2 — and then into elevator 2 3—
which passes it into the hopper
24 ,

boy 2 5 a kind of flour mixer designed by the Americans for the purpos
,
e

of coolin g the product On leaving the ho pp erb o y the fl our flows first
.
,

o n to two cy lin drical reel separators 2 6 wh re the thro u h s a r conveyed e

g
-

, e

in to bins 2 8 a nd 2 9 with a chamber for flour and the refuse left on th m

.

, e

is once more sift ed on the controlling s parator 2 7 The refuse from e .

separator 2 7 s taken by conv eyor 3 1 either to bin 3 2 to the light kernels

1

a n d chaff and t hen reground on grinder 8 or ground apart

, , .

Thus we hav e a complete automaton with grain cleaning and repeat d , e

grindi ng of the product if needed , .

The principle of sorting the product according to quality was known

to Americans long before the E uropeans l arned of it and effect d with e , e

much greater success I t is n

“

. e

cessa r
y to describe the sor ting "

cylinder 1 2 wher the coarse im

, e

p urities as well as cha f

f o r S mall

grains are sorted away (Fig L LK .

Q

This cylindrical reel separator -

is an inventio n of E vans (called

Roll ing S creen and F an and
works in the following mann er Fm 2 6 ,

out of the conv eyor box r the

grain flows into the inner cylinder 1) concentric to cylinder a Th . e

meshes in the cloth of cylinder a a r e smaller than the grain those of

l

cylinder b larger The two siev es are j oined to each oth r The r fuse
. e . e

of sieve ( large admixtures passes into box 6 th thro gh into si ve

1, , ,
e u s e a .

The refuse of sieve a the good grain flows into bin k and th thro u ghs
, , ,
e ,

fin e dust & c fall through a crevic ein the air pipe The grain and thro u ghs
,
-
.

are subj ected to the effect of a current of air blown by fa n g along f

The dust is carried out and the heavy refus falls into bins i and h e .

The di ameters of these cylinders are 2 5 and 3 feet the number of , ,

revolutions 1 5 to 1 8 per minu te .

Whe n the mill is supplied with grain fro m a barge or v ssel the re e ,

cep tio n is accomp li shed by an elevator 3 9 which ascends and descends , ,

—
with the aid of chain sheav s 4 2 4 3 The el vator pours th grain into e . e .
e

the conveyor 4 5 which carri s it into bins 1 0 and 1 1 the conveyor being
,
e ,

exhausted the while The dusty air is di scharg d out of the conveyor e

—
.

4 5 on its left side and out of the grain cleaning chamber of the mill
,

through the outlet Q .

 FL OUR MILLING [ C H AR 1

TH E I NF LU E NC E OF A M E R I CAN T E CH N I C S IN E U R OP E

In the ci vilised countries of West rn E urop for many centuries the e e

system of a single milling passag e r igned and is still adhered to in e , ,

peasant windmill s I n those mills both gram and husks w re ground

. e

in mill stones and the flour was sift d through hand si ves of horsehair
,
e -
e

preparatory to baking S om 2 5 0 y ars ago the sifting bag was adapted

. e e

to the mill and performed the work of a sifting apparatus .

O v er 1 5 0 y ars have lapsed since the F rench technics introduc ed a

e e

e —
new styl o f m illin g th r epeating type (m on tn re éco no m ign e) which e ,

is beginn ing slowly to sp r ead in E urop e .

Up to the end of th ighteenth c ntu ry the milli n g te h n ics of E urope

e e e c

remain d the sam with scarcely any alt rations ther b ing no motive
e e
“

e ,
e e

cause for progress either in social organisation or in the trade corpora

,
-

tion indust ry F lour mills were working almost exclusively to supply

.

local needs and seldom for neighbouri ng di stricts

, .

The last quarter of the eighteenth century witnessed the beginnin g

of the gigantic breaking p of th conomic structure o f feudal E urop u
'
e e e,

caused by thre pow r ful historical facto rs which brought about a n w

e e , e

era of progress Those factors were the perfectin g of Watt s steam

.
’

en gine th struggle for liberty in America and th F rench Revolution

,
e ,
e .

Technical progress and th victory of the middle class ov r the feudal e -

e

system in E urope rendered possible the organisation of industry on new

prin ciples of production those of capital ,
.

The firs t country b nefited by the principl of capitali sm in the fl o u r

e e

millin g sphere was America as the p ro dir tio n of flour in the United S tates ,
c

required a gr at number of mills Th wan t of hands and the high wages

e . e

forced the Americans to hav recourse to a rational techni cal organisation e

Of production .

To that end in th beginning of th nineteenth c ntury hundr ds

,
e e e e

of automatic mills similar to th one described w re built in

,
e ,
e

America chiefly in th state of P ennsylvania and along the river

,
e

Mississippi .

The influence of American m illing technics becam noticeable first e

in the E nglish milli ng industry partly by reason of th ir conomic rela tions ,

e e ,

which were closer betw en thes two countries than between the otherse e ,

partly owing to their common tongu Y t that influ nce commenced e . e e

only after 1 7 8 1 as is proved by th fact that th most r liabl E nglish

,
e e e e
 CH AP . I ] FL OUR MI LLI NG 27

work of the time (Rees Cgcl p cedi ) in its chapter on flour milli ng gives
’
o a 1

a detailed description of E nglish mills in which no mill of American type ,

is mentioned I t also speaks of a c lebrat d English ngin r S mitt n

. e e e ee , e ,

who built n 1 7 8 1 in D eptford a mill for the needs of th fleet called by

I , , e ,

him The S team Mill accordi ng to his o w n system that he had worked
,
”

out as early as 1 7 5 4 The motor adapted by S mitt e n was Newco m en

.
’
s

steam pump which pumped water into tanks placed at a sufficient height
, , .

The water flowing from these tanks on to the water wheels work d
,
-

, e

the mill
At th end of 1 7 82 Watt had so far perfected his steam engine that
e ,
-

it was possible to adapt it for immediate in working a facto ry I n u se .

1 7 8 5 was built the first steam mill n London close to B lackfriars B ridge I
’

which was call ed Albion Mills I t was built and arrang d by th engineer .
e e

John Renni e and the Watt s steam engine was pu rv y d by the works of
,
’
-
e e

B o l ton
u Watt in S oho The mill only b gan operating in 1 7 86 having
, . e
,

ten millstones for wheat grinding .

The capacity of the steam engine was 5 0 h p 1 h p g rinding 6 3 lbs -

, . .

of wheat per hour and burning about 3 % cwt of coal p r hour "B t
, . e u

e ven that great expendi ture of fuel W s considered to be very pro fitable a
,

and j udging by the results of milling Rennie s mill was recognised to

, ,
’

be exemplary .

D uring the en d of the eighteenth century mill buildi ng in E ngland ,

-

m ade rapid progress : B esides the b r others Rennie (G eorge and John ) ,

in that department the nam s of Mo dsl y E tken and S teel in London

,
e e , , ,

F enton Murrey and Woods in Leeds and F airbairn and Lille in Man
, , ,

chester are renowned .

George and John Renn ie built a mill the largest in the world at ,
2

the time in P lymouth for the V ictualli ng of the fl t containi ng tw nty

, ,
ee ,
e

four mill stone sets T his was probably the first fireproof mill as the
.
,

b uildin g was constructed of iron and ston The mill ston e sets wer e . e

divided into four groups each group of six being driven by one large ,

cogged wheel .

MI LL S IN F R ANC E
Flour milling in France of th eight nth century was far superior e ee

to that in other E uropean countries I n a book by Mal o u in s published . ,

in 1 7 6 7 we find the d scription of a mill wh r e the product was twic

,
e e e

R Cy l p d i1
l xx iii 1
ees 78 1’
c o I bid oe a , vo . .
,
.
2
.
28 FLO UR MI LL I N G [ C H A R I

Sifted by means
of re l separators F ig 2 7 is a rather primitive but
e -
. .
,

suffi ciently characteristic drawing of th inn r arrangement of the mill

e e .

The millston set GK rests on a timber b ursting M The f ed

e . e

hopper B is filled with grain by a workman The float D in the fe d is . e

a sufficiently heavy plank attach d by a string 0 to the b ll E When

e e .

the grain is spent and the hopp r is empty the falling plank D pulls
e ,

the string and r ings th b ll as a signal

,
e e .

e —
A large wood n box L and two s parators K K are placed under the
e

FI G . 27 .

b ursting The groun d product flows into the upper sepa r ator or dress r
. e .

The refuse from that separator passes on into the lower o n e .

The thro gh of the s parators yi lded flour which was collect d in

u s e e e

the box L .

To prevent the flour from escaping into th building the box and e ,

separators were hooded with a curtain which formed a kind of dust

“

chamber The tissue in the separators was woollen

. .

I n pr e portion to th fl t ed in the box the cu r tain was lifted

‘

r co ll
e ou ec

a n d the flour removed with shov ls e .

CHAP . I ] F LOUR MI LLI N G 29

The influence of American milling technics began to penet r at into e

Franc much later than in to E ngland I n th c l brat d M th dica l

e . e e e e e o

E ncyclo p wdi of D id rot and D Ala m b rt a mill of the nd of ’

a e e e

th eight enth c ntury is described greatly resemblin g the type of mill s

e e e

constructed in th b ginning of that cen tury depicted by B elidor in a

e e ,

work call d Architect re Hydro ligu e as early as 1 7 3 7

e u , .

S uch stagnancy in milling t echnics and industrial lif generally has e

its explan tion in the stormy p riod of the F rench Revolution and in th
a e e

wars of the succeeding E mpire Only after the continental wars had .

ended di d the industry of F rance revive and flour milling adopt the ,

Anglo American type of m ills These new types of mills in France were
-
'

built by E nglish firm s I n 1 8 1 8 the E nglish engine r Mo desley was . e , ,

buildi ng a mill of four mill stone sets in S t Quentin I n 1 82 5 Atkins . .

and S teel built a mill in S t D eni s near P aris for B en sit who acquire d .
, , ,

a name in the F r nch milling literatur later e e .

B u t th v ivacious and creativ mind of the F rench was not satisfi ed

e e

in the further d velopment of mill building with imitating the E nglish

e -

a n d Americans F rench engineers have introduced many original inven

.

tions chiefly in the sphere of transportation cleani ng of grain and dress

, , ,

ing the product The buildi ng of their mills excelled in beauty of archi
.

tecture and the departments in proportion ality Of sizes One of the

, .

greatest inventions of the F rench of that time is th cl aner and e e

separator the most indi spensable machine of the grain cleaning de

,
-

p ar t m en t D oubtless the development

. of milling tech ni cs pushed the
question of perfecting the water wheel adapted th n almost exclusively -

,
e

in mills to the front and it was F o rn yro n d who produced the firs t
, ,
u e

turbine This was of no less import anc to the develop m ent of milling
. e

in France than was Watt s steam engine in England ’

-

V II

P R O G R E SS
T E CH N I C S I N G E R M AN Y OF
The old G erman mi ll which was in use up to the fifties of the n ine
teen th century is illustrated in F ig 2 8 S uch mills (section in F ig 2 8 A )
1 .

—
. .

w re driven by a water W heel with the aid of a mangle gearing m l

e -
.

Th mangle gear l is set on a spindle restin g on the step bearing K

e
-

l ying on a beam p wh ich may be raised and lowered regul ati ng the ,

di stance between the grinding surfaces The adjustable grinder B is con .

n ected with the S pindl by a driving iron i Fig 2 8 B gives th S i de i ew

e . .
e V .

1 Prechtl , Techno logische E n cyclop a die, vo l . x . S tu tthard, 1 840 .

30 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C HAR 1

From the millston e the flour flows into a woollen sifting bag to K ,

which a V ibratory motion is communi cat d by a fork v p rform in g e ,

e

ret urning oscillations f r om haft 71 Th fi n flour sifted through th s

1
. e e ,
e

b ag K pass s into th box L

, e Th bran s molina and coarse meal
e . e ,
e ,

(o verta ils ) fall on sieve M wh r th bolting is r peat d I n thi s manner

,
e e e e e .
,

tw o kinds of flour w r obtainable and s molina which was th n r ground

e e ,
e , e e .

S ometimes the sifting bag was r plac d by siev s of di fferent d nsity to e e e e ,

obtain a greater numb r of kinds of flour 0 is a solid drivin g iron

e .
,

D a ratch t Wheel for the e ibrato ry motion of th sho set into the V e e

openi ng of th runner (see A ) Fig E a m chanism ommuni cating the

e .
,
e c

vibratory motion to the fork which shakes the s ifting bag The e .

mechanism shown in Fig F and th working of which is obvious was .

,
e ,

frequently adapted for th sam purpose I n the firs t and s cond case e e . e

the revolving cross head w acting upon a wood n spring-

ff cts a e e e

vibration of the rollers on which th sp ring is s t F ig G is a sieve M e e . .

for sifting the o v rta ils from the sifting bag ; Fig H is a wood en spring
e .

counterbalancing the vibrations of the S ieve M Th tightening of the . e

Spring is r gulated ither by transposing th taper pin i or tight ning

e e e -

, e

the string On F igs K and N we find the shaft and screw apparatus
8 . .

for raising the vertical j ournal p when the di stance between the grindin g
surfaces is to be regulated.
The new mill mad its appearanc in G ermany later t han in E ngland
e e

and France Th f udal system th corporate organi sation of the

. e e ,
e

trad s and the conservatism in te hm cs ma ntained by them w re the

e , c i e

chief causes of this tardi ness

“

The f udal law had creat d the so called compulsory grinding

e e -

in th mills belonging to the landowner thus putt ing the monopoly of

e ,

production into t h hands of the lord of the manor and precluding

e ,

any possibl comp tition Y et the necessity of competing in the market

e e .

and fighting against th imported F r nch and E ngli sh flour forc d the
e e e

Ge rmans to adopt the American type of mill as more e ffi cient and pro ,

d in g b tter flour
uc e .

H aving grasp d the advantag s of t h Am rican mill the G erman

e e e e
“

e ngin rs and industrial promoters commenced studying that type wi th

ee -

the carefulness and minuteness characteristic of th nation e .

The first G rman flourmills o f the Anglo American type wer buil t
e -
e

and began Operating in P russia As a rly as in 1 82 5 such a mill was . e ,

arrang d in Magdeburg by F Murrey of Leeds ; in G uben under the

e .
,

S up rvision of an ent rprising leaseholder K orti

e e ,
.

I n B rlin th r sprang into xistence a st am mill o f S chu h mann

e e e e e -
32 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C H AR I

and Kra t eke arranged by an engin e builder Freund after the fashion of
z -

E nglish mills ; and on th upper Od r a st am mill of the American e e e -

type similar to that in G uben was working

, ,
.

The Prussian trad committe furthered thes e b ginnings in ev ery

e e e

way by publishing for instance in 1 82 5 detailed drawings and descrip

, , ,

tions of the b st E nglish and American mills and s nding in 1 82 7 two

e , e

pupils of the I mp rial Trade I nstitute (H n t el and Wul f ) who w r

e a z , e e

studying mill building to America and E ngland to acquire practical

, ,

knowledge in everythi ng pertaining to the question Ha n t el and . z

VV lf s report was published by order of the P russian G o v ernment of

’
u

1 8 3 2 and these two b u i lders erected with great success several large
,

mills and very skilfully performed the mill ing operations .

I n the w stern provinces of P russia the Ober P resident von Winke

e -

became r nowned having built about 1 8 3 0 the first standard m ill of the
e ,

American typ on the river Leine e .

I n the south of G ermany the first t o introduc mills of American con e

struction was the Royal G overnm nt of W iirtem b erg The first mill of e .

that type was erected on the site of an old mill belonging to the treas ury
in B erg by S t tth art
,
u .

The b ui lding of that mill was b gun in the summer 1 8 30 and ended e ,

In 1 83 1 I t commenced operating on the 1 st S eptember 1 8 3 1

. Here three .

water wheels set into motion ten millstones three aspirators and three
-

separators with silk cloth one sieve two product elevators one sort in g
, , ,

dresser and several sifting machines I n a short time the flour from
,
.

this mill commanded so extensive a market that by 1 8 3 2 an en

largement of the mi ll was thought of B t the greatest good the mill . u

wrought was the xample it set for soon in di fferent parts of the
,
e ,

kingdom mills of the B e r g type sprang up S uch mill s were erected .

in Althausen Zeflin gen Urach Reutlingen Tiib in gen E sslin gen an d

, ,
'

, , , ,

Heilbronn .

S ome time before the mill in B erg was built the attention of the Royal ,

G o v ernment of B avaria was attracted to the question and it published ,

on 2 7th F ebruary 1 82 8 the following announcement

A remuneration of 30 00 guldens will be allo tted to the man who in ,

two years time sh all have built and commenced working a flo u r grin di ng
’
-

mil l of at l ast three stones constructed after the manner of those suc
e ,

cessf lly operating for several years in E ngland and N orth America
”
u , .

The sole claima nt of that p ri mechani c S p at of Niirn b erg n n o u n ced

z e, a , ,
a

in 1 8 3 1 that a mill of the type m ntioned containing four millstones and e ,

driven by an overshot water wheel had been er ected b y him and was -

, ,
CH AP . I ] F LOUR MI LLI N G 33

working S pat was awarded the priz in 1 8 3 2 notice b ing tak n of th

. e , e e e

fact that the mill is indeed of the Anglo American type but somewhat -

mo di fied .

Thi s impro v ed mill of S pat s enjoyed no great success as an xampl ’

e e

to be imi tated and in 1 8 3 7 a mill er B achmann was sent by royal orde r

, , ,

for the B av arian Mill ers Uni o n to W iirtemb erg to study the American
’

mills of that country .

A far larger field was gained by the An glo Am rican mills in the
“

-
e

—
following years (1 83 3 3 5 ) in Pr ussia where the Royal S ea Trading S ociety ,

took a prominent part in their di ffusion .

F rom 1 82 2 that S ociety acting on behalf of the merchants of D antzig

, ,

di stributed the grain p urchased b y it among the local mills and sent the
'

fine flo u r partly to E ngland part ly to Transatlantic ports Thereby the

, .

traders soon arrived at the conclusion that G erman flo u r millin g was too far
behin d that of foreign coun tries particularly of N orth America to enable , ,

them to compete successfully on the outland markets .

I n co n sequence the S ociety purchased a milli ng plant situated on

,

the O der in Tiergarten in the neighbourhood of Ohlan (in S ilesia ) and

, ,

entrusted its reconstruction in the American fashion t o an experienced

techni cal miller named Han t el I n 1 83 4 eight stones of the rebuilt z .

m ill were i n stalled a n d st arte d two more flaking mills bein g added to the ,

n umber later on .

p
This mill was the standard for mills b ui lt in after years and produced ,

flo u r of a higher quality for home use as well as for export ,

.

At the same time pri v ate industry di d not remain inactive P ar .

ticu lar attention must be called to the e ffort of a merchant Witt by name , ,

who greatly assisted the d ev elopment of the fl o u r milli ng industry in -

D antzig I n a mill with twenty pairs of stones rented by him in D antzig

.
, ,

he had twelve reconstructed o n the American system and added n ew , ,

o n es to them so that in a short time he had no less than thirty one

,
-

millstone sets of perfected construction in operation .

The second of the abo v e mentioned engineers who had be n s nt to -

e e

America Wulf had an Open field here for developing his activity on a
, ,

large s cale in the capacity of director of the technical sid of the business e .

B ii scher of N eustadt E berswalde n ext d serves mention

- H was a e . e

go v ern ment engineer a nd with his five stones mills of the Am rican
,
- e

type stro v e to e n ab le the owners of small mills without any mark d ,

e

alterations to the plants to produce flour which only slightly differed in

,

quality fro mthe product of the most perfect mills of th day e .

I n 1 83 5 Kriickma n n
,
the ow n er of a mill in B erli
,
n adapted his ,

C
34 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C H AR I

three stones mill for hard grain and shortly afterwards a councillor of
-

commerc Grunau in E lbing reconstructed his mill in the improved

e, ,

style .

B efore that on the Rhine Opposite to the town N euwied on an estate

, , , ,

Z r N tt b longing to Karl Winz a mill on the American system

”
u e e, e ,

was erected and W orke d This mill contained four sets of stones driven .

b y two water wheels -

.

VI I I
F U RTH E R D E V E L OP M E N T OF MI LL B U I L D I N G -
IN E U R OP E

I n 1 82 3 ,after unsuccessful attempts b y Helfenberg in R o hrscha h c

(S witzerland cant S t G all n ) B,

allinger in V ie n
. na and von K. o lli o in e , ,

P aris a certain von Miiller of Lucerne began building first in Warsaw then
, , ,

in Triest and lastly in Fra u en f ldt in S wi tzerland mills which Operated

,
e ,

by means of iron rolls instead of millstones These rolls did not fulfi l .

the hopes placed in them and it was only in 1 8 3 4 that a Zurich engineer , ,

S ulzberger eliminated the defects of the roller mill and attained real
,

success The j oint stock company established by Miiller in Frauen

.

feldt began to build roller mills with an unusual nergy an d n o t o nl y e ,

s uccessfully er cted Miiller s mill in Warsaw Triest and Fra u enfeldt

e
’

, , ,

but took pains to build such mills in other localiti s too These mills e .

were driven by steam ngines With a steam engine and a suffi cient -
e .
-

quantity of fuel and water for feeding the boilers it was possible to ,

set up a reliable motor anywhere .

I n 1 8 3 6 there were several steam mills in P russia B erlin alone was

’

in possession of three of the num ber I n Aust ria — H ungary the first .

steam mil l began working on the 2 6th S eptember 1 8 3 6 in Odenburg (in

-

H ungary in the neighbourhood of the lake N eusiedler ) About that time .

a similar mill came into existence in the Gran d D uchy of B aden in Mann ~

heim ; a little later in the Grand D uchy of Hessen two larg steam mills
, , e -

b gan operating one owned b y S chneid r 85 Co in Oppenheim clos e

e , e .
,

to the banks of the Rhine the secon d in the vicinity of Weissenau b y ,

Mainz .

I n H ano v er a leas holder F iedler had mill plants of the American e , ,

-

type in K lickm ii hle (capital of H anov er ) in 1 8 3 2 and the first steam mill ,
-

in Rehden wa s started by H artmann in 1 8 3 6 .

All these nterprises enj oyed great success as thanks to them whea t
e , , ,

gained near markets an d lo cal co n sumers r eceived flour o f a higher,

F LO UR MI LLI N G

FI G
. 29 .
36 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ CH A R I

quality The H an o v er steam mill in Rehden which ran some two years
.
-

only proved to be the sole xception The main caus s of its failure
,
e . e

were the restrictions it was placed under by the restrictiv and archaic e

regulatio ns imposed by the trade corporation ; besides which its being

situated among large water mill s and the excessive consumption of coal
-

b y the boilers were factors which influenced its fate

,
.

The first wind propelled mill of the American type in G erman y is

-

the mill by B reslau constructed by H ofmann a then well kn own factory

, ,
-

warrant o ffi cer about 1 83 6 F ig 2 9 shows a vertical sectio n of the mill

,
. .

with its full equipment .

On the top floor under the roof is a hollow main shaft of cast iron 00
, , ,

with spider a and win gs b which may be brought into any position (to
,

ass u me a workin g taper of the s u rface of the wings ) by the aid of

straight and angle shafts moved by Shaft d and rope e with a shaft k
,

and counterbalan ce m The m o tion of the win d propeller is tran s m itted

.

by means of Lo gged wheels e and f to the v ertical main shaft A of the

whole plant .

The sev en th floor (some 2 0 ft in di ameter ) contains supply bin s KK .

for grain and an appliance for elevating it .

The sixth floor is designed for grain cleaning apparatus of which -

only the se call ed sm u tters (machines for freeing the grain of its hu sk )
-

GG driven by gears H an d J are shown here

,
From thi s floor the grain
, .

passes in to b in s EE on the fifth floor I n all probabili ty other cleanin g .

,

machines were stationed on the third floor as the sm u tters w ould n o t ,

be sufficien t for that purpose .

On the fourth floor we fi n d the sto n es DD set symmetrically in a ,

circle the radi us of whi ch is self defin ed owing to a large cogged wheel B -

, ,

which couples with the gears of the spindles of all four millstones .

On the third floor ar e stationed the cogged wheels dr i v in g the mill

stones and gears and two mill dri v es MM for collecting the grain an d
,
-

cooling the product .

We may add that of the four pairs of millstones (5 ft in di ameter ) .

,

two pairs were from a F rench factory (La F erte) the othertwo bein g ,

from the Rhine (of volcanic basalt in the environs of Andernach ) These .

stones made from 1 0 0 to 1 1 0 revolutions per minute the wind pro ,

peller making 1 0 to 1 2 in the meantime .

On the second floor are the sifting bolters NN The middl e part of .

that section supported by strong wooden p illars serv es for storage

, , .

I n the grOu n d floor is th hand press QR for packi ng the flour p ure -
~

pose d for export into b a rrels S .

 FLO UR MI L LI N G 37

TH E S T RU GG L E B E TW E E N TH E R O LLE R AN D S TON E MI LL S

The first steam roller mill of the S ulzberger (Frau eni eldt ) type
'

appeared at the end of 1 83 7 in Main it was followed by similar mills z

in S tettin Muni ch and at the en d of 1 8 3 7 in L eipzig

, , , , .

S team roller mills made their appear ance in Austrian dominio n s ,

B uda P est and Mil an probably at the same time

-

, , .

The costs of arranging such a mill with a capacity up to 3 00 cen tners ,

1

o f wheat per day amounted to , guldens with a floating capital ,

of g l d s u .

These S ulzberger roller mills were adapte d solely for factory pro
.

duction of flour s ui table chiefly for export as the pro duct di d n o t

,
'

b ecome heated in grinding while it was possible to grind only perfectly

,

dry grain .

The roller gro u nd flour first gained great popularity fr om its goo d
-

outward appearance and high quality I t was ev en maintained that this .

flour contained more nutritiv e matter than flour ground o n ston es .

I n P re chtl s Techn lo gica l E n cyclo p cedia were gi v e n the results of the

’
o

analysis of flour from a Milan fl our mill made by a professor of

chemistry Ottavio F errario
, .

l OOO
'
1 0 00

Bu tgradually the opinion as regards roller m ills b gan to change to o

e ,

which assistance was lent by the circumstance of a quick discovery

that on the roller mills of the day a p rfectly pure product was not to e

be obtained and special stone sets had to be built for that purpose
,
.

The owners of roller mills soo n began to complain of heavy expenses

incurred by the repair and oiling of the roll rs and particularly of the e ,

C t r h dr d w ig ht 1
en n e r: un e e .
38 FLOUR MI LLI N G [CH AR I

excessive exp n diture of power and th necessity of employing many

e e

hands Thus for instanc th Ludwig mill in Munich produc d

.
,
e, e e

B avarian bushels of flour p r year on thirty six roll r mill s e -

e ,

whereas the thirt en stones that were substituted in their plac later
e e ,

gave bushels of flour while the number of hands was reduced ,

from twenty eight to nin -

e .

I n S axony t h mills of the Anglo American type were first adopted

e -

at the end of 1 8 3 8 in two localiti s : in N eumuhle by D resden and in e ,

K loster Miihle in Chemnitz

-
B oth these mills were w o rke d b y water .

whe ls driving mill stone sets

e .

I n the following y ar in Aust ria a splendid mill was started

e ,

in the town of Fium (Croatia ) This mill was situated within a half e .

hour s j ourney fr om th sea I t contained eighteen sets of F rench stones

’
e .
,

4 5 to 5 1 ft in diam ter driv n by three ov rshot water wheels with a total

»
. e ,
e e -

capacity of 9 5 h p I ts capacity was to b c ntn r s of flour from e e e

—
.

the b est kinds of heat B anatka Russian and Rumanian W , , .

I n 1 8 4 0 the plan of construction of a steam driv n mill previously

’

-
e ,

rej ect d was work d out anew and after a short tim one of the best
e ,
e , e

Aust rian mills the lic ns d steam mill in Vi nna was erected
,
e e e , .

Th renowned firm of Co q erille in S eraing nea r Li ege supplied th

e u , , ,
e ,

mill with machinery arranged it supervised the erection of it and took, , ,

th w hole responsibility upon itself

e .

I n 1 84 2 when the mill began working it was quipped with sixteen

, , e

sets for wheat grinding and two for that of corn I n course of time it , .
,

was enlarged to twenty two sets driven by th r e Wolf s st eam ngines -

e
’
-
e ,

of the j oint capacity of 2 00 h p When arranging the mill it was .

,

designed merely for the Anglo Ame rican low grinding which was n o t -

adapted for p r oducin g the s call d I mperial F lour (K aiser mehl ) e -

e
“

which goes to th baking of rolls v r y popular in Vi nna

e ,
e e .

Therefore it soon had to be r const r uct d for semolina grindi ng on e e ,

the F rench system or Mouture é conomi q u to b discussed later in th e,

”
e e

section treating of grists .

I n this manner the stone mill won the battle almost e v erywhere
'

B etween the forties and to the sixties the roller mill struggled in vain ,

against the millstone set improved by a syst m of exhausts and dust ,

e

coll ction
e .

H owe ver at the en d of the six ties the factories of E scher Wyss
, Co , , .
,

n ear Vienna and F Wegmann in Zurich brought out the perfected roll r
,
.
, e

mills which began s u ccessfully to supp lant the ston

,
t in the indus e se

trial fl r mill s ou .
40 FLO UR MI LLI N G [ CH AR II

colourless or sometimes y llowish loos ly built cells I t is v ry thin

, e ,
e . e

and possesses no w ll outlin d characteristics

e -
e .

Th t hi rd envelope C (E n do rp i m ) is composed of cells di sposed at

e ca u

right angles to the axis of th berry While thi s latter is still unripe
e .

the envelope is of a greenish colour wh n quite ripe it becomes colourles s

,
e .

Th se three env lop s may be comparatively easily taken o ff the seed

e e e .

Th fourth
e nvelope D (Testa E p isp erm ) has oblon g cells much
e ,

smaller in size than those of the outer

env lopes e .

The fourth envelope D and the

fifth E (E mbryonic m mbrane ) are e

called envelop s of the berry proper e .

They are both v ry thin adj oin closely e ,

to each other and it is most di ffi cult ,

to detach them one from another .

The sixth envelope F (P eri sperm )

a layer of aleurone and is also ,

call ed the gluten env elope I ts .

volume constitutes one third of the

total volume of all the env elopes I ts .

cells have v r y stout w alls they e

r very hygroscopic and being put a e ,

in water soon become swollen I t .

was formerly supposed that th y con e

t in ed gluten (an endosper mn itrogen a - :

ous substance ) and the envelop was ,

e

therefore called the gluten envelope .

And though the careful analyses made

F IG30
by S h nk and B rucke hav e shown
. .

that these cell s do n o t contain any gluten at all the t rm is still in se

'

,
e u .

The gluten env lope com s int o a close touch with the endosperm
e e -

and the envelopes of the s d prop r I t is therefore possible to take off

ee e .

the three inn er envelopes of th berry wi thout br aking this latter

e e .

The nucl us G (E ndosperm ) that yields flour when broken consists

e ,

of comparativ ly small c lls with thin colourless walls The cells of the
e e ,
.

endosperm are fill d with granules of starch and very small granul es of
e

gluten (cleb er) The n ar r to the centre of nucl us the smaller is the
. e e e

proportion of gluten in the cells The largest quantity of it is contained

.

by th cells that adj oin the sixth envelope of the b rry

e e .

A section through the nucleus is eith r fl o u r whit or has the appear e -

e,
 FLO UR MI LLI NG 41

ance of a glassy somewhat yellowish substanc The colour of the

, e .

n ucleus darkens gradually from the centre towards the outer cells .

The germ H of the berry is firmly attached to the nucleus I ts c lls v

. e

are tin y and very compact and contain much ni trogen min ral salts , , e ,

and fats While the plant is developing the germ is fed on the starch
.

an d the cl eb er of the n ucleus This accounts for the so called germina .

-

tion of the raw grain kept in a warm place .

The en velopes are not as w are going to see of a nutritiv e nature

, e , ,
‘

and m u st therefore be removed before the endosperm is finally reduc d to e

flour Their tOtal weight constitutes from 1 7 6 per cent to 3 0 per cent Of
.
'
. . .

the weight of the berry .

Let us now examine in detail the wheat berry .

P H Y S I CAL S TR U C TU R E OF TH E WH E AT GR AI N

The fun ctio n s of the grain are those of repro du ctiOn hen ce its strue ,
.

ture The grain consists of three distinct parts the germ the endosper m
.
“

, ,

and the bran The germ is the s ed properly speaking for it develops
. e ,

ultimately into the plant The endosperm consists of a starchy sub.

stan ce ; it constitutes the main body of the grain and is destined to supply ,

food to the germ in the early period of its growth The bran consists .

of sev eral separate co v erings which en cl ose both germ and endosperm , ,

and are destined to protect the grain .

The study of the physical structure of the grain requires the use of
the microscope .

F ig 3 1 represen ts a section through the crease of the grain shown in

. ,

elevation b yshadi n g on the left hand side of the sketch The figure has -
.

been obtained by tracing from typical slides and reproduces fairly w ll ,

e

the relativ e dimensio n s of the germ and the endosperm The bran is .

seen to enclose both With the aid of a m icroscope one can see the
.

so called aleurone cells or the square cells of the bran lining the int rior
-
e .

The n ame gluten cells though commonly used is n o t accurate for

“ ”
, , ,

these cells contain n o gluten .

F ig 3 2 shows a cross section through the germ of a Kubanka wheat

.

grain Here we see the pigment containing cells going all round the
.
-

grain and forming in the crease a thick spot of colour The al urone . e

cells of the bran do not continue round the g rm The next figure (3 3 ) e .

repr sents the same section but examined with a higher pow r objectiv e
e ,
e .
42 FL O UR MI LLI NG [CH A R II

It shows more clearly the outer skins of the bran and allows us to ee s

quite di stinctly the squar al uron or c r ali n cells At the bottom ofe e e e e .

the crease they become mor num rous and form a doubl lin The e e e e .

bifurcation of the cr ase is perf ctly distinct The rather large da r k

e e .

yellow spot of pigment cells is plainly seen in the middle of the fork .

The starch granules r also seen a e .

I n order to examine the bran and the endosperm we must sel ct a very e

thin section The bran consists .

of the outer nv elop s of the e e

grain and those of the seed

proper F ig 3 4 shows them all . .

ut l on a longitudinal
C ic
section
e .
.

is the outer pidermis

E p isp erm
iam . a e
lu ll or cuticl I t constitutes a o
A e ro ne ( ’e
.

s .

e .
,

cording to Mege Mo ries u ,

per cent by weight of the whole .

grain and consists of t hi ck ,

walled longitudi nally disposed ,

cells I t is often pierced through .

g ffié h
fi
i
l

fil gugff ll fi
g by hair acting as air con d uct
s at
s -

ing chann els while the grain is a e ro ne ce

f cmn nwncem en t o Gem

A bso rp twe (I: sco re
{t t l u
i ve ep i he i m
P luut lluul t
Sc e
m a shea h
m
.

. rl p em n g .

m f
Th s
.

{ filfléfflfffi
ce o
b Is th e ep I ca rp i
l
.

Ru m en ta ry
fg
i ea ves
‘
t
l' f
ggzz m
l -

amounts to about 1 per c nt e

g
.

g
es o us
mg
en ve o p e e nc 0 8

23g we
» st e r
n of the gra n I t very th n I Is i

R a di c
R oo S hea h t
l e .

t .
and possesses n o well defin ed -

R a di cze Cap .
ch a ra cter1 s trcs .

p erm
endocarp and the
.

G Gem ~

c Is

F IG31 —
.L git di l S ti thr gh Gr i f th last o f the outer series of
. on u na ec on ou a a n o
e
Wh t m g ifi d b t 1 0 Di m t r
ea a n e a ou a e e s
,

the grai n envelopes I t cells

.

. s

are disposed at right angles to the axis of the grain and a ppear to be ,

almost round on the longitu di n al section I ts weight constitutes 1 5 per .

cent of that of the grain

. .

d is the testa th first of the two env elopes of the seed prOp er I t
”
,
e .

is also call ed episperm I t consists of Oblong c lls much smaller in

.
”
e

Size than those of th outer envelopes and contains most of the colouring
e

matter of the grain .

e is the embryonic membrane and the S econd envelope of the seed

r
p pO e r I t
. is very thin and closely adj oins the testa Together they .

constitute 2 per cent of the grain . .

CH AR II ] FLO UR MI LL I NG

f is the lay r of aleurone c lls These c lls appear to b almost

e e . e e

squar in outlin and have v ry stout walls Th y abso rb moi tur

e e e . e s e

easil y and being put in water soon become swollen As already m n

, , .
e

tio n ed they only enclose the e n dosperm and do not envelop t h g r m

, e e .

FI G . 32 .
-
Transv erse S ectio n of Gra i
n of FI G 33
. .
—Vi w e of Crea se in Grain o f W hea t ,

Wh ea t, ma g ifi
n e d 13 Di a m e te s r . a s s ho wn in a Tr an s verse S ectio n .

g is the layer of parenchymatous cellulose which divides the endo ,

sperm into comparatively large cells Thes latter are filled with . e

granules of starch and very small granules of gluten Towards the .

centre of the ndosperm the proportion of glut n becom s smaller

e e e .

FI G 34 -
Lo ngitu din a l r gh S tiec on th ou

—O t r L y r f th Br
. .

Br an and P rti o f E d p rm
on 1 O n os e 0 FI G 35 u e a e o e an o f

Gr f Wh t m g ifi d 4 4 0 Di m t r
. .

a in o ea , a n e a e e s .
Wh t m g ifi d 2 5 0 Di m t r
ea ,
a n e a e e s .

is the hilum of an individual starch granule

h .

Th nv lopes must be also examined on th flat They can be

e e e
”
e .

d tach d asily nough ff th body of th grain in thre layers (1 ) pi

e e e e o e e e ,
e
44 FL OUR MI LL I NG mm .11
dermis and epicarp (2 ) ndocarp and episperm and (3 ) the inner skin ,
e ,

whi ch contains the cerealin c ll s Fig 3 5 shows the structure of the e . .

outer layer I ts cells are ar r anged longitudinally in th dir ction of

. e e

the grain and are four to six times larg r in length than in b r adth e e .

Fig 3 6 represents the hairs of the beard at th end of the grain W

. e . e

can see on th section its lf how they are attach d to the skin ; th
e e e e

mount also shows canals ex

tending about half the length
of the hair F ig 3 7 shows the . .

structure of t h s cond layer e e .

We e that it consists of two se

lay rs one over the oth r which e e

F 36 B rd f Gr i f Wh t
IG ea o a n o ea
, ,

are not both in focus at the

-
.
. .

same time The upper layer consists of a seri s of long c lls often
.
e e

termed girdl cells and arrang d transversely to the longitudin al

e ,
e

section of the grain as shown on F ig 3 4 (marked c) On this they seem ,

. .

to be almost round Underneath the girdl e cells are the pigment .

containing cells .

Fig 3 8 shows the al urone or cerealin cells of the bran to be of an

. e

F1 G . 37 —Midd1f L y r 3 a e Br a n Of
FI G 3 8 —I r r Al r L y r f th
nn e o eu o ne a e o e
Wh g fi d 2 5 0 13
. .

f Wh t m g ifi d 44 0 Di m t r
ma
e a t, ni e 1 2 111 9 13 “
Bran o ea ,
a n e a e e s .

irregul ar outline though when vi wed on section either longitudinal or

, e ,

transv erse they appear to be square or rectangular and are ther fore
, ,
e

o ften termed cubical .

Let us now compare the longitudi nal section through th bran of e

wheat as S hown on Fig 3 4 W ith its transversal section shown on Fig 3 9

,
.
, . .
 F LOUR MI LLI NG 45

Though the latter section w as not so good as the longitudinal th , e

drawing shows clearly enough the general structure of th bran The e .

c ells of the middl e S kin appear to be of considerable l ngth wh n w

;
e e e

see them on the flat When we look on them l ngthwise we must of

. e , ,

course notice the ends of the c lls of the outer skin The aleurone
,
e .

cell s appear more irregular in outline on the transversal section than on

the lo n gitu di nal The study of .

t hese drawings must of course , ,

be followed by an examination
of the actual slides under the
microscope
“

Th bran of the wheat berry

e

is chiefly composed of cellulose

or woody fibre a n d o f 5 0 111 F 3 9 —Tr r S ti t hr g h Br f IG
. . an sve s e ec on ou an o

Wh t m g ifi d 2 5 0 Di m t r ea a n e a e e s'
ble albuminous matter When .
’

treated with hot dilute solutions of acid and alkali it yields cellulose in a
fairly pure state The following is the way to obtain cellulose for the
.

p urpose of microscopic study : pieces of the di fferent layers of bran are

put in separate test tubes an d subjected for a n ho ur to the action of dilute
-

FI G 4 0 —C e llu lo s e o f O u ter S kin of FI G . 41 .

—
C lle Middl Ski
u lo se o f e n of

Br g ifi d 2 5 0 D m t r
. .

Br an , ma g ifi d 2 5 0 Di
n e a m ete sr .
an , ma n e ia e e s .

sulphuric acid .
Then t hi s latter is poured o ff and substituted by caustic

water are u sed , an d the resulting il

cel l i o s e can be mou nted on glass
slides .
 46 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C H A R II

F igs and 4 3 show resp ctively the cellulose of th outer

. 40, 4 1 , 42 , e e ,

middle and aleu r one layers of bran as viewed under th micro cope
, e s .

The structure of the first and second pieces of c llulos does not di ffer e e

much from the structure of the original layer of skin Th first appears . e

to be almost transparent and in the second the und r lying pigment ,

e

cells are partly stripped o ff The al urone layer changes considerably . e

in appearance when treated with alk ali for it contains a large quantity
, ,

of protein mat ter F ig 4 2 shows a pi ce of this layer in which the

. . e ,

greatest pa r t of protein has been removed by the action of th caustic e

soda F ig 4 3 shows another specimen in which there remains almost

. .
,

no protein at all .

The outer layer of wheat bran is thus largely composed of cellulose

'

FI G
.
—C ll l
42 . f Al r e L yr f
u o se o eu o ne a e o FI G . 43 .
—C lle r Lyr
u l o se of Al eu o ne a e

Br with P rti
an, f Pr t i r o on o o e n e of B n with ra ,
ly t h lig ht t Tr
on e s es ace

m i i g m g ifi d 4 4 0 Di m t r
a n n , a n e a e e s . of Pr t i til l r m i i g i
o e n s me f a n n n so e o

th C ll
e m g ifi d 4 4 0 Di m t r
e s, a n e a e e s .

and cannot therefore be used for human food The middl layer
, , . e

contains less cellulose but a larger quantity of colouri ng matt r , e .

Th inner contains but a very small proportion of cellulose and

e

large quantities of protein This latter is inj uri ous to the flour .
,

for it exerts a strong action on brok n starch gran l es N one e u .

of the three must be therefore admitte d as a part component of

the flour .

I f separated from the bran and subj ected to acid and alkali treat
ment the endosperm yi lds traces of cellulose I t is most in structiv
,
e . e

to subject to the same treatment several di fferent v arieties o f flo u r .

48 F LOUR MI LLI N G [ C H AR 11

TAB LE I I
AV E R AG E S OF D E TAI L E D A NA L Y S E S OF CE R E A L S

NUMB E R OF A NALYS ES .

Fa t
S t ar ch
l
Cel u lo se
u
S ga r &c .

D e tr n a n d s o lu b le st a r ch
,

x i
P i
ro teins nso l ble I n 80 p ercent u . a lc o ho l
P i
r ote ns so lu b le I n 80 p er cent . a lco h o l

i
M neral m atter
Mo isture

T o ta l
R ati o of pr o te ms t o ca rb oh
ydra t e s —
4 8 —
7 6 —
6 5

till later Hutchinson represente d the gen eral compositio n of the

S
cereals in the following table

TAB L E III

g l ts ’
CONS TI TUE NTS
l Maize
’
B arl ey
R l er i
. . .

1
l 7 °

8 l °

5 4 23 2 0 22
71 2 69 5 686 68 9
22 3 8 13 2 0 1 O °
2 9
10 2 72 lO2
°

15 2 1 l 0 °

22 22
12 0 12 3 12 5 11 0 12 0 123 13 0

Ana lyses o f W hea ts f tables

ro m on pp —
50 5 4 D ifferen t Cou n tries —The .

are the results Of a series of analyses made by W Jago The first eighteen . .

were made in 1 884 on specimens of E nglish wheat of the 1 883 and 1 8 84

harv ests and still represent fairly well the general composition and
,

character of E ngli sh wheats

—
.

N os 1 1 8 are samples o f 1 8 8 3 wheats except where other wise men

.
,

tio n ed The figures of moisture of solub le extracts and protein s are

.
,

rather high while those of gluten are lower than in foreign wheats
, .

The Revitts yi elded exc edingly small traces of gluten so small that it
e ,

was pra ctically impossible to recover t hem from the bran ,

CHAR II ] FLO UR MI LLI NG 49

—
N os 1 9 2 7 are all 1 88 3 samples of wheats used by the mille r s of the
.

south of E ngland N os 1 9 and 2 0 are samples of the sam e va riety b u t

. .

grown in differ ent locali ti e s N o 2 1 is a sample damaged during g r ow th . .

.

N os 2 8 3 8 a re fine quality samples of the south and w e st ern counties

.

all of the harv st of 1 8 8 4 e .

I f compar d to thos of 1 88 3 th figu r es of moisture soluble xtract

e e e , e ,

and solubl prot ins are rather low Th av rag of th glut ns

e e . e e e e e

is also lower I n the 1 88 3 s ries N o 1 8 a S cotch w st count ry

. e .
, e -

specimen yi lded the lowes t perc ntage of gluten

,
e and the high st e , e .

of moistur S imila r ly N o 3 8 of t h 1 8 84 se r i s g r own in a

e, , . e e ,

damp climat S outh D evon yi l ds pe,r cent of glut n and ,

e e . e

per cent of moisture . .

S ince 1 8 8 4 several n w va r i ties of wheat have b en introduced in e e e

E ngland Among thes two vari ti s Tivers o n s and Webb s ’ “ ’

e, e e ,

S tand u p-
are larg ly cultivated now F rench wh ats and the Hard
,
e . e

F ife are also grown to some extent .

Th for ign wheats pres nt of co u rse greater number of varieties '

e e e , ,
a

than t he E nglish A comparison between th moistures and the gluten s

. e

of wh ats and the flours produc d from them is most instructive

e e .

Russian wheats yi ld generally a higher perc entage of gluten than the

e

American The I ndian ar as a rule rath r poor both in gluten and in

. e, ,
e ,

moist ure They appear to b almost sandy When wo rked up with

. e .

water and only aft r long conditioning th y acquir the charac

,
e
“
,
”
e e

t ristic ductility of W heaten flours

e The P r sian wh ats contain more . e e

gluten than the I ndian especially th cl an P r sian N o 6 8 ,

e e e ,
. .

N o 7 8 comes from Winona

. and s rves to mak flou r s N os 8 ,
e e .

and 9 Th upper set of gluten estimations was obtain d aft r th

. e e e e

dough had stood for two hour s The wheat itself and the flours pro . ,

d ed frOm i t absorb water extr mely slowly

uc N o 80 comes from e . .

Manitoba The comparatively high perc ntage of moistur

. soluble e e,

extract and p r oteins are characteristic of the cold climat

,
e .

Th sourc s of B ritish supply h ave greatly chang d sinc the tim

e e e e e

when th s analyses w r made London g ets now almost non of th

e e e e .
e e

United S tates spring wheats The D uluth wh ats hav be n larg ly .

e e e e

substitut d by th Manitoba D urum wheat is imported from th

e e .
e

United S tates in considerable quantities The winter Americans ar e .

’

known as R d Wint r and H ard Winter Th Russian wh ats known as

e e . e e

S a x o n ka and K ubanka have also almost disapp ar d from th London e e e

mark t being substituted by s veral oth r varieti ( hi rka Asima

e ,
s C n d e e e , ,
a

oth r )
e s .
56 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR 11

a n alysed durum wheat a n d i n vestigated its properties Also comparative .

an alyses of K uban ka o n of the best R ussian durum wheats a n d Min

,
e ,

mesota o n e of the best American bread wheats have bee n carried out n d
, ,
a

tabul ated together with the mean of Ameri can wheats (by the Bureau ‘

of Chemistry of the D ep artmen t of Agriculture ,

BL E
TA V III

C ONS TI TUL NI '

S
Ku b a n k a D u ru m Minneso ta B re ad
W h eat W h ea t
.

. .

Watr e

Mi r l m tt r
ne a a e

Fat
Cru de fi bre
ru
C de p o e r t in N x

Ca rb o hydra t th rth
es o e r
a n c u de fi bre

S u gar
D ex tri n
v rt u r
I n e s ga ,
so l ubl t r e s a ch

Th e perce n tage of sugar n d of dextri n is remarkab ly high Accord a .

»

in g to S to n e ordi n ary wheats co n tai n

,
to per cen t of dextri n . ,

The flour obtai n ed from durum wheat is estimated to co n tai n 1 to 2 per

cen t of sucrose while the ordi n ary samp les an alysed by S to n e o nly gave
.
,

to per ce n t .

Th eAmerica n durum wheat co n tai n s more protei n tha n that o ri gi n

ally import ed Cal culation s o n a water free basis have g ven the
.
-
i

followi n g results

TA BL E IX

The harvest of 1 9 0 2 was rather bad .

Th e durum flour has a deep yell ow ti n t that shows yellow + ,

oran ge o n the L o vib o n d tin tometer scale The col ouri n g substan ce is .
,

i n solub le in di stilled water but an be dissolv ed in ether alcohol and

,
c , ,
CH A P . II ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 57

dilut e alkalies From the l ater so l utio n s it may be di scharged by acids

.

This accou n ts probab ly for th e fact that flour is stai n e d yellow by the
additio n of sodium carbo n ate .

A series of determi n atio n s made o n durum flours gave the fo llowi n g

n l l —
figures (the g iadi s were ca cu ated o n a water free basis )
l

ru
C de p o e n rti per c en t
t
.

W et glu en
Dry glu en t
Gl a d ni i
i i
Gl ad n o f o a l p tt r t in
o e 47 1 7
°

Th e perce n tage of g lute n run s very high as w ell as that of sugar An d

, .

yet the flour possesses but littl e elasticity n d very poor adhesive qualities
a
,

properties that are usually ascribed to l ack of gliadin Bread made .

wi th the poorer durum flours rises n either dur n g the fermen tatio n n o r i ,

in the ove n
.

Th e baker s spo n gi n g test shows that good duru mflours have as high
’

a vo lume as the bread wheat flours B t durum flour becomes more . u

sticky than these l atter ; whe n the doughs are somewh at sti ff they do
n o t rise properl y a n d the bread obtain ed is heavy
,
n d poor of texture a .

Yet whe n water is use d in sufficie n t qua n tity the vo l ume weight
, ,
nd , ,
a

texture of duru m breads are n o t below those prepared with ordin ary
wheat flours .
 CH AP TE R I I I

P R E P ARATI ON OF GRAI N F OR GRI NDI NG

I MP U R I TI E S AN D TH E P RI NC I P L E S OF CL E AN I N G

AS we have already seen in the gen eral review of the grain the ,

impurity of the stock is due to the character of the productio n An .

admixt re of seed of other p lan ts is u n avoidab l e eve n when the culture

u

of the cereal s is most careful The separatio n of the seeds of foreign

.

p lan ts from the grain although performed o n the l arger farms is n o t

, ,

satisfactory the grai n bein g usuall y prepared for sowi n g an d n o t for sal e
, .

The grai n of the l arge ratio n ally worked farms is comparatively c l ean ;
that o f the R ussian peasan try a n d small farms o n the other han d some , ,

times con tai n s up to 6 per cen t of impurities . .

I n additio n to the seeds of foreig n p l an ts the grai n s of bad quality of ,

the corn itself bel on g to the impurities Those are mainly the s o call ed .
-

shri v elled kern el s un ripe at the time of harv esti n g an d dried to light
,

meagre grain s or those appertainin g to harvests caught by drought an d

,

admixed to the n ormal grai n Kern el s of corn stricken by some di sease

.
,

e g smut are a l so of this group

. .
, .

Assumi n g the corn to be grou n d at the mi ll is wheat the kern el s of ,

other cereal s such as rye barl ey oats & c are to be added to the
, , , , .
,

n umber of foreig n matters

B esides bei n g imp re through admixtures of v egetab l e origi n the

u ,

grain acquires impurities of organ ic n d min eral substan ces an d particles a ,

of metals The method of productio n storage a n d tran sportatio n of corn

.
, ,

make the admixture of partic les of straw empty cobs ston es dust n d , , , a

dirt that co v er the grai n s small sto n es an d l umps of earth i n evitabl e

, , .

An d the n duri n g the threshin g n d c l ean i n g of grai n o n the farm more or

a

less ofte n n ai l s woodscrews n uts

, n d other metal parts of machin ery
, ,
a

fall i n to it .

All mpur ties may be c l assified in three groups

i i

()
1 P ois o n o u s admixtures that may bri n
g about an em p oiso n m e n t ,

58
 F LOU R MI LLI NG 59

no t to men tio n the deterioration of the qualities of flour (its colour n d a

bakin g qualities ) ergot cockle smut & pertain to this cl ass , , , c .

, .

( ) mpurities reduc in g the quality of flour Here we fi n d the seeds

2 I .

o f n o n poiso n ous p l an ts dust a n d dirt

-

, , .

( ) mpurities that may do some damage to the machi n ery e g rapi d

3 I , . .

wear in g out of sieves breakage of parts of the machi n ery & c S to n es

, , .

a n d pieces of metal form this group .

No w if the mi ll is to yiel d a who l esome product of good quality n d

, , a

the milli n g mach in ery is to be set in n ormal workin g con di tion the grain ,

sho ul d be freed of all this foreign matter .

Th e m p rities we have bee n examin i n g usually differ from the sou n d

1 u

product by o n e or severa l token s co n j oin tly of the following categories

, ,

()
1 size , (2 ) specific gravit y ()
8 shape ()
4 n atura l pecu l iarity of the ad , ,

mixture Th e machin e design ed for the extractio n of foreign bodies

'

.
,

out of the grain is co n structed in accordan ce with the particular man n er

,

in which the impurities di ffer from th e main product

-
Thus four types .

of machin ery each takin g adv a n tage of the peculiar di fferen ces of the
,

admixtures have bee n evo l ved B t often the separatio n of the grain
,
. u ,

a n d the extran eous bo di es di fferi n g from it in size nd specific gravity a ,

is combin ed in o n e machi n e .

E XTR ACTI ON or P I E CE S or ME TAL F R OM TH E S TOC K

—
Ma gn etic S epa ra to rs B efore feedi n g the grai n i n to a machin e a l l
pieces of metal that might damage t he workin g parts of the machin e
, ,
,

must be extracted These pieces bein g exclusively of iro n or steel their

. ,

extractio n is based o n the property of the magn et to attract an d detain

both m etals .

A mag n etic apparatus adapted for that purpose is shown in its

simp lest form in Fig 4 4 I t con sists of two cast iro n frames 0 between
. . ,

whi ch a cast iro n box D is p l aced The frames an d the box are bolted
-
.

together I n the box s set a row of mag n ets their pol es a an d 6 comin g
. 1 ,

pol es at a n d b are disconn ected by an i n sol ated in terlayer On the .

p lan k E is p l aced a cast iro n or timber feed hopper A with a gate B -

-

by the liftin g a n d droppin g of which the flow of grain may be regulated .

The gra in is poured in as sh ci n by the ar r

°

ow S an d fallin g through the ,

lower cre v i ce betwee n the gate B a d t

n h e ma gn et tab l e E (arrow S ) ,
 60 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ CH AR m
l eaves the iro n a n d steel pieces o n the magn et li n e F ro m time to time .

these admixtures are removed by han d .

This is the most simp l e apparatus though sometimes a sti p ai er

, ll l n
l
app ia ce is used H orseshoe mag n ets of the commo n kin d are in
n .

i to correspo n di n g spouts do w n w hich the grain passes Usua lly

s erte d n
.

ho e the spout (Fig

l in .At i n terva ls the stopper is take n out a n d ,

the metal partic les attracte d by the magn ets removed .

Th remova l of the partic l es detai n ed by the mag n et o ers some

e
ff

other machin es There

on .

fore an other type of m a g

n etic apparat s removi n g the u ,

iron partic les automatically is ,

in use S uch a n apparatus

.
,

from H owes factory in ’

America is represen ted in

,

Fig 4 6 Th w h l e apparatus
. . e o

is of timber The arran gemen t .

of the magn et is the same

F IG46 . .
as in the simp l e apparatus .

B t here cast iro n scrapers r

u -

set o n a n en d less belt (other factories make a chain geari n g ) pass over -

th mag n et surface
e . These scrapers catch up the iro n partic les stuck
to the magn ets an d throw them in to the bucket E Th belt is driven . e

by a pulley t the ax le of which passin g through the feed hopper

,
,
-

commu icates the rotatio n to the belt pulley n with the aid of a bev el
n

geari g k B y mean s of gears S —S

n .
n the left han d side of the
,
o -

apparatus a feed ro ll in the hopper is brought i n to p lay The taper

, .

of the h Opp er gate is reg lated by screw n uts b—b thus alteri n g the
u
,
CHAP . m] FLOU R MI LL I NG 61

feed open in g bet ween the roll a n d the gate The belt R is tighte n ed ‘

a n d l oose n ed b y s cre w —
.

n uts g— g .

Th e n umber of re v o l utio n s the be lt of such n apparatus performs per a

min ute is between 1 5 an d 2 5 its capacity 9 to 1 6 5 to n s per hour accord ,

,

in g to the size of the apparatus On e of the defects of this apparatus

'

that the scrapers carry some grain away a n d i n terrupt its eve n flow .

Besides the magn etic apparatus j ust examin ed there are other ,

apparatus with a revo lvin g workin g mag n et n d with n electro ,

a a

magn et but those of the latter kin d are rather comp licated in co n strue
,
’

tio n an d are seldom used in mills si n ce the simp le apparatus works

, ,

satisfactori ly .

Th e capacity of the simp l e mag n et apparatus varies betwee n 3 5 cwt .

a n d 4 5 to n s depe n di n g o n its size

, .

A mag n etic separator with rev o lv

in g mag n ets is sho w n in Fig 4 7 . .

The mag n ets are e n c l osed in

the cylin der A w ith a worm wheel -

E which coup l es with the worm D

fixed o n the ax le of the belt pulleys -

( l oose a n d fast ) T Th e flat sur .

F 47 IG
face o f the cylin der co n tain in g the
. .

mag n et B coin cides with the surface of the spout where a hole corre ,

s o n din
p g in size with the area of the worki n g surface of the mag n et is .

cut Th product flowin g al on g the s pout the iro n p artic les stick to the
. e
.
,
'

mag n ets which are then scraped o ff with bar F n d fall out through
,
a

the chann el a A lin k mechan ism 0 serves for settin g the mag n et
. .

S EP AR ATI ON or L AR G E AND S MAL L I MP U R I TI E S

1 . S ep a ra tio n a cco rdin g to S ize

S ifting — P re v ious l y to the further c lea n in g of grai n a product has

. ,

to be obtai n ed of a n approximately equal size i e a product of which ,

. .

all the measureme n ts wou l d be correspo n din g ly equal Th workin g . e

surfaces servi n g to that purpose are the sieves .

As show n i n i
F g there are sieves .either of wove n iro n stee l , ,

copper or bro n ze wire or of a perforated sheet of metal,

.

W he n a mass of corn passes over s u ch a sifti n g surface the separate ,

grain s will fall through the sieve whe n the meshes are s lightly larger than
62 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AP P I I I

the grain s . Th e l arger

matter rolls ff the sieve I n this man n er the o .

thro u gh s supp ly the grai n while the o vert ils co n sist of the l arger
,
a

impurities .

Th e removal of the small er impurities is attai n ed by rocki n g the

grain o n a sieve of which the meshes are small er than the small est grain s .

I n this case the grai n tail s over n d the small matter dresses through ,
a .

B efore passi n g n to the co n structio n of the machi n es separatin g the

o

impure matter frOm the grai n by siftin g the sizes of the meshes a n d ,

the n umeratio n of c loths have to be exp l ai n ed .

Th sizes of the square meshes in wire sieves are defi n ed by the n umber
e

of c l oth which in its turn is defin ed accordin g to the n umber of wire

, ,

threads to the lin ear i n ch I f the n umber of the sieve is 6 the n umber
. ,

FI G . 48 .

of threads is 6 formin g 3 6 meshes to a square i n ch No 4 0 correspon ds

,
. .

to 4 0 threads an d 1 6 00 meshes & c I t is to be n oted however that , .

‘

, ,

the re ko m n g 1 s made in E n glish in ches 2 5 mm (in E n gl an d a n d in

c , .

America ) V ie n n ese i n ches 2 6 mm (in Austria H u n gary a n d Ger m

, ,
an y ) .
, , ,

an d Fre n ch i n ches 2 7 mm (in F ran ce ) This must be kept in view

, . .
,

when sel ectin g fin sieves No 4 2 a n d upwards from various fac tories

e , .
“

, .

B esides that the thickn ess of w ire p l ays a promin en t part in the
‘

defin ition of the size of the c l oth meshes Gen erally S peakin g the -
.
,

diameter of the wire varies betwee n 2 % a n d 0 1 mm W ithi n the bou n ds .

of No s : 1 a n d 8 the di ameter of the wire does n o t v ary (in No 8 it is .

0 5 to mm ) outside of that limit it may differ Fo r this reaso n

. .

the den sity of the cl oth is greater or small er which is reflected in the ,

n umber of the c l oth though the meshes be of the same size F o r

,
.

i n stan ce No 1 6 a c loth of greater den sity correspo n ds to the fin er

,
.
, , ,

N 2 0 th meshes of the two c l oths bei ng equal but those of N 2 0

o .
,
e ,
o .
64 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ C HA R III

The sieve in th ld German mill (Fig 2 8 G) may be regarded as the

e o .
,

most pr imitively co n structed machi n e of the first type that n be used ca

for grain clean in g S ieves of that kin d are set at a sli ght an gl e to the
.

horizo n tal p l an e W hen the sieve frame moves in a l o n gitudi n al reci

.
-

p r oac l directio n the

,
grai n is disp l aced by force of i n ertia the moveme n t ,

of the sieve bei n g straight parallel to the axis of oscillatio n W he n

,
.

the sieve moves crossways ,

the grai n travel s in a zigzag

li n e .

A compariso n of the tw o
methods of movi ng the pro
duct over the sieve persuades
us that the seco n d is prefer
ab l e as travellin g in a zigzag ,

way the stock remain s o n

the workin g surface a l on ger
while n d the separation is ,
a
F 49 IG
.

more perfect
.

B lt r f No rdyk 0 Ma rm n Co —Th E clipse bolter

.

E clip se o e o e ( o . e
“

of the American factory of Nordyke 85 Marmo n Co (Fig 4 9 ) presen ts a . .

simp le a n d origin al co n structio n of a sieve with l on gitudi n al oscil latio n s .

A woode n box D has at its upper nd a receivi n g h Opp er A Tw o sieve

e .

trays B are fixed in the box The frame is set o n four U shaped sprin gs a
.
-

a n d is osci ll ated by a co n n ecti n g rod Commu n icati n g with the cra n k

rod of the drivi n g shaft C are the .

spouts deliverin g the product a n d

small impurities The o V ert ils of
. a

the upper siev e is the l arge refuse .

Th e n umber of revo l utio n s is 4 5 0 per

mi n ute the capacity of the machi n e
,

F 50
6 to 1 8 cwt per hour
IG . .

. .

R eel sepa r t r —Machi n es extractin g foreig n matter by bo lti n g but

-

a o s .
,

with their workin g surfaces revolvin g are called reel separators I t has ,
-

already been men tio n ed that they are a n American i n ven tio n n d the ,
a

simp lest form o f th t machin e was examin ed o n p 2 5 Fig 2 6 The

'

a .
, . .

fun damen tal prin cip l e of its co n structio n is the same to day Besides -

the use of the roun d reel separator practical flour millin g has i n troduced
-

hexagon al reel s in to the i n dust ry by reaso n of their sim p le co n strue ,

tio n n d cheap n ess

a .

—
A reel separator of the most simp l e ki n d (Fig 5 0 ) is ge n era lly a timber .
CHA R m l FLOU R MI LLI NG 65

hexago she n to 3 5 0 0 mm lon g its diagon al measuremen ts

ll A , 1 2 50 .
,
~

3 5 0 to 1 0 0 0 mm covered with bo ltin g cloth n d p l aced in a timber

.
, a

chamber B its axis in clin ed at n an gle of

, to 0 1 to the horizon a .

The reel shaft is moun ted o n beari n gs p outside the chamber

-

The grain , .

flows to the reel separators through a spout N n d o n this side the separa
-

,
a

tor is sheltered by a lid H revolvin g with the reel separators con joi ntly -

A roun d cover G w ith a n aperture E for the passage of grai n is fixed to

,
-

, ,

the i n terior wall of the chamber an d is statio n ary BetweenH n d G . a

there is a small c learan ce besides n Open in g w ith a cl earan ce in G for the

, a

reel shaft Th right n d Of the reel separators remain s Open I n the

. e e -

sides Of the chamber there are apertures for i n spectio n c losed with solid ,

timber gates or frames c l othed with lin en Th reel separator is operated . e -

by a bevel gearin g C a n d the worm co n v eyor S by a belt (sometimes

’
,

—
geared ) driv e o n belt pulleys D D The head of the reel separator (the 1
.
-

in let Of the product ) is gen erally clothed with o n e two or three n m , , u

bers for sifti n g the small matter the tail part (outlet of the product ) ,

with c loths with l arger meshes for the discharge Of the grain The work .

is perfor med in the follo w in g man n er the grain is fed through N in to

the rotatin g reel — separator w hich being i n clin ed it travel s in a zigzag
, ,

li n e towards t The small impurities passi n g to the l o w er part of chamber

.
,

B are discharged by the worm S through the open in g

,
Th grai n flo w s a . e

in to the co n v eyor bo x E n d run s out i n to I) wh il e the large impurities

,
a ,

f ll out as refuse through the ope n i n g

a (3 .

A p l ai n er reel has n o co n veyor n d the l ower part of the chamber is

'

,
a

divided in to hoppers (outlin ed in dots ) deliverin g the small impurities

through open i ngs nd a a a
2
.

Figs 5 1 (l o n gitudin al sectio n ) a n d 5 2 (cross sectio n ) represe n t a

.

reel separator co n structed Of met al (cast iron frame n d iron hOpp r )

-

~
-
a e s

by Thomas R obin so n 85 S o n R ochda le E n gl an d NO co n veyor is , ,

.

adopted here the dust san d & c small impurities fallin g automatically
, ,
.
,

out Of the first co n ical hopper the grain out of the secon d while the large , ,

refuse passes out the same way as in the precedin g reel separator -
.

Th e simp lest ki n d Of a rou n d reel separator with a timber frame a n d -

boxes is shown in Fig 5 3 Th reel is c lothed with three cloths Of e

various n umbers Tw o sect ion s A—

. .

A for small refuse san d n d dust -

,
a ,

—
.
, ,

are c lothed with No 1 4 ; two other sectio n s B B for larger matter a n d , ,

—
.

very small grain hav e No s 1 0 to 1 2 ; the l ast two section s 0 0 for the
,
. , ,

passage of grain No s 5 to 6 The l arge impurities tail o v er Th

,
. .
. e

product moves in the directio n i n dicated by the arrow Th hopper D . e

receives the small impurities E the medium n d F the pure grain Th , ,

a . e

E
 FLO UR MILLI NG
"

66 [ OHA P . II I

doors are rem ovabl e from the side wall s Of the reel chamber ; o n e of them
-

G is sho w n in the drawi n g

,
The cyl i n drical reel separator ge n erally o n
.
-
c

sists Of two semi cylin ders so as to afford the possibility Of their cl othin g
-

, .

S ometimes the c l othi n g used for re el separators is Of perforated sheet

-

iron w ith roun d or rectan gular holes The reel sep arator in Fig 5 4 is
.
-
.

furn ished with three sieves Of which A has rectan gul ar a n d roun d ho les
, ,

B o n ly roun d n d C o nly rectan gu l ar The product is fed as in di cated by

,
a .

arrow S I n section A the thro ghs are small impurities a n d l on g but

. u ,

thi n seeds (of c ats rye shrivelled grai n s in wheat c lean in g ) sectio n B
, ,
CH AR In ] FLOU R MILLI NG 67

gives o n ly the small refuse as thro u ghs n d the clean grain is sifted through
,
a
.

in sectio n C Th e l arger refuse co n stitutes the o verta ils

.
I n this way .
,

in the firs t part Of this reel separator impurities di fferin g in size as w ell
-

as in shape (oats wild oats rye ) are sep arated away An other type of
, , .

machin e howev er for sortin g the gra n accordin g to shape remain s to be

, ,
i

n oted Therefore the use of reel separators supp lied with these covers
.
-

is expedien t o n ly where a simp lificatio n of the grain clean i n g pro -

cess is u n avoidab l e from co n sideratio n s Of econ omy n d the grain ,

a

c leanin g departmen t is depriv ed Of machin ery sortin g the grain according

to shape .

H owe v er a n out li n e may be gi v e n of the modern type Of reel separa

,
-

FI G 5 3
. .

FI G 54
. .

tors which are main ly used o n mill s for separati g the arge n sma l an d ll
,

grain though al so capab l e Of sortin g the seeds of other p a ts away

,
l n

from the chief bulk Of product to be mill ed F g represe ts a cy i dr ca

i 5 5 n . .
l n i l
”
grader reel from the factory formerly k n ow n as Bros S k n . ee ,
I

D resde n T he product is fed i n to the receivi g spout fa s to the

n n d ll n
,
a I
.

meshes e s ev e
o

(T h
reel covered with a boltin g cl oth with recta gu ar
,
n l .
1

n ext to c l oth A is removed ) T h e meshes

.
of the sie v e A may be the same
h l 1
throughout the who l e l en gth Of the reel I n that case the .
t h r o u g W s i

l I f l
be the small grain an d the l arge grai wi remai as
n ll n o v ert ha f al s .

of the reel separator is cl othed with meshes for rye d oats (whe wheat
"

a n n
-

T h en t h
is seco n d half must carry meshes for sma wheatll .
e

box con tai ni n g the co n veyor C will have two discharge spouts Z nd Z , 1
a 2
.
es FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CR AF Tm
Th epecu arity of this ree separator co n sists in its bei n g furn ished with
li l -

brushes B of iro n wire These brushes rev olv e a n d bein g press ed agai ns t the
.
,

cover of the reel c lear the meshes of the grai n s stuck in them The reel
,
i
.

chamber is of timber n d its p rt o f metal T are timber doors (o n e

,
a a s .

is Off) K n d X are li ds for , a

1

the i n spectio n Of the w orm .

The ree l separator is d rive n -

by a beve l geari n g n d the , ,

a

worm by mean s of a belt drive -

n pu ll eys b nd o a a .

V ibro m o to r -

P la n sifters .

small capacity of the The '

reel a n d the d trim en t l effect

'

, e a

F m 55 .
of the i n ertia Of the mass Of
.

machi n ery with flat bo ltin g

trays reciprocati n g compelled bui lders to desig n a type f machin e
, O

supp lied w ith flat sieves The first machi n e Of that style was di s .
'

p l ayed at the Un iversal E xhibitio n in V ie n n a 1 8 7 3 by a miller , ,

from P falz Joha n n P fo lt

,
The pri n cip l e Of operatio n in this machi n e
z .
1
,

which afforded K H ggen m ch r later a basis for the fl at bolter in

. a a e -

v e n ted by him in 1 8 88 is th e ,

followi n g a flat sieve s (Fig 5 6 ) .

is suspen ded from the ceilin g b y

mean s Of four rods a b c n d l , , , ,
a c ,

a n d is co n n ected with a rotati n g

cran k shaft A The product .

falli n g o n the tray is bo lted whi le ,

trav ellin g in a gyratory lin e .

A progressive disp l aci n g Of the

product is attai n ed by a n n l

c li n tio n of the tray w hich is the

a ,

method adopted by the firm Of

G Luther in their aspirators Of
.
F 56 IG

l atest type or by mean s Of guidi n g scrapers as suggested by Ha ggen m a cher

,

in his flat bo l ter I f a horizo n tal flat bo l ti n g frame is divided by cross

.
-

partitio n s 1 2 3 , ,
as shown in Fig 5 7 the product wi ll travel pro
, .
,

g r essiv el
y as i n di cated by the arrow r the partitio n s stoppi n g it ha l f way ,
-

a n d prope lli n g it to ru n a n other circ l e W ere the frame n o t furn ished with .

1
I n 1 87 8 ano t h er in ven to r, P ieter va n G elder , p a ten ted a fl at b o l te r in E n g la n d, b a sed o n

the sa m e p rin cip le .

 F LOUR MI LLI NG 69

partitio s the product would describe full circ les as shown in 0

n ,
,

remai n n g always o n o n e a n d the same spot

i
.

Fl at grai n bo lters of the H a h e r type

gg e n
-

m are bui lt at the a c

E n glish works of Thos R obi n so n (R ochdal e co n structio n o f

) Th .
. e

machin ery with flat sieves will 3 J

‘
4 3
be examin ed later “

The co n struction Of the

machin ery we have become
a cquain ted wi th e n ab l es us to
F
extract the large a n d small 57 IG . .

impurities a n d sort the grai n in respect to its size which is Of ,

great importan ce to the further cl ean in g processes to be co n sidered ,

l ater
. Therefore it fo llo ws out of the very idea of c lean i n g that the ,

positio n s a n d n umbers Of sieves must be as shown below (E nglish

n otatio n ) .

Ta ilin g o ver o f larg e

im p u rit ies .

t T h ro u hs
g J, T h ro u
g h s (l, Th ro u hs
g (I
,

S m a ll Me diu m S m al l No rm a l
im p u rit ie s im p u rit ie s .
g ra i n .
g ra i n . .

In this way first of a ll o n covers No 1 4 a n d 1 2 small impurities

,
s .
, ,

san d an d dust are sifted through ; o n cover N 8 or 1 0 small grain ;

,
O .
,

on c l oth NO 5 or 6 the n ormal grain the large impurities being

.
, ,

tailed o v er .

I f the grai n co n tai n s a l arge amou n t Of imp u rities (sto n es p artic u

larly ) to save the covers No s 1 4 1 2 a n d 8 1 0 from the wear n d tear

, .
, ,
a ,

a separate reel separator may be fitted up for separatin g the large refuse
-

an d a n other for c l ea n i n g the grai n Of sma ll impurities n d sorti n g it a .

Then the scheme of c l ean i n g is

Larg e re f u se tail e d o ve r .

Gra in

is cha rg e o f n o rm a l
g ra in .

im p u ri tie s , im p u ritie s , g rai n

70 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR III

Both the schemes refer to grain c lean in g o n reel separators The -

.

system of c lean i n g o n sie ve separators n d the order Of the n umbers -

,
a ,

will be exami n ed later .

ii
( ) . The Q u a li ty a n d the u a n tity o
Q f the W o rk o f S ieve -
Bo lters
Let us n o w compare the quality a n d quan tity of work of flat sieves
an d two types of reel separators The workin g quality is defi n ed by the
-
.

u niformity of the effect resultin g from the operatio n s of a n y particular

—
workin g organ the bo ltin g surface in thi s case , .

Figs 5 8 5 9 a n d 6 0 represe n t a cross sectio n Of reel separators

.
, ,
-

FI G . 58 . FI G . 59 .

a nd part Of a hexago n reel separator W e see in Figs 5 9 a n d 6 0 that -

. .

the full workin g surface of the reel sep arators i s n o t utilised in the -

operation s n d Fig 5 9 ill ustrates the fact that n o t all the siev e
,
a .

actuall y bolti n g is capab l e Of doi ng equal work F ig 5 9 exhibits . .

the small grain b n d impurities a that are to pass t hrough o n the

a ,

l ower part of the hexago n ree l or flat sie v e a n d o n the side wa l l ,

of the reel I n the first positio n a n d I wi ll easily pass through

. ,
a )

the meshes Of the siev e if fittin g them ; in the seco n d position , ,

they can n ot fall through bein g wedged in between the facets of the
,

mes h as the area of the passage here projected o n the horizo n tal p lan e
, , ,

is diminished in proportio n to the an gl e of in clin atio n Of the reel .

Those impurities must be agai n throw n o n the horizon tal p l an e of

the bolter to attain t he positio n fav ourab l e to siftin g I t is cl ear
,
.
,

con sequen tly that n o t ev ery part of the workin g s u rface produces
,

th s ame
e e ffect a n d thus the ca
, pacit y O f the machi n e is d imi n ishe d I f w e .
 72 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR II I
°

tab le givi n g the average Of data from E uropean an d

, Ameri can works
v erified in practice .

Th e i n c li n e of th e ree l is 8 0 mm to 1 00 0 of l e n gth . .

TA BLE X

D im en sio ns o f Cyl i nd e r .

Di a m e te r . Leng th .

Thefirst three n umbers Of reel s have but t hree n umbers Of c l oths

each B y mean s of the first sh eet the reel s ep r t the dust san d & c
'

,
s a a e , ,
.

(sieve No . The seco n d bo lts the small refuse (NO 1 2 ) in the third .

(No s 5 a n d 6 ) the grain passes through the l arge impurities taili ng o v er

.
,
.

The rest Of the n umbers of ree l s i those begin n in g with 2 0 0 0 mm ,

. e .
.

l e ngth Of cyli n der upwards successfu lly work with four sheets of ,

cloth Here the thro u ghs co n sist of small refuse (No s 1 4 to

. small .

grain (No s 1 0 to . a n d n orma l grai n (No 6 an d wh ile the l arge s .

refuse tai ls o v er .

(iii -
l Clea n in g a cco rdin
g to S p ifi
ec c Gra vi ty a nd S ize
Afterthe impurities have been separated a w ay by bo lti n g the mass ,

O f product though u n iform n s ze sti ll O fte n co n tai n s foreig n matter in

, I 1 ,

the shape of light grain s shell s & c which have to be extracted That
, , .
,
.

is do n e by wi n n owi n g the grain The primitive method Of winn owin g is .

the utilisatio n of the n atural power of wi n d o n peasan t farms where the ,

grain is thrown up with shovels n d the win d carries the light m atter ,
a

away I f machin ery is used for that purpose n air curren t is artificiall y
. a -

in duced by fan s .

Th e sim pl est form of machin e called n aspirator is shown in Fig 6 1 ,

a ,
. .

Th e simp l e separator co n sists of a chamber A with a fa n Th e l ower

part of the chamber en ds in a hopper c l osed by a bal an ced valve d .

The lid of the chamber carr ies a va lve e Open in g i n wards al so coun ter °

,
 Th e l ight impurities are carried to the chamber A w here those lightest are ,

ejected by the f n the less light particl es

a ,

fallin g in to the hopper W hen a large .

q an tity of refuse has co llected in the

u

hopper the v alve d is pushed open by

,

its weight a n d after disch argin g it

,
,

c loses again The v a lve e a utomaticall y

.

admits air in to the rarefied space in the

chamber I f the f n works too power
. a
F m 6 1 °

fully then the curren t Of air takes the n rm l gr in away w ith it

, o a . a s .

W ith a view to a more effective c lea n in g A Fisher suggested the .

co n structio n Of a n aspi rator w ith a trip le aspiratio n Through the feed

,
.

tube a (Fig in the di rectio n of the arrow S the grai n flows o n to a

.

spout furn ished with three partitio n s the height Of which may be regulated
,

by the screw d The air curren t passin g

.

.
-

up (arrows r) en coun ters the stock thrice , ,

a n d removes the light matter which is ,

carried through c to a chamber simil ar to

th e o n e j ust described The heavier ex .

tra n eo s matter fa ll s i n to the spout d by

u

the way of s s a n d s n d is discharged l , ,, 3, a

i n to a sack The defect Of Fisher s asp irator

.
’

lies in the fact that a mass i n termixed t o

a greater exten t with light impurities meets
a curren t of air weaken ed an d dirtied by its
precedin g work .

Th e mani fo ld e x haust based o n the ,

prin cip l e Of Fig 6 3 is much more effective .

,
.

I n that machi n e the grai n discharged i n to ,

the feeder A (arro w S ) un dergoes a quad

rup le aspiratio n with pure air each time ,
.

T h e co n structio n of this m a chi n e is very

F m 62 . .

simpl e A timber chamber B con taini ng a

.
,

fa n F s baffled by in clin ed partitio n s which form a spout for the

1 ,

grain delivered through M after the aspiratio n The upper wall of .

the chamber carries n automatic valve h regulatin g the rarefic tio n

a ,
a

of the air in B The hopper D receivin g the heavy screeni ngs en ds in

—
.

va ves a b which o pe n i n g u n der the pressur e of th e mass of i mpurit ies

l , , ,
74 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR 111

discharge them The lighter refuse falls in to box D n d is co n v eyed

.
'

1 a

out by c n d d whil e the lightest matter is ej ected with the ir curren t

a ,
a

by the fa n
—
.

Ro bin so n As p F r
’ i

s ra to r . o

the removal of light extran eous

matter there exists machin ery ,

con structed o n the prin cipl e

O f utilisin g ce n trifuga l power .

Of the n o v el types of such

machin ery R obi nson s aspirato r ’

mu st be described (Fig .

Th e grain fall s through the

feeder a n d down a spout ru n ,

n in g vertically through the

exhaust chamber o n to a revol ,

F 63
v
IG
i n g cast iro n disc From the -
.

di sc it is distributed f n wise
. .

,
a -

a n d the n e n cou n ters a curre n t of aspirated air which carries the light ,

matter away a n d then con veys it down a spout to its exit The heavier
,
.

refuse e n coun teri n g a deflectin g partitio n o n its way fall s in to the box
, , ,

while the lighter matter

passes through the fan
either to the dust coll ector
or out Of the mill I n this .

aspirator the feed spout may

be raised a n d dropped by
mean s of a l ever gear a n d -

screw for regul atin g the flow

(cross sectio n b etween the
di sc a n d the spout ) The .

disc ru ns at 1 9 0 rev ol ution s

per min ute An in spection .

gl ass is fitted in the top of

the scree nings chann el .

The capacity Of this

aspirator accordi n g to the data of the factory is from 2 5 0 to 8 3 bushels
, ,

per hour correspon din g to the size Of the machin e (No s 1 2

, . .
, ,

an d

Ro bins o n
’
s Cyclo p n eu ma tic S epa ra to r An
-
.
— other machi e of n R obi n
son
’
s co n str u c
, ted on the p n
p l same ri ci e
an d con n ec ted w ith a c ycl o n e fo r
OH AP . II I ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 75

collectin g light impurities is the y lO p n eumatic separator Here ,

c c -

.
1

F
( g i 6 5
.
) the disc receivi n g the grai n is en c l osed in the cycl o n e C n d the ,
a

fa n is above the cycl o n e Th e fan draws the air out of the cycl o n e through
.

a passage in the axis an d ,

impel s it i n to the space B ,

by which it is co n ducted
°

through a side aperture in to

the cycl o n e I n this way .
,

the work is performed b y

the same volume Of air
which un dergoes purification
in space B P art Of the .

lighter refuse settl es o n the

sides Of the cycl o n e owin g ,

to cen trifugal force an d ,

slidi n g do wn the in clin e o n ,

reachin g the worm con veyor -

is taken to the di scharge

spout The heavier screeni ngs
.

are delivered to the worm ,

co n v eyor out of the chamber

B The light an d heavy
.

impuri ties are di scharged

i n to o n e spout in the presen t
case but a separate passage
,

fo r either ca n be afforded by
p l aci n g an other spout al o n g .

the route Of the worm co n -

v ey o rbefore the out l et for the

l ight impurities in the cycl o n e .

The cycle p n eumatic s epar -

a to r s capacity is 1 0 0 to 3 3 5
’

bushel s per hour .

Hcirde s Ma
'

Co rnbin ed
’
.

chin e the simultan eous

.
-
Fo r
F 65 IG
extractio n Of foreign bo di es . .

di fferin g in size a n d specific gravity mac hi n es operatin g by siev es ,

a n d asp iratio n are con structed HOrde s separator ( g ) be o gs

F i 6 6 l n
.
’
.

fered
Of s o m e twen t ar o, bu t
A m achi ne o f a sim il ar Ho lt was ye s a
g
’
1
typ e, s s ep ara to r, y
o wing to th e de f ects in its co nstru ct o n i it di d no t su ccee d
,
76 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR III

to the simp lest c lass of combi n e d mac hi n e I t is a commo n .

separator o n the top Of which a frame S with two bolts is set o n four
-

flexib le t mber stan ds t The frame is reciprocated by mean s Of two

i .

rods r con n ected with a cran k ax le a carryin g weights rotatin g

'

, ,

o n it the Object Of whi ch is to ,

coun terbal an ce vibratio n Of the

bo lti n g frame The grai n is fed .

o n to the first sieve NO 6 which , .

,

retain s the l arge imp urities an d

delivers t hem through the side
spouts a — a .

On sieve No 9 the grai n is .

separated from the small matter

a n d flo w s down the spout b to
the expan sio n chamber A where ,

it un dergoes a tripl e as piratio n

i i an d i makin g its exit
, l , 2, ,

c l ean ed through c The thro u ghs . .

from N 9 pass down sheet iron o

-

—
.

F 66 IG

b ottoms p p to the side spout

. .

0 . D rive n by a stream Of air the heavier scree n i n gs fall i n to the hopper d ,

a n d the n ce to the expa n sio n chamber B where they are fann ed o n ce

,

more in i before l eav in g the machin e through e The lightest impuri ties
3 .

are drawn in by the fan alo n g the air tru n k f an d ejected with the air
-

, ,

whil e the medium refuse

tra v el s o t Of the machin e
u

down the i n clin ed p lan es f .

The defect Of this ma

chin e is iden tical with that
O f Fisher s separator i e the
’
. .
,

first sp ir tio n i is performed

a a

with impure air F o r this .

reaso n the bo ltin g separator

M
of Fig 6 7 with a five fol d
.
,
-
67 .

aspiration each time with a fresh vo lume of air s is preferab l e The

, , .

grain is delivered through the spout c the hea vy refuse falls in to co n veyor
,

box mediums in to b an d the light matter passes out with the air
a, , .

I n modern machin es of this type the fa n ge n erally ru n s at 5 00 to 6 0 0

rev ol ution s per min ute the cran k axle at 2 5 0 to 3 0 0 their capacity bein g
, ,

40 to 1 6 5 b us hels var yi n g with the size of the m ach in e

,
‘ ,
CH AR III ] FLO UR MI LLI NG 77
’

Ro bin so n S epa ra to r — I n
mill s Of great capacity n d in ware
’
T . s . a

houses where a l arge quan tity of grai n has to be clean ed R obin so n s

, ,
’

type Of machin ery is foun d The grain flows in to the feeder (Fig .
1
.

a n d presses ope n with its weight the val ve which is cou n terbal an ce d ,

by weights o n shafts I t .

passes o n to the first sieve

of perforated steel NO 2 0 , .

(meshes 1 0 mm in dia .

meter ) n d in fallin g o n
,
a

the sieve is subj ected to

the effect of astro n g cur
ren t o i air which carries ,

away a ll light extran eous

matter The tai l s of the
.

firs t sieve are large im

p urities while the grain
,

a nd the remain in g im
purities pass to the seco n d
bo ltin g tray with two
n umbers Of c l othi n g 14 ,

and 1 3 H ere the me di um

.

impurities are separated

away whil e the grain
,

fallin g through is bo lted

o n the third sieve NO 3 ,
.
,

with meshes of ‘ mm 7
1
.

On t h e third sieve the

grain is sifted Off a n d is ,

then exhausted with fresh

air in the discharge spout
the thro ghs here co n sist
u

of fin e impurities The .

F 68
three trays are en c l osed IG . .

in o n e commo n box which is suspen ded from the frame Of the

machin e o n four fl at steel rods an d is reciprocated in the same way ,

as the trays of a n ordin ary separator The air draught is i n duced by .

-

two fan s runn in g at about 6 0 0 revo lution s per min ute Light impurities .

1
Th i typ e ha s b een a pp ro p ria te d fr m its Am erica n co n stru c to rs , a n d is b e in g b u ilt, w it h
k —S k
s o

u nim p o rt a n t v a ria tio n s , b y a ll la rge E rpu o ean wo r s ee ,

D a v e rio , Lu t h
e r, Am m e G iese cke
an d Ko n eg en & c ,
.
78 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ CHAR I II

are b lown through the fa n to the dust co ll ector whi le the heavy refuse ,

fall s in to hoppers a n d slides out down i n clin ed spouts .

The main shaft which imparts a rocki n g motio n to the sie v e makes, ,

about 5 5 0 rp m .

The capacity Of such machi n es varies between 2 1 6 a n d 2 4 0 0 cwt .

per hour .

Asp ira to r o f f rm S eek Br s This aspirator is ge n erally used for

o . o .
-

clean in g the grain to be kept in warehouses a n d in m ill s Of a large ,

capacity Through the feeder a (Fig

. the grain is deliv ered o n to .

the first siev e with large meshes , which tails over the coarse ex tra ne ,

ous matter whi le the grain falls o n the sieve c with fin er meshes
, ,

which remo v e the smaller impurities such as corn cobs straws ,

-

, ,

sto n es & which pass out through a side spout d Th e sifted product
,
c .
,
-
.

is then bolted o n sieve e whi ch separates the still small er impurities ,

an d flows in a thin even stream through the di scharge spout I , ,

where it is exhausted by a curre n t of air a n d freed from the dust , ,

chaff 85 0, .

W he n e n teri n g in the machi n e the feed is subj ected to the actio n ,

Of exhausts gg which suc k out the loose dust before it is passed to

, ,

the sieves O win g to this the machi n e when in operatio n produ ces
.
, , ,

n o dust Th e c l ean n ess of the reverse side Of the sieves is main tain ed by
.

automatic brushes hh or i n di a rubber balls which are di stributed o v er -

the c l othi n g a n d the trays movin g from side to side hit the perforated
, ,

sheets thus freein g them of dust

, .

The feed may be regul ated a n d is performed a utomaticall y viz , ,

.

the force of the stream varies in accordan ce with the quan tity of the
stock fed in this man n er prev en tin g n y stoppage an d con tin uously
,
a ,

keepin g a certain amoun t Of grain in the hopper This arran ge .

men t l ackin g the boltin g surface woul d n o t be supp lied with the stock
,

evenly over its full breadth thus the aspiratio n wou l d be i n effi cien t ,
.

Th e hea vy particl es Of dust li fted by the stream of air co ll ect in two

chambers ii when ce they are di scharged through rockin g chan n el s kk
,
,

arran ged o n the sieve The fi n e dust at the same time is driven by the .
, ,

fa n to the dust co ll ector .

i
W hen mou n ted the machi n e has to be carefully adjusted by mea n s,

Of a spir it l eve l B y mea n s Of weights L adj ustab l e by screws p l aced

-
.
,

at the mouth Of the feeder the force Of the stream Of stock must be ,

regul ated so as to keep the h o pp r co n tin uall y fill ed to three fourths

, . e
-

O f its capacity Th e same is to be said Of the regul atio n Of the product

.

in l whe n o n l eavi n g the trays it flows i n to the suctio n drum at the

, , ,
so FL OU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR m
V alves nn S t in the partitio n s between the refuse Co llecti n g chambers
, e

a n d the commo n expan sio n chamber Of both the exhausts These .

sl ide va lves may b e reached through a she l tered aperture in the mi ddl e
-

of the upper p lan k Of the aspirator Th slide valves must n ever be . e -

quite cl osed .

Th e aspirator c n o n l y be ad j usted accurate l y after a trial operatio n

a .

Th remova l Of ll light impurities from the stock by the air curre n t is

e a -

to be aimed at ; the good partic l es Of stock ho wever shoul d n o t be , ,

carried to the refuse chamber .

The aspirator l egs are co nn ected by a spo t w hich further is u ,

co n n ected with the commo n air tru n k Th tru n k ope n s i n to the dust -
. e

chamber or commu n icates with some dust co ll ector Th n w bore Of

,
-
. e e

the air tru n k may n o t be small er than the sum Of the bores Of both the
-

asp irator legs Any s light curves of the air tru nk must be made with as
.
-

l arge a radius as possib l e .

Th e machi n e is worked from the shaft Of the f n maki n g 5 70 a

revo l utio n s per min ute by mean s of beltsthe motio n is tran smitted to a
cran k shaft which rocks the sie v es an d ru n s at 6 5 0 revolutio n s
-

,
.

Th e capacity of such machi n es varies bet w ee n 6 0 n d 2 0 00 bushel s for a

warehouses a n d 2 0 to 6 2 0 bushel s per hour for mill s accordin g to the size

, ,

of the machin e .

The Z igza g S epa r to r—I n this machi n e (Fig which does the ‘

a .

same work as the prece di n g o n e the trays are arran ged in a zigzag ,

li n e
. All five sieves are e n c l osed in a commo n box but its reciprocative ,

motio n run s athwart the directio n the stock travel s W e shall first .

follow the travel Of the stock a n d then compare this co n struction with ,

that of the precedin g machin e From the feed hopper havin g Open ed the .
-

coun terbalan ced slide n d exhausted by a n air curren t the grain fall s
,
a ,

o n the first sieve ( l o n gitudi n al sectio n ) with rou n d ho l es (diameter 1 2

which shakes the l arge impurities Off a n d sifts the grain an d other matters
through This tray is rocked lo n gitudi n all y its axis bein g perpen di cul ar
.
,

to the axes of sieves 2 3 n d 4 Th thro gh s of the first siev e falli n g

, ,
a . e u

o n the seco n d with meshes t — 5 mm l eave the l arge impurities of the

c r .

secon d order o n its surface the grain a n d smaller scree ni ngs passin g through
,

to a p l ate lyin g parallel to the sieve n d are co n veyed to the head of the
, ,
a

third tray The third sieve havin g meshes a 4 g mm retain s ex

.
, _
z .
,

tra n e o s matters Of the third order in size givin g as t hro gh the rest Of
u ,
u s

th e stock which co ll ects o n a simil ar p l ate u n der the sieve w hich in a

, ,

like man n er co n ducts the product to the h ead Of the fourth sieve ,

meshes d 4 mm x
.
CHAR II I ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 8i

Large impurities of the last size are sifte d Off n the fourth sieve o
,

an d the t hro u g h reach the fifth siev e the axis Of which is set p rp n
s , e e

di u la rly to those Of the precedin g sieves

c Th meshes f th fifth sieve . e O e

are d 2 mm I t tails the grain over n d bo lts small refuse dust n d

: . a
, , a

san d The grain from the last sieve passes through the exhaust l g to
.
e

the fa n n d is freed of the remain in g impurities n d dust (cross sectio n )

a a .

I n compari n g this machi n e to the n e precedi n g we n otice that the

o

zigzag arran gemen t of i v m ke it less co m pact B t its en large

s e es a s . u

men t goes to the accou n t of its height n d has n o i n fluen ce o n the area
,
a

REFUS E

occupied by it T he advan tages afforded in return b y the zigzag

.
°

appear in the quali ty of the bo ltin g as the dista n ce the grai n travels is
,

l o n ger besides w hich the product is sifted from the head of the siev e
, ,

whereas in the first machin e the passi n g stock falls o n differen t parts
.

of the n ext sieve an d does n o t travel the who le len gth Of it

,
.

Th e f n Of this zigzag f R obi n so n s makes 6 0 0 revo lutio n s the

’
a O ,

sieves 5 2 0 vibratio n s per m n t the capacity bein g 6 0 to 2 6 0 bushels

I u e,

per hour .

—
Ma chin es with a n I n clin ed R ta tin g S ieve W ith the view Of obvia
o

tin g v ibratio n gen erated by the reciprocati n g motio n Of the worki n g

parts which has a bad effect upo n the machin e n d the building
,
a ,

en gi n eers suggested separ ators with flat in c lin ed sieves gyrati ng

F
82 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR II I

on the pri n cip l e already explain ed The box C (Fig 7 1 ) con tain s four
sieves 1 2 3 an d 4 Thi s box is suspen ded fro mthe frame o n four
. .

, , , , .

reed spri ngs c a n d conn ected in wi th the drivi n g p in of the fly wheel Q by

- -

coun terweights The fl y wheel is set o n a shaft rotated by a belt drive

.
-
.

Th e stock is del ive red i n to the feed hopper A its flow bei n g co n troll ed ,

by a gate balan ced either by a sprin g as sho wn in the drawin g or by a , ,

weight Th ro ll B feeds evenly the sieve 1 a n air c u rren t s removi n g

. e ,
-

at the same ti me the light im

purities S ieve 1 in cli n ed to the .
,

l eft sifts Off the l arge refuse d , ,

droppin g thethro u ghs o n to siev e

2 which giv es the medium im ,

purities r as refuse an d s ifts the ,

grain through to sieve 3 The .

tails of the third siev e are the

l arge grain o a n d the thro u gh s ,

are thrown o n sieve 4 where the ,

small grain o is retain ed a n d the ,

san d dust a n d other fi ne partic les , ,

m pass through The grai n o a n d .

0 passes down the air tube v and 1

-

o n ce more un dergoes the process

of separatio n from the light im
F 71 purities The heavier particles
IG . ,
.

Of di rt a sett l e in box es t a n d are ,

taken out through in clin ed spouts fixed to the boltin g box The n umber .

of rev o lution s Of the box is 2 5 0 a n d the capacity is 1 6 0 bushel s per ,

hour .

Machines of the ki n d described are built by the firm s of G Luther .

(aspirator Triumph a n d others

“
.

2 . S ep a ra tio n a cco rding to S ha p e

Inthe process Of c lean sin g Of the grain of foreign matters by siftin g -

we have seen that their remo v al is possib l e when they greatly differ
from the kern els in size B u t the sieves wi ll n o t remove impurities
.

of an other shape yet of a size that agrees with the small di men sio n
,

of the stock c lean ed To those foreign bodies pertain mostly spherical

.

grain s or partic les Of grain (broken grain ) of the product treated

, .

Fo r i n stan ce the seeds Of cockl e or sweet pea their diameter

, ,
-

,
CHAR I II ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 83

coin cidi n g in size with the thickn ess of a grain Of wheat cann ot be
‘
,

separated from it They ca n n ot too be removed when the stock is

.
, ,

sorted accordi n g to specifi c gravity o n ly the light impurities b ein g ,

extracted here I f c ts are mixed with wheat their cross section s

. a ,
-

coin cidi n g they cann ot be separated by siftin g

, .

All ma chin ery by mea n s of which impurities di fferi n g from the mai n -

stock in shape are remo v ed is con structed o n pri n cip les based o n the
, ,

fo llo wi n g properties of these extran eous matters

()1 S pherica l grai n s ro ll d ow n a n i n c li n ed p l a n e or cur v i n g surface
with a greater speed a n d thus developin g a greater kin etic en ergy leap
, ,

o v er Obstac les which detain the Ob l o n g grains .

()
2 S pherica l grain s ro l l O ff a s l ight l y i n c l i n ed p l a n e o v ercomi n g the ,

friction of rolli n g while the Ob l on g grain s remain immo v ab le o n the

,
.

surface .

()3 I f we ha v e a cur v ed surface or i n c li n ed p l a n e with semi spherica l -

sockets a nd stock mo vin g o v er it the spherical a n d broken seeds wi ll

, , ,

fall in to the sockets and the main stock will roll o ff

,
.

(i .
) Ma chin es of the F irst P rincip le

The Co n ic A p pa ra tu s —Th
apparatus based o n the fi rst prin cip le is e

exceedin gly simp l e (Fig There are two co n ic s u rfaces K a n d K

.
1 2 .

The di ameter of the base of the l ower reversed

en d K is greater tha n the diameter Of the base
2

of co n e X The p l an e Of the base Of the bottom

1 .

con e is set higher than the p l an e Of the base Of

the upper o n e The grain flows out of the
.

spout a o n to the surface of co n e X The 1 .

roun d grain s Of cockle pea & devel opin g , ,

c .
,

a greater rolli n g vel ocity have a larger kin etic ,

en ergy Hittin g the promin en t circular surface

.

cc
1
of the co n e K these grai n s leap ov er the
2
72
F IG
ri n g cc while the grain s Of wheat or rye
.
. .

1
, ,

in their desce n t move s l ow l y a n d pass i n to the co n e K a nd tube b

, , 2
.

Th e a n g l e of the co n es is the diameters of their bases about three

metres The con es are of polished timber Though t his app lian ce is
.
.

bul ky its capacity is great Open co n es would raise dust therefore

,
. ,

they may be en cased which all ows the feed to be exhausted ,

.

The W o rm Trien r — Th e co n structio n O f the.

worm trieur depe n ds o n

the same prin cip le (Fig This apparatus co sists of he icoida co ic

n .
l l n
“

i .
84 FL OUR MI LLI NG [ CH A R II I

surfaces of which o ne two or three b Of a small er di ameter are in scribed

, , , , , ,

in respect Of the surface Of the l arge di ameter a These surfaces are .

e n cased in a box K This tri eur Operates in the followin g mann er the
.

stock gen erally cockle broken grain vetch n d un dersized grain passes
, , , ,
a ,

through the feeder to b a worm of s ,

small er diameter run ni n g c l ose to the

axl e to which the helicoidal surfaces
,

are fixed By reaso n of the actio n Of .

gravity the product descen ds with ,

n accordi n g velocity Th rou n d

a . e
'

grai n s (cockle & ) develop a greater ,

c .

speed n d ro ll over the rim b i n to the

,
a

l arger worm as show n by a rrows At ,

.

the base there are exits for the sorted

product for n o n roun d grain a n d d ,
c -

for the ro un d .

The machi n e is ften built with O

out case but it is better en cased

a , ,

as this app lian ce affords the possi

b ility of aspirati n g the machin e
by mean s of n exhaust tube fixed a

as shown by the arrow e F o r in .

spectin g purposes the machin e may

be furn ished with c l osely fittin g
doors .

This machi n e operates very efli

ien tly the thread O f the worm a n d
c

the an gl e of the co n e bein g carefu lly

F 73 IG . .

cal cu l at ed it requires n o motive power , ,

a n d i t is Of a n excee di n g ly simp l e co n structio n Th e flights of the worm .

are made Of iro n p l ate The case is al so of iron Th capacity Of a

.
. e

machin e with a worm 2 0 00 mm in height the l arger worm a bei ng 5 0 0

.
,

mm in diameter is from 2 5 to 4 0 bushel s per hour

.
,
.

Ma chin es o f the S eco n d P rin cip le

Tw o types of co n structio n be l o n g to machin es operatin g by a movin g

i n c l in ed p l an e the first ki n d moves para llel to the directio n of the
:

ro lli n g grain s the seco n d at right a n gl es

,
.

Fig 7 4 exhibits a doub l e machi n e of the first type man ufactured b y

.
 CH A P . m] F LOU R MI LLI NG
85
R ober . On
a timber stan d are p laced a feed box A for the stock n d a a
frame B with workin g surfaces D which are e n dless leather c loths rotati g ,
,

n
in the directio n
poi ted by arrow s by mea n s of a belt pu lley C n d
n s, -

a
guides r en c losed in the c loths Through the feed box A the stock .

up o n D n d thro w n Off i n to
a

a box F bel ow The flow i .

s

regulated by a gate b Th . e

i n c li n e Of the worki n g surface ,

is adj usted with the aid Of a

toothed gearin g E a n d bo lts
F 74
whi ch are screwed i n to n uts IG
. .

n and
,
support the l ower parts of the frame Th lower guides for D are . e
moun ted o n adj ustab l e bearin gs which makes it possible to adjust the ,

ten sio n of the c l oths .

The capacity of such a machi n e a ttai n s 1 2 bushels per hour the breadth ,

of the c loths bein g 2 5 0 mm their .

,

l e n gth 2 5 0 0 mm n d the speed is .

,
a

80 revo l utio n s per mi n ute .

An other type Of machi n e in

which the c loth trave ls in a dir c e

tio n at right a ng les to the fall Of

grain is sho w n in Fig 7 5 I t is . .

likewise a machi n e Of do b le actio n u .

R eceivi n g th e grai n from the

feed hopper the feedin g ro lls strew
the stock o n the c loths The .

F 75 IG . .
rou n d grai n s ro ll O ff (arrow a n d
the rest remain in g o n the c loths , ,

are carried (arrow n ) to the rece v ng box

.
1 1 .

As in the prece di n g machi ne the adj ustme n t of the i n c li n e a n d te n sio n

,

of the cloths is provided for .

Th e utmost capacity of this machi n e is 2 0 bushel s per hour h vm

g , a

c oths 3 0 0 mm broad a n d 2 2 00 mm lo n g run n in g at the rate 0 f 5 0

l .
.

revo l uti ons er min te

p u .
86 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH A R III

iii
( ) M a chin es
. of th e T h ird P ri n cip l e

The No rma l Trien r Typ e — I n 1 8 4 5 two Fre n chme n V ach o n (father

.
,

a n d so n ) in Lyo n s i n v en ted a machi n e which th ey n amed a trieur “ ”

.
, ,

Th e machi n e was a sheet iro n cyl i n der bossed o n the i n terior surface
-

with cylin drical sockets I n side the cyli n der set a t a n in cli n e was
.
,
_
,

en cl osed a co n v eyor box al most throughout its full l en gth at the sam e
, ,

an gl e of in c lin atio n I n to the raised .

e n d O f the cy l i n der the grain wa s

poured a n d when rotatin g the ,

roun d grain s Of foreign pl an ts fall ,

in g i n to the sockets were li fted to a ,

sufficien t height a n d then dropped

i n to the statio n ary co n veyor box
_ .

The grain travell ed dow n the

F 76 IG
. .

cylin der by gravity shaken al so by ,

the l o n gitudi n al rocki n g of the cyli n der whi le the roun d particl es of
,

impurities ro lled down the i n cli n ed p l an e of the con veyor box B oth .

grain an d mpurities fell in to co n v eyor boxes p l aced un der the l ower

1

en d of the cyl i n der .

D uri n g the seven ty years existe n ce of V a cho n s c l ean er a n d separator

’ ’

its worki n g pri n cipl e has n o t un dergo n e a ny mo di fication The modern .

sortin g cyli n der has but receiv ed modificatio ns of co n structio n an d Fig ,

.

7 6 gives us its prese n t p l an .

A c yli n der C tur n s o n a

station ary shaft 7) in the
directio n of the arrow 3 The .

mass of stock Q ro lls al o n g

the cut surface of the cylin F 77 IG
der ; the r oun d kern el s Of the
. .

admixture an d the broken grain of the stock to be c lean ed fall in to

, ,

the sockets n d are lifted up a n d dropped in to a station ary co n veyor

,
a

box D rolli n g down its slopin g surface b The impurities are pushed
,
.

alo n g the co n veyor box by a worm T rev olvin g in the Opposite

directio n .

A full drawin g Of this machin e is to be foun d in Fig 7 7 Th e shaft

of the cylin der is p laced o n props t—
. .

t W hen the set screws Of the prop s

.

are l oosen ed the shaft may be turn ed On the rev olvin g hub Of the
.

cylin der is set a gear z coup li n g with the gear z Of the worm con v eyor T 1
88 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AP .
'
III

sockets will be un der a disadvan tage (the quick motio n of the stock n o

the workin g surface ) n d besides that we have to take i n to con sidera

, a ,

tio n the friction of the kern el s in the sockets .

Before speaki n g f the capacity of trieurs we must give our atten tio n
O ,

to the shape of the sockets E uropean tech nics .

kn o w o n ly o n shape Of sockets semi spheric which e ,

-

are made either by bossin g or by drilli n g Fig 7 9 . .

shows drilled (I ) n d bossed (I I ) sockets in operatio n a .

An accurate semi sphere can n ot be Obtai n ed by -

bossin g therefore roun d grai n s w ill more quickly fall

,

out of the bossed sockets than out Of the drilled o n es .

Th e receivi n g surface b Of the co n veyor box is set

higher for I than for I I n d co n sequen t ly the work ,
a

in gsurface of trieur I i the area of sockets catchin g , . e .

If the roun d seeds is l arger than that f I I Besides , O .

,

F 79
the
IG
dista n ce betwee n the dri lled sockets is l ess
than be twee n the bossed o n es for a c l ose bossin g
. .

would have mad e the sockets still less regul ar n d damaged the material ,
a .

Therefore a u n it Of surface co n tai n s a greater n umber Of cut sockets

than of bossed on es which raises the capacity of trieurs I in compariso n
, ,

to trieurs I I worki n g un der th e same co n ditio n s Th differen ce in the

, . e

n umber Of sockets to the same area reaches 2 5 per

cen t F r i n stan ce a cockle cylin der n umbers

. o ,

boss ed sockets to o n e square metre Of surface a n d ,

drilled sockets to the same area .

Fig 8 0 shows
. s t hat both ki n ds Of sockets are
u

t rn ed in the directio n of rotatio n n o t of their

u

spherical but cylin drical surface This is to preven t

, .

frictio n a n d the chokin g up Of the sockets with small

refuse when the grain s drop out as shown in the case ,

of the grain A in I I (Fig .

B esides semi spheric sockets the P ri n z M n f ct r

ss s a u a u
-

,
Bo ed ro cket

in g CO (Mi l waukee ) Offer bossed sockets show n o n

.

F 80 ,
IG . .

F ig 8 1 the l ower surface of which is either flat 1 or

.
, , ,

cyli n dric 2 Th factory main tai n s that roun d impurities

, . e will be a

lifted higher nd fall more easily out Of sockets of that shape

a .

That is i n deed so but owi n g to their shape the n umber Of socket s

,

to a un it Of surface is small in compariso n to the n umber o f

[

semi pheric s o c ke ts n d co n sequen t ly the capacity o f these trieurs is

-
s ,
a ,

n o t lar e
g
CHA R III ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 89

Th e material Of w hich the trieur cylin d ers are made m sheets is z c .

S ometimes the socketed surface Of the cyli n der is bro n zed for the sake
of durability .

The n umber of sockets to a u n it of surface in a trieur speaki n g gen e ,

rally depen ds On its purpose Besides removin g roun d grai n s a trieur

, .
,

may serve as a barl ey or c t separator a .

To this en d larger sockets n d a a

small er in c lin e of the c ylin der are

adopted I n this case the wheat n d
. a

rye fall in to the feeder while barley ,

a nd oats bein g l arger roll Off the

, ,

cylin der .

The Ca pa city f Trien rs f the No rma l

—
o o

capacity of the trieurs de

,

Typ e The
pen ds o n the len gth the di ameter Of ,

the cylin der an d the circumferen tial

,

speed of its rotatio n (see the tab l e

bel ow ) .

FI G 8 1
Th e bar l ey a n d oat separators bein g
. .

trieurs for larger grain s are l arger in diameter ,

. The in c lin e 35 ,

to 4 0 mm to l m Of l en gth of the cylin der is

. .
, less as a lo n ger
,

period in the cylin der is n eeded for high c lass work -

TAB E X I L

CA P A C I TI E S OF COC KL E CY LI N DE R S

D imensi o ns o f Cyl in d er A p p ro xim ate Cap acity p er H our

Nu m b e r
. .

ofR evo l u t io n s
p er M inu te .
W h eat a nd B ye,
B
u sh el s .
90 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR

TAB E X I I L
CAP A CI TI E S OF TRI E U R S F OR S EP AR ATI N G B ARL E Y
AN D O ATS F R O M W H E AT AN D RY E

D im ensio ns o f Cyl ind er .

Trienrs f o o ther g a theoretica

Co n s tru ctio n l estimatio—Maki
n of n

the capacity of trieurs of the n ormal type it is easy to n ote that the ,

defect of this machin e is the impossibili ty of utilisin g its full workin g

surface owin g to the very n ature Of the co n struction The workin g s u r
,
.

face is used o nl y from A to B (Fig 7 6 ) this co n stitutes 30 to 3 3 per cen t . .

O f the who l e cy li n dric surface as has bee n pro v ed by practical tests

, H er e .

we meet in fact the same con structiv e prin cip l e that is app lied in the
, ,

roun d an d hexago n separatin g reel s B t the prob lem of the most efficien t
-
. u

boltin g machin e was brillian tly solv ed by the i n v en tion Of the p lan
sifter in which almost the whol e workin g surface is utilised whereas the
, ,

n ormal type of trieur has n o t yet bee n supp l a n ted by a more perfect

machin e .

The trieu r with a n in clin ed ta ble

'

R eco rd paten ted by Hein rich

S eck adopts the idea of a n i n c li n ed p l a n e The workin g surface Of this .

machin e (Fig 82 ) co n sists Of n en dless c l oth 1 5 with trieur sockets

. a , .

Th e c l oth is combi n ed of separate n arrow p l ates co nn ected by j oin ts

a n d embracin g the drums A—
,

, A is set at a n in c lin e The grain is del iv ered

,
.

in to the feeder 1 n d falls o n the ban d which trav el s upwards The flow
,
a .

of grain is regul ated by han d with the gate 3 by mean s of a han dwheel 2 , ,

a n d a gear dri v e Th e ro u n d bodi es droppi n g i n to the sockets are carri ed

.

away by the ban d n d at the curve of the ban d o n the drum fall in to
,
a , ,

hopper 4 whil e the gr ain ro lls down the in clin ed surface of the han d
,

in to hopper 5 .
92 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CHA R III

MACHI NE S F OR S EP A R ATI N G S TO N ES
mass Of grain Often o n t in sto n es Of such shapes n d sizes that
’

Th e c a s a

they can be removed n either by mean s Of aspirators n r of trieurs I n o .

such cases the aid of machin ery the worki n g idea Of which is based o n ,

the utili satio n of gravity h a s to be i nvoked , .

H ign ett S to n e S epa ra t r —Hign t t machi n e co n sists Of a tria n gu l ar

’ ’
s o . e s

wooden box (Fig 8 3 ) wi th a lo w rim i n c li n ed .

,

towards the v ertex Of the trian g le On the .

bottom Of the box are p l aced trian gul ar boxes of

smaller size with rims n m The first box , . a

ser v es as feeder for the stock to be c lean ed ,

w hich passes out of it in the directio n poi n ted

by arrows there bein g n o fro n t partitio n to a , .

An other box D with h igher rims is p l aced at , ,

the top c of the box This box co llects the .

sto n es o wi n g to the abse n ce Of a part Of the rim

in the poi n t c e n cased n the box D I n the o .

rim at the back A B of the box there are ho les ,

00 through w hich the grain is discharged

, .

This box is mou n ted n flexib l e rods F By o .

the body of the co nn ectin g rod T Of a cran k

mechan ism a vibratio n is com m u n icated to the ,

box (9 0 to 1 2 0 revo l utio n s ) Ow n g to which ,

i

the grai n l eavi n g is hit by the sides nn a i .

F 83
IG .
T hese
.
b l ows thro w the grai n in the directio n

of the discharge openi n gs 0 0 w hile the ,

sto n es bein g heavier ro ll down the in clin ed p lan e i n fluen ced by their
, ,
.

o w n gravity Of course the in cli n e the oscillation a n d the n umber Of

.
, , ,

reciprocatio n s Of the box must be so cal culated that the gravity of

,

the sto n es (its compo n en t o n the p l an e of the bottom Of the box ) is

greater than the resultan t Of their frictio n again st the w ood Of the box ,

a n d greater tha n the i n ertia from the osci ll atio n s W he n suitab ly i n c lin ed .

a n d v ibrati n g the same machin e may be used for separatin g the light
,

kern el s from the heavy o n es .

G L th r M chin e —Luther s machi n e (Fig co n structed o n

’ ’
. u e s a .

the same pri n ciples as that of Hign tt is more perfect A box A is s t e ,

. e
CHAR III ] FL OU R MI LLI NG 93
on sixteen flexib l e props The i n c li n atio n of the sto n e separatin g box c
. -

with trian gul ar rimmed boxes as in Hign ett s m achin e i a djustable s

’
s
,

bein g adj usted w ith the aid of screw rods an d han d wh eels d fixed to -

the frame of the box On the .

box down its full l en gt h is

, ,

set a co n veyor box C with ,

discharge open in gs 1 2 3 4 , , ,

in to box e B y mean s Of a .

cran k mechan ism the ma ,

chin e is osc illated (u p to 1 2 0

revo lutio n s ) Th e stock flo ws .

in to the feeder C a n d tra ,

F 84 IG

v e llin g as shown by the arrow

. .

passes in to the machin e through open in gs 1 2 3 4 The grain is carried , , , .

upwards an d is delivered through spout while the sto n es roll down the
, a,

in c lin ed p l an e an d pass o u t through spout b .

The capacity of the machi n e is 7 0 to 1 0 0 bushel s per hour .

S CO UR I N G AND P OL I S H IN G TH E GRAI N

1 . P rin cip les f

o the P ro cesses a nd the Cha ra cter of the W o rki ng P a rts

After the remo v al Of foreign matter from the gra n it has to be i ,

cl ean ed of the dirt that has stuck to it a n d the husk smut nd h ard , , , a e .

The di rt is someti mes n oticed here a n d there o n the surface of the grain s ,

but gen erally it lies in its groove As to the h usks which en case the .
,

grain in a compact armour they must be removed because they co ntain , ,

n o n utritive substa n ces for the huma n orga n ism n d the n triturate d ,
a ,

together with en dosperm they impart a darker co lour to the flour an d , ,

reduce its properties in every respect .

The modern processes Of removi n g the dirt a n d husks may be divided

i n to two categories : (1 ) the dry process of scouri n g n d (2 ) the wet ,
a

process when the dirt is washed Off previous ly

,
.

I n the first i n sta n ce the worki n g parts Of the machin ery eith er by
,

frictio n or by strikin g Often est both by strokes a n d frictio n of rough

,

surfaces remove the dirt shells germ coat a n d beard or hairs coverin g
, , , , ,

the grain (c ats ) The seco n d process co n sists in a prelimin ary removal of
.

a part Of the dirt by washin g a n d the n both the husk n d the remaini n g ,
a

dirt are removed by dry scourin g F rom the structure of the berry .
94 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR III

we hav e learn ed that the first three shell s grow v ery c losely together .

The o u te r S ki n s are comparativ e ly l es s firm ly attached to the

°

s eed she ll s
-
but the l atter are so s oli dl y wel ded to each other a n d
,

to the en dosperm that their removal without partially in j urin g the

, ,

en dosperm is a n impossibili ty even by chemical mean s Fo r thi s

, ,
.

reason the effect Of the workin g parts o n the grain must n o t be so

powerf ul as to destroy th grain for the partic les of grain broken Off
e ,

together with the shell in the process Of c lean in g are irretriev ab ly l o st

to the fl our Co n sequen t ly in modern flour millin g tech ni cs the so
.
, ,

called washin g of the grain origin ally desig n ed to remo v e the dirt
,
”

Of f the grai n p l ays a promi n e n t part

, B u t a n exp lan atio n of its rea l .

aim will be foun d bel ow .

The dry as well as the wet processes of c l ean in g have the removal from

FI G 85 . .

the berry of the beeswi n g a n d the dirt co v erin g it in view As the

, ,
.

washin g process requires mechani cal treatmen t of the grain for remo vin g
the beeswin g as well the machi n es emp l oyed for that purpose must be
,

examin ed first .

The scouri n g of grain is best carried out by mea n s of rough s urfaces ,

hav i n g as it were microscopic kn ives which shav e the outer stem

, ,

Off ,or rough metal surfaces Therefore the workin g Organ s of the .

machin e must be
()
1 S harp a n d rough s u rfaces such as sto n es of n atura l a n d arti
,

fi cial origi n .

()
2 S urfaces of thick wire c l oth of rou n d or square -
sectio n Fi
( g .

erforated iro n or steel p l ates with a gratin g surface which

(3 ) P ,

operate with the edges of the torn metal in the p lace of kniv es (Fig .

( ) got cast iro n or steel surfaces with cutti n g facets

4 I n -
.
96 FLO U R MI LLI N G [CH AR 111

T hus the shape of workin g surfaces decided upo n as the most efficie n t
is the rotati n g surf ace a n d its motio n a steady gyratio n
,
.

Let us examin e the shape of the workin g organ s of machin es

accepted in practice They have cyli n dric co n ic n d flat faces I n
. , ,
a .

respect to the positio n Of the axis of rotatio n of the w orkin g organ s the ,

machin es may be divi ded i n to those with a horizo n tal axis n d machin es ,
a

with a vertical axis Of rotatio n The treatmen t in regard to stock

requirin g two workin g organ s tw o states in regard to the degree of ,

activity Of each are possib le (1 ) o n e Of the w orkin g orga n s is in motio n ,

a n d the other o n e is statio n ary ()

2 both orga n s are i n motio n .

li i l
Cy n dr ca S r f e fuR hrti n —
ac s o T h machi n es w ith cyl i n drica l work
o o . e

in g surfaces c n be divided i n to a

two groups w ith a vertical n d ,

a

with a horizo n tal axis Of rotation .

W e sha ll exami n e the first group

( g
Fi .

regards the motio n Of the As

worki ng surfaces three combin ation s ,

are possib le (1 ) o n ly the outer ylin c

der A rotates (2 ) o n ly the i n n er ,

cylin der B rotates (3 ) both cyli n ders ,

revo lve in opposite di rectio n s .

I n the first case (F ig 8 7 I ) the .

, ,

stock fed in the direction Of arrow r

a n be treated o n l y if the dista n ce c
F 87 IG
betwee n the work n g su rfaces s l ess
. .

i 1

than the largest measuremen t Of the grai n A grain Of c o m pressed . a

by the surface A travel s in between the surfaces A n d B in a helical a

curve (it would represen t a parabo l a o n a p l an e ) i n fluen ced by its proper ,

gravity (mg ) a n d by frictio n But the grain is liab l e to be crushed by the

.

pressure Therefore the first combin atio n must be rej ected

. .

I n the seco n d case (Fig 8 7 I I ) the cyli n der A bein g statio n ary a n d
.
,

B rotati n g in the directio n s the dista n ce betwee n A n d B may be, a

greater than the l en gth Of the grain F alli n g o n the rfa e B the grain . su c .

receives a percussio n an d reboun ds to A bein g throw n back by A it is

, ,

again throwno n to B 85 0 I t route o n the p lan is marked c d e

, . s , ,

(Fig . 87, I I )
.

the third case i e when A an d B rotate in opposite directio n s the

In , . .
,

grain reboun din g from B would be throw n agai n st A by cen trifuga l

, ,

force I t w ill be e n abl ed to travel down wards if the velocity f rotation

.
,
O
 CH AR I]
II FLO U R MI LLI NG 97

of A is so small that the friction gen erated by the cen trifugal force of A
2
is less than the gravity of the grain here f is the , i . e .
i
f r
WL
- -
< r
ng , w

‘
co efli i n t Of frictio n O f the grai n a n d the surface A r the ra d ius
c e f A , O ,

m the mass Of the grai n n d g acce l eratio n of the gravity

, This
a .

defin es T hough the cal cul atio n of such a velocity is possib le ,

by makin g cyli n der A Of a correspo n din g radius the buildi n g Of the ,

machin e will be comp licated .

I n additio n in regard to the character Of the motio n give n to the

,

grain this type of machin ery approaches the secon d combin atio n n d
,
a ,

therefore it would be purposeless to complicate the machi n e by adoptin g

,

two movin g surfaces .

Of the combin ed motio n s Of A an d B j ust reviewed gen eral practice , ,

has adopted o n ly the seco n d form .

Fig 8 8 represe n ts two cyli n drica l

.

s rfaces A an d B havin g horizon tal

u ,

axes Of rotatio n A in the case Of . s

vertical cylin ders we shall give our ,

atte n tio n to the rotatio n Of but o n e

F 88 IG
cylin der B for the rotatio n Of the
. .

outer cylin der impart s a cen trifugal power to the grain which presses it to ,

the surface but there is n o thihg to impel it out by way of arrow r I t

,
.

woul d be possib l e to treat the grain between tw o movin g cyli n ders but ,

the comp l exity of the machin ery m akes it i n dvisab le in practice The a .

o nly remain in g combin ation is that of o n e statio n ary cylin der A n d o n a e

rotatin g B The cylin der B must be furnished w ith helical b lades to

.

g l v e the grai n a trave ll i n g motio n Th e route of the grai n wi l l be b.

a, ,

c d c af ter the ma nn er O f the thre d o f a screw

’

, , ,
a .

Thus we shall occupy our atte n tio n with two types Of machi n es
havi n g cylin drical workin g surfaces which an swer their purpose Both ,
.

machin es have a n outer statio n ary cylin der A a n d n i nn er rotatin g n ,

a o e .

Compari n g the two sty l es th e advan tage of the first o n e (accepted by

,

engi n eers in America ) must be ackn owledged as the w ork is even ly ,

distributed o v er the who le i n n er surface f A whilst in machin es with a O ,

horizo n tal axis the l ower part of A wh ere the bulk Of grain co ll ects is ,
,

used more than the upper side which brin gs about n un even wear of ,
a

the workin g surface B t as regards the simp icity of co structio

.
lu n n n d a

a n easy access for i n spectio n machi n es with horizo n tal rotatio n are pre
,

fera b le .
98 FLOU R MI LLI NG
r om p . m

Co n ic Gyra ti g S rf ces
n — Fig 8 9 prese n ts the same combi n atio n s of
u a .

co ni c surfaces n d their motio n s as those of the ylin d r ; the sol e di ffer

a e e s

e n ce lies in there bei n g two combin atio n s for the vertical axis with the ,

con e poin tin g upwards n d down wards Th co n sideratio n s men tion ed

a . e

respectin g the combin ation s Of motion f the surface n d Of the product O , a

in the cyl i n ders may be repeated here

,
B t the defect of machi n es with . u

co n ic surfaces in gen eral is t h variability Of their circumferen tial vel o

,
e
'

cities of motion n d con sequen t ly n u n ev en wear of these machin es

,
a ,
a .

B esides if for I we adopt a speed of the rotati n g co n e B at its top D

,

sufficient to rub the husk ff or O

take the germ n d beard away a ,

at base E that speed wi ll be

greater n d might destroy the a

grain I f vice v ersa the upper .

,

part f the casin g will no t O

work .

Of ll combin atio n s of co n ic a

surfaces practice has adopted ,

I nd I I I in w hich o n ly the a ,

inn er co n es gyrate Yet we .

,

must admit that a very grav e "

defect in these machin es viz the ,

.

variab l e speeds f the gyratin g O

w orki n g organ makes the ma ,

chin es with cylin drical surfaces

F 89 IG
. .
preferab l e in practice .

I n combi n ed machi n ery we

Often meet co ni c surfaces poi n ti n g down wards I t is i n terestin g there .

fore to fin d out when the motion of the stock is possib le W . e

shall foll ow the movemen ts Of the co n e A while the con e B remai n s ,

station ary .

The grai n a, lyi n g n the i nn er side of the co n e at the poi n t

o has a a,
2

cen trifugal force 1

c where m is the mass of the grain , v the vel ocity
of gyration Of the con e at a a half of the an gle of the co n e Besides
,
a .

that the grain lies un der the in fluen ce of its o wn weight mg T

, .
. o

all ow the grain to travel down wards the force P must exceed the sum ,

total of the power of frictio n a n d S i e , .

P >

1
S ee p 87
. .
10 0 FL OUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR III

2 . Co n stru ctio n of S ecu ring Ma chin es

i( M a chin es with a V ertica l A x is of Ro ta tio n

It was men tio n ed above that scourin g machin es with a vert ical axis
are bein g al most exc l usively co n structed in America S ome t n years . e

ago the E uropea n factories imitated the American o n es but at presen t ,

scarcely o n of the large factories in E urope builds vertically rotatin g

e

scourin g machin es Th reaso n for this lies in the diffi culty of fi n din g the
. e

FI G . 91 . FI G 9 2
. .

equilibrium of the gyratin g drum n d the heavy l oad o n the step ,

a

bearin g of the drum which carries the who l e weight Th e lighter .

machi ery ith a vertica axis of rotation however brush machin es

n w l — , ,

—
for in stan ce are al so built b yE uropean factories .

A typica l America n scourer emp l oyed for removi n g the germ coat
n d beard as w e l l as scouri n g the she l l s is P rin s machi n e in Mi l wauk ee
’
a , ,
z .

F ig 9 1 gives a ge n eral view of the machi n e the casi n g bein g remo v ed

.
, ,

Fig 9 2 a l o n gitudin a l sectio n F ig 9 3 a sectio n down Z—

.
, Z the step
.
,

bearin g details of the w ire cl oth workin g casin g n d a detail of a beater

,
-

, ,
a

of an other con structio n with a casin g of bossed iro n p late

, .
 CH A P . III ] FL OUR MI I II NG J

is statio n ary
l
revo vi g shaft carr es six discs with beaters U Th upper disc is
n i
1 e
solid the n ether o n is perforated to give access to the outer air
.

e
E ach
,

disc the top n as well is covered with a c

.

, o e
,

the seco n d scouri n g di sc & On , c .

reachin g the last scouri n g disc the grain ,

passes its l ast stage of treatmen t ,

and is the n de livered through the

spout B 1 .

Th e spout B has a valve D 1 ~

1
which automatica lly regu l ates the dis

charge o f fi n ished stock The grain .

The heavier refuse settles o n the sides

of the leg F whi le the lighter par 1 ,

ti l s pass through the fa n either to

c e
,

the dust co llector or i n to the dust

ll n nn—
fo owi g ma er the arrows T T mark the in flux of the air S tream .

in g in through the ho l es in the n s n a directio n opposite to the flow c a s1

g I

of the grai n it drives the loose husks dust bee swi n g beards n d other
,
, , , , a
light matter out through the f n a .

The space betwee n the wire cagi n g n d the beaters is greater at the a

top n d less below owi n g to which the grain u n dergoes a gradually

a
,

i creasin g scouri ng n d is treated with most e n ergy n the last floor before
n
,
a o ,

leav i n g the machi n e On F ig 9 3 w see that the scourin g b lades

.
. e

3 7 are bo lted to the discs which a ll ows them to be rep laced whe n wor
, n

—
.

”
Eu r k f S h
e a n eider J q t eo(I a This
c
( g 94 ) is o n of the
F i , ac u e ( . e

combin ed typ e f machin es On shaft carrie s a f n F beaters 0 n d

‘

o . e 0 a a
, ,

br u shes D The s tatio n ar worki n dr um H is made of erforate d

,
y g p
 [ CH AR III

wire a n d covered w ith a n iro n casin g Th grai n flo w s down A an d . e

is thro w n agai n st the drum where it is en ergetically dealt with by iro n

,

beaters Then dow n the co n ic p l ate of the upper station ary brush the
.
, ,

stock rolls o n to the revolvi n g brush a n d thrown by cen trifugal force in to

,

the space between the grass or wire brushes is freed of the partly cut -

,
-

ski n s a n d o f that part of the dirt still adherin g to it after the scourin g
,
,

a n d lastly flows down the spout B through tube V where it is aspirated .

,
.

T h e heavy refuse is di scharged by spout G t h e me di um through the va l ve K , ,

a nd the li ght matter passes out through the f n Th e air curre n t ru n ni n g a .

through the machin e is marked by arrows poin tin g upwards The .

ta ce betwee the brushes is regu ated by raisin g the step beari n g wi th

n n l -

the aid of a han d wheel m that lifts by a screw the cross head t upo n
- -

whi ch the step bearin g rests The whol e machin e is moun ted o n two
-

hollow cast iro n column s n d driven by a belt pulley S which may be

-

,
a

p laced either at the top or bel ow The n umber of revol ution s is 4 0 0

.

to 5 00 ; its capacity accordi n g to the size of the machin e is 2 0 to 3 0

, ,

bushels per ho r u .

A Br sh Ma chin e fro m the W o rks f f rm S eek Bro

u Fi
( g with o o . s . .

con ic workin g s urfaces of grass brushes is desig n ed for the fin al removal of ,

abraded bra n n o t quite separated by the scourin g machin es dust coll ected ,

in the crease of the grai n n d the semi separated germ e n ve l op e s

,
a Th e -
.

grain fl owin g al o n g spout A o n to the co n ic s rface of the statio n ary upper

,
u

bru sh B falls o n the di sc of the revolvin g brush an d is thr own b y cen trifugal
, ,
104 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR II I

The factory produces these machin es in seven sizes , an d the fo ll owin g

tab le shows their capacity :

TA BL E XI I I

CAP A C I T Y or B RUS H MA CH I N E S

Th e space between the brushes is regulated as in the precedin g ,

machin e with the aid of a supportin g cross head which may be raised
,
-

a n d l owered by mea n s of rods carryin g han d whee l s o n their upper -

screw en ds .

Before en din g our review of the sco rin g machin es w ith a vertical u

axis of revolution it must be n oted that all attempts o n the part of

,

con structors to build a machin e with tw o revolvi n g surfaces failed for ,

the result was either a v ery comp licated co n struction Or the treatmen t
sustain ed by the grain was too severe The grain was n o t o n ly .

scoured but broken down at the same time

,
.

(ii .
) M a chin es with a Ho rizo n ta l Ax is of Ro ta tio n

The most co nv enien t shape for workin g surfaces in machin ery with a
horizo n tal axis of rotatio n is the cylin der though co n i c a n d flat surfaces
,

are al so empl oyed in practice I n a ll machin es with cylin dric co n ic or

.
, ,

flat surfaces gen erally but o n e of them is in motion this bein g the in
, ,

t erio r surface in the first two type

I n describi n g the operatio n of a machin e with horizo n ta l surfaces of
rotatio n it must be poin ted out that o nly n der the most favourab l e
, u

circumstan ces is the whol e of the stoc k caught up by the in n er surface

a n d trave l s in a he lica l l i n e over the worki n g space Th e outer statio n ary .

s u rface is usually whole while the rotatin g in terior o n e is built of separate

,

parts in the shape of beaters or br ushes set in a helical lin e to drive the
, ,

s to ck through the machin e to its e xit ,

CH AR I II ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 1 05

Th e statio n ary workin g surface of these machi n es is gen erally made

of metal (perforated metal s o r wire cl oth ) or of artificial sto n e (mostly ,

of emery carborun dum

, , Th rotati n g surface is made of stee l
e

beaters artificial ston e n d metal or fibre brushes

, ,
a .

I n cal cul ati n g or verifyi n g the capacity of cyli n drical machi n es o n e ,

may be guided by the follo w i n g co n sideration s

S uppose we have a sco u ri n g machin e of the n orma l type w ith n , a

emery or perforated metal casin g o n which the grain is thrown n d

,
, a

treated by beaters The beaters are arran ged asl an t in respect to the
.
,

gen eratin g circl e of the casin g ; owi n g to that i n cli n ation the grain ,

moves o v er the surface of the casin g an d describes a helical lin e the

FI G 9 6 . .

len gth of which depen ds o n the magn itude of the an gle at which the a

beaters are i n cli n ed (Fig .

Th e l o n ger that he lical trajectory of the grai n is n d the thi nn er the layer ,
a
i

of gr n mo v in g alo n g that traj ectory the better will the st k be clean ed

al ,
oc .

The degree of i n c l i n atio n x of the beater w i l l be expressed in depe n d

en ce of the size of the a n g thusc s1

X Ltg a .

The pitch of the helical traj ectory of the grain is

lt z z rt g a .

The n umber of threads in the screw of the tra j ectory is

L L 2

'

h a

The l en gth of the helical traj ectory of the grain is

75 1) L 2

when ce
106 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR I II

the wheat to be satisfactorily c lean ed after a trip le scourin g the

Fo r ,

traj ectory of the grain A has to be M OO in ches l on g The value of A -

.
1

bein g so great in comparison w ith the len gth of the casin g L the l atter ,

may be ign ored un der the radical the i n cli n ation of the beaters then is
L 2

o v er 1 in ch of the pitch of the helical traj ectory of the grain B bush

If .

of grain will be passin g p er h o u r the capacity of the scouri n g machin e

'

may be expr essed as

Q t : B n D tg a z

g
i n Dl .

If the l en gth of A is 1 4 00 in ches as defin ed above B must be recko n ed

, ,

D US T
l

at 20to 2 4 bush per hour (the len gth of D an d L is recko n ed in i n ches )

.

This formul a coi n cides al most perfect l y with the practical data
obtain ed by perso n al observ atio n of the operatio n of horizo n tal emery .

scourin g machin es in R ussian n d foreig n factories a .

Let us n o w pass to the con structive descriptio n of these machin es .

The em ery s co rin g ma chin e of the fa ct ry fo rm S eek B ro s (Fig 9 7 )

u o . . .

may be regarded as the n ormal type of machin e of this kin d .

I n a statio n ary emery casi n g a there rotates at a speed of 3 5 0 to

7 00 re v o l utio n s per min ute (varyi n g wit h the size of the machi n e ) a dru m ,

furni shed with beaters b which fli n g the grain fed (E inl auf ) i n to the
,

casin g again st its sides where the shell s are cut open a n d torn o ff by the
,

sharp edges of the emery .

1
The circu m feren tial velo city o f the b ea te rs e m
pl o ye d w a s 1 5 mt,
pe r sec , t . h directio n rad ia l
eir ,
 108 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH A R III

The S ea a rer b
f

y f—
(a TO the same type of machi n ery
Na bho l tz .

belo n gs the emery scourer co n st ructe d of iro n by the D b ro fl? 85 o

Na bho lt factory in Mosco w

z I n this machi n e th
. time the grain e

takes to pass through it may be regulated .

I n Fig 9 8 we see that the sco rer co n sists

.
f a rotatin g drum
u O

co n tain in g iro n beaters a leather casin g b n d a fa n 0 The beaters

a, ,
a .

FI G
. 98 .

in the drum have a less an gl e of in c lin ation here than in scourers Of the
n orma l type .

The app lia n ce adapted to regul ate the time of passage through the
machin e co n sists of the foll owi n g Opposite the sieve coverin g the
O pe n i n g O f the emery casi n g o n the i n side there are arra n ged va lves i i
,

formin g a ven etian b li n d These valves are co nn ected by a common rod

.

en di n g o n the outside in g with a screw—

,

thread a n d a h an d wheel h The -

ven etian b lin d con veys the stock in a helical li n e defin ed by the an gl e of
the i n clin ation B y mean s of the han d wheel h n d the rod g a greater
.
-
a

or smaller in clin atio n may be impart ed to the valves in accordan ce with ,

W hich the grai n wi ll ass faster or s l ower throu h the worki chamber
p g n
g ,
CHAR III ] FLOU R MI LLI NG 10 9

owing to the i n fluen ce the ven etian b lin d (paten t of the factory ) has in
this case upo n the pitch of the helical route f the grain O .

Th e S haft of the drum rotates o n b a ll beari n gs (Fig -

AS r . e

gards other details in its main out li n es the machin e does n o t differ from
,

the n ormal type of scourer .

T Ro bin so n s E m ery S co u rer —Th e greater part Of E n glish a n d

’
. .

American factories have deve l oped their o w n type f scouri n g machi n ery
O ,

differen t from the E uropean n ormal type of co n structio n the f n ,

a

an d the scouri n g drum bei n g set o n o n n d the same axis whi l e the o n
e a ,
c

v y r which carries the heavy refuse away has been supp l an te d by a

e o

hopper from when ce the screen in gs pass out by themselves B esides .

that the machin e is en c lose d in a chamber which e n ds in a box for heavy

,

refuse at the bottom .

Fig 1 00 represe n ts a scouri n g machi n e f Thos R obi n so n s w orks

’
. O . ,

at R ochdale (E n glan d ) I n the statio n ary casi n g K covered w ith emery

.

mass o n the i n side there rotates a scouri n g drum D On the same haft
,
,
. S
1 10 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR III

1) as the drum is set a f n A Th e drum is en closed in a chamber

a .

en di n g in a hopper B below The machin e Operates in the foll o win g

.

man n er Th stock is delivered in to the feeder provided with a bal an ced

e

valve an d passes through the aspirator l g s to the hopper b which co n

, e ,

veys the grai n i n to the machin e W hil e passi n g through the tube 8 the
.
,

stock is subj ected to th first aspiration n d freed of the light matter

e ,
a .

I n the emery casi n g the grain is separated from germ coveri n g beard , ,

an d hells almost ll of which pass through the sieve d down the whol e
S , a

l en gth of the casi n g because through the meshes the casi n g is p l ay e

,
d on
by a s tro n g exh aust Th e light partic l es passi n g through d are sucked
.
, ,

up through the spout Q to the f n l eaving the l ess light matters o n a ,

their way in the refu se box r while the heavier imp rities fall down in to
‘
,
u

the hopper B The c lean sed grai n flows to its exit down c n d is for
.
,
a

FI G . 1 00 .

the third time aspirated here by a co trary air curren t e which carries n -

away ll the light matter remain i n g after the boltin g o n d Thus the air
a -
.
,

is co n veyed to the fa n from the casin g chamber n d by the two spouts a ,

T a n d T where the grai n is purified at its i n gress a n d egress

I , .

Th e fact that this machi n e has a commo n shaft for the fa n

~

a n d the scouri n g drum n d the abse n ce of a co n veyor

,
a S imp lify its ,

co n structio n to a l arge exte n t a n d reduce the expen diture of power for

,

drivin g the f n n d the con veyor B u t a commo n shaft compel s both

a a .

the f n an d the scouri n g drum to perform the same n umber of revo l

a u

tio n s H owever if the expen diture Of air be correctly cal culated a n

.
, ,

equal rotatio n may be assig n ed to the drum n d the fan an d o n a , c se

quen tly this circumstan ce cann ot be viewed as a defect

, .

Th e drum of the machi n e rotates with the ve l ocity Of 3 5 0 to 4 80

revolutio n s per min ute a n d th capacity is 4 0 to 2 80 bushel s per hour
,
e ,

accordi n g to the size of the machin e .

1 12 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ C H AR I II

by a draught in s impell ed by the f n up T The heavier particles of

1 ,
a I .

refuse passi n g through S fall i n to hopper D the l ess heavy o n es settl e , ,

in the dust air chamber G whi l e the light matter is car

-
ried out through,

the f n a .

This machi n e is i n terestin g in its co n ceptio n but firstly it is comp li , , ,

c te d in co n structio n seco n d l y the path of the grai n wi ll n t be s lidin g

a , , o ,

as the author mai tai s but wi

n n ll r n in —
a broken lin e 1 2 3 4 5— — ,
u -

for the an gl e of in ciden ce of the grain gen erates a n iden tica l an gl e of

reflectio n Co n se q ue n t ly the grain will be s c red through its succes
.
, e u

sive p ercussio n s agai n st the emery surface of the c asin g

—
.

B ru sh M chin eQ Fig 1 0 2 represen ts a ho ri zo n ta l brush machi n e

a .
,

the essen tial poin ts in the co n structio n of w hich are as follo w s .

Th e arrow a mark s the path of the grai n i n to the chamber A Of the

machin e P assi n g through the .

feeder it is exposed to a draught ,

r i n duced by the f n E which a ,

removes light impurities Th e .

chamber A is a rectan gular box

with a semi cylin dric bo ttom -

formed by the surface Of a bo ltin g

co v er B The rotatin g drum D .
-

F 1 02 IG .
carries a brush arran ged in a
,

S pira l I n c l ean sin g the grai n of .

th e dust secreted in its creases a n d abraded bra n the brush dri ves the , ,

product to the exit a where it en cou n ters the air curren t r which— ] , 1

carries the light refuse remai n in g after bo ltin g o n B i n to the worm

box E Th thro gh s of the sieve B are taken by th worm to the
. e u e

discharge spout n d delivered through a Th e hafti n g is suffi cie n t l y a . S

outli n ed in the drawi n g S ometimes a belt drive takes the p lace f . O

—
the gear drive k k betwee n the brush n d the worm 1
a .

This machi n e with s light a l teratio n s is bui lt by al most l l E uropean

, ,
a

works .

Th brush drum ru n s at the rate Of 7 5 to 9 0 revo l utio n s per mi n ute

e -

the fa n 5 00 to 6 0 0 Th capacity of the machin e is 1 0 to 5 0 bushel s per

. e

hour varyin g with the size f the machin e

, O .

iii
( ) . Co m bina tio n S ecu ring Ma chin es
In cases where the process of grain cl ean in g must be shorten ed -

ou t of con sideratio n s Of eco n omy separate boltin g or brush machin es ,

 CHAP . mJ FLOUR MI LLI NG 1 13

for the fin al freein g of grain Of the shells are n o t i n stalled but combin ed ,

machin ery is gen erally brought i n to use S uch machin ery is mostly .

desig n ed for small mill s .

W f
o l s C m b i n tio n Ma chin e
’
o — Fig 1 0 3 S hows a n America n machi n e
a .

from The W o lf CO works in Chambersburg I t is a combin ation .

”
.

of the sec u rin g n d brush machin es The product is fed o n aa .

l o n gitu di n all y rockin g tray A where l arge n d sma ll impurities are , a

separated from it Then it run s down i n to the s c rin g drum meeti n g

. s e u ,

a curren t Of air 8 o n its way which carries off the dust a n d light refuse
1 ,
,

a n d is then co n ducted through tube t to th f n F (the fu ll le n gth of the e a

tube t is n o t shown in the sec

tio n l drawi n g )
a Th scourin g . e

part of the machin e co n sists of a

perforated metal cas n g B n d a i a

drum C the latter bei n g a haft, S

o n which seve r al coru n dum (ki n d of

emery ) discs are set as lan t W hen .

the dr m is rotatin g the discs

u , .

compel the grai n to move to n d a

fro over the l ower part Of the

casin g the backward movemen t
,

bein g S horter than the forward .

Trave lli n g to the exit k in this

way the grain is scoured Th e
, .

spout L takes it to the brush

machin e D from when ce follow ,
.

F 10 3 IG
in g arrow s it passes to the
. .

2,

out let en coun teri n g n air curren t

,
which removes the light particles
a 83,

that had n o t passed through the perforated casin g deliveri ng them to

the hopper E .

Both the coru n dum s c u ring an d the brush machi n e are S O aspirated e

as to subj ect the stock un dergoin g treatmen t to a trip le exhaust ,

viz when fed to the machin e in the worki n g chamber n d at its

.
, , a

deliv ery ; while in additio n if we take i n to con sideratio n the fann in g ,

the grain receives in passin g out of the corun dum scourin g part to the
brush machin e we m y recko n the aspiratio n to be qui n tup l e
,
a .

This machin e represe n ts the combin a

”
G J c tu ehin s Reco rd
’
. . c .
-

tion of a zigzag separator a n d a scourer n d pertain s therefore to the ,

a , ,

cl ass Of machin es servin g for decorticatin g the grain .

I t works in the fo ll owi n g ma n n er The grai n whe n fed i n to a .

,

H
1 14 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C HA R I n

F
( gi . before falling o n the first S ieve of the separator B passes ,

through a curren t of air i n duced by the f n C a .

Th e light matters such as dust chaff husks a n d shrive ll ed grain

, , , , ,

differin g from the soun d grain in their S pecific gravity are carried out ,

through the spout b to the chamber A I n that chamber as outlin ed

.
,

in dots there are arra n ged a system Of partitio n s

,
n d a va lve n to a

FI G
. 1 04 .

reg ul ate as required the draught which carries the li ghtest partic les
, ,

through the delivery spout f ; the heavier particles coll ect in the
chamber A .

The impurities sett li n g in the mouth of the chamber A o v ercome by

th eir weight the pressure of the outer air upo n the valv es e an d e n d 1 2 ,
a

open in g them automaticall y fall out I n this way free of ll light

,
.
,
a

foreign particl es a n d dust the grain falls out of the fee der o n to the
,

S ieve of the zigzag separator .

O n S ieve 1 are e l imi n ated the l argest impurities such as straws l umps, ,
116 FL OU R MI LLI NG [ CH A R II I

swirling ir Curre nts develop a cen trifugal force which thro w s the
a

heavier particl es in to the spout l w here they slide down to the outl et , .

Th e l ess heavy matter fa ll s i n to the spout c whil e the lightest particl es

.
,

are se n t to the f n through d a .

This machin e is r ather bu lky n d the i n adjustability of the di stan ce

,
a

o n ce estab lished between the sto n es b locks the passage for grain s of a ,

l arger ize thus produci n g a l arge perce n tage

S ,
f broke n grai n Th O . e

n atura l resu l t f t h is has bee n its droppi n g out of use

O .

A n E mery S
-
ec u rer by the Mecha n ica l E n gin eer , V . A . M c ska lefi
machi n e with vertical gri n dston es is design ed to adjust
Mo ska l eff s ’

, ,

the distan ce bet w een the surfaces automatically Co n sequen tly the .
,

aim of this device is to set

aside the defect of the mill sto n e ,

i e the breakage of grai n (Fig . . .

a horizon tal shaft 1 there is On

set a metal di sc 2 e n c losed in a
casi n g 3 of the s me materia l a n d a ,

rotated by a belt pulley 4 To -

the fro n t a n n u lar part of the di sc

n emery w asher 5 is fixed by a

bo lts the heads f w hich are su nk , O

i n to the w asher A imilar . S

washer 6 but composed Of two ,

Fm 1 0 5 ,
halves is attached to t h e bottom
, ,

of the casi n g Th grain is f d . e e

in to the machi n e by pouri n g it through th hopper 7 i n to the fun n el 8 e ,

w hich covers the middle co n cave part Of the dis sh p d to suit the form c,
‘

a e

of the basin 9 .

Th e f un n el 8 is adj ustab l e n d set o n three bo lts the heads Of which rest

a ,

o n the flexib l e p l a tes attached to the fu n n e l n d by w hich it is pressed ,

a

agai n st the disc ; Th grai n poured in to the funn el is thro w n by cen trifugal
e

force to its edges in n even layer A sufficien t quan tity of stock in

a .

the basin 9 bei n g give n a cen trifugal motio n presses back the rim of
, ,

the fun n el n d the grain is even ly distributed in a f n hape through

, a a S ,

the an n ul ar aperture n o w open i n to the w orkin g space between the ,

emery w ashers I this m an n er the funn el p l ays the part of n applian ce

. II a

fOr the equab l e feedin g f the worki n g surfaces O .

Th pressure of the grai n again st the rotati n g washer 5 is tra n smitted by

e .

S —
a pri g through the footstep bearin g to the stop 1 0 with han d wheel l l
n -
.
F LOUR '

MI LLI NG 1 17
1 18 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR III

This spri n g is the te n sio n brake of the wa sher 5 Th e S pri n g must -

.

be S O cal cul ated as to co n tract when the washer is press ed by grain s

of l arger ize a n d the n the distan ce between the washers in creases an d
S , ,

the grain leav es the workin g space u n broken .

Th actio n of the han d wheel 1 1 co n tro l s the degree of pressure of

.

e -

the washer 5 an d the distan ce between the washers At the other en d

,
.

of the S haft 1 there is a guard bolt 1 2 which defin es the l east distan ce
between the washers Th fini shed grai n passes through the S pout 1 3 in
. e

the l ower part of the casin g an d through the tru nk 1 4 where a draught ,

of air aspirated by the fan 1 5 carries the husks an d beeswin g away The
'

air l aden with light impurities is driven out of the f n to the expan sio n a

chamber 1 6 where it deposits the l ess light matter in the h Op p er 1 7

, ,

whil e the lighter refuse passes through the di scharge Openin g 1 8 a n d is ,

carried out through the tube 1 9 The a ir draught is con troll ed by a .

lid 2 0 which is open ed more or l ess as occasio n deman ds

, , .

F o r the bal an c in g Of the disc 2 o n its reverse th ere i a s lide 2 1 al o n g ,

s

which two iron pl ates are hifted n d may be fixed in an y particul ar spot S ,
a .

The idea of this machi n e is u n doubted ly correct a n d we shall return ,

to it again whe n S peakin g Of mi ll sto n e ets with v ertical worki n g surf aces
,
S .

3 . S p ecia l Ma chinery
Gra in Clea n ing with g process of grai n c B
l ea i
ra n
n n g —I the
n s ec u rin ,

the germ co v ers husks an d beard are supposed to be removed as well as the
, ,

mud stickin g to the berries Gen erally after a series of machin es sepa .
,

ratin g away ll extran eous matter the stock is treated o n the impure
a ,

scourer with the view of removin g the dirt together with the germ covers
n d a part of the husks F o r this reaso n Ha ggen m a h er s n ew machi n e
’
a . c

must be referred to that type of machin ery which c lean s the outer skin
of the grain I t is well kn o wn that al mon d bran is used for cl ean in g
.

f u rs Fin e rye an d wheat bran is Often made use of too for c leanin g
.

delicate l eathers (Chamois Th e harp edges Of bra n seem to work , S

like chisel s in scrapi n g the thi n coatin g of dirt o ff the surface Of the
obj ect E viden tly these con sideratio n s led Haggen m a cher to his id ea
.
,

of washin g the grain with bran .

The machin e for c l ean in g the gram with bran (Fig 1 0 7 ) co n sist s .

of n iron drum A 7 1 0 x 3 1 0 mm in dimen sio n s moun ted o n two

a , .
,

U shaped iro n beams

-

On four beari n gs B a n d C resti n g o n the

.
,

same iro n beams there are two shafts rotatin g in Opposite direc
,

tion s o n e with the vel ocity Of 1 00 rev ol ution s the o ther of 1 2 0 revolu ,
1 20 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CHAR III

tio n s per mi n ute The en ds of these shafts let i nto the drum A carry two
.

j our n al s D —
D with pi n s E I n the upper part of the drum there is a n
.

outlet 2 00 x 2 0 0 mm in size covered with a valve F w hich is pressed

.
,

agai n st the drum by two weights G set o n l evers o n either ide of the valve ,
S .

Th e grai n mixed with bra n o n passi n g out of the drum through the
outl et flows i n to the exhaust tru n k L The air is sucked in to that tru nk .

through an aperture M covered with a n et Th grain n d bran are fed e a

to the machin e through the funn el Q n d then through two spouts N —

, .

N a

I n the l ower part of the drum A there is a n out l et covered with a gate
v alv e for the discharge Of its co n ten ts at the n d Of the operatio n
,
e .

—
W he n the j ourn al s D D are brought i n to motio n in the mass Of stock
fillin g the drum A the bran co mes i n to l OSe co n tact with the grain
,
c

movin g from the axis to the periphery of the drum a n d rubs the dust
off the outer covers n d out of the creases Of the grai n
a .

Th bra n used in grai n c l ean i n g is fi n e

e n d the amo u n t required for ,
a

that purpose is 1 0 per cen t of th stock in treatme n t P roportion ally

. e .

to the accumulatio n of the grain an d bran the pressure in the dr m ,

u

grows un ti l a momen t arrives w hen valve F is lifted a n d part of the

, , ,

mixture is ej ected out of the drum in to the aspirated t ru n k L From .

this tru n k the grai n passes i n to a whizzer for separatin g the bran .

A machi n e with a drum of the above me n tio n ed di me n sio n s is sup -

posed to cl ean 1 30 0 bushel s of grain per day (twen ty four hours ) -

.

4 . The W et S ec u rin g a nd W a shing P ro cess

It has bee exp ai ed a ready that the so called grain washin g is to

n l n l -

be regarded as n e of the processes of scourin g To distin g i sh it from

o . u

scourin g proper a n d the bran washi n g method Of c l ean in g it may be ,

n amed the wet scouri n g process

-

This scourin g process is app lied o n ly .

to wheat .

W he n Ama n dus Kah l s w asher appeared in H amburg some twe n ty

’

— —
years ago it appeared earlier still in E n gl a n d the i n ve n tor certai nl y
i n te n ded it to wash o ff the dirt B t eve n then in additio n to these . u ,

m achin es a whizzer was used for dryi n g a n d shelli n g the grain The
, .

grain was carried to the whizzer out Of the w ater tan ks by the same -

water it was washed in n d en ergeticall y stirred with the paddles of the

,
a

rotatin g drum .

H owever co n trary to the primary i d ea Of washin g the dirt off the

,

grain practical experie n ce in grain washin g has led the en gin eers to a type
,

of washin g process which by its n atur e is a wet scouri n g process -

.
C H AR III ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 12 1

A ccordi g to our observatio the wet scourin g proces s co n sists

n n, -

of the foll owi n g : The grain is immersed in water for a short time '

(3 0 to 4 0 seco n ds ) T he n the excess of w ater coverin g the grai n is

.

removed by whizzin g D uri n g this i n terval owi n g to the compara

.
,

tivel y great hygroscopic properties of the bra n the ski ns absorb a fairly ,

even amou n t of moisture a n d swell The n the grai n is dried I n , .

.

dryi ng the moisture in the outer S ki ns evaporates faster n d they have

, , a

a ten den cy to co n tract whereas the seed shell s still co ntainin g part of
,
-

the absorbed moisture resist co n tractio n This causes n in n er ten sio n

, . a

in the outer ski ns n d they burst , a This fact is a n a l ogous to the burst
.

in g of a hoop o n a dry barre l o n its bein g fi ll ed with water a n d swe lli n g ,

or the radial burstin g of wood when quickly dri d e t

On taki n g a berry after it has bee n dried a n d rubbi n g it gen tly

between the palms of the han ds we fin d that it is easily shelled W hen , .

i n spected un der a microscope the shells prove to be the berry husks ,

-
.

Grai n washin g in mi ll s probab ly first appeared in E n gl an d w hich ,

used to receive a n d sti ll receives grain from ll parts of the world a .

B esides bein g po ll uted n atura lly in the p l aces of productio n the ,

co n ditio n s of tran sport Often co n tributed their share of impurities to the

grain Fo r in stan ce in the eighties of the last cen tury E n glan d
.
, ,

imported wheat from R ussian ports o n the B lack S ea in coal ho lds

of S hips that had imported coal in to Russia .

I t is evide n t that much l abour fell to the l o t of E n g lish e n gi n eers in

in ven tin g washin g machin ery before the prob lem w a s bri lliantly solved .

A moder n p l a n t for scouri n g the grai n b v washi n g has to perform

three Operatio n s successively viz ,

()
1 D ampi n g the grai n copious l y .

( )
20
M echa n i ca l r emo v a l of water from O ff the grai n .

()
3 D ryi n g the grai n .

I n exami n i n g the process of sc ouri n g by washin g we shall i n spect the ,

machin es an d apparatuses pertain in g to it in the order they foll ow in

the proc ess
—
.

Th Ro bin so n s W a shing P r cess

.
’
()1 D a m p in g th
o e G.ra in I n the
dampin g of grain Th R obin so n s works take i nto con sideration the soft
.
’

a n d hard wheats W e.
sha ll begi n by exami n i n g the app l ia n ce for dampi n g
the soft wheat Fig 1 0 8 is a sketch of such a p lan t the main parts of
. . ,

which are the two tan ks No 1 a n d 2 n d a worm con veyor B The tank s .
,
a .

NO 2
.
is arra n ged in the fo l l owi n g ma n n er T h e upper cy l i n drica l part
. e n d s
in a co n e at the bottom pro v ided with a discharge cock 0 T h e cy li n der is .

pro vided with an in clin ed lid K an d has a drain S pout L leadi n g to tank
 122 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR I II

W a terf ro m
th e feed p ip i n g .

whizzer .

Tc ca n a li sa ti o n .

To ca n a l isa ti o n .

FI G 1 0 8
. .

the gui din g paddl es in turbin es The grain fall s out of the spout M o n
.

the con e whil e the w ater flows out o f ta n No 4 d o wn the t u be E u n der

, k .
124 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR III

a nd is the n delivered to the vertical whizzer Out of the gen era l .

tan k the w ater is supp lied by a ce n trifuga l pump A B oth worms are .

pl ayed o n with fresh water from a series Of cocks .

Th ta n ks F a n d B are iso l ated n d have differe n t w ater l e v el s

e a Th . e

drives of the co n veyors n d pumps are c learly marked out Fig 1 1 0

'

a . .

represen ts the gen eral view .

M h i l R m l f W m h G i —A fter bei g we ll
()
2 c e n ca a v t r
fr e toe r
aa n o a e n o

dampen ed the grain falls through s pout P (Fig 1 0 8 ) to the vertical whizzer .

to remove the water This Operatio n must be performed very r apidly

.
,

otherwise the water will pen etrate the starchy part of the grain an d its ,

moisture co n ten t wi ll exceed the n ormal limit .

R obi n so n s cen trifugal or vertica l w hizzer (Fig 1 1 1 ) co n sists of a

’
.

v ertical rotatin g drum con tai n in g beaters arran ged spirally The grain .

is fed in at the base Of the drum by n in clin ed spout from the worm a

through the in l et n d is met by the beaters revo lvi n g at the rate of 70

,
a

feet per seco n d (the drum makes 3 6 0 to 6 0 0 revo l utio n s per min ute ) .

The beaters fli n g the grai n agai n st a steel casi n g perforated to l t t h e , e

w ater nd a
a braded bran escape The grain impelled by the beaters .

hits the casin g n d by the b low owin g to the decrease f the great velocity
,
a ,
O

Of motio n f the grai n the coati n g of water is thro w n Off by ce n tri

O ,

fugal force n d expelled through the ho les Of the casin g This is the
a .

action n amed w hizzin g The in g n i t of separate sectio n s eight

'

. ca s co s s s ,

or more in n umber (gen eral F r the rete n tio n of the sp l ashi n g

“

water the perforated casin g is en c losed in an oth er casin g of so lid iro n The
,
.
 CHAR I II ] FLO U R MI LLI NG 125

sp iral lifters rapidly raise the grain to th top a n d deliver it thr o ugh n out
e
a
let spout .
Besides the removal of water part of the beesw i n g bran an d
,
, ,

beards is separated o n the way up Co n sequen t ly by a seco n d peration

.

, O

the grain is simp ly scoured w hen thrown by the lifters agai n st the casin g
,
.

(3 ) The D rying cf Gra i n —The most importan t stage of the wet

scourin g process is the dryi n g Of the grain I t is dan gerous to leave the
.

grain with a moisture above the n ormal for that would lead to un favour
,

ab le co n sequen ces in the treatmen t to follow Overdryi n g is likewise to

.
12 6 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ CHAR In

be av oided as the grain then beco mes brit tl e a n d gives a large percen tage
, ,

O f broke n ker n e l s whe n subj ected to dr scouri n g I n additio n the

y .
,

bra n of the o v er dry grain will be groun d to bran powder duri n g the
-

milli n g process from which it is impossibl e to extract the flour

,
.

I t is o n ly by carefu l experime n tal treatme n t of the grain indryin g

a n d coo li n g machi n es coup l ed with bservatio n s o n the moisture of the
, O

grain to be dampen ed that the temperature a n d the vo lume of the dryin g

air a n d the quan tity of grain to be dried may be defined F o r thi s .

reaso n a ratio n ally co n structed dryin g a n d coolin g apparatus must be

,

adj ustab le in r espect to the temperatur e n d vo l ume of the air in use a ,

a n d the qua n tity of grai n to be treated at a time .

R obi n so n s dryer (Fig like machi n es of other desig n

’
.
,

of a rectan gul ar section Tw o S ides of the co l um n are so lid ,

while the other two co n sist of two parallel perforated walls Th grain . e

fed in through hoppers A a n d B fl Os betwee n those wall s n d is sub ,

a

j e c t e d to the actio n of a draught from the chamber G which pe n etra te s ,

,

through the h ol es in the walls The warm air is aspirated from the steam .

chamber through the aperture Z by a f n an d after passin g through the a , ,

stock is exhausted through tru n k j F o r about o n e third of its way

, .
-

the grain is exhausted with cold air (temperature of the mill apartmen ts )
aspirated by an other f n a n d ej ected through the tru n k D At the warm
a .

a ir i n l et Z the c ol um n is divided by a so l id bottom which preve n ts the

,

col d air from pen etrati n g in to the chamber G .

B efore proceedi n g to further descriptio n s of the co n structio n the S igni ,

fi ca n ce of cool i n g the stock must be exp l ai n ed .

The temperature of the dryin g air depe n di n g o n the damp n ess of the ,

grain v aries between 2 5 a n d 6 0 C S ometimes when the stock is very

,
° °
.
,

dry the col umn is filled with air of the outside temperature u n w armed
,
.

I n that case the fu n ctio n s of both the upper n d the l ower di visio n of a

the co lumn ar iden tical B t when the temperature f the air has to
e . u O

be raised to 3 0 —6 0 C a o o lin g o f the grai n is n ecessary for the foll owin g

‘
° °
,
c

reaso n s Th e dried a n d warm grain is deposited in bin s to be tempered

.

for the space of eight to twelve hours to allow the mo isture co ll ected in ,

the bran to spread eve nly in the en dosperm as well to facilitate ,

the treatmen t Of the stock in dry scourin g n d millin g The grain a .

deposited in bin s without havin g been coo led previously retain s its high ,

temper ature which acts detrimen tally upo n it because if tempered

, , ,

fo r a l o n g time it may fi rst germi n ate a n d seco n dl y the starch may

, ,

become soaked to a paste Moreover durin g the con ditioni n g the .

,

bran becomes cool ed first thus accel era tin g t h e process of evaporatio n
,
12 8 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH A R III

in the outer cov er s n d the temperin g period in con seq en ce is shorten ed

‘

,
a u .

F o r regu l ati n g the feedi n g of the co lum n there are valve flaps K in

FI G . 1 12 .

the hoppers A a n d B which may be open ed wider or less by mean s

,
Of a
cran k mechan ism M That mechan ism con trol s at the same time
.
th e
C HA R III ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 12 9

by a valve flap L worked by a gear wheel n d rack n

a o
t he flap . Th e opposite en d of the cra n k mechan ism carries w eight

FI G
. 1 13 .

to coun terbal an ce the load of grai n o n the flaps K .

An other dryer a n d co n ditio n er built by R obi n so n s w orks (Malli n

’

so n s pate n t ) of a more comp licated co n structio n is shown in F ig 1 1 3

’
. .
, ,

I
1 30 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH A R III

A more equab e i
l dry n g of g rain is rea li sed by mea n s of the fo l l owin g
appli an ces I n the workin g space in the right han d side of the
.
-

column there are vertical spouts fed with steam from the heatin g
,

chamber E At the top in the hopper A these spouts are conn ected
.
, ,

by a common horizo n tal tru nk W ithin the workin g space the grain
.
,

travel s in a zigzag lin e owin g to the in clin ed partition s thus assistin g

, ,

the stirrin g of the gram Through open in gs in the partition s the

.
,

warm air exhausted through the spout G by a f n pen etrates in to the

a

stock from the chamber H The vertical steam pipes are desig n ed to
.

main tain n even temperature in the workin g space fo r in th colu mn of

a ,
e
1 32 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR II I

is the E n glish machin e for washin g coke slightly mo di fied The , .

machin e con sists f a tan k di vided in to six sectio n s in which the

O ,

water circul ates in the fo llowi n g mann er .

Th fresh water pl ayi n g the g rain is delivered through ho les

e

in the p ipi n g a n d co ll ecti n g in No 1 (Fig 1 1 5 ) is pumped al o n g the

, . .

tube d to the chamber F by a cen trifugal pump C from F it flows over

into No 5 a n d NO 6 two v essel s commun icatin g with each other
. .
,

Fi
( g 1.1 6 ) out of No s 5 a n d 6 the water fi ll s NO 4 which l ikewise has
. .
,

S ection thro u g h E F .

FI G . 1 16 .

a co nn ectin g chan n el I n this ma nn er divisio n s Nos 1 an d 2 separated

.
, .

from NOS 3 4 5 an d 6 have a communicatory Open in g b whil e the di rty

.
, , ,

water flows out of No 2 through the pipe 9 Th e di vision s NOS 5 a nd 2

. . .

Fi
( g 1 1 7
.
) are co v ered o n differe n t heights with perforated scree n s N o s 6 .

a n d 4 e n case woode n pisto n s m a n d l dri v e n by a n ecce n tric D urin g the .

Operatio n of the machin e these pisto n s agitate the s rface of the water u

over the perforated lid givi n g from 1 80 to 2 00 vibratio n s per min ute
, .

The work is performed as fo ll ows : the grai n is fed i n t o worm C :

in the stream of water Then it is carried by th worm to the hopper

. e ,

when ce the feed ro ll er r passes it o n to the surface of the screen of divisio n

FLOU R MI LL I NG

S I MON S MA CHI N E
’
W A S H I NG .

S E CTI ON THR OU GH
FI G . 1 17 .
1 34 F LO U R MI LLI NG [ CH AR III

No . where the vibratin g stream washes it away to the overfl ow p an d

5, ,

further to the l ower en d of con v eyorB I n travellin g to the o v erflow p .

the grain passes over divisio n No 3 with a l owered screen a n d leaves the
.

heavy extran eous matter (ston es & c ) o n it so that NO 3 serves as , .

, .

a sto n er .

To prev e n t a hea v y o v erflow of water bei n g pumped from the chamber F

in to di visio n No 5 there is a fun n el—
.
,S haped Open in g in F o v er the water
i nl et which is the en d of the tube supp lyi n g NO 4 with water Owin g
, . .

to this tube the water l ev el in No s 5 a n d 6 is kept at about the same height

. .

The wash in g machin e j u st examin ed (H S imo n s ) has two worms

’
-

.
,

though it may be provided with but o n e B (Turn er s machin e ) I n the ,

’
.

l atter case the grai n is fed straight in to the hopper a n d the n ce to di visio n ,

No . 5 .

Wmust poi t out s me defects of th s machin e before pr oceed g

e n o i in .

to describe whizzin g a n d dryin g machin ery of other makes The .

mistake the makers Of these machin es make li es in their supposin g ,

the washin g of grain to be the chief fun ction of the machin e That is .

why its co n struction is comp licated by the di visio n s NOS 5 n d 3 i n the . a

tan k with vibratin g surfaces .

This pri n cip l e is adaptab l e in the case of coke a porous substan ce , ,

which is in deed washed by the water impelled in to the pores by strokes .

'

As to the grai n a ll it n eeds is to be well damp

,
Th e grai n must n o t .

be immersed for l on ger than thirty to forty secon ds which is n o t a l on g ,

en ough period for the di rt firmly stickin g either to the surface Ofthe grain ,

or in its crease to be washed Off, .

A v ibratory mechan ism is therefore n o t required I f o n the other .

,

han d the agitatio n of the water surface is to be abolished it is e viden t

, ,

that R obin so n s type Of washin g machin e or o n e akin to it must be

’
-

, ,

adopted .

B esides this esse n tia l defect resulti n g from a misun derstan di n g of the
,

pri n cipl e of the machin e faults in co n structio n must be men tio n ed

,
.

A wish to make the machin e so lid i n duced the e n gi n eers to utilise the
pressure Of the pump in drivin g the g rain to the overflow This results .

in a fluctuatio n Of the water l eve l s in spite Of the tube e devised for the ,

compe n satio n of the strokes Th e open in g in the partition between No 1

. .

a n d No 2 regul ates the water l eve l of No 1 but vio l ates the pri n cip l e of
"

. .
,

cou n ter curren t (di rty water washin g di rty grain ) for there is a possibility ,

of the dirty water bein g exhausted through the open in g out of the di v i
sio n No 2
—
. .

The R em o va l of W a ter fro m the Gra in As regards the separatio n of

1 36 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ C H AR III

Un der S uch circumstan ces the grain is certainly well rin sed but this ,

process is somewhat dan gerous because the grain may remain in the
,

water for too l o n g a time S O that the starchy part may absorb too much
,

moisture F o r this reaso n hori zo n tal whizzers a re gradually dropping

.

Ont f use
O .

Th e grai n is ge n erally fed i n to the whizzer after the water has bee n

drai n ed o ff S ome e n gi n eers wish n o t o n ly th orough ly to soak the

.

grain but actually to wash it I n this respect the washin g pro

,

cess Of th e firm o f S eek Bros (Fig 1 2 0 ) deserves atten tio n Here

. . .

we have the full proc ess From the s ton er A th grain n d water
’

. e a

flow in to the first w hizz er B At t h bottom Of the apparatus the

.
’

grain is well rin sed in the seco n d apparatus C I f the time is accu
'

ra t l y cal cu l ated
e t his process may bri n g good results Y t the
, _
. e
anu . m] FLO U R MI LLI NG 1 37

e ngi neers ought n o t to co n cen trate their who le atten tion o n the washin g
of the grain but S houl d remember that we have here a n exampl e of the
,

proces s of sec u rin g by washin g .

Fig 1 2 1 represe n ts the washi n g p l a n t from the works Of Luther

. Here .

1 is a b in 2 a sto n e separator 3 a ri n si n g app lian ce 4 a ce n trifuga l

, , ,

pump 5 a vertical whizzer 6 a dryer 7 a collectin g f n n el 8 a hot air

, , , u ,

exhaust 9 a cold air exhaust 1 0 the heatin g chamber 1 1

, , ,

co ll ector 1 2 a dryer 1 3 a deliv ery

’

, ,

pump 1 4 a wa ter cistern a nd 1 5

,
‘
,

a dust collector .

The D i
ry ng of the Gra i n — In
dryin g grai n that most importan t ,

stage in the wet sco urin g process ,

the selectio n of the tw e Of dryin g .

apparatus is a very serio us ques

tio n I n the first p lace we must
.
,

ackn owledge that the most active

agen t in the dryin g process is the
air This absorbs the greater a
.

m o u n t o f water v ap our the higher

'

is its temperature an d the smaller ,

the pressure The abso lute quan .

tity of the v apour absorbed by the

air is proportio n ate to its volume .

I t fo ll ows therefore that n e ffi

, , a

cien t i e rapid dryin g deman ds

, . .
,

()
1 T h e highest temperature .

()
2 A pressure be l ow that of
the atmosphere .

()
3 T h e greatest possib l e qua n
F 12 1 IG
tity of workin g air
. .

These three co n di tio n s are defi n ed by the duratio n Of the

process The fas ter the dryin g is to be performed the higher must be
.
,

the temperature the more rarefied the air an d the largerthe quan tity
, ,

Of it used On the other ha n d given the limit of S ig n ifica n ce of the

.
,

temperature an d pressure an d the air con sumption w e r en ab led , ,

xa e

to defin e the l en gth of the dr yin g procedure a n d the amoun t of grain ,

accor di n g to i ts primary an d fin al moisture .

An experime n tal dryin g Of moist grai n has shown that the highest
limit of temperature is 6 0 C I f that limit is exceeded the bra n as
° ’

.
,
 FLO UR MI LLI NG
'

1ss [ CH AR In

well as the kern els burst H owever as far as possibl e high tempera
.
,

tures ought to be avoided because firstly when heated to 6 0 C , ,

°
.

the starch may turn to paste an d seco n dl y a l ower dryin g temperature

,
1
,

requires less fuel .

These two circumstan ces suggest the n ecessity of usi n g rarefied

air An d the best result is actually obtain ed by dryin g the stock in
.

rarefie d air as is don e in l arge ,

2

gran aries H owever such en ormous .

,

structures as a vacuum dryin g

H o t a ir
apparatus of E P s b u rg s are im . a s
’

possib le in mills because we have ,

a washin g pl an t w hich must be

in cluded in the cycl e of machin ery
belo n gin g to the grain clean
in g departme nt an d space is ,

limited .

W e have two types o f dryers

'

for dryin g the grain in the wet

scourin g process : (1 ) operatin g by
I n n er ce o u ter
forced air n d (2 ) by aspirated i e ,
a ,
. .

rarefied air .

Th e R obi n so n dryer we have

examin ed operates b y rarefied air .

s Fig 1 2 2 shows a type

S ta timm u f dryer
cra p e r
. O

(T ur n er s works in I pswich ) workin g ’

Co l d with forced air Nearly ll E uropean . a

an d American mi lli n g e n gi n eers

fav our the seco n d type of dryers .

On Fig 1 2 3 we have a dryi n g .

EWH A TDR arran gemen t of S imon s (kn own

A C OND I TI ONE R
’

u n der the n ame of B iihl r B ros e .

”

in R ussia ) H ere A is the air .

heatin g chamber T a f n im , I
a

—
pelli n g the warm air i n to the tru n ks B B n d T an other f n fillin g ,
a a

the tru n ks with cold air E n gin eers however sho l d avoid buil d
. , , u

in g dryers w hich work by forced air i with in creased pressure , . e . .

Besides co n sideration s respectin g greater security an d eco n omy in

dryi n g there are co n sideratio n s in regar d to their co n struction
,
.

1
P ro f Ki k
s . c and Zo ykin s et the l im it at F . B a u m g a rtn er a t

2
V a cu u m d rying a pp a ra tu s o f E . P a s sb u rg
’
s s ys tem , Ru s s ia n M iller ,
1 909, NO 1 0 . .
1 40 FLO U R MI LL I NG [ CH AR II I

moves faster than the grai n o n either side of it a n d is co n sequen tly ’

dried to a differen t degree .

()
3 Th e air , durin g the dryin g proces s in passin g through a thin ,

l ayer of grai n equa l to the breadth of the dryi n g ca n al is n o t saturated

en ough wi th moisture n d is therefore i n sufficien tly utili sed
, a .

AS co n cern s the t w o first defects they are effectually do n e away ,

with in Mallin so n s dryer with step can al s This is con firmed in the
’
-
.

types of machin ery suggested by P rofessor Zworyki n The third defect .

is to be overcome by the pri n cip le Of coun ter curren ts a dapted by Pro -

fe so r Zworyki n in the foll owi n g two sket ches

s

f dryi n g co l um n s
O .

Fig 1 2 4 represe n ts a ho ll ow co l um n AB of
.

E s a
x ha u
square
t a ir
or recta n gu l ar sectio n pro v ided with
to
a series Of j utties of a trian gul ar sectio n in
fa n

side (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 ) n d a hopper
, , , , , , , , , a

D at the top which co n tain s a feed ro ll C an d , .

a n arra n geme n t for regulatin g the feedin g .

The moist grai n passes through the hopper

a n d the fee di n g apparatus i n to the col umn ,

roll s down the j utties (1 2 3 4 as , , , ,

poin ted by who l e arrows a n d is di scharged ,

through the valve K bel ow I n the direction .

opposite to its course a curren t of air is driv en

through the i nl et E : it ven tilates the grain
several times at the momen t it falls from the
ev en o n to the odd j utty or vi ce v ers a a n d ,
F
IG 124
then humid with the moisture drawn off
. .

the grain it passes to the f n through the outlet Z Naturall y the

,
a .

grain must flow in a thin l ayer n d must n o t b lock up the S pace

a .

F o r the actio n to be regu l ar P rofessor Zworyki n recommen ds heat

,

in g a ll the j utties or o n ly o n side of them with steam or water whi l e

e ,

the period spen t by the grain in the apparatus may be reg l ated by u

makin g at least o n e ran ge of boxes (for i n stan ce the even n u mbers ) ,

adj ustab le S O as to alter the an gle Of i n c li n atio n of the s u rfaces down

which the grai n ro lls from 4 5 to I n P rofessor Zworykin s Opin io n
° ’

there is n o especial n eed artificially to cool the dried grain if after ,

dryin g it is n o t to be tempered in bin s but co n tin uall y passes from , ,

‘

machi n e to machin e an d u n dergoes a grad al treatmen t

, u .

Th e seco n d variatio n Of that design is a rou n d cyli n drical co lum n

with co nic (Fig 1 2 5 ) surfaces B The cen tral part A of the apparatus
. .
CH AR I II ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 14 1

is heated The grain flowin g through the hopper travels over the con ic
.

s u rface of the heated cen tral part A an d aspirated n its way falls o n , o ,

the con ic surface B Then it ro lls o ff B o n to th seco n d co n e A n d is

.
e a

again fan n ed & till it reaches the out let

, c .
,

—A
Gra in i nlet
.

Ca lcu la tio n s i n Reference to D ryers n

approximate computation of the quan tity o f

air a n d heat required for dryin g purposes may
s
A i r ex ha u t
be based o n the followin g co n sideration s :
1

I f the capacity of the dry er is stated to

be P kilogramme of grain per hour the ,

quan tity Of water to be extracted from the

P
grai n in o n e hour wi ll be de fin ed in

kilogramme where p signifies the per

,

cen tage Of moisture in the damp grain a n d ,

A ir in

p0
in the dried grai n .

E ach cubic metre of air extracts y

kil ogramme of moisture con sequen t ly the ,
FI G' 1 2 5 °

P 07 Pol
dryin g the stated quan tity of grain requires cubic metres
.
”

of
l OOy

of air . qua tity of water v apour which a cubic metre Of air may
The n -

hol d whe n fully saturated depen ds o n the temperature an d is given in

, , ,

kilogramme weight in the foll owin g tab l e

TA BL E XV

D egre es W e ig h t o f
K il o g ra
Vmm a p o u r, D egrees W e ig h t o f
Kil o g ra
Vmm a p o u r, W eig h t o f V a po u r,
C . e . C . e . K il o g ra m m e .

If the air en terin g the dryer con tain s k per cen t of moisture n d its . a

temperature is T o n leavin g the apparatus it is n o t perfectly saturated

, ,

ha vin g k per c en t of h midity n d t temperature Then the total

. u a
o
.

quan tity Of moisture y absorbed by 1 cubic metre of air in relation to

the temperature of ir after usage t i formul ated thus a ,
o
,
s

1 “
Th e G rain D ry er, b y P ro f . . k
K Zwo ry in Russ ia n Miller 1 9 1 0 No 1 1
, , , . .
 1 42 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR III

where l an d Z sig n ify the quan tity Of steam in ki logrammes saturatin g

O

1 cubic metre Of air havi n g a temperature of T a n d t respectiv e ly wh il e o ,

a is the coefficien t Of expan sio n Of the air equal to 0 0 0 3 6 6 5 Hen ce the ,

.

formula defin in g the volume of air required for dryin g in cubic metres ,

at a temperat re t u o

z0
1+ “
(o
t —T D
I
The term
ET Z) ZT
' ’
is i n sig n ifican t if co ld air is emp loyed ,
and in a
rough cal culatio n may be left out a n d the quan tity K does n o t exceed 0

0 7 for the damp n ess of the air discharged is assured ly n o t to be in creased

,

beyon d 70 per cen t of the abso lute damp n ess

. .

Assumi n g the temperature of the medium supp lyi n g the air to be 1 0 C

°
.
,

the temperature of heati n g a n d at the discharge of the air 6 0 C the per °

.
,

cen tage of moisture in the air in both cases is 70 per ce n t the primary .
,

damp n ess of the grai n 3 0 per cen t n d 1 0 per cen t when dry after due
.
,
a .
,

substitution the formul a of V wi ll be presen ted as follo w s

,

30 10 1 1
I

5 O O4 5
'

cubic metres at 6 0 C of temperature °

. .

TO defi n e the quan tity of w armth required in the dryi n g process it ,

must be kn own how much warmth is n eeded for the moist ure to e vaporate
from the grai n an d for the heatin g of the grain n d the air supplied out a

of medium to the temperature it has when l eavin g the dryer That

,
.

quan tity Q is defi n ed as

, 0,

l V odoco (to —T
“ ”

)
H ere is the S pecific heat of the grain amoun tin g to about
c1 e that 0

of the air u n der steady pressure equal to 0 2 3 7 ; a n d d the weight of

, o

1 cubic metre of air heated to 60 C equal to 1 0 6 ki l ogrammes

°
.
,
.

S ubstituti n g these s ign ifi ca tio n s in Q we have ,

ec 50 9 2 37 .

—
5 9 8 3 3 l 4 Oe —
—
é Fl l 2 5
’ '
z
O l

S un der the con dition s alluded to 1 kilogramme of dried grain

O, ,

deman ds the ex p e n dit re of ab o u t 1 7 5 u n its of h eat

u O n ce the he at .
144 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CHAR II I

if the bra n coat is broken up i n to particles l arger than the flour they may ,

be removed by boltin g I t is Of great co n sequen ce therefore that the

.
, ,

process of millin g S houl d be performed so as to leave the bran coats whol e .

I f we have dry g rai n duri n g the mi lli n g process the dried bran is ,

very easily groun d to dust which mixes with the flour } I f o n the other ,

han d we dampen the bra n it becomes more e lastic n d Offers greater

, , a

resistan ce to pulv erisatio n than the starchy mass of the grain .

I n that case the force suffi cie n t to break the ker n e l wi ll l eave the bra n

coats i n tact I f a n elasticity is to be imparted to the bran it is n ecessary

.
,

t o temper it Naturall y a dampi n g is n eeded o n ly w he n the grain is

.
,

dry an d in its process of cl ean in g has n o t been scoured by washin g

, .

Th e dampi n g of the bra n Of the dry grai n in the dry proces s of

clea nin g is performed (if
the grain is very dry )
either previous to the
secon d scourin g or b e ,

fore it is fed in to the

first break roll I n the .

first case the bran en ,

v l o p s the grai n so c l ose l y

e

that wit h out breaki ng it ,

up it cann ot be re ,

moved when soften ed by

Er 1 2 6 a .
water
.
it is separated ,

with greater ease I n the .

seco n d case the el asticity of the dampen ed bran resists the trituratin g
,

effect Of the grin di n g .

There are two types Of apparatus for co n ditio ni n g the bra n ()

1 the
wettin g apparatus an d (2 ) the apparatus for steamin g the grain V
Dam
.
,

in
p g
— T h e grai n is wetted with the aid O f a n apparatus Fi
( g 1 2 6 ) ,

which co n sists Of a paddle wheel res emb lin g the overshot water wh eel
- -

set in an iro n casin g A The grain fed through a spout hopper a as

.
,

marked by arrow 8 falls o n the paddles a n d bri n gs the wheel in to

,

rotatio n The motio n is commu n icated through gear wheels b c to the

.
—
wheel D which carries a series of cups d drawi n g up water out of the
cistern B On reachin g a certai n height the water pours out of the
.

cups in to a l on g in clin ed trough E down which it run s a n d is spouted

,

through tube e (arrow 8 ) o n to the grain which o n leavin g the pad dle
2 ,

wh eel has passed through the co n veyor an d is n o w flowin g (arrow 8 ) 1

to the b in The tan k B is filled from the water pipin g al on g s I f the

.
-

3 .
CH AR I II ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 145

consumptio n of w ater is lo w its overflow run s out of B d o w n tube f ,

set o n a certain level Th i n flow of w ater is regul ated automatically

. e

when the flow of grai n dimi n ishes the revolvi n g velocity of the padd le ,

wheel di mini shes also n d co n sequen tly that of ,

a

wheel D thus reducin g the water supply tOB

, .

W ith the stoppage of the fee di n g of grai n the ,

work of the wetti n g apparatus is disco n ti n ued .

The water flowi n g to B flows out at f which ,

giv es the S ig n to those atten di ng the grai n

clean in g divisio n .

An other l ess cumbrous apparatus is hown in S

Fig 1 2 7
. Here the co n ic cups a are screwed o n to
. Q? “

tubes l The water scooped up by these boxes is

( 1 .

con veyed by pipes d to b when ce it pours in to the

, ,
F 12 7 IG . .

box 0 from the water flows to the box at a n d

e

then alo n g the pipe s fa lls n the grain in the worm co nveyor A which
1 o ,

is carryin g it b y the w y of 8 to th e b in Owi n g to a stirrin g action

a
2
.

Of the worm a more or l ess eve n dampe ni n g Of th e grai n is effected

,
.

S tea m in g —H owever e n ergetically the mixi n g be

performed still the who le stock i n t moisten ed ,
s o

to n equal degree W ith the view to makin g the

a .

temperi n g Of the bra n more efficie n t the American s

suggest steami n g the grain .

F ig 1 2 8 shows Bea ll s steami n g apparatus ; its

’
.

shape is cy li n drical with steam circulati n g between ,

its doub le walls I ts mode of actio n is as fo ll ows .

Thro gh the hopper 6 the grai n is fed i n to the u

i n n er cyli n der w here it fall s o n the bottom disc 5 ,

with star hape d perforatio n s -

S .

Th e flow of grai n is regul ated by a co n e 8 w hich ,

is fixed in the cylin der by a cross head 7 Th -

. e

stream of grai n is co n trolled by cylin drical gate 6 a

_

fasten ed to the same rod 9 o n w hich the disc 5 is

s et a n d w hich rests o n a spri n g 4
,
I f a l arge qua n .

F 128
IG .

tity of grai n has collecte d o n th disc 5 the gate 6

.

e ,

s tep s the passage of grai n betwee n the co n e n d it rim P roportio n ately a s .

to the outflow of grai n the w eight dimin ishes n d then the sprin g 4
,
a

begin s to act it lifts the rod n d Open s the gate Th steam circulates a . e

in the fo ll owi n g ma nn er The steam which is ge n erally exhaust steam

.
, ,

is l t in to the space betwee n the tw o walls of the cyli n der thr gh th

e ou fi
e

K
146 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR III

tube 1 its passage bei n g co n trollab le by a valve

,
Th steam e n ters a . e

in to th workin g S pace by i n l ets 3 warmi n g the in n er cylin der o n its way

e
"
,

(the outer n is i nosu l ated

e ) P art O f it co n de n
. ses o n the grai n whi l e ,

the rest becomin g coo led sin ks n d is delivered through the l ower outlets
, ,
a

in to the in t r yli n dri S pace when ce it is discharge d through the tube 2

e c c , .

B t more Ofte n there are n p er t r be l o w nd l l the steam beco m i n g

'

u O a u es ,
a a

co n den sed dampen s the stock still more

,
Th steam coo l ed in the . e

in ter ylin dri space passes out through the tube 2

c c .

Th mai n poi n t in the steami n g process is the warmi n g Of the grai n

e

in the cyl i n der Th moisture co n tai n ed in the ker n el of the berry

. e

evaporates n d is det in ed by the

a a i e the grai n sweats . . .
”

FI G. 129 . FI G . 1 30 .

additio n the co n den sin g steam settles o n the surface of the grain
‘

In ,

a n d moiste n s it in n eve n measurea .

An other steami n g apparatus is show n in Fig 12 9 H ere the gate A . .

open s un der the weight Of the grain Th cross beams B serve as guides . e -

to the rod a which is co n n ected with a small l ever b rotatin g in a ball

,

bearin g owin g to the presen ce of a ball c l ose to the cen tre e The other
, .

e n d of the l e v er b is j oi n ed to the rod e movi n g in the so l id j our n a l bear

in g f provid ed with a spri n g —

B y mean s of a han d wheel d the slide
.

valve A is Open ed to its utmost W hen the flow of grain is disc on .

tin ed the spri n g f pushes t h e rod e which tur n s the l ever b thus lifti n g
u , ,

the rod a an d stoppin g the spout with the gate .

I n the more simp l e steamin g apparatus E ureka on ly the middl e

part of the c ylin der is he ated (Fig Th flow of
g rai n here is . e
14 8 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ C H AR II I

e laborate here because it aims at a more perfect separatio n of imp u r

, i ti es
a n d beeswi n g Th machi n es a n d apparatus to be emp l oye d are
. e

()1 A bo l ti n g machi n e for l arge a n d sma ll refuse

( ree l separator ,

bo ltin g separator aspirator or zigzag separator ) (2 ) a cockl e separator

, , , ,

()
3 a co n tro ll i n g trieur ()4 a mag n et apparatus
, ()
5 fi rst scourer ()
6 a , ,

boltin g machin e (reel separator asp irator zigzag separator ) (7 ) an , , ,

emery s co u rin g machi n e (8 ) a brush machin e (9 ) a wettin g apparatus

, , .

I f the wheat is v ery dry the wettin g apparatus is to be p l aced before

'

s
Gra in from to ri n g bi n
the emery sco ri ng ma u

here are two scourers T

already in this di agram ,

a rough an d a n emery
o ne On the first mac h in e .

the di rt stickin g to the

w grain is remo v ed a n d part ,

Of the germ coats an d ’

beard whi le the seco n d ,

separates the shells a n d

th e remai n i n g germ co ats
n d beard E ach scoure r a .

must be fo ll owed by a
bo ltin g apparatus as the ,

fa n of the scourer l ea v es
un extracted a certai n per
cen tage of husks a n d
broken grain a n d other ,

small impurities which ,

F 1 31 n
IG o t
.
bei n g .
S ifted away ,

will pass in t o the n ext

machin e a n d besmear the rough surface (if it be a scourin g mac hi n e )
or di rty the grain .

3 The Mo st Co mp lete Typ e of Clea n ing

.
—Beginn in g with a dail y yield
of 2 000 bush el s an d more if the millin g is high the best styl e of grain
, ,

c leanin g must be emp l oyed I t is serviceab le to keep an accoun t of th e.

l oss in the grain c l ea n in g depart men t , the r

-
efore automatic scales are
pl aced before n d after the c leani n g process Fig 1 3 1 gives a rough
a . .
‘

di agram of the wheat c l ea n i n g machi n ery -

.

Out of the storin g b in the grain fis Co nveyed to automatic scales 1

,

an d the n take n to bi n s 2 F ro m the b in it asses ov er th e m a n et

p .

g
CHAR II I ] FL OUR MI LLING 14 9
appar tus 3 to the asp irator 4 which removes the l arge refuse to the sack
a

a whil e the dust san d n d small matter are sen t to the sack b I n
, , ,
a .

this aspirator (the S eck type or a zigzag separator ) the stock is sorted ,

in to large an d small grain the former flowin g in to barley separators 5 , ,

the l atter in to cockl e separators 5 After the barley separator the grain 1
—
.
,

passes o n (through a hopper ) to re barley cyli n der 6 n d the stoc k from a

—
,

the cockle separator to the re cockl er 6 The grain clean sed in

5—
1 .

6 an d 5 6 (small grai n separated from broke n grai n

1
-

1 n d cockl e
) is a

then treated co n secutively o n scourer 7 in the aspirator 8 in a c lean , ,

emery scourin g machin e 9 aspirator 1 0 an emery scourin g machi n e 1 1 , , ,

aspirator 1 2 a n d a horizo n tal (or vertical ) brush machin e 1 3 After the .

brush the stock may be weighed o n an other pair of scales which will ,

in form us of the l oss in weight sustain ed in the grai n c lean in g departmen t -

The scal es are n o t S how n in the flow sheet a n d the grai n passes to the ,

wettin g apparatus 1 4 here when ce it is carried by co n veyor 1 5 to be ,

tempered in bin s 1 6 for eight to twelve hours From the bin s o v er .

,

a magn et apparatus it is taken to b e groun d The capacity of the , .

bin s must be cal culated to give a store of grain for eight to twelv e
hours .

TO keep the scal es n d trieurs dust free there is a fa n which exhausts

a ,

the dust out of the machin e an d drives it to the dust coll ector That -
.

same dust collector receives the dirty fan ref se of aspirators 4 an d 8

- -
u

a n d rough scouri n g 7 Th e dust co ll ector passes the refuse to the ree l

.
-

separator which sifts the heavy dust in to sack I small refuse i n to I I , ,

medium i n to I I I whi le the l arge impurities (chaff & c ) are tailed ov er

, , .

to I V The broken grai n n d cockl e separated by the re coc kl er 6

. a -

are then sorted in a worm trieur A a n d the former deposited in the sack ,

c the l atter in the sack b

,
The fa n refuse from the fi n ishi n g scourers .
-

as pirators a n d brushes is se nt to the dust co ll ector 2 1 a n d the n ce to the

,
-

reel separator 2 2 an d the heavy refuse of the same machin es n d the a

thro u gh s are di scharged i n to sacks either in bul k as shown in the flow ,

sheet or the impurities from the scourers are treated apart from the
,

thro u gh s of the aspirators n d the brush a .

This flow S heet may be varied to a l arge exte n t I f the grai n is very .

hard an d dry the damping machin e precedes the first fi n ishing scourin g
,

machin e 9 The aspirator 1 0 is Often n o t used even in large mills though

. ,

this ten ds to deteriorate the work of the scourin g machin e 1 1 V ery .

rarely three emery passages are in c luded in the p l an besides the rough ,

scourin g machin e bein g n un n ecessary luxury S ometimes the aspirator

,
a .

1 2 is di scarded n d o n l y the brush is retain ed

,
a I f the c lea n in g is to be .
150 FLO U R MI LLI NG [ m m m
s implifi ed the b arley S eparator is no t i n c luded a n d th separators em
,
,
e

p l oyed are o nly the cockl e separator a n d the re cyli n der -

.

In we ll desig
-
n ed mi ll s of l arge capacity the l arge an d sm all
berries shoul d n o t be b l en ded after passin g the co ntrolli n g trieurs ,

but cl ean sed parallel o n separate scourers till they reach the ,

brush machin es The drysto n er has to be pl aced before the rough

.

scourer 7
—
.

Gra in Clea n in g in the W et S ecu rin g P ro ces s D urin g the period sin ce
grain washin g has come into vogue the cl ean sin g p l an has been ,

co n siderab ly simp lified it ,

bein g supposed that the .

washin g process remo v es

the dirt comp l etely Fig . .

1 3 2 ill ustrates the c l ean

in g by washin g system
recommen ded by Kapler s ’

works (Berlin ) at the b e

gin ni n g of the presen t
century Accordin g to .

this pl an from the storin g ,

b in 1 the grai n is take n

to the scales 2 an d then
to the separator 3 The .

s scree nin gs Of the aspirator

To the bin

fa n are d eliver ed by the

cycl on e 4 the heavy im ,

F 1 32 IC . . purities to the bags a an d

b the sma ll matter (the ,

t hro u ghs of the l ast siev e ) to the bag 0 Th e grai n passes further o v er a
.

magn et 5 to the trieurs 6 when ce the refuse is deliver ed to the seco n dary
,

trieur an d then washed passin g the ston e separator 8 the whizzer 1 0

, , ,
,

a n d the dryer 1 2 Th e dryer is supp lied with warm air by the f n 1 3

. a

which draws it out Of the heatin g chamber 1 5 an d the cold air is impell ed ,

by the fan 1 4 Out Of the dryer the grain flows to the s c u rin g machin e
.
, e

1 6 the brush machin e 1 7 a n d the n to the gri n di n g machin ery

, , The .

fan refuse co llects in the dust co ll ector 1 8

- -
.

I n compari n g the two p l an s we fi n d that the rough scourer a n d o n e

Of the fi n ishin g machi n es are l eft out here .

D urin g the l ast few years in the grai n c l eani n g with the wet scouri n g
or washin g process the rough scourer precedes the washi n g This proves .
152 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ C HA R 1 11

H owever imp le thi s arran gemen t may be still it deman ds an extra

S ,

expen se in fuel I t is desirab le therefore that the en gin eers should

.
, ,

util ise the exhaust gases from the motors of in tern al combustion the ,

temperature of which Often rise s to

Gra in Cle n in g w h Br n W a
iat s hi ng —Th e c l ean i n g with bran in
a

H ggen m ch er s mac h i n e a process already exami n ed has been v ery

’
a a , ,

l ate ly adopted in Austria H u n gary -

.

Th operatio n s of those machin es havi n g un dergo n e n o strictly

e

scien tifi c trial as yet it is diffi cult to give a n y defini te opin ion though
, ,

in theory favourab l e resu lts may be expected

, .

I n determi n in g the p l ace of the bran washer in the flow sheet of “

grain clean ing it must be men tio n ed that simil arly to the wet scourin g
, ,

it ought to take p l ace of the seco n d scourin g passage Y et it is often .

p l aced in stead f the rough scourer

O

The Cle n in g f Rye —

.

a All the flow heets reviewed co n temp l ate the

o S

cl ean in g Of wheat Th flow sheet for c lean in g rye is practically the

. e

same but is curtailed by o n e scourin g passage Y et if the grist is

, .
,

high yieldin g up to five kin ds Of flour the usual three passages must be
, ,
‘

practised i e the p l an in wheat cl ean in g adhered to

, . . .
 CHAP TE R IV

GRI NDI NG THE GRAI N

TH E FU N D AM E NTAL P R I N C I PL E S OF MI LL I N G

ON l eav i n g the grain cleanin g departmen t

-

, th e grain is se n t to be groun d
i n to flour .

B efore proceedin g to describe the gri n di n g machi nery the fun da ,

men tal prin cip les Of that most importan t Operatio n in the in dustry
must be systematically co n sidered .

As was shown in the historical out li n e f flour mi lli n g the primitiv e O ,

tech ni cs of times gon e by produced but two prin ciples of reducin g

n —
the grai impact an d friction ; n d the material s of which the a
’

milli n g imp lemen ts were made were almost exclusively n atural ston es .

I n this primitive process both the grai n a n d offal s were groun d .

Th e n ecessity of removin g the n n n utritive bra n however co n siderab ly

o -

, ,

mo di fied the system by e v okin g n ew prin cip les of trituratio n while ,

n ew material s for the worki n g orga n s of the machin ery a fforded the
possibility of puttin g those prin cip les in to pr actic e .

I n c l assifyin g the types f mi lli n g machin ery exist in g in moder n

O -

techni cs accordin g to the prin ciples of action of their workin g organ s

,

upon the product u n der treatmen t the machin es must be divided i nto
,

the three followin g categories

()
1 Cu tti ng ( chi p p in g c fi ) ma chi n es .

(2 ) P ress in g (cru s h i n g ) m a ch i n es .

()
3 M a chi n es a cti n g yb free i m p a ct .

The machin ery of the first prin cip l e Of reduction requires two work
in g parts mo vin g in Opposite di rectio n s or in the same but with differen t
,

speeds (Fig . I t is evide n t that the worki n g surfaces A a n d B in

these machin es should be sharp a n d rough .

Th e seco n d prin cip l e f actio n of th e worki n g parts upo n the pro

O

duct treated is n ever met with in its pure form because those pa rts ,

move with a vel ocity di fferen t to that of the product n d th grain ,

a e ,
1 53
 FL OU R MILLI NG [
CHA R IV

besides bein g crushed l oses particles that are chipped Off n o t by the
,

strain of the cuttin g facets but through friction This p rocess is call ed
, .

trituratin g the product I n this case too the worki n g parts may be
.
, ,

movin g either in differen t or in o n e an d the same directio n I f runn in g .

in the l atter man n er their speeds must be di ffere n t

, An immovab l e .

position of o n e of the workin g surfaces as in millsto n e sets for i n stan ce

, ,

is also possib le I n Fig 1 3 6 we have a diagram Of the treatmen t the

. .

product receives accordin g to the secon d prin cip l e Th direction of . e

mo v emen t of the workin g surfaces is marked by arrows s the pressin g ,

force by N Then the forces Of frictio n are Nf f bein g the coefficien t of

.
,

friction of the product again st the workin g surface The breakin g dow n .

FI G . 136 .

of the grain or of a part Of it wi ll be effected in p lan es parall el to the

actin g powers Th workin g surfaces A a n d B may be smooth in that
. e

case but with a high coefficien t Of friction f

, .

Th e third a n d l ast pri n cip l e of reductio n the free impact gi v es us

, ,

machin ery the worki n g parts of which by strikin g impart a great kin etic
(m v )
z

en ergy to the grain which destroys it these machin es the

“

,
. In
2
Speed of motion of the workin g organ s m ust be v ery great for the mass ,

of grain m is in sign ifican t .

The a im of the machi n es of the first prin cip l e of treatmen t is to

produce by a con secutiv e series of cuttin g particles (middlin gs ) co n tain
, ,
r
-

in g bran a n d free of it .

I n the milli n g process to fo ll o w we shall separate the bra n ny

15 6 FLO U R MI LLI NG [ CHAR Iv

cases : (1 ) workin g S urfaces havi n g a commo n axis of rotation n d ,

a

(2 ) surfaces with parall el axes of rotatio n .

Th e period spe n t by the grai n betwee n the worki n g surfaces is of

the greatest co n sequen ce because the degree Of u n iformity of the tri
,

t ra ted partic l es depe n ds o n it

u I n this respect the workin g surfaces
.

are di vided in to two categories : (1 ) surfaces of reiterated actio n n d ,

a

()
2 s u rfaces acti n g o n ce I n the first case we have mostly to do with
.

p l an es between which the product is treated ; in the seco n d , with cylin dric
surfaces where the workin g organ s come in to co n tact al o n g a lin e .

To the category Of machin es with reiterated action of the workin g

surfaces pertain mill sto n es desin tegrators & i e machin ery havin g
, ,
c . . . .

a common axis of rotatio n ; to the seco n d ro ll er mill s i e machin es , ,

. .

with par allel axes of rotatio n of the workin g surfaces This order is .

estab lished by the historic co n secutiven ess in the developmen t of fl o r u

millin g tech n ics a n d by the degree o f perfectio n of the two types of

machin ery F o r this reason we shall study the machin es in the order
.

of their tech n ical perfectio n .

MACH I NE S OF RE I TE RA TED ACTI ON O F TH E W O R KI NG S U RFA CE S

—
M ills to n e S ets (bu rrs ) B efore passin g to mi llsto n es it is n ecessary
.
_
,

to pro v e that other workin g surfaces of reiterated actio n besi des p lan es
are in adaptab l e from the poin t Of view of the prin cipl es we h av e stated ,

as well as con structively .

As the machi n ery of reiterated actio n Of the worki n g surfaces must

have a commo n axi s of rotation the followin g combin ation s are possib l e
,

here : (1 ) cylin dric s urfaces in scribed o n e in an other (2 ) simil arly in ,

scribed co nic surfaces a n d (3 ) parallel pl an es

,
.

I n a ll three cases the axis may be vertical or horizo n t al .

To begin with the combin atio n with a vertical axis of rotatio n

,

must be di scarded in the first two cases for un der such con dition s the
,

time spen t by the stock between the workin g surfaces is shorten ed ,

because in fluen ced by its proper gravity the stock passes between the
, ,

two workin g surfaces more rapidly n d con sequen tly requires s urfaces
,
a

of la rge di men sio n s which makes the machin e more expen sive F urther
, .
,

the combi n atio n of cylin dric surfaces with a horizo n tal axis of rotatio n
must also be rej ected because the wear of the worki n g surfaces makes
,

it impossib le to keep them within the desired distan ce of each other a ,

C H AP . Iv ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 157

con sideratio n in regard to its co n structio n which al so applies to the

precedin g cases Coni c surfaces with horizo n tal or vertical axes of
.

rotation though affordi n g the p ossibility of brin gi n g them closer to each

,

other in proportio n to their wear have differen t peripheral v elocities of ,

rev ol utio n n d co n sequen tly excl ude equability in the treatment o f the
,
a

product a n d in the wear .

Thus o n ly machi n ery with fl a t worki n g surfaces havin g either a ,

ho ri zo n tal or vertical axis of rotatio n remain s , .

I n machin ery of this type the fo ll owi n g combi n atio n s of rotatio n are
possibl e : if the axis is vertical (a ) either the upper workin g surface ,

revo lves while the bottom o n e is statio n ary or vice versa an d (b) both
, , ,

the surfaces rotate in opposite directio n s The same may be said Of

the horizo n tal axis —either o n e on ly or both the workin g surfaces may
.

be rotatin g .

Comin g to co n structive descriptio n s a n d a critical co n sideratio n of

the existin g types of sto n e mills it must be men tion ed in the first pl ace ,

that the w o rkin g o rgan s of that machin e the grin di n g sto n es are shaped
'

, ,

of hard n atu ral rock or artificial sto n es as well as of metal (steel cast , ,

iro n ) W e shall give a detailed description of these material s l ater an d

.
,

proceed n o w to describe sto n e mills with a vertical axis of rotation .

1 . S to n e Mills —Hcrizcnta l (V ertica l A x is of Ro ta tio n )

S to n e mills with a vertical axis of rotatio n are divided accordin g to
co n structio n in to three types viz , .

()1 S to n e mi ll s with a rota ti n g uppe r sto n e ,

()2 S to n e mi ll s with a rotati n g bottom sto ne ,

()3 S to n e mi ll s with both the upper a n d bottom sto n es rotati n g .

Th e simp l est type Of a burr mill hav in g a rotatin g upper sto n e is

Shown in Fig 1 3 7 Th e upper rotatin g sto n e B the runn er is set o n
. . , ,

a v ertical shaft i i by mean s of a cross head g the driving iron The

'

-
.
l ,

shaft i is called a spin dle n d is bro u ght in to rotation by a pulley F a ,

or a gear dri ve The l ower part i of the spin dle en ds in a pivot j ourn al p
’

restin g o n a step bearin g t whil e its upper part i is hel d in a v ertical

-
o
, 1

bearin g k the mill bush a n d is co nn ected with the cross head through
,
-

,
-

n octago n a l tru n cated pyramid h Often for simp licity s sake the end ’

a .

of the pin dle is shaped to a square section The bottom ston e C the
S . ,

fixed bedsto n e is set in a frame I The v ertical bearin g k is set in a

,
.

cup r cast in o n piece with the frame I T preven t the grain from
e . o

a i
f ll n g through the aperture —
c c of the be ds to n e c this a erture is co v ere d
p ,
15 8 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR Iv

o ver by a p lan k l— l Th e distan ce betwee n the gri n di n g surfaces B

.

a n d C is adj usted by a co n e n d worm drive in the fo l l owi n g man n er ;

a -

the vertical axl e t e n di n g in a hub with a square hole is set upon the ,

square n d t of the axl e n a n d rotates driven by han d wheel s The

e 1
“

-
.

axl e w which sets the worm wheel x i n to motion is turn ed by a co n e

u —
drive r The screw y with a square thread en din g in a p lug m rises
.

or falls liftin g or l owerin g the cup z in which the step bearin g t is set
, ,
-
o
.

The spi n d l e a n d with it the top sto n e B is lifted r l owered together

, , o

with the step beari n g -

.

Out of the hopper a ,

the grai n flows through

n ozz l e b a n d tube 0 in to

the feedin g tube e n d “

falls o n the tab l e f whi ch

is fixed to the cross hea d -

a nd gyrati n g together
with it fl in gs th e grain ,

i n to the grin di n g zon e as ,

i n dicated by arrows .

Th e feedi n g tube e is
raised or lowered by
l evers d which with the , ,
’

cup g an d the screw hub

g form o n e b l ock owi
1
ng ,

to which the flow of .

grain is regul ated for ,

the cross section of the

o u tfl o w in g stream of grain

dimini shes or i n creases .

Th e mi ll sto n es are en
cl osed in a timber cyli n dric casin g M carryi n g o n its upper lid a cross
head Q with a hub for the fee di n g tube e The reduced product .
,

coll ectin g betwe en the gri n din g sto n e a n d the casin g is shifted by ,

scrapers 8 to the outl et spout G n d descen ds to the elevator H or

1
a

directly in to bags At the head of the spout G there is n open in g 9

.
a ,

usuall y covered with a lid through which the product may be sampl ed
,
.

Th e sto n e mi ll is moun ted o n a h rstin g supported by cast iro n

u
-

co lum n s or timber stan ds while the frame Of the step bearin g rests o n a
,
-

S pecial fou n datio n R I n mill s t h sets of gri n di n g sto n es are often

. e

l an te d on the botto m of th e sec on d flo or

p ,
1 60 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR IV

e ge era y Th e dust collector is suspen ded to the cap of the

lin n, n ll .
-

casin g of the same ki n d of cl oth B A trun k C communi catin g wi th .

the fan is l t in to the dust collectin g chamber Th pull eys b a n d

'

,
e -
. e

a drive the mechan ism which S hakes the dust coll ector ; this co n sists -

of a worm a n d cross head gearin g to the rod t which is co n n ected with

-

the dust collector The frame of the dust collector bein g Of a stron g
-

’
.
-

system the part of the dust collector opposite to the rod t receiv es
,
-

the shocks Of th shakin g actio n n d return s them by the sprin g r The

e a .

air streams in as i n dicated by arrows 8 passes between the grin din g ,

sto n es n d is exhausted ( ) through the dust co llector carryin g the

,
a sl -

dust with it Th air nd grain passage is isolated from the casin g

. e a

chamber likewise by cl oth sl ee ve or a timber spout .

Fig 1 4 0 is a dust co llector for a sto n e mi ll from A W e t ig s works with

’
.
-
. z ,

FI G . 1 39 FI G . 1 40 .

a shaki n g applian ce W e see here that durin g the shaki n g motio n the
.
, ,

aspiratin g tube A i s c losed by the v al ve b with a rod a otherwise if the , ,

apparatus w ere shaken whil e aspirated the particles of dust woul d n o t ,

b thro wn Off the dust co llector because they woul d be pressed again st
e j
-

it by the aspirated air .

Havin g become acquain ted with the type of the machin e we shall ,

proceed n o w to the detail s o f the ston e mill s .

2 . Co mp o sitio n a nd D esign o f M i ll s tc n es

Grin ders of Na t ra l S to n e — B efore the tech ni cs produced a n y satis

u

factory results in the preparation o f artificial ston es the grin ders were ,

sh aped Of solid rock n d the material s used were (A) quartz ston es (B )
,
a ,

porphyritic n d gran ite (C) san dst o n es n d (D ) sto n es of volcani c ori gin
a , ,
a .

W h en se l ecti n
g the ki n d of s t o n es t h e ir ro
p p erties must b e tak en
 CHA R Iv ] F LOU R MI LL I NG 161

in to accou n t in order to guaran tee a high stan dard of work a n d impart

,

a durability to the grin ders Therefore the quality of the n at u ral

.
,

sto n es may be determi n ed by the followi n g properties

()
1 T h e h a r d n e s s O f the sto n e is the greatest guaran t ee Of a l en gthy
period Of service an d co n seque n tly the hard kin ds are to be preferred
, , ,

if the other qualities of the sto n es are equal .

()
2 T e n a c i t y
— I f the hard sto n es crumble very much when struck ,

they cann ot be used as millsto n es I t is i n dispen sab le that the sto n e .

should be of a sufficien t toughn ess makin g all crumblin g impossib le

—
, .

()
3 P o r o u s n ess S to n es apt to become po lished must be avoided
. .

This is possib l e if the sto n e is Of porous structure Those sto n es are to .

be co n sidered best which are gran ul ous in structure o n which the porous
, ,

n ess depe n ds I n such a case whe n the upper coat of the sto n e is worn off
.
,

by work it l ays bare a fresh surface j ust as rough as the o n e rubbed off
, .

()
4 U n i fo r m it y o f S tr u c tu re — U n iform work . is obtai n ed o n l y
when the coatin g of sto n e worn Off is suppl an ted by an other of equal
structure Fo r this reaso n the structural uniformity of the sto n e is of
.

great importan ce .

A
( ) Q u a rt o s e Sz to n es — Th e best ki n d Of quartzose sto n es satisfactory ,

in a ll the abo v e me n tio n ed respects are the Fre n ch sto n es with a fame
-

O f 200 years sta n di n g proc u red in the vici n ity of La Ferté sous Jo u are
,
- -

in the D epartm e n t of the S ei n e Geo l ogica l i n vestigatio n s prove that

.

this l ocali ty used to be a bay at some epoch i n to which a l arge river ,

flowed The formation of a quartzose or silicious in crustatio n l eads u s to

.

suppose the existen ce of man y hot sprin gs there at the time spoutin g ,

water rich with silicic acid or S i lica .

Th e real Fre n ch sto n e from La Ferté is of a beautiful roseate hue .

An other bed of quartzose sto n es in Fran ce lies in B ergerac Bu t .

these sto n es are less porous They are al most perfectly white
. .

I n some parts of H un gary al so there are beds of sto n es c l ose ly ap ,

ro a chin g those of La F er t é in their qual ities

p .

I n R ussia quartzose sto n es Of a fair quality are to be foun d c l ose to

station S uleya of the S amara Zl atoust rai lroad go v of Uffa ston e -

,
.
,

quarry of N La areff P ossessin g the fin e tough n ess porous n ess a n d

. z .
, ,

un iformity Of the Fren ch sto n es they are co n siderably i n ferior to them

,

in hardn ess .

B
( ) P o r h
p y y r a n d G r a n i te S to n es T hese v ery hard sto n es are ge n e
.
-

rally n o t porous an d become rapidly polished from work The best

,
.

kin ds of porphyry an d gran ite for maki n g gri n dsto n es are obtain ed in
German y n ear Cr vincler and in Austria c l ose to Perg o n the D an ube
a ,
.
1 62 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR Iv

C
( )S a ndsto n es —Grinders of sa dsto e strata are used al most ex
n n
'

cl u sively o n s impl e farm mills S an dsto n es co n sist of fin e quartz crystal s

.
,

a n d co n seque n t l y reduce the i n tegume n t of the grai n very much In .

additio n bein g Of an insUffi cient tough n ess these ston es easi ly cru mbl e
, , ,

l ea vin g small partic l es of quartzose crystal s in the meal .

The san ds to n e quarries lyi n g in the v all ey of the Oka n ear Mosco w ,

a n d in the D n ieper v alley by P o u tivl are co n sidered to be the best in ,

R ussia
—
.

D
( ) S to n es of V o lca n ic O rig in I n respect to their qua l ity the sto n es
Of v o l ca ni c origin c l osel y approach the Fren ch quartzose sto n es B efore .

the disco v ery of the La F ert e sto n es they were the best , .

The best k n own l ocalities are the vo l cani c sto n e quarries al o n g the
R hin e in German y (An dern ach ) The quarri es yiel d harden ed l a v a of .

bas al t (the ston es are call ed Lava stein ) v ery hard tough an d porous , , , ,

grey in col our .

I n some parts of H un gary (B ars Geletn ek ) trachyte sto n es are obtain ed

of a high quality an d in I taly the l av a from Mou n t E tn a gives good grey
,

basalt sto n es .

Grin ders of Artificia l S to n e — The di ffi cul ty of procuri n g good n atural

sto n es their comparativ e expen siven ess an d variety in structure com
, ,

p e ll e d ma n ufacturers as far back as thirty years ago to begi n makin g

artificial grin di n g sto n es I t is comparati vely but quite l at ely that the
.
,

attempts hav e bee n crown ed with success but n o w the miller is in posses ,

sion of more or less perfect artificial sto n es for millin g purpose s .

The prob l em of produci n g artificial gri n ders may be re garded as '

solv ed when a hard rock reduced to particl es is so firml y cemente d

together as to form a sto n e possessin g a ll the qualities of n atural ston es
, .

The prin cipal material s used in maki n g artificial sto n es are quartz ,

sil ex emery corun d u m carborun dum an d el ectrite very hard roc ks The
, , , , , .

ceme ti g materia s emp oyed are magn esite (Mg O o xide of mag
n n l l — “

n esiu m ) mag n esium c hl oride (Mg Cl ) fi el d or ri v er spar g l ass so l utio n

, z , , ,

muriatic an d several other acids

, .

I n accordan ce with the p urpose of the gri n der the hard sto n e is broke n ,

t o small pieces begi nn in g with the size of a wheat berry a n d e n din g in

‘

particl es of the siz e Of c oarse san d Gen erally there are fiv e ki n ds o f

‘
.
'

gra vel prepared viz NO 1 the l argest used for gri n di n g oats (seldom
, . .
, ,

used ) a n d No 5 t he fin est used for grin di n g sto n es in mill et scourin g

.
, ,
-

mach in es Grin ders for millin g rye an d wheat are prepared of the in ter
.

medi ate No s (2 3 4 ) of grav el .

, , .

The gra v el used is either of o n e kin d Of sto n e or a mixture of two kin ds , ,

1 64 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR Iv

Fig 1 4 1
.
gives us r gh sketch of the U pper a n d the lower sto n es W
a
'

ou . e

see in this sketch that the gri n di n g surfaces of both the sto n es are n o t
flat Th Open i n g A in the upper run n er is n amed the eye the zo n e B
. e

betwee n poin ts 1 a n d 2 is call ed the heart C between 2 an d 3 the in ter , ,

mediate zo n e D from 3 to 4 the reduci n g zo n e E 4 to 5 the grin din g

, , , ,

zo n e I n this way the s rface of the sto n e bet w ee n poi n ts 1 n d 4 is

.
,
u a

curved while its gri n di n g part proper between poi n ts 4 an d 5 is a p l an e

, , ,
.

Th l oopho l e F in the e

bed st o n e serves for passin g

the spi n dle through it n d a

setti n g the vertical step

bearin g The surface of the .

bottom sto n e from the poin t

b correspo n di n g to poi n t 4
’

Of the ru n n er is chise ll ed to ,

the shape of a co n e up to
poin t a .

Th e outli n e of the work

in g surfaces gi v e n here was
developed by Fre n ch works
n d accepted a l most every a
F 14 1 IG
where I n R ussia the n ame
. .

.
,

grin di n g zo n e or slide is app lied to D n d E wh il e the i n termedi at e a ,

regio n C is called the regio n Of full con tact The surface B an d C is n amed .

in R ussia the swallow The di me n sio n s characterisin g t h

.
mil l e ~

ston es Of the examined n ormal type are given in the follo win g tab le , ,

where h den omin ates the depth of the swallow in the top ston e n d h in ,
a 1

the bed sto n e .

TA BL E XV I

To p S to n e . B ed S to n e .

ussia the sto n es are usually measured in quarters Of n arshi n

In R a ,

an d accordi n g to the n umber f quarters in the di ameter are call ed O

q rt p lua qui
u n tup
e, l
”
e & Th l argest S ized R ussian s to n e is
,
”
c . e

the octup le 5 6 in ch diameter

,
-

.
 FL OUR MI LLI NG 16 5
u.

worki n g surface s of the upper a n d the lo wer sto n es form a commo n

The .

swall ow which catches the grain crushes it pushes it to poin t 3

a , , ,

a n d gr in ds it to mea l o n its way from 3 to 4

The ge n era l view of the worki n g surfaces of the gri n ders is shown
in Fig 1 4 2 A is the bed sto n e a n d B is the upper rotati n g sto n e
. .
, .

F rth sake Of durabi li ty

o e

the sto n es are en circ led with .

lio o p s (ge n era lly two ) set o n

'

w he n hot This is p rti . a cu

l arly imp ortan t for the ru n

n er which deve l ops a great
,

Cen trifuga l force whi l e re ,

vo lvin g an d may be torn to ,

pieces if the sto n e is too

friab le a an d b parts of.
,
‘

F 142
the swallow are made Of ,
IG . .

firm co n crete The circ les A n d B (part Of C D n d E ) the worki n g

. a , ,
a ,

parts are of n atural or artificial rock

, .

On the upper as we ll as o n the l ower sto n e there are furrows which

, , ,

if o n e ston e i s l aid upon the other cross each other at an angl e The
,
,
.

purpose of these furrows is the fo ll owi n g first ly the sharp edges Of the ,

furrows are supposed to cut the grain seco n dly by mean s of these fur
.

rows the workin g space is

ve n til ated As co n cer n s .

the first suppositio n it ,

can n ot be regarded as cor

rect for the cuttin g action
is performed by the crys
tal s Of the sto n e itself .

Th e edge of the furrow

then is so rudel y outlin ed , ,

F 143 IG
owi n g to the porous n ess
. .

of the sto n e that there a n be n idea of cuttin g n t to me n tio n the

"

, c o ,
o

fact that the cutti n g an gl es of the edges are too l arge w hich is n otice ,

ab le in the vario us forms of cross sectio n of the furro w s (Fig -

.

Of these forms Of furrows the o n e marked V is the most preferable ,

because the prod uct broke n in to l arge pieces is more easily picked out of
the cavity of the u n der furrow by the edge of the top On n d may then be e, a

subj ected to a further reductio n I t is foll owed by shape I V which may

.

. ,

b h a d in two variatio n s viz with the a n gl e k a n d w ithou t it whe n the

'

e ,
. ,
166 FLO U R MI LLI NG [ C H AR Iv

bottom of the furrow ed is con tin ued to the s urface Of the mill sto n e ,

i e has the p l an e of ed a n d a b
. . B u t this furrow is worse than the V th
1 l .

o n e for th e
,
re wi ll be more product coll ected in the an gl e e and the diffi
culty of drivin g it out will in crease .

The bottom a b of the furrow V li es o n a cur v ed p l an e but is usuall y ,

made flat Th differe n ce between the V th form a n d the seco n d v aria

. e

tio n (bottom cd ) of the I Vth o n e lies in the fact that the an gl e e in the
l

I Vth form is acute whi l e the correspo n di n g an gl e a Of v ariatio n V is

,

obtuse .

The di me n sio n s of the cross sectio n of these furrow s are the fo l lowin g
depth h = 9 to 1 3 mm breadth eb = 30 to 3 5 mm . .

I t is e v ide n t from the seco n d p ositio n of the furrows in v ariatio n V ,

that the grain or a particle of it A is chipped in the pl an e xy when the , , ,

p l an es of the furrows approach each other durin g the rotatio n Of o n e

of the sto n es an d the chippin g forces ,

are Nf where f is the coeffi cien t of ,

frictio n .

A to the furrows formed as shown s ,

in I I I a n d I I I they are scarcel y e v er , , ,

used in practice bein g di sadvan tageous ,

in a ll respects .

To arrive a t a c l ear u n derstan din g

F 1 44I G.
of the S ign ifican ce of di fferen tly out
.

li n ed forms of the furrows it is n ecessary to become acquain te d with the

theory of their fun ctio n s .

I t is supposed that the furrows act upo n the product u n der treatm en t ,

as a cuttin g organ an d scraper whi ch prop el the grist to its exit .

Let us examin e the propell i n g actio n of the furrows takin g fo r ,

gran ted that we have the most commo n outl in e of furrows i e curv ed , . . .

ab ( Fig 1 4 4 ) is a furrow of the upper rotati n g sto n e cd that of the l ower

.
,

o ne . B etwee n them at t he poi n t m there is a partic le of product .

Through m to the furrows are drawn tan ge n ts t a n d t whi ch form a n ,,

an gl e called the an gle of in cli n atio n of the furrows The pressure upon
a
, .

the product in the furrows ed an d a b we den o mi n ate through p a n d p 1

f is the coefficie n t of frictio n The prope lli n g of the product al o n g a b to

.

its exit is possible if the sum of the pro j ectio n s of all forces actin g upon m
o n the ta n ge n t t exceeds zero i e 1 , .

p S in —fp co s —fp > 01 a

1
a .

There bei n g no mo vemen t of the product in the directio n er

p p en
 FLOU R MI LLI NG [
'

168 CH A R Iv

pul se of the forc es con sidered above otherwise the stock wi ll n o t be groun d
,

at the i n tersectio n al poin ts of these furrows I f o n the other han d the .

, ,

stock is so fin that the furrows bein g ru de chisel s are un ab l e to triturate

e , ,

it it will tra v el in the furrow because of the effect of the draught Of air
,
.

I n this way the furrows perform the duty of ven til atin g can al s o n
,

the o ne han d a n d serve as spouts for the delivery of the grist out of the
,

workin g space o n the other The furrows in the fixed bed sto n e act the
, .
-

part of the ven tilatin g can al s n d exit passages for the product The a .

upper sto n e furrows serve o nl y as ven til atin g can al s for the reduced stock ,

a n d v e n ti l ate the u n der workin g surface of the sto n e in its w h o l e a rea

‘

Naturall y the l arge stock caught in betwee n the edges of the furrows is
crushed that is the secon d purpose of the furrows .

F rom the poi n t of view of ve n ti l ati n g the workin g area of the sto n es ,

the furrows ought n ever to be made cur v ed because this len gthen s the path ,

of the passage Of air From this poi n t of view straight radi al furrows
.

woul d be mos t desirabl e But such furrows wo u l d form n o an gle of

.

in tersectio n a n d the coi n cide n ce of the upper a n d l ower furrows woul d

,

gen erate a series of whirl s in their commo n can al for the motio n of the ,

air in the furrow of the rotatin g sto n e is the more rapid owin g to the ,

cen trifugal power .

Y et an other S ig ni fican ce is attached to the furrows I t is supposed .

that the grin der in tersected b y furrows acts as a fa n Howe v er this .

,

Opi n io n we a l so co n sider to be erro n eous for the chamber out Of which ,

the air passes in to the workin g space through the eye Of the grin der an d
the space in to which the air passes out of the furrows are o n e I t is the , .

chamber of the casing An d if the set is aspirated by an exhaust an d

.

the eye is isol ated from the chamber Of the casin g (Fig the .

motion in the ir is brought about by the actio n of the f n the

a a

v e n tilatin g effect of the sto n e is al most equal to zero in comparis on

to the airi n g performed by the fa n .

W e hall di rect our atte n tio n to rectilin ear furrows as bei n g the m ost
S

e ffi cien t but seein g that in ge n eral practice curved furrows have to be

,

dealt with the practical mean s of drawin g them must be exp l ain ed
, .

Th e fu rro w s sh a p ed in a l o ga ri th mi c cu rve are made in a simp lified

mann er as foll ows (Fig 1 4 5 I ) at the en d Of the radi us is built a n an gl e
.
,

“
a equal to o n e half the an gle of i n clin atio n of the f rrows the quotien t
,
'
-
u ,

of which is to be foun d F rom 0 the cen tre of the gri n din g sto n e a
.
, ,

perpen di cul ar is dropped o n the li n e 5 V The lin e C V is divided in to an .

equal n umber of parts five in the presen t case an d through poin ts I

, , ,

I I I I I a n d I V li n es parall el t o 5 V are drawn

, , The n from the ce n tre 0 .
cm . wj FL OU R MI LLI NG 169

circles are described with the radi us OI OI I & c an d 0 1 0 2 O3 8 , , .

, , , , 50 .

Through poi n t a a ta n ge n t is draw n to the circ l e O V which crosses the ,

in termediate circl e at the poin t b from I) a tan gen t is drawn to the

circ le OI V which gives us the poin t i Th poin ts 0 h d & c are foun d
,
. e , , , .
,

in the same man n er .

Joini n g those poi n ts by n e v e n curve We obtain a n approximate a ,

con structio n of the l ogarithmic c urv e of the furrow .

E va n s fu rro w s are buil t in this way (Fig 1 4 5 I V ) A circ l e 1 is drawn

’
.
, .

with the ra di us of o n e third R (R = radius of the st on e ) n d cir cle 4 o n e

'

,
a ,

fourth R in radi us The space between circ les l an d 4 is di vided in to an

.

equal n umber of parts (three in the drawin g ) in a like mann er the

space betwee n the circle of the eye I an d that of the sto n e V is di vided ,

but with o n e more part than the prece di n g A tan gen t is then drawn
'

from poin t V to the circ le 4 an d the poin t

(1 obtain ed from a tan gen t drawn to 3 a

forms poin t 8 & c The poin ts thus , , .

obtain ed are j oin ed an d form 8 V the curv e ,

of E van s furrow ’
.

Th e n o vel circu l ar fu rro w s the most .

popul ar kin d hav e the simp lest outlin es

,

F
( gi 1
. 45 V ) F rom
, the ce
. n tre of the
mill ston e 0 a radi us equal to 3 in ches is
proj ected Then a radi us equal to 2 R + 3 in ches is taken an d the circ les
.
,

described by it are the lin es of the furro w s .

Th e practical way in fu rro wm g the sto n e is to do it by mean s of a

timber or iro n p l ate temp l ate (Fig -
which is prepared accor di n g to .

the chosen typ e of furrows I n forgin g o n the furrows in tersection s in .

them ought to be av oided for the an gles of i n tersectio n may st 0 p the ,

deli v ery of the product .

Too ls f r D ressing Millsto n es —The gri n di n g surface havi n g become

o .
,

poli shed from work ceases to gi v e satisfactory results an d requires dress

,

in g which the miller himse l f usually performs by han d

,
F o r this pur .

pose the furrow ham mer a n d hoes or picks of differen t kin ds are used .

The too l s emp l oyed for ren ovati n g the wor n furrows are the furrow
picks with a broad edge of the best harden ed steel I n Fig 1 4 7 two . .

ki n ds of these pic ks are shown : with eyes for wooden han dles an d ,

so li d Fo r so lid picks wooden han dles a or han dl es with a metal

.

head b are use d There are man y various paten ted hammer holders but
. ,

these han dles too work qui te satisfactoril y The picks are made in
,
'

sizes up to 2 5 0 mm alo n g their edges a n d 5 0 mm in breadth

'

. .
.
1 70 F LO UR MI LLI NG [ H A R IV C

A pick is a hammer with the strikin g part groo v ed to a series of

pyrami ds a n d is used for roughenin g the polished s urface of the mil l
,

ston e The n umber o f pyramids to a square ce n timetr e amoun ts some

.

times to fiftee n The area of the strikin g part reaches 8 X 8 cm the

. .
,

l e n gth of the hammer 1 5 cm The striki n g part of the fl at hammer

.
,

as we ll as the edges of the f u rrow hammers are made of the best harde n ed ,

steel
—
.

M illsto n es witho u t F rro ws

u The defects of the groo v ed mil l sto n es lie
.
,
.

in their teari n g the in tegume n ts with their edges a n d gri n din g them ,

too fin ely The siftin g away of the bran reduced to flour becomes
,

FI G 1 4 7
. .

impossible owin g to which the meal acquires a dark colourin g A pre

, .

li min ary crushi n g of the grain in the heart has the same effect B esides .

that the grain bein g but sl owl y del iv ered by the heart a co n siderabl e
, ,

part of the workin g surface is l eft without stock a nd therefore the ,

capacity of the mill sto n es in spite of their l arge workin g area is in sig ni
fi can t in compariso n with ro ll er mills W it h a view to avoidi n g th es e
-
.

defects an en gin eer I Noll proposes to abolish the furrows an d the

, .
,
1

h eart an d di min ish the worki n g a rea I n stead of a heart (Fig 1 4 8 ) I

. . .

Noll sets o n the spin dle a disc of zin c sheet iro n a 1 0 4 0 mm in di ameter -

, .

(the di a meter of the mi lls to n es is 1 30 0 T hi s di sc by gyratin g a n d

devel opin g a cen trifugal force in the grain feeds it i n to the grindi n g
circl e the breadth of which is 7 0 to 1 00 mm I Noll main tain s that
,
. .

1
D ie Mable, 1 9 1 1 No ,
. 40 .
 FLO U R MILLI NG ( ou rw .

of support 0 of the spin dle To obviate s l an ti n g similar weight must be .

attached a t the poin ts 1 n d 1 0 a 02 .

I t is n ecessary to fi n d a ge n eral so l utio n of the prob l e m w hich woul d ,

show how the supp lemen tary weights are to be di sposed in the grin der ,

so as to attai n n equipo n derate motio n Let us suppose we have n

a . a

I mmobi l e axis 0 0 Fi
( g n d a sto n e1A of irregu l ar
. shape r tati n gao n o

it The cen trifugal power devel oped exercises a pressure upo n the axis
. .

I f we mark the reactio n of the axis by forces P nd P app lied in the I a 2,

ful crum of the axis 0 n d 0 a 1 ,

the n i n c ludi n g those forces ,

in the n umber of active

forces we m y regard the ,
a

whol e system as free n d ,

a

app ly to i t D Al am b rt s
”

’ ’
e

prin cip l e Th motio n of the . e

sto n e bein g a steady rotatio n ,

F 15 1
the
IG
sum tota l of proj ectio n s
a n d the sum tota l of mome n ts
. .

in respect to the three reciprocally perpe n dicul ar axes OZ OX O Y must , ,

be equal to zero B y d en otin g the an g ul ar vel ocity of ro tatio n through

.

00 through m the mass of a n y particul ar part of the ston e x y its

, , , ,
-

co o rdin ates in respect to the correspo n di n g axes P the weight of the

-

whol e sto n e a a n d b the di stan ce of the cen tre of gravity of the sto n e
,

from the p l an es y z n d x z M its mass an d h the quali ty 0 0 we obtain

o a o , , 1 ,

the followin g equatio n s

The sum total of pro j ectio n s

M w d+ X 1 + X 2 = O
2

s b + Y1 + Y2 = O
P Z 0

The sum total of momen ts

Pb 2
w 2 m yz Y2 h 2 0 ()
4
—P a + w 2 m xz + X 2h
2
()
5

momen ts of each actin g force in respect to the axis OZ are equa l

The
to zero for the direction of those forces in tersects the axis OZ
, .

I f the axis of rotatio n passes through the ce n tre of gravity 0 nd b , , a

are equal to zero the forces X X Y n d Y then are equal to zero 1 , 2 , 1 a 2 .

I f at the same time OZ is the mai n axis of i n ertia the n Z m y = 0 n d

, , .
,
z a

m z ==0 Un der such co n di tion s the axis of rotatio n of the sto n e wi ll

.

b e exposed to n o side pressures i e we obtain a free axis

-

, . . .
C HAP . Iv ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 1 73
‘

As regards the mill sto n e the first co n di tio n is fulfill ed when the axis
‘

of the spin dle coin cides with the axis Of the stone i passes through its , . e .

cen tre of gravity S hould the grin der however be of differen t den sity
.
, ,

Zm yz a n d fi rm w ll di ffer from zero Th e mi ll sto n e wi ll the n s l an t like

i s .

the wire cylin der I n that case supp lemen tary weights must be added
.
.

I f a a n d b are equal to zero we shall obtai n from equatio n s (1 ) a n d 2

(),

—X 2 ,
an d l —Yz .

'

The resul ta n ts will be P an d P A coup le

of X1 and Y, x , ,
an d I
f
, , 2 .

Of forces are thus obtai n ed which te n d to o v erthrow the axis of the sto n e
, .

F r cou n teracti n g this coup l e of forces Fi there m ght be app ied

o
( g 1 5 1 ) i l .

weights III a n d M of a size which would produce cen trifugal forces

1 2

s r equa l to P a n d P
l , I 2 .

I n ge n era l practice the supp l eme n tary weights are app li ed by mea n s
of a special adj ustmen t in the rev olv in g grin der .

Three or four cavities are made in the sto n e in which cast iro n boxes ,
-

FI G 15 2
. . FI G . 15 3 .

Fi
( g 1 5
. 2 ) A covered w ith a lid B are deposited I n such a box there is a .

cast iron weight p which is adj ustab le al o n g the rod a to the right or
-

l eft a n d up or down with the aid of screws b a n d n uts 0 B y movi n g the .

weight p to the periphery of the millsto n e we augme n t its cen trifugal

force while by movin g o n e weight up a n d the other o n the Opposite side
'

, , ,

of the sto n e down we le n gthen the shoul der of the coun terbal an cin g
, ,

coup le .

An other app lia n ce is shown in Fig 1 5 3 Th weight H here s lides . . e

al o n g the rod F with a collar t w hich rests o n a spri n g E n d is fixed to ,

a

the rod by a bolt Th ro d passes t hrough a cast iro n ball which is hel d
. e -

by a bearin g D I n the opposite side of the box there are open in gs J

. .

B y p l aci n g the en d of the rod in differe n t sockets the height of the weight ,

may be altered .

S imp l er app lia n ces co n sist of boxes with l ead in them the quan tity ,

of which may be either i n creased or dimin ished S ometimes there .

simp l y are ca v it ies made in th e sto n e n d fille d with me lted lead I f too a .
1 74 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR Iv

much l ead is po u red in part of it i s cut Ou t ; if too little more is

, ,

added .

On Fig 1 5 4 showi n g the bui ldi n g of a mi ll sto n e of pieces of Fr en ch

.
,

s to n e we see the cast iro n boxes E for l ead which arehermeticall y set
,
-

in whe n the top part of the sto n e is

covered with co n crete .

W hen the sto n e (ru n n er ) is ready it ,

is b a la n ced in the fo ll owin g way (Fig .

An apparatus co n sisti n g of three p l ates

ef ed a n d a b a n d two bo l ts n d h is
, , 9 a , , ,

set in the eye of the sto n e The pl ate a t .

slides freely o n the bo lts an d is kept back

by n uts 10 B y the upper n uts the appar .
,

a tu s is screwed up in the eye Then the .

sto ne is p l aced o n a hu rstin g in whi ch a n ,

iro n rod m is set upright taperin g to its

y a wn ,

poin t The rod passes through the

it .

ope nin g 0 in the pl ate ab a n d rests with

its poin t in the small cavity made 71.

with a cen tre mark in the pl ate ed Thi s -

.

pl ate must be set so that its centre (the cavity for woul d correspon d
to the ful crum of the drl vm g I ron The rod m n rests with its lower en d
.

o n a l ever which lifts it together with the sto n e The sto ne rai se d by .

_
c i

FI G . 155 .

the rod is carefully re v o lv ed an d watched to see if it s l an ts I n case , .

of a sl an t the position of the apparatus is al tered in the direction

,

required an d the weights in the boxes are tran sposed the ston e havin g ,

been previously l owered o n to the b urstin g a n d the upper screws ,

l oose n ed .

These m an ip ul atio n s are repeate d u n til the sto n e rotates without a

 1 76 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C HA R Iv

workin g surface of the sto n e is set in a horizo n tal p lan e I n the .

sides of the cyli n der are three ho les for bo lts which help to ,

ce n tre the ston e To make the co n structio n lighter the solid

.
,

bottom of the cylin der may be substituted by three l ugs A .

still lighter desig n is represe n ted o n Fig 1 5 6 There are . .

simp ly three castin gs A made with regul ati n g bol ts These '
.

l ugs are set i n depe n de n tl y o n the fl oor in a circ l e at a n

an gle of 1 8 0 0

F o r the p l ai n est ki n ds of machi n ery in peasa n t mil ls a ,

simp le p lan ti n g o n beams may be recommen ded The a d .

j usti n g bolts may be let through the beams i n to which

threaded n uts are set .

Th e dime n sio n s in a ll the figures are gi v e n in mm .

Th e sp i n dl e supporti n g the ru n n er is a n iro n or steel shaft A

Fi
( g 1 5 8 ) wi th
. a vertica l j our n a l set in its base T h e top a .

part of the shaft B is turn ed to a co n e or p lan ed smooth to

a trun cated pyramid I n the first case it is coup led with .

the cross head of the drivin g iro n by mean s either of a wedge

-

or a key .

Th e m i ll bu sh (Figs 1 5 9 a n d -
statio n ed in the eye of .

15 8
the bed sto n e n d arrestin g the side movement of the shaft
.
-

,
a
-

timber (oaken beech tree or pock wood ) or bro n ze wedge shaped

,
-

,
- -

FI G. 15 9 . FI G. 1 60 .

bushes ‘

a . In it the cen trin g Of the shaft is do n e with the aid of bolts

0 an d nu ts 17 . This mi ll b u sh i att ach ed t o the sto n e by m eans of l ugs d
-
s .
,
GHA F . Iv ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 1 77

which are co v ered with a cemen tin g comp ositio n in their respectiv e seats
"

in the sto n e The l ubrican t is poured i n to the cup e

; .

There are mi ll bushes of various design but al ways with bush es

-

S ometimes those mill bushes are set o n the frame -

.

A s tep b earing of the ordin ary ki n d is shown in

-

Fig 1 6 1
. A is the l ower en d of the shaft in to which
.
,

is set a j ourn al B restin g o n a steel bush c The ,

.

side bush d is of bro n ze

-
The o il is p oured i n to 8 .
,

and after p s m g through the beari n g is drain ed

a s

through drill ed can al s f The ho le 9 in the en d of the .

shaft is to afford access to the j our nal B which is ,

kn ocked out with a wedge shaped p l ug in case a -

breakin g o ff must be made The li n er E of the step .

bearin g cylin dric in shape is ge n erally of cast iro n

, , .

The frame of the step beari n g is show n in Fig 1 6 2 -

. .

The spin dle is li fted by a l e v er D The beari n g E .

supports the shaft of the toothed gearin g to the spin dl e .

Th desig n of the step beari n gs varies very much

e -

—
,

but the ball coll ar thrust beari n gs are to be preferred

most
—
.

F 161 I G.
B y mea n s of the drivi n g iro n
.

i
Th e driv g ro
n i n .

the spin dl e is con n ected with the rotatin g sto n e The p l ain est styl e .

of a drivi n g iro n (Fig 1 6 3 ) s a n I ro n cross head which is herm eti

. I -

cally set in the gri n der or a tripod dri vin g iro n (Fig , al so .

tightly fi tted in the sto n e B u t these design s shoul d be av oided .

‘

for the proper b al an cm g of a fast coup led ru n n er in motio n is t an

FI G 1 6 2
. .

impossibility A type of drivin g iro n in vogue is shown in

.

Figs 1 6 5 a n d 1 6 6
. I n the sto n e there are set two cast iro n cups N
.
-

on which the j ourn al s e Of the cross head I) rest This cross head -

.
-

lik ewise has sock ets for j our n al s of a seco n d cross head c The
'

e -

s pin dl e is set w ith its coni c en d in the cross head e; an d faste n ed to it -

M
1 78 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H A R Iv

with o ne or two keys This forms a flexible faste ning o n the prin cipl e
.

of Ho o ke s j oin t ’
.

I n stead of cups it is better to set (Fig 1 6 7 ) a cyli n dric cast iro n

a .
-

rin g B with ribs P for the j ourn al s of the cross head I n that case the -
.

l oad chippi n g the sto n e is di stributed o v er a l arger area The seco n d .

FI G . 163 . FI G 164 . .
FI G
. 1 65 .

cross head D here is coupl ed to t he spin dl e by wedges i though keys t

-

, ,

may al so be empl oyed .

To pre v en t an y curli n g up Of the ri n g it is pro vided with protrudin g ,

ribs which are sun k i n to sockets ho ll owed out in the ston e for that
purpose an d fixed there with cemen t when the rin g is l aid o n
, .

I n the upper cross head of the drivi n g ir o n there is usuall y made a

-

hol e K for settin g the pl ate e (Fig 1 6 7 ) which receives an d the .

grain by cen trifugal force into the eye Of the mill ston e S ometimes a .

cup (Fig 1 6 8 ) is set in the p lace of a flat pl ate The advan tages sup
. .

posed to be a fforded by this cup are that the heav y extran eous matter
(sto n es sma ll,pieces of iro n & c ) drop to its bottom a n d do n o t reach
, .

the millin g area Thi s is howe v er a n un n ecessary complication of

.
, ,

the design because pre vio u s to bein g m ill ed the grain has to be freed
.
, ,
“

of all im purities An d if un c lean grain is mill ed (as in primitive

,
-
 LOU R MI LL I NG
'

1 80 F [ CH A R Iv

axle A slide a l owered or lifted with the aid of a han d wheel b regul ates
.
,
-

the fl w of product The i n clin atio n of the shoe is a dj ustab l e by mea n s

o .

of belts f which may be woun d o n n d off the axle by turni n g it wi th

, a c

the han d wheel e n d keyi n g n with wedges l

-

a o .

An other fee di n g app li a n ce we see in Fig 1 7 1 H ere w e have a cast . .

iro n trun k A moun ted o n the cover of the casin g by its wall brackets .

The spout T cast j oi n t ly w ith the tru n k Through the bottom of the
is .

trun k is l et n a l e co n n ected by sl eeve m with n ax le v run ni n g

a x 2) a
1

from the drivi n g iro n Th sprocket b fee di n g the grain i n to the spout T
. e
,

FI G . 171 .

and the cross head which l oosen s the grain fed in to the trun k are
-
a. ,

both set o n the axl e By raisin g n d l oweri n g axle v with l ever d a ,

attached w ith its fork to the spout the flow of product is regulate d , .

The gate valve e he l d by a screw i t regul ates the de livery of the grai n
in to the spout ; the lid 9 is an in spectin g door the l ubricator oili n g ,
7

the axle v .

3 . Un der Ru nn er M illsto n es
-

In studyin g design s of ston e mills we saw that the product treated

travel s to the outlet from the workin g space un der the actio n Of the
force of friction if l arge en ough n d subjected to press re bet w een the
,
a u

ston es or travel s do w n the furrows of the sto n e n d the w orkin g surface

,
a

of the bed sto n e driven by n air curren t if it is so fin ely broke n that

,
a

the top runn er can n ot act upo n it .

I n the st on e mill s w ith n un der run n er the de livery of the mill ed

a ,

product takes pl ace un der much more favourab l e co n di tio n s si n ce its ,

partic les acq ire a ce n trifugal force A to the l ar ge stock to be mill e d

u . s
,
 FLOUR MI LL I NG 1 81

its treatmen t also obtai n s u n der better co n ditio n s f r o w in g to the , o ,

cen trifugal force the pressure bei n g equal to that of the upper
,

run n er mill s it is treated more vigorous ly n d the actual gri n din g

, , a

takes l ess time .

I n respect of u n der ru nn ers the importa n t questio n as to the out lin e ,

Of the furrows n d eve n their i n dispe n sabi li ty arises

,
a I f in a mi ll wit h , .

a fixed bed sto n e the ven tilatin g air carries the fi n e groun d product
-

out in the case of a rotatin g un der sto n e the un groun d partic les of
,

g rai n wi l l be ej ected by ce n trifugal force if the li n e of the furrows

coin cides with the directio n of the product which is propelled by ce n tri
fugal force a n d by the pressure of air O win g to this if the lin e of
, .
,

the furrow is badly chosen the fi nished product will be u n satisfactory,

,

i e it wi ll be i n termixed with u n grou n d partic l es of grai n

. .
.

To so lve thé questio n of the patter n of the furrows we must

kn ow the directio n in which the
product travels a n d then a desig n ,

of furrows c n be selected which a

will result in the crossin g betwee n

the route of the grain a n d the direc
tio n of these furrows O n ly in this 5 .
,

way will the un groun d product be

ej ected from the furrows to be re F 1 72 IG . .

d u ce d to flour in the gri n di n g area .

P rofessor K ick gives the fo ll o w i n g so l utio n of the prob l em co n cer n

in g the route Of t he stock .

Let us suppose that the un der sto n e rotates w ith n an gular velocity a .

I f a partic l e Of product at a dista n ce from the ax s of rotatio n acquires 7

‘
1

a cen trifugal force m w r equal to th frictio n force fmg it is boun d to

z
,
e ,

slip o ff the sto n e at that mome n t n d move un iforml y i as a free ,

a ,
. e .

body with a speed rm so that its motio n will be directed at a tan gen t
, ,

to the circumferen ce of the radius r The den otatio n s emp l oyed here .

are m the mass of partic les g the acceleratio n of gravity n d f the

, ,
a ,

coeffi cie n t of frictio n between the product n d the sto n e a .

Th e free motio n of the partic l e in respect to the un iform ly rotati n g

sto n e is n in vo lute of circ le a fact easily grasped (Fig
a ,
.

Th sto n e revo lves as poi n ted by arrow S

e Th partic l e m havi n g . e

sli pped o ff at poin t at a distan c e r from the axis of rotatio n fl ies ,

at a tan gen t in the di rectio n the sto n e moves with the speed rm
a
s ,
.

Th motio n of G is abso l ute

e TO fi n d the traj ectory of motio n in
3 .

respect to the rotatin g r unn er let us suppose that in a un it of tim e the,

1 82 FLO U R MI LLI N G
[ H AR I V C

runn er has turn ed at a n an gl e

,
n d the part ic l e m has trave ll ed thea ,
a

di stan ce Then the resul ti n g positio n m o f the part ic l e will be at

al .
1

the i n tersectin g poi n t of the circl e described with radi us n d the 0 1 a

circl e drawn from ce n tre 1 of the radius of the straighten ed arc ba ) 1 ,

correspo n di n g to the an gle A series of poi n ts a G C a85 obtai n ed in

.
l , 2 , 3, 0 .

this man n er forms n in vol utio n of circ le

,
a .

This Opi n io n of P rofessor K ick s can n ot be agreed with for he has

’

n o t take n i n to co n sideratio n the power of wi n d which wi ll impart a

un iformly accel erated motio n to the particl e m .

Besides that takin g for gran ted that the partic le will sli p o ff the
,

s rface of the sto n e (which is impossible the gravity pl ayin g a part

u ,

here ) it wi ll move in a parabol a un der the effect of the power of gravity

,

a n d of wi n d n d wi ll certai n l y fall upo n the sto n e

a .

Co n seque n t ly we see that the trajectory of motio n of the partic l e ,

in fluen ced by its gravity cen trifugal force an d the power of win d pre
, , ,

sen ts a very comp licated curve n d in n o case a n i n vol ute of circl e as

w ,
a ,

P rofessor Kick supposes I t is possib l e to co n struct this cur v e in theory

.

for o n e partic le B u t if we co n sider that in the workin g area of the

.

sto n es there is a l arge quan tity of product u n dergoi n g fri ctio n in its
mass n d that the rough surface of the mill sto n e exc ludes the v ery
,
a

idea of frictio n in the fin e particles for the cuttin g crystalsof the sto n e ,

impede the motio n of the reduced particles an d co n sequen tly excl ude , , ,

the possibility of frictio n in the s li di n g motion o v er the surface of the

sto n e (the motio n must be performed in a zigzag li n e between the
crystal s ) these circumstan ces make the prob lem in sol ub le
,
.

As to ge n eral practice it woul d ha v e been possib l e to an swer the

,

questio n respectin g th e most advan tageous tracin g of furrows had strictly ,

scien tific experime n ts been performed to that en d Howev er in our .

,

o pi n io n the furrows ought to be comp letely di scarded o n the l ower

,

run n er n d retai ned o n ly o n the upper fi xed sto n e for ven til atin g the
,
a

workin g area : the shape of the furrows in the fixed u pper sto n e at the ,

same time bein g of n o great importan ce they may therefore be of the

, ,

simplest kin d i e rectili n ear ,

. . .

B efore procee di n g to describe the desig n s of u n der runn er mi ll s we -

must men tion the experime n ts performed by B uisson in co nn ection

with his observation s co n cern in g the in fluen ce of exhausti n g mill
sto n es .

All the thr ee types of sto n e mil l s were drive n by 6 h p each The . .

experimen ts were made o n wheat grin di n g n d the ston es emp l oyed ,

a

were Fren ch of equal diameter an d with simil ar furrows

, ,
.
1 84 FLO U R MILLI NG [C H A R fit

an ordin ary bal an cin g drivin g iro n e the first cross head of which rests ,
-

o n a di sc i fur n ished with a li d w hi ch serves at the same time as a p l ate

,

supp lyi n g the grin din g area I n its botto m surface the runn er has boxes
.

with weights for coun terbal an cin g it I n the sides of the sto n es there .

are iron sockets n for liftin g it E very sto n e ought to be provided with
.

such sockets because in moun tin g or di sman tlin g of the mill s the ston es
,

must n ecessarily be l ifted .

Th e feedi n g is performed by the tube A described earli er (Fig .

The side travell in gs of the spi n dl e D are arrested by a n or di n ary vertical

-

bearin g k On the spi n dl e is set a washer l its turn ed down en ds en teri n g

.
,

the rin g reservoir m which is fill ed with water (or empty ) to preven t the
,

meal dust from pen etratin g i n to the beari n g As to the remain in g

-
.

details the shaftin g of the rotatio n ,

Of the spin dl e the step beari n g ,

-

a n d the tram pot n o t give n in the

drawin g they are similar to those ,

Of the above examin ed upper

run n er m ill s .

Th e co n structive adva n tages

of un der runn er mills are the -

fo ll owin g
()
1 S imp l icity of the bearin g
substitutin g the comp licated mill
bush here an d its accessibili ty for ,

in spectio n an d l ubricati o n .

()
2 T h e d ri v i n g iro n does n o t impede the free passage of the product
through the eye a n d co n sequen tly the grin di n g surfaces are more
,

supp lied with grain .

The heavy l oa di n g of thestep beari n g is as we have see n a n importan t

-

, ,

defect more or less successf ll y combated almost exclusive ly by Ru ssian

u

e ngi neers To cou n teract the rapid weari n g of the vertical j o rn al a n d

. u

the step bearin g resultin g from the heavy load they rep laced the sli di n g
-

frictio n by a ro llin g frictio n empl oyi n g ball co llar thrust beari n gs of a

,
-

correspo n din g design .

Fig 1 7 4 represe n ts a n un der runn er mi ll desig n ed by Mr P an shi n

.
-
. .

The re v o lvi n g u n der sto n e A is fixed o n a cast iro n frame B formin g o n -

e

b l ock with the pull ey D which is set in to motio n from a belt drive Th
,
. e

who le system is moun ted o n a cast iro n frame E b olted to the foun dation -
.

The frame supporti n g the ru n n er A rests o n two ball co ll ar thrust bearin gs -

the first o n e I bei n g set be l ow n the mai n frame the seco n d I I o n the
, , o , , ,
 F LOU R MI LLING 185

vertical statio n ary cylin dric steel co l um n with a collar The harden e d .

steel ball s recei vi n g the pressure of the u n der run n er ro ll between the ,

steel ri n gs , likewise harden ed I n this wise the pressure of the un der

.

runn er is supported by two horizo n tal p l an es which reduces the wear ,

of the steel ball s an d ri n gs The third upper row of ball s I I I also

.
, , ,

ro lli n g in steel washers does duty for the mill bush Th distan ce b e
,
-
. e

tween the grin di n g surfaces is adj usted with the aid of a cogged han d
wheel 0 havin g a l o n g square threaded hub The han d wheel is turn ed
,
-
.
-

FI G
. 174 .

by a le v er H The liftin g is do n e as fo llows : the tripod drop han ger

.
-

frame K supportin g the fixed upper sto n e is screwed wi th its hub o n the
hub of the han d wheel O a n d lifts the sto n e ; with the retrograde motion
-

of the han d wheel the drop han ger frame is screwed OH an d the upper
-

,
-

sto n e is l owered The regul atio n of the flow of grain is performed by

.

l owerin g or raisi n g the feed tube L with a hopper whi ch is do n e with a

-

han d wheel havi n g a screw threa d o n the in side of its hub

'

The l ubricatio n of the mi ll bush a n d step bearin gs is sufficien t ly

- -

c learly depicted in the drawi n g To the bottom of the frame o n which

.

the run n er is moun ted are riv eted iro n scrapers M which con vey the ,

flo u r to the discharge spout T .

1 86 FLOU R MI L LI NG (m
e . w
W . sto n e mill (en gi n eer Fuhrman s paten t ) has a fixed
Jo uk o vsky
’
s
’

frame T carryin g (Fig 1 7 5 ) a step bearin g R with three rows of ball s .

-
.

The frame P is cast in a sin gl e b l ock with the pul l ey S of pig iro n the
cylin dric rib U of the frame co n stitutes the mill bush K The steel -
.

shaft V conn ected with the frame T by mean s Of keys is statio n ary a n d
, , ,

h as an axl e V i n side which with the aid of a ratchet wheel geari n g a n d

I , ,
a

l e v er f may rise a n d fall by bein g screwed i n to the screw hub b of the

t,

The shaft V supports the fi xed upper sto n e o n a tripod dro p han ger
-

1
-

frame a n d thus affords the possibility of adj ustin g the di stan ce betwee n
,

the gri n di n g surfaces The product is supp li ed by the hopper Q a n d a

.
,

tube 7 which may be raised a n d ’

l owered by a cran k mechani sm p o

driven by a han d wheel n Th -
. e

o il is supp lied fro ml ubricator box -

m through a C opper pipe t directed ,

to the mill bush From the mill -

bush it is co n veyed to the step

bearin g by a can al i The .

step bearin g a n d the mill bush - -

are comp letely isOlated from dust .

Th e product is shovelled from the

bottom of the casin g in to the
spout Z by mean s of scrapers 8 .

I n comparin g the tw
.

o desig n s

of sto n e mills n d attachin g a

F 1 75 IG
supreme importan ce to ball bear
. .

in gs we are i n c lin ed to fav our en gin eer F uhrman s desig n for the
,
’

assemblin g of a ball step bearin g in o n e p l an e presen ts n o difficul ties -

.

I n Mr P a n shin s desig n the fitti n g up has to be do n e in two

’
.
,

p l an es a n d a s light in accuracy in this case compel s o n e to work but

,

in o n e p l an e At first sight the thr ee rows of ball s in F uhrman s step

’
.

bearin g al so prese n t in co n v e n ien ces n amely all the three ri n gs of balls , ,

are even ly l oaded n d therefore the ball s o f the outer rin g havin g a l on ger
,
a
-

course to r n ought to wear out more rapidl y I t has to be taken in to

u ,
.

co n sideratio n however that the n umber of balls in that rin g is greater

, , ,

a n d co n seque n t l y the l oad per ball is l ess Thus a j u di cious choice of .

dia meters in the rin gs of the three rows of balls will equali se the wear o f
the ball s .

The u n der ru nn er sto n e mi lls with ba ll beari n gs have un doubte dl y 9

- -
.
 1 88 F LO U R MI LLI NG
[ H A
'

R
'

I v C

I n a cast iro n casti n g a easil y removed there s fixed the n m o v

-

, ,
I u

a b l e gri n din g sto n e b The r n n er b is set in the l eft sectio n

. of the
u 1 a1

casin g The shaft h with the run n er set o n it by mean s of a co n e n d n t

. a u ,

rotates in three bearin gs with rin g l ubricatio n s two of which are attached ,

to the parts a an d a Of the box Th e third bearin g is set o n a 1 .

bracket .

Th e casi n g a a n d the bracket are estab lished o n a cast iro n f

-
a1 nd -
ou a

tio n frame a n d riveted to it by bo lts I f the frame is correctly p l aced

-

, .

o n the fou n datio n or o n the floor the correct n ess of the posi tio n Of the ,

mill ston e is perfect ly guaran tee d for the setti n g of the bracket n d the ,
a

casin g a a is do n e accurately at the works

l .

Th e throwi n g of the sto n es apart a n d together is performed by mean s

of a l ev er h conn ected by an eccen tric with a screw en din g in a han d
1

wheel f This han d wheel serves for .

-

a more accurate adj ustmen t of the

distan ce betwee n the fixed sto n e b
n d the ru n n er b This is do n e in a l .

the fo llowin g man n er the shaft h :

carryi n g the run n er b rests n a . 1

o
‘

horizon tal pivot j our n al which is -

z,

co nn ected with the box p I n to this .

box e n ters a screw co n n ected with a

box 9 which rests wi th its co ll ars 1>

n a spri n g set in bet w ee n the h b o u

F 1 77 IG .

of the box an d the casin g of the

.

bracket The sprin g will resist a certain n ormal pressure B y t rn in g

. . u

the han d wheel f to the right or to the left o n e may accurately regulate
-

the distan ce between the grin di n g surfaces B t when a big hard object . u ,

(n ai
,
l n t &
u ) is ,caught in
c betwee
. n them the ru nn er presses hard ,

upon the shaft h which tran smits the pressure to the box g
,
The n ]
.

the sprin g c o n tracts a n d the object leaves the worki n g space havin g
caused n o breakage w hile the runn er acted upo n by the sprin g return s to
,

its former positio n .

Th sl ight disp l aceme n ts of the bed —

e sto n e whil e bein g moun ted are
likewise provided for This is do n e in the fo ll owi n g way
. in the right
han d bottom of the casin g co n tain in g the bed sto n e there are set four a -

adj ustin g screws (o nly o n is visib le in the drawi n g they are seen more e ,

c l early in the gen eral view Fig 1 7 7 Through the bo di es of the screws , .

there pass bolts by mean s of which the ca in g Of the bed sto n e n be s -

ca

tightly pressed to the en ds of the adj ustin g screws At the begi nni n g .
 C HA R Iv ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 1 89

the grin ders are adj usted in proportio n to their wear with the aid of ,

th han d whee l f
e B t o n ce the wear of the worki n g surface has
-

. u

reached the stage whe n the turni n g of the ha n d wheel becomes purpose -

l ess the n h avi n g freed the bo l ts a n d screws Of their n uts the fixed ston e
, , ,

is pushed together with its casin g in the di rectio n of the run n er the han d ,

wheel f havi n g previousl y bee n brought to its former position The fur
«

ther adj ustmen t is performed as far as circumstan ces permit again by ,

the han d wheel un til the disp lacin g of the adj ustin g screw s has to be
-

ren ewed This mani pulatio n is repeated so l o n g as the l en gth of the

.

adj ustin g screws per mits i e un til these screws co mp letely sin k in to the
, . .

ho llow Of the casin g a .

W hen the fixed sto n e in co n seque n ce of wear has attai n ed the l ast
, ,

men tio n ed position the run n er ca n be f urther tran sposed T this en d

, . o

F
( g i . the adj usti n g screws l are screwed out of the casi n g a n d the
run n er keyed n to the shaft is pushed with the aid of a co n e shaped
,
o ,
-

e n tasis i to the righ t towards the fixed sto n e To .

assist in tran sposin g the run n er a box 0 is set o n the ,

shaft a n d the run n er with its casin g is shifted more to

the right D uri n g the operatio n fo ll owi n g the sto n es
.

are adj usted in the man n er exp l ain ed above un til they ,

are totally worn .

I n di smou n ti n g the mill specia l hoops are screwed ,

F 1 78 IG . .

o n to th frame n d after the bo lts coup lin g both

e ,
a

halves a n d a have been l oosen ed with due precaution s the frame

1
a ,

is shifted with the aid Of ro ll ers o v er the hoops to the right .

This mi ll may be fur ni shed with sto n es of v arious types Fo r the .

purposes of aspiratio n the machin e is either in cl uded in the gen eral aspira
tio n if there is a cen trifugal app lian ce or provided with a special dust
, ,

coll ector D urin g the ven tilatio n the o p em n g n the left han d side
. I -

sectio n of the casin g a usually co v ered with wire cl oth is hermeticall y

l , ,

stopped up .

Th e feedi n g app lia n ce co n sists of a h Op p er with a n a dj sta bl bottom u e ,

simi lar to the rockin g shoe in the hopper of n or di n ary sto n e mill The a .

hopper is driven by a p ll ey t which an be s hi fted al on g the shaft h

u c .

Fo r regul ati ng the feed there is a distributi n g sli de v alve by mean s

of whi ch the outl et in t h adj u stab l e bottom may be enl arged o r made
e

small er The product fed i n to the millston e slides o v er a magn et which

.

extracts all pieces of iro n an d is then co n veyed by the worm n to the

,

workin g space of the grin ders .

W he t n h e mi l l s in o p eratio n a
I n d fi ll ed with pr oduct t he l e v er h e t 1
s
1 90 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H A R IV

on the box g is brought in to a positio n defin ed by the pawl of the ratchet

1

wheel i e it is turn ed to n an gl e of 90 in respect to its former

, . . a
°

position Then by mean s of the han d wheel f the run n er is brought

.
,

by the screw so cl ose to the fi xed ston e as to produce a grist of

the desirab l e fin en ess I f the process has to be qui ckl y stopped
.
,

it is suffi cien t to tur n the l e v er o n box g back the 9 0 a n d the

°
1

ston es acted upo n by the sprin g will move apart At the same time .

the mo v emen t of the rocki n g shoe must be stopped with the aid o f a
di sen gagi n g gear .

I f a n y hard foreig n Ob j ect is fed i n to the mill together with the grai n ,

the runn er may be thrown out Of actio n by pressm g the sprin g whi ch ,

forces back the box g a n d the adj ustin g mechan ism 1 .

This set may be furn ished with quartzose sto n es but the artificial ,

emery ston es are preferab l e as they require re dressin g much more rarely
, .

There is n o n eed to make sl a n ti n g furrows here it is sufficien t to deepen ,

the v entil atory furrows from time to time a n d smooth the spout for the
ready product .

Of sto n e mill s of this typ e Thos R obin son s D readn ought the .
’

Mo n arch of B obro v y a n d Nab h o ltz ha v e a n a me as have the mill s ‘

, ,

of a simil ar type from man y American works when ce the E uropean ,

en gin eers hav e borrowed the desig n .

B el ow are given the data of the capacities of a ll three types of sto n e

mill s obtain ed in gen eral practice I n the secon d tab l e D den omin ates .
,

the diameters of the sto n es in quarters n the n umber of rev ol ution s ,

1
,

P capacity per hour N the n umber Of e ffecti v e horse powers an d Q the

,
-

weight of the mill without the sto n es .

TAB E L XV I I

TH E CAP ACI TY OF S TON E MIL L S

()
1 U pp er -
B a n n er Mills

D iam eter of S to n es, Nu mb er o f Cap acity p er H o u r,

i n Qu artera l H P re u ired
. . q . in B u sh el s .

g .

(3 5 in .
) —
1 60 1 70
g
f
(
(
4
4
2
9
in
in
.
)
) —
1 4 54 5 5
1 35 1 4 5
1 2 0—
.

g (5 6 in .
) 1 30

measu rin g mill sto nes;

”
1
Q
ua rter: 7 in .
Q ua t er
r _
is a Ru ssia n m easu re
Z u se d in
1 92 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H A R IV

the factories Fo r this reaso n in cal c l ati n g the capacity of sto n e mill s
.
,
u

it ought to be set at 5 to 1 0 per cen t l ower than as per catal ogues of l arge.

firms ; it is sti ll better to empl oy a n experien ced mill er ab l e to han dl e

the machi n ery well .

D etail ed i n vestigatio n s of the capacity per horse power per hour are -

pub lished by W iebe n d are based upo n his experimen ts o n mill s in

,
1
a

Budapest (P ester Miihlen ) These researches in spite of their datin g from

.
,

so early a period have n o t l ost their v al ue in a compar tive se nse

’

,
a ,

owin g to the fact that the stan dard Of mill sto n e grin di n g was very
high at the time men tio n ed The sto n es the capacity of which was
.
,

i n v estigated wer e 5 feet in di ameter an d ran at the rate of 1 2 0 r p m

, ' ,
‘

. . .

Those data rel ate to the p l ai n n d high gri n di n g o n sto n es The a .

first figures (bel o n gi n g to p lain gri n di n g ) approach our moder n data .

I f they are rectified in proportio n to the i n creased n umber of revol utio n s

n n n l 8 —
of the mill sto es a d a improved v e n ti atio n 1 0 lb s per hors e power ,
.

hour will be a perfectly n ormal capacity for modern millsto n e sets .

TA BL E XV I I I

CAP A C I TY PER HOR S E P O WE R (S

-

EAM ) P E R T HOU R A CC O R D I NG
TO W I EBE .

E
W H AT .

()S
1 i n gle gri n di n g with a regrin d
in g of the rest
()
2 G ri n di n g in two passages
()
3 G ri n di n g in three passages

()
1 Grin di n g in a sin gl e passage
()
2 Gri n di n g in two passages
( )
3 Gri n di n g in three passages

passin g to the questio n of the design of sto n e mill s it must be

In ,

pointed out that the cal culatio n of exact detail s of this machin ery de
pen ds o n the weight of the sto n es which in its tur n is determi n ed by , , ,
'

the force n ecessary to crush the grai n Th n at ural ston e bein g diverse . e ,

and variab l e in its structure does n o t a ll ow of the evo l utio n of a n y

,

1
W iebe ,
D ie Ma hlrnithlen ,
 CH A P . IV ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 1 93

a n alytical form u l a as regards the n ormal di men sio n s or for the velocity
of rotatio n of the sto n es Owi n g to this fact we must have recourse
.

to the empiric data evo lv ed by factories a n d mi lls in their l o n g years

of practical experien ce accordi n g to whi ch to o n e square metre of
,

the worki n g surface 700—1 0 0 0 ki logrammes weight of the runn er ’

is accepted Availin g himself of those data Navier suggests the f l

.
, o

lowi n g formu l a for the weight P of the ru n n er P — 6 6 8D ki l ogrammes : _

2
,

D bei n g the di ameter of t h sto n in metres I f the height h of the

e e .

sto n e is to be determin ed then den omin atin g the den sity of the sto n e
, ,

as 6 the di ameter of the sto n e D the di ameter of the eye cl we obtain

, , ,

the pressure to o n e square metre of the workin g surface

6k,

h
W
2 2

for the weight of the mi ll sto n e P am v o l ume of the cyli n dric

n
(D 2 —d )
2

ring multip li ed by the specific gravity of the sto n e ) while ,

4

the area of the b ase of this rin g S eein g that the den sity 8 of the .

n atura l sto n e is equal to 2 0 0 0 a n d taki n g the a v erage of p as 85 0 kil o

,

grammes we obtain h = 0 4 2 5 metres which c losely approaches the

,
°

di m en sion s of the sto n es made by Fren ch man ufacturers .

R esults of a greater accuracy may be Obtai n ed for art i fi cial sto n es ,

as the uniformity in their structure en ab les us to fin d more accurate

limits of weight .

As regards the circumfere n tial v el ocity of the mill sto n es W iebe ,

proposes 9 4 2 metres per seco n d for the utmost limits Fairbairn ,

1 0 metres per seco n d a n d moder n co n structors p l ace the highest li mit

,

at 1 6 metres per seco n d for good Fren ch sto n es .

No scie n ti fi c experime n ta l operatio n s with the view to cal culati n g

the power con sumed in the workin g an d the empty ru n of the sto n es have
bee n made as yet while the imperfect observatio n s give the followin g
,

gen eral rul e : it is co n sidered that to move a grin din g sto n e a force
equal to to o f the weight of the sto n e is required app li cab l e at the
1 1
7 3 9 5 ,

distan ce of from the axis Of rotatio n Then the work T per secon d
2
3, .

wil l be expressed by the formul a

P 7t Dn P
2 0—
22
2
3
60 —
1 800 1 9 80
0

where D is the diameter of the sto n e n the n umber of revolutio n s per ,

“

mi n ut e Gener al pra ctice in R ussi a has estab lished a still more simp le
.

N
1 94 ELOUR MI LLI NG [ CH A R IV

rule accor di n g to which o n e H P is recko n ed to each quarter i e 2 8

,
: , . .

i n ches require four H P 3 5 in ches fiv e H P 4 2 in ches six & c . .

, , .

I n ca l cul ati n g the co n sumptio n of power of the sto n e mill s it must ,

be kept in min d that the power co n sumptio n depen ds o n how the grindin g
is don e The n umbers of horse power give n abo v e are to b e regarded
.
-

as n average
a .

A sto n e mi ll ru n n i n g empty co n sumes 2 0 to 2 5 per ce n t o f power . .

W iebe Offers the fo ll owi n g i n fere n ce for the defi n itio n of the rel atio n
between the velocity of rotatio n of the sto n e n d the co n sumptio n of a

power
Let us suppose that h is the dist an ce between the workin g surfaces
at the i n flow of the product a the speed at which the product is di s
,

charged in a radi al directio n The vol ume of product V deli vered per
.

secon d will be equa l to D ha D bei n g the di ameter of the ston es I f

az , .

we gran t with a great approximation that the vol ume of the reduced
, ,

product is proportio n ate to the vol ume Q flowi n g i nto the mill then ,

V = Q where
a , is the coeffi cien t of proportio n ality R ecko nin g that
a .
:

the speed Of the product delivered is proportio n ate to the circum

feren tia l vel ocity Of the gri n der we obtai n a fl , where v is
,
the ve l ocity u

of the sto n e an d 8 the coefficien t of proportio n ality S ubstitutin g

, , .

those signific tio n in the form l a for V we shall obtain for the bulk
a s u ,

discharged per seco n d

V a Q when ce

m :

6 0a

Bys ubstitutin g the mean v al ues of n n d Q in this form ula we shall a ,

defin e this co n stan t quan tity Th foll owin g prob lem may be solv ed
. e .

as n examp l e Gran ted D = 1 5 metres The n umber of rev ol utio n s

a .
°

n = 1 2 0 4 8 litres Of wheat per o n

,
—
horse power have been fed in per h Ou r
e .

The n per mi n ute Q= 0 8 N N den omin ati n g the n umber of horse pow er
°

,
-

He n ce (recko n i n g Q per hour to be equal to 2 75 litres )

o N
=0 019
m
.

D 2
.

71,

I% i
o sequen tly
C n 00 19 , The co n stan t
N D n
= 2
may be regard ed .

as equal to 0 0 2 then the formul a defin i n g the n umber of powers will b e

,

00 2 .

But seei n g that the capacity of the sto n e mi ll s n mo dern techni cs I .

.

h as risen the coefficien t

, sho ul d be slightly in creased ,
196 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CHA R Iv

disch arged as pointed by arrows 3 The gri n ders are en cl osed in a cast
1 .

iron b uilt u p casi n g 2 7 The shafts of the grin ders are set each o n two
-

bearings with bron ze bushes an d rin g l ub ri cation an d hav e ball step

bearin gs 9 The right han d grin der has a ten sion ad j ustmen t drawn in
.
-

FI G . 1 80 .

detail o n O which is arran ged as follows the piv ot j ourn al of the shaft
,

tran smits th e pressure to the bolt 2 which in its turn presses upon the ,

cross head 3 restin g with its en ds o n sp ri n gs 4 8 the sprin g a n d the en ds

-

of the cross head are set o n gui des 4 9 fixed to the frame of the bearin g
-
.

Th e bo lts 2 a n d 4 7 of the en d beari n gs al so serv e for

the fittin g up Fo r liftin g a n d in spectin g the grin d
.

in g surfaces there is a rack a n d pi n io n 5 2 operated

by a ratchet wheel with the aid of a l ever 5 6 One .

en d 5 4 of this rack is co nn ected by a j oi n t to the

base p late o n whic h the bearin gs are set The .

bearin gs a n d the casin g are set o n the foun dation

F 1 81
IG
frame The acc racy in the setti n g of the
. u

shafts of the grin ders is guaran teed by the co n

. . .

struction of the bearin gs which may be raised or l owered by

,

bolts a an d pushed backwards or forwards by bolts D (see gen eral

,

View ) .

Fo r the i n spectio n a n d c l ean i n g of the grin ders the casi n g is broken

Off the bel t remo v ed a n d the who l e side with the te n sio n ad j ustmen t is
, ,

l ifted with the rack a n d pin io n The p l a te 2 0 o f th is si de is place d o n

.
CHAP . IV ] FLO U R MI LL I NG 197

the base p late free an d is n o t bo lted to it while the p late Of the other
side is cast in o n e b l ock with the base p l ate .

B y the first beari n g o n the l eft (sectio n ) a co ll ar 6 3 is set an d ,

the bush of the pulley 2 2 ser v es as guard for the shaft of right han d -

grin der The holes E —

. E in the frame are made for the belts to pass
through .

This machin e has been ratio n ally desig n ed a n d its so l e defect is the ,

absen ce of ven tilation which is particul arly imp ortan t for coolin g when
, ,

hard min eral substan ces are groun d The worn grin di n g steel di scs .

Fi
( g 1
. 8 1 ) are easi l y rep l aced by n e w o n es Th e capacity of the machi n es .

of this type a n d the power co n sumptio n are gi v en in the fo llowin g

tab le
TAB L E X I X

CAP A CI TY OE MI L L S e H ME TAL GRI N D I N G D I S CS

D iam et er o f Nu m b er o f
G rind i ng D iscs . R evo l u tio ns .

T his tab le gives us the produce of feed this type of mi ll s n o t bein g ,

empl oyed for millin g flour for human con sumption because the en ergetic ,

activity of the cuttin g discs reduces to powder the bran too which can n ot ,

be extracted from the meal .

Lately in the W est E uropean coun tries the use of mills with steel
grin di n g p lates al so for other kin ds of grin din g has begun rapidly to
S pread These machi n es ha v e al so appeared in R ussia
. The abse n ce of .

a n y defi n ite data in ge n era l practice however allows us to utter n o , ,

positiv e opin io n co n cern in g them As to the firms sellin g them they giv e
.
,

but advertisemen ts At a n y rate owin g to the cheap n ess of these mills

.
,

a n d the simp licity in atte n di n g to them they may p l ay a co n siderab l e ,

rO le in supp l a n tin g the heavy machi n ery o n the peasa n try market .

The gri n din g di scs co n stitute n essen tia l detail of this machin ery a .

Fig 1 8 2 represe n ts two ki n ds of those di scs

. On e has the cutti n g facets .

arran ged after the type of the circul ar furrows the other is with fi gure ,
1 98 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR IV

rim collars A and radia l edges B at the outlet of the product Un doubt .

edly the fi rst desig n of the facets is more ratio n a l tha n the seco n d In .

FI G . 182 .

the di scs the heads of the bo lts ri v etin g them to the mill sto n es rest in
,

square sockets D Of a sufficien t depth for the heads to be sun k to a l evel

with the workin g surface of the di sc .

IV

MA CH I NE S ACTI N G BY I MP A C T

Themachin es actin g by impact are co n structed o n the prin cip le of

tran sformin g the kin etic en ergy in to a crushin g actio n which is the result ,

of pressin g a body beyo n d the el astic limits .

S upposin g we ha v e a body weighi n g P ki l ogrammes for the crushin g

of which work equal to E kilogram meters is required Then reckon in g .
,

the i nitial v el ocity of motio n of the body to be equal to zer o we obtain ,

the foll owin g formul a for the destructive work

P 11 2

g 2
P
AS z m herefrom is defin ed the v el ocity v of motion of the strikin g
g
,

el emen t or the v el ocity of the body with which it must hit again st, an

immobile object to be destroyed ,

If the hittin g elemen t a n d the body to be broken are movin g towards

each other an d the vel ocities correspo n din g to their motion s are V a n d V I 2

—
th e resul tin g v e l ocity wi ll be V i V l 2 .

— On of the first mach in es of this type (Fig 1 8 3 ) was

'

D isin tegra tors . e .

suggested b y Carr The W orkin g organ s in this machin e are iro n discs A
.

an d B with steel taper pi n s a a nd b set in co n ce n tric circ l es B oth the

-

.
,

discs are brought in to rotatory motio n in opposite directio n s b y mean s of -

2 00 FLOU R MI LL I NG [CHA R Iv

o n ce o rtwice through the roll er mill s On l eavin g the roller mill the
.

semolin a passes i n to the hopper 1 when ce by a fee di n g roll er H it is

,

delivered in to the workin g space I n this machin e the co n structor tried

.

FI G . 1 84 .

to obviate the v entilating effect of the di integra to r w hi ch resul ts in

s ,
‘

pulverisatio n of the meal ; this explain s the presen ce of the stu ffin g
boxes 2 a n d 3
The di sproportio n atel y l arge cister n s D a n d D serve to co llect the 1

exhaust o il an d drai n it
through cocks i T is the drive n .

belt pulley while the l oose belt

-

pulley J is the tighten er .

TO get a c l ear idea Of the

process of movemen t of the
product over the workin g area
in a machi n e Of the first type ,

l et s suppose we hav e it
u

F
( g i 1 85 ) in sectio.n over the
taper pin s parallel to the
F 1 85
I G. .

discs The pin s P P a n d .

I , 3,

P are movin g in the directio n S a n d the directio n of the pin s

,

P a n d P is poi n ted by the arrow S

2 4 Th an gul ar vel ocity of rotatio n
1 . e

of the two discs is then the vel ocity of the pin s is r r w & c The
co ,
l
a , z , .

berry A falli n g through the eye of the disc en coun ters the p in P which I ,

thro ws it with a n impact at tan ge n t with the speed r

a1 On its way l
a .
 CHA P . I v] FL OU R MI LL I NG 20 1

the berry meets the p in P of the seco n d di sc a n d is rejected at a tan gen t

2 .

li n e a to the p in P m o v n g n a co n trary directio n with the vel ocity

. 2 3 1 I ,

r w
z At the mome n t the grai n a n d the p in P meet the vel ocity of the
.
2 ,

impact is equal to r w + r w cos for the velocity of the pin P is pro

1 2
a
l , 2

j ec te d upo n the di rectio n of the motio n a by the quan tity r w cos l , z a

l
.

W ith a s light i n accuracy however we may mark r ,

r cos S b , 1 2 “
1 u

stitu tin
g the r of this equatio n i2n to the formu l a of the ve l ocity of the
impact we Obtai n ,

V 1 = 27 1 w .

By reaso nin g in the same mann er with regard to the percussio n of the
grain or its partic l e by the taper pin s P P P we shall accor din gly -

3, 4, 5

obt ai n the v el ocities

V 2 = 2 r2 w
3 2 7 3 cc
V 4 = 2 r4 w 85 0 , .

If we mark the dist an ce in a ra di al lin e between the pin s

'

P 1 , P 2, P 3,
&c .
, through n the result will be
,

V 1 = 2 r1 w
V2 :

which mean s that the v el ocities of the impact accelerate in proportio n

to the product s approach to the outlet in arithmetic progression the
’

denomin ator Of whi ch is I n accordan ce with it i n creases the force

of the impact .

This co n c l usio n is arri v ed at o n the suppositio n that in every

elemen t Of the route n to the outlet the p roduct en coun ters taper ,

pi n s of the forward n d backward motio n of the discs Other

a .
,

often occurri n g cases whe n the product en cou n ters the pin s of the
,

retrograde motio n o n ly o n its 2 n way are also possib le Then the ,

.

l a w of acce l eratio n of the ve l ocities in arithmetic progressio n is

infri n ged .

I f the l a w we deduced respecti n g ve l ocities were n o t i n fri n ged thro u gh

the b l ows of some of the pin s bein g missed then the cal culatio n of the , ,

n umber of revo l utio n s of the discs bei n g correct n d the dista n ce n ,

a

defini te the grain woul d gradually be reduced n d l eav e the workin g

,
a

space in the shape of a product un iform in size .

I n reality howe v er those omissio n s do occur a n d W yn ga ert s ex p eri

’

, ,
9 09 FLO U R MI LL I NG [ CH AR Iv

men ts hav e shown the foll owi n g results gri n din g on a disi n tegrator
of Carr s type ’

Fl our
Fi n e mi d dlin gs
S emo lin a
Coarse mid dl i n gs
Offal
Total 1 00 per cen t .

hus after a passage through the disin tegrator 6 6 per cen t of the
T , , ,

product n eeds further treatmen t .

B efore givi n g a defi n ite estimatio n of this machin e we shall examin e

the actio n o f the Nagel a nd
'

K amp s type of disi ntegrator i e ’

, . .

with o n e rotati n g di sc .

Th disc with taper pi n s T e -

I ,

T T rotates as in dicated 2, 3

by arrow S Th e grai n struck .

,

by the p in T (Fig moves in I .

the directio n a On en coun terin g l .

o n its way the fixed p in T the 2,

F 1 86
grai n is
IG
.
crushed nd
.
l oses its a

vel ocity r w I f the grain does l .

n o t break sti ll owi n g to its in significan t elasticity when co mpared to

, ,

the steel pin it l oses its vel ocity ,

.

W e suppose in the fi rst as well as in the seco n d case that it will n o t

, ,

reboun d from the fi xed p in havin g l ost its vel ocity a n d will drop in the , ,

directio n a influen ced by its gravity Therefore the p in T will giv e it

2 .
, 3

th e directio n a I n this wise the way of the product will lie a

‘

a l a 2, 3,
3 .
,

a a
4,
S eei n g that the speed of the free drop is quite i n sig ni fican t
5,

in compari so n to the v el ocity of the pi n s we may ig n ore the item o f the

speed down a to a Con sequen tly the velocities of the i m
,

2 3 . pact T T , I , 2,

& c wil l a ccor di n gly be

.
,

17
3
2 7 3 60 , V5 2 7 0) &0 .

Let us compare these vel ocities with those of the first case
1
= Tl co Vl rz
-
rl w
‘

V3 = 2 m + 2n >
w

V5

Then ce it is cl ear that the homo n ymous impacts in the first case have
doub led the v el ocity of those of the seco n d This mean s that to attain .
204 FLOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR xv

Last ly if the disintegrators were to produce results of as hi gh a

,

quali ty as those obtain ed from other milli n g machin es even in that case ,

they would n o t be worth emp loyin g for the capacity of a disi n tegrator per
,

horse power per hour is co n siderab ly bel ow that of other machin es Gen er
-
.

ally speakin g the machin es actin g o n the prin cip l e of a bl ow co n sume

,

a great quan tity of kin etic en ergy un productively a n d if there is any ,

possibility of rep lacin g them by others the use of them shou l d be avoided,
.

This questio n of disi n tegrators has bee n raised in our man ua l o nl y with
,

a view to maki n g an en d of them o n ce a n d for ever a n d to wa rn the ,

en gin eers again st l osin g time in perfectin g the design s of mac hi n es of the
impact type .

MI LL I N G MA CH I NE S V
H A I N G TH E AX I S OE R OTATI ON OF THE

W OR KI N G O R GAN S IN D I FF E R E N T P L AN E S

Our examin ation of the machin es Of repeated actio n has shown that
these machin es hav e a common axis Of rotatio n if both the surfaces hav e ,

a gyratory motion ; if o n the other han d o ne of them is fixed its axis

, , ,

of symmetry coin cides with the axis of rotatio n of the other .

P ass i n g n o w to machi n es in w hich the stock is treated by the work

in g organ s but o n ce it must be n oted in the fi rst p l ace that their axes
,

of rotatio n lie in differen t p lan es S peakin g n ext of the form of the

.
, ,
‘

worki n g surfaces we c n accept o n ly p l an es a n d cylin ders because

, a ,

other rotatory bodies (co n e hyperbol oid & c ) can n ot produ ce equal
, ,
.

circular velocities of rotation alon g the lin e of the treatmen t of the pro
duct un der such co n di tio n s Of work therefore the product groun d will
, ,

n o t be u n iform a n d the wear of the worki n g surfaces wi ll be un equal .

Taki n g these circumstan ces i n to co n sideratio n ge n eral practice a n d ,

theory have produced three combin ation s of workin g s urfaces (Fig .

The first of them (I ) is a cylin der A a n d p l a n e B I n practice we kn ow .

but o n e type of machin ery Of the I combin atio n the runn er (Fig 1 88 ) ,
.

emp loyed in o il man ufacturi n g The secon d combin ation (I I ) is two

-

cylin dric surfaces with a n inn er co n tact a n d lastly the third (I I I ) two , , ,

cylin dric surfaces with an outer con tact .

’

I n a ll those combi n atio n s the worki n g surface is theoreticall y defin ed

as a straight li n e a n d therefore the product is con sidered to be treated
,

o nl y o n ce by th workin g surfaces The ma hin es of the run n er type

e . c

differ from the in gle actio n machin es for the rotatin g s u rface B carries
S ,
CH A P . Iv ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 205

the product un der treatmen t se v eral times to A W e shall n o t occupy .

our atten tio n with machin es of that type as they are in n o way co nn ected ,

with flour millin g Th machi n es of the secon d type are used for grin d
. e

in g hard substa n ces for i n sta n ce gravel for artificial m ill sto n es
, Fo r , .

this reaso n we shall later o n give a descriptio n of a typical machin e of

that ki n d .

The third combin atio n (I I I ) two cyli n dric s urfaces with a n outer ,

co n tact re v o lvin g with di fferen t v elocities is the basis of co n struction

, ,

of the ro ller mill the most widely used grin din g machin e
, .

I n studyi n g the design s of machin es sub j ecti n g the product to a

simm e treatmen t we n otice that their workin g organ s v ery rarely hav e
, , ,

equal v elocities (runn er ) or the speed Of o n e of the surfaces e q uals ,

zero (I I ) Usua lly howev er the v elocities of rotatio n are differen t as

.
, , ,

shown in combin atio n I I I I n that case the surface B brings the

'

.
2

product up to the surface A which performs the cuttin g or chippin g 2,

FI G . 1 87 . FI G . 1 88 .

actio n Of the degrees of v el ocities we shall speak below a n d point

. ,

out n o w that o wing to their v ariety the product un dergoes sev eral
, ,

cuttin g or chipp in g o peratio n s before bein g discharged from the workin g

space .

W e shall n o w proceed to gi v e a descr iption of the design s of these

machin es a n d commen ce with a type of the secon d (I I ) combin ation
,
.

The M ill The sin gl e ro ll er mill Gri ffi n Brad ey

”
l
’

Grifiin .
-

(
P ul v eriser C o ) show n o n F igs
.
1 8 9 a n d 1 90 is a n origi n a l type of a .

grin din g apparatus for hard material s such as cemen t clin ker Thomas ,
’

scoria superphosphates & c

, ,
.

I t s prin cip l e of operatio n co n sists in crushin g a n d grin din g the

material by a roller which run s o ver the casin g and thus acquires a
,

cen trifugal power .

This is attain ed by mea n s of the fo ll owi n g co n structio n

On a cast iro n base p l ate 2 4 in S hoes 6 6 which rests o n rubber bu ffers
-

, , ,

there are set timber sta n ds 2 3 supporti n g a be l t pu ll ey frame 4 ,

-
.

This frame is of cast iro n n d co n sists of two box shaped part s riveted ,
a
-
206 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH A R Iv

together by two bolts 6 3 bel ow a n d j oin ed by a cross piece 2 2 at the -

tOp .B y mean s of four iro n rods 5 it is supported in a correct positio n

in respect to the foun datio n W ith their upper e n ds those rods are
.

screwed in to the frame 4 while the lower en ds r n through bolt holes

,
u -

in the corn ers of the fou n datio n a n d are screwed up by n uts un der which ,

are laid two rubber buffers 6 4 apiece separated by n iro n linin g

,
a .

Th e first machin es Of this type howe v er were fur n ished with cast
, ,

35 13

FI G
. 1 89 .

iron stan ds but the vibratio n of the casin g durin g the grin din g process
,

was communicated it appears by the rigid stan d to the frame nd had a

, , ,
a

detrimen tal effect upo n the bearin gs The n ecessity of obviatin g this
.

vibration has l d to the above —

e men tio n ed co n struction of a n elastic
j un ction between the frame a n d the foun dation .

I n the frame 4 there are set a fast belt pull ey 1 7 a n d n auxili ar a

y
-
.

o ne 1 4 . Th e l atter by mean s of the belt pulley 4 0 set o n the axl e 4 1

,
-

an d carryi n g the gear 6 0 turn s the worm 4 9 of the feedin apparatus

. ,
g
 208 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C HA R Iv

through which the product fall s in to a fu e shaped chamber un der nn l -

the cup whe n ce it is removed by a tran sportin g app lian ce (a worm in

, ,

Fig .

On the fou n datio n is fixed a siev e 3 8 a cyli n dric co n e 4 5 su rroun ds it

,

co v ered with a lid 4 4 carryin g a con e shaped casin g 2 5 through which -

the shaf t 1 passes .

I n Fig 1 9 0 above the ro ller are see n the wi n gs of the fa n 6 which

.
, ,

are desig n ed to propel the triturated product through the siev e 3 8

Un der the roller n d attached to it by n uts there are the win gs 8
,
a ,

for stirrin g the product .

There are n o movi n g parts in the dusty atmosphere of the cup .

The j oi n t in the belt pu ll ey is hermetica lly covered with a lid 1 3

-
The .

l ubricatio n of a ll movi n g parts is do n e through the ho l e 1 2 drill ed in the

spin dle fixed in the cross piece -

The spi n dl e ce n tres the lid aided by cann o n steel bush 2 7 .

The di men sio n s of the machin es are the fo ll owin g

Height
abo v e the foun datio n 2 6 0 0 mm .

S ize of the base p late 2 1 0 0 x 1 6 00 mm .

Height of the middl e of the belt pull ey abo v e the -

foun dation
D iameter of the bel t p ull ey -

Number of re v ol ution s per min ute

Co n sumptio n of work between
W eight of the who l e mill
D iameter of the roll er
D iameter of the casin g
Len gth of the gen eratin g circle
W eight of the casin g
W eight of the cha n ge rin g of the ro ller

Accor di n g to the data of the factory the mill reduces to fine mea l ,

from 2 6 4 to 6 4 00 cell s to a square cen timetre of the sieve between 1 5

a n d 2 to n s per hour of hard up to of soft phosphate a n d from 1 5
, ,

to 2 5 to n s of P ort lan d cemen t quartz or ore depen din g o n the hard

, , ,

n ess n d the l arge n ess desired of the product

a .

The machi n e Operates in the fo ll owi n g mann er when brought in to

motio n the roll er rotates in the same directio n with the belt pull ey
,
-

a n d o n reac hi n g its n orma l n umber of re v o l utio n s is j erked out of its

central position by han d .

The cen trifugal force which attain s 3 000 kil o gra mmes when at fu ll
,

speed pres ses the r oller to the castin g

, .
CH AP . Iv ] F LOU R MI LL I NG 209
’

No w commen ces to rev o lve arou n d the casin g ; movi ng in

th e ro ller

the directio n Opposite to the o n e it started with .

Th e product is poured i n to the hopper 5 0 .

As soo n as there has co llected e n ough materia l in the cup to be

S coope d up by the wi n gs 8 it is flun g by them o n the casin g n d the
, a

millin g commen ces .

W hi le in full operat io n the co n te n ts of the cup are stirred by the

ro ller a n d when reduced are bolted through the siev e by the pad dl es 6
,

which do the duty of a f n at the same time Th pieces remainin ga . e

un sifted fall back un der the ro ller .

The padd les o n the axis Of the ro ller in revo lvi n g draw the air in
through the co ni c casin g n d impel it through the sieve so that the
a ,

dust does n o t escape outside .

The sie v e chose n is s light ly larger tha n the fi n a l product to avoid ,

chokin g up .

I n S pite of the i n ge n uity of the desig n described its co n siderab l e ,

comp lexity must be poin ted out as well as the circumstan ce that a large ,

part of the work in gri n di n g goes to overcome the resistan ce offered to the
motio n by the wi n gs 8 a n d the co n ti n uous stirrin g Of the heavy product .

Th app licatio n of rubber buffers al so ca n n ot be reg a rded as a happy

e

thought for in dia rubber exposed to the ope n air rapidly l oses its elasticity
,
-

a n d wi ll do so the quicker beca u se of the vibratio n S teel p l ate sprin gs .

would serve that purpose with success .

The n if the actio n of the fa n be r egul ar the dust may fly out of

, ,

the hopper 5 0 if there is n o product in it a n d therefore a lid to the hopper ,

woul d be a n acceptab le device .

Lastly our atten tion is drawn to the un sheltered position of the feed
,

worm 4 9 set o n the free en d of the S haft if a n ythi n g l arge W ere to fa ll i n to it,
.

This defect coul d likewise be obviated by carryi n g the bearin g 5 3

o v er to the left behin d the hoppers
, .

VI

R OLL E R MILL S
1 . Co nditio n s f
o Redu ctio n f
o the P ro du ct

Before we direct our atten tio n to th co n struction of roller mill s e ,

it is n ecessary to become acquain ted with the character of actio n of the

workin g surfaces a n d the co n dition s nder which the reduction of the u

sto ck is possib l e ,
2 10 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CH A R TV

W ehave(Fig 1 9 1 ) two cylin dri c surfaces 0 n d O rotatin g at di ffer

. a I

en t ve l ocities in the di rectio n s S a n d S At a certain mome n t there is a I .

berry (or a particle of o n ) A in between them which is to pass through

e ,

the worki ng space The surfaces of the cylinders may be either smooth
.

or con sist of a series of chisel s spoken of o n p 1 5 3 Fig 1 3 5 I n that case .

, . .

the ro ll s are said to be corrugated or grooved an d the pr o duct may ,

be impell ed into the working

space by their corrugation s in
a n y combi n atio n of ve l ocities

n d di ameters of ro ll ers A a . s

to the operation Of smooth

rolls the con dition s of work ,

ing wi ll be deduced from the

F 19 1 I G.
followin g con sideration s :
.

First the workin g s urfaces a n d the product u n der treatmen t must

,

have a certain coefficien t of friction f I f the material of the roll s gi v es .

a v ery small coe ffi cien t the grain A will n o t be drawn i n to the work
,

in g space but wi ll remai n s lidi n g abo v e it

, B t as the workin g surfaces . u ,

are prepared of a defi n ite kin d of material (cast iro n n d porcelain ) f is a ,

likewise a defini te quan tity Therefore the defi n ite f has to be combin ed
.

with other elemen t s characterisin g the worki n g surfaces .

F o r the coefficie n ts Of frictio n f a n d the a n g l e of frictio n 1 Kick gi v es ()

the foll owin g quan tities

TAB LE XX

Fo r F in e Middl ing s .

Material of R o l l ers .

Cast iro n smooth polished ,

Dead cast iro n

Cast iron used
Porcelain

Let us examin e n o w the con dition s n eeded for the product to be

drawn in to the workin g space with the qua n t ities p n d f given ( a .

Th roll s bein g in rotatio n the grain A weighs upo n their surfaces in

'

e ,

the poin ts of con tact n S uppose the reactio n s of that pressure to be p

.
,

their direction is evident ly ra di al Then the forces of friction directed .

,

in tan ge n ts at the poin ts of co n tact of the ro ll s a n d the product will be fp , .

I f the a n gl e of direct io n Of th e re acti o n s an d o f the ce ntre lin es name d the ,

2 12 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C HA R Iv

The Ma teria ls a nd D esign o f Ro lls .

—Th material s
e Of w hich rolls are
prepared must be hard n d wear resistan t — a .

I f the product is to be reduced by cuttin g it is n ecessary that the ,

coefficien t of friction should be the least possib le as the forc of friction is , e

Ob n o x 0 u s here
1 B u t if the ro ll s operate o n the pri n cip l e of trituratio n
.

Fi
( g .13 6 p ,
the n. the force Of frictio n re n ders usefu l service ; a
'

high coefficien t of friction therefore is desirab le in that case The choice

, , .

of material however is determin ed by its durabili ty wear resis ta n cy

, , ,
-

a n d mou l dabi lity Gen eral practice has shown that cast iro n steel a n d
.
, ,

porcelain an swer those requiremen ts .

Th e iro n ro ll s are cast so that their surface is harde n ed 5 to 1 0 mm .

deep from the surface The hardenin g of the surface of the rolls is brought
I

about by castin g them in meta l finin g pots or by other mea n s which are -

the secrets of the factories .

The attempt to use steel was un successful it must be admitted though , ,

that thi s questio n has been but little treated by en gineers I t is probabl e .
,

howev er that roll s of in got iro n with a cemen ted (harden ed ) surface
,

wo ul d giv e better results than cast iron an d the en gi n eeri ng firms ought ,

to work in that directio n .

P orcel ai n ro ll s were first i n troduced by W egm an n factory The ’

s .

durability of porcelain rolls is n o t as great as that of cast iron but for ,

semolin a grin di n g they are i n di spen sabl e At first so me twen ty years

-
.
,

ago the porcelain r oll s were n o t qui te satisfactory O ften b urstin g o n

, ,

beco mi n g heated an d they became rapidl y an d irreg l arly worn Nowa

,
u .

days howev er the exhausti ng o f roll er mill s havi n g been impro ved a nd
, ,

durabl e porcelain bein g a v ailabl e they compete with cast ir o n roll s ,

.
-

quite Successfully .

Th e compositio n of the ro ll porcel a in is approximatel y -

P ure chin a c lay

.

—
6 1 6 2 per ce t n
—
.

Fin e qu artz 16 17
Fel dspar —
16 17
Chal k 4

As regards the design s of roll s those of cast iro n are gen erall y ho ll ow ,

cylin ders A (Figs 1 9 2 a n d 1 9 3 ) which are set o n the shaft B hot a n d are
.
,

seldom keyed o n This con struction (Fig 1 9 3 ) is more con venien t if

. .

cast when at work the roll warms more evenl y a n d therefore its ex p a n ,

sion ev enl y modi fies the dimen sion s leavin g the cylin dric shape un altered , .

The porcel ain ro ll s (Fig 1 9 4 ) co n sist of a full cylin der A caught b e

.
,

twe en cast ir o n washers C b y mea n s of cou pli n g bo lts d

-

I n the washer s .
 CH AP .
]
Iv FLOU R MI LL I NG 2 13

there are holes for the shaft B . A gen eral view of a groo v ed roll is give n
in Fig 1 9 5 . .

—The position of the ro lls in the frame materiall y in

W sitio n of the Ro lls

fl u en ces the design of other pa rts of the machin e the degree of wear of the ,

ro ll s themselv es a n d the compactn ess of the whol e machin e I n choosin g a

, .

position for the roll s the co n structor must be guided in the first p lace by
co n sideration s Of a co nv en ien t supp ly of the product to the millin g surfaces ,

FI G . 1 92 . FI G
. 1 93 .

an d easy access for in spectin g the operatio n Modern practice all ows eight .

differe nt combin ation s of the ro ll s which we shall examin e n o w (Fig

—
,

—
.

The fi rst three combi n atio n s 1 2 a n d 3 re l ate to doub l e ro ller , ,

mill s Combin atio n 1 wi th the axes lyi n g in a horizo n ta l p lan e in re

.
,

spect to the supp ly of the product a nd in spectio n of the work o ffers

a n un doubted adva n tage o v er the seco n d which was suggested with ,

a view to reducin g the breadth of the machin e which is importan t ,

for mill buildi n gs de fi cien t in s pace B u t a material defect Of the V ertical

-
.

positio n of the roll s is the more comp licated feedin g Of th em i e the supp ly , . .

FI G . 1 95 .

in g of the product to the workin g surfaces Combin ation 3 giv es a di agonal .

di sposition of the rolls owin g to which the comp lex con struction Of the
,

feedi n g device is discarded a n d at the same time the machin e gain s in

,

compact ness in compari so n to combin ation 1 Combin atio n s 4 a n d 5 are .

desig n ed to afford the product two passages between three roll ers These .

combin ation s howev er shoul d be most decidedly rejected as the middle

, , ,

roll are p laced in workin g con dition s di ffere n t from those o n either
s

side I n doin g doub le work they wear out con siderab ly faster than the
.
,

outer roll s owi n g to which the operation of the mill becomes irregu lar
,

a n d i n ferior in qual ity I n additio n the feedi n g of the ro ll s requires

.
,
2 14 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR Iv

a comp licated apparatus a n d the i n spectio n of the work is difficult .

Combin atio n 8 Offers a doub l e passage of the product The design s of .

machin es Of that combi n ation purportin g to give two passages n e

, ,
o

succeedin g the other are sen seless if o nly from the fact that they
, ,

infri n ge the prin ciple of a sin gle treatmen t of the product Machin es .

of this type are o ffered for use in p lain farm millin g which is quite ,

successfully performed by sto n e mill s .

The machi n es where t h e product after the first passage is delivered

to be bolted n d the large product sifted o ff is then fed to the l ower pair
,
a

FI G . 1 96 .

of roll s for further treatmen t are complicated in constru ction an d are

,

n o w al most e ntirely discarded

—
.

There remain but t wo combi atio n s 6 a n d 7

n Th e fact is that the .

four r oll er machin es are the usual modern type of the roller mill No t
-
.

only in in dustrial mill s but in small cou n try m ill s al so two ro ll er

, ,
-

'
mill s are a rarity This is easily un derstoo d s in ce o n e four roll er mill
”
.
-

is con siderab ly cheaper than two mills with two roll s each .

Combin atio n 6 is accepted by ll American factorie s a n d but at o n e

a , ,

Han tz in Austria Hun gary in E urop e Combi n ation 7 with a di agon al

-

, .
,

disposition of the roll s has been accepted by a ll E uropean makers

, .

W he n studyi n g the design s of mill s with a horizon tal n d dia go n al a

2 16 FLO U R MI LLI N G [ CH AR Iv

prin cip le of trituration (p 1 5 4 Fig W he n studyi n g the pri n cip les

.
, .

of reductio n we saw that the work of trituration is performed by the

,

force of frictio n Nf where N is the pressure Of the worki n g organ upon

,

the product n d f the coefficien t of frictio n of the product again st the

,
a

workin g s u rface Th greater f is the less is the pressure of the roll s

. e ,

upo n the stock a n d the less will the wear of the workin g surface a n d of
,

other parts of the machi n e be B esides that if the pressure of the .

,

roll s upon the product be heavy the quality of the flour deteriorates ; ,

the flour is dead i e has a l o w baki n g quality as prov ed by

,
”
. .
,

experimen ts Great pressure produces b ad res ul ts in the millin g of

.

flour of high qu ality while the l ower kin ds are less i n fluen ced by it Fo r
,
.

this reason the s urface Of the gri ndi n g roll s shoul d have the l argest
possibl e coefficien t of friction f I n this respect porcel ain ro ll s or the .

dull s urface of cast iron roll s p roduce satisfactory results though the
-

dull surface of the cast iro n becomes p o hshed rapidly a n d requires

frequen t ren o v atio n .

To procure flour out of the brann y particl es (dark middl in gs ) a ,

heavy press ure has to be app lied Which the porcelain cann ot support ,
.

The dull surface of the cast iro n ro ll s is so rapidly worn that there is
-

n o se n se in usi n g it Therefore a polished cast iro n s urface has to be

.
-

used a n d a stron g pressure giv en to the rolls so as to obtain a su ffi cie ntl y ,

great force of friction Nf .

Thus we have three ki n ds of r oll er surfaces ()

1 corrugated for -

breakin g (2 ) rough surfaces with a large coefficien t of frictio n (porcelain

, ,

dull cast iro n ) for reducin g the m iddhn gs a n d (3 ) the smooth polished ,
-

cast iron surface for millin g the l ower kin ds of flour

-

Let us n o w turn to the character of motion of the rolls .

W he n studyi n g the movemen t of the product in the worki n g space of

the roll s we n oticed that the roll s rotate in opposite directio n s pushin g
, ,

the grain or particles of it in the di rection of the lin e of grin din g The
, , .

greater the revolvin g speeds of the roll s the higher is their capacity ,
.
“

B u t this vel ocity has a li mitin g sig n ificatio n which is determi n ed by ,

the degree of heatin g of the product which must n o t exceed 30 to ,

' °

otherwise the flour may lik ewise become deaden ed The limitin g S igni fica .

tion of the circumferen tial v el ocities of the roll s will be given later while ,

it must be poin ted out n o w that their magni tudes are differen t for each roll .

This is i n dispen sab l e to Obtai n a cutti n g effect o n the corrugated

roll s an d trituration o n smooth rolls I f the vel ocities of both the roll s .

were equal the stock would be chipped ra di all y o n the corrugated rolls
, ,

a n d w ou l d b hn d the space betwee n the corrugatio n s by a radial pressure .

CHAP . Iv ] FLO U R MI LLI NG 217

A con tin ued operation of the r o ll s woul d lead to a crushin g of the pr oduct
to cake if the grain were sufficien t ly soft or to flour if it were v ery hard
, , , .

Co nsequen t ly there coul d be n o id ea of breakin g in the sen se we un der

,

stan d it The same kin d Of crushin g the product to cakes woul d take
.

place o n the smooth r oll s too .

Our aim however in the breakin g process is to obtain a uniform

, ,

product approximately corr espo n di n g to half the size of the least

distan ce between the workin g surfaces Fo r this reaso n di fferen t v el o .

cities are imparted to the roll s Then the sl owly rotatin g roll carries .
1

the product to the o n e revolvi n g rapidl y which cuts Off part of the product ,

with the chisel of the corrugation in the breakin g process a n d chips it o ff

by the f o rce Of friction in gri n di n g O nly un der such con di tion s does .
'

the directio n of the active force coi n cide with the route of the product a n d ,

p art of it the size of which is determin ed by the di stan ce between the

,

workin g surfaces is separated o ff I t is importan t to n ote that e ven if it

, .

were possib le to av oid crushin g the product to cakes by roll s rotatin g with
equal vel ocities the pressin g f orces actin g perpen di cularly to the direction
, ,

in which the product tra v el s wou l d crush it to partic l es of various sizes

, ,

depen din g but httle o n the least di stan ce between the workin g surfaces .

Th e circumferen tia l v el ocity of the ro ll s is determin ed accor din g to their

diameter an d n umber of rev ol ution s the rel ation of v el ocity of the sl owly ,

a n d the r a pidl y re v o l vi n g ro ll s v aryi n g betwee n 1 an d 5 : 1 The .

foll owin g tab le g iv es a c l ear idea of the limits of the sizes of the di ameters ,

nu mber of revo l utio n s a n d ve l ocities of the ro l l s,

I n this tab l e D den otes .

the greatest a n d the l east diameters of the roll s N the n umber of rev ola ,

tion s of the fast roll V their circumfere n tial v el ocities in metres per seco n d
, ,

V : V the di ffer en tia l ve l ocities of the fast a n d sl ow ro ll s

I .

TAB L E XXI

R o ll s . D mm . V mt p ersec. .

—
6 9 brea ks 1 50 350 — —
2 2 5 4 80 2 5 1 5 1
2—
: :

5 breaks —
2 2 0 3 80 2 5 0 600— 2 : 1 3

1 3 reb rea k s —
2 2 0 3 50 2 5 0 400— 1 2 1 1 5
°

: 1
1 5 0— —
-
.

Grin di n g cast iro n 400 1 8 0 3 80 1 1 3 1

°

2 2 0— —
.

Grin di n g porcelain 350 1 5 0 1 80 1 1 5 1

°

factories in E urope E n glan d excepted gen erally give the av erages

Th e
—
, ,

of those quan tities n amely D of the corrugated ro lls 2 2 0 300 mm

, , .
.
,

1
h
T is is k n o wn a s t he Di ff eren tia l .
”
2 18 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ CH A R I v

s mooth —
2 5 0 3 5 0 mm N = 2 —
00 3 2 0 S ome of the E n glish factories
.
, .

(T hos R obi .n so n ) gi v e D = 1 5 0 4 0 0 mm n d N up to 4 80 S o gr e a
~
t a .
,
a .

diameter as 4 0 0 mm is used but in o n e make of R obin so n s mills the

.
,
’

differen t v el ocities of a pair of ro ll s are obtain ed through their differen t

di ameters Thi s co ns tructio n is described bel ow
—
. .

Th A merica e n factories (A ll is C ha l mers C O ) usua ll y gi v e D = 1 7 5 2 5

-
0 .

mm but with a much higher n u mber of rev ol ution s p to 6 0 0 for the

.
, ,
u

rapidl y rotatin g roll s wi th a di amet er of 1 7 5 mm whi ch correspon ds .

,

to the circumfere n tial v el ocity of metres per seco n d The mills Of .

Nordyke Marmo n Co desig n ed for the prep aratio n of v ari ous cer eal
.
,

flakes of barl ey oats maize & c (the cel ebrated American Hercul es
, , ,
.

oat flakes kn own in R ussia but in the form of un successful adulterations )

’

, ,

have roll s up to 4 6 0 mm in di ameter a n d the greatest n umber of revo lu

.
,

tio n s of the fast roll is 1 2 0 which correspon ds to a circu mferen tial ,

vel ocity Of 2 9 metres per secon d .

H avi n g become acquain ted with the gen eral character Of the workin g
organ s of roller mill s we shall proceed to study in detail the corrugat in g
of break a n d scratch roll s .

2 . Co rrug a ting the Ro lls

Gen era l S ta te f
o question con cern in g the most
the Qu es tio n .
—
i—
Th e
”

a dva n tageous operatio n of the breaki n g mi ll s may n o t be regarded a s

solved un til the question touchin g the correct corrugatin g of roll s is settled .

Un til n o w the speciali st when a prob lem of corrugatin g the roll s of

, ,

break mill s was set before him solved it by simp ly poin tin g o u t the n umbe r ,

Of Corrugatio n s a n d n ever touched the other esse n tial sides of corrugating

,
.

n ,
—
I t is n o t surprisi g therefore that o t o nl y fl o u r mi ll ers but by far the
n , ,

greater n mber of specialists too wo l d express astonishmen t if ques

u ,
u

tio n ed as to the i n clin e of the corrugation s I t is a totally un kn own fact .

to them that the in clin e Of the corrugation s in respect to the gen eratin g
circl e of the roll s varies from the first to the last break a n d that the ,

degree of perfection of the break process depen ds o n it .

Ho w is the cutti n g of ro ll s don e in mill s pro vided with corrugatin g

machin es or at factories un dertakin g such work 4 Al most always with
,
’

the same i n clin ation of the corrugation s An d yet this is a grave error . .

B u t besides the in c lin ation of the corrugation s there I s an other side ,

to the cuttin g to which n o serious atten tion has been paid by the Euro
,

pean n o t to men tion the Russian experts I t is the di sposition Of the

, , .

an gl es of the corrugation s of their cuttin g edge s in respect to the product

,
2 20 FLO U R MI LLI NG [ C H AR IV

Sh arp an gles c haracterisin g it o n ly by the size of the an gle of the corruga

,

tio n itself Fig 1 9 7 shows us the an gle of

. . esta b h sh ed by practi ce

for corrugatio n s in hi gh millin g of wheat an d Fig 1 9 8 reproduces the ,

.

shap e of the corrugatio n with a n a n gle of 7 5 emp loyed in the simp lifi ed °

wheat a n d high rye milli n g .

The dra win gs of Figs 1 9 7 a n d 1 9 8 pro v e that those a n g les of corruga

. _

tion s are easily Obtain ed The fro n t facet Of the corrugatio n (Fig 1 9 7 )
. .

forms a di ametrical p lan e of the rolls for a n a n gl e of a n d a segm e n ta l

p la n e (Fig 1 9 8) for a n an gle of 70

. the r in the seco n d ca se be in g °

equa to e e B
l — .

I t is n o t di fii cu lt to show (Fig 1 9 7 ) that giv e n such a n g les a n d a .

FI G . 197 .

certain n umber Of corrugatio n s their height is a quite de finite ,

I n deed if we den ote through n the n umbe r of corrugatio n s to

,
acenti
metre of circumferen ce of the roll t their height an d h=
10 mm the .

, ,
n

circ ul ar pitch of the corrugatio n s then from the trian gle ,

1
AB C we sh all
O btain for t in milh m etres

M t= h 9O

supposin g with a slight er

, ror that the tan gen t passin g through the ,

point A of the corrugation passes at the same time through its poin t B .

He n ce it is cl ear that with n i n creased n umber of corrugatio n s to a a

centimetre their t decreases I f we t ake the n umber of corrugation s n.

1
The circul a r p itc h of the co rru ga tio ns is the p a rt o f th e a rea b e twe entwo po ints o f the
co rru g a tio n s , b u t fo r the sim plicity of th e in feren ce h m a y den o te a c h h
o rd o f t is a rc o r a ta n gen t,

as the mis ta k e o ccu rrin g fr m thi

o s in fr e e n ce is ins igni fi ca n t .
CH A P . Iv ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 22 1

equal to 5 a n d 1 0 a n d fl= 5 0 then accordi n g to formula

.
,
°
, , ()
1 we Obt a in
correspo ndi n g t s in mil limetres
’

mm .
,
and t= mm .

Th e shape of the corrugatio n s havin g a n a n gl e of de fin ed by the

,

co n struc tio n derived from Fig 1 9 7 is gen erally used in high grin din g
.
,
‘
.

F o r the me di um l o w n d rye gri n din g ge n era l practice has estab lished

, ,
a

the shape of corrugation s given in the design o n Fig 1 9 8 the radi us r .

,

accepted for the medium gri n din g bein g l ess than the o n e used in lo w

us see how the height Of the corrugation will be defin ed in this

Le t
case the n umber of corrugatio n s to a cen timetre bein g given
, .

Havi n g den oted the a n gl e of the corrugatio n If the a n gle formed by ,

FI G . 1 98 .

the radi us R passin g through the poin t of the corrugation a n d its l ower
facet y the circul ar pitch of the corrugation h a n d its height through t
, , ,

we can defin e the height t of the corrugation .

Th e a n g l e y usua ll y equa l to 7
,
a n d the radi u s of the ro ll R a n d r

bein g given previo usly to definin g t the an gle y an d the circul ar pitch of
,

the corrugation h have to be defin ed in accordan ce with the quan tities given .

The an gl e 7 is deduced from AA OC by sin y

}
,

r= R sin y, he n ce sin y : I; '

The circular pitch of the corrugation h may be easily defin ed with a .

slight error either as n arc AB taken as a straight lin e or as its chord

,
a , ,
.

I n the l atter case the circul ar pitch h is defin ed as the side of n o bh q u e a

an gled trian gle ABD .

W e S h all ta ke the seco n d case it bei n g more sim pl e a n d gi vin g an ,

222 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR IV

in si gnific an t error Gran ted that the tang en t AS pass es t hrough the top
.

of the secon d corrugatio n B i e coin cides with the chord a n d forms like
wise with the radi us OB right an gle The n we Obta in B A D = 90 —
, . .
,

a . L a,

L A BD 90 y a n d co n seque n t l y
,
AB D 1 80 , ) y) ,
4 a

= 1 80 —( — y) =a1 80
The trian gl e A BD gi v es

AB = h .

is the height of the trian gl e A B D dropped o n to A B i e the

If t
— —
.
, .

height sought for of the corr gatio we obtai

u n n t B D sin (90 y) ,
.
.

Hen ce by substituti n g the signi fication in the p l ace of BD a n d per

,

formin g the simp lification s ( fi—y) we obtain the t sought for a z

,

In this formula a ll the quan tities are kn own for h is defin ed in accord ,

an ce with the n umber of corrugation s per cen timetre th an gl e 5 is gi v en ,

e , ,

a n d the a n g l e y is de fi n ed as exp l ain ed above

'

.
,

I f we take the di ameter of the ro ll to be 2 5 0 mm i e R = 1 2 5 m m .

, . . .
,

r= =4 0 mm fl= 7
. 5 ,
n d ha v i n g defi °
n ed,y out of the
a form u l a,

sin substitute them in to the formul a ()

2 then the ,

number of corrugation s bein g 5 an d 10 to 1 cen timetre we obtain after ,

a cal culation
10 09 49 0 5 54
5 0 9 70

10 0 9 49 0 554
= 0 54 mm .

10

Ha vin g
reckon ed out a n d compared the signi fi cation t Of the corruga
tion s for high milli n g with the same n umber of them 1 0 per 1 cm
,
‘

.
,

a n d a n a n gl e o f 7 we obtain t = 0 7 6 mm This S h ows that the height °

of the corrugation s in the secon d Ca S e is con siderably l es s mm .

,

i e by
. . mm .

i
B esides the corrugatio n s of a t ri an gu ar shape j ust exa m n ed the use
l ,

of corrugation s with roun ded cuttin g edges has bee n suggested B u t this .

form is j ustified n either by theory n o r by practice ; when ce the theoretical

premi ses are deduced Th thir d shape of corrugation s trapezoidal in
. e ,

S ectio n as shown o n Figs 1 9 9 a n d 2 00 is still recommen ded by some

, .
,

factories a n d specialists who mai n tai n that the cutti n g of the grai n or
1
“

, ,

1 Fr
. Kett nb ch e a , D erM ull er a nd M uhlen ba u er 190 7 , .
224 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CH A R Iv

Let us see n o w what requiremen ts the S hape of corrug ations shoul d

an swer from the poin t Of v iew of the least expen diture of en ergy in the
,

breakin g pr ocess .

Th e aim of the breaks is to obtai n as ma n y m iddhn gs as po s sib l e

with the l east possible breaki ng of the bran co v eri n gs Th e ideal .

positio n of the grain in first break rolls is hown in Fig 2 0 4 I n this S . .

FI G 2 02. . FI G . 2 03 .

case the grai n would be broken through its creas e Th tran s v ersa l . e

position given o n Fig 2 0 5 is l ess fav ourab le for the first breaki n g
.
.

From the poi n t of view of the theory of cutti n g the shapes Of c o rru ,

t i n s exami n ed exc l ude ll possibi l ity of cutti n g I n deed the shape

ga o a .
,

of corrugatio ns defin ed by Fig 1 9 7 gives a cuttin g an gle of

,
for .
,

thi s a n gle is defin ed by the fron t edge of the chisel (Fig 2 0 4 ) a n d the .

directio n of its motion which may with n i n signi ficant error be re

, , a ,

FI G . 2 04 . FI G . 2 05 . FI G . 2 06 .

garded as straight The cuttin g force P = P tg for P the force of

.
1
3
a,
2,

pressure is perpen di cular to the fro n t edge Of the hisel A P the

,
c 3,

chippin g force is perpen di cul ar to the di rection in whi ch the chi sel
,
“

mo v es an d is the cutti n g an gle I f = 9 0 then P

,
a That is to . a
°
,
_
00 .

say the grain is n o t cut but broken S hould the hape of the corruga
, , . S

tion be as defin ed by Fig 1 9 8 > 9 0 Th en P is a n egative quan tity

(
.
,
a
°
.
,

whi ch mean s that the breakin g of grain is performed u n der worse co n

ditio n s tha n in the first case (Fig I n the O call ed
”
Ho chschro t . S -

1
S ee P r0 f I Time s . .
’
t h eo r
y f cu ttin
o
g .
 CH AP . IV
] F LOU R MI LLI NG 225

When the slowly rotati ng ro ll is smooth (Fig 2 0 7 ) or has fi n e corrugation s

-
.

F
( gi . it is quite p l ai n that the grai n is broke n a n d that part of
the bra n comin g in con tact with the smooth or fin ely cut surface of
,
-

the sl owly revolvin g roll is groun d That is the reaso n why Hoch ,
.

schrot produces the so — called bl ue flour whic h is gen erally extracted ,

o n the brush mac hi n e .

No w if we set b efore ourselves the prob lem of o b t in ing a p erfe t cuttin g

’

,
a c

of grain or part ic les of it in the breakin g process a n d leavi n g the int gu e

men t whole with the view of obtai n in g a greater amoun t of broad bran
, ,

then the fast roll has to be supplied with corrugation s havin g cuttin g
an gles Of as shown o n Fig 2 0 9 which pro v es that the feedin g roll .
,

may have ordi n ary corrugation s The cuttin g of corrugation s of that .

shape o n cast iron howe v er woul d presen t some di fficulty by reason of

, ,

its brittlen ess Therefore takin g in to co n sideration the in c lin e of the

.
,

FI G . 2 07 . FI G . 208 . FI G. 2 09 .

corrugation in regard to the gen eratin g circ l e of the roll this an gle may ,

be accepted as excee di n g n amel y 6 0 which has a small cuttin g

e ffect .

A sol utio n of this question is likewise possib l e if the roll s are made of
in got iron a n d n o t of cast iro n with a harden ed surface I t is quite
, .

possible to use in got iro n (Open hearth steel ) The roll s may be co n sider -

ably lighter a n d a cemen tation of the corrugatio n s which woul d guarantee

,

their wear to be l ess than that of the corrugation s o n cast iron roll s is -

attain abl e as pro v ed by P rofessor Zworykin s experimen ts

,
’
.
1

Th e questio n of the preparatio n Of ro ll s of i n got steel is very imp ortan t .

S erious atte n tio n ought to be paid to it by e n gi n eers because a satis ,

factory sol ution o f that question woul d cause a revol ution in respect to
the shape of the corrugatio n s res ltrn g in a more perfect breakin g pro ,
u

cess owin g to the sharper an gl e of the corrugatio n s

, .

I nclin e f the Co rru ga tio n s —

o Tw o di rectio n s for the cuttin g edges O
.
f
the corrugatio n s were suggested at the beginn in g of the dev el opmen t of
’

1
S ee Cementa tio n of Iro n b yGas , by P ro f . Zwo r
ykin ,Ru s s ian Miller , 1 9 1 1 , No . 2 .
226 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR w

roller milling down the circumferen ce of the roll an d al on g its generat

-

in g circ l e
. B u t this produced u n satisfactory results Fo r this rea so n .

gen eral practi ce in the en d adopted the direction of the corrugation s at

a n a n gl e to the gen erati n g circ l e of the rol l .

I n their a ttempt to gi v e a theoretical exp lan atio n of the resul ts o h

ta in ed in practice some Of the German authors (Fr Ketten bach a n d F
,
. .

B aumgart n er ) regard the breakin g down of grai n or partic l es of it as a

process of shearin g Fig 2 1 0 represents the edges of two corrugations
. .

N of a sl owly rotati n g roll an d N of a r a pidly re v ol vin g o n e The cuttin g

1
.

of the grain takes p lace when the corrugation s cross at the poin t 0 Fo r .

the sa ke of c l ear n ess we shall carry this poin t out to O W hen the edge 1 .

of the corrugation N presses upon the berry the di rection of the cuttin g
1 ,

FI G . 2 10 .

force P is perpen di cul ar to the direction of the corrugation I f the .

in clin ation s (the an gl e in respect to the gen eratin g circl e ) of the co rru
a a

g a t io n s of both ro ll s are equa l in size but opposite in their

,
d irec tio n s the ,

a n gle between them is 2 Let us di vide the active power P according to

a .

the l w of parallel ograms i nto Z horizontal a n d S v ertical The cuttin g

a .

forces will be S S Th force Z ten ds to push the product in a horiz ontal

. e

direction a n d if thi s force exceeds the force of friction of the product

,

again st the surface of the corrugation it will drive the product to the en d
,

of the rolls havin g ann u lled the cuttin g force S The forces P a n d Z
, .

depen din g o n 1
. will be fo rm lated th s
a u
'

S = P cos ; Z P S in a z a .

I t is evi den t that the power Z must n o t exceed P f i e the force of , . .

friction of the product o n the cast iron where P is the n ormal pressure ,

a n d f the coefficien t of this frictio n The highes t a n d the lim it signi fica
.
2 28 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CH A R IV
.

the bearin g which in its tur n resul ts in the W ear of o nl y o n e collar of ’

—
, , ,

th e bush of the beari n g the right or l eft ha n d o e t hi s depe n ds o n the

n

—
,

di rectio n in which t h co rr g tio n s are i n c li n ed a n d the wear of o n e

“

e/ u a

shoulder of t h axis of the roll I t is Ob vious that there will be n o preS

e .

sure upo n the a x is on ly in case 0 (Z = P in = 0 ) i e if the co rrru a

'

g a z s a , . .

tion s are cut in a gen eratin g circl e .

Ten di n g to discard the i n c lin atio n of the corrugatio n s which causes ,

the in j urious pressure upon the axis we must in crea se the n umber of ,

rev ol utio n s of the roll s I f we were to bri n g th speed of the fa St roll to

. e

1 000 revo l utio n s per mi n ute with a corres pon di n g i n crease in the speed ,

of the sl ower roll the direction of the corrugation s might be laid in the
,

gen eratin g circl e an d the shape adopted that in Fig 20 9 I n this mann er
, , . .

we shoul d obtain a steady l oad ann l the pressure again st the axis n d ,
u ,
a

con siderably raise the capacity of the mill s That is the reason why .

the questio n con cernin g the preparation of cemented iron rolls shoul d
receive earn est con sideration .

I n c l osi n g the chapter o n the i n c lin atio n of the corrugatio n s we must ,

remark that it depen ds en tirely upon the coefficien t of friction of the pro
duct upon the material Of the roll s I f experimen ts prove that f for the .

g rai n is sma ll er a n d i n creases for se m o h n in accorda n ce with the dimin u a

tion of its size then the must li kewise graduallyin crease as it cl earl y
,
L a

—
,

fo ows from the formu a S n

ll l i — tg p (for the h mi t of sig ni fi cation Z Pf) a _ _
< :
,

because the p mo di fies within the li mi ts of 1 2 a n d 2 5 maximum

z .
° °
.

Th e in hn tio n of the corrugatio n s therefor

c a e has to be accepted at , ,

1 0 to 1 6 per cen t i e a t 1 0 mm to 1 6 mm to 1 00 mm of l en gth of

. . . . . .

the roll .

P o s iti n f the Cu tting E dges of the Co rru gati n s —Th e positio n of the
o o o .

cuttin g an gl es of the corrugation s in respect to the product treated p lays

n o sma ll part in the process of breakin g the berry The practice of this .

process in R ussia gen erally recogni ses but n e position of corrugation s o ,

viz the product is fed in by the sharp edges of the S l owly revolvi n g roll
.

a n d is subjected to the cuttin g effect Of the likewise sharp edge of th

e
fast roll The gen eral practice part ly of the W est n d chiefly of America
.
a

h s evol ved fo ur types of positio n for corrugatio n s

a .

Those types are to be seen o n Fig 2 1 1 Here a shows a sharp edg e . .

opposite to a harp o n e b sh arp to dull c dull to sharp a n d lastly

S , , , ,

d dull to du ll .

Th e German s reco gni se o n l y three types of positio nof th e corruga

tion s n amely
,
b a n d d whi le in America al so the type c s used
,
a, , , In 1 .

F B aumgart n er s Opi ni o n the type is to be emp l oyed for breakin g

’
.
a
,
CH A P . Iv ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 22 9

type b for l ooseni n g the bran n d type d for r b r kin g of pure middlin gs ,
a e ea

Au fl Osin g n amed Po h hin g in R ussian milli n g ) s .

Th e we ll kn ow n German factory form S eck B ros

-

n d the Austrian . . a

firm of S elmar Hecht (V ien n a ) app ly the o n type for the whole break ,
e a ~

in g process .

Let us exa mi n e every o n e o f th o se types apart

'

Un doubte dl y in high milli n g the type a shoul d be used only while

the break semolin a is sufficien t ly large a n d sharp B t begin ni n g with . u

the fifth break it ought to be rep laced b y the type b because on ly in

, ,

t hat c a se c n a l arge quan tity Of broad bran be Obtai n ed an d the coarse

a

meal a n d middlin gs be less dirtied by the small particles of reduced bran .

I t is e vide n t that if the product is fed in by the dull edges the harp ,
S

e dges of the fast roll will scrape out the middlin gs without breaki n g up
t he co v ers which offer greater resistan ce to the cutti n g force
, .

W hen we tur n to t h e l ast break the p urpose of which is to c lean ,

the bran an d separate from it the meal y particl es of en dosperm lyin g

FI G 2 1 1
. .

immediately ben eath the i n tegumen t then to av oid the reduction of bran , , ,

it is reason able to use the type d The opinion expressed by Baumgartn er .

,

who recommen ds the type b for the l oosenin g process is to be regarded ,

as erron eous for the cuttin g of the bran is in evitab le in that case
,
.

Th e type d must be emp l oyed for po lishi n g the m iddhn g s (A fl Osun g ) u ,

i e the sc r
. . atch rolls a n d for the passages fo ll owin g after the first o n e in
,

rye milli n g .

As to the type c it is used o n ly in America part ly in the rye part ly

, ,

in maize milli n g most l y for t h e first passage

,
I n se v eral Am erica n .

mill s howev er we h d the occasion to see the type 0 app lied to the
, , ,
a

grin di n g of very hard wheats On e of the Ol dest American firms .

,

Nordyke Marmon Co in I n di an apolis a l so me ntio n s the use of

.
, ,

type c for v ery hard wheats commen cin g with the third break though , ,

it giv es n o defin ite con sideration s in favour of that type

—
.

The Nu m ber of Co rru g tio n s Th n umber of corrugation s in the a . e

breakin g passages depen ds n the degree of perfectio n of the milling . o

I n high protracted milli n g the n umber of corrugatio n s i n creases m ore

,

sl owly than in the se mi high I n the cases where o n is obliged to use

-
. e
 2 30 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH A R Iv

the same pair of roll s for two passages (as in the sa ck milln or in the
semi automaton ) a n intermedi ate n umber of corrugation s is t a ken
-

, .

The n u mber of corrugatio n s is ge n erally defin ed to a cen t imetre of .

the circu mferen ce of the roll ; in Russia howev er the n umber of co rru , ,

g a ti o n s is gen era ll y give n per in ch .

The tab l e adduced bel ow gi v es a gen eral v iew of the n umber of

corrugation s for breakin g a n d cl eanin g of the bran (the l ast pas sa ge )
in di fferen t kin ds of mi ll i n g There the a v era ge n umbers e v ol ved by
.
,

practice are given I n the same tabl e will be pointed out the desira b le
, .

i n clin ation of the corrugation s a n d the position of their Cuttin g edges

accordi n g to th e above men tion ed typ es -
.

Thi s tab l e must be regarded as gi v in g the n or mal quan tity of co rru

g a t io n s to a gi v e n n um ber of breaks As the n umber Of brea kin g .

passages fluctuates accordin g to the type of the grin din g or the h ard
,

n ess of the wheat the n um ber of corrugation s o n the intermedi ate

,

breaks may v ary The first a n d the l ast breaks however h av e to

.
, ,

retain the mention ed n umbers of corrugation s if it is desirabl e to Obt ain ,

broad bran Fo r the first break (if there is n o Ho chschro t i e brea k

.
,
”
. .

ing of grain al o n g the crease ) there remain three to fo u r corrugation s to

a centimetre a n d for the l ast twel ve corrugation s
, .

I t must be n oted that we con sidered the n umber Of corrugatio n s in

conn ection with the gen erall y accepted differen ti al vel ocity of rolls a n d ,

with the n ormal n umber of rev ol ution s for the fast roll established by ,

Germa n a n d E n glish factories an d based o n the n ormal producti vity o f

the breakin g process Fo r thi s reason we giv e tabl es Of different typ es
.

of grin din g here which al so characterise the de fin ite productivity of the

,
’

breakin g process in conn ection with the accepted corrugatin g .

From this tabl e we l ea rn that for hi gh grinding (eight

breaks without Ho ch schro t with a n ormal n umber of corruga
tion s a n d spiral the j oin t workin g l en gth of the break roll s to
,

o n e sack of grist per day is de fin ed to be 2 1 mm To obtain the .

l en gth of the first break roll s for a mill Of for in sta n ce 3 0 0 sacks capacity , ,

of high grin di n g per twen ty four hours we mus t evidently multiply -

—
,

3 mm by 3 0 0
. That will gi v e u s the l e n gth of the roll s for the first
.

break which will be 8 1 0 to 900 mm in eight breakin g p assages This

, . .

bein g the len gt h the gen eral in clin e of the corrugation s is 1 2 0 mm

, .

F o r me di um grin din g with a n orma l n umber of corrugatio n s a n d

,

t heir in clin e the j oin t workin g l en gth of the break roll s to o n e sack
—
,

i —
of gr st per day is 1 9 8 2 2 3 mm for l o w grin din g 2 0 mm an d

—
. .
, ,

l ast l y 3 2 3 2 4 5 mm for E n glish grin din g. .

2 32 FL OU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR

3 1139 1 8

Hc erg
'

H H
I: H

N
CD

N
(

E H
E
CHAP . IV ] F LO U R MILLI NG .
2 33

on sequen tly with a n ormal n umber o f in clin ed corr u gation s the

C , ,

followin g capa city is defin ed for fo u r kin ds of grist (in lb s ) to a cen timetre .

or a n in ch of the workin g len gth of ll the breakin g passages per twe n tya

four hours
TAB L E XX I V
CAP A C I TY OF TH E R OLL S P ER TW E NTY -

F O UR HO U RS To 1 CM . OR
1 I N CH IN LB S .

P er 1 cm ofLeng th P er 1 i n ch o f Leng th
Kw a Of G ri n d i ng
.

of th e Ro ll o f t h e R 0 11
.
. .

But as the capacity Of the breakin g process is defin ed by the absolu te

a n d di fferen tia l v el ocity of the ro ll s the n umber of corrugation s an d ,

the other elemen ts characterisi n g the corrugatin g (their in chn atio n an d

position ) were dealt with in con n ection with the gen erally accepted
Vel ocities of the rolls the absol ute v el ocity of rotation of the roll s is
metres per secon d a n d the ratio of v el ocity of the sl ow an d fast
—
,

roll s is l 1 : 3 .

Here we may c l ose our i n v estigatio n of the question con cer nin g the
corrugatin g of roll s All that has been said pro v es that this question
.
,

which Open s out a n ew li n e of thought as for in stan ce of the shape of , , ,

the grooves in con n ection with the in vestigation of the process of break
in g dema n ds serious experimen tal treatmen t
, .

S i n ce the time of P rofessor F Kick a n d K A Zworyki n—in the co urse of

al most twen ty years—thi s question has n o t stirred from its place whereas
. . .

in other regio n s of mecha ni cal tech n o l ogy we wit n ess gigan tic progress .

3 . Adj u stm ent of the D ista n ce between the W o rkin g S f

u r a ces

The degree of reduction of the p roduct depen ds n o t o nly o n the form

(corrugated or s mooth ) but a l so o n the di sta n ce betwee n the worki n g surfaces .

I n accorda n ce with the size a n d the hardn ess of the product it is n eces ,

sary to alter the distan ce between the break roll s with the view of Obtain
in g the qua n tity of coarse a n d fin e middli n gs giv e n in the p la n as the ,

machin es which divide the product accor di n g to its quality (p urifiers )

, ,

are cal c l ated for a certain quan tity a n d size of this product Fo r
u .

thi s reason ev ery roll er —mill must be furn ished with a mechani sm which
will a fford the possib ili ty of adjustin g the di stan ce between the rolls
 2 34 FLO U R MI LL I NG mm . IV

at a ny m o ment ecessity Of adj ustin g the distan ce is likewise

. The n

e viden t in the c a se of smooth roll s o n whi ch coarse an d fin e middlin gs ,

o f v a rious sizes h a v e to be reduced a n d mea l of differe n t fi n e n ess

,

obt ained The possibility of adj ustin g the distan ce between the rolls
.

c an be attai n ed by maki n g o nl y o n e Of them ad j ustab l e so as n o t to ,

compli cate the con struction of the machi n e .

The a dj usti n g mechani sms are n amed brakes As it is impossibl e

“ ” 1
.

to reckon upon a n ideal freein g of the grain of metal admi xtures before
m illin g a n d there is al so the possibili ty of their droppi n g in out Of the
,

m a chin ery durin g grin din g the con structio n of the brake must be such
, ,

th a t in c a se of a na il o r any other metal Ob j ect fallin g in the surfa ce ,

of the rolls shall n o t become spoilt or the dri vin g organ s of the machin e
,

FI G 2 1 2
. .

break . Th e brakes satisfyin g those requirements are called ten sion brakes .

W e shall exp lain the idea of the ten sion brake o n schematic co n
stru ctio n s .

On Fig 2 1 2 we hav e four sketches of ten sion brakes S ketch 1

. .

exhi bits the form Of the simp lest brake The ro ll B is set in statio n ary .

bearin gs D fixed in the frame C of the mill The roll A lies in bearin gs E .
,

which may be disp laced to the right an d to the l eft with in the sli ppers
P—
_

P of the frame
I I f the ro ll s are to be set at a certain di stan ce the
.
,

b o lts l screwed in to the frame with their t hreaded part n d their conic
, a

hea ds resti n g a gain st the adjustab l e bearin g E are tur n ed W ith the aid , .

1
h h h
T is term is u se d t ro u g o u t the wo r to d en o te w k h a t Is n o w E
g en erally term ed In n gla d n
a dj u s tm en t m ec a n is m
”
h
or
‘
a dj u stm en ts I t is . s h o rt , a n d co rrectly ex presses w a t h
h
o t erwise enta ils n eedl ess circu m l o cu tio n .
2 36 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR Iv

n ormal the deflectin g tail n of the lever tran smits the pressure to the
,

cran k mechan ism through the bolt 8 a n d after the hard particle has 1,

passed between the roll s the weight G brin gs the roll to its estab lished
position .

From tim e to time the i n v en tors paten t such weight brakes B t . u

we must say th a t thi s bulky appli an ce offers n o advan tages in compari

s o n to the spri n g brake a n d at the same time comp licates the co n structio n

of the roll er mill for this reason such makes ought to be re j ected .

As regar ds the first desig n it is to be met with in the simp l est,

American mill s for crushi n g hard material s (quartz Of the roll ,

sets for mill s there is kn own o n ly o ne Am emcan con struction of Noye s

FI G 2 1 3
. . FI G 2 1 4
.

u a o who v ery un successfully adapted the prin cipl e of direct action

in B ff l ,

of the pressur e of the spri n g (Fig The resistan ce of the sprin g here
.

is pl aced bel ow the axes therefore the pressin g force P giv es a v ertical
,

compon en t F a n d a coup le Th which causes friction of the bearin gs in

1 ,

the guide parallel s I t is only the comp on en t E directed to the l eft

.
, ,

that tra n smits the pressure to the spri n g F o r this reaso n the mecha n ism .

must be l ess sen sitive .

4 . A Gen era l S u rvey o f the Ro ller M i ll

To un derstan d the meanin g a n d import an ce of the details of the roll er
mill o n e ought prev iously to become acquain ted with the gen eral character
of its con struction where those details may be seen a n d their purpose
,

un derstood Fo r this purpose we shall in spect the con struction of the

.

four roller mill s for those mill s represen t doubl e two roller mills a n d
-

,
-

con structio n ally in n o way di ffer from the t win rollers set in separate
frames .
C HAP . Iv ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 2 37

.
Ro ller Mill of Ga n z t Co in Bu da p t e — eFig 2 1 5 ill ustrates G n s
. s . a z
’

roll er mill in section Let us exa min e the right han d half of this mill
.
-

The produ ct flows i n to th e hopper b of the mill with its weight presses ,

Ope n the gate w n d fa ll s upo n the feedi n g ro ll s which

,
a re rotati n g in the a

directio n of the Cl ock han d W ith the vi ew of l etti n g through these roll s
.

a strea m of product of the desired thickn ess there is a gate down the whole
l en gth of the hopper which may be ope n ed more or l ess by mea n s of a
,

FI G . 2 15 .

han d wheel h From the fee di n g roll s the stock run s to the r eduction
-

rolls a n d o n passin g between them falls through the hopper a into the
,

spout D urin g the millin g of a moist product there is the possib il ity of
.

its stickin g to the surface a n d b hn di ng the corrugation s an d therefor e , ,

un der the roll s down their full l en gth there are scrapers set (knives for
the smooth brushes for the corrugated roll s ) to free them of the adhering
,

particles .

F o r the in spectio n of the feed there is a gate opposite to the feed

rlo l s,a n d a o r
n the o n for in s p ecti n
g the
e o
, p eratio n o f the ro l l s is se t in ,
.
238 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR IV

the frame bel ow the roll s Through both of them a t any moment the
.

stock may be seen a n d reached with the han d o n openin g the gate .

Let u s see n o w how the probl em of a djustin g the dis tan ce between
the workin g surfaces is sol v ed her e .

I n modern mill s the re gul atio n of the workin g d is t a n ce a n d the

'

mecha nism for throwi n g the roll s out of gear are j oin ed in o n e common
construction W hen the mill is in workin g order the gate w is either in a
.

vertical position or in cli n ed to a certain degree which depends o n the ,

quantity Of the produ ct fed The gate w rotates o n a n axis which has a
.
,

l e v er o n the outside (Fig 2 1 7 ) with a weight z coun terbal a n cin g the

.

FI G 2 1 6
. .

pressu re of the grain upon the gate w This l ev er is j oin ed by mean s

.

of a fin ger with an other lever y with the axis of rotation at the side
of the feed hopper
-
.

On the right ha n d side of the l e v er y there is a cavity for the fin ger of

-

the han dl e of the lever 93 (Fig 2 1 8) leadin g to the rod r of the brake M
.

Fi
( g . 2 1 7 T h e l ever 98 is set o n the ro ll u which ru n s through the who l e
l en gth of the mill Th. n d of the l e v er x is co nn ected by a rod r with
e e

the brake or adjustmen t mechan ism proper the j oin t bein g of the ball
.

a n d S o cket ki n d .

The brake correspon ds to our fourth p la n I t s co n structio n is as

.

foll ows I n the levers M which hav e their axis of rotation in N there
.
,

are hel d by mean s of screws g the bearin gs of the sl owl y rev olvin g s ide
roll s d an d d These same bolts afford the possibility Of settin g the axe s
l .
2 40 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH A R Iv

of the rolls horizo ntally Th top en d of the lever M (Fig 2 1 9 ) is a t n

. e . e

sion brake of the fo ll owin g con structio n The hub of the lever co ntain s .

a spri n g c restin g o n the right han d side again st the washer m which is
,
-

screwed to the hub a n d o n the left agai n st the rin g n Through the
,
.

hub there freely run s the bolt j oin ed with the rod r I f a hard Ob j ect is
0 .

caught in between the roll s a n d the pressure exceeds the n ormal the hub ,

of the lever tran smits the pressure through the w asher m to the sprin g c ,

an d compres si n g the S pri n g mo v es to the l eft a n d whe n the hard Object

, , ,

has passed the worki n g area of the roll s the spri n g compel s the l ever to ,

return to its former position T h ten sion of the sprin g is i n creased by

. e

tur nin g the han d wheel h the square pin 7 havin g bee n pre viously pressed
-

,
’

in a n d stopped by screw k .

W e shall n o w exami n e the operatio n of the whole mecha ni sm To .

FI G . 2 19 .

brin g the roll s into workin g position we must lift the l ever 23 which with , ,

its p in raises the l ever y an d the l ever with a weight (Figs 2 1 7 an d 2 .

Then the gate w drops a n d the product flows to the feed ro ll s W ith its .

weight the product keeps back the gate a n d preven ts the weight 2 from
di sj oi ni ng the l evers x a n d y As soo n as the flow of the product i nto
.

the hopper is stopped the pressure upon the gate w is removed an d the
, ,

weight will drop down lift the lever y n d di sen gage it with 23 Then
.

2 , ,
a .
,

acted upon by the sprin gs of the brake the levers M will force the bearin gs ,

apart B t as there is the possibili ty of the grain recommen cin g to flow

. u

from the hopper there must be arran ged n adj ustmen t to retain it
, a

there F o r this purpose each mill is supp l ied with a mechani sm stop
.

pin g the actio n Of the feed roll s which in Gan mill is effected in the
,
’
z s

foll owin g man n er The axl e conn ectin g the brakes of the roll carries
. u , ,

o n a key a hub with the le v er A (Fig 2 1 9 ) which is con n ected by mea ns of

.
C H AP . Iv ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 24 1

lev ers B an d C with the hub c freely ru n ni n g o n a key of the axle E of ,

the bottom feed roll The left han d part of the coup lin g is furnished
.
-

with cross heads On the en d of that same ro ll there is a freely rot ati n g
-
.

belt pulley with a j uttin g out p in a n d a hub which al so en ds in cross

-

heads correspon din g to those of the hub c A bell is attached to the en d .

of the ro ll E W hen the machin e is set Operatin g the axle i t t urn s so

.

that the lev ers A B a n d C push the hub c to the left a n d brin g it with its
,

cros shead en d in to co nnectio n with the hub of the belt pulley Then
-
-

the feed roll a lso commen ces rotatin g As soon as the mi ll ru ns empty
-
.
'

the hub 0 becomes di sen gaged with the hub of the belt pull ey which -

from this momen t freely rotates o n the n o w station ary roll E The .

p in of the be l t pu ll ey hi ts the spri

-
n g with the sma ll hammer which ,

havin g got l oose at a cert a i n part of the turn hits the bell This serves , .

FI G . 220 .

as a sign al that there is n o stock in the machin e The sprin g is .

attached o n the hub which is pressed to the shoul der o n the end of
,

the axl e .

A detai l of the ad j ustab l e bearin g is ill ustrated o n Fig 2 2 0 Here . .

the box a of the bearin g has a cavity for the stoppin g a n d adj ustin g bolts
9 b is a bro n ze bush c the Oil chamber a n d f the ca n al for the exhausted
, , ,

o il to c Thebear in g has rin g lubrication

The S eck B ro s Ro ller Mill —
. .

Let us examin e the S eck B ros mill

. . .
,

whi ch ha s di agon ally pl aced roll s (Fig The product is fed i nto .

the box V divided in to two part s by a timber partition

, .

As in the precedi n g machi n e both part s of this mi ll ca n reduce the ,

same or a di fferen t ki n d of product as each pair of roll s con stitutes a n ,

in depen den t machin e The axis of rotation w of the l ev er of the upper

.

beari n g is at the top The adjustabl e top ro ll is put in gear by .

han d with the aid of a l ever B whic h is brou ght to its highest positio n“

Q
244 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR Iv

the defin ite space between the workin g sur faces wi ll cause a
,
stro ng pres
sure an d widen this space thus all owin g the product to pass t ough hr
,
,

partly un reduced I n the process of reducin g the semo i as

l n a n d m li
idd gsn
.

FI G
. 222 .

Of
the fee di n g of the product in stre a ms resu ts a great qua tity flakes
l in n ,

a n d makes the flour dead .

Th fee di g
e n mecha ni sm wi ll perform its w o r k c o rrect l y if the fo HOW ~

in g requiremen ts are satisfie d

CHAP . Iv ] FLO U R MI LL I NG
()
1 An even a n d co ntin uous flow of the product .

()
2 A utomatic reg u l atio n of the flow .

()
3 T h e shortest way from the feedi n g mecha n ism to the ro ll s .

()
4 A bse n ce O f a n y Obstructio n s to the flow of the product .

Let us examin e n o w ll the existin g types of feedin g devices

a

a n d gi v e a n estimatio n of them from the poi n t of view of the stated

requiremen ts .

2 2 3 represe n ts a mill with diago n all y set ro ll s . The product

FI G 2 2 3
. .

flows into the feeder A a n d with its weight p resses upon the gate it hol d ,

in g the cou n terweight f Off (o n the ot her side of the machin e ) The gate t
.

is set at the gr eatest desired open in g between its edge an d the feed roll 4
with the aid of screws 1 n d stops 3 S ometimes sprin g stops are empl oyed
a . ,

a n d their n umber is from two to four accor di n g to the size of the

,

machin e The gate t is fixed to a square ste rn 6 with j ourn al s o n of

’

. ,
e

which protrudes out of the box n d carries o n a key a lever 7 hel d back
a

by screw rod 2 with a spri n g Th feed rolls are covered from bel ow by a
. e

screen 9 to catch up the product acciden tall y passin g b etween them .

W he n the i n flow of the stock to A di mi ni shes the ,

priSn g 8 pull s the l ever
 246 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR IV

6 an d turn s the gate t to the l eft owin g to which the space betwee n the ,

feedin g roll 4 an d its edge di mini shes Th degree of stabili ty of the gate t . e

is regulated by the greater or smaller ten sion of the sprin g 8 which is ,

obtain ed by mean s of a n t 2 which may be screwed up more or less

u ,
.

The product passed from the ro ll 4 to 5 al o n g the arrow S fall s o n the I

screen r then n the top roll a n d the screen g which carries it to the S l owly
, o ,

rotatin g bottom roll .

W he n the stock ceases to flow i n to the feeder A the wei ght f drops
down a n d cl oses the gate n I n this man n er as it is in Ganz s mill
.
,
’
,

the rotation of the feed roll s is di sco ntin ued n d the adjustabl e roll is
-
a

thrown apart from the top o n e I t may be n oticed by the way that the .
, ,

brake device here is based o n the same prin cipl e as that of Gan s but z
’

slight ly comp licated by a t hi rd a xi s of bearin g 0 1 .

B efore proceedi n g to the estimatio n of roll er feedin g we shall exa mi n e ,

a series Of an al ogous con struction s but for the momen t we must direct
,

our attention to the main detail of the mechan ism the feed roll s W e ,
-
.

have seen two fee din g rolls in the con struction examin ed The first .

on e, 4 is n amed the su pp h er the seco n d 5 the feeder

, ,
Th ey are brought , ,
.

into rotation by belt gearin g from the belt pulleys N o n the axes of the
- -

roll s with station ary bearin gs The n umber of revolution s of the supply
.

in g roll 4 gen erall y v aries between thirty a n d forty fi ve per m in ute a n d -

that of the feeder 5 is three to four times greater Their di ameters are
1 2 0—
.

1 6 0 mm O f the l arger roll a n d 6 0—

. 80 mm of the smaller whi ch cor
, .
,

respon ds to the circu mferen tial Vel ocities up to metres per secon d
for the first an d up to , metres per secon d for the secon d The .

E uropean factories main tain that the flow of stock is l ess e v en whe n sup
plied by o n e feed roll on ly especially when the prod uct is soft an d at
, ,

the same time most Of the factori es recommen d feed roll s of di fferen t
“

di ameters as in the case just deal t with

, Th American s are of a di ffere n t . e

opini on an d prefer the use of o n e feed roll or e v en totall y avoid roll er

, ,

feedin g as we shall see l ater

, .

I n o u r turn we must remark that both the E urop ea n n d the Americ an a

methods of feedin g give very satisfactory results ; E veryt hi n g depends ,

as observation s prove o n the choice of a s ui table velocity of rotati on of

,

the feed rolls or the n umber of vibration s of the American feeding “

p lates n d upon the l oadin g of the feeder A al so.

,
a

R etur n in g to the ro ller feedi n g we m u St gi ve a n ide a as to the c o n

-

struction of the roll s .

Th e feedi n g ro ll s are holl ow cast iro n cyli n ders with corru gatio n s
“

cut parallel or perpen di cularly to their axis There are three shapes Of
_
.
24 8 FLO U R MI LLI NG [ CH AR IV

his idea has bee n utilised in man y modern makes but is erro n e
T ,

ous in its prin cip le for the mass of the product bel ow the plan e a b
,

becomes rapidl y compact a n d therefore the heavy particles are Caught

,

up by the fee di ng roll B esides that the feedin g mechan ism ought n o t
.

to be forced to fulfil the duties of a magn et apparatus as all un iv ersality ,

comp licates the con struction to the di sadvan tage of its prime i nten tio n .

W e shall n o w proceed to co n sider f urther makes of fee din g

devices .

Two ro llerF eeding —Th E n gli sh mac hin e buildin g factory of E R a n d

-
e -
. .

F Tur n er in I pswi ch was o n e of the first to i n v e n t a ration al co n structio n

.

FI G 2 2 9
. .

of a diagon al Fig 2 2 9 ill ustrates the fee din g of the

.
D iago n al
mill in its modern form .
1

The grain or the grist flows in to the hopper in which there is free ly ,

suspen ded o n ball an d socket j oin ts an iron gate A as a secon d l on gi

- -

t u din a l wall of the feed A secon d gate B di rects the product to the firs t
.

feed roll N This gate may be approached to or removed from the

-
.
‘

fee din g roll with the aid of a screw E a n d n u t C by pressin g E upon the °

l ever D owi n g to which the flow of grain in creases or decreases

, .

I n the l ever G there is a cross head a n d g ui de which chan ges the posi
-

tion of the gate A wi thin the space marked K a n d Q when the sprin g L ,

is pressed by the n u t J .

The first feed roll N up t o 1 0 0 mm in di ameter run s at about fourtee n .

re v ol ution s per min ute ; it is pro vided with l on gitu di n al corrugation s

1
Englis hp nt
a te , No s 6 5 0 1
. an d
CHAP . Iv ] FLOU R MI LLI NG 24 9

of differen t sizes to an swer the defin ite purpose Of the roller mill for
,

breakin g the grin di n g of mi ddl in gs or c l eani n g the bran

, , .

The duty of the secon d feedin g ro ll makin g 1 5 0 re v ol utio n s per

,

min ute is to suppl y the stock to the grin di n g roll s which is don e
, ,

by mean s of a pl ate between the roll 0 a n d the bottom slowly

'
'

rotatin g roll .

The seco n d fee di n g ro ll is brought in to motio n frO m a belt pulley o n -

FI G 2 30
. .

the axis of the bottom roll by tran smi ttin g the motion to the roll
,

through toothed wheel s B oth the rolls are of the same di ameter
. .

G Luther s factory in B r u n swick gives a con structio n of the fee di n g

.
’

device (Fig 2 30 ) totall y di fferen t from the ordin ary typ e in that the
.
,

supp lyi n g a n d the feedi n g roll s are remo ved from each other by a con sider
able di stan ce .

The feed is thro wn out of the hopperby the roll C o n to the

plate f whi ch together with the vertical partition forms a kin d Of
,

secon d hopper From this seco n d hopper th roll d carries the stock
. e

to the sl owly rotatin g bottom roll a Thus the characteristic peculiarity

.
25 6 FLO UR MILLI NG t m
“

o . hr

of this co n stru ctio n is the division of o n e hopper in to two parts n d the

'

absen ce of the supplyin g p late between the feedin g roll d a n d the red c u

tion rolls The adjustmen t of the fee din g by mean s of the gate e is a very
.

common combin ed con struction of the feedi n g mechani sms already

examin ed .

The E u rop ean con structors ha v e l ately begun to attach great 1 m

p ortan ce to impro v emen ts in the reg u l ation of the fl ow of the stock
'

by mean s of a gate in the hopper a n d ha v e a ten den cy to di scard the

,

supplyin g pl ates Thi s is of great con sequen ce an d we shall speak of it

.
,

when gi ving an estimate of the v arious t yp es of fee di n g .

On Fig 2 3 1 we ha v e H B run er s fee di n g co n struc tion without a

’

—
. .

supp yi g p ate which operates as foll ows The feed roll s 2 2 have the
l n l , .
1

same diameter 90 to 1 0 0 mm The , .

top roll rotates with the speed of

4 0 5 0 revol ution s per mi n ute a n d
-

the o n e at the bottom 90—

,

1 50 whi ch ,

depen ds o n the product (grain ,

semolin a middlin gs or bran ) for , ,

whi ch the mill has been fitted .

Un der the roll s there is a trough

for collectin g the heavy a n d hard
extran eous matter The gate 3 is .

adjusted with the aid Of cran k

F m 231 . .
mecha ni sms a n d a sprin g 1 0 T h e .

axis of rotation of the gate is

24 The cran k l ev er 7 revolvin g roun d its axis whe n drawn
.
,

o ff by the sprin g 1 0 presses the gate with its screw 8 whi ch rests ,

upon the support 9 screwed o n W hen the stock flows in to the hopper
.

a n d presses the gate 3 the pressure is commu n icated to the uppe r

, part
of the cran k l ev er 7 which stretchin g the sprin g in cli n es to the l eft W ith
, .

the v iew to gi v e the greatest declin ation desired to the gate there I S set a
screw 2 0 with the aid of which the limit declin ation s may be adj usted
,
.

The con n ectin g rod 6 in its l ower en d has n ob l on g h o l e fo rthe pin Of the
’

l ever 7 . Th e l en gth o f this conn ectin g rod 6 may be adj usted by means
Of a n u t co n n ected with the join t part of the conn ectin g rod a n d S et o n
the screw part of the co uplin g rod The pressure of the lo vers 7 upon .

the gate is adjusted b y tightenin g the sprin g with the screw to whi ch it
is j oin ed To open the gate the axis 4 is turn ed with a han dl e o n the
.

outside (n o t shown in the drawin g ) in the direction opposite to that of

1
French pa te nt No
- , . of 191 1
252 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ CH AR IV

the l ev er 2 0 through the gate 2 3 the chain wheel 1 5 rolls o ver the chain
,
“

wheel 1 6 but is n o t di sen gaged from it To preven t the dirt in the .

product from pen etratin g in to

the j oin ts 2 4 a n d those of the
stop 2 6 the en ds of the gate 2 3 ,

are covered o ver with a l eather

li n in g 2 5 .

The roll 2 is 90 mm in .

di ameter a n d ru n s at fifty re
vol ution s per min ute whil e the ,

diameter of the roll 3 is 2 5 mm .

a n d its v el ocity eight to ten

re v ol ution s .

A more simp l e sin gl e roll -

feedin g mechan ism evolved al so ,

by Thos R obin son is shown o n .

,

Fig 2 3 3 From the hopper A

. .

the stock flows o n to the roll

d a n d is thrown upo n the
F 2 33 IG
. . .

supplyin g p l ate c by pressin g

o ff the gate B rotati n g o n the axis 0 The press u re of the gate is
.

adj usted by a sprin g E whi ch tran smits the pressure by l ev ers

the ten sion of the S prin g is varied by a n t a run n in g o n the screw b u .

The l eft han d en d of the screw is

'

j oin ed by the fork G screwed in to

a n arm o n the frame F The de .

tail s are given in the drawings I

and I I . The di ameter of the roll
is 1 00 mm a n d its speed reaches
.

up to forty rev olution s .

I n this mill the differen t v el ocities

of the roll s performin g an equal
n umber of rev ol ution s is obtain ed
o wi n g to their di ameters bein g
differen t Th chann el Z serves for
. e
F 2 34 IG
ven til atin g the mi ll
. .

On Fig 2 3 4 the S in gl e ro ll fee din g of the mi ll from G W egm ann s

’
-
. .

factory is sho wn The l eft half Of the mill is for breakin g the other o n e
—
.

—
,

with p o rcel a in ro ll s for the reductio n of mi ddl in gs

,
L t us exa mi n e .
‘
e

the fee din g process in the former sectio n of the mill The stock flows .
CH AP . Iv ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 253

into the hopper A presses open with its weight the gate d a n d is stirred
, ,

l oose if it is in l umps (this happe n s when the grain is moist ) by a p addl e

roll a B y turn in g the gate g as in di cated by the arrow the p assage
l .
, ,

is open ed to the feed roll a from which the product run s to the grindin g
rolls The p late f isolates the product from the space between the
.

partition s of the mill n d of the bottom ro ll where it might fall in acci

a ,

den tally The n umber of re v ol utio n s of the feedin g roll is about sixty
.

a n d th e diameter is 4 0 to 5 0 m m .

The feedi n g of the porcel ai n ro ll s is si mi lar to the system of Thomas

Robi n so n s exa mi n ed abo v e B oth the halv es of the mill are v en til ated
’
.

o n the pri n cip l e of cou n ter curre n ts through the cha n n e l B

America n F eeding M echa n ism s —Just as comp licated as are the fee din g
.

FI G. 2 35 .

mechani sms of the E uropean con structors so simp le are those of the ,

American s V ery ma n y American factories prefer a type of feedin g de

.

vice an al ogo u s to the i ntermitte n tly shaken shoe for fee din g mills ton e s
or a sin gl e roll system but in n on e of the American con struction s do
-

we fin d a two roll feed Further in t he American feedi n g mechan

-
.
,

isms the p lates supp l yin g the stock to the grin din g roll s are totally
,

absen t .

On Fig 2 3 5 may be seen both the types of America n fee di n g

.

mechanism s from the factory of Nordyke 85 Marmon Co On the right

,
.

han d side of the mill we hav e two gates N a n d M which form the hopper .

I n flue n ced by the weight of the pr o duct the gate M tur n s roun d the
axis Of the fasten in g a nd the stock fall s o n the gate N whi h is kept ,
c

vibratin g by cross heads k The cross heads ru n at the rate of up to 2 5 0

-
.
-

re v ol ution s per min ute Fig 2 3 6 shows a section in perspective of this

. .

fee d in g mecha n is m Bot h the rece iv n g a n d the feedin g gates a re

i

,
254 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR IV

furni shed with taper p in s set in chess board order the purpose of whi ch
-

,
.

is to break up ny l umps in the product

a .

R eceivin g a l arge n umber of oscill atio n s the gate B l oose n s the

,

pro du c t well a n d feeds it in a n even sheet to the grin di n g rolls .

2 3 7 is shown a perspecti v e section of the roll er feed

.

The -
.

FI G 2 36
. .

gate B is suspen ded o n an axis to the en ds of whi ch o n the outside the

counterweights C are fixed for regul atin g automatically the passage Of
the stock between B n d the feedin g roll
a .

Fig 2 3 8 represen ts the feedin g de vice Of the factory of Alli s Chal mers
.
-

FI G 2 3 7
. .

CO in
. Mil waukee . stock run s in to the di stributin g box A divided
Th e
by a n adjustabl e partition B with the aid of whi ch the quan tity of
,

product flowin g in to the right n d the l eft han d section of the mill
a -

may be regul ated .

The feede r C is forme d o f a fixe d pl a n k h and a gate a suspen ded o n

256 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ C H AR IV

mechani sm to the roll s a nd absen ce of i n jurious resistan ces o n the way

of the stock we must give preferen ce to the mechan isms with free
,

I f we tur n to the con struction s of compuls ory feedi n g we shall see

that in the most fa v ourabl e case the supplyin g plates Offer a n in clined
plan e a n d often a rather l on g way o v er a curved surface I n the first
,
.

a n d in the seco n d case t hi s way is l o n ger tha n the falli n g of the product
,

from the feed roll straight upon the rolls (the li n e of fall will lie in a
parabola for the stock is u n der the i n fluen ce of its weight a n d is flun g
, ,

Off the ro ll with the i n itial v e l ocity at a n a n g l e to the vertica l ) S pe n din g .

more time o n its way the product becomes heated to a greater exten t
before reachin g the roll s B t if the ven tilatio n is good t hi s circumstan ce
. u ,

is of littl e con sequen ce The c hi ef poi n t is that in tra v ellin g o ver

.

the pl ate the product has to o vercome the power of friction owin g to
, ,

Which its v el ocity a n d co n seque n t ly the capac ity of the mill dimini shes
, , .

An other very i n j urious circumstan ce li es in the fact that o n the

plates especially when a moist product is bein g reduced kn ots are
, ,

formed which break up the solid sheet of stock into separate streams .

Thi s di sorder in feedi n g is partic ul arl y n oticeab l e if semolin a a n d

middl in gs are the products treated .

The formatio n of the str eams or the so called paths is brought ,

-

about in the foll owi n g man n er W hen di fferen t kin ds of product .

,

besides the grain r n do wn the p late the soft mealy gl utin ous particles
,
u , , ,

stick to its surface Aroun d them fresh particles coll ect a n d stick to
.

them thus formin g a kn ot a n d the path is ready The stock runnin g

, , .

in is tur n ed aside by those bu n ches a n d the sheet Of product co n sists ,

of separate thick streams The feedin g is un even ; o n e part of the work .

in g l e n gth of the ro ll s remai n s un used whil e the other is o v er l oaded a n d ,

crushes the stock to flakes The capacity of the mill decreases .

.

The supporters of compul sory fee di n g adduce in its defen ce the

con sideration that if the process of reduction o n roll s is correctly per
,

formed the n ecessary mo v eme n t an d a ration ally arran ged ven tilation will
,

pre ven t the mealy gl utin ous particles which cause the formation of the
, ,

paths from fallin g upon the feed rolls

, .

H owever these argume n ts are feeb l e

, I t shoul d be n oted that .

there is n o idea of supp lyin g the grin di n g rolls with a product totally
free of moist glutin ous partic les howev er perfect ly the mo v eme n t mi ght
, ,

be arran ged W hen the middl in gs are groun d those particl es are n early
.

always presen t The mill er atten din g the operation n easily obtain
.
ca

p roofs of it A co n sta n t flakin

.

g of the mea l n d a n e xcessi v e heatin

g of ,
a
C H AP . Iv ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 257

the product di scharged v ery Often poin ts to a n un even n ess in the feedi n g
,
,

ca u sed by the paths formed o n the p late An in spectio n of the feedin g .

applian ce a n d puttin g the p late in order is of great assistan ce in the

, ,

process This in spectio n should be performed e v ery four to six hours

.
.

I n the breaki n g process the paths are fou n d more sel dom ; the
rough break stock cuts the kn ots o ff as soo n as they appear .

The da n ger of the meal y partic l es stickin g to the pl ate a n d gatherin

g
into kn ots is con siderably alleviated if a perfectly dry stock is fed in .

Thi s is attai n ed by the arra n gemen t Of v e n til atio n the mai n purpose Of ,

which in a roll er mill is to exhaust the warm moist air Th fact must , . e

be kept in mi n d howev er that a perfect ven tilation in this respect

, ,

appears onl y as a palliativ e which impedes but does n o t obviate the

,

formation of kn ots o n the surface of the plate W must al so n o t forget . e

that so fin e an d ten der a product as the fin e middlin gs are to be dealt

with The v ery least Obstacle is suffi cien t to buil d a path The slightest
. .

traces of moisture woul d suffi ce for the exceedin gly small hygroscopic
particles of meal to form a kn ot B u t moist ure is always presen t ev en
.

with the best of v en tilatio n .

The foll owin g proves this statemen t to be true W ith a ratio n a l .

ven t ilation the particles of meal reach the feed roll s in a state of n ormal
moisture but o n their way from the feed to the gri n din g roll s they may
,

un dergo a chan ge in that respect I n fact with the passage of the .

,

product both the product itself a n d the workin g roll s become heated
, .

O win g to this a part of the moisture co n tain ed in the product passes

,

in to air which will be S lightly warmer than the product This air
, .

enriched with moisture in spite of a perfect ven tilation will hav e time
—
, ,

to retur n this moisture to a cooler hygroscopic product the gl uten ;

the m oisture will precipitate upon the product I t will be absorbed by .
.

the fin est hygroscopic particles of the meal rich in gl uten which will , ,

settl e in the l ower en d of the pl ate To this we must add that the air .
.

impreg n ated with moisture settles imme di ately o n the col d p late which ,

facilitates the formation of paths This latter remark however is .

, ,

app licable o nl y to the begin ni n g of the operation for the p late al so ,

becomes heated soon I t goes without sayi ng that we have in View

.

formatio n s of dew (both o n the product a n d o n the p late ) imper .

c ep tib le to the eye a n d the ha n d a n d such formatio n s are possib l e

,

even if the mill is v en tilated which is pro ved by experimen t for the
, ,

pl at es Of the ven tilated mill s have to be clean ed just as those of the

n o n ve n ti l ated mill s
-
though more rarely The harmfuln ess of the use
,
.

of plates ev en if us ed with the best moder n ven til atio n is perceptible

, ,
.

R
258 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR rv

Inapp r aisi n g the fee di n g mechani sms the accessibili ty of their parts ,

a n d operatio n for in spectin g p urposes must be con sidered I n this .

respect the compul sory feedin g al most in all makes is placed in a n

un favourable light This defect in fee di n g is particul arly n otice
.

abl e o n Fig 2 2 3 p 2 4 5 Here the product may be seen through the

.
,
. .

in spectio n win dow B o nly at the momen t it l eaves the feedi n g roll 5 -

a n d part l y whe n o n the p l ate r Th p l ate r itself is quite in accessibl e

. e

to in spectio n a n d so far removed from B that its extraction with the

,

view to freein g it of the kn ots is extremely diffi cult The con structors .

upholdi n g the comp u l sory feedi n g ought to accept it as a rul e that the ,

supp lyin g pl ates shoul d be easy of access an d l oosely suspen ded as thi s ,

will facilitate the removal of the a dh erin g product from them .

W hate v er be the kin d of feedin g forced or free the stock must be , ,

delivered to the sl ow roll ; it is required by the v ery idea of the process

of reduction that the sl owl y rotatin g roll S houl d hol d back the pro
,

duct If the stock falls o n the fast roll it will be thrown agai n st
.
,

the sl ow o n e rebou n d from it again a n d hi n der the other particles

, ,

from reachin g the grin din g surfac es thus lowerin g the q u ahty of the ,

work .

6 . Typ es f
o Ro ller Mill s

i
( .
) Two ro ller
-

Mills
Havi n g become acquainted with the prin cipal detail s of roller mill s
‘

we c n formul ate the requireme n ts which must be satisfied by a ration

a

ally con structed machin e Those requiremen ts are as foll ows

.

()
1 A n even feedin g of the grin din g surfaces automatic adj ustmen t ,

a n d stoppage of the feedin g mecha ni sm .

()
2 A te n sio n brake for the adj ustable roll .

()
3 T h trammi n g of the p arallehty of the roll s
e .

()
4 T h e ve n til atio n of the workin g chamber of the mill for coolin g ,

the product an d the workin g parts a n d for removin g the meal dust ,
-
.

( ) h work of the mill easy of i n spectio n ; ease in the observatio n

5 T e

of the feedin g process a n d in ta kin g sampl es of the grist while the mill
is in Operation without an y dan ger Of m til atio n ~
u .

()
6 R emova l of the adherin g product from the workin g surfaces .

(7 S imp l e di sma n tli n g Of the frame for remo vin g the roll s .

()
8 E co n omical tran smi ssion of power to the workin g organ s .

Let us n o w examin e the E uropean an d A merican type s of mill s ,

a n d see how far they satisfy the a ove requireme n ts

b ,
2 60 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR IV

the timber blocks the adj ustable bearin gs are carefully lowered un til ,

the axl es of the rolls are l yi n g in the ca vity in the casin g f the frameO .

Th h ds e of the statio n ary beari n g n d i of the adjustab l e bearin g are

e a

remo ved it is then easy to take out first the upper then the bottom roll .

The co n structio n of the ball bearin gs will be exami n ed bel ow whil e

-

for the present we shall occupy our atten tion with a four roller -

FI G 2 42
. .

Fi
( g .
where the feedin g mechan ism n d the brake may be in spected
a .

The fee di n g is performed in the fo ll owi n g man n er : a l oosel y sus

.

pen ded gate w has a n adjusti n g valve g which may be l owered a n d rais ed
,

by mean s of screws k in creasin g n d reducin g the passage of stock B y

, a .

the pressure of the product the gate dec lin es to the right n d is retain ed
a

in the positio n of the l argest desired open i n g by a stop screw c with th e

-

aid of which the width Of that Open in g may be altered On the outside
.
,

the gate w has a coun terweight run nin g alon g the lever e or in o th er, ,
CHAR ]
Iv FLO UR MI LLI NG 26 1

makes of the same factory pushed by a sprin g as in G Luther s mill , , .

’

already examin ed From th fas t fee di n g roll the stock flows down
. e

the plate n to the fast grin din g roll which passes it to the p late 0 the ,

plate 0 di rects the stock to the sl owly revo lvi n g bottom roll B oth the .

p lates are suspe n ded a n d may easily be removed through

,

the doors in the hopper of the m ill s .

Th adjusti n g m e h n ism h s the fo ll owi n g arra n geme n t

e c a a

the frame of the adj ustabl e bearin g has two arms (Fig .

Of whi ch the right ha n d o n e wi th a fork shaped tai l rests o n

- -

the cup d with a sprin g while the left ha n d o n e is set o n an

,
-

axi s of rotation fixed in the fra me of the mill The fin ger set .

in the hub p of the frame has a n en d F of a hexahedral sectio n

F i O n F there is set n ecce n tric ba ll hub g faste n ed
( g . a

to the collar Of the fin ger by a bolt s the n u t of which is

'

,
_

co v ered by the washer t hel d by n u t u Between the ,

a .

hubs p a n d q there is a washer 12 Turn in g the n t s after . u ,

ha vin g previously removed the n t u a n d the washer t we turn u ,

the hub q together with the fin ger F thus settin g the axis of ,

the adj ustabl e bearin g in a position parallel to the axis of

the fixed b earin g This fittin g up is gen erally performed F G 2 4 3
.

1 . .

accurately in the factory A more simp le truin g up is .

performed with the aid of a spri n g brake already examin ed I n .

Fig 2 4 3 is shown this brake for porce lai n ro lls

. The same fork shape d .
-

tail rests upon the cup d in which there is a sprin g restin g with its l ower
,

e n d upo n a n t m its tail en terin g in to the apert u re Of the cup Th

u , . e

top en d of the brake rod is

set o n a fin ger eccen trically
position ed in respect to the
axis of rot ation of the lev er
A (Fig Th e raisi n g .

or l owerin g of the bearin g

is performed roughly by
turni n g the n t m n d u ,
a

more accurately by a ratchet

F 2 44 IG
wheel n u t co nn ectin g the top
. .

a n d the bottom part of the rod Over the rou n d l y grou n d fork of the.

lev er there is set a washer With a ball shaped cavity hel d by a n t r a n d a -

,
u

l ock n t 8-
W he n the pressure upo n the ro ll s exceeds the set limit the fork
u . ,

Of the tail presses upo n the cup n d compressin g the spri n g drops do wn
’

a , ,
.

I f the beari n g is to be l owered n d the ro ll s p t o t of gear the lever d is a u u ,

2 62 FLOUR MI LL I NG [ CH AR IV

di sen gaged fro m the le v er f a n d then the fork pressed by the weight of , ,

the roll l owers the whole rod A more accurate adj ustmen t of the dis
, .

tan ce is attain ed with the aid of a han d wheel E whi ch when turn ed -

, ,

pushes forward the l ever A n d lifts the fron t n d the back rods t sin ce a a ,

the roll with eccen tric fin gers is let through the box of the frame .

The motio n is communi cated to the feed ro ll s from the fast gri n d
in g ro ll by belti n g to the l arger a n d by a gear dri v e from the l arger to the
smaller roll Th e fee di n g rol l s rotate with the ordin ary v el ocities The
. .

thr owin g Off a n d in of the feed rolls is performed by a Cross head -

coup lin g o n the axis of the large roll as in Gan s mill ,

z
’
.

Th e rotatio n is tran smitted from th e fast to the s l ow gri n di n g ro ll

al so by mean s of a gear dri ve The mill s in question ha v e ordin ary rin g .

lubricatin g or ball beari n gs -

.

The fitti n g of the g ear wheel s bel t pull eys a n d ball bearin gs o n -

,
-
.
-

FI G . 245 . FI G 2 4 6
. . FI G 24 7
. .

these mills is of some in terest a n d we shall therefore direct o u r atte ntion ,

to those detail s .

Figs 2 4 5 a n d 2 4 6 ill ustrate the keyi n g o n of the gear wh e

. el s or belt -

pull eys by mean s of two wedge shaped keys b n d c The chain wheel -

a .
-

is set o n the shaft so as to all ow easy access to the screw t hreaded holes a -
’

made for takin g the chain wheel s o ff Then the key b is set in first the -

.
,

key c laid o n it a n d b o th are hammered in with the cal cul ation that the
,
‘

e n d of the key 0 shou l d protrude n o t more tha n 7 to 8 mm outside the .

hub of the gear wheel W hen the pull ey is to be take n Off the key b
-

is kn ocked aside a litt le to the left which causes the key 0 to become ,

l oosen ed a n d easy to extract The gear wheel is take n o ff wi th the aid .

-

of a cross head (Fig 2 4 7 ) with bolts run nin g freely through it a n d screwed
-
.

in to the holes a Th middle bolt en terin g in to the thread of the cross

. e ,

head rests again st the cen tre of the shaft I n screwin g the mi ddl e bolt
, .

in to the cross head we obtain a ten sion in the side bolts which ev enl y
-

, , ,

without a n y crookedn ess draw o ff the chain wheel or the belt pull ey,
- -
.

The essen tial part of the ball bearin g is the steel ri n gs with balls -

between them of which o n is set fast o n the j ourn al of the shaft while
,
e
'

the other o n e is held in the frame of the he rin g The ri n gs wi th ball s a .

2 64 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR IV

p late deliv ers the product to the gri n din g roll s in a tan gen tial di rection .

Th e di sta n ce betwee n the feed hopper a n d the grin di n g surface of the r o ll s

-

has bee n reduced to a minimum in comparison to the prece di n g mi ll

,
.

The ro ll s are put in gear by mea n s of a rod 0 with a ha n dl e d which ,

when pressed is caught by the l ever e At the same time a system o f .

l evers f a n d g turn s the axis 0 which with the aid of the l e v er h eccen
,

tricall y set o n it raises the bottom gri n di n g ro ll

,
Th feedi n g de vice is . e

thrown in by a lever c with an i n clin ed segmen t k actin g upon the fork

shaped rod i .

The paralle lism of the grin di n g ro ll s is set by mea n s of ha n d wheel s -

m . By turn in g the l evers g with the screws r the gate t may be set in ,

an
y positio n in which
,
it will be retain ed by the sprin gs s .

The automatic throwi n g out of the ro ll s

a n d the stoppage Of the feed are effected

by the actio n of the weight g upon the

l evers c a n d p in a ma n n er a lready kn own .

Th e grin din g ro ll s are aspirated in the

direction in di cated by the arrows 1 3 a n d 4 , ,

in the drawin g n d the air o n e n terin g the ,

a

chamber of the mill through the fissures

u n der the lid exhausts the gri n di n g rolls from
bel ow n d then passes up a .

Th bearin gs of the rolls are made of

e

phosphor bro n ze a n d furn ished with rin g

-
.

l ubricatio n .

F 25 "
I G'
Th gear wheel s for tran smittin g the
e -

motion to the rolls wi th doub l e helical hke teeth are set in special cases - '

servi n g them as Oil boxes .

The sl ow feed ro ll is tur n ed by a belt dri v e from the belt pull ey o n - -

the axis of the fast grin di n g r oll n d from the sl ow fee din g r oll to the
,
a

fast by toothed gearin g The built cross head coup lin g is set o n the axis
.
-

of the sl ow feedin g roll .

F ren ch Ro ller M ill — O Fig 2 5 3 may be see n the mill of o n of the

h . e

l argest Fre n ch milli n g machin ery works Teiss t Cha p ro n B rau lt , e ,

Fr eres in P aris n d Chartres

,
a .

The sectio n ill ustrates the positio n Of the fee di n g mecha n ism a n d
grin di n g roll s showin g the fast grin din g roll with fixed bearin gs to be at
,

the t Op a n d the sl ow roll with th brake bel ow Th in hn e of the p lan e

, e . e c

of the axes forms n an gle of 5 0 with the horizon tal p lan e

a
°
.

The feedi n g is performed by two ro ll s a n d b with correspo n di n g a

CH AP . IV ] FLOU R MI LLI NG 26 5

differen tial v elocities a n d a n adjustable gate c discharged by mean s

of a sprin g set o n the outside of the mill Th stream of product . e

obser ved through the glass door d in the upper part o f the frame
’

glides down two in clin ed plates From those p lates the stock fall s
.

upo n the sl ow grin din g roll A which carries it to the fast roll B
, .

FI G 252. .

On pen in g the door D in the mill the deliv ery of the milled
O ,

product may be watched n d samp les obtain ed without n y

a a

di fficulty .

From the feedin g ro ll s a n d o n lea v in g the grin din g ro li s t h product

’

may be taken by han d without fear of a n y dan ger .

Th exhaust air e n ters through the top part of the hopper fo ll ows
e ,
266 FLO U R MI LL I NG [CHAR IV

the stock a ll al o n g its route n d is exhausted by the aspirator after the

,
a

stock passes through the gri n din g roll s .

The cast iro n frame j udgi n g by the outward appearan ce of its co n

-

struction is rigid a n d vibration apparen t ly obviated Th frame is lin ed

, ,
. e

with timber o n the i n side to preve n t the wa ll s from becomin g cool ed in ,

which Case the m oisture is deposited a n d sett les o n them a n d the meal
tur n s to a paste .

The adjustmen t of the grin di n g ro ll s here as in other types of mill s

,

too con sists of two separate processes : (1 ) trammi n g the adjustable

,

FI G 2 5 3
. .

roll in respect to the fixed o ne a n d (2 ) setti ng the adj ustable roll

,

n earer to or farther from the fixed .

Th e tram mi n g in respect to the fixed ro ll in e v ery beari n g is performed

by mean s of a ha n d wheel G resting upon a sprin g en cased in a box H
-
.

The brake mecha nism as we ll as the automatic stoppage of the feed

-

, ,

in co n structio n is simi lar to those of S eck with the so l e di ffere n ce

,

that the brake is fitted to the bottom roll while in S eck mill it is ,
’
s

applied to the top roll .

G D a verio s Mill
.
’
— The S wiss works of G D verio (Zurich ) was the . a

first to adapt the vertical position of ro ll s a n d very soon began to set

them diagon ally con vin ced by experien ce of the in con veni en ce of the
,

plates supp lyi n g the stock to roll s so positio n ed S imu lta n eously with .
268 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR IV

at the same time tur n s a horizon tal crooked lever roun d its axis which ,

by mean s of a cross head couplin g throws the rapidl y rotatin g bottom

-

feedin g roll out of motio n Th spri n g of the brake is adj usted by mean s
. e

h —
of n uts h An accurate trammin g of the axes of the grin din g roll s is
l .

performed with a han d wheel g Th di sma n tli n g of the frame n d ex

-
. e a

tractio n Of the grin di n g roll s is performed in the foll owin g mann er The .

remo vable parts 0 o n either S ide of the frame are taken Off Then the . .

cotters i are taken out n d the n t k l oosen ed which all ows the cup m
a u ,

to be lifted off when the lids of the bearin gs are removed n d the grin d
,
a

in g ro ll s may be l ifte d out .

Th ve n tilati n g air en ters through the ho les in the lid of the hopper
e

co v ered over with a de n se sieve exhausts the roll s from bel ow a n d escapes , ,

through the side Open in gs .

The tra n s mi ssion of motio n from the fast top roll to the bottom o n e
is don e by mean s of toothed wheel s en cl osed in cast iron casin gs filled -

with o il through the inl et q up to the level p .

Am erica n Ro ller M ills

No t o nl y in R ussian hteratu r but in W estern E urope as well a total e

absen ce Of description s of American mi llin g machin ery in gen eral re ,

spectin g roller mill s is observab l e E ven so emin en t a n author as P ro

, .

fesso r Kick speaks o n l y of H owes scouri n g machin e This circumstan ce

’
.

is all the more strikin g sin ce the first teachers of the E uropean automatic
,

millin g en gin eers were American s On e coul d learn a good deal from them .

ev en n o w However n o t onl y in mo n ographs n d lectures but even in

.
,
a ,

the perio di cal literature of E urope we fin d n o material dealin g with the ,

America n co n structio n of mi lli n g machin ery I s this the usua l co n ser .

va tism of E urope or the patriotism of the Ol d W orl d 2 W e ca n n ot un der

‘
,

take to j udge but the fact is that the E uropean co n structors have been
, ,

depri ved of rich material in the possession Of their tran satlan tic colleagues .

The American ro ll er mill s are so di fferen t n d origi n a l in their c o n a

structiv e ideas a n d besides that so httl kn own to us that we ha v e deemed

, e ,

it expedien t to de di cate a wh o le h p ter to their description ‘

c a .

W e are already acquai n ted wi th the feedi n g devices of the American

‘

mill s a n d shall n o w exa mi n e the brakes n d the mi ll in their full outfit

, a .

Fig 2 5 5 represen ts J S te v e n s two r oller mi ll with a brake of direct

’
-
. .

action The beari n gs a are fixed the adj ustabl e o n es r n in the parall el
.
, a1 u

guides of the frame The brake has the followin g arran gemen t Th
. . e

screw F freely passes through the screw 1 —2 en terin g the box of the ,
CH A P .
] Iv LOU R M I LL I NG F 2 6 9

bearin g a n d its en d protrudin g out of it The screw 1 — 2 is screwed in to .

the arm G of the frame On this screw a sprin g is set which presses upon
.

the bearin g The grin di n g rolls are thrown apart by pressin g the lever D
.

down with the han dle d when the cross heads C (o n Fig 1 with an other
,
-
.
,

curve of the l ever D it is more clearly seen ) press upon the protrudin g
,

parts of the screw F n d draw the bearin gs an d the grin di n g roll with
a

them to the l eft W hen the lever is turn ed back the sprin g brin gs the
,
.
,

bearin gs to their former positi on Th di stan ce of the workin g surfaces . e

is defin ed by the size of the protrudin g en ds of the screws F The ’

.

a ra ll eh ty of the axes of the ro ll s in a horizo n tal p l a n e is set by those

p
same screws bein g deeper or less screwed in to the frame of the bearin g .

FI G 2 5 5 . .

The head 3 of the screw — ser v es for screwi

1 2 n g it
.
i n to the arm of the
frame a n d thus adj ustin g the di stan ce to which the bearin gs are removed
,

the n u t 4 regul ates the ten sio n of the sprin g The motio n is tran smitted .

to the roll by belt gearin g an d the receivin g belt pulley is o n the j o urn al
-

,
-

H of the fast gri n di n g ro ll which tra n smits the motio n to the s l ow ro ll

—
,

by mean s of j ockey pul eys l I -— I n d I I I I from the

l
shaft
a of the s l ow 1

roll a cross drive I I I — I I I ru n s to the feedi n

1
g ro ll T h e te n sio n of the .
,

belts is adj usted by a screw B with a sprin g to mitigate the S hocks This
—
.

sprin g presses upon the adj ustabl e bearin g of the j ockey pu ey I I while l l I -

the degree of its pressure is regulated by a n t an d a l ock n u t l u -

.

The defects of the brake of direct actio n were n oted whe n e x a min

in g N y o e s brake
’
B .t those mi ll s
u do good service i n the rough fodder
g
ri n di n g Of maize bar l ey ,
oats & c A mo n g
,
the reparab
,
l e defects
. of
2 70 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CHAR Iv

this mill we may p lace the tran smission of motio n to the feedin g ro ll
.

from the adj ustabl e grin di n g roll for when the gri n din g roll s are bein g
,

drawn apart the belt becomes stretched n d then begin s to work badl y a .

I t is to be remarked here that the be lti n g tra n smi ssio n of motio n to

the grin din g roll s is a p eculiari ty characteristic Of American roller mil l s .

O n ly in mi ll s doi n g rough coarse w o rk do the American s empl oy tooth ed

,

gearin g .

T W Graham s origi n al brake is show n o n Fig 2 5 6 The ad j ustabl e

’
. . . .

grin din g roll E is set in a bearin g F On e tail of which is co nn ected with ,

the rod D while the other G with its poin t H turn ed to a gl obe en ters into
, , , ,

a yhn drical socket in the frame of c

the fixed bearin g A which forms a ,

part of the roller frame Through .

the arm K of the l ower tail there

passes a rod L to the sprin g M .

The rod P ec cen tri ca lly set with

its clip X o n the fin ger n the ,

screw D n d the sprin g hold the ,

a

bearin gs in a settled position B y .

turnin g the han dl e N down a n d

pushin g the rod P likewise down ,

the bearin g F is made to rev olve

roun d the horizonta l axis of the
appl e Q To all ow a fre e l oweri n g .

of the l eft n d of the S pri n g rod e

Z there is a c learan ce l in the

m 25 6 frame
g ,
A rough,
trammi n g Of the .

roll axes is don e by mean s of n uts -

0 and 0 a more accurate settin g by the screw D which also regul ates the
1,

workin g di stan ce The pressure of the S pr n g s adjusted by a n u t Z

. l 1 2 .

The brake of J D awso n s four roll er m ill is give n in Fig 2 5 7 The

’
-
. . .

l ower tai l s D of the adjustab l e beari n gs E are free ly set o n the hubs G
with l e vers K These hubs are eccen trically fitted o n the j ourn al s of
.

the shaft H the rotatory motion o f whi h is stopped by bolts L The top
, c .

tail s of the bearin gs rest o n the sprin g V Th screw rods N are fitted . e

with their slips n the fingers of the di scs R n of which has a han dl e X
o , o e

with a l ock Y The di scs are fixed o n the j ourn al s R of the S haft R wi th
.
1 I

keys B y turnin g the han dl e X to the right or l eft n an brin g the

. o e c

grin di n g roll s to a fast or a l oose r n The ten sion of the sprin g is d u . a

j usted by a nu t W (ha ving a washer o n the rod with a c learan ce b ehin d

2 72 FLOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AP . IV

the middle ro ll s here are fixed The details n eed n o exp lan atio n bei n g a
.
,

repetition of those precedi n g .

A more simp l e frictio n dri v e to the feedi n g roll s is to be see n o n

Fig 2 6 1
. Here o nl y o n e frictio n roll E is l oose
. to the seco n d feeding
roll the motio n is tran smitted by a crossed belt The defects of the .

friction drive in the firs t case (Figs 2 5 8 an d 2 5 9 ) lyin g in the fact that
,
.

FI G . 25 8 . FI G . 259 . FI G . 26 0 .

with the chan ge in the worki n g distan ce of the grin di n g rolls the positio n
of the friction roll has likewise to be altered are remo ved here sin ce the ,

position of the friction driv e is i n depen den t of the position of the brake
rod .

I n Fig 2 6 2 we see a v ery i n ge n ious de vice for stoppin g the Opera tio n
.

of the feed r oll s by mean s of a n or di n ary cross head coup lin g n d a -

a

l oose bel t pulley o n the axis of the fee di n g roll

-
On the left han d en d .
-

FI G 2 6 1
. .

(top eft han d dra win g ) of the roll G communi catin g the motion to the rods
l -

E of the brakes there is set fast a hub p with a screw arm P (Figs 3 a n d
, .

4 ) which catches the flan ge a of the hub of the be lt pull ey L o n the axis of -

the feedin g roll J This hub o n its left han d side is a cross head couplin g
.
- -

coggin g in with the hub of the l oose belt pull ey N W hen the roll s are -
.

in a workin g position the roll G is turn ed so that the screw flan ge of the
hub p poin ts down wards an d the sprin g f pushes the belt pull ey L for -

ward till it coup les with the belt pull ey N W hen the grin din g roll s are
-
.
CH AP . IV ] F LOUR MI LL I NG 2 73

ru i g empty the fla ge
nn n nse gages the be t pulleys L n d N n d the
P di n l -

a ,
a

operation of the feed ro ll s is di scon tin ued .

A sim i lar device for a l oose n d fast ru n of the feed ro ll s with

a

toothed coupli n gs an d frictio n 2 is ill ustrated in Fig 2 6 3 with this .

,

FI G . 2 62 .

differen ce o n ly the di sen gagin g mechan ism of the gri n din g roll con n ected
,

to brake han d wheel an d the con n ectin g of the coup lin gs or of the
-

,
.

fric tion is performed n o t by a sprin g but by a cran k lev er B (with

,

or without a fork at the n d ) On the rod H which brin gs the

e .
,

FI G . 2 63 .

adjustments i n to actio n there are two slides made to fit the free en d

,

of the cran k l ever B W hen the roll s are in gear n d the rod H
. ,
a

is pushed to the right the en d of the lever B falls in to the slide

,
a

a n d keeps the coup l i n g Q e n gaged with the hub of the belt pu lley N
-

W he n the ru n is l oose it is he l d by the slide a

, .
2 74 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CH A R IV

atest model of W D Gray s ro ller mi ll is represen ted in Figs 2 6 4

The l . .
’
.
,

265 nd 2 66
,
aA characteristic pecul iarity of the American roll er mill s
.

is as has already bee n men tion ed the total absen ce of toothed gearin gs
, ,
.

Let us n ote first how the motio n is commun icated to the roll s From .

the pulley of the tra n smission shaft the belt run s first (Fig 2 6 4 ) over ,
.

the belt pull ey A of the outermost fast grin di n g ro ll n d then over the
-
a

j ockey pulley C to B the belt pulley of the third o n the left han d side
-

,
- -

FI G . 2 64 .

fast grin di n g ro ll I n this mann er the fast ro lls of the American roller
.
,

mills are di sposed asymmetrically—the in evitab le result of tran smi ssion

by belti n g This arra n geme n t ca n n ot be avoided if the machin e is
.
.

to be compact Th sl o w grin din g roll s with belt pulleys D a n d E

. e -

the seco n d n d the fourth receive their motio n (Fig 2 6 5 ) from the
a , .

belt pull eys F n d G p laced n the same shaft as the belt pull ey C
-
a o -
.

Th belt pu ll ey C has a doub l e fu n ctio n : first l y it affords the possi

e -

b ility of e nl argin g the grippi n g a n gl e of the be lt gearin g of the pulleys A -

n d B seco n d l by risi n g or fa llin g it adjusts the te n sio n of the be lt

a
y, , ,
2 76 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR IV

mechan ism adjustin g the di stan ce here is improved in so far that the
eccen tric rods E of the brake hav e o n e common axis 8 which simplifie s ,

the co n structio n On the same axis is set the tail of the hub of the l oose
.

belt pulley o v er which there run s a belt tran smittin g the motio n from
-

the sl ow roll to the feedi n g roll s I n throwin g apart the outer grin din g
.

roll s by turni n g the l ev er P to the left this l oose bel t p ull ey is dropped -

down the belt slacken s an d the feedin g roll s stop operatin g This belt
, ,
.

FI G 2 6 6 . .

pu ey sim ar y to the guide be t pull eys n d the belt pulleys o n the

ll , il l l -

a -

axes of the feed roll s has collars (Fig 2 6 6 ) which preven t the belt
, .

from runni n g off W hen the ten sion of the belt to the pull eys of the
.

feed roll s is to be in creased the bolt holdin g the hub of the tail of the
l oose belt pull ey is dropped the tail tur n ed to the right a n d the bo lt is
-

, ,

again fasten ed .

No rdyke e M mm o n C s M ill —On Figs 2 6 7 2 6 8 n d 2 6 9 we see

( a o .
’
. .
, ,
a

the con stru cti on of a ro ll er mill of n e of the l ar ge s t America n wor ks —t ha t

o
CHAP .
]
Iv F LO U R MI LLI NG 2 77

of Nordyke Marmo n Co . at I n di an apolis . Fig . 2 67 illustrates the

FI G
. 2 67 .

gen eral view of the mill and the p lan (2 ) with the hopper o ff ,
Fig 2 6 8
.

two section s l on gitudi n al

,
a n d a l o n g the brake mecha n ism Fig 2 6 9
.
2 78 FLO U R MILLI NG [ CH AR rv

detail s of the drive to the brake mechan ism n d to the feedin g apparatus a

( 6 7 8 9 10
5, , , , The mill is drive n by the belt pull eys l 2 3 4
, ,
-

, , ,

1 a n d 3 by mea n s of the be lt 1 2 ru nn i n g from the be lt pull eys o n the -

shaftin g 2 n d 4 by mean s of separat e belts 1 3 an d 1 4 o n the belt

,
a

pulleys 6 n d 7 The j ockey pulleys 5 6 a n d 7 r n through the frame

a .
-

,
u

of the mill .

Th e adj ustab l e beari n gs are bu ilt in the followin g ma nn er the two

tailed boxes D for the bearin gs E bel ow (Fig 2 6 8 4 ) have a n axis of rota .
,

tio n d (a bolt screwed i n to the frame ) o n which they are set with thei r
ecce n tric d This eccen tric determi n es the di stan ce to which the adjust
'

l .

FI G . 2 68 .

able grin din g roll spri ngs Ope n in case a n ail or a n y other piece of
metal fall s in between the rolls The bearin gs E ha v e surfaces a n d .

.
6 62

turn ed in to the correspon din g s urfaces of the boxes D to which the ,

frame of the bearin gs is attached by bolts c I f the axes of the l .

roll s requ ire adj sti n g v ertically the bolts 6 are l oose n ed a n d the
u
, 1

wedges e tighten ed W hen the regulation is en ded the bolts 3 are

3 .
, 1

readj usted .

The rods F of the brake pass through the l ower e n ds of the sho ul ders
D u n der their j oi n ts ha v in g the spri n g F o n o n e side a n d the re u l a t 1
, ,
g ,

in g brake of the spri n g han d whee l F o n the other Th ese ha n d wheel s

- 2
.
-

are screwed p till the shoulders hav e a ten sion sufficien t to com
u
2 80 FLO U R MI LL I NG [ CH AR IV

separate t e the throwin g in or apart takes place At its inn er en d

, . . .

e v ery o n e of those rods is con n ected by a j oin t g with a lev er H which ,

draws the shan k with it when movin g .

The l evers H have in the frame A axes of rotatio n Z by turn in g the I (

cross heads 7 the throwin g in a n d out of the roll s is performed

-
°

Th e ha n dl es J are set o n the j ourn a l s of the cross heads J

1 Those -
.

han dles ha v e segmen ts of toothed wheel s J at their l ower en ds On e of 2

.

the toothed segmen ts may be thrown off n d act in depen den tly of its a
'

l ever if it b e desired that o n ly o n side of the mil l shoul d be at work

,
e .

This is e ffected by makin g the toothed wheel n d the l ever in two parts a ,

as shown in Fig 2 6 9 (6 an d with a sl ot for the bolt 3 W h en it is

. 1
1
.

desired to fasten both parts together the bolt é is brought down as ,

l
,

shown to the l ower part of the sl ot n d faste n ed there so that the l ev ers
,
a ,

a n d the segme n ts form o n whole body a n d operate together I f it is in

e .

ten ded that on ly o n e half of the machin e should work the bo lt i is pushed ,
1

up to the top part of the sl ot n d then the han dle n d the segmen t are ,
a a

in depen den t of each other As this segmen t does n o t sit firmly o n the shaft
. ,

the opposite lev er may be disp laced without touchin g the shaft it is set o n .

W ith the aid of the above described adj ustme n t both pairs of rolls or ,

either pair si n gly can be thrown apart a n d the n again brought together
,

to exactly the same di stan ce .

Th e l ower en ds of l e v ers j are pro vi ded with pin s i which durin g the 1 2
, ,

motion of the le vers backwards a n d forwards catch the claws 1 1 of the ,

rods L (Fig 2 6 9 which are con sequen tly brought in to motion an d draw
.
,

the shoul ders K an d the shafts K of the regul ati n g gate by mean s of
1

l e v ers K n d pi n s l with them I t is q i te c l ear that when the l ev ers 7

’

1 a 1 . u

are di sconn ected a n d are workin g in depen dently of each other they ,

brin g i n to actio n each o n of the rods i n depen de n tly e .

Th feed p l ates J are of thin metal a n d ru n a l o n g the feedin g

e

rolls J with claws j n d at the top On e of these claws j o n each

1
a .

o n e of the p l ates coup l es with c l aw k of the correspo n di n g axl e K

(see F igs 8 n d
. n d ina this way the gate rises
a a n d fa ll s with th e

revolutio n of the axle Other claws are fitted so as to be abl e to catch

.
, ,

the stop screws n d co n sequen t l y the gate is a ll owed to rise o n l y to a

a

certain height I t is best for the regulatin g screws to do the service of

.

stop cl aws (see the fig ) in that case the rise a n d fall of the feed gate is
.

u n der co n trol The fee di n g roll s J are brought in to motion in the direc
.
1

tion poin t ed by the arrow by mean s of belts the di stribution of which ,

in the machin e i s marked in dotted lin es n the right han d side of the p la n o -

of the roller mill

CH AP . Iv ] FLO UR MI LLI NG 2 81

The shaft M through a con n ectin g gearin g of the pulleys 5 6 n d 7 , ,

a

is set o n bearin gs N W ith the risin g a n d fallin g of that shaft the drivi n g
.

belts 1 2 1 3 an d 1 4 are tighten ed a n d l oosen ed

, .

Th beari n gs N are set o n hatchet stakes n fixed in the arms of the

e

bearin gs n d pass through g ui des G a n d G of frame A

a 3 4
.

Th e stems are co nn ected by j oin ts with the upper parts?of the frame n ,

en din g in toothed racks at the top .

Th e toothed wheel s P are set o n axl es P a n d e n gaged with the toothed I

racks of the stems 0 which are thus en abled to rise an d fall draggin g the
, ,

shaft M a n d the belt pulleys with them -

The motio n is tran s mi tted in the fo ll owin g ma nn er the main belt 1 2

drives the pull eys l 3 a n d 5 turn in g the grin di n g roll s 0 n d C in o n
, ,
1
a
3
e

directio n a n d the shaft M in an other W ith the aid of belt pulleys 6 .

-

a n d 7 a n d be lts 1 3 a n d 1 4 run n i n g to the be lt pu ll eys 2

, n d 4 the shaft M -

a ,

turn s the grin din g ro ll s 0 a n d O in the direction opposite to that of the

2 4

roll s 0 an d 0 There is a small pulley 8 o n the shaft of the roll 0 which

1 3
.
2
,

drives the pull ey 9 by mean s of a belt , o n e of the feed rolls J a nd

’

1
,

pull ey 1 0 set o n th e same shaft The p ull eys 1 0 a n d 1 1 are co nn ected .

by a belt which driv es the other feed roll The belts con n ectin g the .

p u ll eys 8 an d 9 1 0 a n d 1 1 are n o t shown in the drawin g but their arran ge

, ,

men t is marked by dotted lin es o n (2 ) Fig 2 6 7 . .

On the ax l es K the c l oser to the ce n tre the better there are c l aws
, ,

K (6 ) coup l in g with the cl aws 7 o n the brushes a n d thus capab l e of

°

raisin g a n d l owerin g the gates accordi n g to the direction in which the ,

roll s are turn in g On these rolls (5 ) there are l evers K which with their
.
1

weight turn the shafts in o n e direction in the other di rection they are
turn ed by mean s of claws Z Z o n bl ocks L which in movin g lift the 1 1
,

shoul ders K when they come in contact with those claws

1
.

B y mean s of the rods L the roll s K tur n in o n e direction co v erin g ,

the p lates W hen it is desired to shut the feed gates (or p lates ) the bl ocks
.
,

L are mo v ed in such a man n er that the c l aws Z touch the shoul ders K 1 1
,

whi ch are lifted a n d tur n the roll s K thus causin g the p lates to drop as , ,

is shown o n (5 ) a n d (6 ) Fig 2 6 9 W hen the gates are to be Open ed the

. .
,

rods L are mo v ed in the opposite di rection a n d the shoulders K with ,

1

their weight turn the roll s K back thus Open in g the gate As has been ,
.

men tion ed abo v e the l evers J hav e fin gers i which en ter into the claws ll
,
1 2

o n the b l ocks L thus liftin g an d l owerin g the gates with the same
,
.

motion that brin gs the roll s together a n d apart To keep this action of .

the apparatus e ffectiv e in the operation of each bl ock separately the ,

fin gers i are so arran ged in respect to the claws l that they couple o nly
?
2 82 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR IV

if disp lac ed from o ne position to an other The r o ds L are so p laced that .

their en ds are sli ghtly raised a n d when durin g the movemen t of the ro d
,

from o ne side to the other the fin ger 5 touches the claw l the rod rise s
7
2
,

an d the fin ger 3 passes u n der the c l aw l

7
2
n d stops betwee n that c l aw nd a a

the o n e foll owi n g if the rod con tin ues mo vin g the fin ger 5 comes in to , 7
2

con tact with the n ext c law l a n d brin gs the rod to a n ormal position
,

when it is stopped W hen the levers J are turn ed to o n e or the other

.
1

side to the extreme poin t (Fig 2 6 9 ) 5 n d 7 the fin gers do n o t touch

. a ,

FI G . 2 70 .

the claw l at a ll a n d the rods L may be moved backwards a n d forwards

,

quite in depen den tly of them .

The l atest mode l exami n ed of the Nordyke Marmo n Co mill is

’

sh o w n o n Fig 2 70 Here the adjustab l e bearin gs H are p l aced in the

'
'

. .

middle a n d the fixed on es are in the n eighbourhood of the outer wall s ,

a n d the beari n gs S of the outer ro ll s are so set as to a ll ow of regu l ati n g

them a n d this is performed as follows the bearin gs S have two tail

,
.

shaped arms a an d I) n e of which rests freely o n the bolt K screwed

,
o , a,

in to the arm L of the frame the arm b is faste n ed to the frame by a

bolt j screwed in to it The plan es of con tact 0 of the bearin g n d the
.

,
a

frame are pl an ed to each other n d determin e the di rection of motio n

a

of the beari n g I f the bearin g S is to be lifte d or l owered we l oose n the

.
‘

,
2 84 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ m m .
,
IV

feed g ro s B y mea n s of a screw with a han d wheel G a n d the han d

in ll .
-

wheel D doin g ser vice as a l ock n t the workin g di stan ce between the
-
u ,

grin din g ro ll s is adj usted n d,

the par l l li ty of their axes set T h
a a e e .

bearin gs of the j ockey shaft r lifted by a rod T which has a square

a e

thread a n d is brought in to motion by co n ic gears B The cap of the .

“

bearin gs of the j ockey shaft is kept o n by the bolts 1 n d 2 The ten sion a .

of the sprin g is regulated by the screws P Figs 2 7 1 n d 2 72 ill ustrate . . a

the fro n t a n d the back view of the mill Fig 2 72 clearly shows how the . .

feedi n g roll s are driv en by belt gearin g The belt p ull eys 1 an d 2 are set
.
‘
-

FI G 2 7 3
. .

on the axes of the feedin g rolls o n the hub of the bearin g of the belt
pull ey 1 is set a bracket 4 for the belt pull ey 3 : this bracket is j oin ed -

with a cran k mechan ism 5 its cran k set fast o n the axl e d (see Fig
,
.

owi n g to which at the momen t of throwin g the roll s apart the belt pulley 3 -

is drawn to the left the belt is loosen ed n d the fee din g discon tin ued
, ,
a .

A more simp lified co n struction of simulta n eous liftin g or l owerin g of

the j ockey shaft bel on gi n g to the same works is shown o n Fig 2 7 3 where .
,

the gen eral hoop A carryin g the bearin gs of the drivin g be lt pulleys is -

seen The en ds of the hoop rotate n j ourn al s fixed n the sides of the
. o o

frame while the middl e has a ratchet stop

, .

A F eed Cru s
-
hin g R lol reM ill — Th feed crushi
. n g ro ll er m ill
e show n in -
CH A P . Iv ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 2 85

F igs 2 74 a n d 2 7 5 is used by the American s to reduce the cakes obtain ed

.

as a b y product in o il pressin g The rolls of such mill s with pyr

- -
amidal .

corrugation s are cast in open hearth steel n d their surfaces harden ed -

a .

The arra n geme n t of this mi ll is very simpl e Th roll 1 is set in fixed . e

bearin gs the other roll 2 is p laced in adj ustable bearin gs A furni shed
, , , ,

with a brake of di rect acti on The bearin gs A have cylin drical arms with .

which they are set in to the s lippers B lyi n g in parallel gui des D The .

cups 0 holdi n g the sprin gs are attached to the frame by bolts The ten
’
.

FI G . 2 74 . FI G 2 75
. .

sion of the sprin g is adj usted by bolts On the reverse side of the bearin gs .

there are bolts by mean s of which the di stan ce betwee n the roll s is regu
l ated .

Th diameters of the rolls of such mill s are 3 00 to 3 5 0 mm their

e .
,

l e n gth 6 0 0 to 800 mm the n umber of revo l utio n s of the fast roll 6 5 0

.
, ,

that of the sl ow 3 2 5 the n umber of powers required 1 5 to 2 5

, .

iii
( .
) Ro ller M ills o f the F o u rth and F ifth S chem es .

Three H igh -
M ill8 .
—
C Ka p ler s mill (Fig
has three grindin g
.
’
. 2 76 )

roll s w and
l
p laced diago n ally o n e over the other Th hopper 0
, . e

is di vided by a partition 0 in to two chambers I n the l ower part of 2

.

—
those chambers are di sposed the feedin g rolls d a to whi ch the gates m l z
,

approach sli di n g o n the outside surfaces of the i n clin ed wall s of the

,

feeder I n each gate m there is a toothed rack m coup lin g with the
.
l
,

toothed wheel I o n the axis l passin g through the feeder On the n d

I ,
. e

of each axis l a worm wheel n is freely set with sl ots q through which the ,

screws of the station ary stems p at the en d of the axes l can pass with
these screws the wheel s n may be fixed to the stems p The worm wheels .

2 are cou l ed
7.
p p with the screws 0u on t he tra n s v ersa l axis 0 at o n e e n d 1
2 86 LOU R MI LLI NG F [ C H A R I V

of t he feeder ; o n the e n ds of this axis there are han d wheel s W hen -

.

both worm wheel s are fixed o n the axes l a n d the axis 0 turn s both the
71.

—
,

gates m accordin gly draw away from the feed rolls a n d the feed el
l
a
?

in g in this ma nn er is regul ated equall y o n both ro ll s I f it is wished to .

bri n g o nly o n e gate in to Operation the worm wheel n of the other gate
is di sconn ected with the stem p or with the axis l On the en ds of the .

axes of the fee di n g roll s a —a there are set the belt pulleys R through
l 2 -

which the drivin g belt (see dotted lin es in Fig 3 ) ru n s . .

FI G . 2 76 .

On the Opposite n d of o n of the feedin g roll axes there is freely set

e e

the belt pulley S which may be con n ected with the axis of the feed
- I
,

roll s by mean s of a toothed couplin g G The drivi n g belt marked by a .

dotted li n e o n Fig 4 passes over the belt pull eys S a n d S o n the axis of
.
- I 2

the top roll W Un der the feeder two in clin ed p lates Y a n d Y are
1 .

1 2

arran ged The first supplyin g p late is p laced over the top roller W a n d
.

from the l ower edge of the p late Y parallel to o n e side of the chamber M
2

there run s a v erti cal part ition e An en dl ess belt T run s o v er the feedin g
.
I

roll s 7 7 whi ch hav e a groo ve like hollow o n their circumferen ce so that

1
,
-

th e mid dl e part of the belt lies l o wer t ha n the rims this belt run s parallel
2 88 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR Iv

middle a n d the l ower grin di n g rolls Th rotatio n is commun icated to . e

the feed ro lls by a direct n d cross belt drive from the axis of the top
-
a -

grin di n g roll to the belt pulleys M which may be thrown o ff a n d in by

-

han d with a cross head coup lin g H with the aid of the lever 0 The
-
.

adjustable bearin g for the l ower grin din g roll has a tail D with a cup for ,

the sprin g K The l ower roll is thrown in n d out by the top l ever A
. a ,

with the aid of which this roll may be p laced at a n y workin g di stan ce .

A more acc urate settin g is performed by mea n s of a ha n d wheel E The -

ten sion of the sprin g is a d

j usted by n uts n the right o

han d side of the brake rod .

The top ro ll is thrown in a n d

out by the l ower l ever A The .

brake of this roll is arran ged

simil arly to the o n e at the
top .

W hen this mill works in

di v ision s the supp lyin g p l ates
are gen erall y arran ged as
shown o n Fig 2 7 8 i e the .
, . .

product from the upper a n d

the middl e roll s passes
through the isolated Open
i n gs in the p late which directs
the stock to the middl e n d a

the l ower roll .

W illford s Three H ig h
’

—
M ill The defects of the
three high mill s with roll s -

F 2 77 IG
. .

of e q al di m eter lies in the u a

fact that the middl e roll in doin g doubl e work becomes worn
, .
,

more rapidly a n d requir es a more frequen t ren ewal of the corruga

tion s This causes a quick decrease in its di meter n d co n se
.
a ,
a

quen tl y the n ecessary differen tial of their v el ocities is un balan ced

,
.

An America n e n gin eer W illford with the view to ob viatin g this defect
, , ,

recommen ds a mill with a middle roll of doubl e the di ameter of

the roll s o n either side of it Fig 2 79 represents this mill where 2
. .
,

marks the frame of the machin e n d 4 the feed hopper with a feeding,
a

mechan ism The frame is n cast iron bl ock while the hopper 4 is
. o e -

u suall y made of ti mber a n d suitab ly fixed to the fra me Th e t p n d . o a

 ca n . IV ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 2 89
O

the bottom roll s 8 a n d 1 0 are first p laced in to the frame through the
middle aperture 2 0 in the wall an d then pushed with journ al s in to the
,

holl ows 2 2 an d 2 4 The middl e roll 3 is set in its place between the other
.

g ri n di n g ro ll s a n d the meta l caps 5 5

,

co v erin g the open in gs in the wall s

are screwed to the frame Th open . e

in gs are made in the opposite wall s

of the frame so that it is possib le
,

to put the roll s in or take them

out from either side for the mill ,

sometimes has to be erected in a

positio n that woul d make the roll s
'

in accessible if the apertures were o n ly

,

o n the o n e side W ith this co n stru o

.

tion all the rolls may be in serted

through ny particular openin g e very
a ,

o n e of which is sufficie n t l y l arge to

allow a passage for the largest ro ll .

Th holl ows 2 2 a n d 2 4 co n stitute parts of the ope nin g 2 0 but the

e ,

openin gs themsel ves may be made so large as to embrace the holl ows too ,

so that the top a n d the bottom rolls or o n e of them may be put in an d ,

FI G . 279

then pushed aside to give place to the third ro ll I n such a con structio n .

the shape of the openin g 2 0 is of n o con sequen ce though the roun d ,

shape with holl ows for the journ al s of the top a n d the bottom rolls is
preferable .

The j o u r n al s 6 of the middl e roll 3 are set in the hearin gs? in the cap s 5
r
'
2 90 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CH A R IV
0

co v erin g the openi ngs 2 0 which hav e ribs 9 to impart greater strength
,

to the cap .

The j ourn al s of thetop an d the bottom ro ll s are set in beari ngs which
—
,

are supported o n l e vers 1 5 1 7 fi xed by j oints to the walls of the frame

,

abov e a n d bel ow the middle roll .

The v ertica l bolt 2 5 passes through the e n ds of each pair of l evers .

I n its top part it has a screw thread a n d a ha n d wheel 2 7 with a screw -

hub Un der the han d wheel there is a washer 2 9 a n d between the washer
.
-

a n d the l e v er is p l aced a spira l spri n g 3 1 Through the fro n t wall of the .

frame between the en ds of the l ev ers there run s a shaft 3 3 with cross
, , ,

hea ds 3 5 o n which the slide rods 3 7 rest Those slide rods are fi xed to
,
-
.
-

the le v ers by screws 3 9 an d by adj ustin g n uts 4 1 The slide rods 3 7 o n .

-

each l ev er are in depen den t of each other an d therefore by adj usti ng them ,

the p aralleli ty of the roll shafts may be trammed .

The shaft 3 3 has a han dl e 4 3 o n o n e en d by mea n s of which it ca n be ,

t u rn ed a n d the en ds of the l e vers parted with the aid of cross heads thus -

forcin g the top an d the bottom roll s away from the middl e o ne The .

han dle 4 3 gen erall y has a bracket 4 5 runnin g un der the shaft Through .

the pro j ection 4 9 ther e passes the couplin g belt 4 7 restin g again st the
bracket 4 5 B y t u rni ng this bolt the position of the rolls may be a d
.
,

j usted ; The rolls may be t hrown apart by mean s of a le ver a n d then ,

brought to their primary po sitio n The ten sion of the sprin gs 3 1 deter .

min es the pressure of the top an d the bottom rolls upon the middl e o ne .

The beari n gs for the l e v ers are formed o n the en ds of the square or
flat stem s 5 3 which pass through a thickenin g 5 5 o n the outer walls of
,

the frame (see Fig B y mea n s of bolts 5 1 a n

. d 5 7 the positio n of the
axes of rotatio n of the levers may be altered .

On the shaft of the middl e roll there is set a drivin g belt p ull ey 5 9 -

with the aid of which this roll is driven The surface of this roll bein g .

cl ose to the surfaces of the upper n d the l ower ro lls the latter are rotated
a , _

by friction with the middl e roll when the stock fl ows between them ,

for thi s reason the vel ocity of their rotation must be equa l to that of the
middl e roll To a v oid this there is a separate differen tial belt drive by
.
,
-

mean s of which the vel ocity of ro ta tio n o f the top a n d the bottom rolls is
diminished in respect to the vel ocity of the middl e roll On the opposite .

en d of the shaft of the middl e ro ll is set a belt pull ey 6 1 The shaft -

.

of the top roll has a belt pull ey 6 5 a n d a similar belt pulley 6 7 is o n the
-

,
-

shaft of the bottom roll I n the p lan e of these three belt pull eys to the
.
-

wall of the frame there is fi xed a l ever 7 1 with a hol e at its upper end ,

through which there passes a screw 7 3 Thi s screw has a spiral sprin g 7 5 .
2 92 F LO U R MI LLI NG [ CH AR IV

bolts rest again st a projectio n o n the frame made for that purpose On .

the other side of the vertical arm there are fixed in suitable positio n s two
L shaped
- brackets E supporti n g truck l e ax l es F which r u n through the ,

whol e frame with n ecks at either n d protrudi n g beyon d the brackets

,
e ,
.

T hese brackets are ecce n tric in respect to the body of the shafts , n d their a

duty is to support the adjustabl e bearin gs G for the roll s a n d also the ,

l evers H at the other n d e .

In the upper parts of the L shaped brackets E there-

are v ertica l s l ot s

dotted out F i through which the coup l i n g bol ts f pass Th es e

( 6 o n g .
.

brackets have adj ustin g S crews 9 for settin g the rolls in a parallel position ,

FI G 2 80
. .

at o n e n d n d a l on g horizon tal openin g J (see Fig

e ,
a the inn er en d of .

which is roun ded so that the shaft F may pass in to it A small bush h
, .
,

wi th a cavity o n the side adjace n t to the shaft F (Fig 7 ) is set in to the

, .

sl ot t hi s bush n freely sli de in the sl ot I t is hel d in its position by a

ca .

small spiral sprin g i to which the desired ten sion may be imparted by
mean s of a screw 7 ru m in g through the en d of the bracket n d restin g
°

l a

again st the sprin g The sprin g i with the bush s lidin g in the sl ot serv e s
.

as an elastic stop to the truckl e shaft F the e ccen tric en d of this shaft
passes through n of the en ds of the adj ustable bearin g G for the roll s
o e ,

wh ich is fixed to the n eck of the shaft so that in the case of a hard body ,

falli n g in between the rolls they can mo ve apart owin g to the action of
, ,
‘

the truckl e shaft F the bushes h an d the sprin g i The other en ds of the
, , .

roll bearin gs are supported nd adj usted by screw s k wit h forked en ds

-
a
CH AR Iv ] FLOU R MI LLI NG 2 93

r u nni n g from the middle arm through a n open in g in the en ds of the bear
i n gs G On these screws there are set hollow coup lin g n uts l which are
.

o n the outside of the wa ll s of the machi n e n d serve to bri n g the ro lls a

together a n d apart with the view to obtain in g a product of the desired

,

fin en ess B etween that part of the ro ll bearin g through which the screw
.
-

bolt passes a n d the middl e a rmB a spiral S prin g m with a n t n d a washer ,

u a

behin d it is p laced Th purpose of this sprin g is to hol d the roll bearin gs

. e -

I n the positio n required so that the ro ll s shou l d n o t become wor n whe

, ,
n

there is n o product between them .

I f it is w ished to throw the ro lls apart at a mome n t s n otice the truckl e

’

shafts F are turn ed by mean s of the han dl es H fi xed to the en ds of those

shafts B y turn in g the shafts the roll bearin gs G supported by the
.
,
-

eccen tric n ecks of the shafts are mo ved The han dl es H are co n n ected .

with each other by a stem K o n e n d of which is fixed to o n e han dl e a n d , e ,

the other passes through the te n sio n bo lt coup led W ith the other han dl e
in this wise the positio n of o n e ha n dl e may be adj usted in respect to the
other o ne On e of these han dl es H is hel d in n y un chan geabl e position
. a

by a l ock screw with a n u t passin g through the segmen t lin k L which has , ,

its upper en d fasten ed by a j oin t to the frame of the machin e so that this ,

lin k is suffi cie n t ly l oose to all ow the ro ll beari n gs G to mo v e away whe n a -

hard body is caught between the roll s .

M is a n ordi n ary America n j ockey shaft .

To the top of the frame n y ki n d of a feedi n g mecha n ism may be a

adapted The grin di n g roll s as is seen o n Fig 2 co n sist of two fixed D

.
, .
, , ,

a n d two adj ustab l e ro ll s D

’

I n si de the frame para ll el to the ro ll s there are p l aced three feed

, ,

p lates N N nd N The top shel f N directs the grai n flowi n g

’ ” '

, , , a .

from the feeder i nto the space between the fixed top roll D n d its a

adjustable n eighbour D Ha v i n g passed to the opposite surfaces of

’
.

those ro lls the reduced grain is con ducted by the pl ate N to the
,
’

workin g space betwee n the upper adjustab le ro ll D a n d the seco n d ’

fixed ro ll D After this passage its flow is deflected by the pl ate N to

.
”

the space between the fixed bottom roll D n d the n pours down as ’
a

shown by arrows .

The top shelf N is statio n ary the other two N n d N have joi n ts
’
, ,
a

below shown in n a n d their upper edges are j oin ed by a s lewin g head P

, ,
’

with a fixed rack 0 so that when it is n ecessary to examin e thé pro

,

duct the pl ates N or N may be l owered after l ooseni n g the slewi n g

,
’
,

he ad an d the product then passes through c orrespon din g d oors in to the

,
’

frame sliding d own the i n c lin ed pl ate

, .
 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR Iv

(iv ) Ro ller M ills f

o the E ighth S chem e

—T
.

W . Gra y a nd R . roller mills of

B irkho ltz
’
s F o u r Ro ller -
Mill he
E uropea n co n structio n s for successi v e passages of the eighth scheme
(p 2.1 4 ) represe n t the
‘

ordin ary types of two ro ll er mill with the shafts -

of the correspon di n g pairs of roll s lyi n g in a vertical plan e The n umber .

of passages is from two to fou r a n d this process is performed in plain ,

millin g or the millin g of feed stuffs Of those mill s we shall exami n e the .

America n co n structio n of W Gray a nd B irkh o lt as the most origi n al

.
z, .

FI G 2 8 1 . .

Thismill is shown in Fig 2 8 1 The roll s B C of each pair are set in

. .

fixed bearin gs the other two roll s DD in adj ustable beari n gs with tai l
,
’

frames an d brakes already familiar to us Th bearin gs have ball arms . e -

(S e l l ers type ) for

’
se l f adjustme n t a n d o n the l-
ow er side they ha v e l o
,
n gi
t di n a l arms e w ith which they drop i n to the s lides D a n d pre v e n t the
2
u

bearin gs from rollin g out of their seats .

Th bearin gs are hel d in their set position s by screws e screwed

e
'
3

in to the arms e w hich han g over the beari n gs Th position of e

4
. e
“

is such a s to all ow of removin g the bearin g from its p lace '

,

on ce the screw has been l oosen ed Fo r this purpose th hollow is left . e

open n o n e side nd its shape is such that whi lst the box or the bearin g
o ,
a
2 96 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR IV

On the o n e side the shoe is supported by o ne or sev eral belts m attached 4

by their upper en ds to the frame at the fron t edge it is support ed by

,

o n e or se v era l be lts or wires m a l so attached to the frame the shoe ca n

5

move in a direction perpen di cular to the shafts of the rolls This motion
—
.

"
is commun icated to it by mean s of two ecce tric driv es
n m m from the 7

g e n era l ax l e receivi
,
n g the motio n with the aid of a bel t pull ey set o n it -

a n d co n n ected by a be lt m with the pulley o n the axle of the roll

8

Th e feeding top shoe passes u n der the flap va l ve of the hopper n d co n a

v eys the stock from the bottom part of the hopper to the fixed sI pplyin g I

pl ate n which directs it to the workin g space of the rolls Havin g passed
,
.

through the top rolls the stock fall s o n the l ower fee din g plate m which ’

directs its co u rse to the secon d pair of roll s

‘

To pre v en t the product from fallin g in behi n d the shoe a piece of ,

lin i n g l is attached to the back wa ll .

7 . Tra n sm issio n f
o M o tio n to the Ro lls

To o thed Gea ring—W e ha v e already exami n ed the details of the roller

mills havin g a special fu n ctio n—the fee din g a n d the adj ustmen t mechan
isms for in stan ce No w we must n ote the detail s of a gen eral character
, .
,

which are of n o l ess importan ce than the fee di n g a n d the brake de vices .

Of the detail s of a gen eral character the parts of machin ery tran s ,

mittin g the motion are the most importan t I n our gen eral re view of .

ro ller mill s we have n oted that there are two types of geari n g the toothed
gearin g adopted by the E uropean en gin eers a n d part ly in American
mill s for rough grin di n g (the reduction of forage products ) a n d the belt ,

gearin g emp loyed by the American s o nly Here we are speakin g of .

'

tra n smi ttin g the motio n from ro ll to roll To commun icate motio n to .

the feedin g rolls the E uropean en gin eers gen er lly use combin ed gearin g
, a ,

the flexible a n d the toothed while the American s emp l oy only the
,

former in their mill s of the latest type .

Co n sider the toothed geari n g giv en in Fig 2 8 3 (1 2 a n d The .

,

first o n e the simp lest is used for mill s of small capacity an d in cases
, , ,

where the degree of evenn ess p lays n o great part The secon d type of .

toothed gearin g represen ts doubled chain wheels with a chess board like - -

disposition of the teeth to lessen v ibratio n in worki ng I t has be en .

adopted by some of the American works Th ordin ary toothed gearin g . e

wi th a helical like di spositio n of the teeth show n o n 3 has been adopted

-

, ,

by al most a ll works I n this last gearin g the wheel s are provided with
.
emu »
. w] FLOUR MI LLI NG 29 7

rin g l ubricatio n use d by S eck s works an d by the American works of

,
’

W o lf (both pate n ts were c laimed simul tan eously ) .

I n speakin g of the merits of toothed gearin g the accuracy it attai n s

in the ratio of geari n g must be poin ted out B u t the gra v e defect of the
.

toothed gearin gs in the roller mills where the distan ce between the
,

FI G 2 83
. .

shafts has to be altered is the decreased e fficiency when in operation a n d

,

the shafts hav e to be brought n earer to each other in proportio n to the

wear of the roll s Th n ecessity of a lterin g the distan ce between the
. e .

axles of the gears deman ds n out lin e of the teeth accordin g with
a

the in v olute of the circle Un der our con dition s however the axes
.
, ,

of the wheels in the most fav ourab le circumstan ces may only be
, ,

brought 1 0 mm n earer than the n orma l Con sequen t ly the wear

. .
2 98 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR Iv

and ren ewal of the workin g surfaces may go o nly 5 mm deep for ea ch .

roll otherwise the toothed gearin g will be operatin g at a great disa dva n
,

tage Thus if each of the roll s has worn 5 mm n w gear wheel s with
.
,
.
, e

smaller diameters ha v e to be i n stalled otherwise the gear wi ll cause a great

,

waste of power I n Russian mills this is gen erally n o t taken in to co n

.

sideration a n d eco n omisin g in n w pinion s the work is performed till the

, e

teeth break regar dl ess of the fact that more is l ost in the expen di t u re
,

of en ergy an d the fact that the motor has to be overl oaded without
,

in creasin g the capacity of the mill s is regarded with surprise .

Thus the expedien cy of the toothed geari n g may be ackn owl edged ,

but when the ro lls are in worki n g position the axes of the pini on s ca n
, ,

o nly at most be brought

n earer together by about

1 0 mm I f the di sta n ce .

betwee n them is to be
still further decreased ,

the pin ion s must be

chan ged .

B el t gea ring S e v eral -

.

of the belt gearin g co n -

stru ctio n s were deal t with

when describin g the

makes of American mills .

The shafts of th e drivin g

belt p ul leys are usually -

attached to the frame .

B t often to simp lify u ,

the con struction of the mill they are station ed outside a n d apart as
, ,

shown in Fig 2 84 Here B is the axle of the shaftin g C the j ockey

. .
,

shaft 1 the drivin g belt to the fast roll s an d 2 to the sl ow The ten sio n
, ,
.

of the belt is adjusted by toothed gears A an d the suppl emen tary reg ul a ,

tion Of ten sion of the belts to the sl ow rolls is brought about by l owerin g
or raisin g the bearin g by screws 3 .

S ome twe n ty years ago whe n the E uropea n e n gi n eers attempted to

—
,

in troduce belt gearin g the prin cipal argumen t again st it was the im p o ssi
,

b ility of mai n tai n i n g a n accurate n umber of revo l utio n s of the ro ll s ,

owin g to the belt slippin g The work of the American mills of the
.

con temporary makes howe ver proved that this argumen t had n o solid
, ,

groun d u n der it The slippin g of the belt within such li mits as to

. .
,

affect the accuracy of the tran smitted n umber of rev ol ution s of the ‘
300 FLO U R MILLI NG [ CH AR Iv

The first
sol e attempt to giv e theoretic formulae of the useful
an d

work Of the roller mills was made by P rofessor Afan a syeff a n d was based ,
1

o n his experime n ts o n the resista n ce of the grain to pressure performed ,

at the mechani cal laboratory of the Tech n ol ogical I n stitute S t P eters , .

bu rg R epeated experimen ts with the resistan ce to pressure of grain s

.

(2 00 grai n s or more each time ) of a n orma l moisture co n te n t a n d of a pp ro x i

mately equal size p laced in between steel p lates un der a press produced
, ,

the followin g results

TABL E X XV

P ressure in K lgs . 1 0 00 2 0 00 3 00 0 4 0 00 5 0 00

D istan ce between the p l ates

(th ickn ess o f t h e gra in ) in 27 23 2 3 95 2 06 8 17 53 L 5 42 13 91
mm .

C ompressio n in successive
l o a di n gs } 03 28 0 32 7
-
9 315 9 211 mm

T his table shows that the absol ute qua n tity of elastic pressure is equa l
to o ne third of the size of the grain
-

The ful l l oa di n g up to the limits of el asticity of the grain fluctuated

between 1 0 a n d 2 0 kl g to each grain in proportio n to its moisture co nte nt
.
,

th e l ess l imit referri n g to the grai n with more moisture This c orrespo n ds
’

to the l oadin g of 5 0 to 1 00 klg to 1 .

square cm .

I n definin g the l a w of cha n gin g the

press u re of the roll s o n the grain or partic les -

of it P rofessor Afan a yeff reaso n ed in the

, s

followin g man n er : supposi n g we hav e two

rolls of equal ra di i r (Fig 2 8 6 ) with the .

di sta n ce between the worki n g surfaces i a n d

F 2 86
IG
the size of the stock to be treated £
. .

0 .

S uppose that the pressure of the ro ll s upo n the stock o n the route it
trav el s from n to n is proportion ate to its compression If we mark
1 .

the quantity of the pressin g forces al on g the cen tre li n e P a n d Q is some

intermediate positio n of the stock Lt—
,

u then Q is defin ed from the

’

proportio n
Q P = su z q n l

1
F l o u r M ills , S t P e ters
. b g 1 88 3
ur , .
ca n »
.
]
Iv F LOUR MI LL I NG 30 1
“

for the press ures when the compressio n is elastic are proportio nal to
, ,

the quan tities of compressio n (2 su a n d 2 gn ) bein g pressed from two 1

sides B u t sin ce
.

while in the dra win g

=
Eo 2 r+ i —
2 r cos — =
E 2 r(1 a
—
cos a
)
,

havi g performed the reduc tio n s

n an d the substitutio l —cos n a =2 sin
2

we obtain
Cl
gn 1
= 2 r s in 2
.

From the same drawi ng we obtain the signi fi catio n of su for the in ter
mediate position of the stock
su = 2 r sm —
2 r sm
0 0
2
.
-
a P

o
2
.

2 2

By substitutin g these sen ses into the formula ()

1 we obtain
D
C
"

N
)

The a n gles a n d 6 bein g v ery small with a slight i n accuracy we may

a ,

regard the sines as equal to the circular measure of these an gles Then .

we ha v e

T hat is the pressure of a uni t of area of the roll whereas we are to fin d ,

the pressure from n to n so as to kn ow the full work of the pressure I f

1 .

the elemen t a m of the surface of the roll correspon ds to the an gle do

.
,

a n d the dime n sio n s a a o n the ge n eratin g circ l e of the cy lin der is l the
l ,

elementary pressure will be

< )
2 2 2 2
a 0 G 0
l = cl P l . u . u 1 cos 6 = P lr

full pressure
The R is obtain ed when we take the integral of this term
from to o a .

sZ
z 2 3 D

6
(
a N
P lr d9 = P lr a
w
- "

The poi n t of app lication of this resultan t pressure is obtained o n o r ~

de finin g the momen t of actio n of this force The momen t o f a ct ion dQis .

3 51
W
9
dQ up am .
30 2 F LO UR MI LLI NG [ C HAR IV

for u p = r sin 0 = r0 the 0 bein g small By integratin g this term we

, .
,

arriv e at the mome n t of the compressin g force R in respect to the axis

’

of the roll
P zr z
(; gg) i
f
,
p zr a z z

dividi n g (4 ) by (3 ) we obtain the sho ul der of the resultant of the

On
pressures by which we sha ll defin e the poin t of application of force R
, .

This sh du ld r ; will be
e 7
‘3
n
— r z
‘
a .

we di stribute these R directed parallel to the p la n e of the axes

If ,

o v er the tan gent a n d the ra di us (Fig we shall obtain .

R z —R
3 3 3 3
R I = R sm
g
a = Ra
g
cos
because the an gl es a bein g small we may ,

accept
3 3 3
sm
§
a
g
et and cos § a _
1 .

FI G" 2 87‘
hen the motiv e power of each roll
T .

impartin g v elocity to the product durin g the period from the n ull sen se
to the greatest equal to the rotatin g velocity of the roll s will be ,

S =fR, —R , .

this momen t is so in significan t that we may ign ore it a nd co n

But
sider the v el ocity of motion of the product between the rolls from the
beginn in g of its in gress to its exit to be ev en a n d equal to the rota ry
vel ocity of the roll s These con sideration s preven t our accepting as
—R as the
.

correct P rofessor Afa n a syeff s inferen ce who regards

’

, I

motive power a n d further defin es the work of the roll er mill s as the work
of this force S .

The work of the forces fR must be defin ed by takin g their pro j ectio n
2

upon the direction of the motion of the product i a upon the v ertical , . .

p lan e .

The n the se n se of the motive power will be

F =2fR2 sin
:

P rofessor Afan a syeff s

’
experimen ts have shown that
where 6 mean s the thickn ess of a grain of wheat , a n d ,u the relativ e
 30 4 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CHAR IV

area of the grain is mm . T hen with ,

P rofessor Zworykin s ’

correctio n we obtain
,

1 0 00 lv lv
T=
m klc,

which c losely resembles the results produced by P rofessor Afana syeff s ’

i n vestigation s
—
.

Co nsu mp tio n of Usefu l W o rk i n Grinding Th e co n sideratio ns of

P rofessors Afa n a syeff a n d Zworyki n we ha v e adduced ha v e a p u rely
th eoretica l va l ue Those formul ae elucidate the ge n eral character of
.

the phen ome n o n but cann ot be adapted to defin e the useful work of the
ro ll er mill s bein g deduced o n the suppositio n that the ro lls h a v e equal
velocities which n ever happe n s in rea lity The equa l velocities of the
,
.

ro ll s result in the crushin g of the stock wherea s a cuttin g or chi ppin g,

of the grain or partic les of it is Observed when the v elocities are di fferen t .

Thus to defi n e the usefu l work in reduci n g it is n ecessary to kn ow the

,

resistan ce to cuttin g which requires n immediate experime n tin g o n

,
a

the cutti n g of grai n B y this reaso n , havi n g n o other data P rofessor

.
,

Zworykin suggests maki n g use of P rofessor Kick s experime n ts a n d ’

e v olves a series of formul ae defin in g the useful work .

Accordin g to P rofessor K ick s researches the resista n ce to the cutti n g

’

of the gra in in creases from 0 to 9 klg o n the stretch of 0 5 mm there

. .

fore the cuttin g work for o n e grain is equa l to 0 0 0 2 2 5 klg m tr Ao .

-
.

cep tin g for the break ro ll s the circu l ar pitch of the corrugatio n to be t ,

the v elocity of the fast roll a n d its le n gth l we obta in th a t the n umber ,

of grai n s passin g between the roll s per seco n d is

1 000 lv
16 6 5t
’
'

As the circular pitch of the corrugatio n t must correspon d to the

dimen sio n s of the stock cut co n sequen tly the usefu l
,
‘

work T for corrugated roll s will be expressed thus

1 00 0 l v O l lv
‘

or about
1

Fo r smooth ro ller mills the useful work will be expressed by the

formula

These formulae may become very va luab le if through the immediate ,

definitio n s of the u se ful work of the ro ller mill s with differe n t l v an d t

.

, ,
C H AR Iv ] F L O UR MI LL I NG 30 5

(t is n eeded for corrugated ro ll s ) we fin d by experime n t the coeffi cie n t

1
7675
.

Theo retica l Ca p a city of Ro ller Mills —P roceedin g from the foregoin g

i n feren ces we may me n tio n se v era l co n sideratio n s regardin g the theo
,

retica l capacity of ro ller mill s .

I f the thickn ess of the sheet of product flowi n g i n to the n ip of the

ro ll s be mark 6 the n its vo lu me passi n g in betwee n the workin g surfaces
,

is (with the same de n omin atio n s of l v k a n d It as before ) , , , 1

1 00 0 1 v . . 6

cceptin g the specific gra v ity of the stock to be

A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 klg .
, we
obt in the weight Q:
a

1 0 00 l v
0 0 0 00 0 0 6
kkl

Thuswe see that the capacity of a ro ller mill is a rather comp licated
f u n ctio n of five variables Give n the l en gth of the ro lls n d the circum
. a

f ren tia l ve locity of the fast ro ll we may accept lv for this mi ll as a co n

e ,

stan t qua n tity The n the prob lem of defin in g the capacity is simp lified
.
,

for the capacity will depe n d n 5 k a n d k These variab les depen d o n o (

, l .

the ki n d of mi llin g which determin es what their respectiv e values are to

,

6
be . Bu t it is impossible to give any l imiti n g v
a lues for _

klc1
_

’
because the
millin g diagram s are very v ariously arra nged . S in ce we ha v e n o serious
5
(
experime n ta l data for as yet we are compell ed to make use of the
,

data of capacities of ro ller mills as give n by the works with correctio n s ,

foun ded o n gen era l observatio n s of the capacity of these machin es at

modern mill s .

P ra ctic l D t a a a —
f the C p a city f R ller Mills Th capacities of
o a o o e

break a n d reductio n ro ller mill s given below were take n from the data
of E uropea n works tested o n the p la n ts in R ussia n mi lls n mill in g ,
o

systems which are duly men tion ed in the tab le Naturally the factory
, .

data fairly accurately coin cided with the capacities observed at the
mill s for the b u ilders of these mill s more or l ess strict ly adhered to
,

th eir data V ery often ho w ever the capacity of o n or a n other m il l

.
, ,
e

exceeded the g u ara n tees of re liab le works ; this is a lways the

result of overloadin g the machin es at the expen se of the qua lity of
the wo rk .
30 8 LOU R M I LL I NGF

Baumgartn er o ffers the f o llowi n g capacity for break n d a va rl o u s

ro ller mill s which is co n siderab ly be low the data of the works

,

TA BLE X XV I I I

CAP A C I TY OF R OL L E R MI L L s AC COR D I N G To B AU MGAR TNE R

1 . Cru shin g M ills (Qu etschstiihle)

2 . Ro lls f or H igh Bre a k, Ho chschro t (B rechstu hle)

D = 2 2O mm Q = 2 5 0 klg (o n e pair of ro l ls )
.
,
.
.

D 250 mm Q 2 5 0 klg (three ro ller mi ll )

.
,
.
-
.

3 . Br ea k Ro lls (S chro ts tu hle)

e
D ia m e t r o f R o ll s —D m m .

4 . P o rcela in R o lls (P orzella n stu hle)

D ia m et e r o f R o l l s —D mm .

5 . S m oo th Ca s t iro n Ro lls (Ha rtgu ss Gla tts tu hle)

- -

D iam e t e r o f R o ll s —D mm .
 CIIAP . IV ] FLOU R MI LL I NG 30 9

It is to be regretted that Baumgar t n er does n o t me n tio n the origi n

of these tables which raise some doubts in our m in ds W must r

,
. e e

m a rk by the way that in modern practice ro lls of such diameters as

, ,

4 5 0 to 5 00 mm are n o t kn own . .

B y putti n g our data in the form of capacities to 1 cm or 1 i n ch for

'

the who le break process we obtain the fo llo w in g tab l e ,

TA BL E XXI X

CA P A CI T Y To 1 CM . OR 1 I N CH P E R TW EN TY F O U R H OU R S -
F OR TH E

W H OL E B R EA K P R OCE S S IN LB S .

To 1 i n h f l ng th o f
a Ris s qé s
To 1 r O I ng th o f
.

c
Kin d
.

of G rind inCe" O S t l e oi 8
}e . .

High wheat grin din g —

1 1 1 5 5 1 2 8 79 —
2 7 8 87 3 2 1 9 8

Medium 12 8 62 —1 4 0 9 2 3 2 1 6 2— 352 3 0

Low 1 382 7 1 6 1 2 8
-
3 4 5 6 —
3 403 2 0

R ebreak or scratch ro lls D epen ds o n the n umber of reb reaks

High rye grin din g

If we compare the capacities recko n ed out for the first break with
the factory data we fin d that our ta b le shows 1 5 to 1 7 per cen t more
, .

than is giv en by the works I n cal cul atin g the dimensio n s of the ro ll s .

it is better to fo ll ow this tabl e as its data defin e a perfectly n orm a l ,

capacity of the ro lls without a n y superfluous reserve a n d without

,

i n j urious overloadin g of the machin e .

I n computi n g the capacities of ro l l s for high rye mi lli n g we have kept in

min d the fact that in the first break the grain treated has bee n pre vious ly
sp lit down its crease in passin g through smooth crushin g ro ll s the capacity
,
'

of which as S hown in the tab l e is defin ed at 1 8 7 to 2 2 5 mm to o n sack

, , . e

of rye per twen ty four hours -

W he n ca l c u l ati n g the sizes of corrugated ro ll s we must bear it in mi n d ,

that their capacity for o n a n d the same passage in creases with the e

diameter rememberin g at the same time that a greater amoun t of power

,

is co n sumed I n selectin g corrugated ro ll s for high a n d medium grin d

.

in g the diameter of 2 2 0 mm may be decided upo n if their l e n gth does n o t

, .
3 10 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH A R Iv

exceed 1 000 mm S hou l d

.
the capacity of the mi l l howe v er require , ,

r ll s l o g
o
'

n r thae n 1 0 0 0 mm the n the diameter

.
,
emp l oyed ought to be
2 5 0 mm .

Fo r ol w gri n di n g ro ll s 2 5 0 to 3 0 0 mm in diame t er shou l d be used.

,

a n d 300 to 3 5 0 mm for S i n g l e a n d high rye gri n di n g .

—
.

E xa mp l e o f C a l l ti n T
cu a i l l
o ustrate c l ear loy the use of the tab l e
for calculatin g the dimen sio n s of the ro lls accordin g to the c a pacity ,

given of the mi ll we hall take o n e examp l e

,
S .

W e are required to ca l culate the dime n sio n s of the break ro lls for a
wheat mill o n a high grin din g s ystem yieldin g 4 0 0 sacks per day S u p .

posin g the wheat t o be of medium qua lity as regards hardn ess a n d in ,

n orma l co n ditio n we hall turn to the first limits of the data for high
,
S

grin din g .

Fo r the first break we ha v e o n e sack of product per day is reduced

by 2 6 2 mm of l en gth of the ro lls Co n sequen tly the dime n sio n s of the

. .
,

roll s for the first break are

2 6 2 x 4 00 1 04 8 mm .

Th ecapacity for high wheat grin din g in our tab le bein g referred to
the 2 2 0 mm dia meter of ro lls we must take a diameter of 2 5 0 mm
.
, .

S i n ce the l e n gth of the ro ll s is great B t the n the c a pacity of the mi ll . u

wi ll in crease accordin g to the factory data by 5 to 7 per cen t Therefore .

we may use roll s 5 to 7 per cen t S horter Thus the d imen sio n of the ro lls
. .

for the first break will be

First break—1 00 0 x 2 5 0 mm o n e pair of ro ll s .
, .

S econ d x 400 1 5 00 mm .

Thi rd x 4 00 1 5 0 0 mm .

F ourth mm .

F ifth 2 62 x mm .

S ixth 2 2 5 x 4 00 9 0 0 mm .

S eve n th 2 2 5 x 4 00 900 mm .

E ighth 18 8 x mm .

hus we h a ve obtain ed three pairs of ro lls at 1 00 0 mm two pairs at

T .
,

1 5 00 mm two at 9 00 mm a n d o n e at 7 5 0 mm
.
, I t bein g a l ways more
.
.

adva n tageous to use four ro ller mill s such a combin atio n is in co n

-

v en i n t
e Fo r this reaso n we S ha l l take a pair of ro ll s for the sixth bre a k
.
,

because without reducin g to the capacity we sha ll have four m ills ,

with two pairs of ro lls each .

312 FLO UR MI LL I N G [ CH AR Iv

his man n er the dimen sio n s of break ro lls of the other types of
In t
grin din g too men tio n ed in Tab le XX I X may be c a l culated
,
.

W e S ha ll pass to the defi n itio n of the n umber a n d the sizes of the

smooth ro ll s after we have become i n timately acquai n ted with the grin d
in gs At the presen t momen t we must direct our atten tio n to the
.

machin ery fin ish in g the work of the ro ller mi lls .

Br sh M chin es 9 . u a

Th break process may n o t be regarded as fi n ished un ti l after the last

e

break a ll the bran is thorough ly c lea n ed a n d the fl Ou r a n d middlin gs

adherin g to the bra n which the grooves do n o t hear away a re separated S

from it An in creased n umber of breaks woul d give cert ain results in this
.

respect but firstly e ven the eighth break yields n o more than 1 to 1 5 per
, ,

ce t of break flour a n d therefore there is littl e sen se in makin g the pro

n .
,

ductio dearer by addin g a n other breakin g passage seco n dly a len gthen
n
,

in g of the breakin g passages results in the reductio of bra which

n t h n e ,
l owers its va lue as feed However t o make rich .
bran i e with the ,
, . .

m a ly p rt of the grai n n o t separated from it mea s the oss of

e a
cer ai
n l a t n , .

percen tage of flour (up to 1 s per S i n ce that is t h e case the sifted ,

bra hou d be treated in a mach in e that will separate away the mea l
n l S

nd
a
is t expen sive Fo r this purpose brus h machin es are used
n o . -

Th p lain est type of a brush

e
machin e which with se v era l a lteratio n s ,

in its o n tr ti n m a
c
f y bes
emp l oyed for that wo r
uc o
k is described in
p 1 1 2 F g 1 0 2 A more comp licated brush machin e but at the sa me time
,

.
,
i . .

ha vm g a greater a a t s shown n Fig 2 8 8 This (G D a v rio s )

c
0

p y cI , 1 I .
. . e
’

S heet iro n sieve remo v ed

(
-
CH AR Iv ] FLO UR MI LLI N G 31 3

brushes n thesebeaters are set in a helica l l in e owin g to which the bra n

o ,

travel s to the out let of the machin e The deliv ery to the machin e is .

ma rked by the arrow S Th brush drum is driv e n (2 00 to 2 4 0

. e

revo lutio n s per min ute ) from the belt pulley C The belt pu lley D -
.
-

by mean s of the belt pu lley E tra n smit s the motio n to the worm while
-

, ,

F wi th the aid of the be l t pu l ley G does the s a me for the drum with the
-

S ie v e (2 4 to 3 0 revo l utio n s ) D uri n g operatio n the mea l is obtai n ed as

’ '

thro u gh a n d the bra n is tai led over

s .

F o r adjusti n g the dista n ce betwee n the casi n g of the drum a n d the

brushes th re a r the screws a by which the ribs with the brushes
,
e e ,

are attached These screws ru n through the rim of the pulleys H (three
.
-

to four pu lleys ) fixed with keys to the shaft of the brush drum .

D a v rio s works a we ll as others make these machi n es with fixed

’
e ,
s ,

drums . S ometimes a part of the brush beat ers is supp l a n ted by stee l
o n es spira lly disposed The casi n g of the workin g drum is a l so Clothed
.

with a wire sieve .

Th capacity of such machi n e s with a statio n ary casi n g is gi v e n at

e

4 3 2 to 1 0 80 lb per hour D (diameter of casi n g ) bei n g 2 5 0 mm to 7 2 0 m m

.
, . .
,

an d L ( l e n gth of ea sin g ) 1 000 to 2 0 00 mm ; others with a rotatin g .

,

casin g 8 6 4 to 2 5 9 2 lb per hour with D = 4 5 0 to 70 0 mm a n d L 1 0 0 0 to

.
, .
,

2 5 0 0 mm .

10 . D eta chers

In grin din g the fin e a n d coarse middlin gs when it is n ecessary to ,

impart stro n g pressure to the mooth ro ll s the crushin g of a certain per S ,

cen tage of stock to flakes is in evitable —the mea l flakes particula rly
often when the ro ll s are badly fed a n d do n o t receiv e a n e v en S heet of
,

product but n arrow streams owi n g to the damp product stickin g to

, ,

the feed p lates and formin g kn ots The mea l flakes thu s formed a n d .

compressed fast may pass to the sieve in that sh a pe a n d be remo v ed as

o v erta il s if n o steps a re take n towards l oose n i n g them
, .

S uch flakes are l oose n ed in detachers which receive the product o n ,

its lea vin g the ro ll s a n d break the flakes down to mea l There are three .

Show n in Fig 2 8 9 cast iron chamber A has a timber or iro n co v er

. . Th e -

B wit h a n ope n in g D for the passa ge of the product do wn arrow S I n side .

the chamber down its who le len gth there is a fibre brush C runn in g at
, ,

3 5 0 to 1 2 0 0 revo l utio n s Th e stock passes in betwee n the brush a n d th e

.

w ire sie v e E where the mea l flakes are reduced to flour

, P art of the flour .
 3 14 FLOU R MI LLI NG [
'

CH AR Iv

passes through the sieve a n d part is flu n g by the brush o v er the sieve as

in dicated by arrows S The dista n ce betwee n the brush a n d the S ieve
I .

is regulated with n uts F by mea n s of a imp le lin k mecha n ism Th e n ds S . e

G of the screws passi n g through ope n i n gs in the frame ser v e as guides

, , .

Lafo n
’
s —Fig 2 9 0 represents a doub le p in detacher from
P in deta cher
-
. .
-

the Fren ch works of F Lafo n (Tours ) The product mo v es as S ho wn by

. .

arrows S a n d fa lls in to co n ic sieve chambers A Here it is c a ught up by .

the pin s which break down the flakes The pi n s are fixed o n the .

hub C which is attached to the axle B with bo lts a The co vers D are
, .

cast in n e b lock with the bearin gs for the j our n a l s of the axl e
o .

FI G 2 90
. .

The loose n ed product flows part ly through the sieve a n d part ly

through the outlet down arrow S Th e n umber of revo l utio n s o f the
I .

p in drum is 1 1 0 0 to 1 7 5 0 per min ute The bearin gs are rin g l ubricated -

S eck s W orm deta cher —

.
.

Both the brush a n d the p in detachers a n swer

’
-

—
. -

their purpose that of breakin g down the flakes B u t both again ha v e .

 CHAP TE R V

GR AD I NG THE P R O D U CT ACCO R DI NG To S I Z E

S I FTI N G TH E P R O D U CT

P u rp o se o f S ifti n g .
—
The character of the process of grai n reductio n -
a nd

its n ature m evita b ly result in a product of various shapes nd sizes a .

Th e break process giv es us partic l es of flour as we ll as a series of

middli n gs of various S izes B u t this product c n o nl y un dergo a further
. a

a n d fi n a l treatme n t after it has bee n graded accordi n g to ize S .

I n fact the dist an ce betwee n the workin g surfaces of the reductio n

machin es millsto n es , or roll er mills at a n y o n period of the operatio n
,
e

is quite defin ite n d ca lculated to yield a product of a certain S ize Co n

,
a
'
.

seque n t ly if the product is of v arious sizes a part of it bei n g sma ll er in

'

, , ,

S ize tha n the dista n ce betwee n the workin g surfaces will pass betwee n ,

them un touched I f however we set the workin g surfaces at a dista n ce

.
, ,

sma ller tha n the l east ized particles the large grain s will be too viol en tly
-
S ,

broken down reduced to flour a n d will form flakes No w this is

, , .
,

in jurious to the qua lity of the flour to say n othi ng of the un productive ,

co n sumptio n of power in curred by the stro n g pressure of the workin g

surfaces Hen ce it is clear that if the w ork of the reducin g machin es
.

is to be satisfactory after every passage through the breaks or re du c

,

tio n s it is n ecessary for the partic les of the product to be graded

accordi ng to S ize .

I n recommen din g a series of successive reductio n machin es we had ,

the complex grin din g systems n n ew m which the n ecessity of siftin g I ,

is clearly dem On trable B t it is l ikewise eviden t that siftin g is

s . u

j ust as in dispen sab le n p lain millin g n spite of the grain bein g redu c ed
I ,
I

to mea l n o n e pass ge through the grin din g machin e The fact s that
I a . I ,

howe ver g reat he the p ress fe of the workin g surfaces upo n the grain u
,

the offal s bein g more elastic tha n the kern el o ffer greater resistan ce to
,
, .

breakage a n d part of them remain s in the hape of bra n S iftin g is a l so

, S .

n ecessary for a g tirg j h r m of mea

V e b ra n f o th m a/
s i l e
_ _ -

-
e
_ ,
s .

316
 CH AR vJ F LOUR MI LL I NG .
31 7

T hus sift in g is n ecessary (1 ) in the complex millin g process to pre

, ,

pare the i ntermediate products for further treatmen t by gradin g them P ,

a ccor di n g to S ize ; ()
2 in p l ai n (si n g l e ) mi ll in g to separate the b ra nny ,

part icles from the flour .

The bra n must be likewise sifted o ff from the flour in the fi n a l stages
of m illin g in the break process at the last break a n d rebreak a n d in ,

the reductio n process at the fin a l reductio n of the dark bra n n y particles

of grain
—
.

W o rkin g S u rfa ces Fo r gradi n g t h e i n termedia te products of millin g

a n d for separati n g the br a n from the fl o r bo l tin g s u rfaces a re used u ,
We .

are a lready a cquain ted with the prin cip le of a ctio n o f th ese s u rfa ces . ,

havin g met it in the process of separatin g the large a n d sma ll impurities

from the grain where we saw that a ll the S iev es tail o v er the large particles
,

as refuse whi le the sma ll particl es are bo lted thro u gh the siftin g meshes y
,
.

From th same grai n c lea n i n g depart me n t we kn ow the shapes of the

e -

siftin g workin g surfaces a n d the character of their motio n Fo r gra din g .

the reduced particles of grain we have prismatic ,cylin dric a n d flat S iev es , ,

S imi lar to those emp l oyed in machi n es for grain c l ea n in g .

B u t whi le the worki n g surfaces in the bo lti n g machi n es for grai n

co n sist of ieves of so lid S heet iro n p lates or of meta l c loth s owin g to
S -

the greater resista nce these materia l s offer to wear in gradin g the ,

products of milli n g meta l c loths are used o n ly for the coarser particles
=
.

Th e rest of the product in the mea n time is bo lted o n S il k S ie v es though ,

man y attempts are bein g made at prese n t to substitute met a l c l oth for S ilk .

I f we take home m an ufacture i n to co n sideratio n the n the hair c l oth ,

-

( most l y horse hair ) used for ieves for home siftin g S houl d be men tio n ed
-

S .

W e may sa y that th hair c l oth used from the remotest time for sifti n g
e -

, ,

is better tha n sil k or wire as it is hy droscopic a n d co n sequen t ly n e v er

,

swell s or grows rusty Further it is S i ffici n tly stro n g to stan d a

.
, l e

lo n g period of work B u t the u n e v e n size of the hairs t h eir u n equa l

.
,

diame ter a n d len gth does n o t a llow this materia l to be used for factory
,

made S ieves .

I t was comparati v e l y but a S hort time ago that woo ll e n c l oth of co m b

yarn wa large ly used o n p lain S hort system mi ll s owi n g to its che a p n ess
s .

B u t the n appin ess of the woo llen thread sre n dered the sifti n g imperfect
,

reducin g the qua lity a n d the qua n tity of the work .

Meta l Cl ths — AS regards so lidity a n d durabi lity meta l sie v es are

o .

the best B u t their essen tia l defect is the liabi lity to rust which v ery
.

rapid y destro ys the S ieves worki n g in u n favourab le that is damp

l
, ,

co n dition s .
318 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C HA R v
must admit however th a t this defect o n ly refers to iro n sieves
‘

W e , , .

S tee l is more rust resista n t whil e phosphor bro n ze c l oths exce l e v e n

-

,
-

steel in that respect B esides iron steel a n d bro n ze the wire of .

, , ,

the bo ltin g surface is a lso made of pure copper B t Copper siev es . u

cann ot be recommen ded because that meta l gi ves a poiso n ous oxide ,

when the siev e works in da mp air .

Though meta l sieves for bo lti n g fin m iddhn gs a nd mea l ha v e a lready e

made their appeara n ce o n the market they ha v e n o t fou n d their wa y ,

i nto the ra n ks of the machin es gen era lly used in mills bein g v ery ,

expen siv e .

W he n it is desired to emp l oy meta l S ieves for bo lti n g fin e midd lin gs

'

a n d flour phosphor bro n ze c l oths or of other rust resista n t copper com

- -

b in a tio n s shou ld be take n I n usin g meta l S ie v es we must remember .

that owin g to the high heat con ductivity the moisture from the raw
,
-

product precipitates upo n the meta l sieve (the dew phen omen o n ) which ,

is da n gerous for the reaso n that the moisten ed parts of the sieve im
,

mediately become blin ded with starchy paste an d the sifti ng will stop .

Fo r this reaso n bo lti n g machi n es with meta l sie v es hou l d be S ub j ected S

to a n en ergetic exhaust
S ilk S i eves —A tissue of white or ye ll ow raw si lk comparati v e ly cheap
.

, ,

durable a n d scarcely at a ll hygrOS COp ic is v ery successfull y adopted

, , ,

where meta l siev es ca n n ot be emp loyed .

Good si lk c l oths prepared of pure si lk threads are design ated by

, ,

the kin d of their in terlaci n g n d lso like those of meta l by numbers for a a , , ,

products of differen t izes I n makin g the choice of the c l oth particular

S .

atten tion should be paid to the puri ty of the silk B ei n g a n expen sive .

materia l it is often adulterated Owi ng to finishi n g sil k of lo w qua lity

, .
,

often becomes firm smooth a n d gl ossy i a possesses in its outward

, , , . .

appearan ce a ll the good qua lities of sterlin g c loth I n such a case ev en .

a n experie n ced eye wi ll n o t be ab l e to disti n guish it from good stu ff .

Fin ished i lk howe v er is very hygroscopic a n d swe l ls after absorbin g

S , , ,

a sma ll quan tity of moisture o n bei n g held a S hort time between S lightly
dampen ed fin gers This S ilk absorbs the moisture of the evaporatin g
.

product swells n d causes the meshes of the tissue to co n tract The

, ,
a
.

flour tur i g to paste o n the damp sieve b lin ds it in the en d a n d it stops

,
n n
,

workin g .

Th e fin ishin g of bad silk i e impartin g to its threads the firmn ess n d 1

a , .

l
g ossi ess of good materia l is do n e chiefly by mea n s of starch (coa rse
n
,

adu ter tio ) a n d by mean s of Arabian resin (a fin er adulteratio n ) The

l a n
.

1
Dr P Herm a nn Caloric Textile Chemica l
, .
,
 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR V

a re of equa l thickn ess a n d the meshes of equa l dime n sio n s O n ly such a .

sieve gives thro u ghs or o ve rt il equa l in ize a s S .

Any rough u n e ve n n ess of the threads a n d a n irregu lar yar n s trike o n e

—
o n the most superficia l exami natio n o f the c l oth But a some wh at .

i nferior tissue may be to ld from good stuff o n ly with the a s ista n ce o f a s

‘

particular kin d of le n se S hown o n Fig 2 9 4 . .

This l e n se co n sists of two meta l p lates A a n d B fo l din g up o n a third

p late the sta n d C Th p late A has a square hol e in it of 5 to 1 in ch in
,
. e ; ,

the p late B the le n s L is set Before i n spectin g the c l oth it is laid o n

.

smooth b lack or dark paper a n d then the len se is p laced as shown in the
,

drawin g I n examin in g through the le n se the square piece of the c loth

.

framed in the square ho le through the p late A it is easy to n otice the regu ,

l a rity or irregu larity of the

threads n d the meshes a n d to a ,

coun t them to test the n umber

of the c l oth To examin e the .

silk more accurate ly it must

be in spected through the len s
in severa l p l aces .

Nu m era tio n of the Clo ths .

ith the n umeratio n of the W

meta l ieves we bec me a S o o

q u in t e d i n the part treati n g a

F m 2 94 .
of grai.
n c l ea n i n g A s regards -
;

the n umeration of S i l k c loths ,

here we a l so have n o defin ite fixed i n tern atio n a l sta n dard .

S i lk bei n g used for sifti n g flo u r a n d gradi n g the coarse a n d fin e

middlin gs accor di n g to ize n umeration has been correspo n din gly
S ,

est a bli shed for the flour a n d the middli n gs c l oths separate ly I n addi .

tio n there is the S wis a n d the Fre n ch n umeratio n of the c l oths of both
s

ki ds Further the n umeratio n of the fl o u r c l oths di ffers from that of

n .
,
-

the middlin gs c loths Almost a ll E uropea n works (except the Fren ch )

.

ha ve accepted the Zurich n umeratio n o f flo r ilks n d the S wiss for -

u S ,
a

mi ddhn g ; the same n umeratio n is accepted in America where the

s
,

Am ri n B o ltin g Cloth Co in S t Louis is co n sidered to be the b est

e ca
'

. .

factory .

Th qua lity of the sil ks co n siderab l y i n flue n ces their n umeratio n

e
,

which exp lai n s why a differe n t n umeratio n has bee n adopted for middli n gs ,

a coarser pro duct requiri n g a stro n ger tissue I respect to their stre n gt h . n

th e c loths ar divide d i n to five kin d s

e
CH AR v] F LOUR MI LL I NG 32 1

()
1 Pai n c loths (Prima)
l
for ree l s
eavy c oths xtra
.

()
2 H l (E )
()
3 D oub l e heavy (D oub l e E x tra ) for ifters a n d ce n trifuga l s
.

S
reb e hea y rip e xtra
.

()
4 T l v (T l E )
()
5 M idd li n gs c l oths (G azes a G ruaux ) .

Of these fiv e kin ds of c loths those for middli n gs are the most den se
(thicker threads ) .

Th e p lai n c l oths (P rima ) ha v e the n umbers 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 , , , , , ,

up to 2 0 a n d at the America n factories up to No 2 5 I n most cases

,
. .
,

however c loths over No 1 7 are n o t ma n ufactured

,
. .

Before passin g o n to the further characteristics a n d compariso n of

si lks we give the n umeratio n n umber of threads the n umber a n d S ize
, , ,

of the meshes in the Prima sie ves (S wiss S i lks ) .

TA BL E XXX

Nu m b ero f D im in
e nsio ns Nu m b er Nu m b er o f
Mesh es to mm o f e ach sid e S il k No o f Th rea d s Mesh es to
q
. .

1 s u are cm . o f th e Me sh es . to 1 cm . q
1 s u are cm .

Of these c l oths No s 0 0 00 to 4 give large a n d sma ll middli n gs as

.

thro u gh s No s 5 to 7 du n st or coarse flour whi le NOS 8 to 2 0 gi v e

’

, .
, .

finished flour I n practice however the n umber of si lk n umbers is

.
, ,
'

co n siderab ly limited as we S ha ll see when studyin g the diagrams of

,

mill s .

The heavy c l oths (E xtra ) are ma n ufactured for fi n e midd li n gs a n d flour ,

a n d ha v e twe l ve n umbers from 6 to 1 7 i n c l usi v e l y .

Th c l ot hs of doub l e de n sity (D oub le E xtra ) have three n umbers less

e

th an the Pri ma fr o m No 0 0 00 to No 1 7
, . . .
322 F LOU R M I LL I N G [ C H AR V

Th trip
e l e heavy si l ks (T r ip l e E xtra ) l ike those of the doub l e are ,

u sed o n ly for fin middlin gs n d flour from N 7 to No 1 5

e a ,
o . . .

W he n de n oti ng these four types of c l oth they are marked in the ,

fo llo w in g ma n n er (w e take the flour S i lk No 1 2 for examp le ) .

P rima — 12
—
.

E xtra 12 X
—
.

D oub le E xtra 1 2 XX .

—
Trip l e E xtra 1 2 XXX .

W ith these crosses the correspo n di n g si l ks S hou l d be marked in draw

in g the milli n g diagrams .

Th midd li n gs sieves app lied in purifiers in the S wiss n umeratio n

e , ,

are characterised in the followi n g tab le

TA BL E XXXI

Nu m b er o f D im en sio n s
in Nu m b er Nu m b er o f D im ens io ns
in
Cl o th No o f Th re ad s M e sh es to mm o f e a c h s ide Cl o th No o f Th re ad s Mesh es to mm o f each side
.

q q
. . .

to 1 cm . 1 s u a re cm . o f th e Mesh es . to 1 cm . 1 s u a re c m . i o f th e Mesh e s .

their den sity the middhn gs sieves correspo n d to the Trip le E xtra
In .

F r gradin g the middli n gs c l oths from Tab l e X X X I S hou ld be e m

o ~

p oyed because the sharp product wears out the lighter c l oths more
l , ,

rapidly } B t sometimes the use of the P rima c l oths (Tab le XXX)

u

is preferab e because they are cheaper Fo r this reaso n we gi v e the

l
’

, .

table of parallel n umbers of the P rima a n d th e midd lin gs c l oths

( ab le X X X I I )
T .
32 4 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR v
Cha ra cteris tics f o Before
the I n term edia te P ro du cts
on a nd F lo u r .
-
c

iderin g fl w h ts for the gradi n g n d flour dressi n g it is n ece ssary to

o s ee a ,

sett le the questio n of the terms app lied to the in termediate products in
co nn ectio n with the abo v e n umeratio n of sie ves .

The largest break product is obtain ed from the pre limi n ary break
(H o h
c s ch ro t ) whe n the grai
,
n is broke n in two dow n the crease I f the .

broken gra in is to tail over the scalper S iev es from No 8 to No 2 4 , . .

,

accordin g to the S ize of th grain must be emp loyed Then come the e , .

ordin ary breaks from 6 to 9 in n umber: Fo r high break as well as for

the successive break passages we use wire sie v es with meshes n umbered
per in ch which were S poken of o n p 3 2 2
,
. .

Th e largest product in the break process is ca lled semo li n a a n d sin ce ,

this semo lin a is sharp a n d rough it is n ecessary to use wire sie v es which , ,

are more durabl e .

After each successiv e passage of the break stock through the grin din g
ro lls its S ize dimin ishes a n d recko n in g the n umeratio n of the wire S ie v es
, ,

to a n in ch ieves with No f rom 1 4 to 4 0 should be used for the la st

,
S s .

break The di men sio n s of the break semo li n a may be recko n ed at 1 4

.

mm to 0 7 mm a n d less
. . .

F urther we ha v e the rebreak semo lin a for sizi n g which W re s 1 e v es

, , i

are also required NO 2 0 to 4 0 The dimen sio n s of the rebreak semo lin a
,
S . .

are defin ed at 1 3 5 mm a n d less . .

Th e product fo llowin g in S ize is the midd li n gs of v arious dime n sio n s .

Gen era lly up to six n umbers of midd li n gs are distin guished To obtain .

these middlin gs as o vert ils si lk c loths are used of the fo llowin g n umbers
a , ,

accor di n g to the middlin gs n umeratio n in Tabl e XX XI .

TA BL E XX XI V

NU M B E R S OF MI DD LI N G S AN D TH EI R CORR E S P ON D I N G S I EVE S

Middl ing s Cl o th Prim a S ilk D im en sio n s o f

N0 5 .
No s . Midd l in g s in m m .
 F LOUR MI LLI NG 32 5

I n givi n g the dime n sio n s of the midd l in gs in mm we u n dersta n d this .

,

to be their la rgest meas u remen t or diameter supposin g them to be of a ,

spherical shape .

A fter the midd l i n gs the product n ext i n size is n amed du n st “

.

T his product dressi n ,

g through grit gauze N o s 6 0 to 6 8 is tai l ed over o n .
,

NOS 5 to 7 (P rima n umbers )

.
.

Lastly the gra n ul ar flour is obtain ed as thro u ghs from S ie v es No s 5

,
.

to 7 a n d the fin ished flour from No s 8 to

—
.

D ia gra m s f B l l i n g o W e are aol ready acquai n ted with the ge n er a l

out lin e of the operatio n of the graders ; we h a ve n o w to study it more
in detai l .

In ex a mi n i n g the process of sifti n g a n d gradi n g th e break stock we ,

n otice three methods of sifti n g

1 T h o vert ils are of u n iform size whi l e the thro u gh s are of
() e a ,

va rious S izes .

T h h o u gh s are u n iform in S ize the o v e rta ils differe n t

()
2 e t r , .

T h i l a n d the th ro u gh s are both of various izes

()
3 e o v rt e a s S .

D u n st

No 2. . No 3. . No . 4 . No 5 . . No 6. .

FI G . 2 95 .

gra di n g by the first method a S ieve is chosen with meshes of a

Fo r ,

size which a llows o n ly the largest product to be tailed o v er .

I n the seco n d the dime n sio n s of the meshes all ow o n l y the sma l lest
,

product to dress through the sie v e .

Fo r the third method meshes suiti n g the medium of the i n termediate ,

products are se lected .

Th e app licatio n of the third method is expedie n t whe n it is desired to

divide the work of o n e sie v e amon g sev era l I n most cases the seco n d
.
.

a n d third methods of siftin g a re a dopted .

S upposi n g we are required to grade midd lin gs i n to sizes from No s 2 .

to 6 according to Tab le X X XI V Then we must use sie v es from NOS 2 8 . .

to 6 0 The first system (Fig 2 9 5 ) o verta ils the middlin gs the seco n d
.
.
,

( g 2 9 6 ) dresses them through The first system yie l ds the larges t

F i .
.

middlin gs No 2 as o verta ils a n d the rest as thro u gh s To separa te the

.
, .

middlin gs No 3 n ext in ize a fin er S ieve has to be used—No 3 4 & c I n

.
, S , .
, .

this way the n umbers of the sie v es decrease un til we obtain as o v erta ils
1
I n m o dern E n g l is h m il ls the l o w est flo u r s il k nu m b er is u su ally No 9
. h
w il e in l a rg e
,

m o dern m il ls t hro u g h s of No s . 9 a nd 10 an d e ven 11 a re s o m e t im e s tre a te d a s d u n s t an d

f rth
u er
p u ri fi ed an d red u ced on the sm o o t h r ll o s .
32 6 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR v

the fin est middlin gs No 6 a n d dun st as thro u gh To perform the work

,
.
, ,
s .

in accorda n ce with this diagram the sieves ha v e to be di sposed o n e be l ow ,

the other W e ha v e a lready met with such a co n structio n of sie v es

.
,

when studyin g the co n struction of grain c lea ni n g machin es -

.

I f emp l oyin g the thro u gh s system we dispose the sie v es in a n order ,

startin g with the fin er n d e n din g with the coarser The first product
a .

yielded as thro ghs by No 5 6 correspo n ds to the fin est middli n gs the

u .
,

seco n d larger o n es & c I n the seco n d dia gram the sieves are p laced in
,
.

o n e p la n e or some other form of surface This type of ma chi n e we a l so .

met in the grain c lea n in g sectio n n amely the ree l eparator

-

,
-
S

A compariso n of these two diagrams l eads u to prefer the first in s ,

which there is litt le product tailed o v er in compariso n with the ge n era l

mass a n d co n seque nt ly
, h sie ve w i ll be but s li ght ly worn
ea c I n the
'

mid d l ings

No 6 . . No . 5 . No . 4 . No 3 . . No . 2 . No . 1 .

FI G . 296 .

secon d diagram in which the quan tity of the thro u gh s is sma ll the who le
, ,

mass of product trave ls o ver the sieve therefore the force of frictio n is ,

much greater tha n in the first case n d the c loth wears more rapidly , a .

I t is best to combin e both these diagrams so as to separate the coarser

'

product by the o v rta il system a n d grade the fi n er product by the

e s ,

t hr gh s system
ou .

V E P OS I TI ON OF THE S I E V E S
R E L A TI

Havi n g become acqua in ted with the gradin g diagrams we sha ll n o w

proceed to work out the relative positio n of the siev es .

W e have the fo l lowi n g diagrams of the dispositio n of sieves accor n g

di
to the system of gri n din g
()
1 A diagram of the dispositio n of siev es for siftin g the product of
p lai n (sin gle ) grin din g .

2 ) D iagrams for high grin di n g .

3 ) Diagrams for rebreak .

D iagrams for semi hi h gri n din g

g
-

5 D iagrams for sifti n g the products of reductio

n of midd li n gs a n d
'

dun st .

The secon d a n d the third

diagrams fo rsifti ng the products of high
32 8 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ CH AR V

l ikewise co n sist of a mixed product — fi n e midd lin gs du n st , ,

and flour .

Th e duty of this sieve whic h gives

,
n u n iform product n either asoOv e rt a il s ,

nor as t hro u ghs, is to faci l itate the work of the more te n der flour si lk s ,

the fourth a n d the fifth b y sepa ra tin g the coarse product (middlin gs
,
'

No s 1 to
. The mixed m iddhn g o v ert ile d o n the third sie v e s a

may be sub j ected to a further gradin g if n eces ary the thro u gh s from s

it in the mean time pass to the fourth , ,

sieve which bo lts the flour The over ,

.

tails of the fourth sieve go to the

fifth a n d the thro u ghs are again flo u r , ,

which mixes with the flour from the

NOS 2 04 9 fourth sie v e La stly the sixth sie v e .
,

gives fin midd li n gs No s 4 to 6 as e .

o ve r t il a n d the d u n sts as thro u gh s a s, .

Nos .34 36 -
T hus the sieves 1 a n d 2 gi v e ,

o vert il s S ie v e 3 separates the pro a ,

duct for further gradin g sie v es 4 ,

n d 5 give thro u gh s a n d the l ast

a , ,

N 1 1—
os . 12
the sixth sie v e yields the graded ,

product as tails a n d as thro u gh s .

The S i xth sie v e cou ld be a n d ,

sometimes is p laced after the third ,

.

Nos 1 24 3
. The n the first four sieves wo ul d be
operatin g o n the o vert il system ” “
a ,

a n d the l ast two givi n g thro u h s the

g ,

last sieve yie ldi n g du n st as tai ls .

But the first p lan of disposition is

preferab le for the flour o n the ,

D u n st ,
fourth a n d fifth sieves wi ll be sifted
F IG 2 98 . .
better if they are more hea vil y
l oaded with product .

Fo r a shorter break system for in stan ce with six breaks this di a , , ,

gram may b e a ltered so that by p lacin g i n stead of the seco n d wire siev e
the middlin gs ieve N 2 4 we obtain middlin gs N 1 Then the third
S o .
, o . .

S ie v e wi ll yie l d midd li n gs No s 2 to 3 which may remai n u n separat d.

e , .

The other sieves n be l eft in their p laces

ca .

I n the diagram reviewed there is n o ieve which wou l d yie l d rebreak S

semo i al n . To obtai n it the seco n d sieve No s 2 0 to 2 2 may be su b

,
, .
,

sti tuted by a wire ieve No s 2 4 to 2 6 which gives the rebreak

S , .
, .

Th greatest qua n tity of midd lin gs amou n ti n g to 6 0 per ce n t of the

e
( .
 CH AP . v] FLOU R MI LL I NG 32 9

bu lk of grist ) in a n eightfo ld break is obtain ed at the seco n d third a n d

»

, ,

f ourth breaks which in duces us to exa mi n e the diagram of positio n of the

,

S ieves of for examp l e the third break the most characteristic o n e as it

, , , ,

yiel ds up to 2 4 per cen t of m iddhng s This di agram is shown o n Fig 2 9 9

. . . .

The first wire sieve o vert ils break semo li n a the seco n d a n d third
a
,

S i l k c l oths yie l d coarse a n d medium midd li n gs No s 1 to 4

, Th e fourth
, . .

Fl o u r

and fifth sie v es yield flour whi le the S ixth sie v e bo lts the dun st a n d tai ls
,

o v er the fin e middlin gs No s 5 to 6
, . .

Comme n ci n g with the fifth break the S ize of the midd li n gs dimi n ishes ,

a n d at the fi fth break there is scarce l y a n midd l i n gs No s 1 to 2 F r

y o . .

this reaso n the n umbers of the middlin gs sie v es in crease a n d some of these ,

sie v es may be discarded a n d flo u r or dun st n umbers set in their p laces .

The last break which yie l ds bra n dark midd li n gs du n st a n d flour

, , , , ,

is a lso characteristic F r the eighth break the diagram of sie v es S hown

. o

o n Fi
g 3
. 0 0 shou l d be adopted .
330 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ CH AR V

A ccordi n g to this diagram the sieves l a n d 2 yie l d o v er ta il the s,

siev es 3 4 a n d 5 thro gh s a n d S ieve 6 both o vert il a n d thro u ghs

, ,
u ,
a s .

The tail s from the firs t wire sieve the bra n are Co n v eyed to the bru sh , ,

machin e to remo v e the mea ly particles remai n in g o n them The .

tails from the seco n d si lk Sie v e the soft dark midd li n gs are se n t , ,

for reductio n Th thr u gh s from the third fourth n d fifth sie v es

. e o ,
a ,

l owest grade of flour n d l ast ly ,

the thro u gh a n d the tails from the
a , ,
s

S ixth S ieve dark dun st a n d sma ll dark middlin gs are like wise co n veyed
, ,

for reductio n a n d reduced to lo w grade flour -

.

()
3 D i a
g r m s o
af S i eves f r R e br ea k — Th e n umbero of r e b rea k s em
ployed in the Russia n mills varies betwee n 1 a n d 5 I n the last case .

the rebreak may be regarded as a para llel break n d the diagram of ,

a

dispositio n of the sie ves here S c arcely differs from the diagrams for the
shorter (semi high ) break process B u t gen erally I to 3 rebreak or scratch
-
.

rolls are used Fo rthe rebrea k the diagrams of the sieves in their ge n era l
. s ,

outli n e are the same as those for breakin g with the so le differe n ce that
, ,

the n umbers of the wire a n d the middlin gs sie v es are higher the product ,

bein g fin er .

4 o o —
( ) D ia gra m f S ieves f r Mediu m B rea k S ystem s There is n o esse n tia l
differen ce in the diagrams of dispositio n of the siev es in the l o n g a n d the
medium systems ; they differ o n ly in the n umbers of their sieves a n d
their more rapid i n crease at the en d of the break process for break semo
li n a a n d midd lin gs .

()
5 D i g
a r m s af S ie bes fo r
o R ed u c tio n — A s in the precedi n g cases the
diagrams of dispositio n of the sieves for S iftin g the milled product .

prese n t a combi n atio n of thro u ghs a n d o v rt ils differin g o n ly in the e a

n umbers of their sieves n d the n umber of thro u gh s systems “ ”

a .

This diagram of S ieves shou l d be emp l oyed for the reductio of

() n a

middlin gs (b) for the reductio n of du n st a n d c lea ni n g the offal s (c) for
,
,

suppleme n t ary machi n es .

I n ll three cases the chief aim of the reductio n is to obtai n flour

a .

Therefore the greater n umber of S ie v es in this diagram shou l d be set for

,

flour so as to separate the large product more accurate ly durin g the

,

siftin g process .

(a ) Th e diagram illustrated by Fig 30 1 shows the positio n of the sie v es .

for siftin g the product produced by the reductio n of middl in gs The .

highest grades of flour o btain ed from R ussian grin din g bein g ge n erall y
gra ular (2 a n d 3 grades ) n d n o t di fferin g in ize from midd lin gs No 6
n
, a S .

n d du n st this diagram prese n ts two varieties of

a ie v es the first flour
, S

n umbers yie ld coarse

(gra n ular ) flour the seco n d soft or fi n e The , . .
332 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR V
Ani n spectio n of the reduced product shows us that it co n sist s of par
ticles of equa l S p e cifi c gravity but differe n t in size a n d of bra n n y
'

, ,

particl es which are lighter Fo r this reaso n the who l e of the product
,
.

will settle n the S ieve in layers according to specific gravity Th top

o ,
. e

l ayer wi ll co n sist of bra nn y partic les the layers u n der it equa l in specific ,

gravity wi ll fin d their depth in accorda n ce with their size the sma ll er

, ,

particles l yi n g abo v e the larger o n es He n ce it is c lear that the bo ltin g .

system requires a n extremel y rigorous stirri n g of the product so that ,

the sma ll particles should be able to reach the bo ltin g surface n d escape a

through the mesh es By shakin g the iev e in this man n er we must

. S

break up the n atura l order of the la yers brin gin g the upper l ayers of ,

small particles to the bo ttom a n d the large to the top for tailin g over ,
.

That is why in the diagrams we ha v e re v iewed the n umber of flour sie v es

, ,

which yield flour as thro ghs is larger tha n the n umber of siev es from
u

which o vert ils are derived a .

The stirrin g of the product is e ffected either as in ree l separators of -

p lain actio n (pp 70 7 1 Figs 5 8 5 9 .

, ,
or with the aid of beaters
.
, , ,

which catch up the product n d flin g it upo n the sieve or again by the a , ,

in fluen ce of the power lyi n g in the p la n e of the sie v e (p 69 Fig .

,
.

I n a n other type of sifti n g machi n es the power acti n g upo n the product is
the resulta n t of the pressure of air perpen dicular to the directio n of ,

motion n d a power parallel to that motio n I n these machi n es the pro

,
a .

duct is divided accordi n g to size as well as to specific gravi ty A more .

rough adaptation of this method of stirrin g the product we saw in th e

grain clea n in g machin es with a sp ira tio n n d we shall see it pphed to
‘

a a
-

the reduction product in purifiers with sie v es .

Th e product passes through the S ieve in flue n ced by its proper weight
n d part ly by the ressure of the ayers yi g abo e the partic es to be
a
p l l n v l
S ifte d .

Let us examin e the fa v ourab le con ditio n s n ecessary to a ll ow the

parti cles a passage through the siev e I f the partic le a (Fig 3 0 2 ) is abo v e . .

the ie ve A B while the product is travellin g over its surface in a n ordin ary
S
,

case it is acted upo n by the gravity mg (m the mass of the particl e n d g ,

a

acce eratio n of the gravity ) a n d by the motive power T directed upward

l , ,

at a n a n gle to the horizo n This directio n of the power T s ad va n tageo us

a .
I

in this respect that the product mixes better the l arger partic les at
,
,

the bottom bein g in this ma nn er brought to the top B t the in o n . u c

v ni n
e e
of the motive power directed upwards lies in the fact that R
ce
,

the resulta n t of mg n d T which propel s the partic les through the mesh
a ,

of the sieve is sma ller here tha n in the case when T is directed down
,
CH AP .
v] F LOU R MI LL I NG 333

wards I n the first case the power mg is dimi n ished by T in the seco n d
. I ,

it wou ld have i n creased by T B esides that in the seco n d case the I . ,

resulta n t gm a n d T form a wider a n gl e with the p l an e of the sie v e th a n

in the first which fa v ours to a greater exte n t the passage of the product
,

through the sieve This latter circumsta n ce bei n g of great importa n ce

. ,

we sha ll examin e it more min ute l y .

S upposi n g the resu l ta n t R t o be directed to the surface of the sie v e

at a right a n gl e a n d at a n a n gle (E(Fig I f the directio n R n d the .
a

surface AB of the sie v e form a right a n gl e then through a mesh of the , ,

0 size the partic e

l m wi ll pass its diameter a b bei n g a l most of the size,
of e .

But if R is directed at the a n gl e fl then the mesh will a fford passage to ,

FI G 302
. . FI G 3 0 3 . .

the particl e m with a diameter a b which is expressed through c a n d

l , 1 ,

the thickn ess h of the sieve thus ,

a b =
f si n fl (e —h Ct
lg fl) s i
1
n fl e s
a1 in fl —hGB ’
,

a f df e — cd whi
L l
l e cdz= h Ctg fi
z
,
.

He n ce it is cl ear that the diameter of the partic le is co n siderab l y

sma ller tha n the side of the mesh a n d further depen ds o n the thic kn ess ,

h of the thread too ; the sma ll er the thickn ess of the sieve the l arger ,

the particles sifted wi ll be a n d v ice v ersa

I f we take a m
.
,

iddli n gs sieve No 2 0 which has e = 1 1 mm (a ppro x i .

,
'
°

mately ) n d h = 0 2 mm the n the directio n o f R bein g v ertica l the

,
a
'
.
, ,

d iameter of the middlin gs will be 1 mm a n d it here has n o in fluen ce o n .

,

the size of the midd lin gs Let us suppose no w that R lies at a n a n gle
.

of The n

a l bl z e sm fi —h cos
fl z —
x/ é
2
—0 '
2 z 0 63
'
mm .

I f fl= 3 0
°
,
then
mm a 1 b1 = 1 1% '

I n other terms in the first case the parti cle which a n pass
,
c

through the mesh is a lmost doub l e as sma ll as in the case of a v ertica l R .

 3 34 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ CH AR v
W he n R l ies at a n a n g l e of a b = 0 3 8 mm i e
1a l most three times
1
'
.
, . .

as sma ll .

F rom the above we may co n c l ude that the more fa v ourab l e co n di

tion s for siftin g are obtain ed whe n R is perpen dicular to the s u rface of
,

the siev e I n this case for the products of equa l size the n umber of
.

meshes to a un it of the bo lti n g surface will be greater than whe n R is

in clin ed The n umber N of threads to a u n it of le n gth wi ll be
.

1
h +c
°

Ifwe defin e the n umber of threads to 1 cm for the three qua n tities .

obtain ed of dia meters of the particles we come to the foll owin g ,

1 0 mm
N
.

m m + 1 l mm
1
.
°

1 0 mm .

10 mm .

mm + 0 3 8 mm .
°

This a n swers the midd li n gs n umeratio n N N = 3 0 a nd N 38 , ,

:
.

Though the above co n sideratio n s refer to o n e partic l e movin g o v er

the bolting surface the character of the phen omen on remai n s the same
,

for the mass W must n ote however that whe n a ma ss of product is

. e , ,

sifted there is n such sharp differen ce between the n umbers of the

,
o

sieves because siftin g is a more comp lex process a n d less easi ly a n alysed
, ,

in theory tha n we ha v e out l i n ed it in respect to o n e partic l e .

Amo n g the defects of n h o ri o n ta l tra v l of the product we must

‘

a z e

reckon the more rapid wear of the sieves because in this case the sharp ,

edges of the p art ic les of product act as in cisors upon the fibres of the
siev es Thus experien ce main ly a n d part ly the e lucidation of practica l
.
,

res u lts by theory lead us to the fo llowin g co n ditio n s w hich shoul d be l id

, ,
a

down as bases for us to build our estimate of the workin g surfac es of

the siftin g machin es upo n
()1 Th e motio n of the product to be sifted o v er the bo ltin g surface
should be such as to keep the mass of product co n tin ually mixi n g .

()
2 Th force actin g upon the particles shoul d act in a directio n as
e

n ear as possib l e to the vertica l .

()
3 Th workin g surface of the sieve must be fullyutilised n d even ly
e a

l oa d e d with product .

I f the co n structio n of the machin e a n swers these three requireme n ts

,

favourab le results from the bo lti n g are guara n teed .

3 36 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH A R v

TA BLE X X XV

CAP A C I TY or P RI S MA TI C R EE L -
S E P A R AT O R S

D im e nsio ns o f P rism in mm .
Cap acity in l b s p e r . H our .

Di a m eter .
Leng th .
B reak . Mid dl ing s . F lo u r
.

offer the con struction i llustrated o n Figs 30 4 a n d 3 0 5 On the shaft of . .

the reel separator there are fixed four to six sprockets or more accord
-

in g to the l en gth of the reel separator —to which there are l ifters bo lted
-

down the full len gth of the separator I n to these lifters there are freely .

set the tail s of the scrapers where they may be turn ed by mean s of
,

han d wheel s w ith commo n rods At o n e the screw threaded end the
-

.
,
-

rods protrude through the cross heads of the reel a n d these en ds are -

furn ished with n uts by mean s of which they may be mo v ed backwards

a n d forwards thus regu l ati n g the i n c l in atio n of the scrapers i e in cre a s
, ,
. .

in g or decreasin g the thread of the helica l surface formed by the scrapers .

c m . v] F LOUR MI LL I NG 337

Du rin g the rotary motio n of the ree l together with the beaters the ,

product fa ll s o n the surface of the beaters nd is flu n g back upo n the

,
a

cloth cover in the directio n of the out let The in c lin atio n of the beaters
.

determin es the v e locity with which the product to be bo lted passes

through the separator whil e the regulatio n of their in c lin e imparts a

,
'

greater or a smaller v e locity to the motio n of the product W have met

. e

this prin cip le a lready in B obrovy a n d N bh o lt scourin g machin e

a
’
z s

Cen trif ga l D ressing M chines —The po lygo n a l n d the roun d ree l s

.

u a a

o f the ordi n ary ty e do n o t a n swer the seco n d a n d third con ditio s

p n
 338 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR v
of a favourab le siftin g (p I n fact the force imparti n g motio n to
.
,

the pro duct is the compo n e n t force of gravity directed para llel to the ,

side of the p r m a ti reel or at a ta n gen t to the cylin dric whi le the great
ls c ,

est siftin g area is n third of the who le cover That bein g the case
o e -
.
,

cen trifuga l ree l separators were evo lved the purpose of w hich is to compe l
-

the p roduct to move at a more or less w ide a n g le to the bo ltin g surface ,

a n d uti lise if poss ib le the w ho l e area of the sieve

, ,
T attai n this n d . o e ,

two types of co n struct io n of the ce n trifuga l are made o n of them : e

with a fixed ieve casin g co ntai n in g a rotati n g drum w ith he lica l

s -

beaters which catch the product up below a n d flin g it upo n the sieve
the other has a rotatin g ree l a n d in
lin d bea ters rotati n g w ithi n it c I n the
e .

first co n structio n w have the pri n cip le e

Of a horizo n ta l scourin g machi n e in the ,

seco n d that of a bra n dusti n g brush ,

-

machin e .

Th adaptatio n of the scouri n g ma e

chin e pri n cip le ho w ever is in expedi en t , ,

here because the pressure of the beaters ,

through the product upo n the lower part

of the sieve causes the bo l tin g c loth to
become rapidly worn n d spoil ed n o t to a ,

speak of the u n n ecessary power co n

sumptio n Ge n era l practice has rejected .

this type of ce n trifuga l a n d we sha ll ,

Fm 3 05 , ,
therefore pass it by .

A ce n trifuga l w ith a sieve rotatin g

in the same d irectio n as the beaters obviates this defect the ,

beaters bein g set at such a distan ce from the bo ltin g c loth that
they ca n not scoop the product up from be lo w n d co n seque n tly do ,
a

n t tear the sieve

o Th operatio n is performed in such a ma n n er
. e

that the rotatin g sieve lifts the pro d uct n d drops it from a certain a

height on to the beaters which throw th mas to be bo lted to the

, e s

workin g surface .

Before proceedin g to describe the co n struction s of cen trifugals

Of the seco n d type severa l theoretica
, l co n sideratio n s must be adduced .

Th first n d the thir d co n ditio n s n

e a
ecessary for the siftin g to be satis
factory (the mi in g Of the product n d utilisatio n of the who le workin g
x a

s rface of the sieve ) are evi den tly attain ed in the ce n trifuga l No w
u
, , .

we must efi e the in c lin e of the workin g surface Of the beater to

d n
3 40 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR v
of the paddles V = N cos ~
But this is possib le o n ly w he n the beaters
-

1
a .

and the cy i
ln der re v o l ve in the same d irectio n .

M arki n g the a g
n l e betwee n V a n d N 8 we fi n d that V l cos 60 1 , o .

But accordi n g to the co n ditio n V N cos— Therefore comparin g N .

1
a .
, 1

we obtai n
V0 V
cos 6
,
cos a
’

or substitutin g the va l ues of V0 and V

Za 2m m
cos 6 cos
'

60 ,
60 a

A fter reducin g
Rm
cos [3
— —
I

Si n ce E DF 90 fl ,
and L OCD :
90 a from the tria n g le
obtai n

cos 5 L from to we fin d
S u b st tu t n g the term ()
2
l
cos
_

l
a R

m 7
2

n R 2

Thiscorrelation shows that wi th a n y in clin atio n of the beaters the

directio n of the resultan t R (Fig 30 7 ) may be made n orma l to the surface
of the cylin der if suitab le n umbers of revo l utio n s n d radii of the
,
a

reel n d beaters be chosen I n inferrin g this correlativity of the n umber

a .

of revo lution s a n d the radii the gravity of the product was n o t take n
in to con sideratio n a n d the velocity of the partic le was supposed to be
,

co n stan t P ractica l experie n ce corrects this for mula by a lterl n g the

.

degree of ratio of the radii from 2 % to 3 Fin a lly therefore we obtain .

, ,

n 3
L
-

.
_

n R

Thetheoretical co n sideratio n s of P rofessor Zworyki n give n here fin d

a brilli an t corroboratio n in the actual co n structio n of cen trifuga l s the ,

n umber of revo l utio n s n d the diameters of which we pro v ed accord

a

in g to his formula havi n g obtai n ed a great accuracy of corre lativity

,

in ferred I n this w y that which is c lear from simp le theoretic i n fer

. a ,

en practice has been seekin g man y years un ti l it reached the correct

ces , ,

solution of the questio n after gropin g in the dark havin g passed a len gthy ,

n umber of rejected u n successful co n structio n s a n d ex e n ded much mo n e

p y
in th at w y a .
 FLOU R MI LL I NG
Co n stru c tio n o f Cen tri u ga ls f .
—Before decidi g upo n the moder n n

type of a reel the works offered ma n y fair ly differe n t co n struction s

,

of these machin es W sha ll n o t e n umerate these types but o n e

. e ,

of them a ree l from the works of D ost in V ien n a Which at a

, ,

certain period was v ery popular dema n ds our atte n tio n Fig 3 0 8 ,
. .

i ll ustrates a cross sectio n of the separator a n d shows its ree l to be ,

of a star sectio n On bein g fed in to the reel the product is lifted

.

o n the l atforms b drops from a certai n height n d is caught up by

p , ,
a

the beaters 0 fixed at n a n g le to the ge n eratin g circ le with two or

,
a

three (accordin g to the len gth of the reel ) sprockets A Th i n c lin e of '

. e

the bo ltin g side a is so chos en as to h av e the product rejected by a bl ow

from the paddles fa ll o n at a right a

a n g le Th sifted product is co n v eyed

. e

by a worm B to the outside .

W e have a lready see n that the product

ca n fa ll at right a n g les o n the sieves in

depen den t ly Oi their form I f t his sepa .

rator did work satisfactori ly e vide n t ly ,

it was o n ly owin g to the happy cho ice of

the ve locities of rotatio n of the sieve a n d
the beaters B u t speakin g gen era lly
.
, ,

this co n structio n is less successful tha n

that of the ordin ary roun d reels .

I n the first p lace the p latforms b l eave ,

tota lly u n sifted the product thrown by F 30 8 IG

the beaters sin ce their motio n is para lle l
. .

to the p la n es of these p latfo r ms lyin g at a r ight a n g le to a Further the .

,

co n structio n of the ree l is rather comp lex which makes cl othin g it ,

with a sieve a di ffi cult task Last ly the wear of the workin g surface .
,

was Obser ved to be u n even because a accepted a l most the who le of ,

the work while b p layed the part of boxes supp lyin g th e p a ddl with
, es
'

product .

Fig 3 0 9 represe n ts the moder n n orma l type of a ce n trifuga l dressi n g

.

machi n e (Thos Robin so n ) The product flows to the feeder A a n d is

. .

con v eyed by the worm to the chamber B of the ce n trifugal The .

drum 0 co n tain in g beaters is rotated from the belt pulley 1 On the -

.

shaft of this drum at the opposite en d there is set the belt pu lley 2 from
, ,
-

which the worm D is brought in to operatio n On the shaft of the worm .

there are two be lt p u lleys 4 a n d 6 ; by mean s of the pulleys 4 a n d 5 the

-

ree s rotated a n d the piral brush E for c lea n in g the c l oth s driven by
1 l , S 1
3 42 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH A Rv
the pulleys 6 n d 7 W ith the assista n ce of the ribs F which co n stitute
a .

the frame of the reel the product is lifted to a certai n height a n d the n ,

dropped upo n the beaters Th e beaters are disposed in the gen eratin g
.

circle but their propellers are be n t to a helica l lin e as shown in Fig 3 1 0

, , . .

FI G
. 3 09 .

bearin gs of the brushes may be tra n sposed so that the brush is

Th e ,

approached to or removed from the sieve accordi n g to its wear or the

n ecessity of a more rigorous c lea n i n g of the bo l tin g c l oth .

Ce ntrifugal s of this type are bui lt by a l most ll E uropea n works a .

V l
ery rare y the beaters ben t to a helica l lin e are discarded n d so lid a

beaters arra ged at n a n gle to the gen eratin g circ le of the cylin der
n a
.

Fig 3 1 1 i llustrates a perspective view of Thos

R obi n so n s ree l separator
. ’
-
.

furn ished with such beaters

—
.

C p a city f Cen tri f

a o lu S i n ce a l most the who l e of the worki n g
g a s .
3 44 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR v
of revo lutio n s of the cy lin der ,
and of the drum co n tain in g the
beaters .

TABL E XX XV I

CAP A CI T Y OF CE N TR I F U G AL S

D im e ns io n s o f C en Cap aci ty I n l b s p er H our

t rifu g a ] in m m
. .

Di B ea ter B reak R eb rea k Middl ings Flo u r

a m e te r . Le ngt h . Cyl ind er .

Dr m
u .
. . . .

250 9 00 1 080 82 8 9 00 5 4 0 72 0 360 43 2 —

— —
- - -

1 440 1 1 5 2—1 368 79 2 900 5 40— 612

—
25 0 1 2 60
2 30 1 6 20 — 1 800 1 4 40 —1 620 9 72 —
1 0 80 7 2 0 82 8 l 8—
OS
'

1 260—
°

1 80 0 —1 9 80 1 4 40 9 00 —1 00 8 —
—
2 00 1 9 80 2 3 40 l O
‘

— 1 6 20 — —
-

1 90 2 5 20 3 060 2 1 6 0 2 5 20 1 800 1 0 80 1 2 6 0
1 80 3 2 40 — 3 6 00 2 8 80 —3 2 40 1 9 80 2 1 6 0
-
1 3 3 2—15 12

co n cern s the power co n sumptio n the quan ti ty the ce n trifuga l

As ,

separators absorb ru n ni ng empty amou n ts to 80 per cen t co n sequen tly .

,

their useful work is v ery in sign ifica n t This circumsta n ce is the cause .

of their losin g groun d to more econ omical machin es which will n o w ,

occupy our attentio n .

2 . P la nsifters

he studyin g the reel separators we saw that this type of s iftin g

W n -

machin e does n o t a llow the use Of the who le workin g surface of the
sieves (p lain reel separators ) or p laces in equa l co n ditio n s of w ork
-

( trifuga l s ) I n additio n the p lain as we ll as the ce n trifuga l

ce n .
,

separators co n sume a large qua n tity of power These defects .

in duced the en gin eers to seek a more perfect type of machin e which was ,

then offered by the America n s together with the idea of a n automatic ,

mill .

Modern tech n ics possess two types of p la n sifters di fferi n g in the ,

character of motio n of their workin g surfaces

M
( ) ach in es w ith rec tilin ear reciprocatin g motio n of the workin g
1

organ s .

()
2 M achi n es with gyratin g progressiv e motio n of the sie ves .

i
( .
) Ma chin es with Recipro ca tin g Mo tio n
The
imp est kin d of such a machin e is given o n p 3 1 Fig 2 8 G
S l . .
, ,

Th d ff r n t machi n es of the
e I e e E clipse p or the zigzag separators
( 6 4 ) .

are more perfect types of it An d lastly S oder s pl n ift r may .

, ,
’
a s e s
CHAP .
v] FLOU R MI LL I NG 34 5

be poin ted O t as o n of the best modern reciprocatin g bo ltin g

u e

machin es for reductio n stock This S ifter i a n Ob l o n g timber

.
s a

box (Fig 3 1 2 ) supported o n steel sprin g sta n ds The box is brought

.
.

in to motio n by n eccentric driv e with a cou n terweight for ba la n cin g

a

the in ertia of the mass I n side the box (Fig 3 1 3 ) there are set fiv e
.
.

bo ltin g frames .

This machin e c a n v ery successfu lly do the w ork of a ree l in the

sma ll farm mill s in case eco n omy of space is a great co n sideratio n
,
.

Procee di n g n o w to give n estimate of the reciprocati n g machi n es we

a ,

must n ote that their adva n tages in comparison to the reel separators -

co n sist o n ly in their compact n ess On the other ha n d they ha v e materia l

.
,

JV J V ‘ 5 7 -
1 M . m m

FI G . 3 13 .

C o pp er cl o th , NO 26 . . S il k g au z e, No s 5 . 7 .

K = I nl et o f s to c k .

defects the cause of which lies chiefly in the character of motio n of the
,

machin e These defects are as fo llows

.

( ) ecessity of co n siderin g the i n ertia of the mass of the machi n e ;

l N
()
2 V ariab l e v e locities of motio n causin g a n un eve n n ess in the
,

bo ltin g of the product .

Owin g to these defects the app licatio n of reciprocatin g machin es is

,

very limited I t is o nl y their comparati v e cheap n ess a n d compact n ess

.

which makes their use in sma ll short system mills possib le .

Ma chin es
g Mo tio n
with G ra to ry P ro gressive

The idea of the co n structi v e pri n cip l e of machin es of that type is

exp lain ed to us by G Luther s grain c lea n in g machin e Triumph
.
’
-
“
,
”

described o n pp 8 1 82 .
, .

The mam parts with a gyratory progressi v e motio n are the box
,

sta ds o n which the box is estab lished a n d a shaft with n ecce n trica lly
n ,
, a

set drivi g fi n ger The diagram of that S ifter is giv en o n p 6 8 Fig 5 6

n .
.
, . .
343 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR v
W hen the shaft A is in rotation each poin t of the box 8 performs a gyra
,

tory progressive motio n .

Before passin g o n to the co n structiv e descriptio n s of machin es of that

kin d we must decide upo n the fun da men ta l requiremen ts which S houl d
,

FI G 3 1 4
. . FI G 3 15

be a n swered by a ll machi n es of the type in ha n d a n d pro v e this or that

co n struction ratio nal These requireme n ts are
.

()l C ou n terba la n cin g the cen trifuga l force of t he gyratory motio n

of the workin g orga n the detai ls of the tra n smissio n of motio n
,

bei n g of the least poss ible size .

()
2 Uti l isatio n of the larg est area of the bo ltin g surface .

( ) S imp licity of shape a n d setti n g of the bo lti n g trays

3 .

( ) Co n sta n t c lea n in g of the workin g surfaces to a v oid b li n di n g

4 .

To be ab l e to make our estimate of the ifters from the poi n t of v iew S

of the abo ve requireme n ts it is n ecessary to become acquain ted with the

,

mai n types of co n structio n .

K H ggen ma cher S ifter —

. a
’
s The p la n sifter which brought about a re
.

vo utio n in bo ltin g methods w a i n ve n ted by a citize n of S witzerla n d

l s ,

FI G. 3 16 .

K Ha ggen ma ch er
.
,at the en d of the eighties of the last cen tury Th e .

orig n a l co n structio n of this S ifter is shown in Fig 3 1 4 The box R

i . .
,

co n tain in g the bo ltin g trays is suspen ded o n four rods g a n d is brought

,
,

i to motio n from the drivin g pulley d by a quarter twist belt drive to the
n -

receivin g pulley d This pulley a n d the fly wheel L with a coun terweight

.

at K have a common shaft furn ished with a co llar

,
, with which a,

it rests o n the beari n g in the cross head T The hub of the fly wheel -

.
-
34 8 F LO U R MI LL I NG [ C H AR v

the diagrams of the dispositio n of trays for break reductio and n

stocks .

Th e break product ru n s to the fi r st n d to the seco n d sieves (F igs 3 1 9 a .

a nd 3 20 ) simu ta
l n eous y
l and tra v e l s to the right gi v i n g break semo l i n a ,

as o verta il n d the remai n in g product as thr u gh The product of re

s, a o s .

breaks may be directed to the secon d sieve if it is cal culated for rebreak ,

semo lin a I f the break product go o n ly to the first frame it w ill tail over
.
,

the break semol in a of the n ext order discharged through I) n d bo lt the ,

a

rebreak semolin a a n d the rest of the products On the seco n d sie v e the .

products travel in the same directio n n d therefore yield rebreak semo ,

a

il n a as tails delivered out of the ifter through c while the remain in g S ,

middli n gs n d fl o ur pass through Th n ext sie v e No 3 is desig n ed

a . e ,
.
,

to vert il the coarse middlin gs begi n n ing with NO 1 the thro u gh s

o a ,
.
,

at the same time passin g to the fourth li n e n (or sheet iro n ) -

tray where the s lats are so ,

disposed as to prope l the product

in the opposite directio n On
‘

reachin g the open in gs e the pro

duct fall s from the sheet iro n tray -

on to the fifth sie v e wh ich

3 19 —
,

F IG . D i g m of L git di l S ti
a ra through the ope n i n gs 3 gives the
on u na ec on
1 .

fS
fin e m ddh n gs a n d du n st as ta l s
o i eves .

i i

to the se ve n th sieve a n d throws the flour upo n the cl o th of the sixth

,

tray as thro gh which is delivered through f Th e bo ltin g tray 7 is

.

u s, .
‘

divided in to three sectio n s with differen t cl oths which yiel d dun st a n d ,

fin e middli n gs as thro gh s a n d tail over fin e midd lin gs which are l arger

u ,

than those of the thro gh u s .

I n this w a y the three first sieves operate by the o vert il s system a

a n d the two last o n es by the system of thro gh s Th e th ro u gh from

”
u .
s

the boltin g frame 7 fa ll o n the bottom 8 in which there are ho les h h a n d h -

, 1 z

for lettin g th du n st n d the fin e middlin gs out The f rames 1 2 3 5

e a . , , , _ ,

a n d 7 are ca ll ed the worki n g trays whil e those of l i n e n or sheet iro n 4 6 , ,

,

a n d 8 are ca lled co ll ectin g trays This diagram co n tai n s o n l y o n flour

. e

which will be spoken of later .

The diagram of the trays for the stock reduced o n smooth ro ll s is shown
o n F gs 3 2 1 an d 32 2
i . S in ce those products presen t a mixture of fin e
.

m d dhn g
l n d du n st with a co n siderab ly prepo n derati n g quan tity of
s a
CH AP . V ] ,
F LOU R MI LLI NG 34 9

flo ur the sift ing away of the latter Offers greater di fficulties tha n in the
,

first case Fo r this reaso n each worki n g tray is succeeded by a co llecting

.

o ne
, a n d the process of siftin g is do n e o n the fo ll owi n g lin es The .

boltin g workin g frame 1 w ith c loth No 6 0 xx receives the reduced .

FI G 3 2 0
. .
-
P la n s of S ieves and Lin en Fra m es

stock a nd yi elds fin e middlin gs as tails which is e j ected from the ifter at 0

, S

through a ll the trays The dun st n d flour go to the c loth of the co llect
. a

in g tray 2 do wn which they trave l in the opposite d irectio n n d are

, a

assed to the worki tra with a du n s t sie ve No 5 xx tai li n o er

0

p n
g y 3
g v th e .
,
3 50 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CH A R v
coarser dun s t w hich is directed to its exit through cl The thro u ghs
,
.

from the third tray tra v el o v er the fourt h cl oth through the ope n in gs
l
c 1to the worki n g tray 5 c l othed with sieve No 1 2 w hich yie l ds fi ni shed .
,

FI G. 32 1 .
—D i g
a ra m o f Lo ngitu dina l S ec tio n o f S ie ves .

flour as thro u gh s to be de livered through the out let e The tails from
,
.

the fifth tray go to the last workin g surface 7 furn ished with flour ,

Sie ves of differen t n umbers (No s 1 2 a n d which sift flour through o n

.

to the co llecti n g bottom n d tail over the fin est dun st Co n sequ en tly
,
a .
,

FI G 32 2
—k —
. .

B S ha ers
. D B o t to m . 1 , 3, 5 , 7 are S ieves . 2 , 4 db 6 are cl o t hs .

the first two sieves here 1 a n d 3 are operatin g o n the o v rta il

, , e s

system separat n g away the fin middlin gs n d dun s t or dun st o n ly (this

, i e a

depen ds o n what the product gro u n d o n the s moo th ro ll s is whether it ,

352 LOU F R MI LL I NG [ CH A R v

the last sieve (Fig havin g r n Over the ope n wire c loth through
.
u ,

which the product passes to the out let spout th e tappers reach the fir st ,

i n c lin ed pla n e al o n g whic h they asce n d to the first horizo n ta l p la n e n

,
, I

by shocks e fec ed by the rotatio of the sieve From the first

‘

flu n d
e ce f t ,
n .

a
l n n di g they asce n d to the seco n d over n i n c l i n ed p l a n e havi n g a retro a

grade motio n the n to the third n d so o n to the first bo lti n g tray D uri n g
, ,
a . ,

a ll the time of the work each sifti n g tray shoul d be covered with tappers
w hich form n u n i n terrupted
a chai n coveri n g the sieves n d stretchi ng a

through the e levator Ge n era lly the tappers from th last sieve are
.
e

carried to the first B t sometimes in the vertica l ca n a l there are made

. u

FI G 3 2 6 . .

open in gs E to the n earest trays owin g to which part of the tappers fa ll

,

o n the trays w ith the ope n in gs E n d part asce n d to the first tray , a .

Fig 3 2 4 i ll ustrates the p la n 32 5 a sectio n through CD

'

. n d Fig ,
a .
, ,

which make the co n structio n c lear On Fig 3 2 6 may be seen the . .

gen era l disposition of such a c l ea n i n g device .

The defects of c l ea n in g the sieves by mea n s of tappers co n sist in the

fact that the sieves have to be o v erl oaded with superfluous weight which ,

are a cause of their rapid wear The other shakers such as spiral sprin gs ,
.
,

chain s & have the same defects

,
c .
, .

To obviate these defects the hakers are sometimes disp l a ced by S

brush c lea n ers which are diagrammatica lly S hown o n the s ame Fig 3 2 6
, .

(c l ea n in
g of the se co n d s ieve
) Th woode n ro d A has soft ha ir br u shes
. e
 C H AP . v] F LOU R MI LL I NG 35 3

at the top n d the bottom a n d the workin g upper part of the brush touches
a ,

the lower surface of the sie v e while the other en d rests o n a sheet iro n
.

,
-

tray At the en d of the rod free of the brushes there is a timber

.
, ,

fin ger a wh ich e n ters in to the guidi n g ca n a l B C n d pre v en ts it from

,
a

mo v in g to the right or to the l eft W he n the S ie v e is in motio n the brush .

tra v el s a l o n g o n side of the chan n el s turn s back o n reachin g their

e ,

corn ers a n d ru n s a lon g the other S ide

,
.

Th e brushes c l ea n the ie v es better if the hair is sufficie n tl y soft

S , ,

in fluen ce their wear very little n d therefore brush c lean in g has been ,
a

adopted by a l most a ll makers This .

c lean in g howe v er has its o w n though

, , ,

in sign ifica n t defects I n the first p lac e

,
.
,

the guidin g cha n n el a nn u l s a certain

part of the working surface of the
sieve a n d seco n dl y the corn ers of the
,

bol tin g trays remain un touched by

the brush a n d are con sequen t ly n o t
c lean ed .

Th e product tra v e ls in the cha n n e l s

of the trays of the S ifters with the
aid of s lats as we ha v e see n ; the
,

speed of motio n depen ds o n the n umber

of re v o lutio n s a n d the degree of eccen
tricity defin in g the radius of rota
tio n of each poin t in the S ifter Th e .

degree of ecce n trici ty de fin es the

width of the mai n cha n n els o n the trays F 32 7
.

IG
. .

Fo r a n exp l a n atio n of this phe n o

men o n we shall tur n to Fig 3 2 7 The radius of rotation of each particle. .

of product o n the sie v e is equa l to the degree of eccen tricity The larger .

this radius the greater is the wa v e of the cur ve A B Of the resulta n t

, ,
“

motio n of the product u n der the in fluen ce of cen tr ifuga l force of the ,

impact from the sl at n d of gravity I f the cha nn el taken is too

,
a . .

broad we sha ll ha v e immobile dead masses Q To move these masses

, .

al so the sl ats coul d be made l o n ger ; but the n we shoul d ob tain

,

dead masses Q betwee n the sl ats The questio n co n cern in g the

1 .

n orma l width of the cha nn el s a n d the l e n gth of the sl a tS is so l ved by

gen eral practice sin ce it ca n n ot be so lved theoretically the qua n tity

, ,

of the force of frictio n bein g in defin ite Gen era l practice gives for .
,

in sta n c e the fo llowin g correlatio n of the n umber of re v o l utio n s

, ,

z
354 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR v
the width of the chann el ,
an d the radius of rotatio n ( ab e
T l X XXV I I ,

E uropea n works )
TA BLE XXXV I I

Nu m b er o f Revo l u R adi u s o f R o tatio n W idth o f C h a nn el

in m m in m m
t io n s p er Minu te
.
.
.

—
1 70 2 00

We must say however that these a v erage v al u es of the elemen ts of

, ,

the ifter a n d its motio n do n o t give uniform work as regards quan tity
S

as well as quality for each bo lti n g tray S in ce each tray operates with .

products of various sizes the coeffi cien ts of frictio n of the product again st
,

the sieve for each tray are likewise differe n t .

I n practice the v a l ues giv e n in the tab l e are ge n era ll y decided upo n
in accorda n ce with resu lts of the work of the d n st a n d the flour sie v es u ,

where a small n umber of revo lution s causes a chokin g up of the sifter i e , . .

the chann els become b locked with product which does n o t move forward ,

an d so chokes the machi n e A high speed is a l so i n jurious to the work

. .
,

because the o v erta ils will co n tain a large amou n t of floury particl es if the
product travels rapidly However a n orma l speed of motio n of the fin
.
,
e

an d mea l y product correspo n ds to too great a v e l ocity for the mixt u re of

coarse (break rebreak middlin gs No s 1 to

, , n d fin products previous to . a e

their separation owin g to which the o vertails will co n sist of fin e middlin gs

, ,

dun st an d flour That bein g the case Professor Zworykin very j ustly
, .
,

co n siders that the ieves gradin g fin middlin gs dun st n d flour should

S e , ,
a

be i n cli n ed up w ards in the directio n this product trave l s to reduce the ,

velocity of its motio n The n it would be possib le to choose a n umber of

.

revo l utio n s for the S ifter favourab le to a n e fficie n t siftin g both for coarse
a n d fin e products I t is to be regretted that this simp l e idea has n o t
.

been utilised by a n y of the works altho u gh its rea lisatio n woul d ha v e ,

.

imported practically n o con structive compli catio n s i n to the S ifter .

B u nge s Rou n d B lter H gg n m ch er S ifter was succeeded by a

’ ’
o .
-
a e a s
356 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR v
er rin gs while America n e n gi n eers o ffered spira ll y disposed combs
in n , ,

as shown in Fig 3 30 Here we have a workin g tray o v er which the pro

'

. .

d uct trave l s from the axis to the periphery b y a spira l route .

Before procee din g to give a comparativ e estimate of the merits a n d

demerits of the square n d roun d bo lters we must become acqua in ted
a ,

with yet a n other type of ifters S .

K n egen s S ift r —Th two box S ifter built by the Amme Giesecke
’
o e e -

,
-

an d K o n g en works is a modified co n structio n of the two box S ifter

e ,
-

first i n ve n te d by E n gi n eer Ko n gen who set himse lf the prob l em of givi ng

e ,

FI G 3 29
. .
FI G
. 330
.

a ba a ced motio n to the machin e

l n
. The circumstan ces fa v ourab le in

of Ko n e g en ifters ’
s S .

Accordi n g to the w in which the boxes or b l ocks of the ifters are

a
y S
erected two types are distin guished : o n suspen ded by mea n s of four
,
e
n d
ca e ro s ( g F i nd o n in w hich the boxe s are supporte d o n fo u r
. a e

stan ds (Fig Th ma n n er in which the boxes are hu g is thei

.
e
n r
so le differen ce .

Th e S ifter boxes are built of separate trays

Th bottom or co llectin g . e

tray of the first S ifter is screwed o n to two rods fi xed to the main frame
a n d the other trays n
,

umbered in co rresp o n din ,

ca n »
. v] F LOU R MI LLI NG 35 7

W he n the trays of each box are fitted up they are coup led together by ,

four bolts fixed o n j oin ts to brackets bo lted to the main frame which ,

FI G . 33 1 .

co n sists of two p ara lle l H iro n beams f j oin ed by a third cross beam
-

,
-
.

Th e suspe n ded types have riv etin g sets for c a n e rods o n their l o n gi

FI G . 3 32 . FI G . 3 33 .

beams while those supported have brackets fixed for the stan ds
t u din a l ,
.

The sta n ds ha v e the fo ll owi n g arra n geme n t (Fig 3 3 3 ) Th foun dation

. e

is a cast iro n box co n tai n in g a p late of the same meta l with a leather
-
 35 8 FLO UR MI LL I NG CH AR v

l in in g soaked in o il A cast iro n shoe for the steel sta n d is se t in the.

-

p lat e The shoe a n d the p late are covered with a casin g I n to the
. .

sta nd there is screwed a bearin g i for the ba ll v ertica l j ourn a l Z which is ,

screwed in to the bracket I) attached to the lo ngitudin al H iro n beam A ,

-
.

l ubricator K is screwed o n the beari n g i a n d a cap M o n the vertica l ,

j ourn al Z to give the sta n d a more elega n t appeara n ce .

The footstep S for the shaft tra n smitti n g the motio n is set in a dro p
han ger frame n d its bearin g in the frame a Th shaft W is join ed to
,
a l . e

the fly wheel which has a cou n terba la n ce by mea n s of the hub h of the
-

, ,

fly whee l screwed o n the threaded part of the shaft Fo rl ubricatio n there

, .
‘

is the cup out of which the o il run s in to the bearin g (Fig

0 , The .

cup is sup plied with o il from the outside

0 .

On Fig 3 3 5 is S hown the ba la n ce w hee l from th e top

. Between the -

FI G . 334 .
FI G . 335 .

adjustab le weights w servi n g for additio n a l regulatio n there is a box ,

,

fi e with lea d Th fin ger k of th bal a n ce wheel e n ters in to the

ll d . e e -

a justab le beari n g e n c losed in the cast iro n frame which is fixed between
d -

l o n gitudi n a l H iro n beams W ith the aid of bo lts b the hub of the
-

. .

beari g may be adjuste d to set it correctly whe n erectin g to a lter the

n

d egree of ecce n tricity A perspective view of the K o n ifter is

g n .
e e S

sho wn in Fig 3 3 6 . .

A Tw b x S ift r by o S e k Bro o W rks —Th l if e show c

-

p n t e r n s . o e a s
in Figs 3 3 7 n d 3 3 8 is a mode l of a two box ba a ced ifter of the
a
.

l n S
-

n
ewest type Th left a n d right ha n d side boxes are j oin ed by a
. e -

timber frame of j oists in a square section Th frame coup led together . e

between the boxes by two a n gle chann el iro n s forms the base of the -

S i
fter . O n the o n side of this frame o n the stan ds an d supports rest
e
e ,

both the boxes of the sifter which are a series of S ie v e trays arran ged in ,

nd
stories ,
coup e together by ro d s h fasten ed with o n e en d to the
l d a
,
3 60 FLOU R MI LLI NG
AS me n t io n e d a b,
o v e the who l e mass of the ‘

S fter is supported
i

on
four stan ds The stan d is a n iro n rod e (Fig
.
.
which carries a

ba ll bearin g at its upper n d n d a bu ffer vertical journal g restin g o n a

e ,
a

flat b earIn g g at the other n d Betwee n the buffer n d the beari n g a

1 e . a
a p . v] FLO U R MILLI NG 36 1

piece of leather is p laced to l esse n shock The ball vertical j ourn a l s.

fixed to the frame of the S ifter rest o n the footsteps f a n d in this ma n n er

.

the S ifter is supported o n rods e The rods e bein g a l ways set aslan t
.

in resp ect to the v er tica l axis of the sifter it is e v ide n t that the horizo n ta l
,

compo n e n t of the weight of the S ifter is commu n icated by pressure o n

the shaft b .

S in ce the ro ds co n stitute o n e of the most esse n tia l detai l s of a Z

sifter ,

FI G
. 3 39 . FI G 34 0 . .

two other types of rods e v o lved by S eck shou ld be described n d more ,

a

min utely .

Fig f 3 3 9 i ll ustra tes a rod b u ilt of two parts co n n ected by a two

twist n u t which a ffords the possibility of ad j ustin g the len gth of the
rod .

Th stem a is co n n ected by j o in t s b a n d b with boxes 0 a n d c

'
1 l
e ,

which ro ll o v er the bearin g surfaces t n d el On of th surfaces (the

a a
l
. e e

top o n e ) is fixed to the frame of the bo ltin g machin e the other lies o n ,

the groun d I n the drawi n g we may see that the journ al s of the j oin ts
.

are turn ed at n a n gle of 9 0 in respect to each other

a
0
.
36 2 FLO U R MI LLING [ CH AR V

ach o n e of the boxes o n the side n ext to the support is cyli ndrical in
E
shape a nd the axis co in cides or n early coin cides with the axi s of the
, , ,

journ al of the join t lyin g opposite The box freely swi n gs to either side
.

as far as is n ecessary for the circu lar motion of the sie v e .

T preve n t the sieve when operati n g from run n i n g out of the limits of
o
O

FI G . 34 1 .

the mot io n required the bearin g s u rfaces of the boxes towards their
,

rims are bou n d by p la n es tan gen t to the cyli n dric surfaces of the boxes .

Fig 3 4 0 i llustrates the secon d type of support

.
Here differe n t from
.
,

th precedin g case the boxes with the mutua lly perpe n dicu lar p la n es of
e ,

S wi n gin g are tra n sferred to o n

e en d of the prop in such a way that the

top n swi n gs over the back of the o n belo w Thus both the boxes
o e e .
,
run s at the rate of 1 9 0 to 2 0 0 rev o lution s per min ute .

The n umber of sieves is twe l ve the trave l of the product s show n 1

c learly en o ugh Th clea n in g of the sieves is performed by mea n s of

. e

brushes which act in the man n er described o n p 3 5 2 F g 3 2 6

,
.
,
l . .

perspective v iew of the S eck B ros sift rEis show n o n F g 3 4 1

. e i . .

FI G . 34 4 .

After K o n eg en ifters were put o n the market two box S ifters were
’
s S -

a l so con structed by other makers .

The moun tin g of two box ifters is the same at a l most ll E uropea n
-
S a

works The moun tin g by G D a verio works differs to a mo re or less

.
.
’
s

exten t the perimeter of the supports of their rods lyin g between

,

the boxes A perspectiv e view of G Da v rio

.
ifter is give n in . e
’
s S

Fig 3 4 2
. Fig 3 4 3 represen ts B obrovy an d Nab h l t s o n e box ifter with
. .
o z
’
-
S

a frictio n drive an d four exterior conveyers for the shakers Fig . .

3 4 4 represe nts G Luther s two box ifter o n can e supports

’
.
-
S .
CH AP . v] F LOU R MI LLI NG

3 . D yna m ics o f P la n s ifters

B efore passin g to a further descriptio n of the co n structio n of S ifters ,

it is n ecessary to men tion se v era l co n sideratio n s con cern in g fa v ourab l e

co n di tion s of motion for S ifters of di fl eren t types .

W e are gi v e n a si n g l e box S ifter (Fig the motio n of which

-
.

ge n erates a ce n trifuga l force of every poin t of it ro u n d its axis of rotation .

Th e ce n trifuga l forces of each poi n t of the S ifter bein g para lle l at a n y

particular momen t of the motio n they may b e su m m ed up after the la w
'

Of para l le l forces a n d gi v e us the res u l ta n t F app l ied in the ce n tre of

,

gra vity 0 of the S ifter Th force F giv es the mome n t F a in respect to

. e

the p lan e which is perpen dicular to the axis Of the bearin g c To pre
, 2 .

v en t a n y fracture o f the shaft in the bearin g 0 or 2

excessiv e thicke n in g of it it is n ecessary to set a ,

coun terweight o n the shaft which would giv e a n ,

equa l a n d direct ly opposite mo me n t in respect

to the same p lan e of the bearin g 0 Th e co un ter 2 .

weight is gen era ll y made in the shape of a balan ce

wheel with station ary a n d adjustab le weights as we ,

ha v e seen in the co n structio n of Ko n egen s S ifter or F 34 5

’

IG
that of S eck
. .

Thus if the weight in the bal a n ce whee l gi v es a ce n trifuga l force N

,
-

when rotatin g the n the co n ditio n from which this fo rce is de fi n ed will be
,

F a ==Nb , when ce we defin e

'

But si ce n the ce trifuga force N of the bala n ce wheel m ust be

a > h ,
n l -

greater than the ce n trifuga l force F of the S if ter .

Ha v i n g fitted the cou n terweight we obtai n two forces F a n d N

“

, , ,

which ha v e a te n den cy to turn the axis of rotatio n cc about the hori 2

zo n ta l axis From tur n i n g to the right the positio n of the forces bei n g
.
,

as giv en the axis of rotatio n is kept by the reactio n X of the bearin g

, .

The v a l ue of X wi ll be defin ed if we take the mome n ts of a ll the acti v e ,

forces in respect to the poin t 0

Xa = N (a —
b) .

— L
Ha vi n g N F
§
-

)
and on defin i n g X from the precedin g equatio n
through F, we obtain
X=F

Th e force X ,
with such a co n struct io n of Coun terba la n cin g the ce n tri
366 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR v
fuga l force of the sifter wil l alw ays be presen t I ts directio n a lters wi th
,
.

the motio n of the S ifter for each positio which imparts great vibratio
n n
,

to the buildin g Besides that S ifters of this type producin g a v ery

. ,
,

con siderab le momen t of force F of t poi t h n c require a dri v i n g jour

e n al l ,

of large size which o w in g to the great pressure of the j our n a l upo n the
,

bearin g e leads to a rapid wear of its bush .

Taki n g a ll that i n to co n sideratio n it became n ecessary to i n ve n ta

,

method of bala n cin g the cen trifuga l forces of the sifter where X wo u ld ,

be equal to n ought S in ce X wi ll be equa l to ought if

.
n = b En gin eer a ,

Ko n ge n
e taki n g these
,
co n sideratio n s as basis off ered the co n str u ctio n ,

of a two box sifter shown diagrammatica lly in Fig 3 4 6 I n this draw

-

,
. .

in g we see that b w he nathez ce n tre of gravity of the S ifter boxes a n d the

cou nter w eight of the bal an ce — wh eel lie in o n horizo n ta l p lan e e .

M achi n es made in accorda n ce with K o n e g e n s dia g ram gi v e a perfect l y ’

FI G 34 6
. . Ifi G 3 4 7
. .

well balan ced ru n n d do n o t require a j ourn al of so great a S ize as the

-
a

o n e emp l oyed in H g g n m a h e r s arra n geme n t

’
a e c .

An u n sou n d idea for two box S ifter is suggested by B iihl er s

' ’

a -

works in Uz w il, wh ich p laces the fly wheel w ith a coun terweight l ower -

than the boxes (Fig B u t b y settin g a seco n d fl y wheel with a n

.
-

i n verse cou n terw eight at it attain s the a n n ul men t Of the in j urious

cg,

force X F r defin in g the cen trifugal forces R n d T of these two fly

. o a

wheel s the n d 1) given i e with positio n of the fly wheels to be fou n d

, a a , . .
-

we have
R z 2F + T

An d takin g the momen ts 2F and T in respec t to the poin t cl , we

O btain
2 F a = Tb

—
defin e T — gfl i —
i
b
g a
i l
Out of ()
3 w e ,
and out of ()
2 we obtain R z

z .

The same p la n for ca n celli n g the force X m ight be adapted to the

sin gle box S ifter n d it has been don e by America n e n gi n eers before
-

,
a
368 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR v
must be a n ev en n umber of S ifters I n our diagram there are four n d . ,
a

they ru n in pairs to the right a n d to the left B u t this to a certa in .

extent i n volves a lon gitudin a l vibratio n of the mill sin ce the forc es X ,

o
l n gitud a
in ll y disposed in opposite directio n s at the mome n t of the
greatest l o n git u din al declinatio n of the ifters cause the con tra ctio n or S

exten sio n of the floor the resi t n cy of which is sufficien t l y great

,
s a .

At th e m o m en t of the greatest tra n sversa l deflectio n of the S ift ers

'

the forces X act in o n e direction a n d te n d to upset the buil din g I f the .

ru n of the S ifters is so set that the S ifters 1 n d 2 gi v e the greatest d eclen a

sio n to the wa ll CD n d the s ifters 3 a n d 4 to the wa ll A B a mome n t of

,
a ,

forces 2 X twistin g the buildin g is obtain ed I t is possib le to p lan t four

, ,
.

S ifters so that the forces X of the tra n s v ersa l di rectio n wou l d a l so gi v e

altern ately a con traction n d n exten sion of the floor That woul d bea a .

possible with a great n umber of S ifters Howe v er e v e n if this were suc .

,

e ss
c fu lly do n e o n ce started the S ifters wou l d soo n be thrown O ff their
, ,

ru n for the u n equa l sl ip pi n g of the be lts o n a ll the

,
ifters alters the S

n umber of re v o l utio n s Hen ce the shocks imparted to the buil di n g

.

are un equa l in force a n d attain the widest limits after u n equa l periods of
,

time .

The o n l y mea n s of combatin g the vibratio n of the mill bui ldin g ,

which l eads to frequen t repairs n d eve n to its ru in is to throw out the ,

a ,

sin gle box n o n ba la n ced S ifters n d repl ace them by two box o n es
- -
a -
.

An other phe n ome n o n whe n the r n of the S ifter l oses its eve n n ess is u ,

ca lled wa n deri ng The wa n deri ng gen era lly takes p lace at the startin g
.
”

of the sifter a n d when it has on ce begun it may gain in power un til the
,

stan ds or the drop ha n ger frames of the S ifter break This phe n omen o n
-

has its o r g n in the fact that the S ifter bein g started the force Of frictio n
I I ,

of the pin in the bearin g ten ds to tur n the box rou n d the axis of the
p in in the dir ection opposite to the rotatio n of the fin ger .

T make that c l ear (Fig

o we S hall take the poin ts where the.

supports or the suspen sio n rods are fixed 1 (left han d side ) a n d 2 (right ,
-

ha n d side ) W ith the n ormal motio n of the S ifter the poi n t 1 or 2 must
.

travel in the circle K B t if the S ifter has a ten den cy to turn rou n d the
. u

axis of the fin ger in a circl e M the poin t passes in to positio n 1 S O that its ,
1
,

trajectory of motion acquires n ell iptic form L At the s me time the a . a

poin t 2 moves to poin t 2 a n d gives a trajectory L —a compressed circ le

1 l
.

Th e n earer to the axis of the fi n ger the l ess is the deflectio n from the ,

circular motio n a n d the poi n t 3 bein g in co n tact with the fi n ger has n o
, , ,

deflection from the n orma l circular motion K Hen ce it is c lear that in .

n n —
the sta ds o r drop ha gers 1 1 the wa n derin g causes a n exte n di n g
-
C H AP . V] F LOU R MI LL I NG 369

deformatio a co n tractin g deformatio

n and An d if n in —
the sta n ds 2 2 .

the forces causi n g the ten sio n s are sufficie n t ly great they may lead to
breakage .

To a v oid this co n structive defect some of the works suggest various

mea n s of commu n icatin g a rigidn ess to the system j oi n in g the supports
.

a n d th e boxes of the S ifters .

S in ce it i n ecessa ry th t the supports should be para ll el durin g the ’

s a

operatio n Of the S ifters attempts are made to ho l d the min that positio n
,

by supp leme n tary kin ematic j n ctio n s u .

On e such dev ice is shown o n Fig 3 5 0 The two box S ifter ill us
'

-
. .

tra ted is set o n four supports a of a n ordin ary co n structio n On .

the fou n datio n frame 1) ther e is set a shaft 1) which ca n rotate in

beari n gs r At the e n ds of t h e shaft are set rods c a n d the en ds of
.
l
0
2
,

FI G . 34 9 . FI G . 35 0 .

which 3 a n d 4 are co n n ected by Ho o k s j oin ts or a spherica l j ourn a l

, ,
e
’

with rods d d attach ed likewise with j o in ts to the frame of th ifter at

l z
e S

the poin ts 1 a n d 2 I t is quite eviden t that the supp leme n tary stan ds
.

make the frame more rigid n d form n obstac le to the gyratory pro ,
a o

g res siv e motio n of the sifter I n this system the shaf t] ?cou l d have bee n
,

p laced o n the l ower part of the box n d then the ki n ematic j un ctio n
“

,
a

b—c — d wou l d be reversed in respect to the p la n gi v e n Th ese supp l e .

me n tary j un ctio n s may be a l so fixed to suspen ded ifters S .

An other co n structio n of the j u n ctio n s is ill ustrated in F ig 3 5 1 The . .

—
.

n —
top e ds of the system c b here ha v e circular discs f j which g lide
l — c
2 l z

—
,

n —
betwee two guide p lates g g attached to the boxes of the ifter The l 2
S

system c b—
.

— c bei n g perfect l y rigid the ce n tre li n e of the di scs is a l w ays

l 2
,

para ll e l to the shaft 6 W hen the sifter is in rotatio n the discs wi ll be

.

runn in g up a n d down to the right a n d to the left (compo ne n ts of motio n )

,
.

th erefo re wa n deri n g is here im possib l e .

3 70 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ C H AR V
third metho d (Fig 3 5 2 ) gives the system n
A the e n ds of the
.
l —b—n '
l
,

levers h n d r bei n g joi n ed fast to the fou n datio n supports

1
a i
z
and a
1
a
2
.

A detai l of these j u n ctio n s is t be see n in Fig 3 5 3 o . .

A variatio n of the third method where the diago n a lly set sta n ds are ,

join ed n d n et the side o n es is shown o n Fig 3 5 4

a ,
. .

Of a ll the sys tems exami n ed o n ly the seco n d preve n ts wa nderi n g ,

FI G . 35 1 . FI G . 35 2 .

(Fig . two other systems do n o t giv e abso lute regu larity a n d

Th e ,

they therefore should be displ aced in th e model s offered by some of

the E uropea n works which are most ly v ar iatio n s of the seco n d method
,

( iihl r Bros n d Kap l er )

B e . a .

Th prob lem of preve n ti n g the te n de n cy to w a n der has bee n perfect ly

e ,

correct ly n d expedie n t ly from the co n structiv e poin t of View so lved

,
a , ,

by the America n works n d by Thos R obin so n s works in E n g la n d

a .
’
.

FI G. 35 3 . FI G 354 .

Wshall first examin e the America n method

e .

Fig 3 5 5 i llustrates the tra n smissio n of motio n to the box of the ifter
. S

evo lved by the I S chultz O N il C of Min n eapo lis Th toothed

.
’
e e o . .
.
e

gearin g to the shaft 4 is set in the main frame to which a cross head 7 is ,
-

bolted On the cross head there are set adjustab le bearin gs a detail o f
.
-

which is shown o n C for two rods 1 4 with ro ll s 1 5 freely set o n them

, .

These ro lls e n ter i n to t h guidi n g cross hea d n d sli ppers 1 7 bo lted to

e -
a
3 72 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR V
the tra n smissio n of motio n n the same prin cip le i e with the aid of
o ,
. .

two cran ks On Fig 3 5 8 we ha v e a diagrammatic i llustratio n of the

. .

FI G . 35 6 .
FI G . 35 7 .

tran smissio n in Th Robin so n s tw o box S ifter of the latest type Th

-

.
’
-
. e

boxes A are join ed together by H iro n s 1 The cran ks 4 are fixed -

.

FI G . 3 58 .

in p lates 5 j oin ed to the H iro n s a n d cross bars 6 Th bal an ce wheel s

- -
. e
-

2 with coun terweights are brought i n to motio n by o n e commo n bel t 3 ,

o
'
e
—
run n in g ver th drivin g pulley S an d the j ockeys 7 7 Th j ockey 7 1
. e
GHAP . v] FLO U R MI LLI NG 3 73

at the same time ser v es as a belt tighten er Th frame of the . e

bearin g ho ldin g this j ockey is set in the guidin g cross head n d slippers
-
a

a nd join ed by l e v er j oi n
-
ts 1 1 1
-
2 —1 1 the l
1,
ast of which has a n adjust
abl e weight Q B y mo vin g it to the right or to the left we may
. ,

s lacken or tighten the bel t . A perspectiv e View of the i ter is show

S f n

in Fig 3 5 9
. .

The drive e v olved by Thos Robin so n is decidedly superior to that of

.

A W o l f as it discards the rigid n d u n ec on omica tooth geari g

.
,
a l n B t . u

W o l f s dri ve is better in so far that each bal a n ce whee has

l i depe de t
n n n
’ -
a n
3 74 FLOU R MI L LI NG [ CH A R V

gearin g However both the drives should be abso lute ly accurate I n

.
,
.

T h . R obi n so n s dr ive there must be’

a great accuracy in the equa li ty of
d iameters of the fl y whee l s otherwise eve n with the differe n ce of 1 m m
-

, ,
.

in the diameters the be lt wi ll acquire a stro n g s lippin g motio n o n the

,

smaller pulley w hich wi ll cause a rapid wear of the be l t

,
.

I n our opi n io n R obi n so n s co n structio might be impro v ed by throw

’
n

in g the be lt ff n of the pu lleys n d co n n ecti n g the driv i n g cra nks by a

o o e a

coup lin g ro d I n this w y eve a co n siderab le differe n ce in diameters

. a n

of the fly wheel s would be of n co n sequen ce

-
o .

Thus maki n g n estimate of the ty pes of ifters from the poin t of

,
a S

view of dyn amics we must give preferen ce to two box S ifters to such
, _
,

types besides which ha v e the bala n ce wheel with the coun terweight set
,
-

between the boxes a n d the dista n ce betwee n the horizon ta l p lan es of

,

the cen tre of gravity of the ifter n d of the ba la n ce whee l equa l to S a -

n ought or very sma ll .

I n se l ectin g S ifters with m echa n isms preve n tin g wa n deri n g those ,

should be chosen w here this is effected by mea n s of tw o drivin g cra nks

which abs ol utely preven ts run n in g o ff .

4 . A m erica n S ifters

the developmen t of ifter con structio n just as in the buildin g

In S ,

of ro ller mills the American s chose a route tota lly di fferen t to that Of
,

the E uropea n s A characteristic peculiarity of their S ifters I s the i n c lin ed

.
,

zigzag shaped arra n geme n t of the S ieves Ha vin g obser ved the in e q u i
-

librium of motio n in the sin g l e box S ifters with o n e cou n terweight the -

America n e n gin eers were the first to so lv e the prob l em Of equili b r iu m .

Th first (A W ol f s ) type desig n ed to ob v iate the ru n n in g off of the

e .
’
,

S ifter duri n g operatio n a l so be l o n gs to the America n s , .

Th ese co n sideratio n s as we ll as the ig n ora n ce n o t o n l y of the R uss a n

,
i .

but of the E uropea n tech n ician s too of the co n structio n s of Amer ca n , i

S ift ers in duced us to devote a separate chapter to them

1

N y s Z igz g S ift r —
, .

Figs 3 6 0 a n d 3 6 1 how us th e l o n git u d in a l

’
o e a e . S

sectio n a n d the perspectiv e view of Noye s ifter Th box of the S ifter ’

S . e

co n sists of two divisio n s for sieves between wh ich there passes the ,

drivi n g cra n k shaft carryin g two han d whee l s with co u n terweights g

1) .

These cou n terweights may be mo v ed c l oser to or further from the axis

of rotatio n by mea n s of a screw r Th l ower h a n d w heel cast in n . e -

is o e

1
On l y In P a p pe n h eim S
’
w o rk is t h e re a
g en era l des crip tio n of the fter b
si u il t b y t he w o r k s
of No rdy k e Ma rm o n Co .
3 76 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR V

the sieves is shown in Figs

,
boxes are j oi ed to
. 3 6 2 an d 3 6 3 . The A n

their foun datio n frames by cast iro n paralle guide l s I a n d cross heads
-
T -

which the beari gs of the drivi n g shaft V are fixed T h e boxes are
in n
.

suspen ded o n four can e rods E M is the drivi g be t pu ey the guid

n l ll 0 ,

in g l oose be l t pu l l-
eys which are fixed o n brackets
,
Q ad j usted by mea n s

FI G . 3 62 .
FI G 3 63 . .

of screws G Abo ve n d bel ow the boxes there are cou n terweights S set
. a

on the shaft V H n
: d R are the
a O il boxes feedi n g th top a n d the bottom e
'

belt pull eys Th rods are fixed to the thick ceilin g board J set
-
. e ,

across the ceilin g beams K .

A l o n g itudi n a l sectio n of the S ifter box is gi v e n in F ig 3 6 4 T h e . .

boltin g trays 1 2 3 4 a n d 5 are arran ged in zigzag ma nn er with differen t

, , , ,

i n clin es accordin g to the size of the product the greater in clin e corre ,

FI G 3 6 4
. . FI G . 365 .

to the first sieve which bo lts the coarser product Owin g to the
sp o n din g ,
.

differen t in cl in atio n of the siev es we obtain correspon din gl y di fferen t ,

vel ocities of motio n of the product treated This very importan t co n .

di tio n of n eve n sifti n g of the coarse a n d fin e product is n o t take n in to

a

con sideratio n by E uropean en gin eers Fo r fee di n g the thro u gh s to the .

foll owin g sieves there are the in clin ed timber p lates 1 2 3 4 a n d 5 1, 1 , 1 , 1 1 .

Th sieves are c l ea n ed by mea n s of brushes a

e .
am p . v] FLOU R MI LLI NG 3 77

In to the box of the sifter through the side are in serted the boltin g , ,

trays the perspectiv e view of which is illustrated in Fig 3 6 5 a n d in

,
.
,

sectio n in Fig 3 6 6 where it may be seen that each tray is cl othed with a
.
,

workin g sie v e o n the upper side a n d a n ope n wire tissue for the brushes ,

from bel ow Th tray is divided by tra n s v ersal timber cross pieces a to

. e -

limit the area of operatio n of the brushes n d to preve n t their meet in g . a .

An ordin ary arra n geme n t of cou n terweights is shown in Fig 3 6 7 .

(the bottom cou n terwe ight ) whi c h l ikewise giv es a n idea of the tran s
,

missio n o f motio n to the boxes Th e cast iro n belt pulley has a l arge .
- -

hub B in which there is a n adj u stab l e bearin g A for the shaft This .

bearin g is adj usted by mea n s of a set sc rew o n o n e ide a n d a ten sio n S

sprin g D The cou nterwe ight E c n be moved in the guidin g para llel s by
. a

FI G 3 6 6
. . FI G . 3 67 .

turn in g the set screw F I n the coun terweight there are cylin dric ho les
. ,

in which in case of n eed the supp l eme n tary weights G are put a n d fixed ,

fr om bel ow by bo lts passin g through ho l es in them .

S ifters m a de a t W lf s W rks W e have already part l y become a c

’
o o .
-

q u a in t e d with o n e of t h e makes of W o l f s S ifters F igs 3 6 8 a n d ’

. .

3 6 9 represe n t a l o n gitudin a l a n d a cross sectio n of o n e ha l f of the sifter -

operat in g for two products I n this sifter as a lmost in ll American .

,
a

types the sie v es are set in a zigzag lin e The sieves are p laced in to
,
.

the box from the side a n d he l d by mean s of cast iron p la n ks a fasten ed

,
-

by th u mb screws b The motio n is commu n icated to the sifter as we ha v e

-
. ,

seen earlier (p 3 72 Fig by m ea n s o f two dr ivin g cran ks nd bala n ce

.
,
.
a

wheel s with coun terweights brought in to rotation by co n ic toothed gears .

The n umber of bo lti n g trays fi v e is the same as in the prece di n g co n stru

, ,
o

tio n with a S imilar flow of the product

,
.

This S ifter does n o t wan der but its ru n is n o t bal a n ced therefore , ,
3 73 FLOU R MI L LI NG [ C H AR v
the vibration (fo rce X p 3 6 6 Fig 3 4 7 ) of the shafts v commun icated
, .
,
.
’
,

to the floor through the bear in gs d ten ds to shake the mi ll ,

.

A sectio n f W lf
o s b la n ced s i
ofter is show
’
n in F i
ag 3 7 0 a n d d if .
,

FI G . 36 8 . FI G . 369 .

parts n d dispositio n of sieves are shown in Figs 3 7 1 3 7 2 n d 3 7 3

'

feren t a .
, ,
a .

The drawi n g of Fig 3 70 shows us that the coun terweight Q is set i n side the
.

box A so that its cen tre of gravity lies in the p la n e of the ce n tre of gravity
,

of the box Th cran k shaft is n t made in n whole piece but co n

. e -
o o e ,

sists of two parts 1) n d v co n ,

a 1 ,

n e t d by j oi n ts at Th e top c e o .

part of the shaft rotates in ba ll

n d socket bearin gs of the cross a

heads b co n n ected with the box

of the S ifter as S hown in Fig 3 72 . .

Owin g to a speci l co n struction a

of the ju n ction at the S ifter o,

ca n fl uctuate in the i n c l in ed p la n e ,

passin g from positio n 1 1 to 2 2 — -

.

Let us examin e more min utely

the drivi n g mecha n ism shown in
Fig 3 7 1
. .

part of the shaft v Th e l ower

F 3 70 IG. .

is set o n a ba ll collar thrus t bear '

in g a n d he l d in a v ertica l positio n by two ba ll bearin gs c On the top part

a .

of the sh aft there is set a split belt pulley S n the hub P of the cup T
7) -
o .

Th upper cra n k part of the shaft

e has at its l ower en d a cavity for the
cl
3 80 FLO U R MI LL I NG [ C HAR v

In Fig .
is shown a horizo n ta l sectio n of the ifter box
3 72 S

above the coun terweight Th S ifter a n bolt four or eigh t distin ct

.
’

e c

products ; in the latter case the S ifter is di vided in to two

floors .

Th e box is suspe n ded o n brackets 16 for the ca n e rods wire .

sieves are c lea n ed by mea n s of heavy tappers t n d the silk o n es ,

a

FI G 3 72
. .

by thin steel chain s p attached with their e n ds to the fr m e of the a

sie v e.

A l o n gitudin a l sectio n of the S ifter is how n in Fig 3 7 3

S Here o n e . .

part of the sieves is giv en in l on gitudin al section n d o n e in cross sectio n

,
a -
.

Th sifter we are examin in g is built for eight products i e each section

e
, . .

Operates i n depe n de n t l y for two products F r each product there are

. o

six bo ltin g trays every On e of which has its w n c l oth Th e tra y 1 gives
, o .
C H AP . V] F LOU R .
MI LL ING 381

break I as tai ls the tray 2 middlin gs I I tr

, ays 3 4 , , ,
and 5 yield flo ur as
thro u gh s , a n d the sixth tai l s o v er fin e middlin gs an d gives dun st as

FI G . 3 73

thro u gh s . Th e l ower
floor of the first sectio n differs in that the seco n d
semo lin a tray is substituted by o n for flour e .

This S ifter se rv es for a mi ll havin g fo u r bre aks an d f o u r red u c

tio n s
.
3 82 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR v

5 . F ree S win i
g gn P l a n s ifters

As we ha v e see n a lready both the si g e the doub

,
e box ifters n l and l S

ha v e o n sol e defect from the poin t of v iew of their dy amics n T hey .

both wan der i e te n d to revolve rou n d the axis of the cra k particu ar y n l l ,
. .
,

so at the start However this f t.

l h s bee a so obviated by the
n l ,
au c o n a

str ct o rs
u
at R obi n so n s in E n g l a n d a n d
’
W o lf s in A merica with the ,
aid ’
,

of two drivin g cran ks

‘

T hus from the

,
sta n dpoi n t of dy n amics the sifter is a quite perfect ,

machine at the presen t m omen t But n o w a n w prob m has prese ted

l e .
n e

FI G . 3 74 . FI G
. 3 75 .

itself to the en gin eers—to simp lify the relatively comp lex n d hea v y a

detail s of which the cran k driving the S ifter boxes n d the bal an ce
,
-
a

wheel w ith the coun terweight are con sidered to be the parts most open
to criticism .

This questio n was worked at by America n n d E uropea n co n structors a ,

a n d fi n a l ly at the
,
n d of 1 9 1 1 there appeared severa l pate n ts first in
e , ,

America a n d the n in E urope for so ca ll e d self ba la n cin g ifters,

- -
S .

Before giv i n g n estimate of these S ifters from the poin t of View of

a

dyn amics a n d of other circumsta n ces characterisin g the merits n d defects a

of the n w machin es we ought to make the stu dent c q u a in ted with their
e ,
‘

co n structio n .

Th c lassificatio n of the n ew machi n es must be based o n the character

e

o f the drivi n g mecha n ism I n this res pect there ar kn o wn tw o kin ds

. e
3 84 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR V
Th e idea of a free s w in gin g S ifter attracted the co n structors so much
that a l most a ll more or less large E uropea n works o n e after the other , ,

began supp lyin g the market with machin es of that type On may say . e

that the works were seized by a n epidemic of co n structin g S ifters to work

o n the pri n cip l e of uti lisatio n of the ce n trifuga l force .

The works E rste La n dwirtschaftli che Maschi n e n fabrik in Buda ,

pest a n d those of J Prokop in P ardubitz Austria a l most simul

,
. , ,

ta n eo u sly put o n the market free swi n gi n g S ifters with flexib le drives
.

B esides that se v era l pate n ts more w ere clai med for similar ifters of S ,

which the most typica l in its idea is Karl Gillesh eim r s co n struction e
’

shown in Fig 3 7 7 . .

The esse n ce of the co n

struction of Gillesheim er s ’

ifter co n sists in the fo llowin g

S .

The ifter box is suspe n ded

S

on four rods f The fast .

pulley l is made to rotate c

from the shaft b by mea n s of

the belt drive guided by two
-

jockeys c fixed o n the box of ,

the S if ter The belt pulley d .

-

is set o n the shaf t g to whi c h

the weight n is fasten ed The .

shaft g rotates in bearin gs h

a n d i coup led to the frame 6
‘
.

An importa n t part of the

F 3 77
IG
mecha n ism is the frictio n
. .

coup lin g The top part h of the frictio n cl utch is keyed o n the shaft
.
,

a n d the bottom part is formed by the be lt pu ll ey cl free l y rotati n g

-

o n the shaft g On the upper n d of this shaft is fitted a sprin g l

.
e ,

the ten sio n of which is adjusted by a n u t 73 B y a lterin g the ten sio n

7 .

of the S prin g the pressure of the frictio n disc 76 c n be a ltered owin g

, a ,

to which the force of frictio n of the cl utch alters a n d a m o difica ,

tio n in the mag n itude of the momen t rotatin g the box is thus attain ed .

W he n started the belt pull ey d at first g lides over the frictio n disc k
,
-

a n d the n grad u a lly the force of frictio n forms a mome t of sufficie t

n n

mag itude which brin gs the S ifter into a gyratin g rotary motio n n d
n ,
,
a
CH AP . V] F LOUR MI LL I NG 3 85

case of i n crease or decrease of the n umber of re v o lutio n s of the bel t

pu ll ey l n d co n seque n t ly of the coun terweight n as well there sprin gs
c, a

—
,

up a force of frictio n betwee n the disc n d the be t pul ley which either
l a ,

acts as a brake (if the n umber of re v o lutio n s in cre ases ) or dri ves the ,

pulley l a lo n g with it
c .

Th V oll a n d Mertz free swin gin g S ifter with a flexib l e driv e is gi v e n

e

on Fig 3 7 8 . .

The gyratory rotatin g motio n of V oll and Mertz ifter is based o n

’
s S

the prin cip le we hav e already examin ed . The weight g is set in the fl y
Lo ng itu di nal s ectio n o f f
th e S i ter th ro u g h A B . Cro ss sect io n o f f
th e S i ter th ro u g h CD .

Pl a n of f f
the S i ter w ith o u t S i ting Trays .

FI G . 3 78.

wheel in the same mann er as the cou nterweight is set in the cran k ifters
a
S .

T his fl y
whee l -is faste n ed o n the shaft which is supported by a ba l l
, co ll ar -

thrust bearin g c a n d a ball bearin g l fixed to the cross bar p of the frame
-
-
c, -

couplin g the S ifter boxes On the same shaft as the fly wheel there is
.
-

set the receiv in g belt pulley b driv en by mean s of a belt which is carried
-
,

to this pulley b y mean s of j ockeys f statio n ed o n the S ifter boxes .

Al l the co n structio n s exami n ed show that the gyrati n g rotary motio n

of the S ifters is attain ed owin g to the a ction of the ce n trifugal force ,

first of the weight n d n ext of the ifter itself

,
a S .

P assi n g by a more mi n ute estimate of the co n structi v e detai l s of free

sw ingi g
n S i te
f rs w hich ,
doubt l ess l y ,
wi l l be sti l l more perfected ,
we sha l l ,

2 B
3 86 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR v
direct our attention to the fu n dame ntal merits of the n w machines e ,

which are ascribed to them by their inv entors .

1 A free swin gin g ifter requires n bul ky settin g of the cra n k shaft
. S o ,

which makes the machin e as well as its erectio n heavier more expen siv e , , ,

an d comp l ex .

2 From the dy n amic stan dpoin t the free s w i n ging S ifter is a n ideal
.

machin e givin g n shocks to the mill buildin g

,
o

A s con cer n s the first poin t i e the simp lifi catio n a n d reductio n of ,
. . ,

weight of the con struction this may be ackn owledged as true but on ly , ,

to a certain degree Th bulky mounti ng Of the crank S haft is in deed

. e

discar ded but the rigi d as well as the flexible drives have se veral defects
,
.

First ly the America n rigid driv e has a comp l ex ball drop hang er
,
-

frame which w ill hold the il badly Al so its belt pulley performs
,
o .
-

besides the ordin ary rotatory a con ic motion w hich causes un equal , ,

ten sion o i the edges of the belt S eco n dly the flexib le drive is far from
'

.
,

perfection because the guide pulleys hav e a gyratory motion owin g to

, ,

which their middle plan e fa lls out of its n or ma l positio n a n d causes the ,

belt to be drawn off the pulley n d the an gle of co ntact to alter These a .

circumstan ces must lead to n irregul ar ity in the work of the belt driv e a -
.

H ow ev er the defects pointed out are n o t v ery con siderab l e a n d may

,

easily be av oided Fo r our wn part we woul d advise the con structors

. o ,

to pay serious atten tion to the electromotiv e tran smission of motion to

th ifters retain in g the prin cip le of utilisin g the ce n trifugal for c e I f a
e S , .

friction clut ch or a chain w heel were to be set o n the shaft carryin g the
weight as in the case of the American sifter or o n the fly wheel with the
, ,
-

weight as V oll n d M rt S ifter has it an d brin g it into rotation from

, a e z s
’

the electromotor the n the complex ball drop han ger frame drivin g
,
1 -

belt pulley guide p u lleys & c become quite superfluous To the motor
-

,
-

, .
, .

of the ifter there will be onl y wires ril nnin g from the ceilin g whi ch will
S
,

totally obviate the incon venie nces of belt drive which work here u nder -

un favourab le conditions .

6 . Ca p a city of P la n sifters
capacity of ifters like th at of other boltin g machin es is chara c
The S ,

t ri d n o t o n ly by the quan tity of product s ifted through a U it of b

e se
n olt
mg surface but a lso by the quality of that work i e the accuracy in
,
, . .

separati g the product accordin g to size I f the o verta ils contain particle s
n
.

o f product which j udgi n g by their size shou l d hav e passed through the
, ,
,
388 FLOU R MI LL I NG

If for ro ll s both groo v,

ed a n d smooth we accept the v e l ocities ,

v to be co n sta n t as u for mi l l sto

,
n es the mag n itude of the areas of
, ,

siev es will be
for roller mi lls ,

A1 1
77
0
;
3 for millston es .

T hese formu l e are usefu l o n l y if we

a ha v e s u c c ce e de d in deduci n g
a series of v alues for 7 n d 7 from practice which requ ires serious 7
6
a 9
1
0 ,

experimental work o n a l arge scale At the presen t moment we are .

obliged to make use on ly of the data con cernin g the capacity of pl an

sifters giv en by the works correctin g them after the results of practice
‘

,
.

Comparin g the capacity Of differen t bolt in g machin es Professor ,

Zworykin gives the followin g tab le (Tab le XX XV I I I )

TAB LE XX X V I I I

S YS TE M
Cap acity o f1 s q u a re m e tre b o lting
.

f
s u r a ce p er 1 h o u r .

o ygo n al reel
P l up to 1 5 klg . of flour
e trifugal
C n 70
H a ggen m a ch er s
’
S ifter 1 00

other terms centrifugal s have a capacity 4 5 times greater than

In ,

reel s n d the p l n ifters 6 5 times

,
a a s .

Accordin g to F K ick s researches 1 square metre of worki n g surface

’
.
,

in H gg n m a ch r s ifter has a capacity on ly four times as great as that

’
a e e S

of the reel .

Bel ow we giv e a tab le (XX XI X ) of the more u p to date res ul ts as - -

regards the capacity of reels centrifugals and sifters accordin g to B aum ,

gart ner an d No to vit h c .

TABL E X X XI X

Area of S ieves in S q u are Metres fo r B o il ing 36 l b of Pro d u ct

H
.

p er 1 our .

P ro du ct t o b e S i ted f .

Po lyg o nal R eel s . Ro u n d R eel s . Cen tri f u g al s . Pl a nsifter .

1 Break Ch0 p
.
0 1 2 3 sq '
111 S q m 0 0 2 5 sq m
2 F n e Ch 0 p (m dd etc ) 0 3 5 0
. .

i 1 s 0 2 30
'
s qm 0 1 40 O 0 70
3 R eductio n 5 0 —
. . -

6 0 per
.

cen t of flour n d 5 0—4 0 0 5 0

. a 0 3 30
0

0 1 60 0 1 00
per cent of du n st .
CH AP . v] FLOUR MI LL I NG 33 9

W hen calcu latin g the n umber of sifters required for the giv e n capacity
Of the mi ll Tab le X L may be used where the capacity of two box
, ,
-

sifters with two three n d four sectio n s hav in g differen t n umbers of

, a

boltin g trays is given .

TA BLE XL

33353? i éfvt 3223 33

( p i y
i
3 8
Nu m b ero f 8 ?
1 l s . 11

W h ea t
W h at P art o f th e
.

f
S i ter
d
o
s
o

o
fi

530 7 3 33
n
10 1 4 00 2o 2 3 6 16
1 30 6 5 7

63 5 -
312 40 0 of S ifter
12 1 4 00 310 15 6 -
20 0
14 7 -
7 2 -
95

500 22 0 27 3 -
Oi S if ter
6 1 6 00 25 0 -
110 13 6
12 0 -
4 8
-
6 1 -

55 3 -
27 3 -
33 6 -

4 o f S ifter
8 1 6 00 27 9 -
13 6 -
16 8 -

13 4 6 1
-
7 8

674 33 6 41 5 -

10 1 600 92 5 33 7 -
16 8 -
20 8
16 3 7 8 98

79 0 40 0 49 2
12 1 6 00 925 39 5 20 0 24 6
19 0 95 119

The capacity of roun d sifters of the B u n ge type is giv en in T ab le

X LI .
3 90 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR V

C a p a c ity S i te r i n
of f
Di a m e te r o f W or k ing t s.
P er o u r H .

Bo l t ing Trays S f
u r ac e in
in mm Mt 2
B reak
. .

Ch o p .

In spite of this table showin g the capacity of rou n d sifters to be

almost the same as that of rectan gul ar on es in reality it shoul d be re ,

garded as much smaller (up to 2 5 per cent ) taki n g i nto con sideration ,

the quality of work which is in comparably l o w er than the work of

,

rectan gul ar ifters where it is performe d o n ix trays at l east

S ,
S .

I n comparin g the quan tity of work do n e by p l n sift r a n d the other a e s

boltin g machines we see that the ifter stan ds con siderably higher as
,
S

regards capacity But the quality of w ork of the ifter is al so higher

. S

than that of polygo n al n d roun d reel s Experimen ts prove that at

a .

the boltin g of the products (reduction of middlin gs ) some 5 0 per ce nt of .

flour is tailed o v er together with fine middlin gs a n d dun st which makes a

, ,

compleme ntary bolting in dispen sable in its turn requ irin g a cons iderable ,

in crease of the workin g surface of the siev es .

S i n ce there are n o inv estigatio n s of the qual ity of work performed by

sifters an d reel s of a later date we shall give the results of experiments
,

made by I W in gert the presiden t of the German Millers S ociety

.
,
’
,

who tested Ha gg nm acher s ifter a nd the reel a nd published the

e
’
S ,

results of his i nv estigation s in D ie Muhle 1 8 89 No 6 The eXperi , , . .

ments were performed o n the boltin g of the product of middl in gs reduced

o n Fre n ch sto n es Th results were as foll ows
. e
 CHAP TE R VI

GRAD I NG THE PR D O UCT ACCO RDI NG TO S P E CI FI C

”

GRAV I TY

GR A D I N G MI DD LI N GS AND D UN S T A CCOR D I NG TO S P E CI FI C GR A VI TY

S INC E the milli n g techni cs ev olved the system of high grin di n g the
flour -

sortin g of the in termediate product accordin g to its specific gravity ha s

been un doubte dl y o n of the most importan t stages in the milli n g process
e .

I n deed from the mome n t he has separated the middli n gs a n d the du n st

,

accordin g to the quality the miller proceeds to defi n e the grades of flour
,
. .

Th remov al of the bran n y a n d col ourin g partic les of grain from the
e

v al uab le starchy mi ddl in gs which give high grades of flour is n o easy task
, , .

A sol utio n of this prob l em was bei n g sought by fl o ur milli n g e n gin eers -

for a whole century a n d only n o w is it solv ed al most to perfection

, .

Although the repeated mill in g (mo u tu re é co no miqu e) is a n i n ve n tio n

of the Fren ch who practised it 1 5 0 years ago the character of the
wi th comparativ ely moist i n tegume n t—n e v er suggested
, ,

w heat —soft ,

to the Fren ch fl o u r millers the idea of gra di n g the mi ddl in gs accordin g

-

to quality I n the o ld Fre n ch process of repeated millin g the el astic

.
1

cov erin gs o f the soft wheat very successfully resiste d reduction when
'

passed through grin din g machin es n d gav e a comparativ ely ins igni ,
a

fi ca n t perce n tage of bran reduced to flour A co n siderab le part of the .

i tegumen t therefore was easily removed with the aid of boltin g apparatus
n
.

Th result of a repeated milli n g of hard wheats is tota ll y differe n t

e The .

dry shells are reduce d to fin bran which it is impossible to separate from

e ,

the meal by bolti n g machin es The fin bran imparts a darker col ouri n g . e

to the flou r n d l owers its quality a n d market v al ue

a
.

Th Fre n ch repeate d millin g wide ly spread in E urope with the aid

e
,
,

of which n excellen t flour accor di n g to the stan dard of the time was
a

obtain ed proved to be u ns uited for hard Hun garian wheats W ith

,
.

a ew to attaini n g the same results in millin g as with the soft wheats

n

1
As a
p
ty e o f su ch m illing the rye m ill in o f to da m a b e ta
,
g y y
-
k en , wit h th e so le differen ce
t h at ro l ler m i lls a re su b
s titu ted in th e
pla ce o f g rin dsto n es .

39 2
 CH AP . VI ] FLO U R MI LL I N G 393

the H u n g arian fl o u r millers thought of dampi n g the wheat so as to

-

moisten the bra n a n d in this man n er make it more el astic The imperfect
, .

dampin g processes howev er offered great in o nvem en c s n so far that

, ,
c e ,
I

the wheat was moisten ed too copiousl y the moisture pe n etrated in to the ,

kern el of the wheat the flour obtain ed was damp a n d coul d n o t stan d
, ,
”

l o n g storage or export .

Thus the first impetus was giv e n to the H u n garia n mill ers to direct
their i nv e n tiv e faculty towards other ways of freei n g the flour of brann y
adm ixtures I n the first p l ace I gn atz P aur a flour m iller intro du ced a
.
, , , ,
~

slight improv emen t i n to the Fre n ch repeated mill in g by greatly alterin g ,

the di stan ces betwee n the workin g surfaces of the grin di n g ston es a n d ,

thus makin g the first steps towards modern high mi ll in g (Ho chm iihler i -

is derived from Ho chm iihle showi n g that the runn er stan ds high over
,

the bed ston e in the first passage ) n d then wi nn owi n g the bl ue flour
-

,
a ,

away from the heavy semol in a by mean s of han d bell ows the primitiv e ,

shape of a S p e cial typ e of purifiers which however took n o root in

“

, , ,

practice .

Owin g to this improveme n t Austria Hun gary first se n t to the market

.

a gran ul ar flo u r for bread of the highest grade an d semolin a for immediate

use That semolin a Very much resemb ling our mann a was called
.
,
“

,
”

W ie n er Gries i e V ie nn ese semol in a

, . . .

Thus the ha n d bel l ows ga v e I g n atz P aur the idea of sorti n g the pro
,

duct accordin g to quality i e S pecific gravity I n 1 8 1 0 he inv ented the

,
. . .

first purifier which is kn own in the history of the de v el opmen t of flour

mill in g u n der the n ame of The V ie nn ese purifier From that date
”

—
.

the mill i n g process is richer by a Very important stage gradin g of

middli n gs accordin g to the qual ity .

Fo r the period of a ce n tury flour mill i n g has see n hu n dreds of c o n

stru ctio n s of purifiers but the fu n dame n ta l pri n cip l e of their actio n has
,

remain ed the same Fo r this reason before proceedin g to rev iew the
.
,

p urifiers in their historic su ccession begin n in g with I gn atz P aur s it is ,

’

n ecessary to dwell o n t h t he o r ti fou n datio n of the chief prin cip l e of

e e c

actio n of e very p u ri fier .

I f we compare the weights of equa l bul ks of c l ea n ed a n d u n c l ea n ed

middlin gs both kin ds bein g of equal size we shall see that the impure
, ,

middlin gs are less in weight This weight is l ost at the expen se of the.

grain s of middlin gs which hav e o n e of their facets covered with the

,

integume nt of the kern el because the bra n in specific grav ity is much
,

l ighter tha n the i nn er starchy parts of the wheat or rye F urther .

,

the weight of u nclean ed middlin gs is less owin g to the sp lin ter like -
394 FLO UR MILLI NG [ ca m as

particles of the bran which pass as thro u ghs or o vert a ils from o ne a n d
,

the same sieve together with the good mi ddl in gs I n this mann er after .

siftin g we have a mixture of particles equal in size but un equal in

weight I t was that differe n ce in the weight of separate partic les that the
.

con structors availed themselves of to separate the lig ht particles i e

, , . .

bran an d middlin gs with integumen tal elemen ts from the heavy or in , ,

other terms rich product ,

.

I t is vid n t that if two fallin g grain s of product equa l in ize but

'

e e S

different in weight should be subjected to the actio n of n air —

,

,
c urrent a ,

the l ighter particle of grain wi ll be carried further than the heav ier o ne .

B t for the co n structor of a machin e sorti n g the middlin gs accordin g

u

FI G . 3 79 .

H —D ir
ect io n o f th e win d .

to quality it is important to kn ow n o t on ly this ob vious fact but also

,
,

the law of motio n of the particles in fluen ced by their gravi ty a n d the
co sta t force of win d fann in g the product to be gra ded An d only
n n
.

when that l w of motio n has been defined is the con structor e n abled to
a
,

start workin g out a ration al type of machine co n fiden tly an d without ,

gropi ng about for a ratio n al type of machin e .

»

Thus we are to solv e the foll owi n g prob l em to d fin th l a w of :

'

,
e e e

motio of a particle subjected to the action of two co n sta nt forces

n
.

W shall first exa mi n e a ge n era l case whe n the partic l e fall s i n to the
e
,

S phere of actio n of the draught with a certai

n in itial v el ocity v Fo r 0 .

li
simp city s sake l t us imagin e (Fig 3 7 9 ) we have n in clin ed spout T
’
e .
a ,

d own which the product flows i n to the chamber

Q with that same in itial
ve l ocity s On l eav in g the spout the partic l es of middl ings un dergo
o .

fann in g by a horizontal air curren t -

39 6 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ CH AR VI

den omin ator multiplyin g ,

I by g,
I I by w, an d subtractin g the seco n d
from the first we obtain ,

gx —wy
He nce
we defin e t — a nd substitute it i nto the secon d equation .

ag bw
The n we hav e
‘

e
ag
r
—bw r
After
reducin g {ra n d y to the same den omin ator an d arran ging them
accordin g to degrees we obtain the equation of the curve
,

g
3
x —2 g wscy + gw y + 2 bg (a g
2 2 2 — — —
bw)r 2 a g (a g bw )y = 0 .

on sequently we obtain a cur ve of the seco n d order of the foll ow

C ,

in g shape

Theabse nce of the con stan t term F shows that the c urv e passes
through the beginn in g of the c O ordin ates as it should Th term -

,
. e

B —4 A O after the substitutio n of correspo n din g coefficie n ts (A = g

2
,
3
,

B :
n d C = gw ) is equa l to 0
a He n ce it fo ll ows that our curve
2
, .

is a parabo l a o n bran ch of which passes through the point 0

, e .

No w the positio n of the axis of the parabol a remain s to be de fin ed ‘

Fo r the equatio n of the axis of the parabol a in ge n era l outli n es we hav e the
followin g formula 1

Hav in g
s ubstituted the correspon di n g coefficients A B C , , ,
D, and E
we Obtain the followi n g equation of the axis
g( + g ) + ( + —
2 2
w w w 9 )y ( g bw )(bg + a w) 0 x
z 2
a :
,

this way the axis of the parabol a lies crossin g the axis Y bel ow the
In
point 0 an d the axis X to the left from the begin nin g of the o ordin ates
'

c -

because we see from the equation of the parabol a axis that the segmen t
it strikes o ff the axis X has a n egative magni tude The direction of the .

parabol a axis will be defin ed in accordan ce with the a n gul ar coeffi cie nt ,

1
An alytica l Geo metry, B ri o t an d B o n q u et, p . 14 8 .
CH AP . VI ] F LOUR MI LL I NG 397

which will give us a v ery S imple formul a for the equation of the axis we
hav e obtain ed
9
w

If we defin e
the direction of the resultant of
now tw o compo ne nt
forces ra w a n d mg we obtain from the trian gl e ORS
m9 = t tg <
p, whe n ce w

Co n seque n tl y
the axis of th p r b o l a is parallel to the directio n of '

, e a a

the resultan t force The summit of the parabol a is ev iden tly higher
.
, ,

than the axis of X is for i n stan ce at the poin t N I t is possibl e to

, , .

fi n d the summit of the parabol a n d the equatio n (I I I ) of its axis a .

W e hav e thus solv ed the prob l em in its ge n eral form The formul a .

tg e —
n defi U
n es the directio n of the axis of the parabol a which is Very easy ,

to co n struct S in ce w the accel eration of the particl e through the force

.
, ]

of the draught depe n ds o n the shape of the partic le n d the force of the
, ,
a

draught expressed by the product of the mass by the acceleratio n mw it is ,

c lear that for particl es of di ffere n t quality a n d shape we shall hav e different
direction s of motio n i e shapes of parabol as the trajectories of motion
,
. .

will be di ffere nt for particles of u n equal quality a n d form of their surface .

I t fo ll ows he n ce that we ca n set the rece ivi n g hoppers for particl es of

v arious quality accurately an d correct ly o n ce the trajectories of motio n ,

are design ed .

B esides that ge n era l prob l em specia l cases are possib l e First ly the , .
,

p a rticles havin g a n initial v el ocity dev el opin g for i n stan ce from the , , ,

centrifugal motion are exposed to the effect of the draught at a n a n gle of

,

0 to the directio n of the grav ity secon dly the force of the draught is
°
,

direct ed at a n an gle of 1 80 to the grav ity Both in the first an d in the

0
.

secon d cases we hav e the simp lest problem in parabol ic motion The .

summit Of the parabola coincides in both these cases with the beginnin g
of the o ordin ates
c -

Let us tur n n o w to the first purifier i nve nted by I gn atz P aur as early ,

as in 1 80 7 n d pate nted in 1 8 10
,
a .

I n its origi n al form this pur ifier (Fig 3 80 ) was a timber box of a .

parallel opiped shape 9 X 2 3 ft in size Gen erally the chamber of . .

the purifier was divided i n to three n early equal parts D E a n d F work , , , ,

in g in depen de n t ly of each other As may be see n in the l o n gitu di n al .

s
ec t iOn (Fig P ) of the purifier its box is div ided i n to three chambers by
.
,

air co n ducti n g chann el s C a n d B directin g the air to the product to be

-
398 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ C H AR VI

graded E ach chamber .

of the purifier was sup

plied by the spouts a a ,
’

and through hoppers

”
'

a ,

b b a n d b with product
’ ”
, ,

which was prev iously

graded o n a flat S ieve ,

li kewise of P aur s co n
’

structio n The operation .

in a ll the chambers bein g

perfectly alike it is ,

sufficie n t to exami n e o ne
sectio n D , .

The product in pass

in g through the outl et o f
the hop per b in to the
hopper I was subjected
to the effect of n air a

curre nt bl o win g through

the Ope nin g a out of the
a ir co n ductor
-
C Th e .

brann y a n d light mealy

particles were carried
away to section V the ,

heavier on es fell in to the

hopper I I n d in this ,
a

way o n the top floo r of

,

the p rifier the first separ

u ,

atio n of the product into

three cl asses accordin g to
the quality was effected .

W hen run n in g from

hopper I to I I I a n d
from h Opp er I I to I V the
stock un derwen t fann in g
for the s cOn d time by e

a dra ught imp elled

through the open in g a l .

Th e product was co n e

sequen tly subj e ct ed to a .

400 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR VI

aur s purifier a n d other machin es of the same type a n d bui lt n the

P
’

, o

same prin cip le were in use in mills for S ixty years Ha v in g spread
,
.

a l l o v er E urope they were ca lled W ien er Griesp u t m a schin en mit

,
z

S to ssw in d or simp ly W ien er S to ssm a s hin en

,
”
This
“
S to sswin d c .
”
,
”

i e the air forced in to the machin e caused the flour mil lers n o sma ll
. .
,

ann oyan ce as the mi ll was fi lled with c louds of flour dust which freely
, ,

escaped from the purifier driv en by the impell ed air Naturally there .
,

was a series of attempts to ob viate this in co n v en ien ce but they a ll were ,

con structive ha lf measures which brought n o satisfactory results

-

B t in 1 8 6 7 J W o ern er purifier made its appeara n ce

’
u , , . n d im s ,
a

mediately dro v e out the machin e with the S to w in d that blip ded the ss

mi ll with fl o u r dust The n ew machin e differs from the machin es of the

-
.

FI G 3 8 2
. .

P aur type in that in stead of a b l ast f n W oern er adopted a n exhaust

,
a

o ne I n this w a ythe f n n o t o n ly does n o t fi ll the mi ll with dust but

. a ,

o n the co n trary c l ea n s it .

W o ern r s purifier (Fig 3 8 2 ) was a box of about the same ize as P aur s
’ ’
e . S

machin e al so divided in to three chambers A B n d C Over the puri

, , ,
a .

fi r there w s the sieve b to which a v ibratory motio n was imparted with

e a

the aid of a cran k shaft receivin g its motion from the ceilin g dri v e1)

through the belt pulley l On the same shaft was a ha n d wheel m

-
c . c -

adj ustin g the reciprocatin g mo v emen t of the siev e w hich was swin gin g ,

o n rods n Th air co n d uctors kl commun icate with the gen era l air
. e c

chann e l run n in g to the aspiratin g f n a .

Th product graded accordin g to size i n to three grades flows in to

e , ,

separate chambers of the purifier through hoppers c c a n d c The ,

’

,
”
.

p roc ess Of
gradi n
g accordi n g to the qua l ity in th ch a mb er A is c arried e
C H AR VI ] F LOUR MI LL I NG 40 1

Ou t in the same order as in B a n d C From the hopper c the semo lin a .

'

fa lls into divisio n s I I n d I un dergoin g a trip le fan n in g by dr ght

,
’
,
a
”
, a au

aspirated through the open in g g Th l ightest particles of bra n n d dust . e a

pass in to division I I I n d are carried out through th air t run k hk driv en

,
a e

by the fa n in to the dust chamber ; the seco n d grade of midd lin g s fa lls .

in to divisio n I I n d is subject ed to a twofol d fa nn in g By this method

a .

here too as in P aur s purifier three products are obtain ed W ith the s ole
, ,
’

, ,

differen ce that the light ref se of P aur spurifier covered the mill with dust
,
u
’

while here they could c ollect in the dust chamber or at least be discharged ,

in to the open As we see in the drawin g in the p urifier the velocity a n d

.
,

the q uan tity of air emp loyed could be regulated by mean s of the swin gin g
purifier was covered the sides by a t mber a s n g n which
'

ga t e s i T
. h e o n i c 1 I

wind ows f were made fo rin specti n g the operatio n .

On this n w prin cip l e of the S augwi n d i e o n the pri n cip le of

”
e ,
. . .

operatin g by mea n s of a curren t of as

pirated air there sprun g up a series of
,

more o r l ss successful types of purifiers

j
e ,

sti ll workin g w ith a flat Vibratin g sie v e

outside the purifier itself .

Of these purifiers of a s light ly S imp lified

,

type worked in comparatively S impl e mills ,

we should men tio n Arn dt s machin e ’

F 3 83 IG
which made its appearan ce in 1 8 6 9 .
. .

As may be see n in the drawi n g (F ig th e midd lin gs fe ll throu gh .

the hopper T upo n the sieve C which was given a vibratory r cipro e

catin g motio n (up to 2 00 v ibratio n s ) by a c ran k mecha n ism b—i

‘

The n d of the siev e was laid n ro ll s g

e There were o n l y two productso .

here : the thro u gh s which r n in to the fee din g hopper Q n d spout a a a ,

a n d the refuse which was discharged Th fa n n in g of the product Wa s

‘

. e

performed by draughts impelled through tubes l a n d c ; the air was a, c,

—
sucked in by fa s V V e n din g in tubes f with bags tied to them for co l
n

lectin g the flour dust a n d the light bra n n y refuse Th hi ghest qua lity . e

middlin gs passed in to c a n d those of a seco n d qua lity in to the side spouts

d
. At the e n ds of spouts c a n d l th r were set bosses p a n d g ha v in g side c e e ,

open in gs for lettin g the air out to these bosses which could be lowered ,

a n d ra ised t o regu l ate the in flow of air there were ba gs attac hed to receive
’
'

the clean ed middlin gs The tubes f were furn ished with win do ws 6
.

cov ered with a boltin g or lin en frame to leav e a passage for the air n d a

preven t the mea l dust a n d partic les of b r n fro m escapin g

'

a .

F o r a p eriod of t e n years after V o rn r s purifier was i n ve n ted V

e e
’

2 0
40 2 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ C H AR VI

this type of machin e was bein g perfected main ly in the directio n of ,

a multipl e aspiration n d the in crease of the n umber of grades of

a

middlin gs .

Th most successful a n d characteristic machin es in th at respect r

e a e

the purifiers of Mill ot a nd of Karl Ha ggen m a cher which appeared almost ,

simu ltan eous ly (the first in 1 8 7 9 the secon d in ,

Millo t s purifier S hown in a lo n gitudin a l a n d in a tra n sv ersa l sectio n

’
,

in Figs 3 8 4 n d 3 8 5 W a desig n ed to giv e a mu l tipl e fa n n in g to the pro

. a ,
s

duct which poured i nto the hoppers thro u gh the sieves TT (F ig 3 84) a n d ‘ ’
.

p assed thr o u gh the fun nel m to be graded The siev e with the hoppers .

was fixed o n four elastic stan ds t a n d vibrated from the eccen tric rods 3
operatin g from t he shaft which carried the in termediate belt pull ey 0
0 ,
-

to the fan pulley Thestock was co n v eyed (Fig 3 84 right ha n d side ) .

,
-

by the cha n n el at to the first sie v e c through which the air curren t passed -
.

Th e refuse Off the sie v e c flowed down a n in n er cha nn el to be further a sp ir

ated while the thro u ghs fell o n n in cl in ed receivin g board down which
,
a ,

it rolled o n to the other siev e c similar to the o n e precedin g This reiter .

ated process of fann in g o n e a n d the same product w s co n tin ued un til a

the clean ed middli n gs reached the receivin g spout d a n d were disch arged ’

in to the sack Th e particles of bran n d the mea l dust o n passin g the

. a ,

grates F were b lown by the fan V in to the dust chamber whereas the
, “ ,

heavier particles droppin g to the bottom left the purifier through the
, ,

chamber D I n this man n er on ly two grades of midd lin gs were yielded

’
.

by this purifier but these were w ell c lean ed

, .

F o r regul atin g the force of the draught there were apertures F the ,

open in g of which allowed a passage for the air a n d reduced the r refa c a

tion in the chambers D Besides that there w ere automatic va lves F.

,
’

which open ed by themse lv es as soo n as the rarefactio n in th e ch a m bers D

'

exceeded the set limits On Fig 3 8 5 is shown the chamber G in to which

. .

there passes a part of the fann ed air clean ed by filterin g through lin en ,

tissue g Through this chamber G the air was directed by gutta—

. percha
s leev es r un der the sieves T an d T n d c lean ed their bl in ded meshes by ’
a

pressure .

F rom this description we may j udg e how thoughtfull y this machin e

was co n structed I n the con struct ion of Millo t s machin e a ll the fun da
.
’

men ta l prin cip les o f a purifier were foreseen man ifo ld aspiration regula ,

tion of the air pressure a n d clean in g of the siev e S till Ha ggen m a cher s
, .
’

purifier was a more perfect type of the machin e in so far that it afforded -

the possibi lity of obtain in g three grades of midd lin gs Altogether .

,

it must be n ot ed that K Ha ggen m a cher is o n e of the most eminent.

40 4 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR VI

co n structors of mi ll machin ery j ust ly occupyin g a p lace of hon our in the

,

history of the dev elopmen t of flour mi llin g W e sha ll therefore meet .

, ,

his n ame more than on ce again when studyin g the con structio n s of
,

machin es .

Ha ggenm a ch er s purifier is S hown in Fig 3 86 H ere we see the sa me

’
. .

scheme of vibratin g sieves a an d a deliveri ng their thro u gh s to the hoppers

’

d (two o n the right a n d two o n the l eft ha n d side of the p u ri fi er ) a n d the

-

refuse in to thehoppers b a n d b The middlin gs of the highest quality after

’
.

a quadrup le exhaust p a ss to the spout p those of medium to g a n d , ,

fin a lly the lower grade to r The meal dust a n d particles of bran o n pass
, .

FI G . 386 .

in g through the fan V are con veyed by the air t ru n k B to the dust -

chamber The outer air flo Ws in through the open in gs 8 a n d s which

.
1 z,

are furn ished with lid s o n hin ges these lids may be raised by the pres
sure o i the outside air thus cl osin g the Open in gs a nd drop un der their
, ,

proper weight B u t the rarefaction of air in the cha mber of the p uri fier
.

may be a l so e ffected by the win dows 1 2 3 n d 4 through which the , , , a ,

desired quan tity of outer air is let in as these win dows may be opened ,

more or less by rack gates m .

I n the beginn i n g of the eighties the co n structio n of this purifier was

a ltered so that it could yiel d up to five grades of middlin gs A gen eral
, .

in sta ll atio n of these p urifiers is seen in Fig 3 8 7 The siev es ab here are . .

placed o utside the machi n e a n d the stock graded accordin g to size o n the
, ,

sie v e is d eliv ere d to the purifier b y a n a u tomat ic e lev ator F

, Th e fans .
 ca n »
. w] FL OU R MILLI NG 405

are likewise set outside the purifier an d commun icate with them by mean s
of aspiratin g air co n ductors o (co llector ) a n d o (bra n ches o ff to the puri ’

fiers ) The graded product run s to the grou n d floor to be packed

. .

Th e further impro v eme n t of Ha ggen m a ch r s purifier sta n ds in co n

’
e

n e ctio n with the in ve n tio n of p la n ift rs B u t substa n tia lly the last
s e .

types Of these machin es remain ed purifiers with ma n y aspiration s in ,

which the sie v es form a separate in depen de n t machin e W e shal l return .

again to the latest types of these purifiers a n d turn our atten tio n for
.
,

the presen t to a n ew group of machin es for gradin g middlin gs .

.

The fun dame n ta l prin cip l e of actio n in the machin es of the first
,

group was the aspiratio n of stock fallin g because of the force of gra vity .

FI G 3 87 . .

In the sev en ties howev er there appear machin es in which besides the
, , ,

force of a ir curre nts a nd gra v ity a n attempt was made to in troduce

,

cen trifuga l force .

I n 1 8 7 6 such a machin e (o n e of the first ) wa s paten ted by Buchho ltz .

The actio n of this machi n e (Fig 3 8 8 ) was as fo llows . The stock .

flowin g through the hopper a upo n the rap idly r otatin g disc 0 is spread
out through the e ffect of cen trifuga l force a n d fann ed The heav iest .

particles fa ll in to the chamber n the medium o n es in to rn a n d the bra n

,
'

a n d mea l dust in to the air tru n k

-
d which commu n icates with the
,

suctio n fa n The b o ss b with a ha n d Whee l may be raised or lowered

.
-

(screw thread ) which

,
a ll ows of regu l ati n g the flow F rom n a n d m the .

product is remo ved by scrapers or run s down the i n c lin ed hOpp er to the
,

spout .
40 6 F LO UR MI LLI NG [CH AR VI

An other
machin e co n structed by two E n glishme n F Thomson n d
, , . a

W W i lliamson in 1 8 80 is based o n the same prin cip le but a repeated

.
, , ,

aspiration of the stock is in troduced by this time Through a f u n n el 3 .

F
( gi 3 8.9 ) the stock is poured upo n the rapid ly rotati n g disc t from which ,

it i s flun g o ff by the actio n of the cen trifuga l force an d sub j ected to

aspiratio n S uccessiv ely a ccordin g to its qua lity the stock falls in to
.
, ,

k h k whi le the o ffa l is carried away through the tube r to the dust
g, a, l ,

chamber The n umber of middlin gs grades here is three n d the n umber

.
,
a

Of fa nn in gs two though four to six floors of I coul d be made

, n d the n t ,
a

four to six aspiratio n s would be Obtain ed .

Th theoretic prob l em of m otio n of the partic les for this t pe of

e
y

FI G . 3 88 . FI G 3 89. .

purifier is most simp le but the in troductio n in to the machin e Of a co n

,

structiv e de v ice in the shape of gyratin g di scs ren dered it co n siderably

more comp licated that type of purifier is therefore qui te extin ct n o w .

W ith this the history of the first period of de v el opmen t of purifier

.

may be con cl uded B eginn in g with the eigh ties of the last cen tury the
.
,

machines for gradin g the stO k accordin g to qua lity begin to devel op c

in to an other type .

II

MI DD L I N G S AND D U N S T GRA D I N G
-
M A CH IN ES OF TO -
D AY

After
the series of modification s in the co n struction s of machin es for
gradin g the middlin gs a n d dun st accordin g to qual ity recorded abo v e
.
,

modern tech n ics fixed upon two types of machin es On e of the se types .

retain ed the prin cip les Of Ha ggen m a her s first purifier which i n P ro c
’

,
40 8 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CHAR VI

acquire di ffere n t v elocities of motio n R un n in g Off the spreader board .

,

these particl es hav e various speeds a n d therefore when meetin g a , ,

curren t of air giv e differen t deflectio n s from their in itial direction

,
.

Fal lin g in accordan ce with their qua l ity in to the botto m l ess feedin g
boxes c the middlin gs pass through them in to the chamber spa ce
, ,

w here they u n dergo a seco n d fa n n in g after which the c l ean ed product ,

drops in to hoppers d divided accor din g to qua lity O v er these ,

.

hoppers adj ustab le va lves are p laced a n d may be mo ved to the right ,

or to the left accordin g to the force of the draught from the fan a n d
,

the size of the stock graded From the hopper d the graded product .

ru n s to the worms a n d is discharged by them from the machin e .

The D ble Gra vity P rifier I n Figs 3 9 2 a n d 3 9 3 is shown a

ou u .

_
-
.

doubl e gravity purifier a lso built by H gg n m a cher a n d V o ll The stock

,
a e .

fall s first upo n the top sie v e S feedi n g the thro u gh s to the secon d siev e
a n d the tai l s for d ischarge Th seco n d sie v e S passes the smaller ’
. e

thro u gh s from the right ha n d side ha lf to the correspo n ding part of the
-

purifier Th e bo lted product ru n s in to the hoppers A when ce it is

.
,

delivered by feed ro lls to the spreader boards b On the way from the a .

spreader boards b the stock is aspirated a n d drops to the bottomless ,

boxes c from which it is directed in to boxes d in streams separated

,

accordin g to quality an d size a n d un dergoes fan n in g on ce more o n its ,

r oute The boxes d hav e adjustable va lv es 6 which are regulated

.
, ,

in accorda n ce with the size of the stock to be grad ed From the boxes d ,

the graded product flows to the di scharge spouts f for further treatmen t .

B etween the di visio n s of the purifier there is the fa n chamber in whi ch the
suction fan h is set .

The Ha ggen m a ch er a n d V o ll s machin es we ha v e examin ed are de

’

scribed accordin g to specimen s built by the works of D o b ro vy n d Na bho ltz a ,

but the same type of machin es of S imilar prin cip le are made by other
works al so such as D a v rio Luther Amme Giesecke a n d Ko n eg n &
, e , , , e ,
c .

’
—
S mi th s S ieve P rifier S mi th s sie v e p u rifi er was origi n ally in v e nted
u .
’ '

in America a n d u n der the n ame of R eform was e v olved by the work “ ”

,

of S eck Bros I t is con structed o n a d ifferen t prin cip le of actio n to that

.

of Ha gg n m a ch r gravity purifier which origin ates in I g n atz P aurs

e e
’
s ,
’

first siev e purifier .

Th e prin cip l e of actio n of that sie v e purifier is as fo ll ows (Fig 3 9 4 ) .

I f we compe l the stock to tra v e l o v er the sie v e a — in the directio n poin ted a

by arrows b n d at the same time impel a c u rren t of air of a sufficien t

, a

force un der the siev e the state of the flowin g product will be similar to
,

that of boilin g I t s light partic les wi ll be lifted o v er the sie ve a n d carried

.
CHAP . FLOU R MI LL I NG
4 10 F LO U R MI LLI NG [ CH AR VI

by the draught upwards P art of that light refuse wi ll be suc ked out
.

towards the fan the rest con sistin g of heavier o ffa l will co llect in boxes
, , ,

Ov er the sie v e into which it wi ll drop o w in g to the abatemen t in the

,

v el ocity of the air which expan ds n lea vin g the ca n a l s between the boxes
,
o .

I n this way the air curre n t here lies at n an gl e of 1 80 to the directio n

0
-
a
,

of bo ltin g a n d at n an gle of 9 0 to the direction of motion The light

,
a
°
.
.

partic les are lifted off the siev e a n d separated as light or heavy offal Th . e

heav y product passes through the sie v e n d the tails consist of the large ,
a ,

gen erally le ss hea vy product because the largest sized middlin gs the co n ,
-

ditio n s of reductio n f the kern e l s bein g equa l a lw ays co n sist of the

.

o ,

in tegumen ta l particles of grain .

1

The pri n cip l e of this mach in e has remained u n cha n ged up to the
pre sen t day a n d o n this prin cipl e the machin es are design ed in E urope
,

FI G . 39 4 .

as wel l as in America I n some co n structiv e min uti ae the works of S eck

.

B ros ha v e a ltered their

. R eform purifier from their first model a n d ,

in its presen t shape it is giv e n o n Figs 3 9 5 n d 3 9 6 Th stock to be . a . e

treated flows in to the hopper n d is the n fed in a n eve n stream by a, a

the feed ro ll b to the surface of the siev e c performin g a reciprocatin g ,

motion Abov e the siev e at n o great height are set simil arly to fire
.
, ,

grates sheet iro n ch an n el s at with their en ds in c lin ed to the l on gitudin al

-

chann el s f Th siev e bein g p laced in a c losely shut up chamber the whol e

. e ,

of the air sucked in by the f n 3 must pass through the boltin g c loth a .

The light refuse is carried away by the f n to the dust co l lector a ,

the heav iest fall s in to the sheet iro n chan n el s t an d the side worm (Abstoss -
a

der Aspiration ) a n d the medium refuse upo n the in clin ed p lan es lyin g
,

o v er the chan n el s cl Th refuse collectin g in side the chamber gen era lly
. e

1
In o ne and th e sa m e br k ea or b kp
re re a assa g e the co l o u re d m iddl ing s i
, . e.th e p a rt icl e s
co vered wit h br an , a re a l ways l arger th th an e p u re o n es T is is du e t o
. h the f
a ct t a t h
the m iddl ing s wit h ff o a l a re m o re el a stic, a n d , c o n s e q fer g rea te r resista n ce to
u en tl y o f ,
re d u e

tio n t h an m iddling s ou t of th e p u re en do s p erm .

4 12 FLO UR MILLING [ C H AR Vi

bo ltin g tray where the greater part of them la n d o n the deposit p lat
,

forms 7 W hen se veral trays 3 are used with spaces in between them
. ,

the air curre n t passin g through the siev e 2 is equal in force in all parts
-

of such a siev e The trays are made with gra v e l s 8 for the sake of
.
.

greater lightn ess a n d owin g to their chann e lled shape serv e for
, , ,

co llectin g the heavy refuse which has a ten den cy to fallin g back o n to
,
.

the siev e I t is best to fix the trays 3 with their en ds to the frame of

.

FI G 3 9 8
. .

the siev e 1 so that when swin gin g the dust in the groo ves 8 a n d o n the
, , ,

side cha n n el s 7 would tra v el to the lower edge an d fall in to the dust
collectin g box 9 Figure 1 0 in dicates the S pout con v eyin g the stock in to
.

the workin g space 1 1 the spout for o v rta ils 1 2 a hopper for the thro gh s
, e ,
u ,

1 3 the frame of the machin e I f the air curre n t o n pass in g by the de

.
-

, [

fl e tin g trays 3 were to r n direct ly to the f n 6 part of the o ffals

c ,
u a ,

wo ld n t settle o n the side chann e ls 7 but would be carried to the

u o ,

fa n .To avoid this the directio n of the draught b lo wi n g by the trays 3

,
 CH AP . VI ] F LOUR MI LL I NG 4 13

is sharp ly a ltered by mea n s of the baffle p late 1 4 at tached to the frame 1 3 .

I n the cen tre of the ba ffle p l ate 1 4 there is made a lo n g n d n arrow ho l e 1 5 a

,

para llel to the S paces between the deflectin g trays 3 Thus ll the .
,
a

air passi n g between the trays is deflected to the Open in g 1 5 a n d the ,

greater part of the offal s settl e o n the S ide chan n el s 7 W ith j oin ts .

FI G . 399 .
—Cr o ss S ectio n o f
-
S ie ve an d C h a nn e l Co w l .

17 un der the ho le 1 5 there r attached adj ustab le gates 1 6 the free edges
a e ,

of which may be brought c loser to or further from each other by mean s

of rods 1 8 or some other con triv a n ce for regulatin g the width of the Open
in g W ith figure 1 9 is in dicated the deflectin g cap o v er the ope n i n g 1 5
.
,

which compel s the rema in in g partic les of dust owin g to the cen trifugal ,

force they de vel op to settl e o n the to p side of the baffle p late 1 4 when ce
,
'

FI G 4
. 00 —P e rspe c tive V iew o f C h a nne l Co wl FI G . 40 1 .
-
h
C a nn e l Co wl ra ised fo r Clea n in g
in W k
o r ing P o s itio n . o f S ieve .

they may be remo ved by a run n in g brush or in some other way Ha vin g .

passed the ba ffl e p late 1 4 the exhausted air goes through the passage 2 0 .

to the fa n 6 This f n mpe l s the air a lo n g the passage 2 1 to the ex

. a I

a n sio n chamber separator 2 2 which is of the ce n trifuga l type I n the

p
.
,

expan sion chamber the air circulates spira lly an d makes its exit through
the outlet 2 3 Th rest of the dust deposited by cen trifuga l force o n the
. e

ca s in g co l le ct in th e d u stbox 2 4 w he n ce b y me an s o f th
,
e worm 2 5 it is ,
 4 14 F LOUR MI LL I NG r
C H AP . VI

taken out of the machin e or co n v eyed to o n e of the side cha nn el s 7 .

S e v era l fa n s a n d separators may be emp l oyed Fig I V i ll ustrates o n . .

-

a reduced scal e the p lan of a machin e simi lar to the o n e examin ed but , ,

with two fa n s 6 an d two dust coll ectors 2 2 .

Fo r c onv en ie n ce sake wh en usin g the sie v e purifier for coarse pro

duct o r for two kin ds of stock with a stro n ger curren t of air the sieve is
'

divided in two parts an d the stream of product is guided separate ly to

,

each half Both the air curren ts are directed in to the cen trifugal separa
.
-

F I G 4 02
. .

tor n d th f n a n the former case I n Fig 4 0 2 is giv en the

a e a ,
s
.
I . .

l o n git udin a l sectio n of such a sie v e purifier Th parts correspo n din g to . e

parts I I I a n d I I I are marked w ith the same figures Th siev es 2

, , . e

face each other at n in clin e F o r each of the sieves there is a sep arate
a .

feedin g spout 1 0 Number 1 1 i n dicates the deposit p latforms for refuse

.

c an d 9 an ordin ary worm for refuse rejected by deflectin g trays an d the side
deposit p latforms of both the siev es Th dust collector 2 2 is furn ished . e

with two in lets adj usted by the valv es 2 6 so that through both the sie ves ,

there hould pass a ircurren ts of equal force I n this case the air is n o t
S -
.
“

impelled through the collector but drawn through it by the f n 6 sta , a

t io n ed by the ou tle t 2 3 Th o ffal fro m the box 2 4 oe s to t h wor m 2 5

e
g e
.

,
 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR V I

which co n v eys it out of the machin e O v er the di visio n s of the siev e .

there may be set b oards 2 7 to reduce in case of n eed the air curren t which -

passes through the siev e at this poin t where the stren gth of the draught ,

is the greatest .

A perspecti v e v iew of the sie v e p rifier is gi v e n o n Fig 4 0 3 u . .

S chn ei der J cqu et t Co s S ieve P u rifi e

,
a (o r — A characteristic pe o u
.
’
.

lia rity of the S ch n eider Jacquet CO sie v e purifier is that first l y it

,
.
, ,

requires n o dust co llector for the fan o ffa ls an d seco n d ly it Operates

-

, ,

with o n n d the same vo lume of air which mo v es in the machin e in a

e a ,

locked curre n t .

On Figs 4 0 4 a n d 4 0 5 may be see n the l o n gitudin a l (the midd le part

.

FI G . 404 . FI G . 4 05 .

of the mach in e is cut out ) an d tran sv ersa l section s The actio n of the .

machin e is as fo llows .

Th e a ir in the chamber of the machin e is brought i n to motion by the

f n a with n outside drivi n g be lt pul l ey b
a a From the fa n the curre n t
-
.

of air passes down a vertica l spout to a horizo n ta l cha n n el 0 (Fig .

Th en it tra v e l s as in dicated by the arrow through the l o n gitudin a l

bottom open in g t of this cha nn e l to the workin g chambers un der the
a

siev es a n d return s to the fa n On its way the air passes through .

vibrati n g sie v es n which the stock to be purified l ies

e, o Th e lighter .

particles are carried off the siev e by the air curren t to pass through the -

chambers f n d open in gs g in to the separatin g space hf I n tra v elling

a

from the sieves 3 down the chambers f the cu rren t owin g to their de , ,

creasin g tran sversal section becomes n arrower The v el ocity of the

, .

draught here must therefore in crease ; it attain s its largest magni tude
w he n the curre n t passes th r
ou gh the o pe n in s
g g nd the n it a l l at o nce ,
a
 C H AP . v1 ] F LOU R MI LL I NG 4 17

drops to its minimum so that the light partic les carried away l osin g their
, ,

kin etic en ergy drop in to the chamber of the worm i Th in crease in

, . e

the v e locity of the air curren t when pass in g through the chambers f
-

is a n adva n tage in so far that the light partic les separated from the
,

stock o n sie ves 3 ca nn ot fa ll back Owin g to the expan sio n of air in the
’

co llectin g space the light particles sett le down a n d are then ce carried
, ,

away by mean s of the worm con veyor i The air chambers f are so .

arran ged that the ope n in gs g ca n be adjusted by the va lves 76

,

E ach machin e has se v era l chambers f arra n ged in rows F o r the .

stock u n der treatme n t to be e ven ly cl ea n ed it is in dispen sab le that the ,

air shou ld pass through a ll the chambers at a n equa l pressure Th . e

pressure of the curren t lea vin g the f n n d run n in g in to the chann el c a a

decreases when p a ssm g down this cha n n el Because of t his di fferen ce in .

pressure the out let cl runn in g be low a lo n g the cha n n el is made w ider
, c

behin d (from the fa n ) tha n in fro n t n d has in this man n er the shape of ,
a , ,

a trapezium E xp elled through this Open ing in the cha n nel the air flows
.
,

out with an e ve n pressure at e v ery poin t of the passage n d Owi n g to ,

a ,

the backward in creasin g width of the open in gs in the sie ves e b lows ,

through the workin g ch ambers with differen t force This wi ll be c lear ly .

exp lain ed by the fo llowin g .

B y passin g through the out let in the chan n e l c the air acts upo n the ,
,

re v erse surface Of a ll the sie v es with equa l pressure S in ce the stock

6
‘

to be purified lies in a large mass n the first sieve which is fi n e ly meshed

o , ,

the purifyin g draught of air cann ot pass through this layer Of product
as easily as through the more open back sie ves where the layer of product
has a lready been part ly bo lted n d is co n sequen tly n o t so thick The
,
a .

qua n tity of air pass in g through the fro n t sie v e is therefore the least a n d ,

in proportio n as we approach the last sieves it in creases s in ce the r , e

s ista nc to be o vercome by the air curre nt in passin g through a suc

e -

c ssiV e row of sie v es with decreasin g n umbers gradua ll y dimi n ishes

e .

Thus the gradin g air curre n t pen etrates a ll parts of the machin e with
-

equa l pressure but through the workin g chambers f owin g to the dimin
, ,

ishin g resista n ce the air passes in differe n t qua n tities

,
Owi n g to this .
,

the process of purification is performed e ve n ly in a ll the air chambers ,

because the draught pe n etrates in to them with equa l pressure .

D own the in l et boss I (Fig 4 0 4 ) the stock to be graded ru n s in a ma nn er

.

required to the vibratin g s ie ves e in the machin e o ver which it tra ve ls ,

in a l o n gitudi n a l directio n At the boss m the coarser parts w hich

.

ha v e n o t passed through the siev e meshes are tailed o ver The .

middlin gs which passed through the meshes into the box n are carried
2 D
4 18 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ CH A R VI

away by worm co n veyors To a llow of the frequen t in spectio n of th

. e

purification durin g operation in the chambers f there are win dows

,
0

adapted especially for that purpose Th even distributio n of the air

. e

curren t in the who le machin e do w n the cha n n el s 0 a n d h has this advan tage ,

that the fin e light particles are n o t carried by the draught to the chambers ,

but settle in a specia l compartmen t The chief chamber for the precipita
.

tio n of the light particles h w hich a lso run s down the len gth Of the
,

FI G . 4 06 .

machin e is to this n d divided by suitab ly adapted partitio n s p in to a

, e

certain number of section s so that each two opposite in lets of the cham
,

bers g ope n in to o n e such section The partition s do n o t cut Off the cha mber
.

h in its ful l height so that the light particl es of product sett lin g in ll the
, a

sectio n s may be discharged by mean s of a commo n worm co n v eyor i .

The surfaces o n w hich the partic l es separated from the stock preci

p it t
a e d are so arra n ged that these partic les can n ot remain sett l ed a n
y
where n d are co n stan t ly de livered by the machin e as heavy o ffa l
, a
42 0 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AI ’
. w

of the chamber a may be sla n tin g a n d the n the hea vy refuse wi ll ,

ru n out of itse l f ; or the draught m ay a l so be l eft there of such force

that it would be ab le to carry these particles out of the chambe r with it .

I n the seco n d case the hea v y refuse ca n be co llected by the dust co llector -

or in some other way .

I II

CAP AC I TY OF P U RI F I E RS

his book P rofessor Zwory kin gives the capacity of the purifi rs in
In e

accordan ce w ith the len gth of the working air fi ssure .

Let us n ame the capacity of the machin e Q the len gth of the fissure b , ,

the v elocity of motio n of the product v n d the width of the fiss u re (the ,
a

thickn ess of the stream of product ) e Then we obtain .

Q bet) a ,

where is the coefficie n t Of proportion ality

a .

I f we n ame the fin ished stock Q it may be expressed through Q by in

0,

tro du cin g the coe fficie n t of proportio n al ity k which is the n umber of p as ,

sages required for clean in g the product

3 bev
k
the n umber of passages is proportion ate to the thic kn ess o f
B u t 16 , ,

the sheet of product fed in a n d inv ersely proportionate to its av erage

dimen sio n s Therefore .

sages will diminish with the in crease of the

, n umber Of fannings n .

Therefore

By substitutin g h from ()
2 in to we obtain
G

in ce practice shows that a lmost in ll co n structio n s of purifiers

S a

the Vel ocity of the feed is a con stan t quan tity we fin ally obtain : ,

=
Q0 Ab 6n ()
3
i .
c pa city of the purifier s directly depe n de nt o n the len gth of the
e . the a i

fissure the size o f the sto ck treated and the n umber o f fan nin gs
,
CH AP . VI ] FLOU R MI LL I NG 42 1

Experime nts S how that 1 cm Of total le n gt h of the draught fissures .

produces from 1 to klg per hour or 5 4 to 2 7 lb per day (2 4 hours ) of pure

. .

semoli n a depe n din g o n the size Of the produ ct

, .

These data refer to Ha gge n m a cher s t ype of purifier As to the

’
.

purifier Of S eck s type ( R eform this cal cul ation s useless for the
’ “
1 ,

air curren t operates through the siev e Fo r the siev e purifiers it woul d
-

be n ecessary to recko n the cross sectio n of th b o ltin g c l oth l ower in g

'

e ,

it by a certain coe fficien t because the stock passin g through the sieve,

b lin ds the meshes of the clo th fo r the mome n t '

I n cal cul atin g the n umber Of purifiers o n e may u se the data Of the
works which deser ve full confi de n c e The compou n d Tab le X LI I of
, .
“

the capacities o f the Reform type siev e purifiers from practice gives ”
, ,

results alm ost similar to the data Of the catal ogues of the German works .

TAB LE X LI I

CA P A C I TY OF S I EV E P U RI FI E R S

k f
W o r ing S u r ace o f th e Cap acity p er H o u r in t s

D imensio ns
.

of S ieve o n a n Averag e (fo r

Machine No s Df k
i ferent W o r s) i n S u a re q
D u nst
.

Met res . Middl in gs . .

—1 6 O ~

1 0 0—
13 2
- -
5 9 -

O 800 1 000
° ~
° —1 1 O -
4 18 —
60

0 5 0 0—
0 6 40 5 9—
7 8
- -
3 2 —
4 5 - -

0 3 5 0 0 4 00
- -
-
36 5 1
1 — 2 -
1—
so o

On av erage it m ay be recko n ed that 1 square metre of the sieve

an

purifier clean s 1 0 cwt Of middlin gs an d 6 cwt Of dun st per hour

. . .

I n cl osin g the sectio n o n g radin g the product accordin g to the qua lity ,

we m ust poin t out that a gravity purifier of H gg n m a ch r s type may a e e

’

be employed for semo lin a a n d siev e purifiers of the Reform type are
,

preferable for c lean in g fin middlin gs n d du n st these machines bein g

e a ,

O f a more de l icate structure .

 CHAP TE R V II

ACCE S S O RY L
AP P I ANCE S AND ME CHANI S MS

CO M P AR A TI VE L Y rece ntly to the fu n dame n tal mill m h n ery there ha v e

, ac l

been added a series f app lian ces n d mechan isms of n accessory char
O a a

acter without the assistan ce of which the mi llin g process woul d be

,

impeded or woul d produce u n fav ourab le results in respect to the

quality of the product as w ell the health Of the sta ff Operatin g the as

mill .

The devel opme n t f automatic gri n di n g req ui red n impro v eme n t in

O a

the tran sportation serv ice at the mill n d the n ecessity for keepin g a ,
a

certain stan dard of flour n the market compelled millers to empl oy o

machin es an d apparatus with the aid of w hich the i n flue n ce of the ih

con stan cy in the quality of w heat upo n the outward appearan ce of the
flour might be n eutralise d to a certai n degree .

Th most essen tial n ecessity for a mi ll is the ve ntilation Of the

e
“

machin es B y mean s of exhaustin g the grai n clean i n g machin es as we

.
-

s a w whe n studyi n g their co n structio n the remova l of dust n d scree nin gs , a

is attain ed w hich is indispen sab le n t on ly for the machin es but for the
, o ,

mill buildin g as w ell si n ce the pen etratio n of dust in to the parts in co n

,

tact with the machin e is in jurious to them n t to speak Of the d an ger of ,

o

exp l osion s fires n d i n jury to health

, ,
a .

I n the mi ll proper the ve n til atio n f machin ery is of still greater O

importan ce because n t o nly dust but evaporatio n occurs here I n

, o .

fact o w in g to the heat gen erate d by gri n din g the water co ntain ed in the
, ,

grain turn s partly to steam especially in the millin g of soft kin ds of rye
,

a n d wheat The heated air saturated w ith steam comes in co ntact

.
, ,

with the cold wall s Of the machin es n d bede w s them This phe n ome n on a .

is iden tical to the sweatin g of cold win dow pan es w he n they are breathe d
upon I n the wi n ter the formation of d w in the machin ery of the mills
.
, e

with badl y arran ged ve n tilation is so great that the w ater pours down the
i nn er wall s f the roller mill s in thin streams
O .

Besides the machin es the spouts e lev ators worm con veyors an d , , , ,

bin s suffer from the warm damp air Th timber parts rot n d the iro n , . e ,
a

rusts The flour tur n s to paste c l ots of d ough b l ock the spouts fin d their
.
, ,

422
424 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ CH AR VI I

F
( gi . 4 1is suc h n ap paratus I t is a cycl on e n d an as pirator com
1 ) a .
a

b in e d .
break product run s from the roll s i n to the feed tube D n d
The a

through it o n to the rotatin g disc A which fl in g the product up fan wise ,

s .

On its route from the space E to the hopper F the product is subjected to ,

the action of n air curre n t which carries aw ay the dust Offal a n d bees
a -
, ,

win g Out of the hopper F the cl ean ed break ch o p flo w s down the spout
.

G i n to the sifter for further gradi n g .

The aspiratio n is effecte d in the fo ll ow in g mann er The fa n W sucks .

the i r out of the cycl o n e in to the space E n d drives it down arrows S

a a

into the chamber B W hen the air is passin g out .

of the right han d side part of the chamber into -

the left un der the divi di n g partition L the ,

heavier particles of integume nt devel op a n ce

trifu g l force n d fa ll i n to the worm P a n d the a , a

air with the lighter dust particles flows into the

cycl on e Th ce n trifugal force presses these light . e

particles of dust again st the wall s of the cycl on e ,

n d they roll dow n a arro w s S into the worm ,

w hil e the pure air is agai n draw n up to the space

E I n this w y the work is performed by a o n
. a c

stant quantity of ir Th o ffal from the chamber a . e

B n d the cyc l on e collects gen era lly in a common '

worm n d is di scharged as in dicated by arrow l

, a .

Th dust offal contain s also a part of break

e

flour which is the n separated away o n a sifter

'

, .

T preve n t a n y cir c u l atio n Of air there are l eather

o ,

F 411 IG
partitio
.
n s set in the worm .

—
.

(2 Co Ap pa ra tu sThe S chn eider, Ja cq u et

A .

'

more simple apparatus for clean in g the break stock is the chamber
illustrated o n Figs 4 1 2 4 1 3 n d 4 1 4 .
, ,
a .

This apparatus is statio n ed before the break ro ll s a n d separates the ,

o ffal from the bre k semolin a I f the break process has high breaki n g
a .

a n d eight breaks it is we ll to set the apparatus for the semo l i n a from the
,

first (after t h high breaki n g ) six breaks an d for the r b re ks (for the first
e e a

two of the three ) .

Fig 4 1 2 giv es the l o n gitudin al a n d ha l f of the tran sversal sectio n of

.

this apparatus which con sists of a rectan gular ti mber cupboard through
, ,

which there pass the worms an d f rthe remov al of the more or less a al o

heav y o ffal Th break semolin a fl ows down the spout A o n to the in

. e

clin d p l ate B
e On this p l ate th ere are set the di stributors b which break
.
,
CHAP . VII ] FLO U R MILL I NG 4 25

up the n arrow stream of product in to a broad sheet which desce nds as ,

shown by the arrow 0 to the out let i n to the box D ov er the roller mill .

On its route of desce nt the product is subjected to the actio n of a n air

FI G 4 1 2
. .

curre n t streamin g in through the crev ice betwee n the adj ustable gates
a
:

d a nd d Besides the regul atio n of the width of the crevice betwee n the
1 .

gates d n d d the force of the draught may be altered by the gate 0 The
a 1, .

air is aspirated by a fan through the spout E .

The l o n gitudi n a l a n d the side v iew of the i n sta llatio n of eight machi n es

FI G
. 4 13 . FI G 4 1 4
. .

is shown o n Figs 4 1 3 a n d 4 1 4 where it is see n that the Offa l passes i nto

.
,

the aspirated worm A whe nce it is conveyed to the sack or to the bolt
,

in g machi n es .

Th B ridd n 2 F wl r P n eu m a tic S ca lp er Attempts hav e

e o ( o e fte n .
-
O

bee n made to arra nge the c lea nin g of the break ch Op in the roller mill
42 6 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR vn

itself but with n o good result Of the l atest attempts a con struo
,
. ,

tion of the B riddo n Fow l er w orks in Man chester (Fig 4 1 5 ) deserv es .

his has been made the fou n dation of a system (paten ted) of mi ll in g
T .

I t is the outcome of experime n ts made by Fowl er in a Y orkshire mi ll .

He fou n d that a pro n ou n ced n atura l separatio n takes place in break

stock comin g from the n ip of di ago n al ro ll s Th heavier stock i e . e , . .

FI G 4 1 5
. .

partly broken wheat semo lin a n d heavy middlin gs are throw n farthest
,
a ,

from the roll while the break flour fin est middlin gs n d dun st are thrown
, ,
a

down o n the in side An adjustabl e divisio n board un der the n ip of the

.
,

ro lls e ffects without an y mechan ical age n cy an immediate separatio n of

, , ,

the heavy a n d the bran n y partic le s from the fl o ry stock a n d fin e dun st u .

Thus co n tamin atio n Of t h break flour or the productio n of i n ferior ttri

e a

tio n flo ur is obviated a n d the colour a n d gran u larity of the break flour

—
,

are impro v ed Curre ts of air workin g as in a gravity p rifier assist

n.
— u

th e separatio n s Th e system is worki n g most successfu lly in ma n y of

.

the largest British mill s a n d is regarded as o n e of the most successful

,

in n ovation s of recen t years .

II
DUS T -
E
COL L C TO R S

Du st cha mber
-
.
—Th simplest ki ds of
e n d u st ~
co llectors are dust cham
-

bers or dust -
bIns . T heir arra n gemen t is Very simp le . A free cor n er Of
42 8 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR VII

direction downwards a lon g the arrow S W ith the in crease of resistan c e .

to motion the air curren t in the n arrowest part of the co n e is impe lled in
-

the directio n of least resistan ce i e upwards n d passes out through the

,
. .
,
a

tube C Owi n g to the spiral motio n of the air the partic les of dust de
’
.

vel o p a ce n trifugal force n d press agai n st the wa ll s Of the cyc l o n e dow n

a ,

which they slide to the exit B in flue n ced by their gravity Thus the air .
,

emitted through 0 is perfectly pure an d free of dust .

S uch is the action Of a ll cyc l o n es This apparatus is v ery simp le its .

,

action is satisfactory but it is comparativ ely bulky

,
.

W ishi n g to impro v e the actio n of the cyc l o n e H owes works in America

’

suggested a more compl ex con struct io n of a n apparatus with a com

u l s o r spira l motio n of the air d dust i the chamber Fi
( g by
p y n n a 4 1 7 ) .

furn ishin g it with helical arms This complicatio n in the con struction
.
,

FI G 4 1 8
. . FI G . 4 19 . FI G 4 2 0
. .

however does n o t improve the action of the cycl on e but the con trary
,
, ,

for the arms hav e very little in flue n ce o n the directio n in which the air
travel s a n d at the same time retard the delivery of the dust
Cyclo n e —
, .

The Kn ickerb cker 0 o The cyc l o n es we examin ed have the

0 .

defect that quite a con siderab le part of the pressure is l ost because of
meetin g at a fair ly large an gle as we see in Fig 4 1 8 the ir fl owi n g in to
, .
,
a

the cycl on e an d gyratin g there T av oid a ny i ntersection Of th air

. o e

curre nts the celebrated American cycl on e works the Kn ickerbocker Co

, , .

(J ackso n M ichiga
, n ) which in ve n ted the first cyc l o n e suggested in 1 9 0 5 a
,
,

n ew pr n cip l e for a cyc l o n e in which a S pira l motio n is immedi ate ly com

i ,

m u ni c t d to the in fi o win g air as it is show n in Fi

a e 4 1 9 H ere the axis
,
g . .

of the e ffi x of the air does n o t coin cide with the axis of the cyc lon e
u .

The meetin g Of the air c rre n ts is ob v iate d in th cyc l o n e of such a o n

-
u e c

struction .

On Fig 4 2 0 may be see n the cyli n dric part of such a cyc l o n e

.
Th . e
CH AP . V II ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 429

air run s into the receiver A an d al on g the arrow L passes sp irally to the
p f
a rt itio ne d o f sectio n of the chamber J
a
T he sp ira l direct ion is co m .
e

m u n ica te d to the curren t by the wa ll s E a n d F Th first wall is c l osely . e

fitted to the wall M of the cyl in der while betwee n it a n d the wall F there ,

is a clearan ce H through which the superfluous amoun t of air can pass

out al on g the arrow L Th curren t of a ir L acts part ly as in the de I . e
“

flector in respect to the chamber J co n sequent ly the streams L a n d L , I

do n o t cross each other but coin cide An d if the a ir travellin g un der ,

.

the walls of the chamber J has n o t separated away the whole o f its dust ,

a n d offal the n in passi n g again in to the fresh supp l y chamber it ca n be

, , ,

totally freed of admixtures The exhaust air passes out through the .

ope n in g D eccen trically made in the lid of the cycl on e The position
,
.

of the Ope n in g D may be

altered sin ce the ri n g K is
,

ecce n trically set in the lid .

This is of co n seque n ce for a

correct settin g of the air out
let . The cyc l o n e c o n stru c
tion we hav e j ust examin ed is
the best of ll existin g types a

of these dust co llectors -

—
.

F ilter The most ge n er

s .

ally used dust collector is the -

tube filter which has almost ,

totally drive n out the cyc l o n e

in E uropea n mill s The .

tube filter is co n v n i n t in e e
'

this respect that occupyi n g ,

litt l e space it gives a l arge

w orkin g surface .

F 42 1 I G.
On Fig 4 2 1 we hav e a
.

pressure tube filter I t co n sists of two gen erally timber boxes A an d

.
, , ,

B the chambers of which commu n icate with each other by li ne n tubes

,
.

Th dusty air carried by the fa n 0 out of the ve n ti l ated chambers passes

e

i nto the top chamber A whe n ce it is distributed to the tubes a nd filters ,

through the c loth leavi n g the dust o n its in n er surface ,

.

From o ff the tubes the dust is shake n by mean s of a frame D which ,

has wire ru n n i n g from o n e side to the Opposite o n every o n e or two

'

rows of tubes Th distan ce betwee n the wires bein g less than the dia
. e

m eter of t he tu bes the l atter are compressed T he f r

am
,
e D ru n s up .
4 30 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR VII

a nd dow n u n in terrupted ly n d in this mann er shakes o ff the d t w hi h

,
a us , c

falls i nto the bottom box B The frame D rises n d falls by mea n s of .
a

four chain drives it bein g suspen ded o n the chain s a by mean s of straps b
,
.

The dust falle n to the bottom of the box c is scooped away by scrapers d ,

which r n dow n the full len gth of the box an d are brought i nto actio n
u

by a chai n drive g i n side it an d is throw n i nto the worm e whe n ce it is

,
'

delivered through the out let spout as i n dicated by the arrow 8 .

Fig 4 2 2 i llustrates the suctio n filter which di ffers from the preced
. ,

ing in that it is e n c l osed in a commo n box I n the first case the fan .

should be p l aced betwee n the aspirated mac hi n e n d the filter in the a ,

seco n d after the filter I n this man n er the f n sucks the air out of
. a

the box A The dusty air which is .

co n veyed i n to the top box by the air

pipe from the machi n es precipitates
i nto the tubes a n d filters through their
c l oth o w i n g to the air in the box A,

bei n g rarefied Co n seque nt ly through .

,

the fa n there passes pure air .

I n compari n g these two types of

fil ters w must speak in favour of '

, e

the first o n e for che ap p l ants seei n g ,

that first ly its con structio n is more

simp le secon dly it requires 1 5 to ,

2 0 per ce n t l ess power there bein g n o .

,

such resistan ce to the outflow of the

exhaust air as we see in the suction
filter ; t hird ly n d l ast ly its Opera a ,

tio n is easily supervised whereas in ,

t h e suctio n fi lter the shaki n g frame

F 42 2 IG
is hidde n in the hermetically c l osed
. .

box A The l atter circumstan ce coul d be ob viated in the suctio n filters

.
,

if a gl ass in spectio n win dow were to be mad e in A but for some reaso n
or other n o n e of the works do it though th is would be Very useful , .

Amo n g the defects of the pressure fi lter we may cou n t the fact that the
exhaust air n t always free of dust passes direct ly into the mill whereas
,
o , ,

in the suctio n fi lter it is discharged by the fa n i n to the Ope n a n d the ,

mill does n o t remai n free of d ust if the fil ter works u n satisfactori ly .

On F igs 4 2 3 a n d 4 2 4 may be see n the Am rica n t b l r fi lters made

'

.
e u u a

by S Howes works The first o n is a type similar to the E uropean

.
’
.
e

constructio n ,differin g from it o n ly in the gre ater e ase it affords fo r in spec

432 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR V II

o neof the l atest types f S e ck s suctio n tubul ar filters Fig 4 2 6 illustrates

O
’
. .

the lo n gitudi n al n d the cross sectio n n d Fig 4 2 7 a perspective View

a ,
a .

of this fil ter I t co n sists of a n iro n cy lin dric ch a mber b co ntai n in g the

.

filterin g tubes 0 c losed at the top n d attached by their edges to the

,
a

bottom of the chamber n d ope n for the discharge of dust W ith the
a .

aid of a n aspirati n g air pipe k the c h amber b commu n icates with the

FI G 4 2 5
. .

fa n . Thedusty air from the exhausted machin es passes through

the air pipe i whe n ce it ru n s in to the tubes e an d filters out free
, ,

of dust into the chamber 1 owin g to the rarefactio n f space betwee n

, ) O

the tubes an d the casin g of the chamber Th tubes are suspen ded . e

to the lev er d which rises a n d falls owin g to the operatio n of the

,

ratchet whee l e o n the shaft f S imultan eousl y with the droppin g of

.

the le v er d duri n g which the tubes recei v e a shak the valv e I also e,
C HAR V II ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 433

c l oses automatically so that the suctio n of the ir o t of the fi lter is dis

,
a u

co ntin ued for the mome nt of the shake Th dust desce n ds to the box g
. e ,

when ce it passes i nto the worm Th heavy ffal d rops i nto the worm
. e O

whe n the air flows i nto 9 because owi n g to the sharp curve the curre nt
,

performs the Offal devel ops a great ce n trifugal force an d is flu n g down .

FI G 4 2 7
. .

Ge n erally th e filter p l ants have two chambers at the very least

su ct io n
'

as in Fig . B u t more Ofte n three or four chambers are j oi n ed

together This guaran tees co ntin uous work of the filter a l so because
.
,

whe n o n e of the filters is b ei n g c lean ed i e the suctio n tube 1 is cl osed

, . . 0

wit h th valve l the others at the same time are ope n the ratchets e
-
e , ,

bei n g brought i nto actio n by tur ns .

4 34 F LOU R MI LL I NG am p
( . vn

I II

E X H A U S T S Y S TE M S
1 . Gro u p E xha u s t S ys tem s

V en tila tio n f
o Ro ller M illS .
~ —
Th remova l of the bra
~
e powder n a nd

flour dust as well as the coolin g of the roll s n d of the heated product is
,
a ,

the aim of v e ntil atio n for roller mills There are two ways of exhaustin g .

the rolls Th first is based o n t he p rin ip le of cou nter curre nts whe n
. e c -

the draught is directed opposite to the motio n of the product the seco n d ,

whe n t h directio n of the air an d the stock coin cide I n m o st cases the
e .

first method is accepted by the w orks by reason of the dust bein g easily ,

separated from a thi n sheet o f product with a n air curre nt B t the '

-
. u

co n den satio n of steam in the cooler t Op p art of the mill chamber a n d the
formatio n of paste o n the walls Of the frame are to be recko n ed amo n g
the defects of this method The abse n ce of co n de n satio n owin g to the .

co n stant temperature in all the part s of the chamber speaks in favour of

the seco n d method to its defects m y be referred the smaller capacity a .

of the air curre n t to remove the partic les of dust a n d S hells from the
- -

compact mass of stock travelli n g dow n the spout or the worm Ho w .

e ver the defects of both the first an d the seco n d methods are avoidab le
, .

'
I f the mill s are n o t o v er l oaded a n d the product is n o t heated much the ,

differe n ce in the temperatures will be i n sign ificant n d there will be n o a

co n de n satio n I n the seco n d case when th air curre nt crosses the s heet
.
,
e -

of product th part icles of dust are extracted out of it n d do n o t mix

, e a

in the spouts with the rest f the stock O .

F ig 4 2 8 represe n ts a n American ve nti l ati n g p l an t o n the pri n cip le

.

of cou nter curre nts The product is fed in at S The air flows into the
-
. .

chamber of the mill through the wi n dows A w hich are covered with '
'

c l oth or a metal scree n traverses th sh et o f product flow in g out at right

,
e e

an gles n d passes out as i n dicated by the arrow S in to the commo n

,
a 1

tru nk B carryi n g the dust with it The f n 0 in suckin g the air

,
. a ,

out of B forces it into the star fil ter

, .

On Figs 4 2 9 a n d 4 30 we see S eek s s ystem of exhausts in which the

’
.
,

direction in which the product travel s coin cides with the route of the air .

I n the case whe n the i n c li n e of the spout A is sufficie n t for the product
to r n dow n of itse lf the p l ant in Fig 4 2 9 may be used Th product
u , . . e

l eavi n g the m ill flows dow n the spout A to the e l ev ator Th air is aspi . e

rated through the tru n k B which directs it to th worm 0 doin g service , e ,

for several rolls an d whe n ce the f n sucks the air through the trunk
, a

D , I n the s pout A there is a free ly suspe n ded v alve a which doe s ,

436 LOU R
F MI LLI NG [ C H AR V II

in Fig 4 3 0 .
is emp l oyed Here is set the worm E out of which the air is
. ,

aspirated by a similar tru n k B I n the remaini n g part of the p l ant there

.

is n o differe n ce .

W h ave bee n exami n i n g here the exhaust systems of the most

e

importan t machin es the roller mills B efore proceedin g to a descriptio n

,
.

O f ge n eral systems of exhaust we must set several ge n eral ru les for a

ratio n al co n structio n of the p lants .

H o w importan t a correct cal cu l atio n a n d co n structio n of exhaust is

we may judge by the examp le of a German mill which bein g driv e n by ,

a 2 6 0 H P steam e n gin e con sumed 1 1 0 H P for ve n til atio n i e 4 3 per

. .
, . .

ce nt Of the power used by all the

. machi n es S uch e n ormous .

FI G . 42 9 .

co n sumptio n of power for the exhausts was caused so lely by bad co n

structio n n d in correct calcu l atio n s
. a

On e of the mai n detai l s of a n exhaust p l an t is the air trun k dow n ,

wh ich the dusty air is drive n out of the machi n e to the dust co llector by -

mean s of a fa n in the machin e itself or a fan outside it The separate .

a ir tru n ks commu n icate w ith the mai n tru n k o n which ge n erally the ,

main fa n is set .

I n co n structi n g a n d recko n in g out the ve n ti l atio n the fo ll owi n g ,

ge n eral rules hould be bor n e in min d

S

1 A correct computatio n of the ge n eral qua n tity of air required for

.

the p l an t give n i e the selectio n of suitab le fa n s

, . . .

2 Th sectio n s of t h air tru n ks shou ld be so cal cu l ated as to have a n

. e e

e q ual quantity of air passin g in their different sect io n s where the Vel o ,

cities may b di fferen t e .

3 Th coup lin g of the air tru n k s shou l d be such as to i nvo lv e n o l oss

. e

of air pressure .
CH AR VII ] FLOU R MI LL I NG 4 37

4 dime n sio n s of the chambers cyc lon es an d filterin g surfaces

. The , ,

ought n o t to cause an y superfluous pressure which req ires a greater , u

co n s u mptio n of power .

Ru les 2 3 a n d 4 giv e the grou n d o n which a correct choice of the fa n

, ,

ca n be made a n d we sha ll therefore speak Of them more in detai l

, .

I f we have two equal machi n es p l aced at u n equal dista nces from the
fa n we can n ot use air tru n ks Of equal S ectio n s
, Obviously the air .

tru nk of the further machin e will offer greater resistan ce to the motio n
O f air bei n g the l o n ger of the two
, To have both the machi n es p l aced .

in equal co nd itio n s Of ve n t il atio n it is n ece ssary to make the tru n k ,

of the further machi n e l arger in sectio n taki n g its dimen sio n s in ,

accordan ce w ith the le n gth which defin es the l oss in pressure

,
.

I n n o case may tru n ks of a n equal sectio n be used for equal machi n es ,

whe n this sectio n is calcu l ated from the air co n sumptio n an d the pressure
of the machin e farthest removed I n that case the machin es lyin g .

n earer to the fa n wi ll be subjected to

a more e n ergetic exhaust than is n eeded ,

a n d the regu l atio n of the air tru n ks by

mean s of valves or gates will in cur a n

extra co n sumptio n of power .

Th abse n ce of sharp be n ds in the

e
F 431 IG
trun ks a n d their j oints is of great import
. .

a n ce Th greater the n umber of be n ds especially at right an gles the

. e , ,

greater is the loss in pressure of the exhaust p l ant .

The coup li n g of air tru n ks must in n o case be at right a n g les as we ,

hav e it o n the American p l an t which serves as an examp le of the worst ,

kin d of coup lin g for air trun ks I f we have a coup li n g f two air trun ks .
O

at a certai n co n siderab le an gle about 4 5 (Fig for in stan ce the n the

,
°
. ,

air curre n ts b e nterin g into the mai n air chan n el intersect wit h the cur
-

re nts a a nd thus hin der each other mutually reducin g the ge n eral pressure ,
.

I t is n ecessary to h ave these streams al most coi n cide in their directio n

of motio n The practice of to day has fix ed the largest angle formed by
.
-

the axes of the coup led r p p e at aI I S

As to the size Of dust co l l ectors (chambers cyc-

l o n es an d fi lters ) in , , ,

selectin g them such dime n sio n s should be take n as wi ll n o t cause any

l oss of the n ecessary pressure before the f n o w i n g to stoppage a ,

of the exhaust air passin g out Beyo n d these limits the dime n sio n s
. .

of dust col lectors may be i n creased without harm to the p lan t if the
-

space an d the mean s allow it D ust collectors of super n ormal size .

-
-

faci litate the work of the who le p l ant .

4 38 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR V II

2 . Gen era l E xha u s t S ys tems

V en tial tio n of the Gra in -

owi
clea n in g D epa rtm en n g the fu
t —
nKda n

me n tal requireme n ts o f a ration al ve ntil atio n of m achi n ery we c an giv e ,

FI G 4 3 2
. .

a gen eral type as a more comp lex o n e of a n exhaust p lan t for the
, ,

grain c lean in g de p artme n t of automatic mills from which it is an easy

-

passage to simple p l an ts .

On F ig 4 3 2 we have a cross sectio n of the grai n c lean in g departme n t

.
,
-

co ntain in g ll types of machi n es The v en tilatio n is performed by mean s of

a .
4 40 FLO U R MILL I N G [
C H AR vii
'

the fa n A
'

the suctio n fi lter B Of the S k type w have ex

and ee e

a m in e d Th mai n air chan n el 0 is disposed vertically a n d tributary

. e ,

to it are the co nveyi n g air tr n ks from the dustin g ree l separator 1 u ,

separator 2 trieurs 3 scourers 4 brush machi n es 5 scouri n g mi ll

, , , ,

sto n es 6 c lean reel separators 7 a nd l astly from the automatic elevators

, , ,

8 at two poi n ts I n this p l a n t we see that the ju n ctio n of the co n veyi n g

.

trun ks with the mai n chan n el lies at th least possib le an gle of their axes e .

Th Vertical positio n of the mai n cha nn e l is to d imi n ish the quan tity of
e

harmfu l resistan ce , nd the f n is set o n the top floor which allows Of utilis
a a ,

In g the n atural pressure of air in respect to the machi n es sta n di n g be l ow .

V en til ti n of the M i llin g D epa rtm en t

a o I n Figs 4 3 3 n d 4 3 4 we have .
-

. a

a diagram of the exhaust system for the mil lin g departme n t of a rye
mill of 1 00 sacks per day (2 4 hours ) capacity A .

f n A nd a suctio n filter 0 operate for this

a a

p l an t .

S peaki n g ge n erally the a ir tru n ks from the ,

machi n e should be set at n i n c li n e allo w ing the a

heavy particles sett li n g in them to r n down of u

themse lves F r the heavy offals to r n down in . o u

this mann er it is sufficien t to have the spout

.

i n clin ed at an an gle of I n the p l a n t give n

nd those similar to it however the commo n
a , ,

Fm 4 3 5 , ,
chann el for the roller mill s had to be made hori
o nt l n d t herefore it Co n tai n s a worm D for the
z a ,
a

discharge of heavy re fuse Th n ecessity of groupi n g the sifters for . e

ge n eral v e nti l atio n in a similar mann er required a worm E Th ve ntil a . e

tio n worms differ from the ordin ary on es in that their chamber is made
n l —
co siderab y higher (the area of the cross sectio n is 1 2 times as l arge ) ,

to allow the ir free passage a .

I n this p l an t we see that th ir trun ks N from the sto n e mill s ru n

'

'

e a

direct ly to th f n passin g the filter by as the mill sto n es have their

e a , ,

fi lters in the chamber of the casin g .

The heavy o ffal s a n d flour co llected by the worms desce n d al o n g the

spouts F (from t h worm of the sifters ) an d G (from the worm for the
e

rolls ) to the n earest elevators correspo n din g to the quality of offals re .

,

tu rn I n g n this wise to the stock the light dust n d o ffal s o n the other
I a ,

hand pass to the filter where they coll ect in the worm for discharge
, , .

I n t h p l an t we are exam in i n g there are show n two variatio n s o f

e

exhaust for ro lls n variatio n with a bottom worm with ve ntil atio n of
o e ,

the spouts H co n n ected with the Ve nti lated worm D by the air trun k I
,
,
CHAR v m L
F OU R MI LLI NG 44 1

is the type accepted by S ek ; the other the o n e most gen erally used
e
,

with a top collecti n g worm D out lin ed in dots u n der the ceilin g (Fig
, .

Fm ] 4 36 .

The comparative merits an d defects of these two v ariatio n s hav e already

bee n spoke n of
.
442 LOU R MI LLI NG F [ C H AR V I I

Tw o com m o n air tru n ks L from the worm of t he ro ll s a nd M from the

,

worm bel o n gin g to the sifters co n vey the dusty air to the fil ter where
, ,

it deposits the dust an d is discharged by the fa n through the trun k B

l eadin g outside the buildin g .

The meal dust a n d l ight refuse discharged by the filters de scen d i nto
’

the bin Q an d a worm carries them out to the spout B where they ,

are admixed to the product goin g to the fifth break Th spout R c n . e a

also deliver the filtered product to the ce n trifugal or direct ly i nto the sack .

—
I n a n y case this S pout must h a ve valves p p (Fig which are ope n ed .

by the pressure Of the dust discharged an d preve nt the back draught of

air i nto the filters otherwise the actio n of the filters wou ld be weaken ed
,
.

Fig 4 3 6 i llustrates the exhaust p l an t of a wheat mi ll

.
I n com .

pariso n with the precedin g o n e there is an extra set of purifier s here for ,

which a pressure filter is in stalled From the purifiers the dusty air is .

driv e n by their fan s to the collecti ng worm whe n ce it passes to the fil ter ,
.

Th S ifters n d ro ller mi ll s are exhausted by the fa n operat in g for the

e a

suction filter .

3 . Ca lcu la tio n f or an E xha u st P la n t

To calcu late the correct size of n exhaust p l an t it is n ecessary to a

kn o w : (1 ) the quan tity of air required to remove the dust and warm
air from each machin e (2 ) the area of the filterin g cl oth
—
.

The Area of the F i lter n g C lo th

i I t is more co n ve n ie n t to begin by
determin in g the n ecessary area of filterin g c l oth from which we shall pass to ,

the cal cul ation of the volume of air required for the giv en worki n g effect .

Area f
o F ilterin g S f
u r a ce f or Ma chin es of the Gra in -
clea n ing D epa rt
m en t .

TAB L E X LI I I
CAP A CI T Y 1 2 5 S AC KS P ER D AY (2 4 H OU R S )

NAM E OF MACHI NE .

Scales
Separator wit ho n e sie v e .

Separator of the zigzag type

T rieurs (cylin ders )
H orizo n ta l emery scourer .

V ertical emery (p l ate ) scourer

Brush machin e horizon tal
,

vertical
compoun d vertical 1

Combi n ed scouri n g m chi n e of t he 7 Ol o tu kh n type

a 1

1
S ee F ig . 95 , p 103
. .
44 4 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR vu

W must re gard the capacity of fan s given in Tab le X LI V as the

e

n ormal which shou ld serve as a provi n

,
g capacity for t he catalogue data
of differe n t firms .

TAB L E X LI V

CAP A C I T Y OF FA N S

Dia m e ter o f
th e su ct io n Nu m b er o f R evo l u t io n s Nu m b e r o f H o rs e

h o l es , p er 1 Minu te . P o wer Req u i red .

mm .

O n ce we have the above men tio n ed data the calcu l atio n Oi the detai ls ,
‘

for a n y exhaust system may be u n dertake n .

F o r examp l e w shall recko n out the p l an t of the rye mi ll (F

,
e igs 4 3 3 .

a n d 4 3 4 ) with high gri n di n g we have exami n ed which has three doub le ,

roller mills w ith rolls 80 0 700 an d 6 00 mm l o n g two sto ne mills with, , .

,

sto n es 1 3 0 0 mm in d i m t r two sifters a n d o n e reel separat or

.
'

a e e , , .
‘

S uppose we are grin di n g rather damp rye The n a l arger fi lt eri n g .

surface accordin g to our data has to be emp l oyed .

Three mi ll s require

3 sq mts s q mts of filters

. . . . .

Tw o sto n e m ill s
“

3 6 7 8 sq mts -
-
-
. .

Co n seque n t ly the reductio n machi n es must have 2 04 sq mts

, . .

Th bo lti n g ma chi n es 5 0 per ce n t

e f 2 0 4 sq mts 1 0 2 sq mts
, . O . .
:
-
. .

Th total is 3 0 6 sq mts
e Th quan tity of air n ecessary for Ven ti
. . e

l atio n is
30 6 X 8 cubic metres -

which will n eed a fan with wi n gs 800 mm in diameter r unn ing at the .

rate of 9 6 0 revolutio n s per mi n ute .

I f we decide upon a commo n pressure tubu l ar filter for all machi n es ,

mill ston es i n clude d the n the diameter Of the tubes bei n g 90 mm (3 3:

, .

in ches ) a filter with 5 6 or 6 0 tubes 2 metres l o n g will b required

, e .

The sectio n of the ir tru n ks ma y be Cal cu l ated accordi n g to the c o n

a

sumptio n f air O .
C H AP . vn ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 445

T he ge n eral air tru n k L for the ro ller mi lls must give passage to 1 2 -
6 X8
1 00 8
100 8 -
cubic m etres of air per mi nute ,
and
60
cubic metres per
seco n d . Accepti n g
the velocity of passage of the air from the v n e

til ate d machi n es dow n the air tru n ks (Figs 4 3 3 n d 4 3 4 ) I K a n d N . a , ,

o n the average to be 1 — —
5 m etres per seco n d a n d 1 5 2 5 metres per seco n d
do wn the co llecti n g spouts L M an d b, it is easy to calcu l ate the dim en
, ,

sio n s of the tran sverse sectio n of the air co n ductin g trun ks As regards -
.

the shape of sectio n of the trun ks rou n d is best as it Offers less resistan ce , ,

to the motio n of air B t trun ks Of rectan gul ar sectio n bei ng more easily
. u

m ade these may be used for a short tra v el

, .

TR AN S P OR TATI O N OF S TO C K
1 . S po u ts and E leva to rs

Moder n i n dustrial mi lls are almost exc lusiv ely automatic the whole
tra vel of the stock begi nn in g with tran sportatio n of the stock to the
, .

stori n g bin an d e n din g with the del ivery Of flour takes p lace without any ,

ex pe n diture of man ual work Therefore the arran geme n t n d o rrect . a a c

'

calcu l atio n of dime n sio n s of the tran sportatio n devices is of Vital import
an ce Th tran sportatio n devices must be
. e co n structed as to an swer S O

the give n capacity (without an y reserve for th e n largeme n t of the mi ll ) e

a n d co n sume the l east amou n t of power That wi ll be the basis of our .

estimatio n of the tran sport co n structio n s which we are about to exami n e

in this part .

All the modes of tran sportatio n may be divided i n to two groups

'
.1 Tran spositio n of the st o k fro m o n e height to a n othe rdow n from c

the top or the reverse .

2 Tra n spositio n of the stock w ithi n the bou n ds of o n e horizo ntal p l an e

—
.
.

D el ivery f th S to ck o wn a d
D o w
e r s S p ou ts F o r the tra n smissio n of the .

p roduct in a dow n ward directio n there are drai n p ipes automatic dis ,

ch argers or as they are more often called spouts Th spouts ge n erally

, , , . e

carry the stock from the machin e to the elev ator or the rev erse from ,

machin e to machi n e a n d last ly from the bi n to the sacks for packin g the ,

fi n ished product —the flour I n the first two cases the spouts have always
, ,

to be set asl an t n d in the third possibility an d co nve n ie n ce allow the

,
a

position of the spouts to be vertical because the greater the speed of the ,
.

fl our flowi n g out of the b in the faster a n d more compact will be the packin g
,
.
446 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ cu m vn

It is easy to deduce the con ditio n u n der which the motio n o f the
stock o v er a n i n cli n ed p l an e is possib le: I f we have a spout (Fig 4 3 7 ) .

i n clin ed to the horizo n at an an gle a n d suppose the w eight Q o n a u nit

a,

Of area of the spout to be equal to G n d the coe fficie n t of frictio n of the

,
a

stock upo n the surface of the spout f the motio n of the product is possible
,

u n der the co n ditio n that

An d S i n ce
T = G S in a an d N r -
G cos a,

by substitutin g the v alues T an d N i n to we obtain

f < Tg a .

In other terms the motio n of the stock

,
in the spout is possib le o n ly

FI G 4 3 7
. .

in case the o ffi i n t o f frictio n of the product upo n the surface of the

c e c e

spout is l ess than the cotan ge nt of the an gl e of i n clin e of the spout .

F o r wood spouts practice has estab lished the foll owi n g least val ues
of the an gle for differe n t products
a

F r grai n
o —
2 5 3 0 degrees
high break —
40 50
l o w break 5 0—60
l arge m iddhn g s 4 5—50
medium middli n gs —
50 55
du n st 5 5—60
bran 6 0—65
flour n d dust a —
70 80

will be well to give the limit values of the greatest horizo n tal tran s
It
missio n of the stock whe n it is deliver ed by the spout I f from the poi n t .

A (Fig 4 3 8 ) the pr oduct passes t o the poi n t B the quan tity sought for a
.
,

is expressed in accordan ce with h thus

a= h Cig a .
44 8 F LOUR ~

MI LL I NG [ CH AR V II

The sack i faste n ed to the boss by a strap with a Fre n ch cl asp A

s

F i
( g . T h e strap is suspe n ded to the spout by mean s of ears a .

W he n the empty sack is fitted o n the boss the c l asp is coup led a n d t he
,

FI G
. 44 2 .

han dle 0 turn ed as i n dicated by the arrow 6 owin g to which the strap
tightly fasten s the sack to the boss
—Th
.

Tra n sm issio n
f o the P ro du ct Upi ca rcl s up w ard tra
E le va to rs n s e

missio n o f the stock in the mill is ge n erally e ffected with the aid of ele
.

v a t o rs or automatic l ifts which co n sist of

, n e n d l ess be lt w ith boxes
a

( cups buckets ) attached

,
t o it a n d ru n n i n g
over pu lleys n e of which is set bel ow , o ,

in the boot of the e l evator n d the a

other at the top —in its head On the

,

S ame shaft with the top pu l ley is set the

drivin g pulley to whfhh the belt from the
shafti n g ru n s Th belt with the buckets . e

is e n c l osed in a timber or iro n case or

l eg to avoid n y l oss or scatteri n g of a
'

the product de l ivered On Fig 4 4 4 a . .

F 443
IG
wood elevator is show n
. .

Th e l evators are al ways set vertically a n d o n ly Very rarely in c ase

e
, ,

of extreme n eed a n i n clin e is allo wed Of n o t more than because other

,

wise the sag o f the belt o n the right side compe ls it to slide over the l eft
han d in n er wall of the l g wh ich damages the belt an d i n curs extra
e ,

co n sumptio n of power a n d the s a of t h l eft side l eads to t h cu s

,
g e
p e
 CH AR V II ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 449

c omin g in co ntact with the leg which resu lts in extra work of frict io n
,

a nd in the cups a n d l bei g damaged

g ne .

The timber legs of the e l evators hou ld be bui lt in the same man n er
S

as the spouts i e by to n guin g a n d groovi n g I ro n legs o f small dim en

, . . .

sio n s are made of iro n p l ate with the be n d of the groo ves dow n the seams ,

a n d the l arge o n es are j oi n ed with rivets .

The belts are gen erally of l eather or p l aited of came l hair-

.

The cups are mad e of iro n galva n ised sheet iro n ti n pl ate or b l ack
, , ,

iro n p l ate Accordin g to the man n er of man ufacture there are stamped
.

cups with a be nd of the groov e a n d riveted cups I n Russi a

, .

2 F
450 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR V II

there are used cups with the seams j oin e d by verl appi n g with ben t O

grooves I n W ester n E urope a n d in America these cups are be in g sup

.

p lanted by those bossed of a whole piece these bein g l ighter The ,

.

riveted cups are used for heavy

work whe n they have to be of a ,

l arge size .

E very cup is characterised by

three measureme nt (Fig 4 4 5 ) -
s .

width B projectio n A a nd height , ,

H I n the back wall of the .

C p there are made ho les for u

F 44 5 IG
faste n i n g them n to the bel t with o

special bo lts
. .

Fig 4 4 6 i llustrates six di ffere n t types of cups

. N 1 has a riveted . O .

bottom No s 2 3 4 n d 5 of medium S ize are bossed a n d N 6 a cup

,
.
, , ,
a ,
o .
,

for l arge capacities is man ufactured of comparative ly thick iro n up to

, ,

2— 2 % mm w hereas the ordi n ary cups are made of tin p late or iro n 1 —
.
,
1 — 1
2

in ch thick B oxes of thin t in p late as N 3 have a Co ver p l ate for

.
,
o .
,
a

3 4

stre gth
n
better resistan ce to wear On Fig 4 4 7 is shown the best
a nd
. .

shape for bo lts with a flat head .

A regards the dime n sio n s of the cups for m ill e evators hey may
s
l t ,

be represe n ted by th followi n g fi gures (S chmidt s W orks in W iir ell

e ’
z .

Germa n y )
,
452 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR V II

Tobri n g the co n structive description of elevators to a close we m ust

give a n idea as to the arran geme nt of cups c lean i n g of elevator legs, ,

an d the co n structio n s of the boots a n d heads of the e levators .

Th precedi n g tab l e shows us that the cups

e

are gen erally set o n the belt in such a mann er as

to leave a pace of 1 0— 6 5 m m betwee n them
S . .

But of late they are aimin g at a total abolitio n

of the distan ce bet w ee n the cups as is show n o n ,

Fig 4 4 8 in order to i n crease the capacity of

.
,

elevators witho u t i n creasin g the di men sio n s Of

the cups I n such cases the top part of the
. a

cups i made so much wider that the bottom of

s

the cup above may e n ter i nto the cup bel ow in ,

which sometimes a n otch of the top li ne a is made .

Th co n structio n of compact arra n geme n t of

e

cups just exami n ed imparts greater rigidity to the

belt which deman ds a l arger con sumptio n Of power
,

to o vercome the i n jurious resistan ces but in its

F 44 8
I G.
fi n al resu lt the usefu l work of such n e l evator is a

greater than with the cups set apart

.

F r freei n g the e levator l egs of dust there are brushes 6 which

o ,

touch in g the wall s of the spout with their edges sweep the dust off .

FI G 4 4 9
. .
FI G . 450 .

esse n tial parts of n e levator are its boot n d head in w hich the
Th e a a ,

be lt pulleys are set Th S imp lest ki n d of a woode n boot n d head is

-

. e a

ive in F igs 4 4 9 an d 4 5 0 Th boot is a p l ai n wood box w ith a fee d

'

g n . . e
CH AP . VII ] FL OUR MI LLI NG 453

spout B The beari ngs for o n e or if the elevator is doub le for two
.
, ,

p lleys are set o n cross bars faste n ed to the box with bo lts F o r in sp e
u , , . c

tio n of the chamber in the boot in case of a choke there is a door A

Th head is al so a box with a discharge tube S
e a door for i n spectio n of 1,

FI G . 4 52 . FI G 4 5 3
. .

the be t pu lley an d a hatch C for co n tro lhn g the discharge of the product
l -

by the cups .

Amo n g the defects of this co n structio n must be me n tio n ed th im e

possibility of regu l atin g the te n sio n of the be lt without l acin g it over .

I n Figs 4 5 1 n d 4 5 2 may be see n the S m p l st co n structio n of a n

. a I e

FI G 4 5 4
. . FI G. 45 5 .

American woode n head nd boot without the possibility of adjustin g the

a

te n sio n of the belt an d in Fig 4 5 3 we have a woode n boot with adjust ab le

,
.

bearin gs which may be l owered wit h the aid of screws a with han d wheel s -
-
.

Th e metal co n structio n s of boots of the America n type are show n

in Figs 4 5 4 Th first is iro n n d riveted the seco n d has a
.

.nd 4 5 5 a . e .
a ,
454 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR vn

cast iro n or i n got stee l frame The bearin gs here are ad j ustab le a nd the
-
.
,

regulatio n of ten sio n of the be lt is easy .

I n Figs 4 5 6 n d 4 5 7 we have the perspectiv e View of a wood a n d

. a

n iro n e l evator of the Amme Giesecke a n d K o n g n system very rat io n

.

a ,
e e

ally co n structed Th beari n gs of the boots are ad j ustab le the door A

. e ,

allows of in spectin g the l ower belt pulley a n d the hatch B is m ade for
-

c lea n i n g the boot in case it is b l ocked up with product The lower part 0 .

of the left han d S ide leg -

in the iro n e l evator is bui lt

up a n d has a door for
i n spectio n Th heads of . e

the wood n d the iro n ele a

v t o r ca n be easi ly take n a

ff a n d disman t led o .

Usefu l W o rk of the E l
eva to rs —Th
efficie n cy of e

an e l evator depe n ds o n the

fo llowi n g circumstan ces

1 S hape of the cup
.
,

which determin es its cap

a cit
y .

apability of the 2 . C
cup of retainin g the pro
duct o n the way from
chargin g to emptyi n g .

3 Capabi lity of the .

cup of emptyin g at the

spot give n Th shapes . e

Of cups we exami n ed de
F 45 6 IG F 45 7 IG
termin e their capacity
. .
. .

F o r the defi n itio n of the abi lity to retai n the stock duri n g the
trave l an d to empty the cups the followi n g lin e of reaso nin g is
suggested .

S uppos in g o n the be lt pu lley S (Fig 4 5 8 ) of the e levator boot we have

-

a cup U fasten ed to the belt B ru nn in g upwards .

Th e midd le of the projectio n of the cup K hes at a distan ce r from the

axis 0 of the belt pull ey 0 K formin g an an gle ‘l with the v ertical the
.
-

, ’

an gul ar Ve locity of rotatio n of the box is the weight of the part ic le of a) ,

product at K m g an d the ce ntrifugal force of rotatio n of this particl e

,

m rw 2
.
45 6 FLOUR MI LLI NG [ cu m v n

poin t is the highest positio n Of the route over the circumferen ce of the
I)
cup . B u t for dry substan ces the surface ba cha n ges to ba so that its 1

n gl é of osci ll atio n 13 (the an gl e Of

a

the tan ge nts at b) forms ap pro xi

mate ly the an gle of n atural d flec e

tio n of the product .

The data defi n i n g the favo u rab l e

co n ditio n s of delivery of the stock ,

we an deduce startin g with the c

suppositio n that the traj ectory Of

motio n of the product must be LS
a n d n o t LS for the product to I

drop i nto the out let spout A and ,

n o t i n to the l e g B of the e l e v ator

FI G 4 6 0
. .

F
( gi .

Atthe moment of ejectio n from the cup the product has t h velocity e

of motio n Of the belt v I ts horizo ntal resu ltant is

.

= t’ CO S a

a nd the motive force in the Vertical directio n (gravity ) mg = m

whe n ce

H avi n g i ntegrated these equatio n s n d exc luded t from them we

a ,

Obtain an equatio n of the curve defin i n g the l w of motio n of the

,
a

prod ct u .

Fo r the calcul atio n of elev ator capacities P rofessor Fischer gives the
followin g empiric formu lae .

S u pp o m g we have s

D— d iameter of the be lt pu lley

—
.

n n umber of revo lutio n s per mi n ute

—
.

A projectio n of the cup

B —breadth of the cup
.

F —distan ce of the summit of the rib l to the horizo ntal p l an e

.

OI N
—dista
.

ic
f
ce betwee n the walls of the casin g
n

—
.

L capacity of the e l e v ator in ki l ogrammetre seco n ds

-

—
-
.

M capacity per seco n d in l itres .

CH AP . V II ] FLO U R MI LL I NG 457

All the lin eal quantities here , D , A, B , F , ,

an d w are give n in metres .

Fo r the quantities me ntio n ed supposi g ,

n th e highest mit forli r= £
2
F
( gi . we have
se s -

Ag o

E =0 5D ~

E ZO 1 7D , -

w = 1 4D , -

= 50 JD S
,

M z o O
-
wfi s

Fo r the defi itio of the umber of horse power required by the

n n n N -

el e v ator F B aumgart n er Offers the foll owin g formu l a

, .
1

L7’ H ’
2 00 0

where L is the capacity of the e le v ator per hour in hectolitres H the ,

height of el ev atio n in metres a n d y the coe fficie nt equal fo r grain to, :

0 7 5 for b re a k zoh Op 0 5 for bra n 0 3 5 a n d for midd li n gs 0 3 0

, , , .

If we accept the de n omi n atio n s V for the bu lk Of product lifted in

l itres ? for its specific gravity a n d H for the height of e le v atio n the n
,
7 , ,

the n umber N of horse power for a n ele v ator accordi n g to the data of
-

the Nagel a n d K amp w orks (Hamburg ) will be

N = (l 3 3 —2 )V nH .

Luther s w orks ’

(B ru n swick ) giv e
N = 1 6 6 V uH
-
.

An d fi n ally P rofessor Fischer taki ng for granted that the elev ator
, , ,

is carefully looked after suggests ,

N = 1 35 -

Fo r thede fin itio n of the workin g (3; fu ll ) capacity I of the cup in litres 7

B aumgart n er s uggests the fo ll owi n g formu l a

’
3 6 00 yvz

W here p is the same coe ffi cie n t v the Velocity of motion of the belt per ,

secon d in metres 3 the n umber of cups to 1 metre of the belt

, .

1
F . B a u m ga rt n e r d o es n o t m en tio n the o rig in o f his for m u l ae .
45 8 FLO U R MI LL I NG [CHAR m
The v e l ocities of motio n of the cups for differe n t products are di fferen t .

e ocity for grain

V l mts per seco n d 2—3 . .

V e l ocity for middli n gs —

1 5 2 0 mts per seco n d . .

V e l ocity for flour mts per seco n d . .

e l 3 —
Th diameters of the be lt pu lleys for e evators are 0 0 700 mm -
Th e .

n umber of revo l utio n s of the be lt pu l leys fluctuates betwee n 4 0 a n d 90

-

depe n din g n theirdiameters n d the give n vel ocity of the belt

o a .

B efore Cl osi n g the part treati n g of e levator tran sport we must gi v e

the bulk we ights of grain n d the i ntermediate products B elow is give n
a .

a tab le of weights in kilograms .

W EI GH T OF 1 LITR E IN K I L OG R AMS
W heat 07 -

0 86-
W heat midd li n gs
0 6 -
Large wheat bran
Barley 06 Fi n e wheat bra n
Oats 4 —
0 3 0 54
- -
Large rye bran
W heat semol i n a —
0 -
43 W heat flour
Rye semo li n a 05 0 05 5 -
R ye flour

2 . Ho rizo n ta l Tra ns p o rt
'

A rchim edea n S crew .

—
rchimedean screw worm or co nveyor
Th e A ,
Bs

is o n e of the ldest mechan isms of automat ic tran sportatio n This

O .

mechan ism is a rotatin g helical surface e n cased ina box which is the , ,

route of tran sport Th tran sportin g actio n of the screw is based o n the
. e

fact that dry substa n ces travel dow n the len gth of th box or the axis e

whe n the an g le of the he lical surface is less than the an gl e 9 0 where

f
c: is the a ng l e of frictio n of the product agai n st the s u rface of the screw .

On tur n of the screw bri n gs the product forward (theoretical ly ) by the

e

size of the thread which is expressed by the formul a D tg where D is

.
, n a,

the d iameter of the screw n d its an gle ,

a a .

Th worki n g organ as we have said is the he l ical surface a p rsp e

e , , ,
e c

tive View of which is S hown o n Fig 4 6 1 No 1 This surface co n sists of , . .

the separate sectio n s f feathers give n bel ow in A The diameter

O
“
.

is defin ed an d these sectio n s formed in the followin g mann er .

S upposin g accordi n g to our cal cu l atio n we n eed a worm with a dia

, ,

meter D a n d a thread h W have to defi n e d the diameter of the Open i n g

. e

of the feather Th len gth of circumfere n ce of the d sought for is a

. e

helical lin e with a pitch h Th an gle of the s crew is . con seque n t ly e a ,

1
h
h z dtg when ce we defi n e d
n a, :

(ft tg a
4 50 F LOUR MI LLI NG [CHAR vn

The worms No s 3 an d 4 have this advantage o ver No s 1 2 n d 5

. .
, ,
a ,

that the direction of motion of the product may be alter ed by

tur n i n g the paddles t rou n d their axis by B esides that by ,

tur n in g t rou n d their axes to a l arger or smaller an gl e the pitch Of ,

FI G 4 6 2
. .

the worm n d co n sequent ly the vel ocity of motio n of the product can
,
a ,

be altered .

On B a n d 0 are ill ustrated the boxes or tubes of the worms ge n erall y

met with in practice Both the boxes are of timber an d the first has a
.
,

timber bottom lin ed with tin r to reduce frictio n of the product

, T h e .

bottom of the worki n g space in the seco n d worm is of iro n The .

co n structio n s of the bearin gs are sufficien tly c lear n d need n o a

descriptio n .

A who l e iro n box of a worm is s how n o n Fig 4 6 2 The most charac . .

FI G 4 6 3
. .
FI G 4 6 4
. .

combin atio n of tran sport by worms is the tran smissio n of product

t eristic

at right an gles show n o n Figs 4 6 3 an d 4 6 4 I n the first case it is do n e

, . .

by an ordi n ary bevel gear system n d in the seco n d we hav e a ,

. a

chain gear .

Tur n in g n o w to the questio n co n cer n i n g the cal cu l atio n of the he lical

tran sportatio n we must say that its theory is too weak a n d co nfin es
,
C H AR vn ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 45 1

itself o n ly to the above co n sideratio n s respectin g the an gle of the worm

surface Al l the data of cal cul atio n are worked out by practice and
.

g rouped i n to empiric formu l ae by P rofess or Fischer .

Th e diameter D of the worm accepted in E uropea n practice is 1 0 0

5 00 mm whil e in America it is 1 0 0 to 4 0 0—
.
, 4 5 0 mm .

The thread h of the worm in accordan ce with D

h -
5

The n umber of re v o lutio n s n per min ute

45
n
JD
The capacity L per second in litres is
L = 1 71 JD 5

D bei n g take n in metres .

I f the capacity L is sought for the diameter o f the worm _

, D may be
defi n ed from the precedin g formul a
D = 5 /
1 2 s fL Z
.

Th e distan ce a b etw een the bearin gs supportin g the shaft of the wor m
is defin ed accordin g to the formul a
JD
'

a 9 .

The co sumpt o n of work

n i in horse power is -

Al l
-

fully ) ,

w her el is the le n gth of the worm in metres L the capacity in litres; ,

y the weight of a litre in ki l ograms a n d f the practical coefficie n t which , ,

has a n umerical v alue of from to 1 8 -

.

F B aumgart n er gives a n other formu l a Of capacity per hour in ki l o

.

grams n amely
,

Q 5 D mh 7 ,

where D is the diameter of the worm in decimetres n the n umber ,

of rev ol utio n s per mi n ute n d h the thread of the worm in deci

,
a .

metres .

A in most cases B aumgart n er does n o t exp l ai n the origi n of his

s ,

formul e Fischer s formul ae are based o n the ex p erim ent l dat a Of the
a .
’
a

works of Luther a n d Of Nagel an d K ii m p which date to 1 8 90 n d are , ,

a

co n sequen t ly obsolete for moder n types of co n structio n s Baumgart n er s .

’

formulae o n the other han d in n o respect correspo n d to the pract ical

, ,

data an d can n ot therefore be used .

462 F LOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR V II

follo win g con sideratio n s must serve as the correct basi s n which
The o

the capacity of the worm cal cu l ated W e must take the area of cross is .

'

sectio n of the product fillin g the box of the worm a n d the v el ocity o i ,

motio n of the product which depen ds o n the thread of the worm an d o n ,

the coe fficie nt Of frictio n of the produ ct agai n st the worm This v elocity .

may be defi ned o n ly practically By introducin g a practical correcti n g .

coefficie n t i nto the form l a Of the quantity of product ru nn in g in a u nit u

of time through the giv e n cross sectio n we obtai n the capacity of the ,

worm Q
Q
Our researches have proved that D an d v giv e n in metres n is expressed
by a n umerical quantity 4 5 0 .

I n this man n er for Q we hav e

xperime ntal i nvestigatio ns show that

E
‘

v is expressed in accordan ce
with the thread h of the worm an d its
_
n umber Of revo l utio n s per

m n te thus
l u ,

32— 0 3 6 )hn 0 -
for flour
—
.

5 (0 4 0 0 4 3 )h n ~ ~
du n st
—
,
.

v (0 5 0 0 5 4 )hn 3
:
~ ~
middlin gs .

v4 :
(0 5 6
°
0 6 0 )hn -
°
break
—
.

v5 (0 6 2 0 7 2 )hn
°
grain .

the existin g factory dim e ns On S of worms with their h = 1 2 0

Fo r I

2 5 0 mm these ve l ocities per min ute will be expressed in rou n d n umbers

.

v =4 v = 5 v
1 j
_

,
6 v = 7 an d v
2 ,
8 C o n seque n t l y the capacity Q in
3
z
, 4 , 5
-

.
,

its fi nal S hape per hour will be formul ated thus

Q per hour 1 6 84 00 )D -
2

Here D is in met res Th coefficie n t 8 4 2 0 0 correspo n d s to the -

. e

capacity for flour nd 1 6 840 0 for grain Fo r the other products Q may
,
a .

be obtain ed by substitutin g the correspon din g vel ocities in the ge n eral

formul a .

Th e formu l a we are suggesti n g fairly accurate ly correspo n ds to the

“

factory data of capacity which differ from our cal cul ation s by 1 to 3 per ,

ce nt .

Opposite is give n the tab le of dime n sio n s a nd capacity of the worms

from S chmidt s w o rks in W iir en which may be ackn owl ed ged as n orma l
’ '

z , .
464 F L OUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR V II

An other co n structio n of the same prin cip le is give n o n Fig 4 6 6 . .

Here the product flows i n to tube S haped boxes with rou n d scrapers
-

passin g through them I n the presen t case the tran smissio n of the pro
.

duct is effected in directio n s lyi ng

at right an gles The tran smitti n g
.

action is easily u n derstood from

the drawin g At the other e n ds
.

of the boxes there are two belt

pulleys like B I f the co nditio ns
.

of space require it an other co n

F 4 65
veyin g be lt pu ll ey i set The
IG
. .

-
s .

rope used for the tractio n is of wire W e must remark however that
.
, ,

such tran sport is used by the American s for small coal a n d sel dom for grain .

On Fig 4 6 7 we see a ban d co n veyor for sacks for mi n g a n e n d l ess

.

c l oth of separate timber p l anks attached to two e n dless parallel chain s

FI G 4 6 6
. .

which r n o n four pi n io n s Th ten sio n is adjusted by tran sposin g the

u . e

bearin g of the pin io n s lyin g n the left which is do n e by tur n in g the

o ,

han d wheel s m This cl oth is brought i nto p l ay from the belt pulley R
-
.
-

which carries a seco n d pair of pinio n s n o n its haft To reduce frictio n

S .
,

ev ery other pl an k there is a n id ler set which ru n s in guidin g rails .

CH AR V II ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 4 65

Ba nd Co nveyo r — Th precedi n g co n structio n of n e n d less c l oth

. e a

ser ves as a n i ntermediate step to the ban d co nveyor which has become ,

Of l ate a n i n dispe n sab l e appurte n a n ce Of grai n e l evators n d l arge mi ll s a .

Th ge n eral idea of the ban d co n v ey or is how n in Fig 4 6 8

e The S . .

e n d less ban d B ru n s over two be lt pu lleys D n d D the first of which is

-
a 1 ,

FI G 4 6 7
. .

brought in to actio n by the dri i g belt pulley N the other belt pu lley
v n - -

N is l oose
1 The ba n d is supported by adj ustab l e id lers from above n d
. a

frOm be l ow Th grai n flows do wn S through the hopper A n d is carried

. e a

by the ban d to the throw Off carriage T n wh ich there are two guides
-

,
o ,

1 a n d 2 with the ba n d ru n n i n g over them

,
At the be n d of the ba n d O r . V e

the pulley 1 to the 2 md the grain which has acquired a force of i n ertia
, ,

is throw n off i nto the box B when ce it pours down the spout S
,
T I . o

tighte n the ban d a weight G with a pul ley 3 is suspe n ded to it

,
.

Th method of throwi n g the stock i n to the box B is give n in Fig 4 6 9

e . .

FI G 4 6 8
. .

Th e positio n of the carriage T depe n ds o n the p l ace where the product

.

is to be emptied By mean s of brake devices it is fixed to the spot

.
.

D iffere n t co n structio n of li ve guide pu lleys are i llustrated n -

o

F igs 4 70 a n d 4 7 1
. On F ig 4 70 we have a set of top n d bottom pu lleys
. . a

supportin g the ban d B th axes of the top idlers are in c li n ed Guide

e .

pulleys W ith i n clin ed axes shou ld be avoided as the beari n gs do n o t ,

ret ai n the o il w e ll .
466 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR VII

On the upper drawin g o n Fig 4 7 1 we see the top wooden guide with a
.

con ic turn in g out Th i n c lin e of the axes of the pulleys or the co n ic

. e .

turn in g out or as we hav e it in the bottom drawin g the gl obul ar ri ms

, , ,

are n eed d t o impart a trough lik e e

-

shape to the ban d which preve n ts

the stock from f lhn g o ff the ban d a .

o n its travel .

Th arran ge me n t of the top a n d e

the bottom guides (fro nt n d side a

Vi ew ) is S how n in Figs . 4 72 an d
4 73 Here i n stead of the globul ar .
,

guides ben din g the belt we have

—
,

a more simp le co n structio coni c

n

guide pull eys Th top part of the -

. e

ban d A feedin g in the stock is

ben t by these belt pulleys to a -

trough .

F 4 69 IG .
P.
roceedi n g n w t o co n sider the o

operatio n of the ban d co nveyors ,

we must poi nt out the re l ation existi n g betwee n the vel ocities of
.

m otio n Of the product a n d the diameter of the guide pu ll eys 1 a n d 2 -

(Fig .

If v is the Vel ocity of motion of the ban d (the same bein g the Cir

FI G . 4 70 . FI G . 471 .

cu vel ocity of the pulley 1 ) n d r th radius

m fe ren tial a e Of the pulley ,

the value of v is defi n ed accordi n g to the con ditio n

mv 2

r
2

where 2 the2 1 force of the product at the tur i poi nt f

d,

IS c en trl fu g a l n ng -
o

the belt to the pu lley ,

a nd mg the gravity of the stock . To preven t th e
468 LOU R
F MI LLI NG [
C H AR VII

P rofessor Zworyki n sug gests the fo l l owi n g areas of sectio n of a l ayer

of grain
Fo r a flat ban d
F o r a through like b a n d
-

O n ce th area o f sectio n f a l ayer of stock n the ban d and its vel ocity
e O o

of motio n are kn own it is easy to defin e the capacity Q of the ban d

,

co nv eyor which will be expressed thus Q fl v

,
z
,
 CHAR V I I ] FLO UR MI LLI NG 469

The co n su mptio n of power must be defin ed in depe n de n ce o n the

ten sio n B of the ba n d which is taken to be equal to 1 000 B kl g 2
s .

Th n umber N of horse power for a ba n d co n veyor S hou l d be defin ed

e -

in accorda n ce with the data evo l ved by P rofessor P etrov who shows in ,

his calcul atio n that o n horse power carries 5 0 0 to n s a distan ce of

e -

W may co n sider that o n e horse power tran sfers 4 0 0 —

.

1 0 0 0 ft
. e 4 2 0 klgs -

per seco n d Co n sequent ly N will be formu l ated thus

.
,

0
’
4 00 4 2 0 -

Q bei n g the capacity of the co nveyor per seco n d .

AP P A R ATUS F OR MI X I N G AND P A C K I N G F L OU R

F lo u r mix ers
~
efore sen din g the flour to the market it is n ecessary
. B ,

to Obtain a product of the accepted stan dard as regards the bakin g qual i
t ies as w ell as in its outward appearan ce The quality of the grai n .

depe n di n g o n the co n ditio n s of the soil an d the climate the man n er of ,

treatme n t & c is Very i n co n stant n d this n aturally a ffects the stan dard
, .
, ,
a

Of the product Ofte n durin g a day s r n of a mill o n does n o t succeed ’

. u e

in obt ai n i n g flour of a certain ki n d u n iform in qual ity That bei n g the .

case o n is ob liged to b le n d the i ntermediate grades in correspon di ng

, e

proportio n to btai n the kin d re q uired

,
O .

I f the mill works fo r eight grades it yie lds from twel v e to fourtee n ,

in its grist These g rades except the first two or three are most ly
.
, ,

medium n d be cause of their in sign ificant differe n ce in quality are b len ded
,
a

a nd give the finishe d product S ometimes flour of better grade is .

admixed to the i nferior o n es to improve their quality if they are bel ow , .

the n ormal That is the reaso n of the co n stan t fluctuatio n in the

.
,

perce ntages of yields o f flour sp i l ly o f the medium grades Th ,

e ec a
'
. e

apparatus used for mixi n g the flour are called fl o r b le n ders u -

.

The fl o u r b l e n ders for mixin g flour are d ivided i nto two groups
-
.

B le n ders without circu l atio n bel o n g to o n e of them those with circul a ,

tio n bel o n g to the other .

The first b le n ders are used in ca ses where the i n termediate grades of
flour obtai n ed at di ffere nt times of the day s productio n are collected in ’

bi n s or sacks accordi n g to u n iformity n d are taken from there to be , a

fed to the b le n der in a certain quan tity decided upo n by the mi ller to ,

O btai n direct ly the grade required

. .
4 70 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR V II

The seco n d type of b l e n ders has s uch a co n structio n as a ll ows of

b le n di n g without interruptio n the flour obtained earlier a nd l ater owin g ,

to their circu l atory arran geme nt .

Fig 4 7
. 5 shows a S imp l e fl o u r b l e n der without
-
circu l atio n A n .

esse ntial part of this flour b len der is the disc A with pi n s rotatin g to
-
,

g ether with th shaft

e B from the driv in g belt pu lley 0 O v
-

er the disc A.

there is an other statio n ary disc

D likewise f urni shed with pin s .

These discs as we ll as the cross ,

bar for the beari n g of the shaft ,

are set in a l arge chamber where

the ble n ded flou r collects I nto .

the hopper E simultan eously

differe nt grades of flour are poured
in a p r oportion to giv e the grade
required That flou r p asses to .

the rotati n g di sc A an d is stirred

I

between the pins Th di sc A . e

ru n s at 1 60 rev olutio n s per

min ute .

The defects of thi s flo u r

b len derlie in the fact that its
disc acts as a suction fan owin g ,

t o whi c h the pres sure in the

chamber rises a n d the flour
escapes thro u gh the chi n ks of the
chamber .

Circu la to ry F lo u r blenders .

On Figs 4 7 6
is illustrated . and 4 77
the ordin ary type of a circul atory
F 4 75 I G. .

b len der emp l oyed n o w adays The .

flour flows in to the hopper A dow n s whe n ce it passes to the worm P , ,

From this worm it goes to the el evator R which carries it to the top part of
,

the b len der o n the worm N which co nv eys it then to the chamber o n to the
,

agitators T From the a git ator s the flour again passes to the worm P the
.
,

elev ator a n d the worm N this circ l atio n be in g performed u n til a fin ished
, ,
u

u n iform product is obtai n ed The n the spout of the e lev ator to the
.

worm N is covered over and the flour directed dow n the spout S to the
,

packer G .

The co n structio n of this fl o u r b le n der w hich is a mod ificatio n of the

-
4 72 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ CH AR V II

on the haft of the worm there is fitted a brush stirrer G which reduces the
S ,

flour n d throws it ff the flan ge of the pipe of the top part of the worm
a o .

W he n the flour is sufficie n t ly b le n ded it is de ,

livered through the boss 0 by o p en in g th valve

'

e .

On Fig 4 80 may be see n a b le n der with a

.

more comp lete circu l atio n The flo ur is de .

livered in to the hopper A where there is a ,

brush apparatus n d a worm as we shall see a ,

further n ; from the hopper it flows into the

o

elevator B which carries it to the chamber of

the b len der where it can circu late just as in the
,

b len der(Fig 4 7 9 ) or be co n veyed by the worm .

D agai n t o the e levator B if by mean s of .

, ,

the rod E the gate valve of the boss of the

.
,

outlet in the chamber is open ed W hen the .

flour is sufficien t ly b le n ded the spout is covered ,

over by the valve F out of the e levator i n to .

the blen der a nd the product directed into the ,

F 4 78 IG
spout G for packi n g
. .

F igs 4 8 1 a n d 4 8 2 illustrate a fl o r b le n der from the ame works u

s
-
.

with a vertical wor m in stead of a n elevator Fig 4 82 exhibits the h Opp er . .

FI G
. 4 79 .
FI G 4 80
. .

A in sec tio n howi n g that it co ntai n s a brush apparatus B a n d a hori

,
S

z o n t a l worm O which co n veys the stock to the vertical worm D

“

, .
CHA P . VII ] FLOUR MI LLI NG 4 73

P a cking the F lo u r flour which h to stan d a le n gthy tran s

. Fo r
-
as

p rt
o at io n or he a l o n g time in warehouses packi n g is of the greatest-

importan ce I n America flo u r is packed almost exc lusively in barrel s

.
,

n d o n l y small qua n tities from 3 0 to 6 0 lb are packed in sacks o f

'

a .

cotto n .

Al though barre l packi n g where the flour is first put in a sack a n d

,

the n with the sack into the barrel is co n siderably more expen sive its ad , ,

vantages are very great Th cakin g of flour packed in barrel s is totally

. e

FI G 4 8 1
. . FI G 4 82
. .

obviated sin ce whe n stored in l arge masses the pressure falls upo n the
, , ,

barrel s a n d does n o t affect the flour .

I n W est er n E urope nd R ussia flour is packed exc lusive ly in

a

sacks an d con seque n tly the h eapin g of sacks in l arge stacks is v ery
,

dan gerous especially for a s lightly damp flour which cakes up an d

, ,

becomes heated .

Th or di n ary simp l e way of sackin g the fl our is performed by han d

e

through the delivery sp out This method is satisfactory whe n the .

capacity is small but can n ot be adopted in l arge mills in which special

,

flour packers are used .

4 74 FLOUR MI LL I NG [ CHAR VII

I n Fig is shown the Amme Giesecke a n d K o n egen p acker

. 4 83 , ,

which fers but slight ly from s imil ar apparatu s of other firms I ts n ature
di f .

is as foll ows
The flour passes dow n the spout S to the auger A in which there is a ,

worm with a down ward ru n of the flour The worm is brought in to .

actio n by a bev el gear system from the belt pulley B which is thrown in -

by the friction clutch 0 On the auger A there run s freely the boss D
.
.
,

to which a s ack is attached by mean s of a strap with a Fren ch clasp '

The boss D is suspen ded o n straps E (or o n chain s ) which are wou n d n o

FI G 483
.
FI G 4 84
. .

drums F The boss is bal an ced by a weight H be cause F an d G are

.
,

coup led by a rope or belt gear .

The sack is lifted at first e n v el opi n g the auger A a n d the n in propor

, , ,

tio n as it is packed it drops down D uri n g operatio n the worm di s

, .

charges the product out o f the auger into the s ack an d when the s ack is ,

full the same worm adds more flour an d presses it down with its w eight
,

to the required compact n ess .

Th rod L ru n s to the brake which regu l ates the l owerin g of the sack
e

in other terms the degree of comp act n ess of the packin g

, .

I n Fig 4 84 we h av e D averio s packer of a simil ar type with an

’
.
,

adjustable pl atform A for supportin g the sacks The liftin g an d l owering .

of the pl atform is do ne by means of chain s (there are two chains for the
s ake of equabi lity ) wi n di n g o n or o ff drums Th weigh t of the p l atform
. e
4 76 FLO UR MILLI NG [ CH AR vn

the sack is p laced in an iro n casin g A otherwise it might burst After ,

.

the packin g operatio n is over the casi n g is open ed a n d the sack removed
from the l ift .

Th e n umber of rev o l utio n s of the discharge worm is 2 00 per mi n ute ,

the capacity 5 0 to 60 1 00 lb or 3 5 to 4 0 2 0 0 lb sacks per hour -

.
,
-

. .

VI

AP P ARATU S FOR RE o K o N I NG AND R E G U LA TI N G TH E QU ANTI TY or

P R OD U C T

A u to ma tic S apparatus w hich serve for recko nin g the

ca les . Th e
quantity of grain stock are con structed for dry substan ces ge n erally ,

FI G 4 8 7 . . FI G . 4 88 . FI G . 4 89 .

and their purpose is automatically to weigh the product flowin g in with

out in terrupt ion to be treated or packed .

Th most typical represe n tatives of this ki n d of apparatus are th e

e

scales Chro n os Libra & ,

" “
,
”
c .

Figs 4 8 7 4 8 8 a n d 4 8 9 illustrate the p l an of the

.
, Chro n os scales ,

a n d the esse n ce of their co n structio n co n sists in the fo ll owi n g There .

is a cast iro n frame A n which the hopper D for the product is set
-

I o .

This hopper is divided by the partitio n a with a sl ot in which

“

2 ,

there ru n s the valve gate d co nn ected by a system of levers with 1

~

the bal an ce levers On the right han d side of the balan ce levers or
.
-

scale beam A and I is set a scale 0 for weights o n the left n rods b is
s
,
o

suspen ded the scal e B which rests with steel prisms d set into the j our
, ,

n l s of th scal e
a Th beams A n d I rest with their stee l prisms o n stee l
e . e a

lin i n gs in the brackets of the frame T the beam A is attached n arm . o a .

Z which i n dicates the correct setti n g of the scales whe n in v ertical posit io n -
.
CH AP . V II ] F LOU R MI LL I NG 4 77

T hrou gh the left han d side part a of the hopper D the grain ru ns
-

”
1 ,

i nto the scale B the n the right h an d side a is covered with the gate d
, ] .

W he n the sc al e is su ffi cie n t ly filled with grai n it drops dow n n d upsets ,

a ,

assu min g the positio n B nd 1, a

the grai n quickly pours o u t .

At the same time the l ever a ,

co nnected with the scale (see

perspective view ) a nd with the
meter x drops down n d tur n s
,
a

o n e di visio n of the pi n io n of the

cou ntin g mechan ism S imul .

t a n e o u sly with the droppi n g of

the scale the valve F c loses the
out let of the hopper W he n .

the grain has ru n out the ,

weights ret u r n the scale to it s

former positio n t take the ,
o
F 4 90 IG
n ext l oad o f grai n 81 0
. .
'

, .

I n the perspective view (Fig 4 88 ) is show n the l e v er with the ad j ust

ab le weight for accuratel y moun tin g the scales .

I n Fig 4 89 we see the scal e Libra which differs from the Ob ro ”

.
,

in small detail s
'

nos .

W he n mou n t in g the
scale it is e n c l osed inan
iro n case which is l ocked ,

or sealed to preven t the ,

workme n from alteri n g

the n umber i n dicated
for the purpose of cheat
in g Th chamber in . e

w hich the scal e is n e

c losed must always be

exhausted otherwise ,

the delicate cran ks of

the scale beams an d sys
tems of levers havin g ,

F 491 IG . .

become dusty cease ,

workin g accurately an d the bal an ce begi n s t show in correct weights o .

Fig 4 9 0 ill ustrates a perspective v iew of the

.
Chro n os scale and ,

Fgi. 4 9 1 a ers
p p ective vie w of t he Li bra sca l e , which is s l i ht
g y l
 4 78 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR V II

differen t from th e Chro n os in its co n structio n but giv es j ust as

,

accurate a weighin g
—F
.

Co lu m bia n F eed Go vern o rs regu l atin g the quantity of product or

fed to the roller mills the American apparatus Columbia is empl oyed
, .

I t co n sists o f a box A (Fig through the in c li n ed wall of which

.

there is made an ope n in g E I n the ope ni n g E attached to the lev er F

“
.
, ,

there is a sli de valve G by raisin g or l oweri n g which the quan tity of

,

grain passin g through this open in g is in creased or reduced W he n .

dropped to the bottom the slide valve G c l oses the open in g E but
, ,

o nly so far as to allow pass age to the least flow of the apparatus of an y
giv en size .

Th e automatis m of actio n
a n d a d j ustabil ity of th is a
p
paratus co n sist in the foll owin g .

Th e l ever F in its axis of

rotatio n is fi xed by hook like -

rings M M an d by mean s of a ,

solid rod is coup led with the

le v er 0 .

On o n e side o f the l ever 0

'

there are two cou nterweights ,

the l arger of which is sta

tio n ary while the small er o n e ,

T freel y trav el s o v er t he r a ck
F
IG 4 92
. .

part of 0 By setti ng this .

ad j ustab le cou nterweight T o n a correspon din g grade m arked o n the

scale of the lever O the quantity of product ru nn in g per min ute
,

through the openin g E is deter m in ed The le v er O o n the side .

,

opposite to the cou nterweights has two han dles S S to the e n ds of , ,

which o n wire rods a frame B with i n cl in ed pl anes K is suspen ded .

The grain s fallin g o n the in cli n ed p l an es K produce a press u re whi ch

To attai n a quiet ev e n actio n of the slide valve G th ere is a piston J

'

runn n g I n a cyli nder I with glycerin e an d con n ected with o n of the

i e
'
han dles S of the le ver C I f the apparatus is desig n ed to do service for
.
,

a double roller mill i e a roller mi ll with two pairs of rolls it has to be

, . .
,

statio n ed in the middl e of the roller mill hopper so that the frame B ,

should be p laced down the len gt h of the roll s But if the grai n
“

ru n s o n ly to o n e
p air o f r olls t he apparat u s is set o v er the hopper
,
,
4 80 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR V II

p l ates K (in th frame B ) o n ly woode n tools shou ld be used an d in n o

e ,

case sharp metal o n es The p ear shaped weight V given in additio n to

.
-
,

each apparatus is set o n o n of the han dles S of the l ever 0 when it is

,
e

n ecessary to c l ose the Ope n in g E comp l etel y .

V II

FL O U R B L E A C H I N G

Owin g to the great devel opmen t of mi lli n g tech n ics durin g the
l ast t n years
e it has ,
bee n show n that it is possib l e to obtain pr o duct s
of a perfectio n n o t co n ceived previously Th attempts to impro v e . e

the outward qualities of flour referred to its col our as well W must . e

ackn owledge that the co n sumer very soo n became used to the grades of
flour which are of a better colour for in stan ce an d is extremely parti
, , ,

cu l ar about it Th e desire of the mill s to comp ly with these dema nds

.

forced them to have r ecourse to a chemical actio n upo n the flo u r with the
view to improvin g its white col our ; the other grou n ds adduced in
]
,

exp l an ation o f this man ipul atio n such as en han ci n g the bakin g qualities
-

of the flour & c bein g o n ly of secon dary importan ce

,
.
,
.

The improveme n t in the white co l our of the flour may be attai n ed by

treatin g it with b leachin g substan ces I t is evide nt that a series of .

b leachin g material s has to be excluded as i n j rious in this operation u ,

a n d o n ly those may be app li ed which are vol atil e a n d may be extracted

after they have had their effect o n the flour S uch for in stan ce are all .
, ,

gases which have a bleachi n g e ffect o n the organ ic substan ce ch lorin e ,

sulphureous gas ozo n e oxides of n itroge n , , .

On the grou n d of previous experien ce as to the e ffect of these sub

stan ces upo n flour the foll owin g is kn own : though ch lorin e an d s l u

p h u re o gas do
us b l each the fi oU r t h ey l ower its qual ity so much as to make
them commercially impossible Ozo n e likewise b leaches the flour but
. .

imparts n u n pl easan t odour to it Thus the sol e adaptab l e b leachin g

a .
,

subst an ces remaini n g are the ni troge n peroxides

—
.

The A l o p B
s l ea chin g P ro ces s I n 1 9 0 3 Al sop pate n ted his process of
fl our b l each in g by mean s of electrified air in apparatus especially i n ve n ted
for the purpose .

Al sop s apparatus (Fig 4 9 4 ) co n sists of four parts a dyn amo a n

’
. : ,

i n ductio n coil n air pump f r electrificatio n n d a switchboard Th

,
a o
,
a . e

electrifyin g pump is the most important part of the whol e system ; in it

th ble achin g gases are prod u ce d
e Between tw couples o f ele ctro de s . o
 CH AP . V II ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 4 81

there is a co n stantly i nterrupted co ntact owing to which e lectric sparks

7 to 1 5 cm l o n g are caused Un der the effect of these sparks chemic a l
. .

I s actio n s take p l ace betwee n the n itroge n a n d the oxyge n of the air which
-

give NO n itroge n dioxide The el ectrode coup les are p l aced in tubes
2 , .

AA o n e of the el ectrodes in each bei n g set fast o n the bott om of the tubes
,
,

while the others move in

the tubes with the aid of
'

slide rods E E Th slide . e

rods are con n ected with

each other in such a way
that they altern ate ly ap
proach the upper el ec
trodes to the bottom o n es
a n d remove them owi n g ,

to which electric sparks

are form ed betwee n the
electrodes .

Th e apparatus operates
in the fo ll owi n g mann er
w ith the a id of the doub l e
actio n pump B a current
of pure air is by t u rn s
aspirated through the
i n lets E H I n the tubes .
‘

A A the air is subjected to

the actio n of the electric
sparks Th e aspiratio n
.

of air takes p l ace s imul

t a n e o u sly with the pro
ductio n of a spark Th . e

electrified air is co nv eyed

through the tubes 0 0 F 4 94 IG . .

away a n d fl ows through

,

v alves in to the chamber B whe n ce through the co nn ectin g pipes a n d

,

valv es set in the back wall of the chamber (n o t see n in Fig

,
it .

passes i nto the pipe which co n ducts to the apparatus in which the flour
is agitated Further the marks o n the figure den ote DD wires for the
.
,

curren t G the s lidin g rod of the pump pisto n and F the shaft o n which
, ,

a pulley of an y particul ar diameter for drivin g the apparatus m ay be set .

Th e agita tin g apparatu s has the shape of an o bl o n g drum in which the

2 11
4 82 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR V II

flour is kept in co n stant motio n by a system of beaters owi n g to this the

part ic les of fl our come well in co ntact with the electrified air The effect .

of the gases become s man ifest after about a mi n ute s stirrin g of the flour ’
.

Th e operatio n of the apparatus may be regu l ated First of all the .

,

q ua n tity of air i n trod uced may be a ltered through a special gl obe v al v e

the ten sio n of the current and its quantity can l ikewise be altered .

E xp erimm ts of b l eachi n g after Al sop s method were performed wit h

’

a stren gth of curren t of 5 6 7 8 a nd 9 amperes The stirri n g apparatus

, , , , .

treated 3 6 to 4 0 sacks per hour ; the flour passed through the drum
in the space of 1 % m i n utes a n d was co n sequen t ly u n der the effect of these
gases o nly durin g that time Neither in the drum n o r o n leavin g it
.

did the flour smell of t he gases Three kin ds of flour were tested They . . .

were all obtain ed from Argentin a W heat which was just the n bein g ,

treated at the mill The followin g were the grades

.

P ate n t wheat fl our 0 to 3 0 per ce n t .

B akers 3 0 to 6 4 5
’

Low grade 6 4 5 to 7 3

The experime n ts were comme n ced with a curre n t 5 amperes stro n g .

I t appeared that with such a stre n gth of curre nt it was impossib le to

,

n otice an y v isib l e chan ge in the fl our defi n ab l e by O y

‘

p ek a ris a tio n nl .

beginn in g with 6 amperes did the effect of the gases upo n the patent and
bakers flour become manifest a nd then grew more inten se with the
’

i n creasin g stren gth of the current B efore it was b leached the flour h ad .

that peculi ar col our which is deman ded in German y in good whe at flour ,

or at l east is very much appreciated That colour remain ed after

, , .

b le achin g with 5 amperes u n chan ged ; with 6 amperes it w as per

cep tib l e, but seemed alre ady to be a littl e lighter ; with 7 amperes it
was scarcely n otice ab le ; o n the co n trary the flour began to a ssume a ,

kin d of dead grey col o u r which with the fu rther i n crease in the stren gth
,

of the curre nt grew more inten se .

The e ffect of th e gases appears to h av e bee n greater o n pate n t flo u r

than o n bakers The pate nt flOu r when more stro n gly b leached assumes
’
.

a col our remindi n g o ne of the colour of chalk whereas the bakers flour ,
’

assumes a dead greyish white colour This differe n ce is particul arly

-
.

visib l e by P ekar s test ’

.

As to the l o w grades flour the n itroge n peroxide seems to hav e n o

,

effect upon it E ve n after a stro ng bleachin g with a curre n t 8 amperes

.

stron g o n could n o t discover by dry test a n y alteratio n while the wet

e
,

test showed a s light differe n ce in col ourin g The lo w grad e flour is .

pr actically nbleachab le
u .
4 84 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR V II

The experime n ts performed with these products gave n o sig n s of the

properties n d the baki n g qualities of the b le ached flour bein g mo dified
a
.

o
C n trary to former observatio n s however it was estab li shed that not
, ,

o nly the b leached flour but the crumb of the bre ad m ade of it as well
,
,

ap pe ared to be whiter Nevertheless the differe n ces were i n significant

. , ,

an d cou l d be n oticed o n l y whe n direct l y compared .

In the p a
l n t of the F l our Oxidisi n g O o b l eachi n g apparatus the .
’
s

bleachin g gas is procured chemically S mall quantities of ammoni a .

gas are co n veyed through a red hot pl ati n um tube an d thus the n itrogen -
,

dio xide obtain ed As is show n o n Fig 4 9 6 a l arge quantity of air is

.
.
,

forced with the aid of a n air pump an d reservoir i nto the tube ge n eratin g

FI G 4 9 6
. .
-
B lea ching Appara tu s of th e F l o u r Oxidising Co Lt d .

A —a ir p u m p —r serv f ; C—cyl in d er fo r amm o n ia ; D n itro g en d io xide —

—
B e o ir fo r ai

(NO 2 ) g e n era to r ; E res ervo ir fo r NO M dru m fo r fl o u r; F —

w
fl o u r eed f '

—b
-

G l each ed fl o u r del i very .

the n itroge n dioxide where those two gases b le n d an d are directed to

,

the bleachin g drums .

Th gases formi n g in the el ectric arc l amp

e n al so ser v e for flour ca

b leach in g Besides the various oxyge n combin atio n s of carbo n (CO an d

.

0 0 ) in the voltaic r there are al so formed oxides of n itroge n

2
a e nd ,
a

amo n g them the n itroge n di oxide (NO ) possessin g b leachin g properties Z .

Owin g to the high temperature of the vo ltaic ar the gases appearin g e,

are imme diat ely destroyed 3 but if the air out of the arc l amp is bein g .

s te adil y sucked away a mixture is btain ed co n sistin g chiefly Of air

, O ,

t h o p gh th e abov e n am ed gases are prese n t in sufficie n t quan tity to have

-
-
.

,
abl e achi n g effect E specially co n v e n ie n t for that purpose are the arc
.

l amps whe r e the carbon s are t n o t opposite to each other but form a se

s harp a ngl e as is the

,
c ase ,
for in s ta n ce in th e a r l amps fo r co nti n uous , e
 OH AP . vu ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 4 85

c u rrent man ufactured by the Ar Lamp W orks Ltd in Nu rn berg c , , .

S uch l amp s are easily j oi n ed i n to o n e system by mean s of a reservoir .

I f the e lectrified air were to be draw n out of this reser v oir it cou l d be ,

directed after cooli n g in the air tan k to the b leachin g drums

Gen era l Res u lt of I n vestig ti n —
.

s Th resu lts of B uchwald a n d N a o e eu

man n s experime n ts lead to the co n clusio n that the n ormal b leachin g

’

does n o t cause a n y grea t chan ge of a chemical character Atte ntio n .

must be especially drawn to the fact that eve n after a l apse of several
mo nths a test of the flour gave the same results ; co n seque n tly the ,

b leached fl our e ve n in the course Of time shows n o te n de n cy to m o difi ca

, ,

tio n At the same time it was estab lished that t he b leachi n g effect of
.
'

the n itroge n dioxide is b ased o n the modificatio n of the fat in the whe at
.

flour Fleuren t co n siders that the n itroge n oxide precip it ates directly
’

o n the fat si n ce it disappears

, .

Accordi n g to Avary a n d to Alw ay a n d P i n k n ey the oxides of n itro

g n deco l ori se in the same way as su n li ght the co l ourin g substa n ce
e , ,

dissolved in the fat of the wheat .

The fat obtai n ed by Buchwald a nd Neuma n n out of b le ached flour ,

the raw fat of ether extractio n disp l ayed n o chan ges in colouri n g Th ,
. e

be n zol extract proved to be lighter o n ly in a stron gly (9 amperes ) b leached

flour I n optical respect the fats showed n o deflectio n s Th q u anti
. . e

t ativ differe n ces in the co n te n ts of fat are caused by b l eachi n g appar

e

e nt ly o nl y in the pate n t flour the quan tity of fl our so lub le in ether at ,

the same time in creasin g but also here the differe n ces are in sig n ifican t I n
,
.

the bakers grades where wi n g to the l arger percen tage of fat greater
’

, ,
o ,

modificatio n s wou ld be expected there were likewise n o differe n ces n oticed ,

.

I n its fresh co n ditio n n d after it had bee n lyi n g the flour co n tain ed
a

the same amou n t of water Neither was there an y differen ce n otice .

ab le in the quan tity of acid .

Th diastatic power of flour man ifest in its property of co n v erti n g

e ,

to sugar appare nt ly i n creases in case of a weak i e n ormal b leachin g

, , . .
,

a n d drops whe n that process s exaggerated 1 .

An importan t poin t in the i n ve n tor s methods is the assertio n that

’

the quant ity of protein in the flour i n creases owin g to hi metho d s

of b leachin g whi le the amou n t of carbo hydrates dimin ishes Th truth

,
-
. e

of such a n assertio n seems i n credible but it is i nterestin g to watc h ,

the effect the b leachin g gases have o n the amou n t of n itroge n an d glute n
in the flour .

From the resu lts of B uchwald a nd Neuman n s experime n ts the

’

fo llowin g may be i n ferred the quantity of n itroge n remain s the same

4 86 FLO UR MILLI NG [ CH AR vn

if the b leachin g is weak b u t it dimin ishes especially in the bakers grades

, ,
’

if the b leachin g is stro n g An an alogous phe n ome n o n w as observed in

.

the gluten The differe n ces in the amou nt of glute n proved to be in

.

significan t owin g to the i n accuracy of the method of in vestigatio n but ,

must be regarded as correct sin ce the n umbers obtai n ed in the man ifold
,

repetitio n s of the i nvestigatio n were the same .

Out of these experime nts the followin g n umbers were obtai n ed

TAB E L L
Paten t
.

Unb l each ed . B l eached . Unb l each ed . B l eac hed .

W ater
Fat
Tota qua tity of protein s
l n

Protei s sso lved in w ater

n di
Gl uten

Sugar ma tose )
( l
D iastatic po w er

The results obtai n ed from experime n ts in baki n g have the most

weight for practice .

The flour the i n vestigators had at their disposal was tested in a ccurate
l aboratory experime n ts as we ll as practically in baki n g estab lishme nts
both the results coin cide well There were n o advantages or defects
.

discovered in the b leached flour .

I n n o case was the b l eached flour fou n d to be wor se as regards the

baki ng qualities .

Th experime n ts were so arran ged as to hav e the process of ferme nta

e
’

tio n o n the o n e ha n d take p l ace in particul arly favourab le circumst an ces

,

in the l aboratory experime nt a n d o n the other h a n d in the co n di tio n s

-

obt ain in g in practice I t appeared that the water absorb in g cap acity of
. -

b leached flour is s lightly smaller ; the quantity of water bein g the same ,

a l arger amou n t of flour was n ecessary to prepare the same dough .

Unb l each ed . B l e ach ed .

6 am p . 9 a mp .

Quan t i ty of water requ red by paten t flo u r

i 1 3 80 1 4 60 1 4 40 - - -

bakers grades 1 6 4 0 1 72 6
’
1 6 92 -

I n other words b leac h ed flour absorbs l ess water V

, IZ
,

P ate n ts by 4 0 per cent to 3 l per cent -

.
' '

Bakers ’

3 2 -
4 88 F LO UR MI LLI N G [C H AR VII

i n admissib le si n ce it wou ld all ow the adulteration of hard wheat mid

,

dlin gs b l e a ched by n ature itse lf with the aid of white rice middlin gs .

That Co n gress gave utteran ce to what the i nvestigators were alre ady
deman di n g in the i nterests of custom taxation n amely the estab lishin g
,

of stan dards of b leached flour .

B u t o n the other han d in the Un ited S tates wher e the chemists E F

, , , . .

L add a nd R E S t alli n gs (North D akota ) are stubborn antago nists of

. .
,

bleachi ng in several of the S tates b leachi n g is co n sidered to be an

,

adulteratio n of flo u r i n j urious to health a n d is forbidden by l aw

, .
 CHAP TER V II I

MI LLI NG D I AGRAMS

CL A S S I F I CATI ON OF MI LL I N G S YS TEMS
IN the precedi n g chapters where we had to speak of the reductio n of
,

g rai n in co nn ectio n with the character of operatio n of the machi n es we ,

me n tio n ed in brief out l i n es the differe n t mi ll i n g systems No w we h av e .

to give a defin ite a n d accurate c l assificatio n of the v arious millin g systems

met with in practice otherwise it will be diffi cult to make out the inn u
,

m erab le v arieties of mi llin g s chemes proceedi n g from the quality of grai n ,

l ocal co n ditio n s of productio n a n d the deman ds made by the l ocal

, ,

di strict a n d wor l d markets

, .

From the remotest time u p to the e n d of the sixtee n th ce n tury the

tech n ics of flo u r millin g kn ew o n ly o n method of reduci n g the grain e ,

the esse n ce of which con sisted in that the grai n was passed but o nce
.

through the milli n g machi n e an d was reduced together with the integu
men ts I n the end of the sixteeenth ce ntury there was i nve nted in Fran ce
.

an other method of milli n g ascribed to the miller P igeau d That method

, .

was kept in secret by the Fre n ch a l o n g time un til in 1 7 60 B ouquet a , ,

we ll kn own miller in Lyo n s pub lished it u n der the n ame of Mouture

-

,
“
“

a la lyo nn aise ,
havin g perfected the o ld Fren ch method of millin g of
the e n d of the sixtee n th ce n tury I n the more rece nt Fre n ch literature
.

that milli n g system is called Mouture é co n omique Th esse n ce of . e

that system lay in the fact that the grain was reduced n o t by o n passage e

but by sev eral W hen letti n g the stock pass three or four tim es in b e
.
‘

twee n the millsto n es the upp er sto n e the runn er was set high over the
, , ,

l ower o n a n d gradually the dist a n ce betwee n them was reduced to the

e,

n ormal n ecessary for fi n e gri n di n g Th product obtai n ed after a passage

. e

through the first millsto n e with the ru nn er set high was bolted o n a ree l
separator an d gave flour as thro u ghs while the o verta il s co ntainin g the
,

l arge partic les of grai n was fed to the seco n d sto n e the gri n di n g a n d the ,

bo lti n g bei n g repeated u ntil the tails from the l ast reel separator co nsisted -

489
4 90 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR VIII
of bran Owin g to such a method of millin g a considerab le part o f the
.

.
. ,

bran was no t a dmi xed to the flour an d the flour obtai ned w as whiter , .

That meth od of mi lli n g began to spre a d rapid ly in E urope a nd

America u n der the n ame of repeated high or reductio n system B u t in , .

Austria Hu n gary where the dry an d hard wheat has brittl e co v erin gs
-

, ,

that method gav e n o good results as the i nteguments were reduced ,

together with the starchy part of the grain an d imparted a darker col our ,

in g to the flour W ith the in v e n tio n of the purifier by the Hu n garian

.

P au r the repeated mill in g was e n riched by o n e v ery importan t stage in

—
the mill in g process the freein g of middlin gs of the offal s which ,

brought a n ew improvi n g alteratio n i nto the milli n g process .

Thus the historical course of de v e l opme nt of grai n mi llin g an d its

presen t state de fines two methods of gri n din g
P l ain grin din g .

2 Repeated grin din g . .

The substan ce of these methods is perfect ly c lear from the precedin g .

B u t mill i n g practice d eman ds a comp licatio n of the p l ai n millin g

towards the rep eated millin g n o t realisi n g however fully the pri n ciple
, , ,

of moder n high millin g o n the on e han d an d o n the other ofte n simpli fie s , ,

the high millin g without brin gin g it up to the comp licated system
, .

German flour m illin g tech n ics hav e estab lished three types of _

I Fl ach mhl
or p l ain grindi n g
u ere i lo w
I I Halb ho chm iihlerei—semi high gri n di n g
fi
.
.

I I I Ho chm iih ler i—high grin di n g

-
. .

. e .

I t must be remarked howe v er that the most l ear n ed Austr i a n

, ,

scie ntist P rofessor K ick foll ows the firs t c l assificatio n i e he di vides
, , , . .

the milli n g in two groups p l ain and high re gardin g the semi high
, ,
-

millin g as high with a reduced n umber of breaks .

I n our f u rther studies of mill i n g we shall keep to the c l assi fi catio n

'

est ab lished by practice and defin e d by the subst an ce of the proc ess
itself Fo r this reaso n we o ffer the followi n g two types of millin g systems
.

1 Pl ai n (l o w) grin din g . .

I I High grin di n g . .

The esse n ce of the p l ain millin g system for wheat is defi n ed n o t by

the n umber of passages of the product through the gri n din g machin e s
.

b u t by the purpose of these p as sage s The ob j ect of each passage through .

the grin di n g machin e in p l ain millin g is to obtai n flour immediately as ,

the chief product Th total n umber of passages may fluctuate between

. e

o ne a n d five The abse n ce of purifiers must be r

. egarded as a characteristic
492 FLOU R [ V III MILL I NG C H AR

flour The bo lti n g away of the u n reduced o ffa ls is do n e by han d S ieves

.

before bakin g if the bran is too l arge which happe n s when the grain ,

is n o t perfectly dry ,

The S ingle P a ssa ge S ifted M illin g differs from the precedi n g in that the
bran is sifted away in the mill by mean s of a reel or S ifter I n the .

l atter case t he mill is ge n erally co n structed for improved p l ain mi lli n g ,

which can yield two or three kin ds of fl our but in depe n de n ce o n the ,

deman d for the peasa nt sifted flour c an produce this flour after o ne sin gle
-

passage The sin gle passage bolted millin g yields 8 5 to 9 5 per ce n t of flour
. . .

S in gle P a ssa ge I n tense Millin g Th e aim of this system is the .

-

reductio n to flour n o t o n ly of the grai n kern el but of its i ntegume nts too , .

After reduc tio n the product ru n s to the bolti n g machi n e which yie lds ,

flo u r as thro u ghs a nd tail s over bra n Th e bra n goes to the same so le .

milli ng machin e which receiv es the grain Thus we have a locked cycle .

for the flow of the bran which resu lts in the bra n bein g reduced to part icles
,

of flour an d the whole 1 00 per ce nt of flour is obtain ed from the grain

—
. .
,

I m pro ved P la in M il l ng
i Th e purpose of t hi s system is to extract
a ll the flour partic les as far as possib l e from the grai n a n d to separate ,

away the o ffal s co ntai n in g n o flour The n umber of reductio n s in this .

~

system is from t wo to five the product after each reductio n machin e ,

p assin g to the bolter .

The ge n eral diagram of the improved p l ai n milli n g system I s this

r
Fi st Redu ct io n .

Flo u r 0 . l . D u n st . Middl in g s .

l
Redu c io n t of Middl ing s
l
D u n st .

I t
l Cl eani ng
,

x/ up .

l f
Redu cti o n of Du n s t .
J
, l
,

1
(, D ark F lo u r . Co a rse and Mediu m
Bra n
l l
.,
.

F lo u r No s . 1 2 . D a rk D u n s t .

l
Redu c io n t of Du n s t .

l
D a rk F l o u r . Fi n e O fal s f (b l u e p ro d u ct ) .

W see in this p l an that each reduction system yields a gr adually

e can

deterioratin g flour dun st middlin gs an d o ffal s Th flour deteriorates

'

, , . e

the more quickly the less the n umber s of re duction systems

, 1 .
C H AR VI I I ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 493

It has already bee n me ntio n ed that an improved p lain system o n c

sists of two t o five an d seldom six redI ctio n s W ith two reduction s
f
I .
,

g e n e rally u p t o 70 per ce n t of flour is obtai n ed from the first an d up to

.
,

1 5 per ce n t fro m the s eco n d . 85 per ce n t shou ld be regarded a s the . .

lim it of flour yi e l d for the improved p l ai n system ; a certain perce n tage

of yields for each reductio n may be at the same time taken to calcul ate ,

the millin g machin es I n the case given with two reduction s the first
.
, ,

o n e yie lds 70 per ce n t of flour direct ly Th e seco n d reduction syste m

. .

receives the remn an t of the product , i . e .

32 3
If we take 50 per cent of
100
.

30 50
flour from it we obtain ,
1 0 3 =l5 per ce n t . Thus 1 5 per ce nt will be .

discharged as bran 2 0 per ce nt of flour might be take n from the seco n d

. .

reductio n but the n the flour would be too dark

, .

As to the quan tity of i n termediate products o n the improved p l ai n

system with three or more reductio n s moder n practice offer s litt le ,

de fin ite material I n that case much depen ds o n the way the mill er
.

performs the reductio n S till we must appe n d the data of a German . .

specialist W in gert for three an d six reductio n systems (Table s LI

, ,

an d LI I ) .

TA BL E LI

Y iel ded in 1 00 P er Cen t .

No s of
.

R ed u ctio ns
Pro du ct R edu ce d .

Middl ing s
Bl u e Flo u r
.

F lo u r .

a nd D u n st
.
B ran . .

ean ed grain
Cl 1 00 50
Middli n gs a n d du n st 30 20
Middli n gs a n d dun st 10 10 7 —

T otal quan tity in 1 00 per cen t . 140 —

7 7 80

TA BLE -

LI I

l Clean ed grai n 1 00
2 Middli n gs a n d du n st 50
3 an d 4 D un st 25
5 D un st 15
6 Bran 15

T otal q uan tity in 1 00 per cen t . 205

494 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR V I II
Let us n o w proceed to exami ne sev eral typic al diagrams of the im
prov ed pl a n milli n g system
i .

III

D I A G R A MS or I M PR O V ED P LAI N MI LLI N G S YS TE MS
The improved p l ain millin g system has l ately begu n to gain a wide
l ocal market . That system showed particu l arly rapid deve l opme n t
after the roller mills were adopted The .

n umber of flour gr a des obtai n ed with this

system is gen erally from o n e to three and ,

sometimes up to fiv e .

Let us exami n e several typical diagram s

of the pl ain roller milli n g system .

Fig 4 9 7 gi v es a diagram of the p la n t

.

for a mi ll of 1 00 to 1 3 0 sacks c ap acity

per 2 4 hours .

The grai n is deposited in the stori n g

b in whe n ce the el e v ator carries it to the
,

magnet which detain s the iro n extraneous ,

matter From the mag net app aratus ,the .

grain flows in a bro a d she et to the

aspirator (separator ) with a S iev e a nd
manifold fann in g On the siev e thegrai n .

is freed of the l arge impurities : str aw ,

b arley wild oats maize St e On the , , , .

separator like wise are partly sorted away

the small impurities : cockle sm all an d ,

broke n grain and the dirt adherin g to the ,

stock .

The diameter of the meshes o n the

aspirator sieves is 4 to 5 5 mm the l arge .
,

a nd 2 mm the small . .

After the aspirator the grai n goes to the

cockle cylin der (trieu r ) where the gr ai n ,

M—F
is freed of
l o u rd u st
cock l e pease broke n a n d smal l , ,

—
.

K —B
p grai ns a n d other a n al ogous impurities
Co rru g atio n s .

, .

M —
p ran
From the cockl e cyli n der the gr a in is
.

S h arp s
—ff
e .
.

O al s
c .

directed to the horizo ntal emery scourer

with trip le aspiratio n where the germ beard p art o f the bran coatin gs
, , , ,

an d dust lyi n g in the cre a se are remo v e d ,

496 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ C H AR VII I
Th ta ils o f that ree l separator are fi n e bra n a n d the t hrou gh s
e -
,

yie ld flour of the secon d grade an d dun st which goes t o the mill ,
.

If it is desired to gi v e a better fi n ish to th e goods of the seco n d gr a de

the du n st is sacked o ff .

Le n gth of rolls of the seco n d reductio n mill

D iameter
D iffere n tial ve l ocity of the ro ll s
Numb er of corrugation s to a n i n ch
Number of revolutio n s of the 4 n d 5 c l ot hree l a

separators
D iameter o f the reel cylin der -

B oth the reductio n and the break mill are exhaust ed .

The ordin ary type of the pop l ar improved pl ain mi lli n g system u ,

especiall y in the south of Russia has the foll owin g form ,

Gra in Cle n in g — An aspirator or separator with a sie v e a trieur

a .
'

(cy l i n der ) n d a horizo

a n ta l scourer .

—
,

Gra in Redu t o c i n Tw o passages through corrugated roll s a n d o n e

passage through a millston e After the roller passages the product is .

bolted o n sifters or o n reel s After the sto n e which clean s out the
.
,

bra n the boltin g yields flour of the l ast grade a nd the refuse gives
,

bran If two grades of flour are prepared the product is yielded as

.
,

follows first grade 4 5 per cent seco n d grade 3 6 2 5 per ce n t bran

: .
,

1 7 5 per ce n t
-
differe nt losses 1 2 5 per cen t I f desired the first and
.
,
-
.

secon d grades may be mixed to o n straight grade e .

Fig 4 9 8 il lustrates a milli n g diagram with four passages

. Th e gr ai n .

c lean in g departmen t of such a mill co n sists of the followi n g machin es

the grain goes first to the dust reel separator where it is free d of heavy -
.

dust nd small extran eous matter : The wire cl oth used for small impuri
a

ties and dust is NO 1 6 to separate the l arge impurities from the g rai n NO 5
.
, .
CH AR VIII ] F LOUR MI LL I NG 4 97

(to a n in ch ) F rom the ree l

. separator the grai n goes to the trieur
-
whe n ce ,

it passes to the magn et apparatus From the mag n et apparatus it goes .

to the horizo ntal emery scourer From the scourer i nto two bi n s .
,

where the grai n is tempered for fiv e or six hours Then it goes to the .

reductio n machi n es .

f —
Gra in Red ctio n T h re ductio n is per
u formed in two four roller mill s
e -

Th first o n is 4 5 0 X 2 0 0 mm in size the seco n d 7 00 ><3 OO mm

e e .The , .

whole reductio n process is e n ded in four passages Th first break . e

gives dark flour (b lue flour ) nd coarse m iddlin gs which are bo lted o n a
a ,

3 metre ree l separator The refuse goes to the S eco n d break which is
.

- -

.
,

bolted o n a 4 metre ree l separator Th flour obtai n ed is fairly white

- -
. e
,

a n d the midd li n gs are medium sized a n d mix with the midd li n gs from the

first break a n d together with them r n to the smooth rolls where both
, u ,

FI G . 4 99 .

are reduced a nd give white flour first grade a n d o verta ils the O called
, , ,
S -

flat product which mixes with the tail s from the seco n d break a nd goe s
,

to the fourth passage Here the flat product a n d the tai ls from the secon d
.

passage u n dergo a fin al reductio n nd are the n bolted o n a 4 metre reel ,

a -

separator where theflour obtain ed is better than the o n e from the first
,

passage an d darker than that from the se co n d S in ce the flour goes to .

a common con veyor the grades may be combin ed at p leasure the first
,

may be obtain ed separately I I I I I I a n d I V & Naturally in stead , , , , ,

0 .
,

of reel separators sifters may be emp l oyed That mill can grin d up
- .
.

to 5 0 0 bushel s of wheat per day (2 4 hours ) o n this p l an

’

Fig 4 9 9 shows a diagram of c l ean i n g a n d reductio n with five

.

reductio n pa ssages
—
.

Gra in Clea n in g The i n expe ns iv e c l ea n in g departme n t of the mill

co n sists of an asp irator a trieur a S eek scourin g machin with a
, ,
e

scouring siev e, Luther s emery scourer a brush mac hine and a clean
’

2 I
4 98 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR VI I I
reel separator From the stori n g b in the grai n is fed to the asp irator
-
.

with o ne or two S ev es where it is freed of l arge an d fin e impurities

i , ,

such as straws cobs c l ods of dirt & c The fan in the mean while
, , ,
.

carries away the dust which is of very litt le v al ue to the cycl on e or the
, ,

filters After that the grain passes to the trieur where the cockle pease
. , , ,

& c are separated away

.
,
.

I n this man n er the grain freed of a ll foreig n matter u n dergoes , ,

further treatme n t Th beard a nd the germ coa ts are broke n o ff the g rai n
. e ,

is polished and the n passes to the reel separator from the reel separator
,
- -

to the brush where the grain is sub j ected to a fin al polishin g a nd at the

, ,

same tim ethe dust brushed out Of the creases The pure grain is damped .

a n d the n by mean s of the co nv eyor

,
more or less satisf actorily stirred ,

a n d carried i n to bi n s for temperi n g The grai n thus prepared is the n .

milled .

The M illin g D epa rtmen t (Fig 4 9 9 ) co n sists of three four roller mills .
-

a two box S ifter with four divisio n s a nd a reel separator The first mill
-

,
-
.

is 3 2 x l 2 in the seco n d 3 2 x 1 4 in the th ird 2 0 x 1 0 in The secon d

.
, .
,
.

mill has o n e pair of smooth roll s which reduce fin e middli n gs The .

boltin g machin es may also be set in the followin g order o ne S ifter for
three products and the seco nd S ifter for two products .

The n umber of groo ves o n the first pair of ro ll s in the first mill is 1 6
to an in ch o n the secon d pair of the first mill 1 8 o n the fourth pair of the
, ,

secon d mill 2 2 an d in the third mill b o th pairs of rolls hav e 2 6 groo ves
,
-
.

The order of mi lli n g is the fo ll owi n g B efore the firs t passage the .

grain ru n s over the magn et apparatus I n the first passage the grain is .

broken dow n an d the product of grindi n g goes to the first di vision of

,

the S ifter The larger brea k chop an d la rge semo lina an d the tail s of
.
,

the bottom t ray u n dergo a secon d passage The product obtain ed p asses .

to the seco nd div ision of the sifter The thro u ghs from the bottom tr ays ,

of the first two systems fin e semo li n a are fed to the smooth rolls I I I
, ,
’

Th product grou n d is bo lted in the third div isio n of the S ifter

e Th e .

l arger chop an d rebreak a n d the bottom ta il s of the seco n d di vi

,

sio n the ta il s of the top sie v es a nd the bottom tail s of the third di visio n
, , ,

go to the fourt h pair of corr gated ro lls The pr o duct received from u .

the fourth pair ru n s to the fourth divisio n of the sifter where from the first ,

two trays c lean ed l arge bran is obtain ed The product of the n ext two .

trays and the bottom tails dark du n st pass to the fifth pair of rolls , , .

The product from the fifth ro ll s is fed to the reel separator whe n ce fin e -

bran an d dark dun st are discharged as ta i ls I f desired the dark dun st .

c an b e de livere d se arate l y Th e t h l ast c l oth in the reel separat or

p n e .
-
5 00 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C HAR V II I
co n tain in g n y proportio n of rye even if the quantity of admixture
a ,

should be small because the flour assumes a darker col ourin g i n co n se

,

n ce
q u e .

Un der s u ch circumstan ces it is possib le to treat ll the grain together a

an d temper it some t n or twe l ve hours if it is of a hard ki n d

e n d four or ,
a

fiv if softer
'

e .

I t is v ry d irab l that the grai n c lean i n g shou ld b p rf rm d in

. '

e es e e e o e

two scourin g passages it bei n g n ecessary to d ampe n the grai n before it

,

goes to the seco n d scouri n g passage I n such a grain clean i n g process the .
-

first scourin g passage frees the grai n of the dust an d dirt After damp .

in g the grai n is tempere d n d the n u n dergoes the seco n d scour in g passage

,
a .

B t s in ce grai n c lea n i n g of that ki n d at the farm mi lls is compara

u

tively expen sive it is difficult to expect it to spread though we must .

remark that good flour repays the extra expen ses .

Th mi ll s described gr in d K ban k with a 1 0 or 2 0 per ce n t admixture

e u a .

of wi n ter wheat .

I n e n di n g the review of the improved p l ai n mi llin g system the fact ,

should be n oted that with this system it is n o t difficult to obtai n good

flour from soft wheat covered with el astic bra n coats which do n o t break up
so much n d leave the flour n dirti d Th best grades of flour prepared
, a u e . e

from hard wheats o n the other han d become dirty owin g to the offal bein g
, ,

grou n d F o r this reaso n the milli n g has to be performed cautiously the

.
,

dry grain bein g damped an d the n umber of passages in creased .

IV

HI GH GR I N D I N G

The high repeated or gradual reductio n process has already been

'

, ,

characterised in brief out lin e W shall n e w study it more min utely . e .

To extract the who l e of the mealy part out of the grain n d separate a

away the integume nts havi n g removed as far as possib le ll mealy parts
"

,
a ,

is the purpose of high grin din g This is attain ed in a certain degree by .

the break n d rebreak process the aim of which is to break the grain
a ,

down to middlin gs n d du n st to separate from them the partic les o n

a , c

tain in g n o ffal s n d last ly extract out of the particles of integument the

o ,
a ,

remaini n g partic les of meal .

As regards the character of reductio n high gri n din g may be divided ,

in to four separate categories I n the first must be p l aced the breaki n g .

of the berry down the crease which a llo w s of the removal of dust ,
CH AP . V II I ] FLOU R MI LL I NG 50 1

sett led in the crease from the halves n d otherwise inextr t b l in the ,
a ac a e

c lean in g process The Fre n ch call this passage pre limi n ar

. y break “ ”

(l / g ) the Germa n s H o hs ch r t
t b og I n the seco n d category
’
v n
a a a e i , c o .

are a series of passages in which the halves of grain are co nsecutive ly

’

grou n d to m idd lin gs an d du n st break prop r b o g/ ge pro premen t dit) e i a

of a better quality .

I n the passages of the third category which shou ld be n amed the ,

comp letio n of break (co mp lement de b o g/a ge) middli n gs and dun st i ,

of a low er quality (soft ) are produced Fi n ally the passages of the fourth .
,

category are design ed to c lea n ff the mealy partic les from the bran (c ra ge o u

des so n s )
.

devel oped r br akin g process in which there are at least three pa s

A e e

sages represents the three la st categories of the breaki n g process or with ,

o n e or two the reductio n of the rebreak midd li n gs .

The breaki n g a n d r b re a king process has to be so performed as to

e

produce as litt le flour a s p o s ib l ; because it ca n n ot be freed from the mealy

'

s e

partic les of integume nt an d ca n be se n t o n ly to the worst grades

, .

Th number of breaks varies betwee n five a n d t n the breaki n g of

e e ,

the grain dow n the crease i n cluded ; the n umber of reb re k between a s,

o n e a n d fiv e The harder the wheat is a n d the more midd li n gs a n d less

.

break flour is it desirab le to obtain the greater is the n umber of passages ,

used .

Th e product obtai n ed from each separate passage is sorted o n

bo lti n g machi n es a n d gives a series of middlin gs a n d du n st of various size
,

a n d q al ity The n they are b le n ded accordin g to size a nd quality

u .

(sharp or hard n d soft ) n d subjected

a to gradi n g accordi n,
g to
a t h eir
quality o n purifiers .

W he n the midd li n gs a n d du n s t are freed of bra n a n d graded

accordi n g to size a n d quality the process of reductio n comme n ces That ,
.

process is divided in to two parts First the middlin gs are broke n down .

fin er That part of reductio n is an alogous to the r b r king process

. e ea ,

a n d ought to b n amed the r break of midd li n gs (

e po lishi n g of semoli n a )
e .

The se n se o f that part of the process has to b exp l ai n ed H owever w e ll e .

the p u rifier may work we shall always hav e a certain perce ntage of,

middli n gs covered with o ffa l s I t is impossib le to extract these grain s .

Of midd li n gs but by breaki n g them dow n

,
n porce l ai n or smooth ro ll s o ,

we obtain partic les of these midd lin gs covered with bran coats of a larger
size tha n those of pure starch m g to that we have the possibility .

of separati n g the brann y midd lin gs n bo lti n g machin es in a seco n d o

’

gradin g accor di n g to quality .

5 02 FLO UR MI LLI NG [CH AR V III

Co n seque n t ly ,
dev e loped high grindi n g whe n reb re akin g the
in ,

midd lin gs th , e productio n of a l arge quantity of flour S hou ld likewise be

avoided .

Fin ally, whe n the midd li n gs an d du n st are comp lete ly graded they ,

are reduced to flour n smooth rolls o .

W ith the detai ls of high gri n di n g we hall become acquain ted through S

the various millin g diagrams at prese nt we give a ge n eral p lan of high

grin din g .

1 Th B r k P r ce s (5 t 1 0 p sag ) . e ea o s o as es .

Kl ,

Flo u r . D u n st . Middlin g s . b
Re reak S em o lin a . La rg e B ra n .

l
2 . Re br eak Pro cess (1 to 5 pa ssa g es) .

F lo u r . D u n st . Middlin g s .
—M d
> e iu m B ra n .

3 G . r a ding a cco rdin g

l
t o S ize .

l
4 . r
G a ding a cco rding to Q u ali ty .

D u nst . Middling s .

C LE A NI NG TH E OF F A LS . <
5 . Reb r eak o f Middling s
l l
F in e Offal . D a rk F l o u r . F lo u r

6 . Redu ctio n of Du n st . <

Fin e O fal f . F l o u r, in cl u din g h ig h es t g ra d es , 85 0 .

shall n o w proceed to acquaint ourselv e s w th the milli ng diagrams

W e i

desig n ed for this system .

H n ga ria n H ig h Grin ding —

u O Fig 5 0 0 we see the diagram Of Hu n . u .

garian high grin din g for a mill with a capacity of 5 0 00 bushels of wheat
per 2 4 hours .

The grain c lean i n g diagram in c ludes the diagram of si lo c leani ng

-

with a passage of the grain through a zigzag separator a n d its distri

b tio n in the fourtee n si los of the e levator
u Fro m the s il o the grain .

goes through the grain b le ndi ng apparatus to the zigzag separator of the -

grain c lea n in g departme nt , the n through the magn et apparatus a n d a

-

two box S ifter with metal sieves which grades the grain accordin g to size
-

, .

Th grai n graded accordi n g to size passes to two groups of trieurs c o n

e
,

sisti n g of cockle cylin ders barley cylin ders a nd re cyl in ders The , ,
-
.

product received from the trieurs may further be S ub j ected to doub le

504 FLO UR MILLING [ CH AR VI II

c leanin g dry an d wet I n cases whe n the grain is n o t too dry the
: .

washin g p l ant is missed The grain passes co n secutive ly two emery

.

horizontal scourers the n it goes to the floor brush machin e an d through

,

the scale into the bin for furth er treatme n t in roller mi ll s Th small
s . e

a n d l arge grain u n dergoes scouri n g o n paralle l separate scourers a n d

brushes I f the wheat is very dry n d hard it is sub j ected to wet scour
. a

in g . The n from the trieurs the grai n goes direct ly to the washi n g
machin e when ce after dryin g n d temperi n g in bi n s it is take n to be
, ,
a ,

scoured .

Th c lean i n g scheme exami n ed here is far from perfect si n ce the

e ,

siftin g away of heavy offal s betwee n the first and the seco n d scourin g
passage has n o t been provided for a n d a mag n et n d a dampe nin g ,
a

apparatus after the brush machin e are abse n t .

Th mi llin g process forms three groups of roller passages a n d the

e ,

rebreak (polishing ) of midd lin gs an d reductio n of middlin gs an d du n st

are e n ded by the millston es for scrapin g out b lue flour .

Th e fi rst break system co n sists of seve n breakin g passages a n d two

r b r kin g passages
e ea W must n ote that the H o ch hro t is abse n t here
. e sc ,
_

a n d the who l e breaki n g process is n o t deve l oped to its utmost limit .

The rebreak (scratch ) ro lls treat the midd li n gs which are tailed over by the
purifier The reduced product is sub j ected to a pre limin ary gradin g o n the
.

first group of sifters o n which the break flour is separated an d the pre
,

limin ary gradi n g of midd li n gs an d du n st accordin g to size is performed .

The l ast breaki n g passage c l ea n s the bra n an d heavy o ffal s of the puri
fiers which sort the l arge n d medium semoli n a Th product from this
a . e

passage goes first to the ree l separator which gives bran as tails while -

the thro ghs pass to the sifter which gives dark flo u r b lue flours of
u , ,

medium s ize a nd dark dun st Of two kin ds The b lue flours go to be

, .

reduced o n the sto nes for middli n gs rebreak an d the seco n d grade of
, ,

du n st to the seventh reduction .

After the pre l imi n ary gradin g the midd lin gs a n d du n st p a ss to the
'

sifters which sort them i nto three to eight grades accordi n g to size Here
, .

the breakin g an d reb r a kin g processes n d Th product graded a ccord

e e . e ,

in g to size ru n s n ext to the first group of purifiers which sort it accordin g

,
,

to quality After that operatio n the product grouped accordin g to size

.

, ,

u ndergoes a process we n ame middli n g rebreak The middli n gs rebreak s .

performed o n smooth rolls is in fact a process a n al ogous to th break e

process F o r this reaso n for the larger middlin gs we have here a system
.

of sifters and purifiers That pro cess is of cO Ir e much shorter than the
.
“

, I s ,

br aki n g process Th sifters of this system supp ly us wi th flour du n st

e . e
, ,
50 6 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR V III

and middlin gs which are sub j ected to a fin al reductio n o n the third

,

reductio n syste m of smooth ro lls The number of reductio n p assages .

is n i n e the sto n e for c lea n i n g up the dark du n st in c luded

,
.

Germa n H igh Grin din g — To i ll ustrate a typical Germa n high gri n d

in g system at the D resde n E xhibit io n in 1 9 1 1 the firm of S eck B ros -
, .

exhibited the millin g diagram shown in Fig 5 0 1 Th mill grin ds about . . e

6 00 0 bushe l s of wheat per day (2 4 hours ) W e shall pass by the .

diagram of the sil o a nd the wheat clean ihg system and o n ly point out that
-

g rai n c l ea n i n g in the m ill is deve l oped co n siderab l y better tha n in the

precedin g p l an Here the wet scourin g of grai n with a dryer and without
.

it is prov ided for .

The mill proper is arran ged after the same scheme that is used in
the Hu ngarian mill with the so le di ffere n ce that the n umber of breaks
,

In this case is limited to six the n umber of re b re akin passages for

, g
middlings is reduced but the number of reductio n s is i n cre ased The
, .

boltin g machi n es for semolin a rebreak are ce n trifugal s a n d sifters in

co n j un ctio n B esides that to obtai n the fin al product flour there are
.
, , ,

ce n trifugal redressers .

Th e two di agrams of high gri n di n g systems exami n ed giv e a su ffi cie n t

idea of the stan dard separate stages of the millin g process .

S i n ce we are acquai n ted with a ge n eral out li n e of the gradi n g of

the product of the breaks a more detailed p l an of that gr adi n g should
,

be give n .

Le t us take for examp l e the third break (Fig

, ,
as ch ara citer .

istic o f b re ak stock a n d exami n e the process of gr adi n g the product

'

, .

obtained .

The product of the third break passes o n to the S ifter No 1 the upper .
,

sie v e of which is covered with a metal cl oth No 1 8 The o verta il are . . s

break stock for the fourth break Th n ext S ieve is likewise cov ered with
. e

a metal c l oth No 2 2 a nd yields the rebreak semolin a Then foll ow two

.
, .

silk flour sieves No s 1 0 a nd 1 1 n ext o n silk sie v e No 3 for separatin g

.
e .
,

middlin gs from the du n st a nd fin ally o ne silk siev e No 9 for separatin g , .

,

du n st as thro u ghs a nd fine middlin gs as tail s B efore the flour sie v e .

very ofte n is set a sie v e for separati n g the l arge se mol in a (No s 3 2 .

The mixed midd li n gs of the tail s of No 3 go to the S ifter No 2 which . .

,

grades them into eight difl erent sizes and he n ce each of the eight grades ,

passes to the purifier A for treatin g the semo lin a .

All the first run s of purified stock ar ge n erally together

mixed e
.
,

but each size may be collected into sacks or spouts (if automatic )
separate ly ,if desired The same may be said of the seco n d run s
.
.
50 8 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ CH AR V I II

The quan tities of middlin gs yielded with a well arran ged high grin di n g -

system are give n in the appen ded tab le Th raw material here is . e

Hu n garian wheat weighi n g 8 1 kl g a litre

,
. .

There were obtain ed

Middlin gs from sieve

31 per cen t .

a similar mann er are obtai ned the middlin gs a n d dun st of th

In ,
e

remaini n g breaks en din g with the fifth or S xth break

,
i .

No w there remain s the further process of gradi n g the middli n gs to be

—
examin ed their sortin g for reductio n to flour .

W k n ow that the productio n of semo lin a is n o t a fu n dame n tal purpose

'

of millin g Fo r its productio n in America for i n sta n ce there are special

.
, ,

mill s which prepare such semolin a for certain ki n ds of biscuits I n

, .

R ussia an d in E urope semo lin a is a b y product of mi lli n g n d is obtai n ed

-

,
a

direct ly from the co ntrollin g purifier

'

The n umber of grades of cl ean ed midd li n gs must be recko n ed as n o t

exceedin g four n d du n st three I n the rest of the breaks from the
,
a .

sixth to the eighth (the n inth c lean s the bran ) there is still much du n st
produced as we ll as a small quantity of poor middlin gs which are n o t
,

worth clean in g Therefore they are reduced to the l owest grades of flour
.

u n treated or treated Very s lightly W shall n o t speak of them here

. e ,

sin ce we have o nly the best middlin gs an d du n st in View .

The middlin gs are re duced o n smooth roll s avo idi n g as far as possib le ,

the formatio n of flour to du n st an d then t o flo u r

,
‘
.

Further we must n ote that

,
ll midd li n gs a n d du n st of equal
a

quality ev en though of different size are b le n de d together from the

, , ,

secon d to the fifth break N w supposin g the middli n gs a n d du n st

. o
C H AP . VI II] F LOUR MI LL I NG 50 9

to be separate d n d then graded a n d purified as in the diagram

a

Fi
( g . the fo ll owin g diagram (Fig 5 0 3 ) shows the further
.

treatme nt a ll the purified middlin gs a nd dun st receive .

W begin with the coarser purified semo li n a (in the diagram Fig 5 0 3
e , ,

middlin gs I ) I t ru n s to the ro ll s is reduced there a n d then se n t to

. .
,

the S ifter NO 1 Th flour goes to the s ack or to a redresser

. . e ,
5 10 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AR VII I
The of the S ifter go to the seco n d roll s to which the seco nd
o verta ils ,

middlin gs are likewise directed Th first middlin gs have become . e

equal to the seco n d in size an d qual ity after the reductio n The best .

du n st from sifter No 1 goes to the first reductio n mi ll

. where
it is fin ally grou n d to flour The l atter is produced in l arge quantities
.
,

a n d after bo lti n g is sacked o f f or al so co n veyed to the r edressi n g S ifter

a n d the n into a b in ( this is n o t given in the diagram our aim bei n g to ,

illustrate the treatment received by the middlin gs ) .

The tail s of the fi rst a n d the l ast sieve of S ifter No 1 co n sist of rich
-

.
,

un clean ed offal which n b ei n g b lended with like partic les from other
, ,
o

sifters is clean ed up separate ly as will be S hown prese n tly The remainin g

, ,
.

du n st passes to the seco n d reduction mill where the same process as in

the first takes p lace .

That which remai n s u n reduced of the dun st (the thro u ghs from
the last siev e of sifter No I I ) goes to the mill (3 ) of the se co nd.

middlings .

The seco n d middli n gs together wit h the tai l s of the first are grou n d
, ,

o n the seco n d mi ll Th e tai l s o f sifter No 2 pass to the third mill

.
-

,
.
,

where o n bein g mixed with the third midd lin gs it un dergoes the same
, ,

operation Th siftin g is performed as before an d the remain s go to the

. e ,

fourth mill & c . .

The tail s of S ifter No 4 pass to the ro ll s A whe n ce the product

.
,

ru n s to the centrifugal wh ich produces dark fl our and dark du nst as

,

t hro u ghs a nd tai l s over the b r ann y partic les which are se n t to ,

the l ast break to be clea n ed up The dark du n st goes to the l ast (6 ) .

reductio n roll .

Th e du n st o f the seco n d middlings goes to the third reductio n mi ll (3 )

a n d together with the remai n s of the first du n st is reduced
, , .

The flour after sifti ng is co llected in bags or in a b in The rem a ini n g .

du n st passes to the fourth reductio n a n d is grou n d together with the

dun st of the third middlin gs .

The tai l s (dark du n st ) of the first a nd the l ast sie v es of the sifters
No s I to V are se n t to the reductio n ro ll
.
Th e break d u n s t I I I is
al so admixed to it .

Th e break d u n sts (I I I a n d I I I ) b l e n ded with the midd lin gs du n st

, , , ,

are in compariso n to it less valuab le S in ce they are formed of partic les ,

lyi n g c l oser to the in tegume n t whereas the midd li n gs du n st l ies n earer

,

the cen tra l parts o f the grain Therefore the bre ak du n sts e v en S ho ul d
.
,

they be perfect ly white in appearan ce after purificatio n can be b len ded ,

with middlings du n st o nly whe n the l atter arrived at the mill h as ,

 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR VI I I
Let us exami n e a few sho rter gra d u l reductio n diagr ms a a .

Ge m
r a n Abridge d High Grinding T h— mil l grin ds 2 000 bushel s of
. e

wheat per day (2 4 hours ) I n the diagram (Fig 5 0 4 ) there are se v en

. .

breaks the first o n (Ho chschro t ) bei n g desig n ed to sp lit the grain in
, e

FI G . 5 04 .

two d own the crease After the passage through the high break the
.

product goes to a brush d uster which gives break middlin gs as tail s

, ,

a n d b lue flour (a dirty gre ish b l ue flo r with d ust as h h T h

y ) t ro gu s u e
-

further process of breakin g is performed in the usual order with gradi n g

of the break ch Op o n sifters The characteristic feature here is the high
.

nu mbers o f wire sie v es starti n with N 2 4 d the correspo di g l y

g o a n n . n,
 CH AP . VI I I ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 5 13

higher n umbers of all the siev es in the sifters That suggests the grin d .

ing surfaces of the corrugated ro ll s have bee n brought c l ose up together

through these in fact the finer an d more flaky flour is prepared
, , .

I n watchin g the breaki n g process in the dia gr a m W see the fo llo w , e

in g picture .

The u n fin ished break stock passes as u sua l to the next break a n d ,

fin ally the tails of No 3 6 S ifter of the sev enth break are l arge bran which
.
,

goe s to b e c lean ed o n the bran d uster (brush ) From the thirty sixth to the .
-

thirty eighth n u mb er of the secon d third a nd fourth breaks large semo

-

, ,

lin a is obtai n ed which in our mill i n g systems wou l d co n stitute rebreak

'

se mo lin a .

This semolin a as well as the fin e midd li n g s from the same sifters goes
, ,

to the gr a din g for middlin gs (o ne m ay say the co ntrollin g ) sifter which ,

s orts separ ately the l arge and the fi n semolin a The tails l arge .

e .
,

semolin a which ought to be directed to a sep arate reb reaking roll is

, _

sent to the fourth break which acts the p art of a rebreak , .

Th at is properly spe akin g the first item of abridgme nt o f the mi llin g

, ,

process
— —
.

The fin e a n d the l arge middlin gs gr aded e a ch i n to two kin ds are

subjected to further sortin g o n a purifi er of the Nem elka type The .

tail s of the c hop from breaks 5 an d 6 mix with the tai ls from the middlin gs
sie ves of the same systems in the l ater breaks while their fine ,

middli n gs are c lea n ed o n puri fi ers of the Reform type The du n sts .

of the seco n d third an d fourth bre ak s are mixed together and clean ed o n
, ,
.

a purifi er of the same type The d u n st from the fifth break is puri fied .

separately while the fine dun st of the s ixt h a n d seve nth breaks go to be
,
/

reduced : the first o n the l ast reductio n roll an d the seco n d together , ,

with the fin e semolin a o n the ston e mill Th fin e middlin gs from the . e

fifth an d sixth breaks are gr aded apart, o n purifiers C a nd D havin g ,

besides that a co ntrollin g puri fier B .

Th e process further co n sists in that the graded midd li n gs go to b e

reb ro ken in the s eco n d row of roll er mill s with smooth rolls A charac .

te ist c
r i poi n t in that part of the process is the deflectio n of the midd li n gs
refuse to the fifth sixth an d sev enth break systems which we must , ,

ackn owledge to be expedie nt .

The du n ts from these systems go to be fin ally reduced

e S the grad . o

ing of du n st accor di n g to qua l ity is ab se n t here n d this causes the tai l s ,

a

from the sifters of the middlin gs rebreak to be directed to the fifth nd a

sev e n th reduction s The absen ce of these purifiers is the seco n d material

.

abrid gme nt in the proce ss .

5 14 F LOU R MI LLI NG [ CH A R VII I
W sh all n o t speak of the further details in the diagram the r est
e ,

bein g sufficiently clear Th gr ading Of flour is n o t give n in the diagram. e ,

as it depe n ds to a con siderab le degree o n the bran ds s ol d by n y par a

t icu l r mi ll
a .

Th e ge n eral data characterisin g the dime n sio n s of the ro ller mills are
as follows the break systems have rolls 1 0 00 X 2 5 0 mm the reductio n .

systems 1 000 X 300 mm a n d fi n ally the sto n e mi ll 1 300 mm in diameter .

, ,
. .

All the stock is bo l ted o n sifters except that the sto n e mi l l is fo ll owed ,

by a ce n trifugal .

Am erica n or E nglish Grin din g Th diagram introduced to our .

-
e

atten tio n (Fig 5 0 5 ) is a characteristic scheme of American or E n glish

.

high grin din g which must be c lassed with the abridged high grin din g of
,

the European type as it is accepted with us I n this scheme the system .

of r b re ak is absen t n d the n umber of breaks is reduced to five and the

e s a

reduction process is very much c urt ail ed co ntai n in g at the same time n o ,

purifiers for the rebreak of middlin gs By reaso n of the l atter circum .

stance o n is ob liged to use the purifiers which sort the break product
e
'
.

Th diagram (F ig 5 0 5 ) is for a mi ll in the S tate o f K ans as w orkin g o n

e .

hard wheat n d havi ng a capacity of 2 80 sacks per twen ty four hours

a -

I t may be see n in the diagram that there are five breaks a nd n in e

'

reductio ns here The five breaks are characteris ed by the dimeh

.

n —
sio s of the rolls successive y 9 in x 30 in 9 in X 30 in 9 in x 30 in
l . .
, . .
,
. .
,

9 2 4 in a n d 9 in X 2 4 in a n d by the differe n tial s of the ro lls of the

.
, . .
,

fast to the slow in the same successio n from the first break to the fifth
,

a nd 2% : l .

The aim of this mill was to yield as much flour of the first grade
(pate n ts ) as possib l e a n d therefore o n turn in g to the di agram we see that
,

the flou r from all the break s ifters except the fifth a n d from all the , ,

reduction sifters e x cept the l ast three is sen t to p aten ts S till ho w

, , .
,

ev er there is a Combin atio n for sen din g the flour from the break sifters to
,

the seco n d grade (clear ) .

I t is i n terestin g to n ote the gr adin g of midd l in gs Th e purifier .

No 1 receives the coarse semol in a from No 3 4 siev es of the first three

.
.

break sifters This puri fier as well as a ll the others (see the arran ge
.
,

men t of the sieves the order of their N is arran ge d to give light offals
,

which r n to the filter D O heavy o ffal s which go from No 1 to the fin e

u , .

bran (feed ) an d fin all y the thro ghs Th thro gh from the p u rifi r
'

, , , u . e u s e

No 1 mixed with the thro u ghs from siev e No 2 6 of the seco n d purifier
.
.

(N o 2 ) go to the smooth roll s 9 in

.
in Th Americ ans c all th at . . e

the first rebreak or sizi n g of middhn gs .

5 16 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR VI II
It must be n oted that the American s have no rebreak grooved rolls
n their break system at a ll a n d in that res pe ct their m ill in g process is
'
I ,

great ly curt ailed in compariso n with the German a nd Hu n garian .

P roceedin g further we see that the same three bre a k S ifters pass fi ne
,

semoli n a tails off the sieves NO 6 4 to th e p urifier No 2 The thro u ghs . . .

from the siev e No 2 6 go to the first sizi n g roll ; as we hav e see n

'

. ,

while the No s from 5 8 to 3 4 send the c lean ed middlin gs to the first

.

reduction .

Th e heavy offal s from thi s purifier l ike those from No 3 go to the , .

,

s mooth ro ll s for a seco n d midd li n gs sizi n g (rolls 9 in x 2 4 in a nd di ffer . .

,

e n tial I } mix n with the tail s of the first middli n gs ro ll From .

'

the point of v iew of the Russian millers such blen din g is a downright ,

crime B u t we must n o t forget that the Americans produce o nl y thr ee

.

or four gr ades of flour nd in the give n case there is the wish to obt a in
a

the greatest quan tity of paten t flour .

Th e purifiers No s 5 a n d 6 purify the fin er mi dd lin gs No 5 from the

B M R sifter which grades the thro u ghs of sie v es No s 6 4—
. .

. . .
, 6 8 of the first .

four break sifters and No 6 of the fifth break sifter an d of the l ast
, .

reductio n S ifter
B esides the sifter W hav e yet two ce ntrifugal s (1 3 xx —
.

6 4 1 4 xx 1 1 xx )
‘

e ,
~

a n d two brush dusters S D a n d BD Th thro gh s of the ce n trifuga l s . e u

rn to the secon d n d third grade of flour wh il e the tails (as well as

u a ,

the tails from the brush S D ) goes to the fi n bran The thro u ghs Of the e .

brushes p ass to the redressin g S ifter R a n d the tail s from the brush B D
y i e l ds l arge bra n D O desig n ates the fan s
.
.

W e n eed n o t dwe ll o n the operatio n of the reductio n ro lls as the ,

milli n g process is easily traced in the diagram

Hu nga ria n Millin g P ro cess —Fig 5 0 6 illustrates the diagram of a n
.

«
.

automatically workin g mill after the system of which man y mills have ,

bee n erected in Hu n gary in recent years Th wheat brought by . e

customers is milled n o t in separate l ots but mixed together accordi ng ,

to quality Havi n g first ascertain ed the weight of wheat it is de

.

sp t ch d to
a e the c lean in g depart ment After millin g the customer .

receives the quantity of flour correspon din g to the weight of the wheat
brought by him .

S i n ce the wheat is n o t mill ed separately it is n at ural that the cus ,

tomer does n o t receive the actual gotten out of his o wn wheat ; but
in order to serve everybody equall y we ll eve n if the goods supp lied are ,

differe n t in quality the good wheat of equal quality belo n gin g to sev eral
,

cu sto mers is mixed an d m illed and t hen a worse whe at bu t al so e qual

, ,
VI I I ] FLOU R MI LL I NG 5 17
518 FLOUR MILLI NG [ CH AR VIII

in quality is grou n d S uch a method affords the possibility of satisfy

, .

in g everybody .

That arran geme n t co n tain s n o rebreak ro l ls as the coarse rebreak ,

middli n gs go to the break rolls The reductio n of middl in gs and du n st .

is performed with the aid of S ix pairs of smooth roll s of harden ed cast

iron which are marked in the diagram by figures 6
,
1 — .

Th c lea n in g up of the l w grade stock a n d fin e bran is do n e o n a pair

e o

of fin e ly fluted roll s of harde n ed cast iro n a n d o n a m ill st o n e -

.

After the reductio n the middlin gs an d du n st before boltin g pass

through the detacher D The seventh break nd bran to b e c lean ed
'

. a

prev io usly to goin g to the S ifter r n through the cen trifugal G to free the u ,

coarse tai l s of du n st a nd flour a n d shake up o n ce more the remain s to

be sifted .

Th bolti n g system con sists of H agg n m a h r s S ifter with six sectio n s

’
e e c e ,

contain in g 6 x 1 1 trays The first high break is treated o n the smaller

.

part of this boltin g apparatus .

Fo r boltin g the reduced middlin gs a n d du n st there is al so a S ifter with

six section s n d 6 x 9 trays an d a small sifter of the same co n structio n
a

with 2 x 9 trays The purificatio n is divided in to three systems a n d

.
,

con sists of two purifiers of the Haggen m acher type with eight sectio n s
a n d o n e with four sectio n s G I n the mac hi n e with eight sectio n s are
.

purifi ed the middlings fro m the seco n d n d fifth breaks ; the smaller a

mach in e receives the fin middli n gs from the sixth break e .

Ther e are two purifiers with t n sectio n s To the first half there goes e .

the du n st from the third an d fourth breaks to the secon d that of the -

secon d and third breaks The seco n d machin e purifies the tails of the
.

first machin e the du n st from the purifiers an d the break dun st from the
, ,

sixth break The first break is kept v ery high an d bolted o n a steel
.
,

siftin g c loth No s 1 8 an d 2 6 The tai ls of NO 2 6 are coarse middlin gs

. . .

wh ich pass to the sixth break while the thro u gh s go to the l ast break ,
.

I n the fo ll owin g breaks the grain is gradually reduced S O that the

seve nth break yields c lean broad bran The upper three trays of the .

break S ifter are furni shed with a coarse boltin g cloth which separates
away the tail s the coarse and the fin middli n gs Th thro u gh
'

, e . e s

pass o n to the n ext flour siev es which yield as tails du n st to be ,

cle aned .
~

Th midd lin gs directed to the purifiers G by mea n s of a small S ifter

e ,

station ed at the top of the machin e are sorted in eight grades accordin g ,

to size n d each grade passes in to o n of the eight divisio n s of the machin e

a e ,

W here e v ery o n e o f them is purifie d separately The coarse fa ilin gs of .

5 20 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ CH AP . vm

E . Middl in gs from the first redu ctio n mill go to the secon d reduct io n
mill .

F . Midd li n gs
from the sixth b re akzmill lp ass to zthezfo u rthfp u rifier an d
then ce to the fifth reductio n mill .

F Tai ls from the first a nd third reductio n mill s go to the fifth

1 . .

Uascuic au tomai iq ue

0 0 3 2 30

'
5 0 m Im S o a s gro' Reco upct t es
Ru : on m sm
f

Cen tri f uge m etal l iq u e —Cen tri f u g al w ith m etal R ei ns —T ila f

s o r to o f a l s .

c l o th B ascu l e au to m a tiq u e Au to m a tic scal e

Bl é p ro p re—
. -
.

S a sseu r P u rifi en Pu re g ra in
—R n d r d r
~

q —
.

B l u terie ro nd e d e s ure té ou e esse r Ap p areil m ag n é ti u e M ag ne tic a pp a ratu s

r— —
. .

B l u terie ro nd e di viseu G r d ing re l

a e E xtracte u s e ro n d e R o u n d reel
D é ta —D etach er —
.
.

ch eu r .
f f
Cen tri u g e Ce n t ri u g al .

FI G
. 5 07 .

G Tail s
from the fourth reductio n mil l (after the centrifuga l ) an d
.
,

the pro duct N 4 0 from the fifth go to the sixth

_

o .
.

H Tai l s from the third a n d sixth reductio n mill s n d the product

.
a

No 2 8 from the fifth go for fi n al treatme n t to the se v e n th reductio n mill

.
, .
GH AP . v m] FLO UR MI LLI NG 52 1

H1 . Tails
from the fourth p u rifier go to the sev enth reductio n mill or
the Offal sort er depe n din g o n the quality of the product
, .

I Fi n e sharps (thirds
.
,

J Coarse sha rps (P o ll ard

’

.
,

K Coarse P ollard. .

L . T l ai s from the first an d third purifiers go to the S ixth break

LI Liftin gs from the first secon d a nd th ird purifiers go to the centri

.
, ,

fugal with wi re cover for the extractio n of flour out of them .

M D ark fl o u r. .

M D u n st from the first break mill I f the products seem to be good

1 . .

they may be reduced o n the sixth break mill .

N Fl our from the seco n d third fourth a n d fifth break mi ll s

.
, , ,
.

N Flo u r from the fi rst seco n d third fourth fifth a nd sixt h redue
1 .
, , , , ,

tio n mill s .

0 D ark flour from the sixth break mill

. .

0 D ark flour from t he se v e n th reductio n mill:

1 .

P Fin e bra n from the wire covered ce n trifugal

.
-
.

Q B road bran
. .

Th e flour fro m the fifth break mill an d sixth reductio n m ill is se nt

further in the man n er an swerin g the wish to obtain a greater or s maller
quantity o f flo ur of the highest grade .

I f the tail s of the fo u rth puri fi er is n o t of much v al ue for baki n g it ,

may b e directed to the sev e n th reductio n mill with a cen trifugal hav in g ,

prev iously sub j ected it to stro n g aspiratio n .

V e y S ho
r r t M illin g S ys tem s — Th desire to make the equipme n t e

of a mill cheaper a nd at the same time to obtain as good a flour as pos

,

sib le co mpels o n e to have recourse to the extremely abridged millin g

,

process an examp le of which may be taken in the form of a diagram of

,

a n Am erican process for mil ls of from 1 00 to 2 0 0 sacks capacity .

Accor di n g to the diagram (Fig 5 0 8 ) we have but four break systems .

with correspo n din g differe n tial s for the first system 2 1 secon d 2 1 , ,

third 2 § 1 an d for the fou rth 3 : 1 Th n umber of corrugatio n s for

,
. e

the first system is 1 2 to l in for the secon d 1 6 for the third 2 0 a n d for.
, , ,

the fourth 2 4 I t must be n oted at the same ti me that often these

.

l imit s are cha n ged from 1 8 (i n stead of 1 2 ) to 2 8 (i n stead of 2 4 ) corruga

tion s to an in c h The len gth of rolls is 3 0 in an d their diameter 9 in
.
.
.

T h e who l e process of mi l l i n g takes course as fo ll ows from the first

break system the product ru n s to the S ifter o n to the distributor (or what ,
5 22 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ CH AR V II I

the German s call S am m elb o den ) when ce it passes to the wire sieve No 1 8
,
.

( 1 8 Th t ai l s
e of the scal pi n g sie v e No 1 8 go to the seco n d break .
,

the middlin gs from No 4 4 to the purifier K I t is supposed that all the

. 1 .

l arge midd lin gs are s eparated away a n d from the No s 1 0 1 1 a n d 1 2 of

’

,
.
,

flour siev es the thro u gh s yield fl Ou r which goes to the seco n d gr ade ,

while the refuse off No 1 2 passes to the purifier K for medium .

2

m iddhn gs .

rther if we watch the seco nd third a n d fourth breaks we shall

Fu , , ,

see that the precedin g process of gradin g the middlin gs a nd flour is per
fectly a n d accuratel y repeated : all the tai ls off the midd li n gs sieves
go to the purifier K the thro u ghs from the flour sie v es to the seco nd
’

1,

FI G . 5 08 .

grade of flour an d the tails of the l ast sie ves (l l xx l l xx and 1 2 xx )

, , ,

to the purifier K As to the tails from the scalpin g siev e No 3 4 of the

2 . .

l ast break sifter it ru n s to the bra n duster BD

, .

Layin g aside for the presen t the possib le variatio n s which are shown
in the diagram let us direct our atte n tio n to the work of the reductio n
,

ro lls R oll 5 (9 in x 2 4
. the thro u ghs (pure middlin gs ) of
.

the purifier K i ro lls 6 7 (9 in , in ) the cut o ff a n d tai l s from the

-

. .
-

p u rifi ers K and K rolls 8—9 (9 in x 1 8 in) the thro u gh s from K Po ll

1 2, . .
2,

No 1 0 (9 in x 2 4 in ) the thro u ghs from the p u rifier K a n d fi n ally

. . .
‘

3, , ,

roll 1 2 (9 in x 2 5 in ) receives the cut o ff an d tail s from the purifier K

. .
-

3 .

First of all we must n ote that the flour from ll the S ifters corre
, a

sp o n din
g to the six reductio n s goes to o n first grade ge n erally n amed e ,

Th e tails from the sifters E an d G (first a nd third ) go to th purifier K e 3,

5 24 FLO U R MILLI NG [CH AR VI I I
Th e tai ls go to the secon d break The semo lina passes into a purifier
.

with an in side siev e of four sectio n s the fi n middlin gs to a purifier for

,
e

du n sts of a simil ar co n structio n

'

From the seco n d break there s obtai n ed bo lted flour of the se co n d

I

grade c arse a nd fi n middlin gs which go to the correspon di n g purifiers

,
o e , .

The tai l s ru n to the third break mi ll The flour produced here is t u rn ed

.

to the third grade a small quantity of middlin gs an d dun st are di rected

,

to the p u rifier the integuments and co arse taili n gs go to the l ast break
,

mill Th reduction stock from this ro ll i graded o n a hex agon reel

. e s ,

a n d yie l ds the products e; f a nd g spoke n of abo v e

, .

FI G . 5 09 .

The l ifti n gs of the purifier are sacked off as ready produc t bran The ,
-
.

tail s fro m the middlin gs siev es are directed to the secon d break the tail s ,

of the fin stock go with the middlin gs from the purifi er

e .

The pure middlin gs pass to the first smooth roll s the n ce to the detacher ,

a n d p l ansifter Here seco n d grade flo ur i is obtain ed

.
.

The coarse stock is tur n ed to the thi rd smooth roll whil e the fin e ,

middlin gs go to the seco n d The l atter after it has been groun d and
.
,

l oo s en ed is bo lted o n a pl an sifter a n d produces flour of the first grade 10

, , .

O nl y the less coarse parts pass to the third smooth mill to which lik ewi se ,

the worst middlin gs from the purifier are tur n ed .

After reductio n a n d siftin g a flour of the seco n d gr a de l is produced

here The l arger tails go to the secon d du n st m illsto n e the fi n er parts
.
,

go to be rec lean ed in the mi ddlin gs purifier No w they are made equiv alen t .
VI I I] F LOUR MI LLI NG
 52 6 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR VI I I
to the b r eak middlin gs Th purified break m idds pass to the first m idds
. e

millsto n e a nd yi el d after boltin g flour of the seco n d grade m The tails .

go to the seco n d millsto n e an d after reductio n to the ce ntrifugal whi ch

, ,

yields flour of the third grade n an d fin bran as o ve rta ils ,

e .

The corrugat ed ro ll s sho ul d be 3 00 mm in di ameter a n d hav e 1 se .

differen tial the smooth rolls 3 5 0 mm in diameter an d the 2 : 3 differ

,
.

e n tial .

W e must add that this a bridged diagram cann ot produce the fin e

grades of flour obtain ab le in high a n d semi high gri n di n g -
.

S till the grades of flour receiv ed are pure n d fetch fair prices ; a

at the same time it must be born e in min d that to obtain them less
m achin ery is n eeded an d therefore the expenditure of origi n al capital
,

is less
—
.

S emi a u to ma tic Grind ng

-
i Up to the prese n t we have bee n e x a m in
in g p l an s of automatic mills in which from the feedin g in of the grai n to
,

the delivery of the flour the whole process i performed without the s

assistan ce of mill han ds S in ce semi automatic mills are still used in

.
-

Russia we appe n d the g e n eral type of a scheme (Fig 5 1 0 ) of such a mi ll .

,

which is ch aracterised by the limited n umber of reductio n machin es .

The wheat is poured i nto the hopper an d carried by the e l evator to

the auto m atic scale a and then ce to the separator b which is fur nished
, ,

with a l arge meshed sieve That siev e remo ves the l arger imp urities
.

sto n es wood & 0 The san d and dust are separated away with the aid
, , .

of a seco n d siev e and travel to the outlet The clean ed grain passes .

through the siev e to the du st c lean er or separator when ce the lighter ,

particles are driv en by the fan into the dust collectin g tubu l ar -

pressure filter The wheat cl ean ed in this man n er p a sses to two

.

cockle cylin ders c The re cockl cylin der c separates the half
.
-

e 1

grain s from the cockle Through the mag net apparatus the product
.

run s to the elevator which li fts it to the horizo n tal scourer I n that
, .

machin e iro n beaters throw the grain agai n st a sieve of steel wire to separ ,

ate away the yet remai n in g dust nd beard The separate particles are a .

carried to the pressure tubul ar filter d by a stro n g air current The .

fil ter is divided a n d o n e part serves for the separator the other for the
, ,

scourer .

The total n umber of tubes of the fil ter is 2 x After the ver

tical scourer the wheat flows in to a horizo ntal emery o n e o n which ,

the grain coverin gs are partly torn Off Th light particles separated ,
. e .

away are blown into the first half of the pressure tubul ar filter d an d ,

th e grain by me an s o f the e lev ator p asse s into the v ert ical b rush mach ine
 528 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR VI I I
ussia the pl ain rye grin din g is char a cteris ed in ad di tion by the
In R , ,

total quantity of flour obtain ed I n the market the pl ain grou n d flour.

is k n own u n der the n ame of sec u red a n d break flour .

The scoured flour is obtained to the amou n t of 9 5 per cen t of the .

quan tity of grain fed i nto the mill I n other words the grain is groun d .

to flour together with the bran a nd 5 per cent goes to the o ffal s in clean
,
.

in g
. Tw o or three passages su ffice for comp l ete reduct io n I n com .

putin g the le n gth of rolls o n should take the startin g poi nt of its
e -

cap acity as 1 3 0 to 1 4 5 lb to 1 cm per day (24 hours )

. . .

Th ebreak flour whe n grou n d in three to four passages the large

”
,

bran bein g sifted away is obtain ed in the quantity of 80 to 8 5 per cen t

,
.

On ought to recko n 1 1 5 to 1 3 0 lb per day to 1 cm of ro ll s

e . . .

The high rye grin di n g c an be characterised by a more accurate bolti n g

of the fl our n d the n umber of passages from five to te n ; the crushin g
, a

passage in which the grain is broken down the crease i n cluded Th

, , . e

high rye grin din g is desig n ed to pro duce several (two to four ) grades of
flO u r or o n
, higher than the scou red an d break grades of flour
e .

On the R ussian market rye flour from high grin din g is kn ow n u n der
the appell ation of dressed sifted an d bolted flour D ressed flour is
.

, , .

obtain ed to the amou n t of 70 to 72 per ce nt o nl y o n e grade sifted an d .

,
:

bolted flour (two to four grades ) yields up to 70 per cent B olted fl our .

of the best grades does n o t exceed 2 0 to 3 0 per cent .

I n very rare cas es in R ussia purifiers for gradi n g the middlin gs ao

cordin g to quality are adopted in bolted rye grin din g I n other cou ntrie s .

the use of purifiers in high rye grin din g is ino t to be met with .

Let us examin e some of the characteristic schemes of high rye grindi n g

H igh B ye Grin ding —Th common p l an of high rye grin ding p rac
.

tised in R ussia is i llustrated in Fig 5 1 1 The mill of 4 0 0 sacks cap acity

. .

per day operates in th o th wester n region producin g the best flour

‘

e s u -

, .

Th rye brou ght in sacks is poured out in fro n t of the sil o gran ary
e
,

when ce it passes through the el evator to the automatic scale hen ce to ,

the prelimin ary clean in g apparatus nd then through the ele v ator an d ,
a

distributin g worm in to the bin s .

The zigzag separator for pre limin ary c l ean in g easil y c l ean s the rye ,

separatin g away mainly the coarse impurities so as to preven t these ,

ad mixtures from passi n g together with the rye in to the sil o a n d stoppin g

it up The dust a n d light part icles of impurities sucked in by the

.

f n in the c lean in g apparatus go to the pressure fi lter a n d are the n ce

a
,

automaticall y sacked off .

From the sil o the rye pas ses in to the co ll ectin g wor m is ble n ded ,
C H AP . VI I I ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 5 29

in the proportio n desired an d mixed in this mann er goes to be clean ed

, , , .

The n it ru n s through the automati c scal e aspirator mag n et apparatus ,

a n d three cockl e cy l i n ders co nn ected wi th a re —

,

cockle cyl in der .

Fu rther it passes through the first scouri n g machi n e dust reel separa
, ,
-

tor seco n d scourer brush machin e an d apparatus an d worms for

, ,
’

FI G
. 511 .

dampin g hen ce it goes to the dryin g chamber where it remain s

, ,

several hours to allow the moisture to spread well in the bra n Th . e

dampin g appar atus may al so be passed o v er or n o t accordi n g to the ,

quality of the rye .

Al l the machi n ery begi n n i n g with the automatic

,
sca l e aspirator n d , ,
a

cockle cylin ders & is freed of dust by aspiratio n ; in a like man n er

,
c .
,

the heavy dust is separated from the light .

5 30 FLOU R MI LLI NG [ C H AR V II I

clean rye in the drying chamber passes through the mag netic
The
apparatus the crushin g roll 80 0 x 3 5 0 with smooth roll s without flu ting
, , ,

an d is the n bo l ted through o n e third of the S ifter -

.

The broken down rye passes through a n apparatus with a fil ter

-

for clean ing the break chop for the first break The break is repeated .

six times .

The dime n sio n s of the mill s a n d sifters are as foll ows

Fo r t he l s t b re a k 2 pa ir o f ro ll s 1 00 0 x 35 0 mm . an d 1 S f
i t er wit h 5 s ie ves .

2 nd 2 800 x 35 0 5
3 rd 1 1 000 x 35 0 5
4th 1 1 000 x 35 0 5
5 th 1 1 00 0 x 35 0 5 5
, 5 6 th 3, l 1 000 x 35 0 5 5
F o r re du ct io n o f sem o ] . l 8 00 x 350 }
1 5

middli n gs from the first seco n d n d third breaks go each separ

The , ,
a

ately to a pair of rolls with fin e corrugatio n s ; from the fourth break

o n wards they are all grou n d together Th e flou r mixes together with the .

aid of collectin g worms suspen ded u n der the sifter a nd all the grades ,

c n be prepared for sa l e
a Th e yiel d of flour depe n din g o n the quality
.
,

of the rye is 6 8 to 72 per cen t

, .

The ro ller m ill s as we ll as the el e v ators are v e n til ated by a powerful

, ,

fa n commu ni catin g with a suctio n fil ter ow in g to which the heat in g of ,

the ru nn in g parts of the mi ll s or the sweat in g of the machin ery in gen eral
becomes im possib le .

Th e scheme exam in ed is defecti v e in so far that it co n tain s n o gradi n g

of middl in gs ac cordin g to quality which is a characteristic peculiar to ,

high wheat grin di n g .

To obtain a good white rye meal it is certain ly n ecessary to in troduce

purifiers I n Fig 5 1 2 we hav e a diagram in cl udin g a p u rifi er for cleanin g
. .

coarse m id ds from the first seco n d an d th ird breaks The mill of 400
-

, ,
.
,

sacks capacity per d ay o perates in the go v ernm en t of E katerin osl av

, .

Th e coarse m idds obtai n ed are cl ean ed o n the purifi er a n d sub j ected to

rebreak o n passage I with smooth roll s the correspon din g sifter yieldin g ,

the dun st which is then reduced o n rolls I I The flour obtained from
, .

this du n st to the quan tity of 6 to 8 per ce nt is the best nd is n ev er .

,
a

mix ed with the best kin ds of break flour Th e flour from the other .

smooth rolls is blen ded with the u n iform quality flour fr nf the corrugated -
o

roll s an d the whole is divided into four grades Fl our No 0 from the
, . .

smooth roll s between 6 a nd 8 per cen t No 1 smooth rolls together with . .

break flour from 2 3 to 2 5 per cent No 2 from 2 2 to 2 4 per cent mill

, . .
,
.

sto n e flo u r to ether with the last brea k fro m 10 to 1 2 er ce n t

'

g p The ,
.
5 32 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ C H AR VI I I
On the other han d it must be ackn owledged that the adaptatio n of
,

a mill sto n e for clean in g u p is v ery useful because the c l ean in g up of the ,

offal s is performed much more successfully o n sto n es than o n corrugated

rolls as the corrugation s become rapidl y blu n ted owin g to stro ng
,

pressure .

Germ a n ye Grin din g

R — The rye grin di n g schemes here appe n ded a re
-

widely practised in the Chem n itz district Let us successiv ely exami n e .

each diagram .

I n the first diagram there are three breakin g passages through c o rru e

gated roll s the first pair of roll s (800 mm X 300 mm ) havi n g 1 5 cor
, . .

ru gatio n s to 1 in a n d the two other pairs 1 8 corrugatio n s to 1 in

.
, Th e .

differentials of the corrugated pairs is 1 3 Further there are two pas .

,

ages through porcel ain roll s 6 00 mm x 3 5 0 mm in siz e a n d fin ally

,
. .
, , ,

two ston e mill s 1 2 0 0 mm an d 1 00 0 mm in diameter (Fig

. . .

The who l e gradin g process is performed o n hexagon reel s The .

FI G . 5 13 .

wire sieves of the first reel s begin with No 2 8 a n d en d (c lean ing up of .

integumen ts ) with No 3 6 while the n umbers of flour sie ves of the flour
.
,

dressin g reel s hav e as their utmost limit fourteen (c leani n g up the offals
a n d th ird break
) The dime n sio n s of the reel s are giv e n in millimetres
.

in the diagram (le n gth a n d diameter ) therefore we shall n o t repeat ,

them here .

Let us watch the millin g process .

After c l ean in g the grain in the prese n t case goes to the first break
,
,

though often en ough the German s empl oy in the first passage a pair of
crushin g rolls the purpose of which is to divide the grain down the crease
, .

Up to the third break the tai ls from the wire nd flour siev es ru n succes a

siv ly to the seco n d a n d third break whil e the thro u hs from the flour
e
g ,

sieves yield the fin al product flour which may be directed to flo u r , ,

b len ders B t the tai ls of the wire siev e in the reel scalpin g the third
. u

break go to be fi n ished o n the first sto n e a n d the tai ls of the flour ,

reel (silks No s 1 3 and .

which is a more or less pure du n st a nd fi ne
midd i gs pass to porcel ain rolls The tails of the wire s iev es in the
l n , .
cm »
. vm ] FLOU R . MI LL I NG 5 33
‘

reel s after both roller mi lls with porcel ain rolls and from the flo u r sieve ,

of the secon d passage through porcel ain roll s go to the first sto n e An d , .
,

l ast l y we hav e two passages o n mill sto n es the aim of which is to give
, ,

a fin al c lean up of the offal .

The capacity of such a mill varies between 1 2 0 an d 1 6 0 sacks with a

motor of 6 0 H P the grai n c lean in g in cluded A to the grades of flour
. .
, . s ,

To th e lo u r b l end er
f .

FI G . 5 14 .

they may be combin ed accordin g to the quality to three or four bran ds .

I n the regio n where this combin ed grin di n g o n corrugated a n d porcel ai n

ro lls is practised there is ge n erally obtain ed 4 5 to 5 0 per ce nt of the so
,
.

called white flour No 0 , . .

The seco n d diagram (Fig 5 1 4 ) differs from the first o nly in that it .

has an ext ra pair of porce l ai n roll s Therefore owin g to the more .

,

accurate reductio n of dun st an d middlin gs there is obtain ed up to 6 2 ,

.

per cen t of flour No 0 an d No 1 which is also c l assified as white

. . .
,

flour .

There is a mi ll in Chem n itz o n the same p l a n which havi n g the same

'

To th e fl o u r b l e n d er

capacity requ res 6 3 H P for the millin g departme n t o nly t e n o t

,
i . , . .

recko n i n g the clean in g of grain S uch great co n sumptio n of power .

a n be exp l ai n ed so l e ly by the co siderab e dema d made by its shafti g

l
n n n ,
c

which coul d have bee n design ed mo re accurate ly .

Fin a ll y in Fig 5 1 5 we hav e a third mi llin g diagram for the same

,
-

capacity per day A mill with grain clean in g n eeds 6 0 H P This type
.
.

of diagrams approaches the o ld Fre n ch millin g systems in which two ,

thirds of the who le process in high gri di g was performed sto e i s

n n n n m l l o .
5 34 FLO UR MI L LI NG [ CH AR V II I

I m p ro ved S chem e o f Geewest German

rm a n Rye Grin din g — I h the n

rye grin din g mi ll s the hexago n reel s are totally discarded a n d the ,

c lean in g up of the o ffal s is do n e n o t o n sto n es but o n roll s .

I n Fig 5 1 6 we hav e the out li n e of a n i n expe n sive semi automatic

.
-

mill which shows that the grain goes first to the crushin g mill with smooth
,

cast iro n ro ll s where it is broken down the crease On the first half of
-

, .

the small sifter A the blue flour is pressed through No X and sacked o ff .
,

while the tail s pass to the first break to roll s 2 Th product of the . e

first break run s to the first quart er of t he sifter B when ce the flour g oes ,

to the seco n d half of the sifter A which does co n tro lli n g duty in that ,

part Th tail s of the first quart er of the sifter B the break stock
. e — ,

middlin gs n d dun st—ru n s in to the b in I I a n d awaits its t u rn to pass

,
a

through the roll s 2 After the seco n d passage through the rolls 2 the
.
,

product is bolted n the same first quarter of the sifter the tai l s goin g in to
o ,

b in I I I for a third passage—t hrou gh ro ll s 3 Th sift i n g of the third . e

passage is performed o n the secon d quarter of the sifter droppin g the tai ls ,

into the b in I V when ce the product goes to the same rolls 3 after the
,

passage of the third break .

The ro l s 4 serve al so for two passages the product of which is bolted

l ,
'

o n the third n d fourth quarters of the sifter B

a All the flour out of .

sifter B is di rect ed to the co n trollin g half of the S ifter A I n this way .

o n e may obtain se v eral gr a des of flour by distributin g them amo n g the

bin s or if they are r n together in the b len der o n e grade

, , u ,
.

The ro ll s 5 serve for c l ea n in g up the bran On these ro ll s l arge as we ll .

as fin e bran may be obtain ed for which purpose there are three bin s VI I , , ,

VI I I n d I X over them
,
a , .

From the co n tro lli n g sifter the du n st is se n t to the first quarter of

the sifter B where the flour fallen into the tail s is separated from it
, ,

after which together with the du n st an d middlin gs from the first break
, ,

it goes to the seco n d break .

W ith the same machin ery millin g c an be practised accordi n g to a more

abridged scheme wi th four passages after the crushin g mill .

The n there are three breakin g passages a n d a fourth for c lea n i n g up

the bran .

All the ro ll er mills except the Ho chschro t are ve ntil ated by mean s of
, ,

fa n 0 a n d a suctio n filter D .

Thus the who l e milli n g p lan t co n s ists of a crushin g m i ll two four

,
,

roller mills with corrugated rolls two sifters for two a n d four sectio n s a ,

filter and a f n A fl o r b le n der n o t given in the diagram is lik ewi se

, a . u -

, ,

i ndispe n sab le .
5 36 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR V III

V II

MAI ZE GRI N D I N G
In ussia there is o n ly kn own a primitiv e system of maize
R
grin din g with a sin gle passage through a mi ll ston e set without siftin g
away the o ffals I n the south of Russia howev er especially in B essa
.
, ,

rabia the questio n of ratio n al grin din g is awaitin g a sol ution Fo r this
,
.

reason we appen d a diagram of m aize grin di n g accepted in America an d ,

partly in Hu n gary .

The ma ze (Fig 5 1 7 ) is poured in to the stori n g b in a whe n ce the

i .
,

FI G . 5 17 .

elevator carries it to the separator b with a sieve Th sieve separates . e

the l arge impurities such as sto n es cl ods of earth &

, , , 0 .

B y aspiration in the separator the maize is freed of straw dust & c , ,

a n d this light refuse co llects in the dust chamber .

Th e c l ean ed maize is co n veyed by the e l evator to the b in 0 over the

i

r ll r mi l l
o e .

Th first break is do n e n o n e pair of ro ll s

e o n d the product i ,
a s

crushed n d the n g oes to be graded in the first section of the sifte r f

,
a
‘

From the S ifter the break middli n gs are se n t to the b in e to be passe d

through the secon d pair of roll s where the break is kept very lo w After
, .

these rolls the product is graded in the seco n d sectio n of the sifter The .

flow of the break middlin gs is altered in a c lose d chamber so as to pass

through the first break ro ll s .
CH AR V II I ] FLOU R MI LL I NG
53 8 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ CH AR VI I I
Thus the product obtai n ed here is sacked o ff which all ows of makin g
, ,

four breakin g passages .

I n the breakin g pro ces s most atten tio n is paid to the produ ctio n
of semolin a with the least produce of break flour i e as high a grin din g , . .

as possibl e is practised Th flour from the sifters is sacked off while the
. e ,

middling s the fine as well as the l arge go to a n ew purifier with six

, ,

di visio n s where the product is graded accordin g to quality

,
Th e p u re .

mi dd lin gs are packed a nd the offals are sen t to the m ills ton e where they
, ,

are reduc e d , a n d the n go to be graded in the th ird sectio n of the sifter .

Th e purifier f n drives the extracted bran down a spout in to the d u st

a

collector h when ce it goes to the sack

,
.

The middlin gs are used for bakin g bre a d the remain in g prod ucts
l

, ,

such as flo u r a nd other o ffal s ser v e as feed for cattl e , .

The arran geme nt of the machin es is such that by in creas in g their

n umber the mi lli n g process c an be made quite autom a tic which affords ,

econ omy in workin g power .

Figs 5 1 8 n d 5 1 9 i ll ustrate a cross a n d a l o n gitudin al sectio n of a

. a

mill for reducin g 4 0 sacks of maize per day This mill is operat ed by .

mean s of a 2 0 H P ben zin e m otor with a belt driv e to the m ain shaftin g
. . .

On the first floor of the m ill are statio n ed : storin g b in (a G ) e levator .

, 1 ,

bottoms the main shaftin g a four roller mi ll 2 2 0 x 4 7 5 mm an d a

, ,
-
.
,

3 6 in sto n e m ill
-
. I n the garret ap artme n t there are set
. a separator b ,

a middlin gs gradin g p l an sifter f a group purifier d with six section s a , ,

fa n 9 a filter dust col lector h the elevator heads an d a shaft re ceiv in g

,
-

, ,

its motio n from the mai n shaftin g a nd tran smittin g it to all m achi ne s
o n that floor .

V I II

S CH EM E or O ATMEAL GRI N D I N G

Oatmeal manufacture is o n e of the bran ches of a widely devel oped

—
i dustry the preparatio n of cereal foods The corn cereal or break
n .
, ,

fast foods are prepared of the grain of maize oats wheat sometimes , , ,

barley freed of the ski n crushed to a thin l oaf roasted or dried They, .

are used in almost every family for breakfast with sugar a n d mil k—the
,

maize an d wheat dry an d the c ats boiled , .

I n R ussia oatmeal is kn own u n der the n ame of American flakes Her

cules which have n othin g in commo n with American Quaker O ats ”

n either in qual ity n r in outward appearan ce o .

5 40 FLO UR MI LL I NG [ CH AR VI I I
irst of a ll the grain goes to the separator No 1 with two siev es
F ,
. .

The first sieve bo lts the oats separati n g l arge impurities o n the seco n d ,

fin e impurities a n d dust are removed Th fa n carries away the light . e

dirt a n d poor grain s From here the stock goes to the gradi n g separator
.

No 2 which separates away the small oats use l ess for productio n
.
,
On .

some of the mills the cleanin g is performed with the aid of flat sieves
with ob l o n g perforation s an d a n automatic brush for c lean in g or by mean s ,

of a gradi n g reel separator No 3 -

. .

These machi n es extract ll fi n e impurities a n d sort away the l arge

a ,

heavy oats .

After a carefu l c lean in g n d sorti n g away of the heav y grai n equal

a

in size it is dried in the dryer No 4 if v ery damp to faci litate the hu ll in g

, .
,

a n d at the same time s li ght ly roasted to give it a fla v our .

Th dryer ge n erally emp l oyed is a metal p an for treati n

e g twenty
barrel s per day Th p an is 1 0 % ft in diameter and up to 9 in deep
. e . . .

I t is ceme n ted i n to the stove which is arran ged u n der it To preve n t the .

grain from gettin g bur n ed it is stirred the who le time One l oad of c ats
, .

of some 8 cwt is dried in three hours Th stove is built of brick ;

. . e

the p n is set o n it with the aid of flan ges in such wise that its bottom a nd
a
,

sides are subjected to the effect of the hot air .

W ell dried n d roasted c ts are very britt l e n d friab le

a They pass
a a .

in successio n through scouri n g grin ders of artificial sto n e .

After each mi ll sto n e passage (No s 5 6 a n d 7 ) the grai n goes to the .

,

separator with a sieve (No 8 shell remov er ) the tail s of which are guided
.
, ,

to the ston es n d the l ast o n e of them po lishes the grain After the sto n e
,
a .

No 7 the grain goes to be fi n ally freed of the i n te g u me n tal dust an d the

.

partly cut hull s which is performed o n the separator No 9

, . .

No w the grai n is ready to be steamed a n d crushed The stea m in g .

machin e here is simil ar to the o n used for feed I t works u n interm it e .

t n tly
e I n America copper steamin g cy li n ders of co n ti n uous actio n are
.

emp loyed Th flow of grain into the hopper at the top is regul ated
. e
,

because with a chan ge in the height of the colum n of grain the steam
in troduced from below into the steam pipe will burst through the grain
a n d steam it i n su fficie n t ly Th grai n in the steamin g machi n e is c o n
. e

tin ually stirred with a stirrer Th steamed grai n passes to the ro ll s

. e .

Th e steamin g machin e ,the ro ll s , n d the dryer are combi n ed into o n e a

machin e No 1 0 which eco n omises space

, .
, .

Th process of crushin g heats the product a n d o n leavin g the roll s

e
,

it is spread out in a thin l ayer in the coo ler This cooli n g dries it .

sufficie n t ly for immediate packin g in boxes or barre ls .

CH A R VI I I ] F LOUR M I LLI NG 54 1

In case the coo lin g alo n e appears to be in sufficien t to dry the c at

meal the steam is let i nto the pipes of the refrigerator an d thus a fin a l
dryi n g is attai ned .

IX

QU A N TI T Y OF I N TE R M ED I A TE P RO D U C TS AN D TH E CAL CU L ATI O N
OF CORR E S P ON D I N G MACH IN E S

In computin g the n umber of corrugatio n s n d the capacity of the a

break a n d rebreak mill s we av ailed o u rselves of the practical data ,

takin g the av erage quantities Of break an d rebreak middlin gs No w .

after we hav e suffi cie n t ly become acquainted with the gen eral scheme
of m illin g we may defin e the dime n sion s Of the ro ller mill s for reb reakin g
,

the semolin a for the reductio n Of middl in gs a n d the clean in g up of the

, ,

o ffa l s in accordan ce with the quan tity of the intermediate products .

I n the pl an s exam in ed we did n o t occupy oursel v es with the estima

tio n of the dimen sio n s of the machines acquai n tin g ourselv es o nly with ,

the existi n g typ es of millin g processes Therefo re we must no w at o n ce .

, ,

poi nt out that the dime n sio n s of the machin es giv en in the appen ded
milli n g di agrams are far from the correct cal cul ation espec iall y as ,

regards the dim en sion s of the roller mi lls .

I t must be n oted that for break as we ll as for reductio n ro ller mi ll s ,

practice often estab lishes o ne an d the same size of ro lls havi n g in view ,

onl y the co nv en ie n ce of erectio n a nd eco n omic co n sideratio n s These .

con sideratio n s however are in correct n d in j urious to the busin ess I n

, ,
a .

fact if at a mill with a certai n capacity o ne were to take ro lls Of a size

,

n ormal for the third break n d for l l other passages estab lish the same
,
a a

size the n owin g to the abse n ce of proportio n of the capacity Of the m ill s
, ,

wi th di ffere n t passages these mi ll s wi ll

,
be either over l oaded or u n der
l oaded This is Ob ser v ed in fact in the mill s of R ussia a n d abroad their
. ,

b uil ders n o t hav in g p roceeded o n the b asis of a correct cal culatio n of

the machin ery .

Q I m di P d — W shall start with the more

u a n tity fo n ter e a te ro u cts e

complex millin g process—the high grin di n g I n F B aumgart n er n d . .

a

L Graf s book there are give n tab les of the quantity of in termediate
.
’

products determin ed accordin g to the authors words from the results of

, ,
’

detailed in vestigation s of the millin g processes in differe n t years The .

wheat which was treated at the mill s subj ected to in vestigatio n w as

,
,

the or din ar y market gr ade .

1 P p 2 2 9 2 3 3 and 305 3 1 2 .
.
-
-
542 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C HAR VI I I
Thus
the tab les by Baumgart n er a nd Graf hereto appe n ded give us
,

the average quan tities Of the i n termediate produc t s for high wheat grin d
in g the re l atio n of the soft
,
n d the hard wheat havi n g been a

Appro x im ately the re v erse re l atio n o n the average is Observed in Russi a ,

where 6 0 to 70 per cen t of soft an d 4 0 to 30 per cent of hard wheat is

.
.

gen erally grou n d .

I n this way with two thirds of hard wheat a n d o n e third of so ft

,
-
-

after cl eanin g there was obtain ed 9 6 per cen t of grain ready for mill in g .
,

so th at the average losses in cleanin g were 4 per ce nt .

After eight breaki n g p assages an d o n e rebreak the results of Tab le

LI I I were Obtained .

TAB L E LI I I
B R E A KI N G P R OCE S S

gr D
”
is
Br l ?
u ns t G rad e .

B RE A K .

Re br kea

To tal 4 09 7 5 1 0 5 p e r ce n t . 1 3 p e r cen t . 6 0 2 5 p e rce n t .

hus there were Obtain ed 1 0 5 per cen t of break flour 1 3 per cen t
T , .
, .

of dun st 6 0 2 5 per cen t of middl in gs 7 2 5 per cen t of l arge bran and

, .
, .
,

0 2 5 per ce n t l oss On e must bear in mi n d howe v er that the gr a des

. .
, ,

(1 2,
a n d 3 ) f break flour do n o t correspo n d in qual ity to the same gr a des
, O

of middlin gs an d dun st B y den otin g the break stock by the three .

grades it is meant that each group of product is divide d into three cate
,

gorice accordin g to quality which is di ffere nt in the flour the du n st

, , ,

an d the middl i n gs .

The process of gradi n g the m iddlin gs a n d du n st acc ordin g to qual ity ,

as we kn ow already is of very great importan ce sin ce from the momen t

, ,

th midd li n gs are graded the grade s an d the q ual it y Of flour are com pute d
e _ ,
544 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR VI I I
ach break gives us a certain quan tity of product appro xim ate ly
E ,

u niform in quality The products of the seco n d third an d fourth breaks

. ,

are the most clo sely r l ted in qu ality . e a .

I n Tab l e LI V we have the resu lts of gradi n g the midd li n gs a n d

dun st accordin g to quality .

From the tab l e it may be see n that the total quantity Of puri fi ed
middlin gs an d dun st obtai ned was about 7 5 per ce n t 2 ] per cen t bein g .
, .

recko n ed to the l osses in du n st an d offal s .

The fur ther process rebreak o i middli n gs a nd l arge du n st (in Russia

,
-

this dun st—P o hlgries—correspo n ds to middli n gs of the utmost fin en ess )

is clear by Tab le LV .

TAB LE LV

R E B R EA K OF MI DD L I N G S (AU E L OS U N G )

F lo u r p er G rade .

1 00
R eb rea k o f Middl ing s (p o li h ing)
s P erCent .

1 st b
re rea k (b e st m id
dlin g s — Au sz u g sg rie s)
10 13

2 n d re rea b k (2 n d g ra de 1
Mu n dg rie s )

3 rd re br k ea
(S em m el 1
g rie s )

b
4 t h re rea k (P o hlg rie s) 6 34 2 3
-

5 t h reb re a k
6 th —l
c ean in g u p the br n a

To ta l 3 10 23 255

this w y as we see three grades of flour n d three grades of du n st

In a , , a

have bee n Obtain ed I n the R ussian gran ul ar grin di n g the 0 0 0 a nd 1

.
, ,

grades of dun st could be regarded as a re ady product—gran u lar flour .

But the German s produce almost exclusively fi n fl o u r an d therefore e ,

1

dun st 00 0 an d 1 is subjected to further reductio n Table LV I

, , .

gives us a tabl e of du n st reductio n an d the extractio n of blue

flour .

Tab le LV I shows the fi n al result of mi lli n g There are obtai n ed .

1 Only q u ite recen tly the p rep a ratio n of

g ra nu la r flo u r has b e un
g h ere a nd t h ere in Germ an y .
F LOUR MI LLI NG 5 45

C0
” if ”
1‘
—
r i
«
546 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH A R VII I
eight grades of flour begin ni ng with No 0 0 and e n din g with No 6 the
,
. .
,

sum total bein g 7 8 per cen t there is 1 6 % per cen t of bran of all kin ds
. .
,

a n d the l osses amou n t to I é per ce n t .

I n this man n er the whol e process of high German gri n di n g

requires n o less than twenty three p as sages I f the Ho ch schro t
-
.

an d yet an other reb re akin g passage are to be set in additio n ,

which is v ery useful the total n umber of passages will be

,

twenty five -
.

D im en s io n s f the M(whin es —
o As r egards the n umber an d di me n sio n s
of the boltin g machin es an d p u rifiers they may be easily selected in ,

accordan ce with the quantity of intermedi ate products accordin g to

the tables of capacity we ga v e o pp n 3 8 8—3 9 0 an d 4 2 1 Fo r the . .

rebreak (sizin g ) of middlin gs reductio n of du n st and finishi n g of o ffals

, ,

we Offer the following Tab le LV I I .

TAB L E LV I I
R EB R E A K OF MI DD LI N G S , R ED U CTI ON OF D U N S T, AN D CL EANI N G
UP O FFAL S

kp
'

Leng th o f R o ll s in m m to One S . ac e r Twenty -

Fo u r HOu rs .

P assag es in Order o f
S q D H
—
e u en ce
R edu ctio n o f u n st S cra p ing o f ul l s
.

Po rcel ain Ro l l s . Cast iro n Ro l l s

-
.

C ast iro n Ro l l s
-
.
—C ast -
iro n Ro l l s .

18 0 19 0 — 19 0 21 0 —

The differential of the roll s for rebreak of mi ddlin gs shoul d be

taken as 4 : 5 with the number of revo l ution s fo r the fast r
.
oll 2 00
to 2 1 0 ; for reductio n roll s the fast roll ru n n in g at 2 30 to 2 3 5 re
,

vo lutio n s the differential is 5 :

, a n d for roll s c l ean in g up the
offal s the fast roll maki n g 2 5 0 revolutio n s the differential to be taken
, ,

is 4 5 .

Kettenb ach giv e s the followin g tab l e of di me n sio n s of rolls

for break rebreak of middlin gs (Au fl Osu ng ) and the redu ction
, ,

o f du n st in di ffere n t grindin g systems for a kl g capacity

'

(Tab l e L V I I I ) .
5 48 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR VI I I
Toill ustrate the Russian system we shall giv e the perce ntages
Of the y ie ld of flour in differe n t parts of the cou n try Great i n co n v e n ie n ce .

is o ffered to the comparison Of the qualities Of the grades of flour by the

absen ce Of u n iformity in the bran ds Fo r this reaso n when s tudyin g .
,

these tables o n must compare n o t the br an ds or No s but the percent a ge

e

of flour in co nn ectio n with the gen eral tab le .

V OL GA R E G I ON

Hard an d soft wheats w ere milled . The data refer to 19 10 an d 19 1 1 .

Mix t u re—H a rd W 5 8 p er c e n t
he a t . Mix tu re —Hard Wh eat, 4 0 p e r cen t .

S o ft W h ea t 4 2 p e r ce nt (R u ssia n ) . .
S o ft W h e a t , 60
p e r ce n t .

G ra de . Y ie l d in 1 0 0 p er Cen t . Y iel d in 1 00 pe r Cent .

1 st b l ue 2 3 00 1 1 00
-

1 t red
s 40 0 70 0
2 n d b l ue 1 87 5 14 0 0
2 n d red 80 0 4 75
-

1 st b l ack 10 0 0
2 n d b l ack 30 0 6 00 .

3rd grade 5 75 120 0

4 th 8 00
-

5 th 3 00 25

T ota amou t of flour

l n 82 2 5
-

O ffal 1 6 75
Losses
Total

S O U TH E RN R E G I ON
souther n regio n Offers a great variety of grades a nd yields of flour
Th e ,

prepared mostly from l ocal wheat The data given below were obta in ed .

at the E katerin osl av D istrict Farm an d I n dustrial Exhibitio n 1 9 1 0 , .

W H EA T MI LL ,
E KA TE R I N O S L A V
1 90 9

Gra n u l ar flour No . 00 i(n c ludin g semo lin a gran ular ,

flour NO . 0 0 00 an d NO . 000 )
S oft flour N O . 0
NO 1 .

NO 2 .

NO I I .

NO 3 .

NO I I I.

No I V .

To ta l amou n t of flour “
CH A P . VI I I ] FLOUR MI LLI NG 549

W H E AT MIL L ,
E K ATE RI N O S L A V— nttnu ed
{ Bo ’

1 90 9

i e Offal
Fn
Coarse sharps a n d s ma ll bran
B road bran

Tota l amoun t of o ffal

S cree gs from the grai c l ean i n g departmen t (wi ld

i

n n n -

oats barl ey cockl e a n d scourin g dust )

, , ,

Thus the mill yields 7 4 per cent of flour 2 0 per ce nt of .

, . Of
f al ,
a nd 6
per cent of l osses in the grain clean in g departme nt
.
-
.

Gran ular flour No . 00 i( n c ludin g semo lin a , 0 000

an dNO 0 0 0 )
.

S oft flour NO 0 .

No 1 .

No 2 .

NO I I .

NO 3 .

NO I I I .

NO I V .

T otal amou n t Of flour

in e Offal
F
S harps a n d small bra n
Broad bran
Total amoun t of bra n

Loss in the grain c lean i n g departme n t -

Th e mill in g process of 1 9 1 0 is the same as that of 1 90 9 ; the wheat is

dryer a nd therefore the quality of the flour is better but the yield of the
, ,

first grad e a n d several other grades is less The total percen tage of .

yields is smaller but there is more fine bran and less l arge bran as
, ,

may be see n in the table This is exp l ained by easy abrasio n of the
.
.

bran coats o n dry wheat Therefore it would be useful to give a stro n ger
.

dampenin g .

Th e wheat is v ery dirty therefore the l o sses Of the grai n c lea n i n g

,
-

department come up to 6 per ce nt .

5 50 FLO U R MI LLI NG [ CHA R V III

W H ATE MI LL ALE X AN D R OV S K
,

I . H igh W hea t Grin ding

Gra n ul ar per ce n t .

per cen t . Of flour .

Large bran
Fi n e 20 4 7
9 2 62 per cen t of bra n .

Broke n grain nd small wheat

a

W i ld oats a n d barl ey per ce n t of offa l

. .

S couri n g dust

S oft W he at Grin din g

(E xport flour )
Fl our No . 0000 6 6 per ce n t .

No . . 0 00 ‘
d
8
Hercu l es No . 0 4 85 70 7 per cen t Of flou r .

NO . 4 48
0
No . 5 14
2 6
175
24 9 per cen t of bran
. .

48
1 4-

0 8 44 per ce n t of offal s
. .

14
08 Total 1 00 per cen t .

III . S oft Grin din g

(W ithout export flour )

per ce n t .

per cen t of flour . .

55 2 FLO UR MILLI NG [ C H AR VIII

The yields of flour in perce n tages are give n in the followin g table
Fl our bran d 0 0 0
,
6 per ce n t .

a)
00 l 9i n

0 4%
1
2 12
3
4 7
H4 57 1
.

Total amou n t of flour 76

3A
23
1 1%

Total amou nt of o ffal 17

1s
a
1
22
—
2 3
Total amou nt of screen ings 73

Total 1 00 5 per cent .

stead of the ordin ary result of exactly 1 00 per cent here we hav e
In .

1 00 5 per ce n t This mean s that the total weight in a co rrect calcu l atio n
'

i n creases o n accoun t of the dampen in g Of the wheat which absorbs the ,

moisture .

TABLE LX
W H EAT MI LL MARIOOP OL
,

5 0 p er c ent B el o to o rk a a nd
F lo u r G rades B el mo m ka ’
.

5 0 p er cen t B
an at a
. k .

Sharps
Fin e bran
Large bran
Offal in the sco u rl n
g de
p a rt m e n t
Du st an d dirt in them
ca n »
. V I II ] FLOUR MI LLI NG 55 3

W H EAT MI LL , V I LLA G E AL E XAN D R OV KA , GOV E R NMENT OF

E K AI
’ ‘
E RI N O S L AV

Th e samp les of mill in g are of the 1 90 9 crop . The mill treats 90

cen t of Ul ka an d 1 0 per cen t of Gar n ovka
. . .
.

S emo l in a
Fl our bran d NO 0 00
, .

No . 00
NO . 0
NO . 1
No . 2
No . 3
NO . 4
NO . 5

amou nt of flour
Fin e sharps
Fin e bran
Large bran
The bove tab les of yields a nd flour bran ds through their v ariety
a

a n d i n co n sta n cy great ly impede the progress of the R ussia n exporters

o n the foreig n markets F o r this reaso n we ought most decided ly to

.
,

adopt u n iform bran ds There is n o doubt that a reduced number of

.

gr ades an d the defin iteness of the bran d will simp lify the millin g process ,

make it cheaper an d faci litate the competitio n of Russian mills o n foreig n

,

m arkets .
 C HA P TE R IX

CO NS TRUCTI O N OF MI LL B UI LD I NGS
I

CON D I TI ON S D E TE R MI NI N G TH E CHARACTE R OF B UI LD IN G S

IN mill i ng practice there are two pr o cesses which deter min e the character of
the buildi n gs and the arran gemen t Of the machin es the automatic an d the
intermitten t Fo rthis reaso n before proceedin g to describe the co n stru c
.
,

tion s of mill buildin gs o ne shoul d comp are these two methods of millin g
,
.

I n automatic mill in g as the n ame itself pro v es the comp lex mi llin g
, ,

process is performed without the as sistan ce of human han ds .

I n the sack m ill all the in termediate products begi nni n g with break ,

a n d midd li n gs a n d e n din g with du n st a n d flo u r are s a cked sorted an d fed , , ,

by han d into correspo n din g machin es where they are sub j ected to furt her
,

treatme n t Thus the man ual operatio n Of a workman forms the co n

.
,

n e ctin g li n k in the i n depe n de n t work of the separate machi n es .

S ack mi lls are n o w co mp aratively seld o m met with an d at a well ,

fur shed sack mi

ni ll o n e may see special de v ices — ge n erall y in the sh ape
n so l- —
of bi s with ca ed caps for the automatic performan ce of the differe n t
l
parts of the millin g process such as the breaki n g process middli n gs
, ,

gradin g or reductio n
,
.

I f o n the other han d the arran geme n t of the mi ll is automatic the

, , ,

whole process starti ng at the momen t the di rty grain goes i nto the
,

storin g b in n d en din g with the packin g Of flour per grade is performed

a ,

withou t the assistan ce of workin g han ds The separate products by .

mean s of various tran sporti n g devices in the S hape Of ban ds elevators , , ,

worms an d spouts pass through all the stages of treat m en t i e the whol e , . .

operation is performed quite automatically .

I n this mann er the co n ti n uity of the millin g process is l eft in tact

, .

I f a certai n scheme of mill in g is accurately fo ll owed both the auto ,

matic an d the sack mill provided they are furn ished with a sufficie nt
,

n umber of machin es are a bleto gi v e equal resu lts as regards the quality
'

of the mill ed products But here arises the questio n W h ich way is the
.
,

best to Obtain these resul ts which o n e of them is the most expedi ent
2
,

tech ica y speaki g

n ll n a n d more eco n omical as regards the millin g costs
,
2
’

Amo n g the mass of mill er s n o t o n ly in Russia but al so abroad there

, ,
554
555 FLOUR MI LLI NG m m . m

of exhaust make dust less operatio n possib le n o t o nl y in the c lean

—
,

—
half of the mi ll the m ill in g departme nt but also in the grain cleanin g -

divisio n By adoptin g filters o n e can make ll the apartmen ts of an

. a

automatic mill dustless for n o t o nly machin es furnished wi th fan s

, ,

may be in cl uded in the gen er al exhaust system but such m a chin es and ,

apparatus as the trieurs automatic scales a nd e levators as well

, , .

W hen sel ectin g the type of mill a circumstan ce of n o l ess importan ce ,

than the tech nical outfit is the eco n omic side of the questio n which
—
,

touches the mill ers most ten der point the cost Of worki n g the milling
’
.

The most material eleme n t in the mill in g expe n ses is the cost of mill -

han ds I f a l arge mill is taken a parall el compariso n of an automatic

.
,

a n d a sackin g mi ll s hows a sharp dif fere n ce Fo r in stan ce in a mi ll Of .

,

the sackin g type with a bushels of wheat capacity per day the
, ,

expen ses in workme n duri ng o ne shift amou nt to the rou n d fi gure o f

sev enty han ds wh ile in an automatic mill of the same cap acity the
,

n umber of workme n is reduced al most fourfo ld do w n to eightee n m e n .

That rel atio n drops al so with the l owering capacity a n d for i n st an ce , , ,

for a medium mill of 1 75 0 bushel s automatic in arran geme n t the n umber

of han ds does no t exceed five or six again st the ten or twelv e of the sack ,

ing system .

The n umbers of han ds giv e n in cl ude o n ly the perso n s takin g part in

the process of productio n for in stan ce roller m en pur ifier men & c, , , , .
,

whereas the workmen occupied in supp lyin g l o adi n g of the wheat the , ,

packin g of the flour are n o t recko n ed as their n umber depen ds o n l ocal

—
,

co nditio s the situatio n of the mill the mode of tran sport & c
n , , .

The foll owin g tab l e gi ves paralle l data pertain in g to the n umber of
han ds empl oyed during o n e shift at a sackin g a nd a n automatic mill .

TABL E LXI

Nu m b e r o f H an d s .

Cap a ci
ty k ing Mil l
Day
£
81
“

l
S ac . A u to m atic Mil l .

Mil l ing D ep t . Cl eaning D ep t . To ta l . Milling D ep t . Cl ean ing D ep t . To t al .

CH AP . Ix ] LOUR MI LLI NG 5 57
F

As may be see n in the tab le in the grain c lean i n g departme t of

n
-
,

the automatic mi s there is emp l oyed the same n umber of han ds as in

ll
the sacki g mi s because the clean in g of grain at a sacki n g mill is ge n e
n l l ,

ra y performed automaticall y B u t in the grin din g departme n t of the

ll .

mill the n umber of han ds in changin g from the sackin g to the automatic
,

mill makes a sharp bou n d as we see in Fig 5 2 1 which presen ts more , .

,

striki ngly the data of the appe nded table .

This diagram c l e arly shows that with the dim inutio n of the capacity
the differen ce drop s a n d attai n s a n i n significant quan tity in , .

small mill s .

To the millin g expe n ses which are abse n t in the automatic arran ge ,

7 3 0 0 0 1 .

1 ‘

7 0 0 0 -
1 0 0 0
w
I?
m oo 4 .

Nu m b ero f h a nd s i ll th e g rain
16
«mo o 5 0 0
I
.
0

C l e an i ng d ep a rtm en t
9

Q
Nu m b e r of h and s in
(50 0
i7i N an

au to m atic m il l .

Nu mb er of h a nd s In
[ 5 0 0
i a
k ing m il l
x

sac .

FI G 5 2 1
. .

men t must be added al so the out l ay in sacks for the intermediate

,

products .

B esides the cost of worki n g o n e sho ul d recko n the cost of equippi n g ,

the mi ll which determin es the capita l charges

, .

The automatic mill requires a greater n umber of machi n es the prese n ce ,

of which would exclude the n ecessity of a return to the machin es which

hav e already fulfil led o n e purpose Con sequently the automatic .
,

mill requires far more machin ery in the grindin g section than the
sackin g o ne .

Fo r examp l e we shall take a mi ll wi th 6 5 0 b ushel s of wheat capacity

,

per day I n mill s fitted out for sackin g very frequen tly o wi ng to the
.
,

use of return s the n umber of roll er mills is limited to four whereas an ,

automatic mill of the same capacity to work re gu l arly n eed s seven or

eight roller mill s P arallel to the n u mber of those mill s the number of
.

boltin g machines n d tran sport dev ices augments which i ncreases the
a ,

costs of the plan t As the capacity i n cre ases howe ver thes e e , ,
558 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR Ix

pen se s decre a se Fo r a mill with 2 000 bushels of wheat cap acity per
.

day Of the sackin g type eight is a su fficie nt n umber of roll er mill s

, , ,

whereas an automatic mill needs but elev e n mill s .

I n spite of the comparatively great differe n ce in cost of fi ttin g o u t a n

automatic an d a s ackin g mill at the present mo men t the ere ctio n of an ,

automatic mill may be regarded as pro fitab le as soo n as its cap acity
amou n ts to 1 000 or 1 30 0 bushels .

Those again st the autom atic mi ll maint ain though wi th o ut any fo u n da ,

tion that the flour produced by an a utomati c mill doe s n o t po ssess

,

uniform qualities Under the in fluen ce of that fal se Opini o n there spr an g
.

into existen ce a type of mill s which fi nd their p l ace o n the l in e betwee n the
automatic and the sackin g mill s The peculiarity of these so call ed
‘

.
-

semi automatic mill s con sists in the fact that the whole process is per
-

formed automaticall y but the flour is collected in sacks at the point

,

of di scharge out of separate bolti n g m achin es a n d then graded by han d

a n d mixed in the b le n der to obtai n the bran ds estab lished o n the market .

B u t this is a palli ativ e which does n o t abol ish the cau ses of n o n u ni
,
-

formity of the flour

. .

I n the mean time n o t n otici n g it them se lv e s th ese Oppo n e n t s o f the

, ,

automatic system turn the abov e men tio ned argument whi ch ha s some
-

real mean ing in it again st themselv es n amely the sackin g mill doe s
, : ,

n o t guarantee the u n iformity of the co n siste n ce of flo ur the whol e ,

c o ntrol bein g based o n the super fi cial v isual sen sation s B u t at the time .

of the ni ght shift that becomes al most imp o ssibl e ev en to an experi

en ced miller .

To solve the questio n of the homoge n eity of flour in the au to matic

mill o ne must p ay due attentio n to the meth o ds o f blen din g the grain
, ,

a no less important questio n than the clean in g of it Fo r the regul arity .

a n d co n siste n cy of the fi n al resul ts the u niformity Of the intermedi ate

,

product s middlin gs and d un st is equally n e cessary The ide al

, , .

solutio n Of the questio n is to erect el ev ators by the mill s in which

the grain is stored in sil os sorted an d the mill supplied with a
, ,

mixt ure accordin g to a certain recipe Then the inte rmedi ate .

products too bein g the re sult of a defin ite mill in g scheme will be
, ,

homogeneous .

Thus for a mill of e v en a medium capacity the aut omatic type

, ,

u nrestricted as regards the n umber and size of machin es is ,

un doubtedl y the most ratio n al type both eco n omically and theo ,
5 50 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ CHAR 1x

drive is p l aced from which the motio n is commu ni cated to the elevator
, ,

the grain clean in g machin e an d the S ifter Fo r the motor (in our cas e a
-

,
.

FI G 5 2 2
. .

naphtha e n gin e but it may be a steam en gin e or a turb in e ) a special

-

,
-

apartment separated from the mill by a wall is arran ged Th buildin g

, ,
. e

m y be of stone which is better as reg ards sec u rit y again st fire

a .
.
CH AR Ix ] F LOUR MI LLI NG 561

III

B UI L D I NG S OF COMP L I CATED GRI N D I NG MI LL S

I n moder n wheat or rye mi lls with automatic han dli n g of the pro
ducts we gen erally fi n d four Or five floors Th first (baseme n t ) floor is . e

l eft for the mai n hafts the seco n d for the ro ller mills the third is
S ,
,

n ecessary for the purpose O f commu n icati n g a su f fi cie n t i n c li n e to the

spouts the fourth for purifiers n d fin ally the fifth for boltin g machines
, ,
a , .

I n rye mill s there is n o floor for p urifiers .

Th ro ller mi ll s a n d sto n e mi ll s as we ll as the purifiers a n d bo lti n g

e ,

FI G . 5 23 . FI G . 524 .

machines are p laced in straight rows alo n g the build in g Fo r each rol ler
, .

passage there is a sep arate elevator which ru n s through all the floors
,

besides that el evators are n eeded for other machi n es from which the
product can n ot be allowed to flow of its o w n accord I t is these tran sport .

devices which have a very co n siderab le in fluence o n the arran geme n t of

the mill buildin g n d especially o n the hape of its roofin g
a S .

Let us n o w in spect the most typical mill buildin gs .

I n Fig 5 2 3 may be see n the tran sverse sectio n of

. mill with two a

rows of ro ller mill s n d t wo rows of p l n ifters

a The e levators are set
a s .

2 N
5 62 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ C H AR Ix

in the middle S uch a n arran geme nt may be particul arly recommen ded for
.

rye mills by reason of its cheap n ess because from both the rows of mill s
, ,

the product by its weight without the aid of worms ru n s to the e le v ators
, ,

as well as into the b oltin g machi n es Th roof of such a bui ldin g should . e

hav e a high ridge so as n o t to in crease the height of the flOOr ho ldin g the
,

sifters for the sake of the elevators Th sole defect of such n arran ge . e a

ment of the outfit is that the elevators b lock up so much space in the
cen tre of the mill bui ldi n g The free passage betwee n the machin es an d
.

the in spectio n of their operatio n are impeded Fo r this reaso n though .

,

such an arran gemen t is sometimes practised in wheat mills it can n ot be ,

recommen ded as the n umber of e levators here is still greater Figs 5 2 5

, . .

a n d 5 2 6 how us the cross secti on s o n which out of the above co n sidera

S

tio n s the elevators are arran ged n o t in the middle but by the wall W ith
, , .

such a n arran geme nt all

the sectio n s remain free
in the middl e a n d easily
accessib le to inspection .

The e levators are set al o n g

the wall S O as n o t to stan d
opposite to the wi n dows .

The wal ls Of the top floor

F 525 IG
have to be su fficie n t ly high
for the e levators (here
. .

they are 5 metres high whi le in the first case the height is o nly 2 metres )
, ,

so that the roof is flat in shape S uch a n arran gement of the buildin g in .

practice appears to be the most fficient both for l arge n d for small e
'

mill s and is ther efore the o n e most freque nt ly adopted

, .

On Fig 5 2 4 t h mill buildin g is divided b y a l o n gitudi n al sto n e wall

. e

i n to two parts of which o n serves as the mill proper an d the other as a

, e
,

warehouse furn ished with flo r b le n ders I f the m ill h a to be enl arged

u -

.
‘

the warehouse may be used for setti n g the machin ery in There is n o .

floor to allow of in c li n i n g the pouts ; i n stead of the spouts there are S

worms set over the mills Th doub le sl op e roof leaves suffi cie nt space
. e

for the high el evators n d detachers which are situated over the s ifters
a
,

of the reductio n rolls W ith su ch a co n structio n of the buildin g o n e has

.

to make much use of the worms but by disposin g the mach in es ratio n all y ,

al o n g th e buil din g their n umber may be co n siderably reduced .

Fig 5 2 7 prese n ts a cross sectio n of a l arge moder n mil l

.
The height .

of the buildi n g here i quite co n siderable Th grou n d floor is S O high

s . e

t hat theproduct Of itse lf ru n s to the elevators fro m both rows of mill s .

5 64 LOUR MI LLI NG F [ C H A R I X

suspen ded bearin gs Of the main shafts are attached direct ly to the iro n
joists .
p

Altogether th e co n structio n of the cei li n gs in mill bui ldi n gs has .

assumed a very pecu liar shape which depe n ds o n the dispositio n Of the
,

machin es nd the practical uti lisatio n of space in the mills

,
a .

On Figs 5 2 5 a n d 5 2 8 (tra n sverse n d l o n gitu di n al sectio n s ) we see a

. a

framin g of j oists often used in other buildin gs too Th cross pieces a . e

are timber be ams with supports 1 at the ful crums Of t he column s ; )

these supports are d esig n e d to horte n the le n gth of the u n supported S

part c in co n sequen ce of which the beam has a more rigid span Th . e

supports b are stre n gthe n ed with rafter beams d or attached to the beam a
by mean s of bolts which produces the sam e result n d is fte n co n sidered
. e, a O

to be more co nve n ie n t Th j oists f r . e disposed at a d istan ce of 0 8 or

e a

1 metre from each other Care shou ld be take n that these j oists are
.

set exactly vertically over each other in all

the fl oors : Th colum n s supportin g the e

cei lin gs are either s ingle like g or doub le ,

l ike h (Fig W he n usi n g timber j oists .

a n d cross pieces the dis ta n ce betwee n the

supporti n g colum n s should n o t be o ver 4

or 4 5 metres in lo n gitudinal n d in tran s a

versal directio n Th breadth of the buil d

.

. e

in g bei n g 8 or 1 2 metres there are co n ,

F 5 28
IG
sequen tly two or three rows of colum n s
. .

Fo r mi ll s with a capacity of 2 4 0 sacks per d y such a n arran geme n t a

is advan tageous as its erectio n costs comparativelylitt le B t for mill s

, . u

of l arger dime n sio n s this arran geme nt is disadvan tageous as regards the
most eco n omic use of the area of the buildin gs A we see in Fig 5 2 5 . s .
,

the rows of column s allow of freely settin g in the metre span s o nl y

three rows f mills an d sifters whereas with the Fig 5 2 6 co n structio n
O
, .

of ceilin g there is space for four such rows I n Fig 5 2 6 there is a row . .

of column s o n ly in the middle the distan ce betwee n the colum n s and the
,

wall s bei n g 6 5 metres F r such a span the timber cro ss beams of the
'
’

. o

limit size wou ld be too weak n d therefore the cross pieces here are
, a

in gwith a distan ce of 4 metres between th ful crums The roller mills e .

an d sifters of the seco n d row are co n n ected with l v a to rs by mean s of e s

tran sverse worms Th advantage of the S ifters o v er reel s an d centri

. e

f g ls as regards eco n omy of the area occupied is c le

u a arly seen here for , ,

with cen trifu gals it is quite impossib le t i n st al in the s ame space a

, o
 CH AP . Ix ] FLO UR MI LLI NG 5 65

machi e doi g the same work or to keep at the same time the dressin g
n n

surface as accessib le to i n spectio n as whe n furnished with sifters .

Th dan ger of fire th at thre aten the mi ll l d to the n ecessity for

e s e
co n ,

str ctin g fireproof buil din gs

u The machi n es nd apparatus as we ll as .
a

the tran sport devices of the fireproof mills have n o wood parts whatever .

No t o n ly the wall s ceilin gs n d coveri n gs Of the

, ,
a

buildin g have to be of fireproof materials but A ,

the doors an d win dows as well .

The buildi n gs of a fire resisti n g mi ll i e pro -

, . .

perly speaki n g the walls are erected of Ordin ary p ,

brick O n ly comparatively rece nt ly in Amer ca at

.
i

tempts at comp lete ferro con crete buildi n gs or steel -

c o n stru ct io n s w it h b ri k she ll have been made AS

a c
0
.

regards ceilin gs t here are two types : solid ferro

,

co n crete (B Fig 5 2 9 ) an d with co n crete arches

, .

( 0 ,
F ig 5 2 9.
) betwee n the l o n gitudin al iro n beams The l ast con structio n .

is the heavier Of the two an d is therefore i n ferior to the first , .

S uch in a ge n eral out li n e are the co n structio n s of mi ll buildi n gs

an swerin g the requiremen ts of moder n tech n ics .

IV

CON S TR U CTI ON OF AM E RI CAN MIL L S

origin ality of American tech n ics shows itself also in the co nstru o
The
tio n of mill bui ldi n gs .

A more or less n ormal type of a n A merican mi ll bui ldi n g approachi n g ,

the E uropean co n structio n is give n in Figs 5 30 n d 5 3 1 which i llus , . a ,

trate the cross sec tio n of the grain c lean ing departme nt a nd a lo n gitudin al -

sectio n through the grain clean in g an d milli n g departments The -

.

prin cipal di ffere n ce from the E uropean co n structio n s of buildi n gs lies in

the fact that the groun d floor is co n siderab ly higher That is n ecessi .

t a ted by the type of ro ller mill s us d which n eed overhead shafti n g hu n g e ,

from the c ei lin g an d special te n sio n pulleys for the flexib le gearin g .

On the grou n d floor the flour is packed o n the first the ro ller ,

mil l s are disposed n the seco n d the suspe n ded fil ters n the third the
,
o ,
o

purifiers On the fourth th cen trifu g ls n d Vertical scourin g bran dusters

,
e
'

a a

for freein g the bran Of the flour remain in g in it o n the fifth sifters ,
.

Th grai n c lean in g departme n t is supp lied with hard n d soft wheat

e -
a

by the ban d co n veyors S B C an d HB C That wheat is hauled up by the

'
.

e levator an d of itself flows into the worm C 1 0 This worm distributes .

5 66 FLO UR MI LLI NG [ C HAR ix
558 FLOUR MI LLI NG [ CH A R 1x

sectio n s of a n American mill belo n gin g to H ecker Jo n es Je we ll in Ne w

York starte d in 1 9 0 8 n d worki n g most ly for export
, ,
a .

Th capacit y f the mi ll is 80 00 sacks of wheat grist per

e O

G 5 35
FI . .

give an idea how big that mi ll is it is su fficien t to say that there

,

are 1 1 5 four roller mill s 2 5 0 X 9 00 mm in size in it a n d it is brought

-

.
.

,
.

i nto operatio n by two compou n d steam e n gin es Of 1 800 n d 1 000 in di

-

c a t d horse power
e -

.
CH AP . Ix ] FLOU R MI LLI NG 569

The co n crete fou n datio n Of the mill is laid o n con crete pil es The .

u n dergrou n d floor serves for the boots of the elevators The first seco n d
.
, ,

an d t hird floors do duty as temporary stores for barre l s of flour the third
°

an d part l y the fourth floors bei n g for packi n g Th tran sportatio n of

. e

P15 . 5 34 .

sacks a n d barrel s to the seco n d a nd first floors is performed by

con veyors The fourth floor co ntain s the drivin g machin ery the fifth
. ,

is for roller mi lls the sixth for the t ran smissio n drive and for the
,

correspo n din g deflectio n of the spouts the seve nth a n d eighth

,

fOr purifiers nd c en trifuga

a l s,
the n i n th for sifters a n d the te n,th ‘

is the garret for star filters Th

. millin g departmen t (Fig 5 3 3 )
e .
5 70 FLOU R MI LL I NG [ C H AR Ix

is divided by a party wall i nto two separate mi lls (4 80 0 a nd 3 2 00 -

sacks ) .

Th grai n cl ean i n g departme n t (Fig 5 3 2 ) has a washi n g p l an t a nd

e -
.

roll er mill s o n the te n th floor for the reductio n of the broke n grain n d a

scree n in gs to feed On the fifth floor there are set the feed an d
.

part of the bran packers for the stock which is tran smitted from the
millin g departme n t .

Th l o n gitudi n al sectio n of the mill is S how n o n Fig 5 3 4

e The mi ll . .

is built accordin g to the firep roof type .

W orthy of n otice i the tru ly America n rapidity with which that mi ll

s

was erected Th co n structio n of the mill bui ldin g the elevator to it

. e ,

(for bushe l s of grai n ) a n d the fu l l equ ipme n t were e n ded in eight ,

months Th e buildin g was started n the 1 st of May 1 9 0 7 nd o n

. o , ,
a

2 nd Jan uary 1 9 0 8 the mi llin g operatio n was in fu l l swi n g

, ,
.

P L AN S OF MILL S

Th e l o n gitudin al a nd tran sversal

sectio n s of the mills we hav e examined
il lustrate to a certain exten t their ge n eral p l an But it is necessary to . .

give a ge n eral outlin e Of the distributio n of machin ery a n d also Of the

positio n of the prime motor .

I n Fig 5 3 5 may be see n the p l a n of the grou n d floor where A is the

.
,

grain clean in g departme nt B the millin g departmen t 0 the en gin e room

-

, , ,

a n d D the boi ler p l an t This p l an shows that the n ecessity of secu rin g
.

th mill again st fire compe l s th e co n structors to iso l ate the e n gin e room
e
.

from the mill proper The positio n of the e n gin e room poin t ed out is
.

co nve nie nt in so far that it oc cupies a small area together with the mill
buildin g B t its in co n ve n i en ce lies in the f act that a S eries Of roller
. u

mills by the wi ndows lookin g o n to the wall of the boiler room D is in ,

the dark I t is better to arran ge the boiler room down the l o n gitudi n al
.

axis of the e n gin e room if space permits , .

F urther it is n ecessary to iso l ate by a staircase the grai n c lean in g -

departmen t from the millin g to preve n t fires which ge n erally break , ,

out in the former from pe n etrati n g in to the l atter I n this p l an as well

, .
,

as in others we see that from the landin gs of the stairca se the doors ope n
,

into the mi llin g n d grain clean in g departme n ts That i the ordin ary
a -

. s

p lann in g in Russia n d in W ester n E urope I t is i n expedie n t howev er

a .
, ,

in case of fire because the flames ca n easi ly leap from door to door
,
FLOU R MI LLI NG
 —
CI I AP . Ix ] F LOU R MI LL I NG

FI G . 5 37 .
5 74 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR Ix

o ne should be guided by their accessibility from ll sides which guaran a ,

tees free in spectio n n d allows repairs to be do n e in it

a a s u .

W ith the third n d fourth floors (Fig 5 3 7 ) the rye mill n d the grai n
a . a

h Fl
S ix t o or .

F if t h F l o o r .

FI G . 5 38 .

'

elevator en d the fourth floor of a wheat mill are set the purifiers
. On ,

an d o n the same f a rye mil l the sifters

O the fifth nd sixth garret a

fl o o r of a wheat mi ll co n tai n sifters (Fig

s .

Th above p l an s represe n t the scheme for a n 80 0 sacks per day mill

e ,

drawn up by the firm of D o b ro vy N b ho lt for a S outh Russian mill

a z .
 F LOUR MI LL I NG [ CH AR x
The data of that tab le are take n from practice but we presume ,
'

that the quantities here are rou nded ff with great approximatio n O ,

sin ce accordin g to the tab le the costs Of o n klg of capacity for e .

small as well as for l arge wheat mills is o n e a n d the same 1 0 ,

marks whereas that cost ought to drop with a n i n crease in the capac ity
.

Of the mi ll .

Th truth of this stateme n t may be proved by K tten b a h other ’

e e c s

tab les where the costs of a fu ll equipme nt of a n automatic mill yield

,

in g o n e sack per 2 4 hours are give n .

TAB L E L XI I I
COS T OF E QU I PP I N G A W H E A T MI LI .

Cap acity p er D ay (2 4 H o u rs ) . Co s t p e r 1 S ac k p er D ay .

TAB L E L XI V
COS T OF E QU I P P I N G A RY E MI LL

Cap acity p er D ay (2 4 H o u rs ) . t
C o s pe r 1 S ac k per D ay
.

to 1 00 sacks to kl g .

200 4 00
4 00 80 0

This is more clearly shown in the diagram Fig 5 3 9 On the horizo ntal , . .

li n e the capacity of the mill per d y (from to kl g ) is

a .

marked o n the left han d side vertical (ordi n ate ) the total cost of equip
,
-

ment in 1 0 00 marks o n the right han d vertical the c ost per o n sack
,
-

per twe n ty four hours in marks Th u n interrupted lin e

-

. e

ru n n in g upwards den otes the diagram f cost of equippi n g a w heat O

mill ; the semi dotted lin e

-

the cost of equippin g a

rye mill .
c m . x ] F LO UR MI LLI NG 5 77

The di a gramdrawn in the broken lin e giv es the c ost of equip

me nt per sack per 2 4 hours for a wheat mill ,
a n d the dotted l i n e

1 00 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 200 0 0 0
f?
I

FI G 5 39
. .
—C p a a city per 2 4 h o u rs .

for a rye mill I t is clearly seen here that with the rise in the capacity
.

Of the mill the cost of equipme n t per u n it of capacity drops .

11

CAL CU L ATI ON XP E NS E S
OF W OR KIN G E

Mo tive B o wen —B efore defi n in g the cost of the moti v e power which
c o n stitutes the main e xp en d itu re in workin g the mi ll the data of the ,

.
—C p ity f Mill
FI G 54 0 . a ac o .

power con sumption in a ccordan ce with the mill capacity shou l d be n oted

briefly .

I n Fig 5 4 0 we hav e a diagram of power co n sumptio n in effecti v e

.

horse power for automatic wheat mills of from

-
to
2 O
5 78 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ C H AR x

kl g capacity The u ninterrupted lin e

. . represe nts the out ~

put of the motor the hor se power of which is S hown n the left
,
-
o

han d side ordin ate up to 5 5 0 H P the semi dotted lin e in dicates the
‘

power co n sumptio n for 1 00 kl g per d ay Th l ast di agram shows that . . e

with the in crease in the capacity of the mill the power co n sumptio n to a

0 40 00 0

FI G 5 4 1
. .
—C a p a city o f Mill .

u n it of capacity drops from H P for a kl g per day mi ll a l most . . .

to H P for a mi ll with
. . klg capacity . .

The diagram Fig 5 4 1 giv es the power co n sumptio n of a n automati

, .
,
c

rye mi ll
Th diagrams exami n ed represe n t the power co n sumptio n in automati
e c

high grin din g mills accordin g to German data .

I n Russia the motive power depe n di n g o n the character of th grin d ,

e

I ng
, s expressed in the fo ll owi n g tab l e
i

nLH ifiI
V
I

u il b el P I P O O9 5
t
4 O
.
_
i I c
Ki nd of G ri nd i n g .

S ingle gr n din g i

S coured
Break
Bolted
S ifted
D ressed
High wheat

Itshould be n oted here th at the power con sumpti on for high

i n c ludes al so the con sumption for electric lightin g .
5 80 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR X
'

W hen choosin g a motor for the en gin e p l ant o n e has pre viously to
solv e the question con cernin g i ts power which is fou n d by summin g ,

up the total power required by all the mill s an d mach in es of the given
p l an t I n some cases when an e nl argement of the output is expected t o
.
, ,

the in itial power a reser ve is added which d iscou nts the presupposed ,

e nl argeme n t The desirability an d in some pl an ts the n ecessity of a

. , ,

reserve motor is al so take n in to con sideratio n .

All the d ifficu lty howe v er of sel ecti n g a motor l ie s n o t in the questio n
, ,

of the power in conn ectio n with the reser v e motor or the presuppo sed
dev el opmen t of the produce but in the selection of the type Of motor
,
.

The variety of motors Offered by moder n tech ni cs makes the choic e

of a type of motor sometimes a rather difficult problem B esides the .

questio n s of a special character co nn ected with l ocal co n ditio ns a nd

,

peculiarities of the giv en p l ant there comes up the questio n of a correct

,

econ omic cal cul ation of the worki n g expe n ses .

I n tech ni cal literature o n is Ofte n war n ed again st drawin g up ge n eral

e

formulae and recipes accordin g to which in a most simpl e man n er the

, , ,

suitability of th is or that motor e n gi n e c a n be fou n d Nev erthel ess the .

attempt to gen eralise the data which to a certain degree el ucidate the
,

above mention ed question s cann ot be regarded as in expedie nt

-

, .

At such factories —as some of the chemical fabrics breweries a n d saw , ,

mill s where besides the motive power the en gi n e house has al so to

,
-

supp ly the cal oric e n ergy for the heatin g sources which ser v e for dryin g
a n d other purposes —the questio n co n cer ni n g the sel ectio n of a motor

e n gin e is solv ed simply in fav our Of the steam p l ant an d in these case s ,

the prob lem of the econ o mi c cal cul atio n is co n siderably s imp lifi ed .

I n su Ch cases where the power p l an t has to sup l y o n ly the motiv e

p
power the circumstan ces resultin g from l oc al co n dition s a nd the char
,
-

acter of productio n are m ost esse n tial .

The re liability an d simp licity of the work mus t be co n sidered the ,

quantity of space occupied by the en gin e the possibility of e nl argin g ,

the output rapid startin g the possibility of o v erloadin g an d of the best

, ,

adjustability as well as the dan ger inv olv ed in different respects by

,

the operatio n .

I t is ev ide n t that the coexiste n ce o f all these co n di tio n s or e v e n o nly

of sev eral in o n e motor is impossible and the s olutio n has always the ,

char acter of a compromise it bein g n ecessary at the same tim e to recko n

,

with the workin g exp e n ses of some o ne or other kin d of p l ant .

W h e n estimatin g the workin g expen ses there comes in to relief the ,

questio n of the u n interrupted or in termittent work of the motor which ,

CH AP . x ] F LOU R MI LLI NG 5 81

greatly in fluen ces the correl atio n of the direct a nd in direct expen ses in
operatio n .

Tur n in g n o w to the questio n of summi n g up the workin g e xpe n ses we ,

must n ote that the in direct expen ses which con sist Of the expe n ses in
,

respect of depreciatio n of the pl ant an d of the interest for the deductio n

of the capital expe n ded o n the p l ant These are recko ned out in .

each separate case in accordan ce with the en gin e supp lier s co n ditio n s ’

of credit .

W he n choosin g a motor it has to be decided first how man y days in

the year the mill will be workin g W hether it will ru n co ntin uousl y day
,

a n d ni ght duri n g the week with a halt o n S u n day or work days o nly
, , .

To defi n e the effi cie n cy of a n y particul ar motor o n e must recko n out

()
1 the first cost and ()
2,
the worki n g e xpe n ses .

I n cal cu l ati n g the first cost o ne h a s to fin d out

1 The price of grou n d occupied by the power p l ant
. .

2 Th costs of the power p l an t a n d its outfit

. e .

3 Th costs of the motor a n d its s ttin g in c ludin g the costs of th

. e e ,
e

fo u n d atl o n erectio n a n d the trial starti n g

, ,
.

The worki n g expe n ses shoul d be div ided i n to two groups

. con sistin g of the foll owin g cl asses

A I ndireet E x p en ses ,

1 I n terest for the price of the site occupied by the power

.

(5
4 to 5 per
2 I n terest o n the capital spe n t o n the bui ldin g a n d full
.

to 6 per
w D epreciatio n of the buildin g (2 3; to 3 per
D epreciatio n of the p l an t (8 to 1 0 per
-
e

u I n suran ce premium (2 to 2 5 per

a R epairs of the buildin g (5 to g per

q R epairs a n d upkeep of the pl ant (1 4 to 2 per

B . D irect E xpen ses

1 . Cost
of fuel .

2 E n gi n eer a n d the rest of the staff atte n di n g the p l an t

.
.

3 E xpe n se s in l ubricatio n a n d cl ean in g Of the p l an t

.
.

I n this way k n owi n g the costs of the p l an t a n d the workin g expe n se s ,

the efficien cy of this or that motor may be define d .

The main expe n diture for an e n gin e p l an t is the cost of fuel Ther e .
»

fore to decide upo n the kin d of motor for the pro j ected mill o ne m ust ,
5 82 F LOUR MI LLI NG [ CH AR x
kn ow the prices of di ffere n t fuel s Further o n shou ld i n quire of the
.
, e

firms the price Of motors n d boilers suitab le to the give n locality ;

a

if a steam p lan t is in view the price of fou n datio n for a n ormal

,

g rou n d a n d outfit as we l l as the guara n teed expe n ses per hour power -

Hav i n g a ll these data in han d it is easy to defi n e what motor w ill be most
,

advan tageous takin g into co n sideratio n all direct an d i n direct expe n ses
, .

W hen testi n g the motor strictest atte n tio n shou l d be paid that the ,

g ua ra n teed co n sumptio nO f fue l is correct F r that

. purpose
o it is b est
to call in a disinterested expert wh will subject the motor to a trial n d
,
o a

t est its power a n d co n sumptio n of fue l per horse power per hour -
.
5 84 I ND E X

P o rc el a in ro l l s ,
2 12 . S to n es s ee G R I N D S TO N E S .

P u ri yin gf m a c in e s h , 39 2 ca p a city o f, S y s te m s of m il lin g 4 89 , .

42 0 .

Tra n sp o rta tio n o f s to c k , 44 5 .

R eel -
s e p a ra t o rs , 6 4 3 36 ,
Trie u rs 8 3 , .

b
R o in so n
’
s c y cl o -

p n e u m a tic s ep a ra t o r, 74 ,

42 3 Un d er ru n n er m ill s
-

, I 83 .

R o ll er m ill s , 37 , 2 09 typ e s o f, 2 58 Upp er ru n n er m il l s

-

, 1 90 .

c a p a ci ty o f, 2 99 v e n ti l a tio n o f 4 3 4 .

V til ti f m ill 4 34
,

R o lls u sed in ro l l er m il l s d es cri ed 2 I 0 b . en a on o s, .

V rti l m il l 8 7
, , ,

Rome a n cie n t , m il l in g a p p a ra tu s and e ca s, I .

V ib r m t p l ift r
,

m et h o ds in , I2 . o -
o or ans e s, 68 .

R y e , g rin d in g sy s tem s 52 7 , .

W a ter -
m il l s , typ e of m il l d e scri b ed by
S ca l es , 4 76 . V i tr u v iu s , I 6 ; an b
Ara ia n m il l , I 7 ; a

S co u rin g m a c in es h , I oo . B as hkirm il l , I 8 .

S ec k Br os .
’
a sp ira to r, 78 . W h ea t , t h e g ra in d es cri b ed , 41 c h em ica l

S iev e b lt-
o ers , 7o . co m p o si tio n o f, 47 ; v a rie tie s} o f, 4 8 ;

f
S i tin g , d e scri b ed , 61 c o n s tru c tio n of c o m p o sitio n of E n g lis and
.
S c o t ch h
si fti ng m a c in es h , 6 3 , 33 5 si fti ng a ft er v a rie ti e s , 50 of f o reig n v a rie ties , 52
g rin d in g 3 1 6 , . of A m erica n v a rie tie s , 54 .

S p o u ts d escri ed 44 5
, b , . W in n o w in g , d e scri b ed ; w inn o w in g ma
S t ea m m il l s in tro d u ctio n
-
, and d ev el o p m en t c hi n es , 72 .

o f, 2 7 .

S t o n e m ill s , ca p a city o f, 1 90 . Z ig za g s ep a ra t o r, 80 .

P ri n ted by Mo nm so x GI BB Lu m en E din bu rg h
,
 S H O RT T I T L E C A T A L O G -

m nblit atiunz uni: i mportatiuns

S C I E N T I FI C E N GI N E E R I N G

B O O KS

h
T is l is t in c l u d es

the te c h n ic a l pu b li c a t io n s of t h e fo l lo w in g E n g l is h b h
p u lis e rs

s c o rr, GR E E NW O OD co . J AME S M UNR O co L td .

C O NS T A B L E & C O M P A N Y , L t d . T E C H NI C A L P UB L I S H I N G c o

E L E C T R I C I A N P R I NT I N G P U B L I S H I NG C O .

fo r W h om D . V a n No s t ra n d C o m p a n y a re A m e ric a n a g ents .
 D E C E M BE R , 1 9 1 7 .

S HORT TITL E
= CATA LOG
O F TH E

P u b l ic a t io n s a nd l m p o rta t io n s
OF

D V A N NOS TRA ND C O MP A NY
.

2 5 P A RK P LAC E , N . Y .

P ric e; m a r/(e d w i t h a n cu t e rh k a re , NE T .

A l l b i n d i n g; a re in c l o t"
) u n l eu
'
o t h e rw is e no ted .

A bbott , A V . The Electrical Tra n sm issio n of E n ergy. 8 vo ,

A Treati se on Fu el .
(S cien ce S eries No . 1 6 mo , 0 so
Testin g Ma ch in es .
(S c ien ce S eries No . I 6m o , o 50
Ada m , P . Pra ctica l B kb oo in din g . Tra n s b y T . . E . Ma w 12 m o, *2
50
Adam s , H T e ory and P ra ctice in D e sign in g
. h . . 8 vo , *2
50
Adam s , H C
*
S ewag e o f S ea Co a st To wn s
. . 8vo 2 o o

D i trict
.

Ada m s, J W
S ew ers a nd. ra in s for P o p u l o u s
. D s s . 8 v0 , 2 50
h
—D
Adl er, A A . . T eo ry of Eng in e ering D raw in g . .
8vo , *2 oo
*
P rincipl e s o f P arall el P ro j ectin g lin e raw in g 8vo , 1 oo

k
Ai m a n , C M . . Ma n u res a n d th e Prin cipl es o f Ma n u rin g 8 vo , 2 50
Aitk en, W . M anu al of th e Tel ep h one .

d Al b e , E E F , Co ntem po a
’
. e . s . r ry Ch m i try
Al exa n der, H J
E l em enta ry E l ectrica l ng in eerin g
. . E . mo, 1 2

All a n, WS tren g t of eam s Under Tran s verse Lo a ds

’

. h B .
(S cien ce S eries
No . 1 6m o ,
T h eo ry o f Arc h es .
(S cien ce S eries No .

All en , H . Mo dern P o w er Ga s Pro du cer Pra ctice an d Applicatio n s .

-
12 mo, *2
so
Anderso n , J W . . Pro spe cto r s ’
1 2 mo , 1 50
An dé s, L . V eg eta l e b F a ts and Oil s . . . 8 vo, *
5 oo

An im a l Fa ts a nd Tra n s by C S a lter
Oil s . . . S W ,
*
4 oo

Dryin g Oil B s, o il ed Oil , a n d S o lid a n d Li u id q D ri r e s 8 vo , *

5 00

Iro n C o rro sio n , An ti -

f o u lin g a n d An ti -
c o rro s ive P a in ts . Tra ns . by
C S a l ter *
. . . 8 vo , 4 cc

Oil Col ors, an d P rint ers ’

I nk . T ra n s . by A . Mo rris a nd H .

Ro b son

Trea tm en t of P a per fo r S pecia l Pu rpo ses . Tra n s by C S al ter

. .

An drew s , E S Rein f
—Th
. . o rced Co ncrete Co n s tru ction
D
—F
eo ry a nd esig n of S tru ctu re s
u rt h er b
P ro l em s in th e T h eo ry a n d D es ig n o f
—Th
m

g th Ma terial s
'

e S tren of

An drew s, E . S .
,
a nd Hey w o o d, H . B . Th e Ca l cu l u s for E n g in eers . rz m o ,

An nu a l Re
p orts o n th e P ro g ress o f C em istry h . T w el ve V ol u m es n ow

rea dy . V o l I , 1 9 0 4 , V o l XI I , 1 9 1 4
. . . . 8 vo , ea c h ,
*
2 oo
 V A N NO S T RA N D C O S S H O RT T I T L E CAT A L O G
’

4 D . .

B arnard J H The Naval Mil itiaman s Gu ide

, . .
’
. I om o , l ea t er h
B arnard Maj o rJ G R o ta ry Mo tio n (S cien ce S eries No
, . . . .
90 . 1 6 m Q,
B arnes J B El em ents of Mil itary S k etching
,
. .
e o,

B arru s, G H . . E ng ine Te t s s . 8vo,

B rwi
a se , S . The P u rifi ca tio n S e wag e of I zmo ,

Ba terden , J . R . Tim er b
( estm in ster S eries )
. W . . 8 vo ,
B a t es, E . L, . and C arl esw ort , F h P ra ctical h . Math em atics and

Ge om etry 1 2 111 0 ,

P art I . P reliminary an d El em entary Cou rse

P art 11 . Advanced Co u rs e
P ractical M at em atics h . 1 2 mo ,
P ractica l G eo m etry a n d Gra p ics h I e m o,
B a tey , J Th e S cience o f W rk M a n a g em ent m o,
— St
. o s 12

eam B oil er s an d C m b ti
o us on I z m o,
B a y o n et Tra in ing Ma nu al 1 6 m o,

B ea dl e, C . C h a pters o n P a perm a in g k . F ive V o l u m es I z m o , ea c h,

B ea u m o n t, R . Co l o r in W o ven es ig n D 8 vo ,
Fin ish ing of Te xtil e Fa brics 8 vo ,
—S t a n dard Cl ot h s . 8v0 ,
B ea u m o n t, W W . . Th e S tea m -
E n g in e I n dica to r . . 8 vo ,
B echh ol d, H Col l oids in . B iol ogy a nd Medicin e . Tra n s . by G J . .

B u l l ow a (I n P ress ) .

B kwith
ec ,
A . P o ttery 8 vo , pa per,
B edell , F .
, an d P ierce, C A . . D ire ct an d Altern ating Cu rrent M anu al .

8 v0 , 4 0 0

B eech F D y ei g of Cotton F b ric

, . n a s 8vo ,

D y i g f W l n F bric
e n o oo e a s . . 8 vo ,
B gtr p J Th S lid V lv
e u , . e e a e . 8 vo ,
B egg s , S tre s se s in Railway G irders and B ridg es
G E . .
(I n P res s ) .

B E B
— (S cien ce S eries No
en der, C Co ntin u ou s ridg es
. . . . 1 6m o,
P rop ortion s of P iu s u sed in ri dg es (S cien ce S B . eries No .
4 .
)
I 6m o ,
B go gh G D B r
en u (Met l l urg y S rie )
, . . a ss . a e s .
(I n P ress ) .

B ennett H G The Manu f ctu r of Le th er

, . a e a 8vo,
B ern th sen , '
A . A Text b k oo of Or ga n ic C h em istry. Tra n s . by G .

M Gow a n ’
Iz m o, *
3 00

B ersc h , J Ma nu fa ctu re o f Min eral

. a nd La k e P ig m en ts . Tra n s by A C . . .

Wright . 8 vo ,
B rti L E M ri B il r Tr by L S R b rt n
e n, . . a ne o e s. a n s. . . o e so 8 vo ,
B v ridg J P p rm k r P k t B o k
e e e, . a e a e
’
s oc e o 12 m o,
B innie S ir A Rain f ll Re ervoir d W ter S u ppl y
, . a s s an a 8 v0 ,
B in C F M nu l of P r cti l P otting
n s, . . a a a ca . . 8 v0 ,
Th P tt r Cr ft e o e
’
s a 1 2 111 0 ,

B irchm o re W H Interpretatio n o f Gas Analysis

, . . 12 mo ,
B lain e R G Th e Cal cu l u s an d I ts Applicatio ns
, . .
. 12 mo ,
B l ak e W H B rew ers V a de M ecu m
,
’
. . 8vo ,
B l a sda l e, W . C . Q u a n tit a tive C h em i ca l An al y si s .
(V a n No stran d s
’

T ex tb k oo s .
) I z m o,
Bligh , W . G . Th e P ractical D e sign of Irrig atio n W or s k . 8vo ,
 V A N N O S T RA N D CO S S H O RT T I T L E CA TA L O G
’
D . .

B lo c h ,
L . S cien ce o f Ill u min atio n Tran s by . . W . C . Clinto n 8vo , *
2 so
Bl o k A , . I ll u m in ation a n d Artifici a l Lig ting h 12 m0, 1 2 5
Bliich er, H . M o dern I n du strial C h em istry. Tran s b y .
J . P . Millington .

*
8 V O. 7 5 °

Blyth ,
A . W . Fo o ds : T h eir C o m po sitio n an d Analysis 8vo , 7 so
P o iso n s : T h eir Ef e cts an d f D etectio n 8vo , 7 so
Bdckm ann , F . C ellu lo id 12 m0 , *
2 so
B o dm er G R , . . Hydrau lic M o to rs an d Tu r in es b 1 2 m0 , 5 oo

B o il eau J T , . . Traverse Ta l es b 8vo , 5 oo

B onney , G . E . The E
l ectro p l a ters Ha n d
’ -
b k oo 12 m0 , r so

B o o th N G u ide to th e Rin g spinnin g Fram e

, .
-
12 mo , *
1 2 5
B o o th W H Water S o ften in g an d Treatm ent
, . .
'

. 8vo , *
2 so
S u p er e a ters an d h S h
u p er ea tin g an d
’

T h eir Co ntro l 8vo , *

1 so
B o ttch er ,
A . Cran e s : T h eir Co n stru ctio n , M ech anical E q u ipm e n t an d

W rki o Tran s b y A To lh au s en
ng . . . . .
4 to ,
*
10 oo

B o ttl er M , . M o dern B l ea c in g Ag ents Tran s b y C S h . . . al ter . . 12 m0 , *

2 so
B o tto n e S , . R M agn eto s fo r Au to m o ilists
. b . 12 m0 , *
1 oo

B o u lto n S B , . . P res ervatio n o f Tim b er .

(S cience S erie s No . . 1 6m o , 0 so
B o u rcart, E . I n s e cticide s , F u n gicides an d W e ed kill ers . . 8vo , *
4 so
Bo u rg o u g n o n , A P ysical P ro l e m s
. h
(S cience S erie s No b . . 0 so
B o urry, E . Tre atis e o n C eram ic I n du stries Tran s by A . . . B . S earl e .

*
8 vo , 5 oo

B o wie A J Jr A P ractical Treatis e o n Hydrau lic M inin g

, . .
, . . . 8vo , 5 oo

B o wl es 0 Tabl e s o f Co mm o n Ro ck s (S cien ce S eries No

, . . . 0 so
B o ws er E A El em entary Treati s e o n An alytic G eo m etry
, . . 12 m0 , 1 75
El em entary Tre atis e on th e D ifi erential an d Inte gral Cal cu l u s . 1 2 m0 , 2 2 5
El em entary Tre atis e on An alytic M ec an ics h 1 2 m0 , 3 oo

El em en tary Treatis e on Hydro m e c anics -

h . 1 2 m0 , 2 so
A Tre a tis e on Ro o f s an d B ridg es 1 2 m0 ,
*
2 2 5
B o yco tt G W M Co m presse d Air Wo rk
,
. . . an d D iving 8vo , *
4 . oo

Brag g E M M arin e Engin e D esign

, . . 12 m0 , *
2 oo
D e ig n s of Ma rine E ng in es a n d Au x il iaries 8 vo, *
3 oo

B rain ard ,
F R . Th e S extant . .
(S cience S erie s No . 1 6m o ,
Br a ss ey s
’
Na val Annu al for 1 915 . W ar E dition . 8 vo ,

B rig gs ,
R .
, an d W o lff, A . R . S team H eating -
.
(S cience S eri es No .

1 6m o , so
0

B rig ht , C . Th e Li f e S to ry of S ir C h a rl es T il s o n B rig ht 8y o , *
4 so

Bris l e e ,
T I ntro du cti o n to th e S.tu dy o f J . Fu el .
(Ou tlin e s of In du s
trial C em i stry ) h .

B ro adfo o t ,
S . K . Mo to rs : S e co n dary B atterie s .
(In stallatio n M an u al s
S eries ) . 12 m0, >t
o 75
a
.

B r g h t on
ou ,
H H . . El ectric Cr ne s an d Hoists *
9 00

B ro wn G ,
. H e al t y Foun datio n s h .
(S cience S erie s No 8o . . 0 so
B row n ,
H . I rri g a tion . .
*
s 00

B row n H Ru bb er 8 vo, 00

—W
.
. .
,

. A . P ortl a nd Cem ent . . 8vo, 3 00

B rown ,
W m . N . D ipping ,
B u rnish ing ,
Lacq u ering a nd B ronzing
B r ss Ware a . .
. . 12 m o, *
1 2 5
Handb ook on J ap anning m0 , *1
-
12 so
 V A N NO S T RA N D C O S S H O R T T I T L E CA TA L O G
’

6 D .
.

B row n ,
W m . N . Th e Art of En a m el l i ng on Metal 12 m0 ,
Ho u s e e co rating an d P ain ting D 12 m0 ,
Histo ry o f D eco rative Art 1 2 m0 ,
W or s k h p Wri o n kl e s 8vo ,
B row n C L Fitti g d E re ti ng f E g i
e, . . n an c o n n es .
. 8 vo ,

B row R E W ter M t r (S i n e S ri
n e, . . a e e s . c e c e es No . 1 6 m o,

B r e E M P r F o o d Te t
uc ,
. . u e s s . 12 m0 ,
D tection of Comm on Food Ad l t r t
e u e an s 12 m0 ,
Bru nn er ,
R . M an u f actu re of Lu rican ts , S b h oe P o l is h es an d Lea t er h
D r ssin g e s Tran s by C S al ter
. . . 8vo ,
Bu el , R H . S a f ety V al ve s (S cien ce S eri e s No . . 1 6m o ,
B k
.

B u nkl ey J W , . . Mil itary an d Nava l Recog nitio n oo 1 6 m o,

B rl ey G W L th e
u , . . a s, T h eir Co n stru ctio n a nd Op era ion t re m o ,

B urn ide W B ridg

s , . e F o u n da tio n s 12 m0,
B urstall , F . W . En ergy D ia gram fo r Gas . With T e xt 8vo ,
D iagram . S o l d s epara tely

B urt ,
W . A . Key to th e S o l ar C o m pas s
B u sk ett, E W F ire A ssa y ing ”

ha i
. .

B u tl er H , .
J . M o to r B o die s an d C ss s

B yers H , . G .
, an d Knig h t , H G . . No te s on Q u al ita tive Anal ys is .

Cain , W . B rief Co u rs e in th e Cal cul u s . 12 m0 ,

-
E 1a s tic Arc es h
(S cien ce S eries No . . 1 6 m o,

M a xim u m S tre s s es .
(S cien ce S erie s No . 1 6m o ,
P ractical D e sign in g R etain in g of W all s .
(S cien ce S erie s No .

6mo ,
'

Th eo ry of S te el -
co n crete Arc h es an d of V a u lte d S tru ctu re s .

(S cien ce S eries No . I 6mo ,

T h eo ry of V o u s s o ir Arc h es .
(S cie n ce S erie s No . 1 6mo ,
S ym b o lic Alg e ra b .
(S cience S e ries No .

C arp enter, F . D . G eo grap hical S u rveyin g .

(S cien ce S erie s No .

C arp enter, R C . .
, an d Di e d eric h s, H . In tern al C o m b u s tio n En g in e s 8vo ,
Carter, H A (Rh ea ), Ch in a G ra s s
. . Rami e 12 m0 ,
M o dern Fl ax, H em p , an d J u te S pinnin g
—
C arter, H R . . . 8vo ,
B 1eaching , D y eing and F inishing of F a brics . . . 8 vo,

Cary, E R . . S o l u tio n o f Railro a d P ro l em s w it th e S lide R u l e b h . . 1 6m o ,

Ca sl er, M . D . S im p l ifi ed R ein o rced Co n crete Ma t em a tics f h re m o ,

Cat h cart, W . L . M a ch in e D e sig n . P art I F a stening s . 8 vo ,

Ca th cart, W . L .
, an d Ch afi e e , J . 1 . El em ents o f G raphic S tatics . . . 8vo ,
S h G raph ics
ort Co u rs e
'

In 12 m0 ,
Cave n , R M , an d Lan d er, G D . . . S ystematic I no rg anic C h e mis try 12 . m0 ,
Ch l kl y A P D i l E g i
a e , . . es e n n es 8vo ,
Ch m b r M th m ti l T bl ’
a e s a e a ca a es . 8vo ,
Ch mb r G F
a A tr my
e s, . . s ono . 1 6m o ,
Ch p p l E
a F iv F ig r M th m ti
e , . e u e a e a cal Ta l es b 8vo ,
Ch r k M h i l T h l gy
a n oc ,
ec a n ca ec n o o 8vo ,
Ch rp ti r P Tim b r
'

a en e , . e . 8vo ,
Ch tl y H
a P ri ipl
e d D ig
, . nc e s an es ns of Aero plan es .
(S cien ce S e rie s

No . 1 2 6) I 6m o ,

Ho w to Us e W a ter P o w er 12 m0 ,
G yro sta tic B al an cing 8vo ,
 V A N NO S T RA N D C O S S H O R T T I T L E CA T A L O G
’
8 D . .

Co well , W B m0 , *
. . Pu re Air, Ozo n e , an d W ater . . 12 2 oo
Cra ig , J
W , . . an d W o o dw a rd, W . P . Q u estion s a nd A n sw ers A b ou t

E l ectrical App ara tu s 12 m 0 , l ea th er,

Crai g , T . M o tio n of a S o lid in a Fu el .

(S cience S erie s No .

W ave an d V o rtex M o tio n .

(S cience S erie s No . 1 6m o ,
Cram p, W . C o ntinu o u s Curre nt M ac in e D esig n h 8vo ,
Creh o re, A . C My stery o f Ma tter a nd nergy
. E 8vo ,

Cre e dy, F S ingl e P a s e Co mm u tato r M o to rs

. h 8vo ,
Cro c k er, F B El e ctric Lig ting
. Two V o lu m e s
. h . . 8vo .

V ol . I . Th e G en erating P l an t
V o l II . . D istri b
S ystem s an d Lam ps
u ting

Cro c k er, F B . .
, an d Aren dt, M El ectric M o to rs . 8vo ,
Cro ck er, F B . .
,
an d W h eel er, S . S . Th e M anag em ent o f El ectrical M a

Cro s s , C F , B evan , E J , an d S in dall , R

. . . . . W W . o o d P u lp an d I ts Applica
tio n s ( estm inster . W 8vo , .

Cro ssk ey , L R l em enta ry P ersp ective

. . E 8vo ,

Cro s sk ey, L R . .
, an d T h J
aw , . Advan ce d P ersp ective 8vo ,
C u ll ey, L J
T e o ry o. c es (S cien ce S eries No
. h f Ar h . . 1 6m o ,
h
Cu s ing , H C , Jr, a nd Ha rri so n, N. Central S ta tio n . . .

D a do u rian , H M Anal ytical M e c anics . h 1 2 mo ,

*
3 oo
t th
.

Da n a , R T Han d o o of Co n stru cti o n p l a n

. . b k 12 m 0 , l ea er,
*
5 00

b
D an y, A Natu ral Ro c Asp al ts an d itum en s
. k h B 8vo , *
2 so
Daven p ort , C Th e oo ( estm in ster S eri es . B k W . .
) 8 vo , *
2 00

D a vey , N . Th e Ga s T rb i
u ne . 8 vo , *
4 00

D avies , F H . . El e ctri c P o w er an d Tractio n 8vo , *

2 00

Foundatio n s an d M a chin ery Fixin g .

(I ns tall atio n M anu al S erie s .
)
1 6m o , *
I oo
Deerr, N . S u g ar Ca ne 8 vo , 8 00

D eite , C . M anu al
Tran s b y S T in g of S o apm a king . . . . K 4 to ,
*
5 oo

D e l a Co u x, H Th e I n du strial Us e s o f a te r Tran s b y A
. W . . . M o rris . 8vo , *
4 so
D el M ar, A W
El ectric P o w er C o n du cto rs
. . 8vo , *
2 oo

D enny, G A . . D e ep l evel -
Min es of th e R an d 4 to ,
*
10 oo

D iam o n d D rilling fo r G o l d .
*
5
D e Ro o s , J . D C . . Link ag e s .
(S cien ce S eries No . 1 6m o , 0 so
D e rr, W . L
S ig nal Op eratio n
. B lo ck O lo n gb 12 m0 , *
1 so
M aintenan ce o i W ay En g in eerin g - -
.
(I n P rep a ra tio n ) .

D esa in t, A T ree Hu n dred S a des a n d Ho w t o

. h h Mix T h em 8 vo , *
8 00

D e V aro n a , A . S G a ses
ew er (S cien ce S erie s No . . 0 50
D evey, R . G . M ill an d Fa cto ry Wirin g (Install atio n M anu al s S . eries .
)
12 m0 , *
1 00
Dib din, W J . . P u ri fi ca tion of S ew a g e a nd W a ter 8 vo , 6 50

Dichm ann , Carl . B a sic Op en H e art -

h St e el P ro ce ss 1 2 m0 ,
*
3 so
D ieteric h K , . An alys is o f R es in s , B al s a m s , a n d Gu m R e sin s 8vo , *
3 00
D il w ort h E , . C S t eel Ra il w a y
.
4 to .
*
4 00

D ing er, Lieu t H C . . . Care an d Op eratio n of Naval M achin ery . . 12 m0 , *

2 00

D ixo n , D . B . M achinist s ’
S team E ng in eer s P ractical Cal cu l ato r
an d
’
.

1 6 m o , m o ro cco , 1 2 5
D odg e , G . F . D iag ram s for Desig ning Rein orced Co n crete S tru ctu res, f
ol io, f
 D V A N NO S T RA N D CO S S H O R T T I T L E C A TA L O G
’
. .

D om m ett, W E . . Moto r Car Mech a nism 12 m0,

D o rr, B . F . Th e S u rveyo r s
’
G u ide an d Poc k et Ta l e b b ok
-
o .

6 m o , m o ro cco ,
—
1

D raper, C H El em en tary Te xt o o b k o f Lig ht H e at an d S ou nd m0 ,

—
. .
, . . 12
Hea t a n d th e P rin cip l es o f T h erm o -
dy n a m ics . 1 2 m0,
D ro n, R . W . Mining F o rm u l a s . . . 1 2 m0,
D u b b el , H . Hig h P o w er Ga s E n g in es . 8 v0 ,

D u m e s n y, P .
, an d No yer, J W . oo d P ro du cts , Di s till a te s , a n d E xtra cts .

8 v0 ,
D u n ca n , W . G .
, an d P en m a n , D . Th e El ectrical E q u ipm e n t o f C o llierie s .

8 vc ,
D kl ey W
un , . G . D es ig n of Ma ch in e El em en ts . 8 vo ,

B b k h
'

D u n stan , A E . .
, an d Th o l e , F . . T . Te xt oo of P ra ctical C e m is try .

m0 ,
mH W
1 2
D u rh a , , . S aw s

h
D u t ie , A L . . D e co rative G l as s P ro ces s e s (W es tm in s ter S . erie s .
) 8vo , .

D wig t, H h . B . Tra n sm is s io n Lin e F o rm u la s 8 vo ,

Dy s on, S . S . P ractical Te s ting of Ra w M aterial s . 8 vo ,
D ys o n , S . S .
, an d Cl ar k so n , S . S . C h e m ical W rk o s 8vo ,

Ec lc es, W . H . Wir l T el eg ra p y a n d T el ep o n y
e es s h h .

E ck , J . Lig t, h Ra dia tio n a n d I l l u m ina tion T ra n s . . b y P a u l Hog n er,

8 vo ,
E ddy , H T . . Max im u m S tres s es u n der Co n cen tra ted Lo a ds . . . 8 vo ,
E ddy ,
L . C . La b o ra o ry t Ma nu a l of Al terna ting 1 2 m0,
E del m a n , P I nventio n s . and P a tents . ra m o ,

E dg cu m b e, K . I n du stria l El ectrical Mea su rin g I ns tru m en ts . . 8 vo ,

(I n P res s .
)
E dl er, R . S w itc h es a nd S w itc g ea r h . Tra n s . by P h . La u b h ac . . . 8 vo ,

Eis sl er, M Th e M etallu rgy o f G o ld

. 8vo ,
Th e M etallu rgy o f S ilver . 8vo ,
Th e M etall u rg y o f Arg en tif ero u s Lea d 8vo ,
A Han db o o k o n M o d ern E xpl o s ives 8v0 ,
k
E in , T C ater P ip e a n d S
. W ew a g e Dis c h arg e D iagram s f o lio ,
El ectric LI g h t Car o n s, Ma n u b f a ctu re o f . . 8 vo ,

Elio t, C . W .
, an d S to rer, F H . . Co m p en dio u s M an u al of Q u alita tive

C h emical An alysis 12 m0 ,
Ell i s, C . Hy drog ena tio n of Oil s 8 vo , (I n P res s ) .

El l i s, G . Mo dern T ec h n ical Drawi ng .

. 8 vo ,

E nnis , W m D . . Lins e e d Oil an d Ot h er S e e d Oil s . 8vo ,

h S V O,
—
Appli e d T erm o dyn am ics .
.

Fl yin g To day M a chin es 1 2 m0 ,

V apo rs fo r H eat E ng in es 12 mo ,
Erm en , F A W
M aterial s Us e d in S izing
. . .
8vo ,
E rw in, M Th e U n ivers e a nd th e Atom
.
1 2 m0 ,

E van s , C A M acadamiz e d Ro ads

. . (I n P ress ) .

Ewing , A . J . M agnetic Indu ctio n in Iron .

8va,

Fa irie, J Notes Lea d

—N t
. on

o es on P ott ery Cl a y s
 V A N NO S T RA N D C O S S H O RT T I T L E CA TA L O G
’
10 D . .

Fairl ey, W .
, an d An dre, Geo .
J . V entil atio n of Co al M in es .
(S cience

S erie s No .

Fairweat h er, W .Fo reig n an d C o l o nial P aten t Law s

C . 8vo ,
Fal k , M S . . Cem ent Morta rs a n d Co ncretes 8vo ,

Fanning , J . T Hydrau l ic an d
. W a ter su ppl y -
E ngin e erin g 8vo ,
Fay, I W . . Th e Co al tar Co l o rs -
8vo ,
F rn b h R L
e ac , . . G lu e an d G el atin e 8vo ,
F irth J B P r,
. . a ctical h
P y sica l C h em is try 1 2 m0 ,

Fi h r E
sc Th e , . e P reparatio n of Organi c C o m po u n ds . Tran s b y R V . . .

S tanfo rd 12 m0 ,
Fis h J , C L . Letterin g o f o r in g D rawin g s
. . W k b
O l o ng 8vo ,
h
Ma t em a tics o f th e P a p er Lo ca tio n of a Ra il roa d . .
p a p er, 1 2 m 0 ,
Fis h er, H . K . C .
, an d D ar y, b W . C . S u bm arin e b
Ca l e Te s tin g . 8vo ,
Fl eis c m ann , h W . Th e B o o k of th e D airy . Tran s . by C . M . Aikm an .

8 vo ,
Fl emin g , J . A . Th e Alterna te -
cu rren t Tran sfo rm er . Two V o l u m e s . 8vo .

V ol . I . Th e In du ctio n o f E l ectric Cu rre n ts

V ol . II . Th e Util izat ion o f I n du ced Cu rren ts
P ro p a g a tio n of El ectric Cu rren ts 8vo,

A H an d b k f rth
oo o e El ectrical La b o ra to ry an d Te stin g Ro o m . Two

Fl eu ry, P . P reparatio n an d Us e s of W h ite Z in c P aints 8vo ,

Flynn , P .
J . Flo w of W ater .
(S cie n ce S erie s No . 1 2 mo ,
H ydrau l ic Ta l e s b .
(S cien ce S erie s No . 1 6m o ,
F org ie, J . S hi el d T u nn el ing .
(I n P ress )
8 vo . .

Fo s ter, A . El ectrical Eng in eers P o c ’

k tbe -
oo k .
(S even th E diti o n ) .

1 2 m o , l ea t h er,

Eng in e e rin g V al u a tio n of b

Pu l ic Utilitie s and Fa cto rie s 8vo ,
H an d b k oo of El ectrical Co s t D a ta 8vo (I n P ress .
)
F o wl e , F F
‘
. . O ver h ea d Tran s m iss io n Lin e Cro s s in g s . 1 2 m0 ,
Th e S o l u tio n o f Al ternatin g Cu rren t P ro l e m s b 8vo (I n P ress ) .

Fo x , W . G . Tran sitio n Cu rve s .

(S cie n ce S erie s No . 1 6m o ,
F o x, W .
, an d T h o m as , C . W . P ractical Co u rs e in M ech a n ical Dr w a

12 m0 ,
Fo ye , J . C h m i l P r bl m
. C e ca o e s .
(S cien ce S e rie s No . 1 6mo ,
H an db k f M i r l g y oo o ne a o .
(S cien ce S eri es N0 . 1 6m o ,
Francis , J B L w ll Hydr li
. . o e au c Exp erim en ts .
4 to ,
F ran zen H , . E x erci s es in Ga s A na l y s i s . 12 m0 ,
Freu dem ach e r, P . W . E l ectrical M in in g I n s tal latio n s .
(In stallatio n
M an u al s 12 m0 ,
Frith J Alt r ti g C rr t D
, . e na n u en e sig n 8v0 ,
Frit h J
sc M f t r f Ch
, . an u a c u e o emi cal M an ure s . Tran s by D . . G ra nt .

8 vo ,
Frye, A 1 . . Civil En gin e ers
’
P oc k tb k
e -
oo 12 m 0 , l e at h er,

Fu ll er, G . W . I n ves tig atio n s in to th e P u rifi catio n of th e O io River h .

4 t0 ,
Fu rn el l , J . P ain ts , Co l o rs , O il s , an d V arn is h es 8 vo .

Gairdner, J W I E rth w rk
a o

r
. . .

cT
.

Gant, L . W . El em ents of E l ect i ra ctio n

 V A N NO S T R A N D C O S S H O RT T I T L E CA TA L O G
’

12 D .
.

Grata cap, L P . . . A P o pu l ar G u ide to M in eral s

Gra y, J . El ectrica l I n fl u en ce Ma ch in es
M arin e B o il er D esign
G re enhill , G . D yn am ics of M e ch anical Flig h t
Greg o riu s , R . Min era l W a xes . Tra n s by C S a l ter . .

Grierso n R S om e Mo dern
,
h .
Met o ds o f V entil a tio n
G riffith s, A B A Treatise o n Ma nu res
. .

D en ta l Metallu rgy
G ro ss , E H o ps .

G ro ssm a n , J Am m o n ia a n d I ts Co m po u nds
.
1 2 m o,
G ro th , L A W el ding a n d Cu ting Metal s
. . t by G a s es or El ectricity .

( W est m i n s t er S eri es ) . 8 v0 ,

G ro ver, F Mo dern Ga s a n d Oil

.
8V 0
G ru n er, A P o wer l o o m W ea vin g
.
- 8V 0 ,
Gru n sk y , C E . . h
T op ogra p ic S ta dia S u rvey in g I . I om o,

Gii ldn er, Hu g o . b

I n tern a l Co m u stio n n g ines Tra n s by H E . . . Di ederic h s .

to
3:
1

Gu nth er, C 0 I n t eg ra tion . . 8 70

G u rden , R L Tra verse Ta b l es . . . f o lio , h lf m
a o ro cco ,

Gu y, A E . . E xperim ents on th e Flexu re o f B eam s 8 v0 ,

Haenig , A . Em ery an d Em ery In du stry 8v0 ,

Ha in b hac ,
R P o ttery eco ra tio n
. D
Tra n s by C S a l ter . . . 1 2 mo,

Ha l e , W J . . Ca l cu la tio n s o f G en era l C em istry h 12 mo,

Ha ll , C H . . C h em istry o f Pa in ts and P a in t V e icl es h ” 1 2 m0 ,
t Worki
.

Hall , G L . . E l em ent ary T h eo ry o f Al t ern a te Cu rren ng . . 8 vo ,

Ha ll , R H . . G o vern o rs a n d G o vern ing Mech a n ism 12 m0 ,

Ha ll , W . S . E lem en ts o f th e D iff eren tia l a n d I n teg ra l Ca l cu l u s 8 v0 ,
D escriptive G eo m etry 8 v0 vo l u m e a n d a 4 to a tla s,

Haller, G F , a n d Cu n n ing a m , E T Th e Tesla Co il

. . 1 2 m0, h . .

Ha l sey, F A S l ide V a l ve G ears

. . 1 2 m0 , . .

Th e Use o f th e S l ide Ru l e (S c ien ce S eries N0 I 6m o , . .

W
orm a n d S pira l G earing (S cien ce S eries N0 1 6m 0 , . . .

k
Ha n co c , H Text o o o f Mec a n ics a n d Hydro sta tics
. 8 v0 , b k h .

Ha nco c , k W C Re ra ctory Ma terial s (Metall u rgy S eries ) (I n P ress )

. . f . . .

Hardy, E El em en tary Principl es o f G rap ic S tatics

. 1 2 m0 , h
Haring , H E ng in eering Law . .

V ol . I . Law of Co ntract 8 vo,

Harp er, J H . . Hy dra u l i c Ta l es b on th e F l ow of W a ter I 6 m o,
Harri s, S M . . P ra ctical Top ograp ica l S u rvey ing h (I n P ress .
)
Harriso n , W B . .
’
h
Th e Mec a n ics To o l o o -
b k 1 2 mo,
Hart, J W E xterna l Plu m ing
. . or b W k 8 v0 ,
H in ts to P lu m ers o n o in t W iping b J 8 v0 ,
Prin cipl es o f Ho t a ter S u pply W 8 v0 ,
S a n itary P lu m ing a nd ra ina g e b D 8 v0 ,
k
Has ins, C H Th e G al van o m eter a n d I ts Uses
. . 1 6mo,
Hatt , JAS H . Th e . s q u are 1 2 m0 ,
b
Ha u s ran d, E Drying by Mean s o f Air a n d S tea m . . Tran s by A C . . .

1 2 m0 ,
*2
00

E va po rating , Co n den sing and Co o l ing Appara tu s . Tra ns by A C . . .

Wrig ht 8 V OI ~
 V A N N O S T R A ND C O S S H O RT T I T L E C ATA L O G
’
D . . 13

Ha u sm a n n , E . T el eg ra p h E n g in eerin g 8 v0 ,

Ha u sn er, A Ma n u fa ctu re o f Preserve d F o o ds a n d S weetm ea ts

. . Tra n s .

by A Mo rris a n d H R o b s on . . . . 8 v0 ,
Ha wkeswo rth , J G ra ph ica l Ha n db o o k fo r R einfo rced Co n crete . D es ig n .

4 t0 ,
Ha y , A Contin u o u s Cu rren t
. n g in eeri ng E 8 vo ,
Ha y es , H V P u l ic Util ities, T eir Cost New
. . b h a nd D ep reci a ti o n . . 8 v0 ,
b
P u l ic Util ities, T h eir Fa ir P res ent V al u e and Retu rn 8 v0 ,
Hea t h ,
F H . . C h em i s try of P h o to g ra p hy 8v0 .
(I n P ress ) .

th
He a er, H .
J . S . El ectrical Engin ee ring 8v0 ,
H e avisid e , O . El e ctro m agn etic T h eo ry . V o ls I . an d II . . 8v0 , ea c h ,

V o l I II . . . 8y o ,
Hec k ,
R C H . . . T h e S tea m E ng i ne a n d T u r in e b 8V 0 ,

S te am Eng in e an d Ot er S team M o to rs-

Two V o lu m e s h .

V ol I T erm o dyna m ics a n d th e Me c a n ics

. . h h . 8 v0 ,
V ol II . . Fo rm , Co n stru ctio n , an d W rk i o ng 8 v0 ,
No tes on El em en ta ry Ki n em a tics . 8 v0 , b o a rds ,

G ra ph ics of Ma ch in e F o rces . 8 v0 b o a rds ,

B eerm a nn , P . D yers Materia ls

’
. Tra n s by A C . . . Wrig ht . . 12 m0 ,
Hei denreic h E , . L . E n g in eers
’
P o c et oo of k b k Rein f o rce d Co n crete,
1 6 m o, l ea t er, h
Hell o t, Ma c q u era n d D Apl ig ny
’
. Art o f Dy ein g W 0 0 1, S il k and Co tt o n . 8 v0 ,
Hen rici, O . S k
S tru ctu res eleto n 8 vo ,
Hering , C . a n d G etm a n , F H . . S ta n da rd T a l es b of E l ectro C em ica l -
h
Eq u ival en t s 12 m0 ,
Herin g , D E ss en tial s o f P ysics fo r Co ll eg e S tu den ts
. W . h 8 v0 ,
Hering S a w, A D o m estic S a n ita tio n a n d Pl u m in g
-
h Two V 0 1s . b . . . . 8 vo ,
B erin g -
Sh aw , A . E l em en tary S cien ce . . 8 v0 ,
Hering to n, C F . . P o w dered Coal a s F u el . 8 vo,

Herrm an n , G . Th e G ra ph ica l S ta tics o f Mech a n ism . Tran s . by A P . .

S m it h .

Herz eld, f Testin g o f arn s a n d Text il e Fa rics

J . Y b 8 v0 ,
b
Hil de ra n dt, A Airs ip s , P a st a n d P res en t . h 8v0 ,
Hil den ran d, b B W . . Ca l e b -
Ma k ing .
(S cien ce S eri es No . . 1 6 m o,
Hil ditch, T P . . A Con cis e Hist ory of C h em is try 12 m 0,
Hil l , C S . . Con crete I n s p ection 1 6 m o,
Hill , J W . . Th e P u rifi ca tion of P u l ic b W a ter S u pp l ies . New E diti on .

(I n P ress . )
I n terp reta tio n of W t r A lya e na sis .
(I n P res s .
)
Hil l , M .
J . M . Th e Th ry f P r p
eo o o o rtio n 8 vo,

P l a te G irder Co n stru ction

—
Hiroi, I . .
(S ci en ce S eri es No . . . 1 6 m o,
S taticall y I n determ in a te S tres s es -
. 12 m0 ,
Hirsh fel d, C F . . E n g in eerin g T h erm o dy n a m ics .
(S cien ce S eries No .

1 6m0
Hoar, A . Th e S u bm arin e T o rp edo B o at rz m o :
Ho b art , H M . . Heavy El e tri
c ca l E n g in eerin g 8vo,
t
,

-
D e ig n s of S a tic Tra n s f orm ers 12 m0,
. 8vo ,
-
El ectric Tra in s .

-
El ectric P rop u l sion of S h ip s
14 D . V A N N O S T RA N D co xs S H O RT T I T L E CA TA L O G

Hob art ,J F Ha rd S ol dering , S o t S ol dering a n d

. . f Br a z ing re m o ,

Ho s,bb W R P Th e Arit m etic of l ec ri ca l

. . . h E t . 12 m0,
Hoff, J N P a int a n d V a rni s F a cts a n d F orm u l a s
. . h 1 2 m0,

Hol e, W Th e .istri u tion o f Ga s D b . 8 vo ,

Hol l ey , A L Rail w ay P ra ctice

. . f ol io ,

k
Hop in s, N M Model ng in es a n d S m al l
. . E B o at s 12 m0 ,
k
Hop inson , J, S h ool bred, N , a n d Da y , R .
J . . . E D y nam ic E l e tri
. c city .

(S cience S eri es No . 1 6m0,

Horner, J P ractica l I ro nfo u n din g 8 vo ,

—G
.

ea r Cu ttin g, in T h eo ry and P ra ctice . 8v0 ,

Hornim a n, Roy . How to Ma k

th e Rail w ay s P a y F or th e W
e ar . . 8 v0 ,
h
Ho u g to n , C . E . Th e E l em en t s o f Mec a n ics o f Ma teria l s h 1 2 m0,
Ho u sto u n, R A . . S tu dies in Lig t h 1 2 m0,
B oven den, F . P ractica l Ma t em a ics for h t Yo u ng E ng in eers 12 m0,
Ho w e, G . Math em a tics fo r th e P ra ctica l Ma n . 1 2 m0,
How ort h J , . Rep a irin g and Rivetin g Gl a ss ,
h
C in a and E a rt h e nw a re .

8v0 , p a p er,
Hoy t, W E . . C h em is try by E x p erim en ta io n t
bb
Hu ard, E Th e Util iz a ion of t
o o d w a s te W 8 vo ,
M
-

n
. . . .

Hiib n er, J Bl . eac hi ng a n d D y eing of V eg eta bl adFi br

e ou s a t eria l s .

(Ou tl in es of I n du stria l C h em i s try .

) 8 vc,
Hu dson, 0 F . . I ro n a nd S teel .
(Ou tl ines of I ndu s tria l
Hu m p hr y J C W M t l l g r p hy f S tr i (M t ll rg y S ri
e , . . . e a o a o a n . e a u e es .
)
(I P r n es s .
)
Hu m p h r y A C Th B i
e F t r
s, f E gi ri g P r ti .8 . e u s n ess ea u es o n nee n ac ce . . vo.

Hu n et r A ,
B ridg W rk . 8 (I P r e o vc . n ess .
)
rt G H
Hu s , H db k f th Th ry f C l r
. . 8 an oo o e eo o o o v0 ,

D i ti ry f Ch m i l
c d R w Pr d t
ona 8 o e ca s an a o uc s . vo ,

L b ri ti g Oil
u F t d Gr ca n8 s, a s an ea s es vo ,

S o ap s 8 v0 ,
Hu rst, G H , . . a nd S imm on s , W . H. T ex il e S t oap s and Oil s 8 v0 ,
Hu rst, H E , a nd La ttey , R T T ex t b k of h
P y sics 8 vo ,
—Al
. . . .
-
oo

so b h
p u l is ed in t ree p arts h .

P a rt I y n a m ics a n d Hea t
. D
P art II S o u nd a n d Lig t
. h
P a rt I II . Ma g netism a nd El tri ity
ec c

h
Hu tc in s o n , R W . .
, Jr . Lo n g Distan ce El e ctric P o w er Tran smis sio n .

m0 , 12
h
Hu tc in son , R W . .
, Jr, . a nd T h o m a s, W . A . El ectricity in Minin g 1 2 m 0 , .

(I n P ress ) .

h
Hu tc in s o n , W . B . P atents an d Ho w to M a k M e o n ey Ou t of T h em .
I Z mO
Hu tto n, W S Th W rk . . e o s
’
Man ag er s Ha n oo ’
db k . svo :
Hyde , E W S k w Ar h e c es (S cien ce S eries No ) 6m o ,
. .
. . 1 5 . 1
Hy de, F S . . S o l ven ts, Oil s, G u m s, Wax es . . H S V O’

I n du ctio n Co ils .
(S cience S eries No 5 3 . . 1 6m o , 0 so
h
I ng am , A . E . G eari n g . A p ra ctica l trea tise 8 v0 , *
2 50
I ngl e , H . Manual o f Agricu l tu ral C h e mis try 8va , *
3 00
16 D . V A N NO S T RA ND co xs S H O RT TI T L E CA TA L O G

K en n edy , R . E l ectrical I n sta l l a tions . F ive V ol u m es

Flyin g M ach in e s ; P ractice an d D e s ign . 12 mo ,

P rin cipl e s of Aero pl an e Co n stru ctio n . 8v0 ,
K e nn el ly, A E . El e ctro dyn am ic .
-
M ach in ery . 8v0 ,
K en t, W . S tren g t o f M a terial s h .
(S cience S erie s No . I 6m o ,
K rhe s aw , J . B . C . F u el , Wt a er a n d Ga s An alys is . 8 v0 ,
El ectro m e tallu rgy .
(W e s tm in s ter S erie s .
) . 8v0 ,
Th e El e ctric Fu rn a ce in I ro n an d S teel P ro du ctio n 12 m0 ,
El ectro -
Th erm a l Meth o d s o f I ron a n d S teel P ro du c ti on . . 8 v0 ,
Ki n del a n , J . T ra c m an k ’
s Hel p er 12 m0,
Kinzb ru nn er, C . Al te rn ate Cu rrent Wi n din g s 8vo ,
Co n tinu o u s Cu rren t Arm atu re s 8 vo ,
Te stin g o f Altern atin g Cu rrent M ac in e s h 8vo ,
Kirk al dy , A W , a nd va n s , A His tory . E D . a nd E co n o m ics of
Tra n sp o rt 8 vo ,
Kirk al dy , W -

. G . D a vid S y stem Kirk al dy ’

s of Mech a n ical T estin g . .
4 to ,
Kirkbrid J E e, . n g ravin g fo r Illu s tratio n 8vo ,
Kirkh m J E a , . . S tru ctu ra l n g in eerin g E 8 vo ,
Kirkw o d J P o ,
. . Fil tra tio n o f River Waters 4 to ,
Kir hk A G
sc e, . a s an d O il En g in es 12 m0 ,
Kl in J F D
e ,
. . es ig n o f a H ig h -
sp ee d S team -
eng in e 8y o ,
h
P ysical S ign ifi can ce o f n tro py E 8vo ,
K l ing en erg , G bLa rg e l ectric P o w er S ta tio n s . E 4 to ,
K h n ig t, R A dm A M Mo dern
.
-
. . . . 8 vo ,

K no tt C G . .
,
an d M a ck ay, J . S P ractical M ath em a tics 8vo ,
t
, .

K n ox , G . D S p iri of th e S OI 1
. 12 m0 ,
K nox, J . h
P y sico C emical Cal cu l a ion s -
h t 1 2 m0 ,
F ix atio n of Atm o sp h eric Nitrog en .
(Ch em ica l Mo n og ra p h s ) . 12 m0 ,
Ko ester, F . S te am -
El ectric P o w er P l an ts 4 to ,
Hydro el ectric D v e el o p m en ts a n d Eng in e erin g 4 to ,
K o l l er, T . Th e Util iza tio n of W a s t e P ro du cts 8 v0 ,
Co sm etics 8v0 ,
Ko p p e, S . W . Gl y cerin e 1 2 m0,

K o zm in, P . A F l o u r Mil l ing

. . Tra n s . by M F a l k n er
. . . 8vo,
Krem ann, R . . App l ica tion of
th e P y sico C h -
h em ical T h eo ry to T ec h
n ica l P ro cess es a n d Ma n u a ctu rin g f Meth o ds . T ra n s b y H . .

E . P o tts
Kr tch m ar K Y
e , . arn an d W arp S iz ing

La ffa rg u e, A . Attac in T renc k h W rf a a re 16 m0 ,

E V E
.

Lal l ier, . . l em en tary Ma n u a l of th e S tea m E n g in e 12 m0,

Lam b ert, T . Le a d an d I ts C o m p o u n ds 8v0 ,
B n o e P ro du cts an d M an u re s 8vo ,
La m b rn o , L L . . Co tto n s e e d P ro du cts . 8vo ,
M o dern S o ap s , G lycerin
Ca n dl e s , an d 8v0 ,
Lam pre c t, R h . R eco ve ry Wo rk Af te rP it F ire s Tran s b y C S . . . al ter 8v0 ,
La n ca ster, Co o ing , M . El ect ric k Hea ting a n d Cl eaning . . 8 vo,
h
Lan c e s ter, F W Aerial F lig t . . h . Two V o l u m es 8v0 . .

V ol I Aero dyn am ics

. .

V ol I I A ero do n etics
. .
 D V A N NO S T RA ND CO S S H O R T T I T LE CA TA L O G
’
. .

La nc h ester, F . W . Th e F l y ing Mach in e 8 v0 ,

La ng e, K . R . B y P ro d u cts -
of Co a l Ga s -
Ma nu f actu re m0 ,
12

Larn er, E T . . P rin cipl e s of Al tern atin g Cu rren ts . 1 2 m0 .

La Ru e , B F . . S wing ridg e s B .
(S cien ce S erie s No . I 6mo ,
La ssar Co -
h n . D r M o d e rn S . cien ti c fi C h em is try . Tran s . by M . M .

P attis o n M u ir 1 2 m0 ,
Latim e r, L H Fiel d , C J , an d H o w ell ,
. .
, . .
J W . . In can desc ent El e ctric

Lig h tin g (S cien ce S erie s No . . 1 6m o ,

Latta , M N . . H an d b koo of Am e rican Ga s -
E ng in e erin g P ra ctice . 8v0 ,
Am erica n P ro du cer Ga s P ra ctice 4 to ,
La w s , C B
S ta il ity a n d . u il i riu m . b Eq b F l o a ting
of B o d ie s . 8 v0 ,
La w s o n , W . R . B riti h s Ra ilw a y s . A F ina n cia l and Comm ercial
S urv ey 8 v0 , 2 00

L k
.

ea s ,
A R . . B r kd ea o wn s a t S ea . 1 2 m0 , 2 00

f
R e rig era tin g M a c in e ry h 12 m0 , 2 00
Lec k y, S T S “
rink l es
.
”
i n P ra ctica l Na vig a tio n
. .
_
W 8 vo , I O 00

Le D o u x , M . I ce -
M akin g M ach in es .
(S cie n ce S e rie s No . 6m o ,
. 1

Leed s , C C . . Mech a n ica l Dr w i

a ng fo r T ra de S h
c ool s . o b l o n g 4 to ,
-
Mech a nica l D raw ing for Hig h an d V o ca tio na l S h
c o ol s 4 to,
Lefé vre , L . h
Arc ite ctu ral P o ttery . Tran s . by H . K B ird
. an d W . M .

*
.
4 to , 7 so
Le h n er, S . I nk M an u fa ctu re . Tran s b y A . . M o rris an d H . Ro b so n . 8 v0 , *
2 so
Lem strom , S . E l ectricity in Agricu l tu re a nd Ho rticu l tu re . . 8 vo, *I
so
Letts , E . A . F u n da m enta l b
P ro l em s i n C h em i s try 8 vo , oo

Le V a n , W B . . S te am -
Eng in e I n dicato r .
(S cie n ce S e rie s No 7 8 ) 1 6 m 0 ,
. . 0 so
Lew es , V . B . Li q u id a n d G as e o u s F u el s .
(W es tm in s ter . 8v0 , *
2 00

Ca r b o n izatio n o f Co al 8v0 , *
3 00

Lewis , L P Rail w ay S ig n al n g in e erin g E 8v0 ,

as

50
?75
. .

Lew is A u to m a tic Ma c in e Ri l e ; Op era tio n h f of . 1 6m0,

)
0

Lick s, H . E . Recrea tio n s in h

Ma t em a tics 1 2 m0, *
1 2 5
Li b
e er, B . F . Li eb er s
’
F ive Letter S t a n da rd T el eg ra p ic Co de h . . 8 v0 , *
10 00

Co de . G erm an E diti on . 8v0 , *

10 00

S pan is h E diti on 8v0 , ‘ *

10 00

Fre n c h E diti on 8v0 , *

10 00

Term in al I n d e x 8 v0 , *
2 so
f
o

Lie b er s App en dix ’

. o lio ,
*
1 5 00

H a n dy Ta l es b .
4 to ,
*
2 so
B nk r a e s an d S to c kb r k o ers
’
Co d e an d M erch an ts an d S h ipp e rs
’

B l nk a Ta l e s b . . 8vo , *
1 5 00

b
Co m inatio n Co d e . . 8 v0 ,
E ng in e e rin g Co d e . 8v0 ,
Liverm o re , V P . .
, an d Willi am s , J . H o w to B e co m e a Co m p eten t M o to r
m an . 1 2 m0 ,
Living s to n e , R . D e s ig n a n d Co n s tru ctio n o f C o m m u tato rs 8vo ,
Mec a n ical
-
h D e sig n a n d Co n s tru ctio n o f G en era to rs . 8 v0 ,

Ll oy d, S . L . F ertil izer Ma terial s (I n P ress ) .

Lo bb en , P . Machini sts ’
an d D raftsm en ’
s Han db o o k 8vo ,

Lo ckw o o d T D , . . El e ctricity , Magn etism , an d El e ctro tel eg rap

-
h . . 8v0 ,
El ectrical Mea su rem ent and th e Ga l va no m eter 12 m0 ,
18 D . V A N NO S T R A N D c o xs S HO R T T I T L E C A TA L O G

Lo dg e , 0 J El em entary M ec anics
. . h
S ign allin g Acro s s S pace wit o u t W ire s h
Lo e wen stein , L C , an d Cris s ey, C P Centri . . . . f u g al P u m ps
Lo m a x , J W
Co tton S p inn ing
. . 12 m0 ,
Lo rd, R T . . D e co rative an d F an cy F a brics 8v0 ,
Lo rin g , A E A H an d o o o f th e l e ctro m agn etic Tel egrap
. . b k E h . . 1 6mo
H an d o o b k
(S cien ce S eri e s No . . 1 6m ,
Lo v el l , H D
P ra ctica l S w itch w o rk
. . 1 2 m0 ,

Lo w, D A . . Applie d M e ch anics (El em entary) 1 6m o ,

Lu b sch e z , B .
J . P ersp e ctive . 12 m0 ,
Lu c k e, C . E . Gas Eng in e 8v0 ,
P o wer P lants : D e sign , E fi cien cy, f an d P o w er Co sts . 2 vo l s .

(I n P repa ratio n ) .

Lu ck iesh , M . Col or and I ts Ap p l ica tio n 8 vo ,

Lig t h a nd S h a de h
a n d T eir App l i ca tio n s 8 v0 ,

Lu n g e, G . Co al ta r -

a nd A mm o nia . h
T ree V o l u m es 8 v0 ,

T ec h n ica l Ga s Ana l y sis 8 vo ,

Manu f actu re of S u lp h uric Acid an d Al k ali . F o u r V o lu m e s . . 8v0 ,

V ol . I . S u lp h uric Acid . In three parts .
*
1 8 00

V ol . I . S u p p l em ent 8 v0 , 5 00

V ol . II . S al t Ca k e, Hydro chl o ric Acid an d b

Le lan c S o da . I n two
parts
V o l I II .Am m o nia S . o da .

V ol . IV . El ectro lytic M e th o ds (I n P ress ) .

Te c h i n cal C h e m is ts
’
H a n db o o k 12 m 0 , l ea t h er,
*
3 50
—T ec
.

h i n ca l Meth o ds of h miC e ca l A n a l y si s . Tra n s b y C A. . . K ea n e

in co ll a b o ratio n w ith th e co rp s o f s p ecialis ts .

V ol . I . In two par ts
V ol . II . I n two parts
V ol . I II . I n tw o p a rts .

Th e s et (3 vo l s .
) co m p l et e

Lu q u er, L . M . Minerals in Ro c kS ectio n s

Macewen H , . A . Fo o d Inspection 8vo ,

M ack en zie N F ,
. . No te s o n I rrig atio n W rk o s 8v0 ,
M ackie J Ho w ,
. to Ma k e a W o o l en M ill P ay 8 v0 ,
M ag u ire W m R , . . D o m es tic S anitary D r in
a ag e an d P lu m in g b . . . 8v0 ,
Ma l co l m , C . W . T ex t b k
oo on Gra p hic S ta tics 8 v0 ,
Ma l col m H , . W . S u bm a ri n e T el egra p h Ca l e b .
(I n P res s ) .

M all et, A . Co m p o u n d En g in e s . Tran s b y R R . . . B u el .

(S cien ce S erie s

No . 1 6m o ,
M an sfi el d , A N . . El e crro m ag n ets (S cien ce S erie s No
-
. . . 1 6mo ,
M ark s E C R , . . . Co n stru ctio n o f Cra n e s an d Li ting M a c in ery f h . 1 2 m0 ,
Co n s tru ctio n an d W rk i o ng o f P u m ps 1 2 m0 ,
Man u fa ctu re o f Iro n an d S te el Tu b e s 12 m0 ,
M ech an ical E ng in e erin g M aterial s 12 mo,
M ark s G , . C . Hydrau lic P o wer E ng in e erin g 8v0 ,
I n ventio n s, P aten ts an d D es ig n s 12 m0 ,
Marl o w, T G . . D rying M ach in ery an d P ra ctice . 8v0 ,
 V A N N O S T R A N D CO S S H O R T T I T L E C A TA L O G
’

20 D . .

M erritt , Wm H . . Fiel d Tes ting fo r G o ld an d S ilver 1 6 m o , l ea t h e r,

Merten s . T a ctics h q
a n d T ec n i u e o f River Cro s sin g s . Tra n sl a ted b y
W Kr g r . u e

M ierzin s ki S Wt ,
. a erpro o fin g o f Fab rics . Tra n s b y A. . M o rris a nd H .

Ro b so n . 8v0 ,
Miessner B , . F . Ra dio D yn a m ics . . I Z m O,
M ill er G , . A . D eterm in an ts (S cien ce S erie s No . . 1 6m0 ,
Mil l er , W J . . I ntro du ctio n to Hist o rica l G eol o gy 1 2 m0, 00

M ilro y, M E W H o m e Lace m akin g . . .

-
1 2 m0 , *
1

Mill s C N E l em enta ry Mech a n ics for E n g in eers

, . . . 8 v0 , "I
>
00

Mitch ell C A M in eral an d Aerated Wa ters

, . . 8vo , *
3 00

M itch ell , C A an d P rideau x R M Fib re s Us e d in

. .
, ,
. . Textil e an d Al lie d
I n du strie s . 8v0 , *
3 00

M itch ell , C F . .
, an d G A . . B u il din g Co n s tru ctio n an d D ra win g . 12 mo .

El em e n tary Co u rs e
A dva n ced Co u rs e
M o n ckto n , C C F . . . R a dio tel e g ra p y h .
(W e stmin ster S erie s .
) 8v0 ,

M o nteverde , R D . . V e st P o c k et G l o s s ary of Engli h s -

S pan is , S pan is h h
E n gl i h T h n i s ec cal Term s 6 4 m o , l ea t e r,
. h
Mo n tg om ry J H El e , . . ect ri c W iri ng S p ecifi ca tio n s
‘

1 6m0 ,
M o o re , E C S . New Ta l e s fo rth e
. . b Co m p l e te S o l u tio n o f Gan gu ill e t an d

K u tter 3 F o rm u l a
’
8v0 , *
5
M o re cro ft, J . H .
,
an d He hr e, F . W . S h o rt Co u rse In El e ctrical Te stin g .

*
8 v0 , 1 50
M o rg an ; A P . . Wir l e e ss Tel eg rap h App aratu s fo r Am ateu rs . . 12 m0 , *
I 50
M o s es A J Th Ch ara cters o f Crys tal s 8v0 , *

—
, . . e 2 00

and P a rs o n s, C L . . El em en t s o f Min eral og y 8 vo . _

00

M o ss , S . A El em ents o f Ga s
. Engin e D e s ign .
(S cien ce S erie s N 1 6mo , 0 so
Th e Lay -
o u t o f Co rliss V alve G ears .
(S cien ce S erie s N0 . 1 1 9 )1 6m o ,
. 0 50
Mu lfo rd A C B o u n daries an d Lan dm ark s
, . . 1 2 m0 , *
I 00

M u llin J P M o dern M o u l din g an d P attern m ak in g

, . .
-
. 1 2 m0 , 2 50
M u nb y A E Ch em istry an d P h ysics o f B u il din g M aterial s
, . . .
(We s t
m in s ter S eri es .
) . 8 v0 ,
M u rp h y, J G . . P ractical M inin g 1 6m o ,
M u rray, J A . . S o il s and Manu res . (W e st minster . 8v0 ,

Na smith , J Th e S tu dent ’
Co tto n S pinn ing
'

. s 8v0 , 3 00

R e cent Co tto n M ill Co n stru ctio n 1 2 m0 , 2 50

Neave , G B . .
, an d H eil bro n , I M . . I den tifi catio n of Org anic Co m po u n ds .

1 2 m0 , *
1 2 5
Neil so n , R M Aero pl an e P atents . . 8v0 ,
=
l'
2 00
.

Nerz , F S earc lig ts. Tran s b y C Ro dg ers h h . . . . 8v0 , *

3 00

Neu b erg er, H , an d No al at H Te c n o lo gy o f P e tro l eu m . h . h . Tran s b y .

J G . . M cInto sh 8v0 , .
*
10 00

Newall, J W . . D rawin g , S izin g an d Cu tting B evel g ears -

8 vo , 1 so
New ell , F H , . . a n d Dray er, C . E E . n g in eering a s a Career _ . 12 m0, cl o t , h *
1

p ap er, 0 75
New b eging , T Han d o o for Ga s ng in eers and . b k E *
6 50
Nicol , G S ip Co n stru ction a n d Ca l cu l a tio n s
. h 8vo , *
5 00
Niph er, F E Th eo ry o f Magn etic M easurem ents
. .
1 2 m0 , 1 00
 V A N N O S T R A N D CO S S H O RT T I T L E C A T AL O G
’
D . .
2 1

Nis b et , H . G ra mm ar of T ex til e D esig n 8v0 , *

3 00

No l an , H . Th e Te l e s co pe .
(S cience S erie s N0 . 1 6m o , 0 so
No rt , H h . B . La b o ra to ry E x p erim en t s in G en eral C h em i stry . . . 12 m o, *
1 00

Nu g ent, E . Treatise on Optics 1 2 mo , I so

O co n n o r, H
’
. Th e Ga s En g in e er s P o c e t o o k ’
k b 12 m 0 , l eat h er, 3 50
O hm , G . S .
, a n d Lo c wo o d , T D k
G al vani c Circu it . . . Tran sl ate d b y
Willi am Fran cis .
(S cien ce S erie s No . 1 6m o ,

Ol s en, J . C . T ex t -
b k oo of Q u an ti ta tive C h em ica l A na l y s is . . 8v0 ,

O ls so n , A . M o to r Co n tro l , in Tu rret Tu rn ing an d Gu n El e vating (U S . . .

Navy El ectrical S erie s , No . 1 2 m 0 , p ap er,

Orm s y , b M T M S u rvey ing . . . 1 2 m0 ,

O n din , M A S tan dard P o lyph as e Apparatu s

. . an d S ystem s 8v0 ,
Ow en , D . Recen t P hy s ica l Resea rc h 8 vo ,

P ak e s, W . C C . .
, an d Nankivell , A T . . Th e S cien ce of Hygien e . 8vo , *
1 75
P al az , A . Tran s b y G
In du s trial P P atterso n , h o to m etry . . . W .
Jr . 8 v0 , *
4 00

P am ely, C Co lliery M an ag er s Han d o o

’
. b k . 8v0 , *
10 0 0

k
P a r er, P A M Th e Co n trol o f
. a ter . . W . . 8v0 , 00

P a rr, G A .D l ectrica l n g in eerin g Mea su rin g

. . E E . 8v0 , *
3 50
P a rry , E J . . C h em i stry of E s s ential Oil s an d Artifi cia l P er u m es, f
—F o o ds a n d Dr g u s . T w o V ol u m es .
(I n P ress .
)

V ol . I . C h em ical an d M icro sco pical An alysis of Fo o ds an d D ru g s .

*
7 50

—
*
V o l II
. . S al e o f Fo o d an d D ru g s Act . 3 00

and Co ste, J . H . h
C em i stry o f P ig m ent s 8 vo, *
4 50

— No tes *
P a rry, L . on Al l o y s . 8 vo, 3 00

M t l if e a W t l ero u s a s es . 8 v0 , *
2

A ly ina f A h d Al l y s s o s es an o s 8 v0 , *
2

Pa rry L A
, Ri k. d D g r f V ri
. s an an e s o a ou s Occu pa tio n s 8 v0 , *
3 00

Pa r h ll H F
s a ,
d H b rt H M Arm
. .
, an o a , . . a tu re Wi n din g s 4 to ,
*
7 50
*1
E l ectric Ra ilwa y E n g in eerin g 4 to , 0 00

P a rson s, L La nd J ra in ag e. . D 8 vo, *1
50
P arso n s , S .
J . Ma ll ea b le Cast Iro n 8 v0 , *2
so
Hig er M at em atics fo r C h h h
— emi cal
Partingto n , J R . . S tu dents . . 12 m0 , *
2 00
T ex t oo b k
o f T erm o dy n a m ics h . 8 vo , *
4 00

P assm o re , A C . . T h ec n ica l Term s Used in h

Arc itectu re 8v0 , *
3 so
P atc h ell , W . H . El e ctric P o w er in M in e s . 8v0 , *
4 00

P aterso n , G W Wiring m0 ,
—E
*
. L . Cal cu l atio n s 12 2 00
l ectric Mi ne S ig nal l ing I n s ta l l a tio n s 1 2 m0 ,
*1
50
P a tters o n , D . Th e Co l o r Prin ting of Ca rpet Yarn s 8 v0 , *
3 so
Co l o r Ma tc in g o n Text iles h 8 vo , *
3 00
-
T ext il e Col or Mix ing 8 vo, *
3 00

Pa u l din g , C P . . C o n den satio n of S tea m in Co vered a nd B are Pipes . . 8 v0 , *

2 00

Tra n sm issio n o f H eat thro u g C o ld sto rag e I n su la tio n h -

1 2 mo,
*
1 00

P ay n e, D W
I ro n Fo u n ders Ha n d oo
.
’
. b k . 8vo, *
4 00

P ec kh am, S . F . S o l id B itu m en s . 8v0 , *

s 00

P e ddie, R A Eng in eering an d M e tall u rgical

. . B o oks 12 m0 , *
1 so
B h
—
P eirce, S ystem o f Ana lytic Mec a n ics
Linnea r Ass o ciative
. . .
4 to ,
.
4 to ,
10

3
00
00

P en dred, V . Th e Ra il way Lo co m o tive .

(W e st m in ster S eries ) . 8 va , *
2 00
 V A N N O S T R A ND CO S S H O RT T I T L E C A T A L O G
’

22 D . .

k
P er in, F . M . P ra cti ca l Meth o ds of I norg a nic C h em i stry 12 m o, *

*
1 00

P errin,J
— J
At om s 8 vo , 2 50
try
.
.

a nd a g g ers, E . M . E l em e n ta ry C h em i s 1 2 m0,

P errin e , F A C . . . Co n du cto rs fo r El ectrica l D i trib

s u tio n . . 8 v0 , *
3 so
P etit, G . Wh it e Lea d and Z i Whit nc e P a ints 8 v0 , *1
so
P etit, R . Ho w to u ild B an Aero pla n e . Tra ns by T O B Hu
. .
’
. bb a rd, a n d

J .H Ledeb o er .
8 v0 ,
P ettit, Lieu t .
J . S . G ra ph ic Pro cesses .
(S cien ce S eries No .
76 . . 1 6 m0 ,
h b k P H B m d G ird r
P il ric , . . ea s an e s. (S c ien ce S eries No . . 1 6 m0 ,
h J
P ill ip s, G l d A y i g . o s sa n 8 v0 ,
D gr G d an e ous oo s .
8y o ,
P hi J n,S v F
. l l i f S i e en o es o c en ce . 1 2 m0 ,
Pi kw rth C N
c o Th I di t r H db k, . . e n ca o an oo . Tw o V o l u m es . 1 2 m0 , ea c h ,

L g rith m f r B g i
o a r s o e nn e s 1 2 m0 . b o a rds ,

Th e S l ide R u l e 1 2 m0 ,
Pla ttn er s M ’
anu al o f Bl
pipe Ana lysis
ow -
. E ig th h E diti o n , re vise d . Tra n s .

by H . B . Co rn wa ll . . . 8 v0 ,
Plym pto n , G . W . The An ero id B aro m eter .
(S cien ce S eries N0 .
3s ) . 1 6 mo,
H o w to b e c o m e an E ng ineer .
(S cien ce S eries N0 . 1 6 mo ,
V a n No stra n d
’
s Ta l e b B k oo .
(S cience S eries N0 . . 1 6 m0 ,
P oc h et, M . L . S team I nj ecto rs . Tra n sla ted ro m th e f Fren ch .
(S cien ce
S eries No . 1 6 mo , 0 50
Po c k et Lo g a rit m s to h F o u r P la ces .
(S cien ce S eries No . . 1 6 m0 , 0 so
l ea t h er, 1 0 0

P o ll eyn , F . Dr essin g s a n d Finish ing s fo r Textile Fa b rics 8 v0 , *

3 00

P ope, F G Org anic C e mis try

. . h .
*
2 2 5
P o pe , F L Mo dern Pra ctice o f the l ectric Tel egra p
. . E h . . 8 v0 , 1 so
P op p l ew el l , C P reven tio n o f S m o e W . . k 8 v0 , *
3 so
S tre ngt o f Materia l s h . 8 v0 , *1
75
P o rritt, B D . . Th e C h em istry of Ru bb er.
(Ch em ical Mo n o gra p h s ,

No . 12 m o,
P o rter, J . R . Helico pter Fl ying Ma c in e h 12 mo ,
P o tts, H E . . C e mis try o f th e Ru b er In du stry
h b .
(Ou tlin es o f I n du s
trial Ch m i try ) e s 8 vo ,

Pra ctica l Co m po u n ding of Oil s , Ta l l o w a nd G rea se . . 8 v0 ,

Pra tt, K B o il . erD rau g ht 12 m0 ,
Hig h S p eed S tea m E ng in es 8 vo ,
Pra y, T .
, Jr . Twen ty Y ears w it h th e I n dica to r 8 v0 ,
S tea m Ta l es b an dE ng in e Co n sta n t 8 v0 ,
Prelin i, C E rth d R k E. a an oc xca va t io n . 8 v0 ,
G r ph i l D t rm in ti
a ca e e a on of E arth S l o pes 8 v0 ,
Tu nn eling . New 8yo ,
D re dgi ng . A P ractical Treati s e 8v0 ,
Presc o tt, A . B .
'

Orga n ic Ana lysi s 8 v0 ,

Presco tt, A B . .
, a nd Jh o n so n , 0 C
. . Q ua l ita tive Ch em ica l A na lys is . . 8 v0 ,
Pre sco tt, A B . .
, a nd S u ll iva n , E . C . FirS t B k oo In Q u a l i ta tive Ch e m i stry.

1 2 m0 ,
P rideau x, E . B . R . P ro l e ms b P ys ical C
In h h emi s try 8 v0 ,
Zi
.

P rim ro s e, G S C (Meta ll u rg y
. . . nc .
(I n P ress )
W tr
.

P rince, G . T . F l ow of a e 12 m0,
 V A N N O S T R A N D CO S S H O RT T I T L E C ATA L O G
’

2 4 D . .

Rein h a rdt, C W T h e T ec h n ic o f Mech a nical D r f ti

a ng ,
bl b
. .

*
o o ng , 4 to , o ards, 1 00

Reiser, F . Harden ing a nd Tem perin g of S teel . Tra n s by A . . Mo rris a nd

H .
1 2 mo, *2
50
Reiser, N Fa u l ts in th e Ma n u
. f a ctu re o f W o o l en G o o ds . Tran s by A . .

Mo rris a n d H Ro so n . b .
8 v0 , *2
50
S p in n in g a n d W ea vin g Ca l cu la tio n s 8 vo , *
5 00

Ren w ic , k W
G Ma r le a n d Mar l e o r in g
. .
8 v0 , b b W k *
5 00

Reul eau x , F T h e Co n stru cto r T ran s b y H H S u p l ee

. 4 to , . . . . .
4 00

Reu terdah l , A T eory a n d es ig n o f R ein orced Co n cret e Arch es 8v o,

. h D f .
*
2 00

Rey , J ea n . T h e Ra n g e of El ectri c S ea rc hl ig ht P roj ecto rs 8 vo, *

4 50
Reyn o l ds , O .
, an d I dell , F . E .
-
Tripl e E xpa n sio n E ng in e s .
(S cien ce
S erie s No .
1 6m0 , 0 so
R h ea d, G . F . S im pl e S tru ctu ra l W dw rk oo o 12 m o, *
1 00

R h o des, H .
J . Art of Lith gr p h y o a . 8 vo, 3 50
Rice , J . M, . and Jh o n so n , W W A N w M th . . e e od of b
O ta in ing th e D iff er

en tia l o f F u n ctio n s . 1 2 m0 , 0 50
Rich a rds, W A Ir d . . F org ing o f on an S teel 12 m 0, 1 50
Ri hc ards , W A d N rth H B M . .
, an o ,
. . an u al o f Ce m en t Te stin g . 12 m0 , *
1 50
Ri hc ards o n , J Th M d r S t m E gi . e o e n ea n ne . . 8 v0 , *
3 so
Ri hc ardso n , S . S . Mag n etism a n d E l ectricity . 1 2 mo,
*2

Ridea l , S . G lu e a n d G lu e Te stin g . . 8 vo , *
4
Rimm er, E B o il erExplo sio n s , Co llap s e s
.
J . an d Mish aps 8v0 , *
1 75
2 m0,
*
Rings, F Co n crete in Th eo ry a n d Pra ctice
. _
. 1 2 50
R einfo rce d Co n crete ridg e s B *
s
Ripper, W
Co u rse o f I n stru ctio n in
. Ma ch in e D ra w ing . f o l io , 00

b
R o erts, F C Figu re o f the art . . E h .
(S cien ce S eries N0 . r6m 0 , 0 50
Ro b rte s, J , Jr . b r t ry W rk i E l tri l E
. La o a o o n ec ca n g in eerin g . 8 v0 , *2
00

b
Ro erts o n , L S W t r t b B il r
. . a e -
u e o e s . 2

b
R o in so n , J B Ar hit t r l C m p iti
. . c ec u a o os on . . 8 v0 , *2
so
Ro bi n so n , S W Pr ti l Tr ti
. th T th . ac ca ea se o n e ee of Wh eel s. (S cien ce
S eries No . 1 6m o , 0 5c
Ra ilro a d E co n o m ics .
(S cien ce S eries No . 1 6m o , 0
50
Wr ght I r B ridg ou on e Mem b ers (S cien ce S eries N0 . . 1 6m o , 0 50
R b o J H M hi D r w i g d
so n , . . ac ne a n an . 8 v0 , *
1 50
R bl i g J A
oe L g n d S h rt S p
,
R . . on an o an a il w a y B ridg es . f o l io, 2 5 00

R g r A
o A L b r t ry G id
e s, f I d a o a o u e o n u stria l 8 v0 ,
— El m e t f I d tri l Ch mi try
.
;
. 2

m o, *

—M l f I d tri l Ch m i try
e n s o n us a e s 12 3 00
*
a nu a o n us a e s 8 vo, 5
Ro g e rs , F . M agn etism o f I ro n V e ss el s . (S cien ce S erie s N0 . 0 50
Ro hl an d, P . Co ll o idal an d Crystallo idal S tate of M atter . Tran s . by
W J . . Britlan d an d H E P o tts
. . 12 mo ,
Ro l lin so n , C . Alp hb a ets b
O l o ng , 12 m0 ,
Ro s e , J . Th e P attern m ak ers As sistan t -
’
8vo ,
Key to Engin e s an d E ng in e ru nnin g -
1 2 m0 ,

Ro s e , T . K . Th e P recio u s (W es tmi n s ter S erie s )

M etal s . . 8v0 ,
Ro s en h in W a , . G l a s s M an u factu re (W e s tmin ster S eri es ) . . 8v0 .

P hy i l s ca Meta l l u rg y , An I ntrodu ction to (Metal l u rgy S . eri es ) .

*
SW , 3 50
Ro t h W , . A . h
P y sical C h em istry 8v0 , *2
00
 V A N NO S TRA N D C O S S H O R T T I T L E C A TA L O G
’
D . . 2 5

Row an, F .
J . Prac ical P ysics t h of th e Mo dern S team -
b oil er 8vc, *
3 00

-
a nd I dell , F . E . B oil er I ncru s t a tion a nd Corro sion .
(S cien ce

S eries No . . 1 6 m o, 0 so
Rox b u rg h W , . G eneral F o u ndry P ractice .
(W estm inster S eries ) . . 8 vo, 00

Ru h m er, E . Wir l e ess Tel ep h o ny. Tran s . b y J E rs kin e M u rray

.
-
. . 8v0 , *
3 so
Ru ss ell , A . Th ry eo of El ectric Ca l es b an d Ne two rk s . 8vo , *
3 00

Ru tl ey, F . E l em ents of Mineral ogy 12 m0 , 2 5

S anfo rd, P G . Nitro explo sive s .

-
. . 8vo ,
S au n d ers , C H Han db o o k o f P ractical M ech anics
. . . 1 6m o ,
l eat h er,

S ayers , H M . . Brak es fo r Tram Cars 8v0 ,

S c h e el e , C . W . C h em ical E s s ays 8v0 ,
S ch eith au er, W . S h al e Oil s an d Tars 8 v0 ,
S c h erer, R . Ca s ein . Tran s b y C S al ter. . 8v0 ,
S chidro witz , P . Ru bb er, I ts P ro du ction a n d In du s trial Us e s 8v0 ,
S ch in dl er, K . Iro n an d S te el Co n stru cti o n W rk o s . 12 m0 ,
S chm all , C . N . First Co urs e in An alytic Geo m etry, P l an e an d S o l id.

12 m0 , h lf l th
a ea er,

S chm r L Fl w f W t r
ee , . o o a e 8 v0 ,
S h m
c u F A Mann, l f H ti g . anu a o ea n a nd V entil a tion . . 12 m 0 , l ea t h er,

S chw r E H L C l G l g y
a z, . . . a u sa eo o 8v0 ,
S chw i r V D i til l ti of R i
e ze ,
. s a on es ns 8 ve,
S cott W W ,
Q l it tiv A l y i
. . ua a e na s s . A La b o ra tory . 8vo,
S t d rd M th d
an f Ch m i l a e o s o e ca svc,
S crib r J MneE gi r
,
d M h . . n n ee s
’
an ec a n ics
’
Co m p a n i o n . . 1 6 m o , l ea t er, h
S cu dder
r, H . El ec rical t Co ndu ctivity an d I o niza tio n Co n s ta n t s of

Org anic Com p ou nds

S earl e, A . B . Mo dern B rickm ki a ng 8 vo,
Cem ent, Co ncrete n d B ri k
a c s 8 vo ,

S earl e, G . M .
“
S u m n ers
’
Meth o d . Con den sed an d I m p roved .

(S cience S eri es No . rom o,

S ea ton, A . E . Ma nu al of Ma rine E n g in eerin g 8vo

S ea to n, A E . .
, a nd Ro u nth w a ite, H . M . P oc ktb k
e -
oo of Ma rin e E n gi

n eeri ng rom o , l ea t er, h 3 5°

S eel ig m ann, T .
,
T orril h on, G L, . . a nd Fal conn et, H . I ndia Ru bb er a n d

G u tta P erch a . Tran s . by J . G McI nto sh

. 8vo ,
S eidell , A . S ol u b il iti es o f I norg a nic a nd Org a nic S u b sta n ces 8 vo ,
S el ig m an, R . Al u m inu m .
(Metal l u rgy S eri es .
) (I n P ress ) .

W H
—
S ell ew , . . S teel Ra il s 4 to ,
Rail w a y Maintenance E ng in eering 12 m o,
t G Ou tl in es P y s ical C em is try
of h h m0 ,
—
S en er, . . 12

Tex t -
b k oo o f I no rg a ni c C em istry h 1 2 m0,
S ever, G F . . El e tri E c c n g in eering E x p eri m ent s 8 v0 , b o a rds,

S ever, G F. .
, a nd To w n s en d, F . La b o ra to ry and Fa cto ry T es ts in El ec

trical E ng ineeri ng 8 vo,

W h
—
S ew al l , C H irel ess T el egrap y
. . 8vc,
Les sons in Tel egrap y h 12 m0,
 V A N NO S TR A N D C O S S H O R T T I T L E CA T A L O G
’

2 6 D .
.

S ew ell , T . T h e Co n stru ctio n of D yn am os 8 v0 ,

S ex to n , A H F u el a nd Re rac f t o ry Ma t ri
e al s 12 m0,
—Ch
. .

em is try o f th e Ma teria l s of E n g in eerin g 1 2 m0,

-
Al l oy s (No n F errou s ) . 8 vo,

S ex to n , A H, . . and P rim ro se, J . S . G Th e Meta l l u rg y

. of I ro n a nd S t eel .

8y o,
S ey m ou r, A . Mo dern P rinting I nk s . . 8 vo ,

S h aw , Henry S H Mech a ni cal I nteg ra to rs

. . . (S cien ce S eri es No .

1 6 m o,

S h aw , S History of th e S t ff
a o rds hir e P o tteries 8 v0 ,
—
.

Ch emi stry of Com p ou n ds Us ed in P o rcel a in

S h w T R D ri i
a , . . v ng o f Mach in e T ool s 1 2 m0,
S h w W N
a F r ,
. . o eca stin g W ea t h er . 8vo ,
S h ld Se d H on , an a u s m a nn , E D ir ect Cu rrent Mach in es 12 m o,
—
.
.
,

Al t r e n a tin g Cu rren t Ma ch in es 1 2 m o,
S h el do n , S .
,
and Hau sma nn , E . E l e tri c c t
T ra c io n and Tra n sm is sio n
E n g in eering 1 2 m0,
h
P y sica l La ora tory b E x p eri m en t s, fo r E ng i n eerin g S t u den t s . . 8 v0 ,
S h J E
iel d s, No tes o n
gi ri g C tr ti
. . E n n ee n ons uc on . r
e m o,
S hr v S H eS tr g th f B ridg
e, d R f
. . en o es an oo s 8vo,
S l k W F
iun Th Fi l d E g i
,
r . . e e n n ee 12 m o, m orocco ,
S imm W H d Ap pl t H A H db k
o n s, . .
,
an e o n, . . an oo of S oap Ma nu f actu re,
8 vo ,
S im m W H d Mit h l l C A E dibl F
o n s, . .
, an c e , . . e a ts a n d Oil s 8 vo ,
S im p son, G . Th e Nava l Co n stru ct or 1 2 m o, m o ro cco,
S im p so n, W . Fo u nda ti on s . . 8 vo .
(I n P res s ) .

S in cl a ir, A . D evel o pm en t th e Lo co m o tive E n g in e

of 8vo , al l e at er, h f h
t
. . .

S inda ll , R . W . Ma nu f actu re o f P a p er ( es tm in s . W er S eries ) 8 vo, . .

S in dal l , R W . .
, an d B a co n , W . N . Th e Te s tin g of W ood P u lp 8v0 ,
S l o an e , T O C El em en tary l e ctrical Cal cu l atio n s
.
’
. E 1 2 mo ,
S m al l w oo d, C Mec a nica l La o ra t ory Met o ds J . . h b h . (V a n No stra n d s
’

T ex t oo s ) b k . 1z m a, l eat h er,

S m ith , C A . . M . H an d b o k o f Te
o s tin g , M ATE RI ALS 8v0 ,
S m ith , C A . . M .
, an d W arren , A G . . Ne w S te am Tab l e s 8v0 ,
S mith , C F . . P ractical Al tern atin g Cu rren ts an d Te stin g 8y o ,
P ractical Te s tin g o f D yn am o s an d M o to rs 8v0 ,
S m it , F A h Ra il w a y Cu rves 12 m o,
—
. .

S ta n dard T u rn ou t s Am eric an Rail ro a ds

—
on 1 2 m0,
M i a nten a nce of W ay 12 m0,
S m it , F E h . . Han db o o k o f G en eral I n stru ctio n fo r M e c h an ics . . 1 2 m0 ,
S m ith , H G Min eral s a n d th e Microscop e
. .
1 2 m0,

S m ith J C Ma nu f a ctu re o f P a int

,
. .
8vo,
S m ith R H P rincip l es o f Ma ch in e W ork
— ,

Adva n ced Ma ch ine W ork

. .
1 2 m o,
1 2 m0,

S m it h W , . C h em istry o f H at M anu f a ctu ring 12 m0 ,

S n e ll , A . T . El e ctric M o tive 8v0 ,
S no w , W . G . Poc k tb k
e oo of S tea m H e ating an d V entilatio n .
(I n P ress ) .

S no w , W . G , an d No lan , T . V en til atio n of B u ilding s .

(S cien ce S erie s
NO .
. 1 6m0 ,
S o ddy, F . Ra dio activity .
- S V OI
 V A N NO S T RA N D C O S S H O R T T I T L E CA TA L O G
’

2 8 D .
.

S u r, F .
J . S . Oil P ro sp ecting and E x tracting SW ,
*1
00

S ven s on, C . L . Ha n d b k oo on P ip ing 8vo, 3 00

S wan , K . P atents , D e s ign s an d Tra de M ark s .

(W min s ter
e st
*
8v0 , 2 00

S win b urne , J, . W o rdingh am , C H . .

, an d M artin , T . C . El e ctric Cu rren ts .

(S cien ce S erie s No . . 1 6m 0 ,
S wo o p e , C . W . Le s so n s in P ractical El ectricity . . 12 m0 ,

T a il fer, L .
B l e h ing ac Lin en and Co tto n Yarn a nd F a b rics 8 v0 , 6 00

Tate , J . S . S u c rh fere nt F o rm s o f R etainin g wall s

arg e d an d D if
-
.
(S ci en ce
S eri e s No . . 1 6m 0 ,
Ta y l or, F N S mal l W a t er S u pp l ies 1 2 m o,

—
. . .
. .

M a so nry in Civil n gi n eering E 8 vo ,

h
—B
T a y l o r, T . U S u rvey ors Ha n db ook
.
’
.
re m o , l ea t er,

ac kb on e of P ersp ective 12 m0,

Tay l o r, W . P . P ractical Cem ent T esting 8 vo ,

Tem pl eto n , W . P ractical M ech anic s ’

W rk h o s op Co m panio n .

1 2 m0 , m o ro cco , 2 00

Tenn ey , E . H . T est Meth o ds for S tea m P ow er P l a n t s .

(V a n
No stra nd s T ext ’
b k oo s .
) 12 m0,
Terry, H L . . In dia Ru bb eran d its M an u f actu re .
(W estminsterS erie s .
)
*
8v0 , 2 00

Th ayer, H R S tru ctu ral D es ign

. 8vo . . .

V ol I. El em ents o f S tru ctu ral .e sign D

V ol I I . Desig n o f S im p l e S tru ctu res
.

V o l III. D e sign o f Advan ce d S tru ctu res

.
(I n P rep a ra tio n ) .

F ou ndations a nd Ma sonry (I n P repa ra tio n ) .

Th ies s, J . B .
, an d Jo y, G A . . To ll Tel ep h one P ractice 8v0 ,
Tho m , C .
, an d J o n e s, H W . . Tel egrap ic Co nn ectio n s h . . o bl o ng , 1 2 m0 ,
Th o m as , C . W . P aper m a -
k ers
’
H an d book .
(I n P ress ) .

Th o m pso n , A . B . Oil Fiel ds o f Ru ssia . .

4 to ,
Oil F iel d D evel opm ent .

T h o m p so n , S . P . D yn am o El e ctric M ach in e s .
(S cien ce S erie s No .

1 6m o ,
T h mp o so n, W . P . Han db o o k
P atent Law o f All Co u ntrie s
of 1 6m o ,
Th m o so n , G Mo dern . S a nitary n g in eeri ng E . . 1 2 m0,

Th o m s o n , G S M ilk. . an d Cream Te s ting 1 2 m0 ,

M o dern S an itary Engin eerin g , H o u s e D rain ag e , e tc 8v0 ,
T h orn l ey, T . Co tto n Co m ing b M ach in e s 8v0 ,
Co tto n W a ste 8v0 ,
Co tto n S pinning . 8v0 .

F irst ear Y
S eco n d Ye ar

T irdh Year
T h u rso , J W . . M o dern b
Tu r in e P ra ctice 8v0 ,
Tidy, C M eym o tt . Tre atm en t o f S ewag e . .
(S cience S eri e s No g 4 )1 6 m 0 ,
. .

Tillman s , ater P u rifi catio n an d S J W . ew a g e D ispo sal . Tran s b y .

Hu g S Tayl or h . . 8 vo,

Tinn ey, W . H . Go l d m in in g -
M a ch in ery 8v0 ,
Tith erl ey, A . W . La bo ratory Co u rs e o f Org anic C h em istry . 8v0 ,
 D V A N N O S T R A ND C O S ’
S H O R T T I T L E C A TA L O G 2 9
.
.

Tizard, H T . .
(I n P ress ) .

To c h , M Ch em istry an d Te ch no l o gy o f P aints
.
8 v0 ,
M aterial s fo r P erm an ent P ainting 1 2 m0 ,
To d, J, a n d McGibb on, W C Ma rin e E ng in eers
.
. .
’
Bo a rd of T ra de
E x a m ina tio n s 8 v0 ,
Wh W B hip
.

T o dd, J, a n d al l ,
.
. . P ra ctical S ea m a n s 8 vo,
To ng e , J . Co al .
(W es min ster t - S V OI
To wn s en d, F . Alternatin g Cu rren t En gin e erin g 8vo , b o ard s ,
T ow n s en d, J . S . I o n iza tion of G a s es b y Co ll is io n 8 vo,
Tran s
a th e Am erican I n s titu te
ctio n s o f of C h em ical Eng in e ers , 8v0 .

E h i g t v o l u m es no w rea d
y V ol I . . . to IX .
,
1 90 8 -
1 916 . . 8 v0 , ea c h ,

Trave rs e Ta l e s b .
(S cien ce S erie s No . . 1 6m 0 ,
m o ro cco ,
E
0

b
T rei er, . F o u n dry Ma ch in ery . T ra n s b y C S a l ter . . . 1 2 m0,

Trink s, W .
, an d H o u su m , C . S hf a t G o vern o rs (S cien ce S . e ri e s No .

1 6m o ,
b
Tro w ridg e , W . P . Tu r in e b Wh e el s .
(S cien ce S erie s No . . 1 6m 0 ,
k
Tu c er, H J . . A M a n u al of S u g ar An alys is . . 8 v0 ,
Tu nn er, P A . . Treati se on Ro ll tu rn in g-
. Tran s b y .
J B . . P e ars e .

8v0 , text an d f o lio a tl a s , IO 00

Tu rn b u ll, Jr , J , . . an d b
R o in so n , S . W . A Tre a tis e on th e C o m po u n d
S team -
en g in e .
(S cie n ce S eri e s No 8 . 1 6m o ,
T u rn er, H . W o rs te d S p inn ers ’
Ha n d b k oo . 1 2 m0,
Tu rrill , S M . . E l em entary Co u rs e in P ersp e ctive . 12 mo,
Tw y ord, Hf . B . P u rc a sing . h 8 vo ,
Ty rrell , H . G . D es ig n a n d Co n s tru ctio n of Mil l B u il din g s 8 vo,
Concrete B ridg es a nd Cu l verts . 1 6 m 0 , l ea t er, h
Artis tic B ridg e Des ig n 8v0 ,

Un der ill , C Rh . . S o l e n o id s El e ctro m a g n e ts a n d El e ctro m a g n etic Wi nd

ing s 1 2 m0 , *
2 00
Underw o o d, N , a n d S . u l l iva n , T . V . C h em i s try and T ec h n ol o g y of
P rin t ing I n s k
Ur q h u a rt, J W El tr
. . ec o -

p l a ting
El e ctro typin g .

Usb o rn e , P O G . . . D e sign of S im pl e S te el B ridg es

V h
a c er, F . F oo d I n sp ectors Ha n d ’
b k oo 1 2 m0,
V a n No stra nd
’
s C h em ica l Annu al F o u rth iss u e 1 918 l ea t h er, 12 m0,
—Y e
. . .

ar B o ok of Mech a nica l E n g in eering D a ta (I n P ress ) .

V an W a g e n en , T . F . M an u al of H ydrau lic M in ing 1 6m o ,

V eg a , B a ro n V on . Lo g arit a h Ta l es b . 8v0 , cl o t h ,

h lf m
a o rro co ,

V in cent, C . Am m o n ia an d its C o m po u n ds . Tran s b y M . .

J S lt
. a er . 8v0 ,
V ol k , C . H au l a g e an d Wi di n ng Applia n ce s 8v0 ,
V o n G e o rg ie vic s , G . Ch m i e cal Te c h n o l o gy o f Te xtil e F ib re s . Tran s .

by C S . a lte r . 8 v0 ,
C h em is try o f D y e s tu fi s Tran s b y C S al ter
. 8vo , . . .

V o s e, G . L . G ra ph ic h
M e t o d fo r S o l ving C ertain u estio n s in Arit m etic Q h
an d Al g e ra b (S cie n c e S eries No . . 1 6m 0 ,
 V A N NO S T RA N D C O S S H O R T T I T L E CA TA L O G
’

; D .

J
.

V o s m a er, A . Oz on e 8 vo ,

W a b n er, R . V en til a tio n in M in e s . Tran s by C S . . al te r 8v0 ,

W a de , E J . . S eco n dary B att erie s 8v0 ,
W a dm o re , T . M . El em en tary C h e m ical T h e o ry 1 2 m0 ,
Wd a s wo rt h , C . P rim ary B a ttery I g n itio n 1 2 m0 ,
Wag n er, E . P re s erving Fru its , V eg eta l e s , b an d M e at . 1 2 m0 ,

W g a n er, J . B
A Trea tis e . on th e Na tu ral an d Artificia l P ro ces ses of
W oo d S ea s o n ing I
. . 8 vo,

W al dram , P .
J . P rincipl e s of S tru ctu ral M ech anics 12 m0 ,
W al k er , F . Aerial Na vig a tio n . 8v0 ,
D yn am o u il ding B .
(S cien ce S erie s No . 1 6m o ,
k
W al er, Org a n ic C J . h em is try fo r S tu den ts of Medi cin e 8 vo,
W lk a er, S . F . S tea m B oil ers, E n g in es and -
b
Tu r in es 8 vo,
f
Re rig era tio n , Hea tin g and V en til a tio n on S h ip b o a rd 1 2 m0,
El ectricity in Minin g 8 vo ,
W al l is —
T yl a er, A .
J B . ea rin g s and b
Lu ri ca tio n . 8 vo ,
Wir R p w y
Aeria l or e o e a s 8v o ,
S g r M h i ryu a ac ne 1 2 m0,
W l h J J Ch m i try d P hy i f Mi i g
a s , . . e s an s cs o n n and Mi n e V en t il a ti o n ,
1 2 111 0 ,

W klyan J A W t r Anl y i n, . . a e a s s 1 2 m o,
W b r g h w D Th A B c f th D iff r ti
'

ans ou e o e e en al Ca l cul u s 1 2 m o,
—S l id
, . .

e V al ves 12 m0,
W a rin g , Jr, G . . E . S ani ta ry Co n ditio n s .
(S ci en ce S eri es No . . 16 m 0 ,

S ew era g e and La n d Dr i a na g e .

-
Modern Meth ods of S ew a g e Di sp o s a l 1 2 m o,
How to Dr i a n a Ho u se . 12 m0 ,
W r A R C l T r D i til l ti
a n es, . . oa a s a on 8 vo ,
W rr F D H db k R i f or d C r t
a en , . . an oo on e n ce on c e e 1 2 m o,
W tki A P h t gr p hy (W tm i t r S ri
a n s, . o o a . es ns e e es .
) . 8 v0 ,
Wt E P S m l l E gi
a s on , d B il r . . a n n es a n o e s . 1 2 m0,
W tt A E l tr p l ti g d El tr r fi i g
a ec o -
a n an ec o -

e n n of Met a l s 8 v0 ,
E l e tr —
.
, .

m etc o a l l u rg y 1 2 111 0 ,

Th e Art of S oap Ma k in g 8y o,
Ma n u f a ctu re
Lea t h er . . 8 vo ,
P ap er Ma k ing -
. . 8vo ,
W ebb, H L Gu ide to th e . . T estin g of I n su l a t ed W ires a nd b
Ca l es . 1 2 m o,
W bb r W H Y Tow G
e e , (W tm i t r S ri ). 8v . . n as . es ns e e es . o,

W gm , E dw rd C v y
e a nn d Di tri b ti f W t r f r a . o n e a n ce an s u on o a e o
W t r S ppl y 8
a e (I P r ) u . . vo . n es s
W i b h J A M l f Th r ti l M h i
e s ac , . 8 an u a o eo e ca ec a n cs v0 ,
h s ee
W i b h J d H rrm
e s ac G M h i
, f Air .
, 8 g : an e a nn , . ec a n cs o . v

W ll M B S t l B ridg
e s, . 8v . ee e . . 0,

W t E B L
es on, f H d D t F ri ti.of W t r i P ip .m o ss o ea ue o c on a e n es . . i 2 o,

Wh tl y 0 Or m t l C m t W rk
ea e , . 8 na en a e en o .
V 0,

Whip pl S A E l m t ry d P r ti l Tr ti
e, . B ridg B il di g n e en a an ac ca ea se on e u n .

8v o,
Whit C H M th d f M t l l rgi l A l y i (V N tr d
e, . . e o s o e a u ca na s s . an os an
’
s

12 m0,
D V A.N N O S T R A N D C O M P A N Y

re a re d to su l
p p y, e ithe r fro m
p p
the r i co m pl e t e sto c k o r at

s ho rt no t ic e

T e c hn ic al o r

S c ie n t ific B o o k
In a dd iti o n t o pu b li shi n g a v e r y la rg e
an d v a ri e d n u m b e r o f S C I E N T I F I C A N D

E N G I N E E R I N G B O O K S D V a n N o s tr a n d
,
.

C o m p a ny h a v e o n h a n d t h e la r g e st
a ss o rt m e n t in t he Un it e d S t a te s o f s u c h

b o ok s i s s u e d b y A m e r ic a n a n d fo re i g n
u b li sh e r s
p .

A ll in qu i r i es a re che e r fu lly an d ca re
fu l ly a n sw e e d r and c o m le t e c a t a lo
p g s

se n t fr e e on r e q u e st .

2
5 P A RK PL A C E NE W YORK